PKG-P-4 (X) and P-4 (Y) - Tender Document AFCONS PDF

BIDDING DOCUMENTS
FOR
PROCUREMENT OF WORKS
(International Competitive Bidding)
Procurement, Fabrication, Check-Assembly, Painting at workshop(s) and

Transportation to various Bridge Sites of Steel Truss Superstructures
alongwith bearings for 33 Nos. of Bridges for High Speed Rail Corridor for
crossing over Roads / Rivers / Railways / other structures
in two (2) Packages [MAHSR P-4(X) and MAHSR P-4(Y)]
for the
Project for Construction of Mumbai-Ahmedabad High Speed Rail
Summary Table of Contents

Invitation for Bids (IFB)
PART 1 – BIDDING PROCEDURES

Section I. Instructions to Bidders (ITB)
Section II. Bid Data Sheet (BDS)
Section III. Evaluation and Qualification Criteria
Section IV. Bidding Forms
Section V. Eligible Source Countries of Japanese ODA Loans
PART 2 – WORKS REQUIREMENTS

Section VI. Works Requirements
PART 3 – CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT AND CONTRACT FORMS

Section VII. General Conditions (GC)
Section VIII. Particular Conditions (PC)
Section IX. Annex to the Particular Conditions - Contract Forms
Project for Construction of Mumbai-Ahmedabad High Speed Rail Bidding Documents
Package No. MAHSR-P-4(X) and P-4(Y) Invitation for Bids
National High Speed Rail Corporation Limited (NHSRCL)
2nd Floor, Asia Bhawan, Road No. 205, Sector-9, Dwarka, New Delhi, 110077, India
Invitation for Bids
Date:24.02.2020
Loan Agreement No: ID-P277 & ID-P279
IFB No: MAHSR-P-4(X) and MAHSR-P-4(Y)

for the
NOTICE OF INVITATION FOR BIDS
(SINGLE STAGE TWO-ENVELOPE BIDDING)
To,
………………………………..
………………………………..
(1) The Government of India has received a loan from the Japan International
Cooperation Agency (JICA) towards the cost of the Project for Construction
of Mumbai – Ahmedabad High Speed Rail. It is intended that part of the
proceeds of this loan will be applied to eligible payments under the Contracts
for:
i. Package – P-4(X): Procurement, Fabrication, Check-Assembly and Painting

at workshop and Transportation to various Bridge Sites of Steel Truss
Superstructure along with bearings for 14 Nos. (GADs 66, 69, 2, 58, 8, 1134,
C5-2, C5-3, 25, 28, 1967, 32, 42 and Laundry) of Bridges for High Speed
Rail Corridor for crossing over Roads / Rivers / Railways / other structures
for the Project for Construction of Mumbai-Ahmedabad High Speed Rail.
ii. Package – P-4(Y): Procurement, Fabrication, Check-Assembly and Painting

Page 1 of 4
Superstructure along with bearings for 19 Nos. (GADs 65, 1, 57, 67, 3, 6, 68,
12, 61, 14, 15, 62, C5-1, 27, 31, 37, 2357-3, 54&55 and Diesel Shed) of
Bridges for High Speed Rail Corridor for crossing over Roads / Rivers /
Railways / other structures for the Project for Construction of Mumbai-
Ahmedabad High Speed Rail.
(2) The Government of India through National High Speed Rail Corporation
Limited (NHSRCL) (herein after referred to as the Employer) now invites
sealed Bids from eligible Bidders for the construction and completion of the
Works as described in (1) above.
(3) International Competitive Bidding will be conducted in accordance with

JICA’s Single Stage (“Two Envelope”) Bidding Procedure.
(4) Bidding will be conducted through procedures in accordance with the

applicable Guidelines for Procurement under Japanese ODA Loans and is
open to all Bidders from eligible source countries, as mentioned in Section-
V Eligible Source Countries of Japanese ODA Loans and as defined in the
Loan Agreement.
(5) Interested eligible Bidders may obtain further information from and inspect the
Bidding Documents at the office of:
General Manager- Contract

Room No. 201, 2nd Floor, Asia Bhawan
Road No.205, Sector-9, Dwarka
New Delhi – 110077, India
Tel: +91-11-28070000
Fax: +91-11-28070250
E-mail: p4packagetender@nhsrcl.in
(6) A complete set of Bidding Documents, both in hard and soft copy format
excluding Works Requirements Section VI-3 Drawings, which
shall be available only in soft copy through a link and DVD, may be
purchased by interested Bidders on the submission of a written
application to the address above and upon payment of a non-refundable fee
of INR 236,000.00 (Indian Rupee Two hundred and thirty-six thousand
only) including GST in the form of a Demand Draft or Banker’s
Cheque, payable at New Delhi, from any nationalised or scheduled
bank or any Japanese bank having corresponding arrangements with
an Indian bank in favour of the “National High Speed Rail Corporation
Limited”.
Page 2 of 4
(7) The Bidding Documents shall be available for sale at NHSRCL’s office
as mentioned in Para. (5) above during 10:00 hrs to 17:00 hrs on all the
working days from 28.02.2020 to 18.06.2020.
(8) The provisions in the Instructions to Bidders and in the General Conditions
of Contract are the provisions of the Standard Bidding Documents under
Japanese ODA Loans for the Procurement of Works by Japan International
Cooperation Agency (JICA), October 2012 (Version 1.1) and FIDIC
Conditions of Contract for Construction for Building and Engineering Works
Designed by the Employer, Multilateral Development Bank Harmonised
Edition June 2010, respectively.
(9) Bidder can apply for anyone of the following cases:
 Case 1: For one package only, however, Bidder shall submit single
Technical Bid and separate Price Bid for both P-4(X) and P-4(Y) packages,
without any preference
 Case 2: Both P-4(X) and P-4(Y) combined and individually without any
preference.
(10) Bids must be delivered to the address as mentioned in Para. (5) above, by hand,
on or before 15:00 hrs on 19.06.2020 and must be accompanied by Bid
Security(ies) as follows:
 Case 1: Bid Security of INR 145,000,000 (Indian Rupee One hundred and
Forty-five Million only),
 Case 2: Two Bid Securities each of INR 145,000,000 (Indian Rupee One
hundred and Forty-five Million only).
(11) Only the Technical Bid will be opened in the presence of Bidders’
representatives who choose to attend at 15:30 hrs on 19.06.2020 at the office
of:
Managing Director
National High Speed Rail Corporation Limited
2nd Floor, Asia Bhawan
New Delhi – 110077, India.
(12) Interested eligible Bidders, who purchased the Bidding Documents beforehand,
are invited to attend a Pre-bid meeting to be held on 26.03.2020.
The venue and time shall be as follows:

Page 3 of 4
Venue : National High Speed Rail Corporation Limited,

2nd Floor, Asia Bhawan,
Road No.205, Sector-9, Dwarka,
Time : 11:00 hrs.
Participation in this Pre-Bid meeting is not mandatory.
(13) Courts in Delhi alone shall have the jurisdiction to entertain any application
or other proceedings in accordance with Laws of India in respect of anything
arising under this Bid.
S/d
Managing Director
2nd Floor, Asia Bhawan
Page 4 of 4
Project for Construction of Mumbai-Ahmedabad High Speed Rail Bidding Documents - Part 1
Package No. MAHSR-P-4(X) and P-4(Y) Section I, II, III, IV and V
BIDDING DOCUMENTS
FOR

for the


Package No. MAHSR-P-4(X) and P-4(Y) Section I, II, III, IV and V
BIDDING DOCUMENTS
Table of Contents

Page 2 of 2
Package No. MAHSR-P-4(X) and P-4(Y) Section I. Instructions to Bidders
The Instructions to Bidders governing this bidding process are the “Instructions to Bidders”
included in Option B, Two-Envelope Bidding, Section-1, of the Standard Bidding
Documents under Japanese ODA Loans for the Procurement of Works prepared by Japan
International Cooperation Agency (JICA) dated October 2012, Version 1.1. Those
Instructions to Bidders are available on the JICA’s web site shown below:
https://www.jica.go.jp/english/our_work/types_of_assistance/oda_loans/oda_op_info/guid
e/tender/c8h0vm0000aoesst-att/civil_01.pdf
A copy of these Instructions to Bidders is not attached to these Bidding Documents.
Page 1 of 49
Package No. MAHSR-P-4(X) and P-4(Y) Section II. Bid Data Sheet

A. General
ITB 1.1 The number of the Invitation for Bids is: Package No. MAHSR-P-4(X) and
MAHSR-P-4(Y)
ITB 1.1 The Employer is: National High Speed Rail Corporation Limited (NHSRCL).
ITB 1.1 The name, identification and number of the lot (s) (contract (s)) comprising
this ICB are:
The Name of the Contracts are:
Package – P-4(X): “Procurement, Fabrication, Check-Assembly and Painting
C5-2, C5-3, 25, 28, 1967, 32, 42 and Laundry) of Bridges for High Speed Rail
Corridor for crossing over Roads / Rivers / Railways / other structures for the
Project for Construction of Mumbai-Ahmedabad High Speed Rail”.
AND
Package – P-4(Y): “Procurement, Fabrication, Check-Assembly and Painting
12, 61, 14, 15, 62, C5-1, 27, 31, 37, 2357-3, 54&55 and Diesel Shed) of
Bridges for High Speed Rail Corridor for crossing over Roads / Rivers /
Railways / other structures for the Project for Construction of Mumbai-
Ahmedabad High Speed Rail”.
The Identification Number of the Contract are: Package No. MAHSR-P-4(X)
and MAHSR-P-4(Y)
The number of lot (s) is: two (2)
ITB 1.2 Add new paragraph after last paragraph of ITB 1.2 with the following:
(d) “Joint Venture” shall be replaced with “Joint Venture or Consortium”.
(e) “JV” shall be replaced with “JV/Consortium
ITB 2.1 The Borrower is: The President of India.
ITB 2.1 The numbers of the Loan Agreements are: ID-P277 and ID-P279
The amounts for the Japanese ODA Loan: JPY89,547,000,000 and
JPY150,000,000,000.
The signed dates of the Loan Agreements are: 28 September 2018 and
29 October 2018.
ITB 2.1 The name of the Project is: Project for Construction of Mumbai-Ahmedabad
High Speed Rail.
Page 2 of 49
ITB 2.2 The applicable Guidelines for Procurement under Japanese ODA Loans are
those published in April 2012. (See URL below):
(https://www.jica.go.jp/english/our_work/types_of_assistance/oda_loans/od
a_op_info/guide/handbooks/c8h0vm0000aoeux8-
att/201204_chapter2_en.pdf).
ITB 3.1(c) A list of debarred firms and individuals is available at the World Bank’s
website: www.worldbank.org/debarr.
ITB 3.2 Replace the words "the General Conditions” with "the General Conditions and
Particular Conditions".
ITB 4.1 Replace ITB 4.1 with the following paragraphs:
A Bidder may be a firm that is a single entity or any combination of such

entities in the form of a joint venture or consortium (JV/Consortium) under
an existing agreement or with the intent to enter into such an agreement
supported by a letter of intent.
In the case of the combination, all members of the joint venture or consortium
shall be jointly and severally liable for the execution of the Contract in
accordance with the Contract terms.
The joint venture or consortium shall nominate one Member entity as “Lead
Member” who will represent all the members in discharging their obligations.
Accordingly, the joint venture (or consortium) shall nominate one person as
“Representative” from the Lead Member who shall have the authority to
conduct all business for and on behalf of any and all members of the joint
venture (or consortium) during the bidding process and, in the event that the
joint venture (or consortium) is awarded the Contract, during Contract
execution.
In the case of a joint venture/consortium, the number of members, including
the Lead Member, shall be restricted to four (4).
The share of the Lead Member in JV/Consortium shall be more than 40% of
the Contract Amount and that of each of the other members shall be at least
15% of the Contract Amount.
ITB 4.5 This bidding is not subject to prequalification.
B. Bidding Documents
ITB 7.1 Replace entire para. with the following:
A Bidder requiring any clarification of the Bidding Documents shall contact

the Employer in writing, delivered to the Employer through email/courier/
fax/by hand at the Employer’s address as below:
Page 3 of 49
Attention : General Manager- Contract, National High Speed

Rail Corporation Limited (NHSRCL)
Street Address : Asia Bhawan,
Road No. 205, Sector-9, Dwarka
Floor/Room number : 2nd Floor, Room No. 201
City : New Delhi
ZIP Code : 110077
Country : India
Telephone : +91 11-28070000
Facsimile number : +91 11-28070250
Electronic mail address: p4packagetender@nhsrcl.in
The Employer’s response will be uploaded on the Employer’s webpage no

later than twenty-eight (28) days prior to the deadline for submission of Bids,
provided that such request is received no later than forty-nine (49) days prior
to the deadline. The Employer shall publish its response including description
of the enquiry but without identifying its source, at the web page
(www.nhsrcl.in). Should the clarification result in changes to the essential
elements of the Bidding Documents, the Employer shall amend the Bidding
Documents following the procedure under ITB 8 and ITB 22.2.
ITB 7.4 A Pre-bid meeting will take place at the following date, time and place:
Date : 26.03.2020
Time : 11:00 hrs.
Place : National High Speed Rail Corporation Limited
2nd Floor, Asia Bhawan, Road No.205, Sector-9,
Dwarka, New Delhi-110077, India
Any addendum issued shall be part of Bidding Document and shall be

published on the Employer’s web site: www.nhsrcl.in in accordance with ITB
7.1.
C. Preparation of Bids
ITB 10.1 The language of the Bid is: English.
ITB 11.2 (e) Replace entire para. with the following:
The Bidder is not required to submit any documentary evidence along with
the Bidding Documents in regard to ITB 17. All information furnished in the
Page 4 of 49
respective Forms as mentioned in “Clause 4.0 Bidder’s Qualification Section

IV” shall be certified by a Chartered Accountant/Company Auditor/Statutory
Auditor. However, the Employer reserves the right to demand any relevant
supporting documents as required.
ITB 11.2 (h) The Bidder shall submit with its Technical Bid the following additional
documents:
(i) Duly signed and stamped copy of “Section V. Eligible Source Countries
of Japanese ODA Loans” of the Bidding Documents.
(ii) The duly filled Checklist of Submission of Documents for Technical Bid.
The Price Bid shall comprise the following:

 For Case 1:
(a) Letter of Price Bid (Option A);
(b) Completed Price Schedules for P-4(X) and P-4(Y) individually, in
accordance with ITB 12 and 14.
OR
 For Case 2:
(a) Letter of Price Bid (Option A) and Letter of Price Bid (Option B);
(b) Completed Price Schedules for P-4(X) and P-4(Y) individually, in
accordance with ITB 12 and 14.
Letter of Price Bid (Option A) is for quoting the price bid for individual
Package P-4(X) and P-4(Y).
Letter of Price Bid (Option B) is for quoting discount of price bid for
Combined Package P-4(X) and P-4(Y).
ITB 12.1 Add new paragraph after last paragraph of ITB 12.1 with the following:
Bidder should be capable of and willing to execute any Package without any
preference. Bidder can apply as per the following case:
 Case 1: For one package only, however, Bidder shall submit single
Technical Bid and separate Price Bid for both P-4(X) and P-4(Y) packages,
without any preference,
preference.
The Bids shall be submitted as follows:
Page 5 of 49
 Case 1: Single Technical Bid and separate Price Bid for each Package
including discounts, if any.
 Case 2: Single Technical Bid for Combined Packages and separate Price
Bids for each Package including discounts and additional discount for
Combined Packages, if any.
If the Bidder fails to quote the price for Bill of Quantities for any of the
Packages P-4(X) or P-4(Y), the Bid will be considered as incomplete and shall
be rejected.
ITB 13.2 Alternative times for completion shall not be permitted.
ITB 15.1 The currency(ies) of the Bid shall be as described below:
The unit rates and prices shall be quoted by the Bidder in the Bill of
Quantities separately in the following currencies:
For those inputs to the Works that the Bidder expects to supply from within
the Employer’s country, in Indian Rupee (INR), the name of the currency of
the Employer’s country (referred to as “the local currency”); and
For those inputs to the Works that the Bidder expects to supply from outside
the Employer’s country (referred to as “the foreign currency”), in Japanese
Yen (JPY), United States Dollar (USD) and/or European Euro (EUR).
ITB 18.1 The Bid validity period shall be one hundred and eighty (180) days.
ITB 18.3 (a) The Bid Price shall be adjusted by the following factor:
Not applicable.
ITB 18.3 (b) The fixed portion of the Bid Price shall be adjusted by the following factor:
Not applicable.
ITB 19.1 The amount and currency of Bid Security(ies) shall be as follows:
 Case 1: INR 145,000,000 (Indian Rupee One hundred and Forty-five
Million only),
 Case 2: Two Bid Securities each of INR 145,000,000 (Indian Rupee One
hundred and Forty-five Million only).
ITB 19.2 Replace ITB 19.2 with the following:
The Bid Security(ies) shall be in any of the following forms at the Bidder’s
option:
(a) an unconditional guarantee issued by a bank; or
(b) a cashier’s or certified cheque,
from a reputable source from an eligible source country. In the case of a bank
Page 6 of 49
guarantee, the Bid Security(ies) shall be submitted either using the Bid
Security Form included in Section IV, Bidding Forms or in another
substantially similar format approved by the Employer prior to Bid
submission. In either case, the form must include the complete name of the
Bidder. The Bid Security(ies) shall be valid for twenty-eight (28) days beyond
the original validity period of the Bid, or beyond any period of extension if
requested under ITB 18.2.
ITB 20.1 In addition to the original of the Bid, the number of copies is: three (3). The
original and each copy shall be enclosed as a hard copy with a soft copy (CD
or DVD).
The soft copies shall be in the form of scanned copies in PDF format.
ITB 20.2 The written confirmation of authorization to sign on behalf of the Bidder shall
consist of:
(a) Organizational Documents, Board Resolution and Power of Attorney
specifying the representative’s authority to sign the bid on behalf of the
Bidder. The Power of Attorney to be submitted in the original.
(b) Bids submitted by an existing or intended JV/Consortium shall consist
of an undertaking authorised by all member/parties, which takes (i) joint
and several liability and (ii) nominates an authorised representative
from the Lead Member who shall have the authority to conduct all
business for and on behalf of any and all the members of the
JV/Consortium during the bidding process and, in the event the
JV/Consortium is awarded the contract, during Contract execution.
D. Submission and Opening of Bids

ITB 21.1 Replace the ITB 21.1 with the following:
The Bid shall be submitted, by hand, as per anyone of the following cases, as
applicable:
 For Case 1:
The Bidder shall enclose the original of the Technical Bid with three (3)
copies in separate sealed envelopes.
Similarly, the Bidder shall enclose the original of the Price Bid with three (3)
copies for each of Package P-4(X) and P-4(Y) in separate sealed envelopes.
The original and each hard copy shall be enclosed as a hard copy along with
a soft copy (CD or DVD) in the form of scanned copy in PDF format.
The four (4) TECHNICAL BID envelopes as thus prepared shall then be
enclosed in one (1) single envelope marked “TECHNICAL BID” and
similarly for the four (4) PRICE BID envelopes as thus prepared for each of
Package P-4(X) and P-4(Y) shall then be enclosed in one (1) single envelope
Page 7 of 49
marked “PRICE BID (X)” and “PRICE BID (Y)” respectively. Then these
two (2) PRICE BID envelopes, thus prepared shall be enclosed in one (1)
single envelope marked “PRICE BID”.
These two (2) separate envelopes, thus prepared, shall then be enclosed in one
(1) single envelope.
The envelopes to be marked and documents to be enclosed in the envelopes

are described in tabulated form as follows:
Envelope Marking on Envelopes and Documents to be

Number Contained in Envelopes
Envelope No. 1 Marked as “P-4(X) AND P-4(Y) FOR ANY ONE
PACKAGE” and contains Envelope No. 2 and Envelope
No. 3.
Envelope No. 2 Marked as “TECHNICAL BID” and contains four (4)
‘Technical envelopes: Envelope No. 4, Envelope No. 5, Envelope
Bid’ No. 6 and Envelope No. 7.
Envelope No. 3 Marked as “PRICE BID” and contains two (2)
‘Price Bid’ envelopes: Envelope No. 3(X) and Envelope No. 3(Y).
Envelope No. Marked as “PRICE BID (X)” and contains four (4)
3(X) ‘Price Bid envelopes: Envelope No. 8 (X), Envelope No. 9 (X),
(X)’ Envelope No. 10 (X) and Envelope No. 11 (X).
Envelope No. Marked as “PRICE BID (Y)” and contains four (4)
3(Y) ‘Price Bid envelopes: Envelope No. 8 (Y), Envelope No. 9 (Y),
(Y)’ Envelope No. 10 (Y) and Envelope No. 11 (Y).
Envelope No. 4 Marked as “ORIGINAL – TECHNICAL BID” and
contains the Original of the Technical Bid plus a soft
copy.
Envelope No. 5 Marked as “COPY 1 – TECHNICAL BID” and contains
Copy One of the Technical Bid plus a soft copy.
Copy Two of the Technical Bid plus a soft copy.
Envelope No. 7 Marked as “COPY 3 – TECHNICAL BID and “contains
Copy Three of the Technical Bid plus a soft copy.
Envelope No. Marked as “ORIGINAL – PRICE BID (X)” and
8(X) contains the Original of the Price Bid plus a soft copy
for Package P-4(X).
Page 8 of 49
Envelope No. Marked as “ORIGINAL – PRICE BID (Y)” and

8(Y) contains the Original of the Price Bid plus a soft copy
for Package P-4(Y).
Envelope No. Marked as “COPY 1 – PRICE BID (X)” and contains
9(X) Copy One of the Price Bid plus a soft copy for Package
P-4(X).
Envelope No. Marked as “COPY 1 – PRICE BID (Y)” and contains
9(Y) Copy One of the Price Bid plus a soft copy for Package
P-4(Y).
Envelope No. Marked as ‘“COPY 2 – PRICE BID (X)” and contains
10(X) Copy Two of the Price Bid plus a soft copy for Package
P-4(X).
Envelope No. Marked as ‘“COPY 2 – PRICE BID (Y)” and contains
10(Y) Copy Two of the Price Bid plus a soft copy for Package
P-4(Y).
11(X) Copy Three of the Price Bid plus a soft copy for Package
P-4(X).
11(Y) Copy Three of the Price Bid plus a soft copy for Package
P-4(Y).
Page 9 of 49
Schematic representation for Bid submission:
Envelope No. 4 : ‘ORIGINAL - TECHNICAL BID’

Original Technical Bid + soft copy
Envelope No. 5: ‘COPY 1 - TECHNICAL BID’

Technical Bid + soft copy
Envelope No.
2 Envelope No. 6: ‘COPY 2 - TECHNICAL BID’
“TECHNICA Technical Bid + soft copy
L BID”
Envelope
No. 1
"P-4(X) Envelope No. 8(X): ‘ORIGINAL - PRICE BID (X)’
AND P- Original Price Bid + soft copy
4(Y) FOR
ANY ONE Envelope No.9(X): ‘COPY 1 - PRICE BID (X)’
PACKAGE Price Bid + soft copy
"
Envelope
Package
No.P-4(Y)
3(X)
Envelope No.10(X): ‘COPY 2 - PRICE BID (X)’
“PRICE Price Bid + soft copy
BID (X)”
Envelope No. 11(X): ‘COPY 3 - PRICE BID (X)’

Price Bid + soft copy
Envelope No.
3 Envelope No. 8(Y): ‘ORIGINAL - PRICE BID (Y)’
“PRICE BID” Original Price Bid + soft copy
Envel
ope Envelope No.9(Y): ‘COPY 1 - PRICE BID (Y)’
No.
Envelope Price Bid + soft copy
3(Y)
No. 3(Y)
“PRI
“PRICE
BIDCE
(Y)” Envelope No.10(Y): ‘COPY 2 - PRICE BID (Y)’
BID Price Bid + soft copy
(Y)”
Envelope No. 11(Y): ‘COPY 3 - PRICE BID (Y)’

Page 10 of 49
 For Case 2:
The Bidder shall enclose the original of the Technical Bid with three (3)
copies in separate sealed envelopes.
Similarly, the Bidder shall enclose the original of the Price Bid with three (3)
copies for each of Package P-4(X), P-4(Y) and Combined P-4(X) and P-4(Y),
in separate sealed envelopes.
The original and each hard copy shall be enclosed as a hard copy along with
a soft copy (CD or DVD) in the form of scanned copy in PDF format.
The four (4) TECHNICAL BID envelopes as thus prepared shall then be
enclosed in one (1) single envelope marked “TECHNICAL BID” and
similarly for the four (4) PRICE BID envelopes as thus prepared for each of
Package P-4(X), P-4(Y) and Combined P-4(X) and P-4(Y), shall then be
enclosed in one (1) single envelope marked “PRICE BID (X)”, “PRICE BID
(Y)” and “LETER OF PRICE BID (X+Y)” respectively. Then these three (3)
PRICE BID envelopes, thus prepared shall be enclosed in one (1) single
envelope marked “PRICE BID”.
These two (2) separate envelopes, thus prepared, shall then be enclosed in one
(1) single envelope.
The envelopes to be marked and documents to be enclosed in the envelopes
are described in tabulated form as follows:
Envelope Marking on Envelopes and Documents to be

Number Contained in Envelopes
Envelope No. 1 Marked as “BOTH P-4(X) AND P-4(Y) COMBINED
AND INDIVIDUALLY” and contains Envelope No. 2
and Envelope No. 3
Envelope No. 2 Marked as “TECHNICAL BID” and contains four (4)
‘Technical envelopes: Envelope No. 4, Envelope No. 5, Envelope
Bid’ No. 6 and Envelope No. 7.
Envelope No. 3 Marked as “PRICE BID” and contains three (3)
‘Price Bid’ envelopes: Envelope No. 3(X), Envelope No. 3(Y) and
Envelope No. 3(X+Y).
Envelope No. Marked as “PRICE BID (X)” and contains four (4)
3(X) ‘Price Bid envelopes: Envelope No. 8 (X), Envelope No. 9 (X),
(X)’ Envelope No. 10 (X) and Envelope No. 11 (X).
Envelope No. Marked as “PRICE BID (Y)” and contains four (4)
3(Y) ‘Price Bid envelopes: Envelope No. 8 (Y), Envelope No. 9 (Y),
(Y)’ Envelope No. 10 (Y) and Envelope No. 11 (Y).
Page 11 of 49
Envelope No. Marked as “LETTER OF PRICE BID (X+Y)” and

3(X+Y), contains four (4) envelopes: Envelope No. 8 (X+Y),
‘Letter of Price Envelope No. 9 (X+Y), Envelope No. 10 (X+Y) and
Bid (X+Y)’ Envelope No. 11 (X+Y).
Envelope No. 4 Marked as “ORIGINAL – TECHNICAL BID” and
contains the Original of the Technical Bid plus a soft
copy.
Copy One of the Technical Bid plus a soft copy.
Copy Two of the Technical Bid plus a soft copy.
Envelope No. 7 Marked as “COPY 3 – TECHNICAL BID and “contains
Copy Three of the Technical Bid plus a soft copy.
Envelope No. Marked as “ORIGINAL – PRICE BID (X)” and
8(X) contains the Original of the Price Bid plus a soft copy
for Package P-4(X).
Envelope No. Marked as “ORIGINAL – PRICE BID (Y)” and
8(Y) contains the Original of the Price Bid plus a soft copy
for Package P-4(Y).
Envelope No. Marked as “ORIGINAL – LETTER OF PRICE BID
8(X+Y) (X+Y)” and contains the Original of the Price Bid plus
a soft copy for Combined Package P-4(X+Y).
9(X) Copy One of the Price Bid plus a soft copy for Package
P-4(X).
9(Y) Copy One of the Price Bid plus a soft copy for Package
P-4(Y).
Envelope No. Marked as “COPY 1 – LETTER OF PRICE BID
9(X+Y) (X+Y)” and contains Copy One of the Price Bid plus a
soft copy for Combined Package P-4(X+Y).
Envelope No. Marked as ‘“COPY 2 – PRICE BID (X)” and contains
10(X) Copy Two of the Price Bid plus a soft copy for Package
P-4(X).
Envelope No. Marked as ‘“COPY 2 – PRICE BID (Y)” and contains
10(Y) Copy Two of the Price Bid plus a soft copy for Package
P-4(Y).
Page 12 of 49
Envelope No. Marked as ‘“COPY 2 – LETTER OF PRICE BID

10(X+Y) (X+Y)” and contains Copy Two of the Price Bid plus a
11(X) Copy Three of the Price Bid plus a soft copy for Package
P-4(X).
11(Y) Copy Three of the Price Bid plus a soft copy for Package
P-4(Y).
Envelope No. Marked as “COPY 3 – LETTER OF PRICE BID
11(X+Y) (X+Y)” and contains Copy Three of the Price Bid plus a
Page 13 of 49
Schematic representation for Bid submission:

Envelope No. 4 : ‘ORIGINAL - TECHNICAL BID’
Original Technical Bid + soft copy
Envelope
No. 2 Envelope No. 5: ‘COPY 1 - TECHNICAL BID’
“TECHNIC
AL BID”

Envelope Envelope No. 8(X): ‘ORIGINAL - PRICE BID (X)’

No. 1 Original Price Bid + soft copy
"BOTH
P-4(X) Envelope No. Envelope No.9(X): ‘COPY 1 - PRICE BID (X)’
3(X)
AND P-
Packag
4(Y) “PRICE
e P- BID
4(Y)(X)”
COMBIN Envelope No.10(X): ‘COPY 2 - PRICE BID (X)’
ED AND
INDIVID
UALLY" Envelope No. 11(X): ‘COPY 3 - PRICE BID (X)’
Envelope No. 8(Y): ‘ORIGINAL - PRICE BID (Y)’

Original Price Bid + soft copy
Envelope Envelope No.9(Y): ‘COPY 1 - PRICE BID (Y)’

No. 3 Envelope
Envelope No.
No. Price Bid + soft copy
3(Y)
“PRICE 3(Y)
“PRICE
BID” “PRICE BID
BID Envelope No.10(Y): ‘COPY 2 - PRICE BID (Y)’
(Y)”
(Y)” Price Bid + soft copy
Envelope No. 11(Y): ‘COPY 3 - PRICE BID (Y)’

Envelope No. 8(X+Y): ‘ORIGINAL - LETTER OF PRICE BID (X+Y)’

Original Letter of Price Bid + soft copy
Envelope No.9(X+Y): ‘COPY 1 - LETTER OF PRICE BID (X+Y)’

Envelope No. Letter of Price Bid + soft copy
Envelope
3(X+Y)No.
3(X+Y)
“LETTER OF
“PRICE BID
PRICE BID Envelope No.10(X+Y): ‘COPY 2 - LETTER OF PRICE BID (X+Y)’
(X+Y)”
(X+Y)” Letter of Price Bid + soft copy
Envelope No. 11(X+Y): ‘COPY 3 - LETTER OF PRICE BID (X+Y)’

Letter of Price Bid + soft copy
Page 14 of 49
ITB 21.2 Replace ITB 21.2 with the following description:

The inner and outer envelopes shall:
(a) bear the name and address of the Bidder and the following identification
“Procurement, Fabrication, Check-Assembly, Painting at workshop(s) and

Transportation to various Bridge Sites of Steel Truss Superstructures along
with bearings for 33 Nos. of Bridges for High Speed Rail Corridor for
crossing over Roads / Rivers / Railways / other structures in two (2)
Packages [MAHSR P-4(X) and MAHSR P-4(Y)] for the Project for
Construction of Mumbai-Ahmedabad High Speed Rail”.
TECHNICAL BID(i)
From(ii) :
Address(ii):
DO NOT OPEN BEFORE(iii):
(i) As appropriate, insert “Technical Bid”, “Price Bid”, “Original Technical Bid”,
“Copy-1 of Technical Bid”, “Copy-2 of Technical Bid”, “Copy-3 of Technical Bid”,
“Original Price Bid” or “ Copy-1 of Price Bid”, “ Copy-2 of Price Bid” “ Copy-3
of Price Bid”.
(ii) Insert the Bidder’s Name and Address
(iii)Insert the latest time and date of Bid Opening stated in the Invitation for Bid.
However, in case of Price Bid, replace the entire wording of “DO NOT OPEN
BEFORE” with “DO NOT OPEN UNTIL ADVISED BY THE EMPLOYER”.
(b) be addressed to the Employer at the following address:
“Procurement, Fabrication, Check-Assembly, Painting at workshop(s) and

Transportation to various Bridge Sites of Steel Truss Superstructures along
with bearings for 33 Nos. of Bridges for High Speed Rail Corridor for
crossing over Roads / Rivers / Railways / other structures in two (2)
Packages [MAHSR P-4(X) and MAHSR P-4(Y)] for the Project for
Construction of Mumbai-Ahmedabad High Speed Rail”.
Attention : General Manager- Contract, National High Speed
Rail Corporation Limited
Street Address : Asia Bhawan, Road No.205, Sector-9, Dwarka
City : New Delhi
Zip Code : 110077
Country : India
ITB 22.1 For Bid submission purposes only the Employer’s address is:
Attention : General Manager- Contract
Page 15 of 49

Street Address : Asia Bhawan, Road No.205, Sector-9, Dwarka
City : New Delhi
ZIP Code : 110077
Country : India
The deadline for Bid submission is:
Date : 19.06.2020
Time : 15:00 hrs
ITB 25.1 The opening of the Technical Bid shall take place at:
Organization : National High Speed Rail Corporation
Limited
Street Address : Asia Bhawan
Floor/Room number : 2nd Floor
City : New Delhi
ZIP Code : 110077
Country : India
Date : 19.06.2020
Time : 15:30 hrs
E. Evaluation and Comparison of Bids
ITB 34.1 The currency that shall be used for Bid evaluation and comparison purposes
to convert all Bid Prices expressed in various currencies into a single currency
is to be the Indian Rupee (INR).
The exchange rate shall be the reference rate of the Reserve Bank of India
(RBI).
The date for the exchange rate shall be twenty-eight (28) days prior to the
deadline for submission of Bids.
F. Award of Contract
ITB 41.3 Add the following new Sub-Clause ITB 41.3 after ITB 41.2:
(New) If the JV/Consortium submitted a “Letter of Intent” according to the BDS ITB
20.2 (b) and 11.2 (e), they shall submit a JV/Consortium Agreement at the time
of the signing of the Contract Agreement.
Page 16 of 49
Package No. MAHSR-P-4(X) and P-4(Y) Section III. Evaluation and Qualification Criteria
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A. General Provisions ..................................................................................................18
A.1. Evaluation Sequence .................................................................................................18

A.2. Clarification of Bids ..................................................................................................18
A.3. Employer’s Rights .....................................................................................................18
A.4. Bid Forms ..................................................................................................................18
1. Stage 1: Evaluation of Administrative Requirements .........................................19
1.1 General ......................................................................................................................19
Result of Evaluation ..................................................................................................19
2. Stage 2: Evaluation of Compliance and Responsiveness .....................................20
General ......................................................................................................................20
3. Stage 3: Evaluation of Compliance with the Qualification Requirements ........21
General ......................................................................................................................21
Check Items ...............................................................................................................21
4. Stage 4: Technical Evaluation ................................................................................45
Procedure for Technical Evaluation ..........................................................................45
Evaluation of Technical Proposal: ............................................................................45
5. Stage 5: Financial Evaluation.................................................................................49
General ......................................................................................................................49
Part 1 - Evaluation of Compliance and Responsiveness ...........................................49
Part 2 – Detailed Financial Evaluation ......................................................................49
Page 17 of 49
A. General Provisions
A.1. Evaluation Sequence
(a) Bids will be evaluated by the following five stages:

(i) Stage 1: Evaluation of Administrative Requirements
(ii) Stage 2: Evaluation of Compliance and Responsiveness
(iii) Stage 3: Evaluation of Compliance with the Qualification
Requirements
(iv) Stage 4: Technical Evaluation
(v) Stage 5: Financial Evaluation
A.2. Clarification of Bids
(a) The Employer may request clarification of any Bid in accordance with the
provisions of the Bid Documents (Part 1, Section-I: Instructions to Bidders,
Clause 27).
(b) If clarification is required, the Employer will send written (courier/email with
PDF attachment) requests to the Authorised Representative for clarification,
specifying the deadline for receipt of reply.
(c) Replies to the above requests shall be sent by the Bidder through courier/e-mail
with PDF attachments and the same shall be solely to clarify and/or elaborate the
items already included in the submitted Bids for the purpose of evaluation.
A.3. Employer’s Rights
Further to the provisions of Instructions to Bidders, Clause 28 and 30, the

Employer reserves his rights in accordance with the provisions of the Bidding
Documents in Part 1, Section-1; Instructions to Bidders, Clause 31 and 32.
A.4. Bid Forms
(a) Bidders should note that the information required to be inserted into the Bid
Forms shall be comprehensive and detailed. The technical information shall be
furnished in line with the requirements of Part 1, Part 2 and Part 3 of the Bidding
Documents.
(b) All Forms contained in the Bid Documents must be fully and properly completed
and all the forms must be returned, as they will be reviewed exactly as submitted
and errors or omissions may count against the Bidder.
(c) Any Bidder who is found to have intentionally submitted false or inaccurate
statements/information shall be disqualified from the Bid process.
Page 18 of 49
1. Stage 1: Evaluation of Administrative Requirements
1.1 General
(a) The Stage 1 Evaluation will consist of checking the Bids to confirm whether
they are substantially responsive to the administrative requirements of the Bid
Documents.
(b) The following administrative items will be checked:
(i) Whether the Technical Bid is in accordance with ITB 11.2.
(ii) Whether the power of attorney for the Bid signatory is in the correct form
[Ref. ITB 20.2 and ITB 20.3];
(iii) Whether all Bid Forms have been signed by the Authorised Representative
[Ref. ITB 20.2 and ITB 20.3];
(iv) Whether all data to be entered by the Bidder has been provided [Ref. ITB
12.1];
(v) Whether any alterations are initialled by Authorised Representative [Ref.
ITB 20.4];
(vi) Whether the required number of copies of the Bid have been submitted
[Ref. ITB 20.1];
(vii) Whether all copies of the Bid are identical [Ref. ITB 20.1]; and
(viii) The duly filled Checklist of Submission of Documents for Technical Bid
[Ref ITB 11.2(h)].
Result of Evaluation
All Bids that have passed this stage of the evaluation will proceed to the next stage.
Page 19 of 49
2. Stage 2: Evaluation of Compliance and Responsiveness
General
(a) The Stage 2 Evaluation will consist of checking the Bids to confirm whether
they are substantially responsive to the requirements of the Bidding
Documents.
(b) This stage of the evaluation shall be on a “Pass” or “Fail” basis. Each of the
items listed below will be checked and if any item is evaluated to “Fail” then
the entire Bid will be failed under this stage of the evaluation.
(c) The following items will be checked:
(i) The Bidder’s responsiveness shall be checked as per ITB 31;
(ii) Whether only One Bid per Bidder has been submitted as per ITB 4.2(c);
(iii) Whether all Bid Forms have not been altered and are correctly filled in
and signed as per ITB 12.1; and
(iv) Whether all relevant Addenda have been complied with.
Page 20 of 49
3. Stage 3: Evaluation of Compliance with the Qualification Requirements
General
(a) Bids that have passed the Stage 1 and Stage 2 Evaluations will be reviewed
to ascertain whether the Bid continues to comply with all of the minimum
requirements as stipulated in the Sub-Clause 3.2 of Section-III of the Bidding
Documents.
Bidder should note that if their Bid for Combined P-4(X) and P-4(Y) Fails to
qualify, then their credentials for any one of Package P-4(X) and P-4(Y) will
be checked.
(b) Evaluation of each item will be made on a Pass or Fail Basis.
(c) If, following this Stage 3 review, a Bidder has failed to comply with any item,
the Bid will fail the evaluation at this stage.
Check Items
The following requirements of the Instruction to Bidders, Clauses 4, 11 & 17 will

be checked to ensure compliance to the requirements of criteria given below:
(a) Eligibility:
(i) Nationality: Form ELI-1 and ELI-2
(ii) Conflict of Interest: Letter of Technical Bid
(iii) JICA Ineligibility: Letter of Technical Bid and Form ACK
(b) Contract Non-Performance and Litigation:
(i) History of Non-Performing Contracts: Form CON
(ii) Pending Litigation: Form CON
(iii) Litigation History: Form CON
(c) Financial Situation:
(i) Financial Performance: Form FIN-1
(ii) Average Annual Construction Turnover: Form FIN-2
(iii) Bankruptcy/Insolvency and Debt Restructuring: Form FIN-3
(d) Experience
(i) General Construction Experience: Form EXP-1
(ii) Specific Construction Experience: Form EXP-2(a)
(iii) Construction Experience in Key Activities: Form EXP-2(b)
(e) Financial Resources
(i) Financial Resources: Form FIR-1
(ii) Current Contract Commitments: Form FIR-2
Page 21 of 49
Criteria
Notes: Exchange Rate for Qualification Criteria
Wherever a Form in Section IV, Bidding Forms, requires a Bidder to state a

monetary amount, Bidders shall indicate the INR equivalent as indicated in the
respective form using the rate of exchange determined as follows:
(i) For construction turnover or financial data required for each year - Exchange
rate prevailing on the last day of the respective year.
(ii) Value of single contract - Exchange rate prevailing on the date of the Contract
Award i.e. Letter of Acceptance was issued.
Exchange rates shall be taken from reference rate of The Reserve Bank of India
(RBI). Any error in determining the exchange rates may be corrected by the
Employer.
In the case where a Bidder is required to convert a monetary amount from a currency
other than for which the RBI reference rate is published, the INR equivalent shall be
worked out using the rate of exchange as published by the central bank of the country
issuing the said currency.
Page 22 of 49
(A) For Case 1:
Eligibility and Qualification Criteria Compliance Requirements Documentation

JV/Consortium (existing or intended)
Factor/ Submission
No. Requirement Single Entity All Parties Each One
Sub-Factor Requirements
Combined Member Member
3.2(a) Eligibility
3.2(a) Nationality Nationality in accordance with Must meet N/A Must meet N/A Forms ELI-1
(i) ITB 4.3 requirement requirement and ELI-2
3.2(a) Conflict of No conflicts of interest as Must meet N/A Must meet N/A Letter of
(ii) Interest described in ITB 4.2 requirement requirement Technical Bid
3.2(a) JICA Ineligibility Not having been declared Must meet N/A Must meet N/A Letter of
(iii) ineligible by JICA, as described requirement requirement Technical Bid,
in ITB 4.4 Form ACK
Page 23 of 49

Factor/ Submission
No. Requirement Single Entity All Parties One
Sub-Factor Each Member Requirements
Combined Member
3.2(b) Contract Non-Performance and Litigation

Contract Non-Performance
3.2(b) History of Non- Non-performance of a Must meet N/A Must meet N/A Form CON
(i) Performing Contract(i) did not occur as a requirement(ii) requirement(ii)
Contracts result of Contractor’s default
since 1st January 2018.
Litigation
3.2(b) Pending All pending litigation against Must meet N/A Must meet N/A Form CON
(ii) Litigation the Bidder shall in total not requirement(ii) requirement(ii)
represent more than one
hundred percent (100 %) of the
Bidder’s net worth and shall be
treated as resolved against the
Bidder.
3.2(b) Litigation No consistent history of Must meet N/A Must meet N/A Form CON
(iii) History court/arbitral award decisions requirement(ii) requirement(ii)
against the Bidder (iii) since 1st
January 2015.
Page 24 of 49
Notes for the Bidder:

(i) Non-performance, which is basically termination of the Contract as decided by the Employer, shall include all Contracts:
(a) where non-performance was not challenged by the Contractor, including through referral to the dispute resolution mechanism under the
respective Contract or by written representation/appeal to the Employer, and
(b) that were so challenged but fully settled against the Contractor.
Non-performance shall not include Contracts where Employer’s decision was overruled by the dispute resolution mechanism. Non-performance
must be based on all information on fully settled disputes or litigation, i.e. dispute or litigation that has been resolved in accordance with the
dispute resolution mechanism under the respective Contract and where all appeal instances available to the Bidder have been exhausted.
(ii) This requirement also applies to Contracts executed by the Bidder as a JV/Consortium member.
(iii) The Bidder shall provide accurate information on the related Bidding Form about any litigation or arbitration resulting from Contracts completed
or ongoing under its execution over the last five (5) years. A consistent history of awards against the Bidder or any member of a JV/Consortium
may result in rejection of the Bid.
Page 25 of 49

Factor/ Single Submission
No. Requirement All Parties Each One
Sub-Factor Entity Requirements
3.2(c) Financial Situation

3.2(c) Financial Details in Form FIN-1 shall be Must meet N/A Must meet N/A Form FIN-1
(i) Performance provided in reference to the audited requirement requirement
balance sheets or, if not required by
the laws of the Bidder’s country,
other financial statements for the
last three (3) years and must
demonstrate the current soundness
of the Bidder’s financial position
and indicate its prospective long-
term profitability.
As the minimum requirement, a
Bidder’s net worth is calculated as
the difference between total assets
and total liabilities and should be
positive in the last year and for at
least two (2) years during the last
three (3) years.
Page 26 of 49

3.2(c) Average Minimum average annual Must meet Must meet Must meet Must meet Form FIN-2
(ii) Annual construction/steel fabrication requirement requirement twenty-five fifty
Construction turnover of INR 7,250,000,000 percent percent
Turnover (Indian Rupee Seven Billion Two (25%) of the (50%) of
hundred and Fifty Million only) requirement the
calculated as total certified requirement
payments received for contracts in
progress and/or completed within
the last three (3) years and divided
by three (3).
3.2(c) Bankruptcy/ The Bidder shall not have suffered Must meet N/A Must meet N/A Form FIN–3
(iii) Insolvency and bankruptcy/insolvency during the requirement requirement
Debt last three (3) years from the date of
Restructuring deadline of submission of this Bid,
and
1. The Bidder shall have neither
obtained debt restructuring in the
immediately preceding three (3)
years from the date of deadline of
submission of this Bid nor have
applied for it (as on the date of
deadline of submission of this Bid)
Page 27 of 49

and shall not be currently in the
process of corporate debt
restructuring.
Or if
2. The Bidder has obtained debt
restructuring in the immediately
preceding three (3) years from the
date of deadline of submission of
this Bid or has applied for it or are
currently in the process of
corporate debt restructuring (as on
the date of deadline of submission
of this Bid), the Bidder shall open a
dedicated “Trust & Retention
account” (T & R account) in
consultation with the Employer.
The Contractor shall submit a
certified list of vendors/suppliers/
sub-contractors/ consultants,
associated and engaged for the
execution of the contract work.
Bank will make payments on
Page 28 of 49

instruction of the Contractors to
pre-certified vendors/suppliers/sub-
contractors/ consultants only. The
funds will be paid in the designated
currency to Trust and Retention
account only. The Contractor shall
not divert the funds for the
purpose(s) other than the intended
purpose(s).
Page 29 of 49

Factor/ Submission
3.2(d) Experience
3.2(d) General Experience under construction Must meet N/A Must meet N/A Form EXP–1
(i) Construction contracts of Structural Steel- requirement requirement
Experience work fabrication / construction
in the role of prime Contractor
(single entity or JV/Consortium
member), or Subcontractor, or
Management Contractor (i) for at
least the last 5 (five) years,
starting 1st January 2015.
3.2(d) Specific A minimum of similar work (ii) Must meet Must meet N/A N/A Form EXP–2
(ii) Construction that have been satisfactorily and requirement requirement (a)
Experience substantially (iii) completed as a
prime Contractor (single entity
or JV/Consortium member)(iv)
between 1st January 2015 and
the Bid submission deadline.
3.2(d) Construction For the above or other contracts Must meet Must meet N/A N/A Form EXP–2
(iii) Experience in completed and under requirement requirement (b)
Key Activities implementation as prime (can be a (can be a
Page 30 of 49
Contractor (single entity or specialist sub- specialist sub-

JV/Consortium member), or contractor(vi)) contractor(vi))
management contractor or
subcontractor(v) between 1st
January 2010 and Bid
submission deadline, a
minimum construction
experience of at least one
contract in the following key
activity successfully completed:
Key Activity:
Fabrication of Steel girder for
Bridge/Viaduct for Railway/
Metro-Rail with at least one
girder of span 60m or more.
Notes for the Bidder

(i) A management contractor is a firm that does not normally perform directly the construction work associated with the contract. Rather, it
manages the work of other (sub) contractors while bearing full responsibility and risk for price, quality and timely performance of the
work contract.
(ii) Similar work would mean a contract/contracts comprising the following activities. Works under various Contracts can be added to meet
the criteria.
• Fabrication of steel structure of total tonnage of 25,000 MT, out of which minimum fabrication of steel structure for Railway/ Metro-
Rail/Road bridges shall be 3,500 MT.
Page 31 of 49
(iii) Substantial completion shall be based on fabrication of 80% or more of the total steel structure fabrication quantities under the contract for
similar works.
(iv) For contracts under which the Bidder participated as a JV/Consortium member, only the Bidder’s share, in terms of monetary value, shall
be considered to meet this requirement.
(v) For contracts under which the Bidder participated as a JV/Consortium member or subcontractor, only the Bidder’s share shall be counted
to meet this requirement.
(vi) In case the construction experience in key activity 3.2(d)(iii) is being met by a specialist subcontractor, then in addition to Form ELI-2 and
EXP-2(b), the undertaking from specialist subcontractor, for willingness to associate with the bidder, shall be submitted without which
specialist subcontractor’s experience shall not be considered.

Factor/ Submission
3.2(e) Financial Resources

3.2(e) Financial (i) The Bidder shall demonstrate Must meet Must meet Must meet Must meet Form FIR–1
Resources that it has access to, or has requirement requirement 25% of the 40% of the
available, liquid assets, requirement requirement
unencumbered real assets, lines of
credit, and other financial means
(independent of any contractual
advance payment) sufficient to
meet the construction cash flow
Page 32 of 49

Factor/ Submission
requirements estimated as INR
1,208,000,000 (Indian Rupee One
Billion Two hundred and Eight
Million only) for the subject
contract(s) net of the Bidders
other commitments.
(ii) The Bidder shall also Must meet Must meet N/A N/A Form FIR–1,
demonstrate, to the satisfaction of requirement requirement FIR–2 and
the Employer, that it has adequate Annexure to
sources of finance to meet the Form FIR-2
cash flow requirements on works
currently in progress and for
future contract commitments.
Page 33 of 49
(B) For Case 2:

Factor/ Submission
3.2(a) Eligibility
3.2(a) Nationality Nationality in accordance with Must meet N/A Must meet N/A Forms ELI-1
(i) ITB 4.3 requirement requirement and ELI-2
3.2(a) Conflict of No conflicts of interest as Must meet N/A Must meet N/A Letter of
(ii) Interest described in ITB 4.2 requirement requirement Technical Bid
3.2(a) JICA Ineligibility Not having been declared Must meet N/A Must meet N/A Letter of
(iii) ineligible by JICA, as described requirement requirement Technical Bid,
in ITB 4.4 Form ACK
Page 34 of 49

Factor/ Submission
No. Requirement Single Entity All Parties One
Sub-Factor Each Member Requirements
Combined Member
3.2(b) Contract Non-Performance and Litigation

Contract Non-Performance
3.2(b) History of Non- Non-performance of a Must meet N/A Must meet N/A Form CON
(i) Performing Contract(i) did not occur as a requirement(ii) requirement(ii)
Contracts result of Contractor’s default
since 1st January 2018.
Litigation
3.2(b) Pending All pending litigation against Must meet N/A Must meet N/A Form CON
(ii) Litigation the Bidder shall in total not requirement(ii) requirement(ii)
represent more than one
hundred percent (100 %) of the
Bidder’s net worth and shall be
treated as resolved against the
Bidder.
3.2(b) Litigation No consistent history of Must meet N/A Must meet N/A Form CON
(iii) History court/arbitral award decisions requirement(ii) requirement(ii)
against the Bidder (iii) since 1st
January 2015.
Page 35 of 49
Notes for the Bidder:

(i) Non-performance, which is basically termination of the Contract as decided by the Employer, shall include all Contracts:
(a) where non-performance was not challenged by the Contractor, including through referral to the dispute resolution mechanism under the
respective Contract or by written representation/appeal to the Employer, and
(b) that were so challenged but fully settled against the Contractor.
Non-performance shall not include Contracts where Employer’s decision was overruled by the dispute resolution mechanism. Non-performance
must be based on all information on fully settled disputes or litigation, i.e. dispute or litigation that has been resolved in accordance with the
dispute resolution mechanism under the respective Contract and where all appeal instances available to the Bidder have been exhausted.
(ii) This requirement also applies to Contracts executed by the Bidder as a JV/Consortium member.
(iii) The Bidder shall provide accurate information on the related Bidding Form about any litigation or arbitration resulting from Contracts completed
or ongoing under its execution over the last five (5) years. A consistent history of awards against the Bidder or any member of a JV/Consortium
may result in rejection of the Bid.
Page 36 of 49

3.2(c) Financial Situation

3.2(c) Financial Details in Form FIN-1 shall be Must meet N/A Must meet N/A Form FIN-1
(i) Performance provided in reference to the audited requirement requirement
balance sheets or, if not required by
the laws of the Bidder’s country,
other financial statements for the
last three (3) years and must
demonstrate the current soundness
of the Bidder’s financial position
and indicate its prospective long-
term profitability.
As the minimum requirement, a
Bidder’s net worth is calculated as
the difference between total assets
and total liabilities and should be
positive in the last year and for at
least two (2) years during the last
three (3) years.
Page 37 of 49

3.2(c) Average Minimum average annual Must meet Must meet Must meet Must meet Form FIN-2
(ii) Annual construction turnover of INR requirement requirement twenty-five fifty
Construction 14,500,000,000 (Indian Rupee percent percent
Turnover Fourteen Billion Five hundred and (25%) of the (50%) of
Fifty Million only) calculated as requirement the
total certified payments received requirement
for contracts in progress and/or
completed within the last three (3)
years and divided by three (3).
3.2(c) Bankruptcy/ The Bidder shall not have suffered Must meet N/A Must meet N/A Form FIN–3
(iii) Insolvency and bankruptcy/insolvency during the requirement requirement
Debt last three (3) years from the date of
Restructuring deadline of submission of this Bid,
and
1. The Bidder shall have neither
obtained debt restructuring in the
immediately preceding three (3)
years from the date of deadline of
submission of this Bid nor have
applied for it (as on the date of
deadline of submission of this Bid)
Page 38 of 49

and shall not be currently in the
process of corporate debt
restructuring.
Or if
2. The Bidder has obtained debt
restructuring in the immediately
preceding three (3) years from the
date of deadline of submission of
this Bid or has applied for it or are
currently in the process of
corporate debt restructuring (as on
the date of deadline of submission
of this Bid), the Bidder shall open a
dedicated “Trust & Retention
account” (T & R account) in
consultation with the Employer.
The Contractor shall submit a
certified list of vendors/suppliers/
sub-contractors/ consultants,
associated and engaged for the
execution of the contract work.
Bank will make payments on
Page 39 of 49

instruction of the Contractors to
pre-certified vendors/suppliers/sub-
contractors/ consultants only. The
funds will be paid in the designated
currency to Trust and Retention
account only. The Contractor shall
not divert the funds for the
purpose(s) other than the intended
purpose(s).
Page 40 of 49

Factor/ Submission
3.2(d) Experience
3.2(d) General Experience under construction Must meet N/A Must meet N/A Form EXP–1
(i) Construction contracts of Structural Steel- requirement requirement
Experience work fabrication / construction
in the role of prime Contractor
(single entity or JV/Consortium
member), or Subcontractor, or
Management Contractor (i) for at
least the last 5 (five) years,
starting 1st January 2015.
3.2(d) Specific A minimum of similar work (ii) Must meet Must meet N/A N/A Form EXP–2 (a)
(ii) Construction that have been satisfactorily and requirement requirement
Experience substantially (iii) completed as a
prime Contractor (single entity
or JV/Consortium member)(iv)
between 1st January 2015 and
the Bid submission deadline.
3.2(d) Construction For the above or other contracts Must meet Must meet N/A N/A Form EXP–2
(iii) Experience in completed and under requirement requirement (b)
Key Activities implementation as prime (can be a (can be a
Page 41 of 49
Contractor (single entity or specialist sub- specialist sub-

JV/Consortium member), or contractor(vi)) contractor(vi))
management contractor or
subcontractor(v) between 1st
January 2010 and Bid
submission deadline, a
minimum construction
experience of at least one
contract in the following key
activity successfully completed:
Key Activity:
Fabrication of Steel girder for
Bridge/Viaduct for Railway/
Metro-Rail with at least one
girder of span 60m or more.
Notes for the Bidder

(i) A management contractor is a firm that does not normally perform directly the construction work associated with the contract. Rather, it
manages the work of other (sub) contractors while bearing full responsibility and risk for price, quality and timely performance of the
work contract.
(ii) Similar work would mean a contract/contracts comprising the following activities. Works under various Contracts can be added to meet
the criteria.
• Fabrication of steel structure of total tonnage of 50,000 MT, out of which minimum fabrication of steel structure for Railway/ Metro-
Rail/Road bridges shall be 7,000 MT.
Page 42 of 49
(iii) Substantial completion shall be based on fabrication of 80% or more of the total steel structure fabrication quantities under the contract
for similar works.
(iv) For contracts under which the Bidder participated as a JV/Consortium member, only the Bidder’s share, in terms of monetary value, shall
be considered to meet this requirement.
(v) For contracts under which the Bidder participated as a JV/Consortium member or subcontractor, only the Bidder’s share shall be counted
to meet this requirement.
(vi) In case the construction experience in key activity 3.2(d)(iii) is being met by a specialist subcontractor, then in addition to Form ELI-2
and EXP-2(b), the undertaking from specialist subcontractor, for willingness to associate with the bidder, shall be submitted without which
specialist subcontractor’s experience shall not be considered.

Factor/ Submission
3.2(e) Financial Resources

3.2(e) Financial (i) The Bidder shall demonstrate Must meet Must meet Must meet Must meet Form FIR–1
Resources that it has access to, or has requirement requirement 25% of the 40% of the
available, liquid assets, requirement requirement
unencumbered real assets, lines of
credit, and other financial means
(independent of any contractual
advance payment) sufficient to
Page 43 of 49

Factor/ Submission
meet the construction cash flow
requirements estimated as INR
2,416,000,000 (Indian Rupee Two
Billion Four hundred and Sixteen
Million only) for the subject
contract(s) net of the Bidders
other commitments.
(ii) The Bidder shall also Must meet Must meet N/A N/A Form FIR–1,
demonstrate, to the satisfaction of requirement requirement FIR–2 and
the Employer, that it has adequate Annexure to
sources of finance to meet the Form FIR-2
cash flow requirements on works
currently in progress and for
future contract commitments.
Page 44 of 49
4. STAGE 4: TECHNICAL EVALUATION
Procedure for Technical Evaluation
(a) The Stage 4 Evaluation will consist of checking the technical aspects of the
Bids to confirm whether they substantially conform to the requirements of the
Bidding Documents.
Bidder should note that if their Bid for Combined P-4(X) and P-4(Y) Fails to
qualify, then their credentials for any one of Package P-4(X) and P-4(Y) will
be checked.
(b) This stage shall be evaluated on an entire “Pass” or “Fail” basis. In order to
determine whether the Bid substantially conforms to the technical
requirements of the Bidding Documents, the Technical Proposal shall broadly
cover the following items:
S. No. Technical Evaluation Items Relevant Forms

1 Works Organization Technical Proposal
2 Method Statement Technical Proposal
3 Works Execution Programme Technical Proposal
Technical Proposal
4 Key Personnel
Form PER-1, Form PER-2
Technical Proposal
5 Major Plant & Equipment
Form EQU
(c) The Technical Proposal will be evaluated to examine the responsiveness and
to assess the capability of the Bidder in executing the proposed work.
Evaluation of Technical Proposal:
The Bidder’s preparedness along with technical capability will be judged by the
quality of the Technical Proposal submitted. It is expected that the Bidder visits
the site and is fully of aware of all the work requirements under this Bid, and then
prepares the Technical Proposal. The Technical Proposal shall cover the following
items with the minimum requirements for “Pass”.
4.2.1. Works Organization:
It shall elaborate on the mobilization of resources, including organization and

manning program. The organization shall elaborate on the project head office (each
member in the case of a JV/Consortium) and site organization, including relevant
departments and personnel.
Page 45 of 49
4.2.2. Method Statement:
It shall elaborate the setting up / expansion of workshop facilities, test-fabrication

for approval, actual-fabrication, check-assembly and painting of steel truss bridge
members at workshop, complete with procurement of material including bearings,
equipment, plant & machinery etc. employing the required skilled manpower like
welders / technicians including their regular training. Specifically, the Quality
Assurance and Control System adopted shall be explained in detail.
It should also elaborate the transportation of the fabricated truss members and
accessories from workshop to various bridge-sites/site-delivery-yards including
unloading and stacking while taking adequate precautions and delivery of the same
to the Interfacing bridge contractors.
4.2.3. Work Execution Programme:

It shall brief the fabrication program alongwith painting, quality assurance/quality
control management program, safety management program and environment
management program.
4.2.4. Key Personnel:
The evaluation of key personnel proposed by the Bidder in their Technical
Proposal in Bid Form PER-1 and Form PER-2 will be according to the following
evaluation sub-items:
Key Personnel for each Package [P-4(X) and P-4(Y)]
Key Personnel
Total Work Experience in
S. No. Position Experience Similar
(years) Works (years)
1 Project Manager 15 10 *
International Expert for Welding and
2 20 5***
Quality Management # ****
Chief Health & Safety Manager /
3 15 5 **
Accident Prevention Officer
4 CNC Operations Manager 10 5 **
#
5 Fabrication Engineer 15 5*
#
6 Welding Engineer 10 5*
#
7 Painting Engineer 10 5*
8 Environmental Expert 10 2 **
#
9 Quality Control Engineer 10 2*
Page 46 of 49
Notes:
# Person needed at each fabrication workshop subject to minimum 2 persons for each
package.
* Years of experience specifically in the fabrication of steel bridge superstructure.
** Years of experience specifically in fabrication workshops/ factories.
*** Years of experience in International High-Speed Rail projects / Japanese High-
Speed Rail projects.
**** For qualification, refer to Sub-Clause 1.7.3 of Technical Specifications in Part 2.
4.2.5. Major Plant and Equipment:

The Bidder shall explain adequacy and appropriateness of the Contractor’s
Equipment included in the Bidder’s Technical Proposal as compared with key work
volumes and the Bid Programme. The criteria are listed below
Major Plant & Equipment (each package)

Minimum number
S. No. Equipment Type and Characteristics required to Assess the
Bidder’s Capability
1 CNC/NC Cutting/Marking Machine 4
2 CNC/NC Drilling Machine 4
3 Edge Planing Machine 4
4 End Milling Machine 4
5 Welding Machine (Submerged Arc Welding) 20
6 Distortion Correction Machine 4
7 Bevelling Machine 4
8 Mobile Crane of required capacity 4
9 Overhead Gantry of required capacity 12
10 Jib Crane of required capacity 4
11 Blasting House per workshop 1
12 Blasting Machine per workshop 2
13 Painting House per workshop 1
14 Airless Painting Spray Device per workshop 3
The Bidder shall provide details of above items of equipment using Form EQU in
Section IV, Bidding Forms.
Page 47 of 49
(a) All Bids which have passed this stage of the evaluation will proceed to the
next stage.
(b) Any Bid that is evaluated to “Fail”, as determined above, will be considered
as substantially not conforming to the requirements of the Bidding
Documents and will be rejected at this Stage and will not be subjected to any
further evaluation.
Page 48 of 49
5. STAGE 5: Financial Evaluation
General
The activities in Stage 5 will be in two (2) parts.
Part 1 - Evaluation of Compliance and Responsiveness
(a) Under this stage the following items will be checked:

(i) Whether the Letter of Price Bid is compliant (i.e., does not include any
alteration to the basic terms and does not constitute an alternative offer).
(ii) Whether all Forms and Price Schedules have not been altered and are
correctly completed and signed.
Part 2 – Detailed Financial Evaluation
(a) After passing the above requirements, the Bid will then proceed for Price Bid
evaluation in accordance with ITB 36.
(b) The Employer will evaluate and compare financial bids on the basis of a
Package, or a combination of the Packages, in order to arrive at the least cost
combination for the Employer. The least cost combination will determine the
most eligible bidder(s) for award of any Package or combination of Packages.
Page 49 of 49
Package No. MAHSR-P-4(X) and P-4(Y) Section IV. Bidding Forms

Table of Contents
Letter of Technical Bid ...................................................................................................... 3

Letter of Price Bid (Option A)........................................................................................... 5
Letter of Price Bid (Option B) ........................................................................................... 8
1.0. Schedules ............................................................................................................ 10

Schedule of Adjustment Data .............................................................................. 11
Schedule of Payment Currencies for P-4(X) ....................................................... 15
Schedule of Payment Currencies for P-4(Y) ....................................................... 16
2.0. Bills of Quantities .............................................................................................. 17
Preamble .............................................................................................................. 17
Daywork .............................................................................................................. 18
Provisional Sums ................................................................................................. 20
Lump-sum rates break-down:.............................................................................. 20
Measurement and Payment ................................................................................. 20
Procedure for Payment ........................................................................................ 21
Methodology of claiming payment ..................................................................... 21
Work Items .......................................................................................................... 22
(A) Package No. P-4(X) [Bridge GADs 66, 69, 2, 58, 8, 1134, C5-2, C5-3, 25, 28,
1967, 32, 42 and Laundry] .................................................................................. 23
(B) Package No. P-4(Y) [ Bridge GADs 65, 1, 57, 67, 3, 6, 68, 12, 61, 14, 15, 62, C5-
1, 27, 31, 37, 2357-3, 54&55 and Diesel Shed ] ................................................. 41
3.0. Technical Proposal ............................................................................................ 60
Site Organisation ................................................................................................. 61
Method Statement ............................................................................................... 62
Works Execution Programme ............................................................................. 63
Key Personnel ..................................................................................................... 64
Form PER-1: Proposed Personnel ...................................................................................... 65
Form PER-2: Resume of Proposed Personnel .................................................................... 66
List of Major Plant & Equipment ........................................................................ 68
Page 1 of 120
Form EQU: Major Plant & Equipment .............................................................................. 69

4.0. Bidder’s Qualification ....................................................................................... 71
Form ELI-1: Bidder Information Form .............................................................................. 72
Form ELI-2: Bidder's Party Information Form .................................................................. 74
Form CON: Contract Non-Performance and Litigation ..................................................... 76
Form FIN-1: Financial Performance .................................................................................. 82
Form FIN-2: Average Annual Construction Turnover ....................................................... 84
Form FIN-3: Declaration on Bankruptcy/Insolvency and Debt Restructuring .................. 86
Form FIR-1: Financial Resources ...................................................................................... 88
Form FIR-2: Current Contract Commitments .................................................................... 90
Annexure to Form FIR-2 .................................................................................................... 92
Form EXP-1: General Construction Experience ................................................................ 94
Form EXP-2(a): Specific Construction Experience ........................................................... 96
Form EXP-2(b): Construction Experience in Key Activities ............................................. 99
Form ACK ....................................................................................................................... 102
5.0. Checklist of Submission of Documents/Forms duly filled for the Technical Bid
........................................................................................................................... 105
6.0. Bid Requirements ............................................................................................ 108
Form-JV/Consortium Agreement ..................................................................................... 109
Power of Attorney for Authorised Representative of Sole Bidder .................................. 113
Power of Attorney for Authorised Representative of JV/Consortium Members ............. 115
Power of Attorney to Authorized Representative of JV/Consortium ............................... 117
Form of Bid Security (Bank Guarantee) .......................................................................... 119
Page 2 of 120
Letter of Technical Bid
(To be submitted on Bidder’s letter head)
Date: …………………………………….
Loan Agreement No.: ID-P277 & ID-P279
IFB No.: Package No. MAHSR-P-4(X)
and MAHSR-P-4(Y)
To:
Managing Director
National High Speed Rail Corporation Ltd
2nd Floor, Asia Bhawan, Road Number 205
Sector-9, Dwarka,
New Delhi -110077, India
We, the undersigned, declare that:
1) We have examined and have no reservations to the Bidding Documents, including

Addenda issued in accordance with Instructions to Bidders (ITB 8).
[Insert the number and issuing date of each Addendum];
2) We, including Subcontractors/manufacturers, for any part of the Contract meet the
eligibility requirements in accordance with ITB 4 and ITB 5;
3) We, including Subcontractors/manufacturers, for any part of the Contract have no
conflict of interest in accordance with ITB 4;
4) We offer to execute in conformity with the Bidding Documents the following Works
(mark  as the Bidder intends):
 Case 1: For one package only, however, Bidder shall submit single Technical Bid
and separate Price Bid for both P-4(X) and P-4(Y) packages, without any preference,
Or
 Case 2: Both P-4(X) and P-4(Y) combined and individually without any preference
(i) Package P-4(X): “Procurement, Fabrication, Check-Assembly and Painting at
workshop and Transportation to various Bridge Sites of Steel Truss
C5-2, C5-3, 25, 28, 1967, 32, 42 and Laundry) of Bridges for High Speed Rail
Corridor for crossing over Roads / Rivers / Railways / other structures for the
Page 3 of 120
Project for Construction of Mumbai-Ahmedabad High Speed Rail”.

(ii) Package P-4(Y): “Procurement, Fabrication, Check-Assembly and Painting at
workshop and Transportation to various Bridge Sites of Steel Truss
12, 61, 14, 15, 62, C5-1, 27, 31, 37, 2357-3, 54&55 and Diesel Shed) of Bridges
for High Speed Rail Corridor for crossing over Roads / Rivers / Railways / other
structures for the Project for Construction of Mumbai-Ahmedabad High Speed
Rail”.
5) Our Bid shall be valid for a period of one hundred and eighty (180) days from the date
fixed for the Bid submission deadline in accordance with the Bidding Documents, and
it shall remain binding upon us and may be accepted at any time before the expiration
of that period;
6) We are not participating, as a Bidder or as a Subcontractor/manufacturer, in more than
one Bid in this bidding process in accordance with ITB 4.2(c);
7) We hereby certify that we have taken steps to ensure that no person acting for us or
on our behalf will engage in any type of fraud and corruption; and
8) In case incorrect, fabricated or suppressed information is noticed after the award of
the Contract, then NHSRCL reserves the right to terminate the Contract and to take
action in accordance with the Contract.
Name of the Bidder*[insert complete name of person signing the Bid].

Name of the person duly authorized to sign the Bid on behalf of the Bidder** [insert
complete name of person duly authorized to sign the Bid].
Title of the person signing the Bid [insert complete title of the person signing the Bid].
Signature of the person named above [insert signature of person whose name and capacity
are shown above].
Date signed [insert date of signing] day of [insert month], [insert year].
* In the case of the Bid submitted by JV/Consortium specify the name of the JV/Consortium
as Bidder.
** Person signing the Bid shall have the Power of Attorney given by the Bidder to be
attached with the Bid.
Page 4 of 120
Letter of Price Bid (Option A)

[To be submitted on Bidder’s letter head]
Date: …………………………………….
and MAHSR-P-4(Y)
To:
Managing Director
2nd Floor, Asia Bhawan, Road No 205
Sector-9, Dwarka
New Delhi - 110077, India.

2) We offer to execute in conformity with the Bidding Documents and Technical Bid
the following Work case(s): (mark  as the Bidder intends)
 Case 1: For one package only, however, Bidder shall submit single Technical
Bid and separate Price Bid for both P-4(X) and P-4(Y) packages, without any
preference.
Or
preference
3) The total price of our Bid*1, excluding any discounts offered in item (4) below is:
[insert the total price of the Bid in words and figures, indicating the various
amounts and the respective currencies below in figures and words];
i) For P-4(X)
Local Currency: Indian Rupee:……………………..(In Words:………………..)

Foreign Currency: Japanese Yen:…………………..(In Words:………………..)
Page 5 of 120
Foreign Currency: United States Dollar (USD):...…(In Words:………………..)

Foreign Currency: European Euro:………………....(In Words:………………..)
ii) For P-4(Y)
Local Currency: Indian Rupee:……………………..(In Words:………………..)

Foreign Currency: Japanese Yen:…………………..(In Words:………………..)
Foreign Currency: United States Dollar (USD):...…(In Words:………………..)
Foreign Currency: European Euro:………………....(In Words:………………..)
4) The discounts*2 offered and the methodology for their application are:
The discounts offered are:
(i) The discount for P-4(X):………..% (In Words:…………percent)
(ii) The discount for P-4(Y):………..% (In Words:…………percent)
The exact method of calculations to determine the net price after application of
discounts is shown below: [specify in detail the method that shall be used to apply
the discounts];
5) Our Bid shall be valid for a period of one hundred and eighty (180) days from the
date fixed for the Bid submission deadline in accordance with the Bidding
Documents, and it shall remain binding upon us and may be accepted at any time
before the expiration of that period;
6) If our Bid is accepted, we commit to obtain a Performance Security in accordance
with the Bidding Documents;
7) We understand that this Bid, together with your written acceptance thereof included
in your Letter of Acceptance, shall constitute a binding contract between us, until a
formal contract is prepared and executed; and
8) We understand that you are not bound to accept the lowest evaluated Bid or any
other Bid that you may receive.
Name of the Bidder*[insert complete name of Bidder Submitting the Bid].
Name of the person duly authorized to sign the Bid on behalf of the Bidder**[insert
are shown above].
Date signed [insert date of signing] day of [insert month], [insert year]
Page 6 of 120
* In the case of the Bid submitted by Joint Venture (JV)/Consortium specify the name of
the JV/Consortium as Bidder
** Person signing the Bid shall have the power of attorney given by the Bidder to be attached
with the Bid.
Note:
*1; Bid Price shall be submitted for both the Packages P-4(X) and P-4(Y). Further, wording
and figures shall be filled in with indelible ink or be printed.
*2; Discount shall not apply for Provisional Sums.
Page 7 of 120
Letter of Price Bid (Option B)

[To be submitted on Bidder’s letter head]
Date: …………………………………….
and MAHSR-P-4(Y)
To:
Managing Director
2nd Floor, Asia Bhawan, Road No 205
Sector-9, Dwarka
New Delhi - 110077, India.

2) We offer to execute in conformity with the Bidding Documents and Technical Bid
for the Works of Combined P-4(X) and P-4(Y).
3) The base price for Combined P-4(X) and P-4(Y) shall be worked out as per the
amount quoted in Item No. 3 [summation of (i) and (ii)] including discounts, if any,
mentioned in Item No. 4 of Letter of Price Bid (Option A).
4) The discounts*1 offered and the methodology for their application are:
The additional discount for Combined Package is ……..% (In
Words:…………percent)
The exact method of calculations to determine the net price after application of
discount is shown below: [specify in detail the method that shall be used to apply
the discount];
5) Our Bid shall be valid for a period of one hundred and eighty (180) days from the
date fixed for the Bid submission deadline in accordance with the Bidding
Documents, and it shall remain binding upon us and may be accepted at any time
before the expiration of that period;
6) If our Bid is accepted, we commit to obtain a Performance Security in accordance
Page 8 of 120
with the Bidding Documents;

7) We understand that this Bid, together with your written acceptance thereof included
in your Letter of Acceptance, shall constitute a binding contract between us, until a
formal contract is prepared and executed; and
8) We understand that you are not bound to accept the lowest evaluated Bid or any
other Bid that you may receive.
Name of the Bidder*[insert complete name of Bidder Submitting the Bid].
Name of the person duly authorized to sign the Bid on behalf of the Bidder**[insert
are shown above].
Date signed [insert date of signing] day of [insert month], [insert year]
* In the case of the Bid submitted by Joint Venture (JV)/Consortium specify the name of
the JV/Consortium as Bidder
** Person signing the Bid shall have the power of attorney given by the Bidder to be attached
with the Bid.
Note:
*1; Discount shall not apply for Provisional Sums.
Page 9 of 120
1.0. Schedules
1.1 Schedule of Adjustment Data

1.2. Schedule of Payment Currencies for P-4(X)
1.3 Schedule of Payment Currencies for P-4(Y)
Page 10 of 120
Schedule of Adjustment Data
Table A and Table B provide the coefficients /details to be used for local and foreign
currency respectively.
Table A. Local Currency
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

Index Index Source of index Base Bidder’s Bidder’s Prescribed
code description Value related Proposed Weightage
and currency Weightage by
Date Amount Employer
(INR)
A Non-Adjustable - - ** 0.15 A: 0.15

All India Consumer
Price Index for
Industrial Workers –
CPI (IW) by the Bidder
B Labour Labour Bureau, to ** * B: 0.22-0.27
Ministry of Labour, specify
Government of India.
(Base Year 2001 =
100)
Bidder
Steel
C to ** * C: 0.42-0.47
(1.3.14.5) #
specify
All India Wholesale
Price Index by the Bidder
Fuel & Power
D Reserve Bank of India. to ** * D: 0.04-0.08
(1.2)#
(Base Year 2011-12 = specify
100)
Plant & Bidder
E Equipment to ** * E: 0.08-0.12
(1.3.18)# specify
Total ** 1.00
Notes:
a) Source of Index
For “Labour”: All India Consumer Price Index for Industrial Workers – CPI (IW) by
the Labour Bureau, Ministry of Labour, Government of India. (Base Year 2001 = 100)
#
For “Index code C to E”: Commodities index numbers as per All India Wholesale Price
Index by the Reserve Bank of India. (Base Year 2011-12 = 100).
Page 11 of 120
b) Base value and date:

The base value for each index from the above-mentioned source shall be as the twenty-
eight (28) days prior to the Bid submission deadline. The Bidder shall indicate the same
in Column (4).
c) Bidder’s Proposed Weightage:

The Bidder shall specify amount and the proposed weightage in each box marked “**”
and “*”, respectively, of Columns (5) within the ranges given by the Employer in
Column (6), so that the total weightage equals 1.00.
Page 12 of 120
Table B. Foreign Currency (FC)
Foreign Currency (FC) _____________[Insert name of currency; if the Bidder wishes

to quote in more than one foreign currency then this table should be repeated for each
foreign currency].
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
Index Index Source of Base value Bidder’s Bidder’s Prescribed

code description index and Date related Proposed Weightage
currency Weightage by
Amount Employer
(FC)
A Non- - - ** 0.20 A: 0.20
Adjustable
B Labour Bidder Bidder ** * B: 0.28-
to to 0.32
specify specify
C Petroleum Bidder Bidder ** * C: 0.13-
& Coal to to 0.15
product specify specify
D Iron & Steel Bidder Bidder ** * D: 0.28-
to to 0.32
specify specify
E Electric Bidder Bidder ** * E: 0.04-
power, Gas to to 0.06
& Water specify specify
Total ** 1.00
Notes:
a) Source of Index:
(1) For Japan:
Labour: “Design wage rates for public works” issued by the Ministry of Land,
Infrastructure, Transport and Tourism (refer to HP address:
www.mlit.go.jp/report/press/totikensangyo14_hh_000730.html).
Materials, Plant and Contractor’s Equipment: The “Corporate Goods Price
Index, Producer Price Index” published by the Bank of Japan.
(2) For currency other than Japan and India:

The Bidder shall provide the indices with the relevant source.
Page 13 of 120
b) Base value and date:

The base value for each index from the above-mentioned source shall be as on the
twenty-eight (28) days prior to the Bid submission deadline. Bidder shall indicate
the same in Column (4).
c) Bidder’s Proposed Weightage:

The Bidders shall specify the amount and proposed weightage in each box marked
**” and “*”, respectively, of Columns (5), within the ranges given by the Employer
in Column (6), so that the total weightage equals 1.00.
Page 14 of 120
Schedule of Payment Currencies for P-4(X)
A B C D
Name of Percentage of
Rate of Net Bid Price
Payment Amount Local Currency
Exchange (NBP)
Currency of Equivalent
Currency to Local 100xC
C=AxB
Currency
NBP
Local currency
Indian Rupee 1.00
(INR)
Foreign currency
Japanese Yen
(JPY)
Foreign currency
United States
Dollar
(USD)
Foreign currency
European Euro
(EUR)
Net Bid Price
(NBP) 100.00
Bill 1 to 5
Provisional Sums
including
Provisional Sum
1.00
for Contingency
Allowance in
Local Currency
BID PRICE
Note:
The Bidder is required to propose and submit this schedule as a part of the Bid. The rates of
exchange shall be the reference rate twenty-eight (28) days prior to the deadline for
submission of Bids published by the source specified in the BDS, ITB 34.1.
Page 15 of 120
Schedule of Payment Currencies for P-4(Y)
A B C D
Name of Percentage of
Rate of Net Bid Price
Payment Amount Local Currency
Exchange (NBP)
Currency of Equivalent
Currency to Local 100xC
C=AxB
Currency
NBP
Local currency
Indian Rupee 1.00
(INR)
Foreign currency
Japanese Yen
(JPY)
Foreign currency
United States
Dollar
(USD)
Foreign currency
European Euro
(EUR)
Net Bid Price
(NBP) 100.00
Bill 1 to 5
Provisional Sums
including
Provisional Sum
1.00
for Contingency
Allowance in
Local Currency
BID PRICE
Note:
The Bidder is required to propose and submit this schedule as a part of the Bid. The rates of
exchange shall be the reference rate twenty-eight (28) days prior to the deadline for
submission of Bids published by the source specified in the BDS, ITB 34.1.
Page 16 of 120
2.0. Bills of Quantities
Preamble
(1) The Bills of Quantities (BOQ) shall be read in conjunction with the Instructions
to Bidders, the General Conditions, the Particular Conditions, the Works
Requirements-General Specification (GS), Works Requirements- Technical
Specifications (TS), Drawings, and the Addenda (if any).
(2) There are two different BOQs, first for P-4(X) and second for P-4(Y). The Bidder
shall quote the rates in both the BOQs.
(3) The quantities given in the Bills of Quantities are estimated and provisional and
are given to provide a common basis for bidding. The basis of payment will be
the actual quantities of work ordered and carried out, as measured by the
Contractor and verified by the Engineer and valued at the rates and prices quoted
in the priced Bills of Quantities, where applicable, or otherwise at such rates and
prices as the Engineer may fix within the terms of the Contract.
(4) The rates and prices quoted in the Bill of Quantities are for completed and
finished items of the work in all respects. The rates and prices shall, except insofar
as it is otherwise provided under the Contract, be deemed to have included, all
Contractor’s Equipment, tools, machinery, labour, supervision, materials,
transportation, handling, storage, sampling, testing, fuel, oil, consumables,
electric power, water, handling, dewatering, all temporary works, staging, form
works and false works, stacking, construction of temporary store and buildings,
fencing, watering, lighting, erection, maintenance, night working, inspection
facilities, safety measures at work site/casting yard for workmen and road users,
preparation of design and drawings pertaining to the shop drawings / temporary
works, stacking yard etc., including all incidental works to each BOQ item. The
quoted rates and prices are also deemed to include the establishment and overhead
charges, labour camps, insurance cost for labour and works, contractor’s profit,
all taxes, royalties, duties, cess, Octroi, GST and other levies and charges together
with all general risks, liabilities and obligation set out or implied in the Contract
and including remedy of any defect during the Defect Notification Period. The
Contractor will be free to avail input tax credits under GST as per the prevailing
rules and input tax credit shall be deemed to have been considered in the Quoted
Price in the Price Schedules. The successful bidder shall be required to give
details of all taxes and duties incorporated in the Bid Price.
(5) The Contractor shall be responsible to take all precautions at its own cost to ensure
the safety of the public, using the ways/facilities etc., which were otherwise
available before the Contractor taking up the works, near the work-site and shall
post such look out men as may in the opinion of the Engineer be required to
comply with regulations appertaining to the work. Relevant provisions in GS and
TS may please be referred.
Page 17 of 120
(6) All necessary Safety, Health and Environment (SHE) measures as detailed in GS
and TS shall be provided by the Contractor. No separate payment shall be made,
and the prices quoted include the same.
(7) General directions and descriptions of work and materials are not necessarily
repeated nor summarized in the Bills of Quantities. References to the relevant
sections of the Contract documentation shall be made before entering prices
against each item in the Bills of Quantities.
(8) The Employer shall indicate in the Summary of Provisional Sums an amount
equivalent to one-half of the Employer’s estimate of the cost of the Dispute Board
(DB) for payments to the Contractor of the Employer’s share of the payments to
the DB member(s). Contractor’s overheads, profit, etc., shall not be included in
the Provisional Sum for the cost of the DB.
(9) Provisional Sums included and so designated in the Bill of Quantities shall be
expended in whole or in part at the directions and discretions of the Engineer, in
accordance with Sub-Clause 13.5 and Sub-Clause 13.6 of the General Conditions.
(10) The method of measurement of completed work for payment shall be in
accordance with Works Requirements – GS, Works Requirements –TS and the
Drawings.
(11) A rate or price shall be entered against each Item in the Bills of Quantities,
whether the quantities are stated or not. The cost of Items against which the
Contractor has failed to enter a rate or price shall be deemed to be covered in the
total cost quoted.
(12) The whole cost of complying with the provisions of the Contract shall be included
in the Items provided in the priced Bills of Quantities, and where no Items are
provided, the cost shall be deemed to be distributed among the rates and prices
entered for the related Items of Work.
(13) The notes under BOQ items are not exhaustive, and hence the Contractor shall be
required to execute all necessary works required for the completion of the
concerned BOQ item in accordance with the Contract.
(14) The rates and prices quoted in the Bill of Quantities shall be filled in with indelible
ink or be printed.
Daywork
2.2.1. General
(1) Reference should be made to Sub-Clause 13.6 of the General Conditions. Work shall
not be executed on a Daywork basis without written order of the Engineer. Bidders
shall enter basic rates for Daywork items in the Schedules, which rates shall apply
to any quantity of Daywork ordered by the Engineer.
Page 18 of 120
(2) Nominal quantities have been indicated against each item of Daywork, and the
extended total for Daywork shall be carried forward as a Provisional Sum to the
Summary Total Bid Amount. Unless otherwise adjusted, payments for Daywork
shall be subject to price adjustment in accordance with the provisions in the
Conditions of Contract.
(3) The basic rates applied to Daywork items will be stated and payable in local currency
only.
2.2.2. Daywork Labour
1) In calculating payments due to the Contractor for the execution of Daywork, the
hours for labour will be reckoned from the time of arrival of the labour at the job
site to execute the particular item of Daywork to the time of departure from the job
site, but excluding meal breaks and rest periods. Only the time of classes of labour
directly doing work ordered by the Engineer and competent to perform such work
will be measured. The time of gangers (charge hands) actually doing work with
the gangs will also be measured but not the time of foremen or other supervisory
personnel.
2) The Contractor shall be entitled to payment in respect of the total time that labour
is employed on Daywork, calculated at the rates entered by him in Bill No. 6 (1)
Schedule of Daywork Rates: Labour. The rates for labour shall be deemed to cover
all the costs to the Contractor, including (but not limited to) the amount of wages
paid to such labour, transportation time, overtime, subsistence allowances, and any
sums paid to or on behalf of such labour for social benefits in accordance with the
law of India, as well as Contractor’s profit, overheads, superintendence, liabilities,
and insurances and allowances to labour, timekeeping, and clerical and office work,
the use of consumable stores, water, lighting, and power; the use and repair of
staging, scaffolding, workshops, and stores, portable power tools, manual plant,
and tools; supervision by the Contractor’s staff, foremen, and other supervisory
personnel; and charges incidental to the foregoing.
2.2.3. Daywork Materials
(1) The Contractor shall be entitled to payment in respect of materials used for Daywork
(except for materials for which the cost is included in the rate for the labour costs as
detailed heretofore), at the rates entered by him in Bill No.6 (2) Schedule of
Daywork Rates: Materials, and shall be deemed to include all overhead charges and
profit.
(2) The rates for materials shall be deemed to cover all the costs to the Contractor,
including the invoiced price, freight, insurance, handling expenses, damages, losses,
etc., and shall provide for delivery to store for stockpiling at the Site, and from there
to the place where it is to be used in accordance with the terms for Labour and
Contractor’s Equipment in this schedule.
Page 19 of 120
2.2.4. Daywork Contractor’s Equipment
(1) The Contractor shall be entitled to payments in respect of Contractor’s Equipment

already on Site and employed on Daywork at the rental rates entered by them in Bill
No.6 (3) Schedule of Daywork Rates: Contractor’s Equipment. The said rates shall
be deemed to include due and complete allowance for depreciation, interest,
indemnity, and insurance, repairs, maintenance, supplies, fuel, lubricants, and other
consumables, and all overhead, profit, and administrative costs related to the use of
such equipment. The cost of drivers, operators, and assistants will not be paid
separately as these are included in rental rates entered in Bill No.6 (3) Schedule of
Daywork Rates: Contractor’s Equipment.
(2) In calculating the payment due to the Contractor for Contractor’s Equipment
employed on Daywork, only the actual number of working hours on Site will be
eligible for payment.
Provisional Sums
Provisional Sums shall be used as per Sub-Clause 13.5 of the General Conditions.
Lump-sum rates break-down:
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, within fifty-six (56) days after the
receipt of the Letter of Acceptance (LOA), stage-payment schedule for all lump-
sum (LS) items quoted in the (BOQ) alongwith break-down, which the Contractor
prefers to be paid, subject to the approval of the Engineer.
Measurement and Payment
(1) As already stated under 2.1, the prices and rates quoted shall be comprehensive and
must include for complying in all respects with the Bill of Quantities, Instruction to
Bidders, the General Conditions, the Particular Conditions, Specifications and
Drawings and for all matters and things necessary for the proper construction,
completion, and making good of any defect in the whole of the Works.
(2) No claims for additional payment will be allowed for any error or misunderstanding
by the Contractor of the work involved.
(3) The measurement shall be made as per BOQ, TS, GS, the Drawings and other
relevant provisions of the Contract.
(4) Payment shall be made as per Clause 14 of the GC, as modified under PC (Section
VII and VIII of the Contract).
Page 20 of 120
Procedure for Payment
(1) The Employer shall make interim payments to the Contractor in accordance with the
provisions of Sub-Clause 14.7 of the General Conditions, as certified by the
Engineer on the basis of the progress achieved for the items of works and stages of
the works.
(2) The Contractor shall base its claim for interim payment in accordance with Sub-
Clause 14.3 of the General Conditions for each stage for various items of work on
the basis of actual progress of work executed till the end of the month for which the
payment is claimed in relation to the Contractor’s total executed quantity, supported
with documents and updated programme in accordance with the Works
Requirements.
(3) The Employer may carry out necessary test checks either directly or through an
independent agency, of the Works done by the Contractor for which the payment
has been accepted and certified by the Engineer. The payment shall depend upon the
outcome of such test checks.
(4) A format of the Contractor’s application for payment shall be agreed between the
Engineer and Contractor and approved by the Employer.
(5) All necessary supplementary details to support the progress claim shall be included
with the application for payment. Sketches, drawings, approvals, calculations, test
reports etc., shall accompany the application for payment to be substantiated and
certified by the Engineer and submitted to the Employer.
(6) Even if no work is executed during the month or the Contractor does not choose to
issue an application for payment, a ‘NIL’ application shall be submitted.
(7) Employer may deploy external agencies, other than the Engineer, to cross check the
work done by the Contractor. If at a later stage it is discovered that excess payment
has been released to the Contractor or the work is found to be defective, then suitable
recoveries would be effected from the first available bill of the Contractor.
Methodology of claiming payment
(1) The Contractor shall prepare his monthly application for payment in the agreed
format in six hard copies and one soft copy. This shall be accompanied by
supplementary details in accordance with Sub-Clause 14.3 of the General
Conditions. All hard copies shall bear the original signatures of the Contractor’s
Representative and be submitted to the Engineer.
(2) If these are found in order, in accordance with Sub-Clause 14.6 of the General
Conditions, then the Engineer shall forward two certified copies of the application
along with certified supplementary details to the Employer, with his
recommendation for payment, otherwise all documents shall be returned with
directions to the Contractor for rectification and resubmission.
Page 21 of 120
Work Items
Each of three different BOQs mentioned in item (2) of Sub-Clause 2.1 of this Bills
of Quantities contain the following Bills, which have been grouped according to
the nature or timing of the work:
Bill No. 1 – General Items;
Bill No. 2 – Providing Steel Materials and Bearings;
Bill No. 3 – Fabrication, Check-assembly, Corrosion protection and Transportation
of superstructure;
Bill No. 4 – Daywork (Provisional Sum);
Bill No. 5 – Specified Provisional Sums; and
Bill No. 6 – Grand Summary.
Bidders shall price the Bills of Quantities in the currency or currencies specified in
the Instructions to Bidders.
Page 22 of 120
(A) Package No. P-4(X) [Bridge GADs 66, 69, 2, 58, 8, 1134, C5-2, C5-3,
25, 28, 1967, 32, 42 and Laundry]
The Bills of Quantities contain the following Bills, which have been grouped
according to the nature or timing of the work:
of superstructure;
Page 23 of 120
2.8.1.A. Bill No. 1: General Items
Rate Amount
Item Local Foreign Foreign Foreign Local Foreign Foreign Foreign
Description Unit Quantity
no. – - – – – - – –
INR JPY USD EUR INR JPY USD EUR
101 Providing Site Offices (at
each workshop) along
with furnishing for the
Employer’s and
Engineer’s Personnel
including dismantling of LS 1
Site Office and
restoration to original
condition etc., all
complete as per the
Drawings, GS and TS.
Notes: Stage-payment schedule shall be based on Sub-Clause 2.4 of the Preamble, as agreed to by the Engineer.
102 Housekeeping &
Maintenance expenses
for the Site Offices (at Month
36
each workshop) of the s
Employer’s and
Engineer’s Personnel, all
Page 24 of 120
Rate Amount
no. – - – – – - – –
complete as per the
Total for Bill No. 1
(Carried forward to Grand Summary, p. 40)
Page 25 of 120
2.8.2.A. Bill No. 2: Providing Steel Materials and Bearings
Rate Amount
no. – - – – – - – –
201 Providing Structural
Steel for fabrication of
super structure and
accessories including
all arrangements,
transportation, testing,
loading, unloading,
handling, storage, etc.,
all complete as per
201(a) Steel Plate (E250) MT 11,594
201(b) Steel Plate (E350) MT 23,696
201(c) Rolled section (E250) MT 852
201(d) Steel shuttering (E250) MT 2,290
Page 26 of 120
Rate Amount
no. – - – – – - – –
201(e) Flat bar, Round bar,
B.N, and Misc. metal MT 7
(E250)
Note:
1) Stage Payment for this item shall be as below:
a) On receipt of material at fabrication workshop: 70% of invoice quantity @ 90% of quoted rate.
b) On completion of fabrication of super-structure for completed quantity: Balance 10% of the quoted rate for the fabricated
quantity.
c) Adjustment for the balance payment for total fabricated quantity shall be made based on reconciliation as approved by
the Engineer.
2) Payment for item no. 201 shall be made as per Sub-Clause 14.7, Part B - Specific Provisions of Particular Conditions.
202 Providing Bearings

along with necessary
arrangements, testing,
transportation to
fabrication-workshop
and then from
to the bridge-sites/site-
delivery-yards, loading,
Page 27 of 120
Rate Amount
no. – - – – – - – –
unloading, handling,
duties (if any),
insurance against loss
or damage in transit,
storage, etc., all
complete as per
202(a) For bridge at GAD 66 Set 1
202(b) For bridge at GAD 69 Set 1
202(c) For bridge at GAD 2 Set 1
202(d) For bridge at GAD 58 Set 1
202(e) For bridge at GAD 8 Set 1
202(f) For bridge at GAD Set 1

1134
202(g) For bridge at GAD C5- Set 1
2
Page 28 of 120
Rate Amount
no. – - – – – - – –
202(h) For bridge at GAD C5- Set 1
3
202(i) For bridge at GAD 25 Set 1
202(j) For bridge at GAD 28 Set 1
202(k) For bridge at GAD Set 1
1967
202(l) For bridge at GAD 32 Set 1
202(m) For bridge at GAD 42 Set 1
202(n) For bridge at GAD Set 1
Laundry
Note:
1) All Bearings required for a bridge (one GAD), as per the Drawing, shall constitute one set.
2) Stage Payment for this item, as below:
a) On receipt of full set of bearings for a GAD at fabrication workshop: 80%.
b) On completion of check assembly, defined as per the item no 302: 10%.
c) On completion of Transportation activity: 10%.

Page 29 of 120
2.8.3.A. Bill No. 3: Fabrication, Check-assembly, Corrosion protection and Transportation of Super-structure
Rate Amount
Local Foreign Foreign Foreign Local Foreign Foreign Foreign
Item no. Description Unit Quantity
– - – – – - – –
301 Fabrication, Transportation
and unloading of super
structure and accessories.
Fabrication including Test

fabrication (using partial
Mock-ups), supply, fixing
and welding of stud shear
connector, and all tools,
equipment, labour, MT 38,439
supervision, management,
services, and incidentals
necessary for the
fabrication;
Transportation and
unloading including
marking, packaging,
support for member,
loading, proper securing
Page 30 of 120
Rate Amount
– - – – – - – –
inside the trailer, insurance
against loss or damage in
transit, unloading at bridge-
site/site-delivery-yards,
stacking with all
arrangements, required
plant and machinery,
handling, etc.;
all complete as per the

Note:
1) The item shall be paid as per total weights in MT as per the Drawings with no deduction for the bolt holes. Weight of welding
and shear stud connectors shall not be added.
2) In addition to the BOQ preamble, the rate shall be inclusive for the following items. No additional payment shall be made on
this account.
a) Successful test fabrication (using partial Mock-ups).
b) Wastage of material, shear stud connectors and welding consumables.
c) Construction of temporary road / strengthening of roads for plying of trailers carrying the fabricated material up to bridge-
sites/site-delivery-yards.
Page 31 of 120
Rate Amount
– - – – – - – –
d) Repair of structural steelwork for super structure and accessories, caused during handling at fabrication workshop and
transportation.
a) On completion of fabrication for super-structure for completed quantity: 75%.
302 Check-assembly of all spans

and all components
(excluding shuttering and
accessories as defined in
TS) including assembly of
bearing and sole plate with
MT 35,297
all arrangements required
handling, etc., all complete
as per the Drawings, GS
and TS.
Page 32 of 120
Rate Amount
– - – – – - – –
Note:
1) The item shall be paid as per total weights in MT as per the Drawings with no deduction for the bolt holes. Weight of welding,
shear stud connector and bearing shall not be added. In case of continuous span girders, check-assembly if done in stages, no
additional payment will be made for segments required to be check-assembled to achieve the continuous behaviour of the girder.
2) The item shall be payable only after successful completion of Check-assembly as described in TS.
3) For Item no. 302 in addition to the BOQ preamble, the rate shall also include full compensation for temporary works required
for Check-assembly including provision of bolts / drifts along with handling of fabricated members and bearings, temporary
supports, testing equipment and sensors and use of plant and machinery such as lifting cranes, steel wire ropes, winch crabs
etc. No separate payment for the above items shall be made.
303 Corrosion protection

(painting, metallizing and
galvanizing) for super
structure and accessories
including surface
preparation, testing and MT 38,439
repair of corrosion
protection along with
providing of materials and
other accessories with all
Page 33 of 120
Rate Amount
– - – – – - – –
and TS.
Page 34 of 120
2.8.4.A. Bill No. 4: Daywork Schedule (Provisional Sum)
Dayworks Summary
Amount
Description
Local
(1) Total for Daywork: Labour
(2) Total for Daywork: Materials
(3) Total for Daywork: Contractor’s Equipment
Total for Daywork (Provisional Sum) [1+2+3]
Page 35 of 120
(1) Schedule of Daywork Rates: Labour
Extended
Rate
Item Nominal amount
Description Unit
No. Quantity Local- Local-
INR INR
D100 Fitter Day 80
D101 Labourer Day 80
D102 Steel fixer Day 80
D103 Welder Day 80
D104 Painter Day 80
D105 Electrician Day 80
D106 Supervisor Day 80
D107 NDT Inspector Day 80
D108 Any other technician Day 80
Subtotal
Total Daywork for Labour
(Carried forward to Dayworks, p. 35)
Page 36 of 120
(2) Schedule of Daywork Rates: Materials
Extended
Rate
amount
Item Nominal
Description Unit
INR INR
D200 Structural Steel (E250) MT 3

D202 Reinforcement Steel Fe-500D MT 5
D203 Paint Kg 5
D204 Aluminium spray metallization Kg 3
D205 Galvanization Sqm 50
D206 Welding Consumables MT 10
D207 TTHS Bolt, Nut and Washer Nos 10
D208 Shear stud/Shear connector Nos 50
D209 Flat bar, Round bar, Bolt, Nut, Washer MT 30
and Misc. metal
Subtotal
Total Daywork for Materials
Page 37 of 120
(3) Schedule of Daywork Rates: Contractor’s Equipment
Extended
Rate
Item Nominal amount
Description Unit
INR INR
D300 Hydra Crane 15ton Day 10
D301 Generator 25kVA Day 10
D302 Air Compressor 170 cfm Day 10
D303 Welding Machine 250A Day 10
D304 CNC / NC Drilling Machine Day 1
D305 CNC / NC Cutting Machine Day 1
D306 Welding Machine Day 3
D307 Distortion Correction Machine Day 1
D308 Bevelling Machine Day 1
D309 Overhead traveling crane Day 2
D310 Jib Crane Day 1
D311 Blasting House Day 1
D312 Blasting Machine Day 2
D313 Painting House Day 1
D314 Airless Spray Device Day 2
(Painting Machine)
Total Daywork for Contractor’s Equipment
Page 38 of 120
2.8.5.A. Bill No. 5: Specified Provisional Sums
Amount
Item
Bill No. Description Local – Foreign- Foreign – Foreign –
No.
INR JPY USD EUR
Cost of DB* 46,620,000

Total for Specified Provisional Sums 46,620,000
Provisional Sums included and so designated in the Bill of Quantities shall be expended in whole or in
part at the directions of the Engineer, except for the provisional sum for the cost of the DB, which
requires no prior instruction of the Engineer, in accordance with Sub-Clause 13.5 and Clause 13.6 of
the General Conditions.
[*One-half of the Employer’s cost estimates of the Dispute Board shall be included in the
Provisional Sums. Contractor’s overheads and profits shall not be included in this amount.]
Page 39 of 120
2.8.6.A. Bill No. 6: Grand Summary
Amount Total
Amount
Local – Foreign- Foreign – Foreign –
General Summary Page Equivalent
INR JPY USD EUR
in Local
Currency
Bill No. 1: General Items
Bill No. 2: Providing Steel
Materials and Bearings
Bill No. 3: Fabrication and
Corrosion protection of
Structural Steel
Subtotal of Bills (A)
Bill 4: Day Work (B)
(Provisional Sum)
Bill 5: Specified (C) 46,620,000
Provisional Sums
Add Provisional Sum for (D) 150,000,000
Contingency Allowance
Bid Price (A+B+C+D) (E)
(Carried forward to Form
of Bid)
(Total in words and in figures ……………………………………………………………)

The above Bid Price is inclusive of all taxes, royalties and duties.
Bidder’s Representative:
Signature: ………………………..
Name: ……………………………
Position: ………………………….
Date: ……………………………..
Company: ………………………..
Company stamp: …………………
Page 40 of 120
(B) Package No. P-4(Y) [ Bridge GADs 65, 1, 57, 67, 3, 6, 68, 12, 61, 14, 15,
62, C5-1, 27, 31, 37, 2357-3, 54&55 and Diesel Shed]
The Bills of Quantities contain the following Bills, which have been grouped
according to the nature or timing of the work:
of superstructure;
Page 41 of 120
2.8.1.B. Bill No. 1: General Items
Rate Amount
no. – - – – – - – –
101 Providing Site Offices (at
each workshop) along
with furnishing for the
Employer’s and
Engineer’s Personnel
including dismantling of LS 1
Site Office and
restoration to original
condition etc., all
complete as per the
Notes: Stage-payment schedule shall be based on Sub-Clause 2.4 of the Preamble, as agreed to by the Engineer.
102 Housekeeping &
Maintenance expenses
for the Site Offices (at Month
36
each workshop) of the s
Employer’s and
Engineer’s Personnel, all
Page 42 of 120
Rate Amount
no. – - – – – - – –
complete as per the
Page 43 of 120
2.8.2.B. Bill No. 2: Providing Steel Materials and Bearings
Rate Amount
no. – - – – – - – –
201 Providing Structural
Steel for fabrication of
super structure and
accessories including
all arrangements,
transportation, testing,
loading, unloading,
handling, storage, etc.,
all complete as per
201(a) Steel Plate (E250) MT 12,176
201(b) Steel Plate (E350) MT 23,009
201(c) Rolled section (E250) MT 827
201(d) Steel shuttering (E250) MT 2,461
Page 44 of 120
Rate Amount
no. – - – – – - – –
201(e) Flat bar, Round bar,
B.N, and Misc. metal MT 7
(E250)
Note:
1) Stage Payment for this item shall be as below:
a) On receipt of material at fabrication workshop: 70% of invoice quantity @ 90% of quoted rate.
b) On completion of fabrication of super-structure for completed quantity: Balance 10% of the quoted rate for the fabricated
quantity.
c) Adjustment for the balance payment for total fabricated quantity shall be made based on reconciliation as approved by the
Engineer.
2) Payment for item no. 201 shall be made as per Sub-Clause 14.7, Part B - Specific Provisions of Particular Conditions.
202 Providing Bearings

along with necessary
arrangements, testing,
transportation to
and then from
to the bridge-sites/site-
Page 45 of 120
Rate Amount
no. – - – – – - – –
delivery-yards, loading,
unloading, handling,
duties (if any),
insurance against loss
or damage in transit,
storage, handling, etc.,
all complete as per
202(a) For bridge at GAD 65 Set 1
202(b) For bridge at GAD 1 Set 1
202(c) For bridge at GAD 57 Set 1
202(d) For bridge at GAD 67 Set 1
202(e) For bridge at GAD 3 Set 1
202(f) For bridge at GAD 6 Set 1
202(g) For bridge at GAD 68 Set 1
Page 46 of 120
Rate Amount
no. – - – – – - – –
202(h) For bridge at GAD 12 Set 1
202(i) For bridge at GAD 61 Set 1
202(j) For bridge at GAD 14 Set 1
202(k) For bridge at GAD 15 Set 1
202(l) For bridge at GAD 62 Set 1
202(m For bridge at GAD C5- 1

Set
) 1
202(n) For bridge at GAD 27 Set 1
202(o) For bridge at GAD 31 Set 1
202(p) For bridge at GAD 37 Set 1
202(q) For bridge at GAD 1

Set
2357-3
Page 47 of 120
Rate Amount
no. – - – – – - – –
202(r) For bridge at GAD 1

Set
54&55
202(s) For bridge at GAD 1

Set
Diesel Shed
Note:
1) All Bearings required for a bridge (one GAD), as per the Drawing, shall constitute one set.
a) On receipt of full set of bearings for a GAD at fabrication workshop: 80%
Page 48 of 120
2.8.3.B. Bill No. 3: Fabrication, Check-assembly, Corrosion protection and Transportation of Super-structure
Rate Amount
– - – – – - – –
301 Fabrication, Transportation
and unloading of super
structure and accessories.
Fabrication including Test

fabrication (using partial
Mock-ups), supply, fixing
and welding of stud shear
connector, and all tools,
equipment, labour, MT 38,480
supervision, management,
services, and incidentals
necessary for the
fabrication;
Transportation and
unloading including
marking, packaging,
support for member,
loading, proper securing
Page 49 of 120
Rate Amount
– - – – – - – –
inside the trailer, insurance
against loss or damage in
transit, unloading at bridge-
site/site-delivery-yards,
stacking with all
handling, etc.;
all complete as per the

Note:
1) The item shall be paid as per total weights in MT as per the Drawings with no deduction for the bolt holes. Weight of welding
and shear stud connectors shall not be added.
2) In addition to the BOQ preamble, the rate shall be inclusive for the following items. No additional payment shall be made on
this account.
a) Successful test fabrication (using partial Mock-ups).
b) Wastage of material, shear stud connectors and welding consumables.
c) Construction of temporary road / strengthening of roads for plying of trailers carrying the fabricated material up to bridge-
Page 50 of 120
Rate Amount
– - – – – - – –
d) Repair of structural steelwork for super structure and accessories, caused during handling at fabrication workshop and
transportation.
a) On completion of fabrication for super-structure for completed quantity: 75%.
302 Check-assembly of all spans

and all components
(excluding shuttering and
accessories as defined in
TS) including assembly of
bearing and sole plate with MT 35,192
all arrangements required
and TS.
Note:
1) The item shall be paid as per total weights in MT as per the Drawings with no deduction for the bolt holes. Weight of welding,
Page 51 of 120
Rate Amount
– - – – – - – –
shear stud connectors and bearing shall not be added. In case of continuous span girders, check-assembly if done in stages, no
additional payment will be made for segments required to be check-assembled to achieve the continuous behaviour of the girder.
2) The item shall be payable only after successful completion of Check-assembly as described in TS.
3) For Item no. 302 in addition to the BOQ preamble, the rate shall also include full compensation for temporary works required
for Check-assembly including provision of bolts / drifts along with handling of fabricated members and bearings, temporary
supports, testing equipment and sensors and use of plant and machinery such as lifting cranes, steel wire ropes, winch crabs
etc. No separate payment for the above items shall be made.
303 Corrosion protection

(painting, metallizing and
galvanizing) for super
structure and accessories
including surface
preparation, testing and
repair of corrosion MT 38,480
protection along with
providing of materials and
other accessories with all
Page 52 of 120
Rate Amount
– - – – – - – –
and TS.
Page 53 of 120
2.8.4.B. Bill No. 4: Daywork Schedule (Provisional Sum)
Dayworks Summary
Amount
Description
Local
(1) Total for Daywork: Labour
(2) Total for Daywork: Materials
(3) Total for Daywork: Contractor’s Equipment
Total for Daywork (Provisional Sum) [1+2+3]
Page 54 of 120
(1) Schedule of Daywork Rates: Labour
Extended
Rate
Item Nominal amount
Description Unit
INR INR
D100 Ganger Day 80
D101 Labourer Day 80
D102 Steel fixer Day 80
D103 Welder Day 80
D104 Painter Day 80
D105 Electrician Day 80
D106 Supervisor Day 80
D107 NDT Inspector Day 80
D108 Any other technician Day 80
Subtotal
Total Daywork for Labour
Page 55 of 120
(2) Schedule of Daywork Rates: Materials
Extended
Rate
amount
Item Nominal
Description Unit
INR INR

D202 Reinforcement Steel Fe-500D MT 5
D203 Paint Kg 5
D204 Aluminium spray metallization Kg 3
D205 Galvanization Sqm 50
D206 Welding Consumables MT 10
D207 TTHS Bolt, Nut and Washer Nos 10
D208 Shear stud/Shear connector Nos 50
D209 Flat bar, Round bar, Bolt, Nut, Washer MT 30
and Misc. metal
Subtotal
Total Daywork for Materials
Page 56 of 120
(3) Schedule of Daywork Rates: Contractor’s Equipment
Extended
Rate
Item Nominal amount
Description Unit
INR INR
D300 Hydra Crane 15ton Day 10
D301 Generator 25kVA Day 10
D302 Air Compressor 170 cfm Day 10
D303 Welding Machine 250A Day 10
D304 CNC / NC Drilling Machine Day 1
D305 CNC / NC Cutting Machine Day 1
D306 Welding Machine Day 3
D307 Distortion Correction Machine Day 1
D308 Bevelling Machine Day 1
D309 Overhead traveling crane Day 2
D310 Jib Crane Day 1
D311 Blasting House Day 1
D312 Blasting Machine Day 2
D313 Painting House Day 1
D314 Airless Spray Device Day 2
(Painting Machine)
Total Daywork for Contractor’s Equipment
Page 57 of 120
2.8.5.B. Bill No. 5: Specified Provisional Sums
Amount
Item
Bill No. Description Local – Foreign- Foreign – Foreign –
No.
INR JPY USD EUR
Cost of DB* 46,620,000

Total for Specified Provisional Sums 46,620,000
Provisional Sums included and so designated in the Bill of Quantities shall be expended in whole or in
part at the directions of the Engineer, except for the provisional sum for the cost of the DB, which
requires no prior instruction of the Engineer, in accordance with Sub-Clause 13.5 and Clause 13.6 of
the General Conditions.
[*One-half of the Employer’s cost estimates of the Dispute Board shall be included in the
Provisional Sums. Contractor’s overheads and profits shall not be included in this amount.]
Page 58 of 120
2.8.6.B. Bill No. 6: Grand Summary
Amount Total
Amount
Local – Foreign- Foreign – Foreign –
General Summary Page Equivalent
INR JPY USD EUR
in Local
Currency
Bill No. 1: General Items
Bill No. 2: Providing Steel
Materials and Bearings
Bill No. 3: Fabrication and
Corrosion protection of
Structural Steel
Subtotal of Bills (A)
Bill 4: Day Work (B)
(Provisional Sum)
Bill 5: Specified (C) 46,620,000
Provisional Sums
Add Provisional Sum for (D) 150,000,000
Contingency Allowance
Bid Price (A+B+C+D) (E)
(Carried forward to Form
of Bid)
(Total in words and in figures ……………………………………………………………)

The above Bid Price is inclusive of all taxes, royalties and duties.
Name: ……………………………
Position: ………………………….
Date: ……………………………..
Company: ………………………..
Page 59 of 120
3.0. Technical Proposal
3.1 Site Organization

3.2 Method Statement
3.3 Works Execution Programme
3.4 Key Personnel
3.5 Major Plant & Equipment
Page 60 of 120
Site Organisation
It should elaborate the site mobilisation of resources, including site organisation

and manning program. An indicative content is as under:
(1) An Organogram with the organization of site key personnel showing clearly
designated duties and responsibilities.
(2) Chain of command throughout the structure with names of key personnel.
(3) Project Head Office (HO) organization chart of all members of the joint
venture and, if available, that of the sub-contractors as well.
(4) A Manning Program for key personnel and others in bar chart format covering
the contract period in month horizontally and listing the proposed personnel
for the key positions specified in Sub-Clause 4.2.4 of Technical Evaluation in
Section III vertically. The chart shall indicate the proposed months of
assignment of each of these personnel.
Page 61 of 120
Method Statement
The Bidder shall provide here a brief description of how the Works are planned to
be undertaken. The description may indicate how each major construction activity
is to be undertaken and what equipment, and in what numbers, are to be utilized in
carrying out each activity. An indicative content is as under:
1) Earmarking the area of workshop which will be exclusively used for storage,
fabrication, check-assembly, painting and packaging for this project.
2) Main materials (structural steel, connection material (bolts, nuts, welding
consumables), paint, bearings etc.) including but not limited to their
procurement, testing, handling, storage, quality control, and disposal etc.
3) Structural steel fabrication (test-fabrication with mock-up for the Engineers
approval, steel material procurement, NC marking/cutting/drilling, member
assembly/welding, straightening, drilling etc.), and other issues influencing
fabrication (girder’s length, curve, inclination and camber including
adjusting the profile to take into account design camber values).
4) Check Assembly (work-site preparation including any lighting, assembly and
dismantling schedule and sequence, handling of components, temporary
staging design and drawings, plant and machinery employed including their
stand-by arrangement and upkeep, ensuring the required design camber after
assembly and its recording stage wise, and necessary match marking before
dismantling, quality control, inspection and acceptance, reporting formats
and schedule) and any other relevant information.
5) Anti-corrosive work by painting, metallizing and galvanizing, with details of
surface preparation, painting schedule, painting procedure and ITP.
6) Transportation and unloading of the fabricated steel structural members and
other materials including but not limited to proper marking, grouping,
labelling, stacking etc. of the fabricated steel structural members, to various
bridge-sites/site-delivery-yards.
7) Machinery (type, numbers, capacity, their location, mobilization and de-
mobilization schedule of the equipment, measuring devices and their
accuracy etc.)
8) Quality control planning (acceptance criteria, quality control items, methods
and position of quality control, document style of quality control records,
records of construction, etc. along with appropriate testing methods).
Page 62 of 120
Works Execution Programme
It should brief the Construction Program, Quality Assurance/Quality Control

Management Program, Safety Management Program and Environment
Management Program. An indicative content is as under:
(1) The Construction Program may be in the form of a bar chart showing the
relationship and timing of major operation required for construction of the
Works allowing due consideration for climatic and hydrological conditions
pertaining to the Site.
(2) The Quality Assurance/Quality Control Program may brief Bidder’s quality
assurance/quality control plan and procedures, including practices and
sequence of activities to be followed and resources to be input to meet the
quality administration requirements of Section-VI-1 [Works Requirement-
General Specification] of the Bidding Document Part2.
(3) The Safety Management Program may brief Bidder’s Safety Management
Plan in compliance with the requirements of Section-VI-1[Works
Requirement-General Specification].
(4) The Environment Management Program may brief Bidder’s Environment
Management Plan (EMP) which will demonstrate the manner in which he
will implement, manage and control environmental mitigation measures as
required under the Section-VI-1 [Works Requirement-General Specification].
Page 63 of 120
Key Personnel
Refer to:
Form PER-1: Proposed Personnel
Form PER-2: Resume of Proposed Personnel
Page 64 of 120
Form PER-1: Proposed Personnel

Date: [insert day, month, year]
Bidder’s Legal Name: [insert full name]
JV/Consortium Party Legal Name: [insert full name]
IFB No.: Package No. MAHSR-P-4(X) and MAHSR-P-4(Y)
Page [insert page number] of [insert total number] pages
[The Bidder shall provide the names of suitably qualified personnel to meet the specified
requirements stated in Section III, Evaluation and Qualification Criteria, Clause 4.2.4.]
1. Title of position
Name
Name
Name
Name
Name: ……………………………
Position: ………………………….
Date: ……………………………..
Company: ………………………..
Page 65 of 120
Form PER-2: Resume of Proposed Personnel

JV/Consortium Party Legal Name:[insert full name]
[The Bidder shall provide the data on the experience of the personnel indicated in Form
PER-1, in the form below:]
Name of Bidder
Position
Personnel Name Date of birth

information
Professional qualifications
Present Name of employer

employment
Address of employer
Telephone Contact (manager / personnel

officer)
Fax E-mail
Job title Years with present employer
Total Work Experience [insert no. of years]

Experience in Similar Works [insert no. of years]
Page 66 of 120
[Summarize professional experience over the last 20 years, in reverse chronological order.
Indicate particular technical and managerial experience relevant to the project.]
From To Company / Project / Position / Relevant Technical and

(Month & (Month & Management Experience/Experience in Similar Works
Year) Year)
Name: ……………………………
Position: ………………………….
Date: ……………………………..
Company: ………………………..
Page 67 of 120
List of Major Plant & Equipment
Refer to Form EQU: Major Plant & Equipment
Page 68 of 120
Form EQU: Major Plant & Equipment

[The Bidder shall provide adequate information to demonstrate clearly that it has the
capability to meet the requirements for the key equipment listed in Section III, Evaluation
and Qualification Criteria, Clause 4.2.5. A separate Form shall be prepared for each item
of equipment listed, or for alternative equipment proposed by the Bidder.]
Item of equipment
Equipment Name of manufacturer Model and power rating
information
Capacity Year of manufacture
Current Current location

status
Details of current commitments
Source Indicate source of the equipment

 Owned  Rented  Leased  Specially manufactured
Provide the following information for equipment not owned by the Bidder:
Owner Name of owner

Address of owner
Telephone Contact name and title

Fax Telex
Agreements Details of rental / lease / manufacture agreements specific to the project
Page 69 of 120
Name: ……………………………
Position: ………………………….
Date: ……………………………..
Company: ………………………..
Page 70 of 120
4.0. Bidder’s Qualification
To establish its qualifications to perform the contract in accordance with Section III,
Evaluation and Qualification Criteria, the Bidder shall provide the information
requested in the corresponding Forms included hereunder:
Form ELI-1 : Bidder Information Form

Form ELI-2 : Bidder’s Party Information Form
Form CON : Contract Non-Performance and Litigation
Form FIN-1 : Financial Performance
Form FIN-2 : Average Annual Construction Turnover
Form FIN-3 : Declaration on Bankruptcy/Insolvency and Debt
Restructuring
Form FIR-1 : Financial Resources
Form FIR-2 : Current Contract Commitments and
Annexure to Form FIR-2
Form EXP-1 : General Construction Experience
Form EXP-2(a) : Specific Construction Experience
Form EXP-2(b) : Construction Experience in Key Activities
Form ACK : Acknowledgement of Compliance with Guidelines
for Procurement under Japanese ODA Loans
Page 71 of 120
Form ELI-1: Bidder Information Form

[Bidders shall provide the following information:]
Bidder's legal name: [insert full name]

In case of a JV/Consortium, legal name of the lead member and of each member:
[Insert full name of each member in the JV/Consortium and specify the representative
member.]
Bidder's actual or intended country of registration:
[insert country of registration]
Bidder's actual or intended year of incorporation:
[insert year of incorporation]
Bidder's legal address in country of registration:
[insert street/ number/ town or city/ country]
Bidder's Authorized Representative information:
Name: [insert full name]
Address: [inset street/ number/ town or city/ country]
Telephone/Fax numbers: [insert telephone/fax numbers, including country and city codes]
E-mail address: [insert E-mail address]
Note: The Bidder is not required to submit any document as documentary evidence along
with the Bidding Documents. All information furnished in this Form shall be certified by
either a Chartered Accountant, Company Auditor or Statutory Auditor.
Name: ……………………………
Position: ………………………….
Date: ……………………………..
Company: ………………………..
Page 72 of 120
Chartered Accountant /Company Auditor/ Statutory Auditor
Signature: ………………………
Name: …………………………..
Position: ………………………..
Date: ............................................
Company: ……………………....
Company stamp: ………………..
Membership No: …………………

Address: ………………………….
Contact No: ………………………
Email ID: …………………………
Page 73 of 120
Form ELI-2: Bidder's Party Information Form

[The following form is additional to Form ELI-1 and shall be completed to provide
information relating to each JV/Consortium member (in case the Bidder is a
JV/Consortium) as well as any specialist Subcontractor proposed to be used by the Bidder
for any part of the Contract resulting from this process.]
In case of JV/Consortium, Bidder’s legal name:

[insert full name]
Bidder's Party legal name:
[insert full name of Bidder’s party]
Bidder's Party country of registration:
[insert country of registration]
Bidder’s Party year of incorporation:
[insert year of incorporation]
Bidder’s Party legal address in country of registration:
[insert street/ number/ town or city/ country]
Bidder’s Party authorized representative information
Name: [insert full name]
Address: [insert street/ number/ town or city/ country]
Telephone/Fax numbers: [insert telephone/fax numbers, including country and city codes]
E-mail address: [insert E-mail address]
Note:
1) In case the construction experience in key activity 3.2(d)(iii) is being met by a
specialist subcontractor, then in addition to Form ELI-2 and EXP-2(b), the
undertaking from specialist subcontractor, for willingness to associate with the
bidder, shall be submitted without which specialist subcontractor’s experience shall
not be considered.
2) The Bidder is not required to submit any document as documentary evidence along
with the Bidding Documents. All information furnished in this Form shall be
certified by either a Chartered Accountant, Company Auditor or Statutory Auditor.
Page 74 of 120
Name: ……………………………
Position: ………………………….
Date: ……………………………..
Company: ………………………..
Name: …………………………..
Position: ………………………..
Date: ............................................
Company: ……………………....

Address: ………………………….
Email ID: …………………………
Page 75 of 120
Form CON: Contract Non-Performance and Litigation

Date:[insert day, month, year]
Bidder’s Legal Name:[insert full name]
JV/Consortium Legal Name:[insert full name]
IFB No.: Package MAHSR-P-4(X) and MAHSR-P-4(Y)
[The following table shall be filled in for the Bidder and for each member of a
JV/Consortium.]
1. History of Non-Performing Contracts
Non-Performing Contracts
 Contract non-performance did not occur since 1st January 2018, in accordance with the Section III
Evaluation and Qualification Criteria, Sub-Item 3.2 (b) (i).
 Contract(s) not performed since 1st January 2018, in accordance with the Section III
Evaluation and Qualification Criteria, Sub-Item 3.2 (b) (i) indicated below.
Year Non- performed portion Contract Identification Total Contract

of contract Amount (current
value, currency,
exchange rate
and INR
equivalent)
[insert [insert amount and Contract Identification: [insert complete [insert amount]
year] percentage] contract name, number, and any other
identification]
Name of Employer: [insert full name]
Address of Employer: [insert
street/city/country]
Reason(s) for non-performance: [indicate
main reason(s)]
Page 76 of 120
Name: ……………………………
Position: ………………………….
Date: ……………………………..
Company: ………………………..
Name: …………………………..
Position: ………………………..
Date: ............................................
Company: ……………………....

Address: ………………………….
Email ID: …………………………
Page 77 of 120
2. Pending Litigation
Pending Litigation
 No pending litigation in accordance with the Section III, Evaluation and Qualification Criteria
Sub-Item 3.2 (b) (ii).
 Pending litigation in accordance with the Section III, Evaluation and Qualification Criteria,
Sub-Item 3.2 (b) (ii), is indicated below:
Year of Amount in dispute Outcome Contract Identification Total Contract
dispute (currency) as Amount (current
Percentage value, currency,
of Net exchange rate and
Worth INR equivalent)
[insert year] [insert amount] [insert Contract Identification: [insert amount]
percentage] [indicate complete contract
name, number, and any other
identification]
Name of Employer: [insert
full name]
Address of Employer: [insert
street/city/country]
Matter in dispute: [indicate
main issues in dispute]
Status of dispute: [Indicate if
it is being treated by the
Adjudicator, under
Arbitration or being dealt
with by the Judiciary]
Name: ……………………………
Position: ………………………….
Date: ……………………………..
Company: ………………………..
Page 78 of 120
Name: …………………………..
Position: ………………………..
Date: ............................................
Company: ……………………....

Address: ………………………….
Email ID: …………………………
Page 79 of 120
3. Litigation History
Litigation History
 No court/arbitral award decisions against the Bidder or any member of the JV/Consortium
since 1st January 2015, in accordance with the Section III, Evaluation and Qualification
Criteria, Sub-Item 3.2 (b) (iii).
 Court/ arbitral award decisions against the Bidder or any member of the JV/Consortium since
1st January 2015, in accordance with the Section III, Evaluation and Qualification Criteria, 3.2
(b) (iii), are indicated below:
Year of Contract Identification Total Contract
Award Amount (current
value, currency,
exchange rate and
INR equivalent)
[insert year] Contract Identification: [indicate complete contract name, [insert amount]
number, and any other identification]
Name of Employer: [insert full name]
Address of Employer: [insert street/city/country]
Matter in dispute: [indicate main issues in dispute]
Party who initiated the dispute: [indicate “Employer” or
“Contractor”]
Status of dispute: [Indicate if it is being treated by the
Adjudicator, under Arbitration or being dealt with by the
Judiciary]
Name: ……………………………
Position: ………………………….
Date: ……………………………..
Company: ………………………..
Page 80 of 120
Name: …………………………..
Position: ………………………..
Date: ............................................
Company: ……………………....

Address: ………………………….
Email ID: …………………………
Page 81 of 120
Form FIN-1: Financial Performance

JV/Consortium.]

JV/Consortium Legal Name:[insert full name]
IFB No. Package No. MAHSR-P-4(X) and MAHSR-P-4(Y)
Financial data
Type of Financial Historic Information for Previous 3 (three) Years

Information in (amount in currency, currency, exchange rate, INR equivalent)
(currency)
Year 1 Year 2 Year 3
Statement of Financial Position (Information from Balance Sheet)
Total Assets (TA)
Total Liabilities (TL)
Net Worth (NW)
Current Assets (CA)
Current Liabilities (CL)
Information from Income Statement
Total Revenue (TR)
Profits Before Taxes (PBT)
Profits After Taxes (PAT)
Page 82 of 120
Name: ……………………………
Position: ………………………….
Date: ……………………………..
Company: ………………………..
Name: …………………………..
Position: ………………………..
Date: ............................................
Company: ……………………....

Address: ………………………….
Email ID: …………………………
Page 83 of 120
Form FIN-2: Average Annual Construction Turnover
JV/Consortium.]

Page [insert page number] of [insert total number] page
Bidder to mark  as the Bid intends:
 Case 1: For one package only, however, Bidder shall submit single Technical Bid and
separate Price Bid for both P-4(X) and P-4(Y) packages, without any preference.
Or
 Case 2: Both P-4(X) and P-4(Y) combined and individually without any preference.
Annual Turnover Data (Construction Only)

Year Amount and Currency Exchange Rate INR Equivalent
[indicate [insert amount and indicate [insert [insert amount in INR
year] currency] applicable equivalent]
exchange rate]
Year 1
Year 2
Year 3
Average Annual Construction Turnover *
*Total INR equivalent for all years divided by the total number of years, in accordance with
Section III, Evaluation and Qualification Criteria, Sub-Item 3.2 (c) (ii).
Name: ……………………………
Page 84 of 120
Position: ………………………….
Date: ……………………………..
Company: ………………………..
Name: …………………………..
Position: ………………………..
Date: ............................................
Company: ……………………....

Address: ………………………….
Email ID: …………………………
Page 85 of 120
Form FIN-3: Declaration on Bankruptcy/Insolvency and

Debt Restructuring
JV/Consortium Party Legal Name: [insert full name]
[The Bidder shall submit the following undertaking for bankruptcy/insolvency and debt
restructuring and shall be filled in for the Bidder and for each member of a JV/Consortium]
(Undertaking as per Sub-Item 3.2 (c) (iii), Section III, Evaluation and Qualification Criteria,
Part 1)
We do hereby undertake that we have not suffered bankruptcy/insolvency during the

last three (3) years from the date of deadline of submission of our Bid.
And
1. We do hereby undertake that we have neither obtained debt restructuring in the

immediately preceding three (3) years from the date of deadline of submission of
our Bid nor have applied for it (as on the date of deadline of submission of the Bid)
and also are not currently in the process of corporate debt restructuring.
Or
2. We do hereby declare that we have obtained debt restructuring in the immediately
preceding three (3) years from the date of deadline of submission of our Bid or have
applied for it (as on the date of deadline of submission of Bids) or are currently in
the process of corporate debt restructuring (strikethrough the clause which is not
applicable). We do hereby undertake that we shall open a dedicated “Trust &
Retention account” (T & R account) in consultation with the Employer. We shall
submit a certified list of vendors/suppliers/sub-contractors/ consultants, associated
and engaged for the execution of the contract work. Bank will make payments on
instruction of the Contractors to pre-certified vendors/suppliers/sub-
contractors/consultants only. We shall not divert the funds for the purpose(s) other
than the intended purpose(s). Also, we give mandate to the Employer or their
representative to make inspection(s) of this account whenever so desired by them.
Page 86 of 120
Name: ……………………………
Position: ………………………….
Date: ……………………………..
Company: ………………………..
The Statement of the Bidder as stated above is verified and certified as true and correct.
Name: …………………………..
Position: ………………………..
Date: ............................................
Company: ……………………....

Address: ………………………….
Email ID: …………………………
Notes:
1. The Bidder should strike-off either paragraph no. 1 (or) 2 as above which is not
applicable.
2. Bidder is not required to submit any document as documentary evidence along with
the Bidding Documents. All information furnished in this Form shall be certified by
Page 87 of 120
Form FIR-1: Financial Resources

JV/Consortium.]

IFB No.: Package No MAHSR-P-4(X) and MAHSR-P-4(Y)
Bidder to mark  as the Bid intends

Or
[Specify proposed sources of financing, such as liquid assets, unencumbered real assets,
lines of credit, and other financial means, net of current commitments, available to meet the
total construction cash flow demands of the subject contract or contracts as specified in
Section III, Evaluation and Qualification Criteria, Sub-Item 3.2 (e) (i).]
Financial Resources
S. Source of financing Amount (INR equivalent)
No.
Page 88 of 120
Name: ……………………………
Position: ………………………….
Date: ……………………………..
Company: ………………………..
Name: …………………………..
Position: ………………………..
Date: ............................................
Company: ……………………....

Address: ………………………….
Email ID: …………………………
Page 89 of 120
Form FIR-2: Current Contract Commitments

JV/Consortium]

IFB No. Package No. MAHSR-P-4(X) and MAHSR-P-4(Y)

Or
 Case 2: Both P-4(X) and P-4(Y) combined and individually without any preference
[Bidders and each member of a JV/Consortium should provide information on their current
commitments on all contracts that have been awarded, or for which a letter of intent or
acceptance has been received, or for contracts approaching completion, but for which an
unqualified, full completion certificate has yet to be issued, in accordance with Section III,
Evaluation and Qualification Criteria, Sub-Item 3.2 (e) (ii).]
Current Contract Commitments
Average
Value of
Monthly
Employer’s Name Outstanding Estimated
Invoicing Over
No. Name of Contract and Contact Works Completion
Last Six
Address, Tel, Fax [Current INR Date
Months
Equivalent]
[INR/month)]
1
2
3
4
5
Page 90 of 120
Notes:
1. The Bidder is not required to submit any document as documentary evidence along
with the Bidding Documents. All information furnished in this Form shall be
certified by either a Chartered Accountant, Company Auditor or Statutory Auditor.
2. The ‘Annexure to Form FIR-2’ is extension of the above table of Form FIR-2. The
Bidder shall provide details for the evaluation of the adequacy of its financial
resources to meet project cash flow requirements.
Name: ……………………………
Position: ………………………….
Date: ……………………………..
Company: ………………………..
Name: …………………………..
Position: ………………………..
Date: ............................................
Company: ……………………....

Address: ………………………….
Email ID: …………………………
Page 91 of 120
Annexure to Form FIR-2

Evaluation of Adequacy of Financial Resources
Column as per JICA Pro-forma Calculation Based on Information Provided by Bidders in Form FIR-1 & FIR-2
S. Name of Employer’s Value of Estimated Avg. Estimated Avg. Avg. Avg. Monthly Total Avg. Amount stated in
No. Contract Contact Outstanding Completion Monthly Balance Monthly Monthly Requirements Monthly FIR-1 by the
Address, Tel, Works Date Invoicing Completion Financial available for Liquid Requirements of Bidder to be Equal
Fax (in Current Over Period from Bid Requirement Funds by Assets by liquid assets for or Greater than
Million INR) Last Six Submission s for Contract Contract (in Outstanding Amount Stated in
Months deadline Date Outstanding (in Million INR) Contracts (in the Form of
(in (in Months) Works Million Million INR) Financial
Million during INR) Resources (i) of
INR/Mo Contract EQC, INR 1,208
nth) Period (in Million plus Total
Million INR) Average Monthly
Requirement of
Outstanding
Contracts
Multiplied by 03
(in Million INR)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
{={Col.(5)-Bid {=Col.4/Col. {= Col.6} {=Col.8- {=Sum {= 1208 +
Submission 7} Col.9} (Col.(10)} Col. (11)*3}
deadline}/30}
1
2
3
Page 92 of 120
Name: ……………………………
Position: ………………………….
Date: ……………………………..
Company: ………………………..
Name: …………………………..
Position: ………………………..
Date: ............................................
Company: ……………………....

Address: ………………………….
Email ID: …………………………
Page 93 of 120
Form EXP-1: General Construction Experience

JV/Consortium.]

Or
[Identify contracts that demonstrate continuous construction works over the past 5 (five)
years pursuant to Section III, Evaluation and Qualification Criteria, Sub-Item 3.2 (d) (i). List
contracts chronologically, according to their commencement (starting) dates.]
General Construction Experience
Starting Ending Contract Identification Role of

Year Year Bidder
[indicate [indicate Contract name: [insert full name] [insert "Prime

year] year] Brief description of the works performed by the Contractor” (single
entity or
Bidder: [describe works performed briefly]
JV/Consortium
Amount of contract: [insert amount in currency,
member)” or
mention currency used, exchange rate and INR
"Subcontractor” or"
equivalent]
“Management
Name of Employer: [indicate full name] Contractor”]
Address: [indicate street/number/town or
city/country]
Page 94 of 120

Name: ……………………………
Position: ………………………….
Date: ……………………………..
Company: ………………………..
Name: …………………………..
Position: ………………………..
Date: ............................................
Company: ……………………....

Address: ………………………….
Email ID: …………………………
Page 95 of 120
Form EXP-2(a): Specific Construction Experience

JV/Consortium.]

Or
[Fill out one (1) form per contract, in accordance with Section III, Evaluation and
Qualification Criteria, Sub-Item 3.2 (d) (ii).]
Contract of Similar Size and Nature

Similar Contract No.
[insert number] of [insert number of Information
similar contracts required]
Contract Identification [insert contract name and reference identification number, if
applicable]
Award Date [insert day, month, year, e.g., xx xxx, xxxx]
Completion Date [insert day, month, year, e.g., xx xxx, xxxx]
Role in Contract Prime Contractor

[check the appropriate box] Single entity JV/
 Consortium member

Total quantity for fabrication under the [insert total quantity of fabrication under the Contract in
Contract MT]
Quantity of fabrication completed [insert quantity fabricated in MT against the Contract]
against the Contract
Page 96 of 120
If member in a JV/Consortium, [insert a [insert total INR [insert exchange rate and
specify participation in total percentage contract amount total contract amount in INR
Contract amount amount] and equivalent]
currency(ies)]
Employer's Name: [insert full name]
[indicate street / number / town or city / country]

Address:
[insert telephone/fax numbers, including country and
Telephone/fax number
city area codes]
E-mail:
[insert E-mail address, if available]
Similar Contract No.
[insert number] of [insert number Information
of similar contracts required]
Description of the similarity in
accordance with Sub-Item 3.2 (d) (ii)
of Section III:
1. Physical size of required works [insert physical size of items]
items
 For P-4(X) or P-4(Y):
Fabrication of steel structure
of total tonnage of 25,000 MT,
out of which minimum
fabrication of steel structure
for Railway/Metro-Rail/Road
bridges shall be 3,500 MT.
 For Combined P-4(X) and P-

4(Y):
Fabrication of steel structure
of total tonnage of 50,000 MT,
out of which minimum
fabrication of steel structure
for Railway/Metro-Rail/Road
bridges shall be 7,000 MT.
2. Complexity [insert description of complexity]
3. Methods/Technology [insert specific aspects of the methods/technology
involved in the contract]
Page 97 of 120
4. Other Characteristics [Insert other characteristics as described in Section VI-

1. Works Requirements - General Specifications and
Section VI-2. Works Requirements-Technical
Specification].
Name: ……………………………
Position: ………………………….
Date: ……………………………..
Company: ………………………..
Name: …………………………..
Position: ………………………..
Date: ............................................
Company: ……………………....

Address: ………………………….
Email ID: …………………………
Page 98 of 120
Form EXP-2(b): Construction Experience in Key

Activities
JV/Consortium.]

Subcontractor’s Legal Name [insert full name]
[Fill out one (1) form per contract, in accordance with Section III, Evaluation and
Qualification Criteria, Sub-Item 3.2 (d) (iii).]
Key Activity:
• Fabrication of Steel girder for Bridge/Viaduct for Railway/ Metro-Rail with at least
one girder of span 60m or more.
Note: Works under various contracts can be added to meet the above criteria.
Total Quantity of Activity under the contract: ____________________________________
Contract with Similar Key Activities

Item Information
Contract Identification [insert contract name and number, if applicable]
Award Date [insert day, month, year, e.g., xx, xxx, xxxx]
Completion Date [insert day, month, year, e.g., xx, xxx, xxxx]
Role in Contract Prime Contractor Management
Subcontractor
[check the appropriate box] Contractor
Single entity  JV/Consortium 

Total Contract Amount INR [insert
[insert total contract amount in Exchange rate and total
INR] contract amount in INR
equivalent]
Page 99 of 120
Contract with Similar Key Activities

Item Information
Quantity (Volume, number or rate Total quantity in the Percentage Actual
of production, as applicable) Contract Participation Quantity
performed under the contract per (i) (ii) Performed
year or part of the year (i) x (ii)
[Insert extent of participation
indicating actual quantity of key
activity successfully completed
in the role performed]
Year 1
Year 2
Year 3
Year 4
Employer’s Name: [insert full name]

Address: [indicate street / number / town or city / country]
Telephone/fax number
E-mail: [insert telephone/fax numbers, including country and
city area codes]
[insert E-mail address, if available]
Name: ……………………………
Position: ………………………….
Date: ……………………………..
Company: ………………………..
Page 100 of 120

Name: …………………………..
Position: ………………………..
Date: ............................................
Company: ……………………....

Address: ………………………….
Email ID: …………………………
Page 101 of 120

Form ACK
Acknowledgement of Compliance with Guidelines for Procurement
under Japanese ODA Loans
A) I, insert name and position of authorized signatory], being duly authorized by

[insert name of Bidder/members of joint venture (“JV”)] (hereinafter referred to as
the “Bidder”) to execute this Acknowledgement of Compliance with the
Guidelines for Procurement under Japanese ODA Loans, hereby certify on behalf
of the Bidder and myself that:
(i) all information provided in the Bid submitted by the Bidder and its
subcontractors for the Project for Construction of Mumbai-Ahmedabad High
Speed Rail, name of the Contract “Procurement, Fabrication, Check-Assembly,
Painting at workshop(s) and Transportation to various Bridge Sites of Steel
Truss Superstructures alongwith bearings for 33 Nos. of Bridges for High
Speed Rail Corridor for crossing over Roads / Rivers / Railways / other
structures in two (2) Packages [MAHSR P-4(X) and MAHSR P-4(Y)]for the
Project for Construction of Mumbai-Ahmedabad High Speed Rail”, and
number of lot(s) is two (2), is true, correct and accurate to the best of the
Bidder’s and my knowledge and belief; and
(ii) the Bidder or any of its subcontractors has not, directly or indirectly, taken any
action which is or constitutes a corrupt or fraudulent practice and is not subject
to any conflict of interest as stipulated in the relevant section of the Guidelines
and the Bidding Document.
<If debarment for more than one year by the World Bank Group is NOT imposed,
use the following sentence B).>
B) I certify that the Bidder has NOT been debarred by the World Bank Group for more
than one year since the date of issuance of Invitation for Bids.
<If debarment for more than one year by the World Bank Group has been imposed
BUT three (3) years have passed since the date of such debarment decision, use the
following sentence B’).>
B’) I certify that the Bidder has been debarred by the World Bank Group for a period
more than one year BUT that on the date of issuance of Invitation for Bids at least
three (3) years had passed since the date of such debarment decision. Details of
Page 102 of 120

the debarment are as follows:
Name of the Starting date of Ending date of Reason for

debarred firm debarment debarment debarment
C) I certify that the Bidder will not enter into a subcontract with a firm which has been
debarred by the World Bank Group for a period more than one year, unless on the
date of the subcontract at least three (3) years have passed since the date of such
debarment decision.
D) I certify, on behalf of the Bidder and its subcontractors, that if selected to undertake
works and services in connection with the Contract, the Bidder and its
subcontractors shall carry out such works and services in continuing compliance
with the terms and conditions of the Contract.
E) I further certify, on behalf of the Bidder and its subcontractors, that if the Bidder
and any of its subcontractors is requested, directly or indirectly, to engage in any
corrupt or fraudulent practice under any applicable law, such as the payment of a
rebate, at any time or any stage of a process of procurement such as negotiations,
execution or implementation of contract (including amendment thereof), the
Bidder shall report all relevant facts regarding such request to the relevant section
in JICA (details of which are specified below) in a timely manner.
JICA’s information desk on fraud and corruption (A report can be made to either
of the offices identified below.)
(1) JICA Headquarters: Legal Affairs Division, General Affairs
Department
URL: https://www2.jica.go.jp/en/odainfo/index.php
Tel: +81 (0)3 5226 8850
(2) JICA India Office
16th Floor, Hindustan Times House,
18-20, Kasturba Gandhi Marg,
New Delhi- 110001, India
Tel: (91-11) 4909-7000
The Bidder acknowledges and agrees that the reporting obligation stated above
shall NOT in any way affect the Bidder’s responsibilities, obligations or rights,
under relevant laws, regulations, contracts, guidelines or otherwise, to disclose or
report such request or other information to any other person(s) including the
Employer or to take any other action, required to or allowed to, be taken by the
Page 103 of 120
Bidder. The Bidder further acknowledges and agrees that JICA is not involved in
or responsible for the procurement process in any way.
F) If any of the statements made herein is subsequently proven to be untrue or

incorrect based on facts subsequently determined, or if any of the warranties or
covenants made herein is not complied with, the Bidder will accept, comply with,
and not object to any remedies taken by the Employer and any sanctions imposed
by or actions taken by JICA.
Name: ……………………………
Position: ………………………….
Date: ……………………………..
Company: ………………………..
Name: …………………………..
Position: ………………………..
Date: ............................................
Company: ……………………....

Address: ………………………….
Email ID: …………………………
Page 104 of 120

5.0. Checklist of Submission of Documents/Forms duly filled for the Technical Bid
(Reference to BDS-ITB 11.2 (h), Section II, Part 1)
S.No. Requirements of Technical Reference Clause No. of Bidder’s Name: ………

Bid Bid Documents
……………………………
Yes / No Ref.
1. Letter of Technical Bid ITB 11.2 (a) and Section
IV
2. One Original and three copies BDS ITB 20.1, 21.1
of Technical Bid along with
soft copy (CD / DVD)
3. Original and all Copies of ITB 20.2
Technical Bid signed by
authorized representative of
Single Entity/Joint
Venture/Consortium
4. Validity of Bids – 180 days BDS ITB 18.1
from Bid Submission
deadline date
i.e., valid up to ----------------
5. Bid Security as per form of BDS ITB 19.1 and
Bid Documents Clause 6.0 of Section IV
6. Form - JV/Consortium BDS ITB 4.1 and Clause
Agreement 6.0 of Section IV
7. Power of Attorney for BDS ITB 20.2 and
Authorised Representative of Clause 6.0 of Section IV
Sole Bidder along with
Organizational documents
and Board Resolution
8. Power of Attorney for BDS ITB 20.2, ITB 20.3
Authorised Representative of and Clause 6.0 of Section
JV/Consortium Members IV
along with Organizational
documents and Board
Resolution
9. Power of Attorney to BDS ITB 20.2, ITB 20.3
Authorized Representative of and Clause 6.0 of Section
JV/Consortium along with IV
Organizational documents
and Board
Page 105 of 120


Bid Bid Documents
……………………………
Yes / No Ref.
10. From ELI-1: Bidder ITB 17.1 and Clause 4.0
Information Form of Section IV
11. From ELI – 2: Bidder’s Party ITB 17.1 and Clause 4.0
Information Form of Section IV
12. Form CON: Contract Non- ITB 17.1 and Clause 4.0
Performance and Litigation of Section IV
13. Form FIN-1: Financial ITB 17.1 and Clause 4.0
Performance of Section IV
14. Form FIN-2: Average Annual ITB 17.1 and Clause 4.0
Construction Turnover of Section IV
15. Form FIN-3: Declaration on ITB 17.1
Bankruptcy/ Insolvency and Clause 4.0 of Section IV
Debt Restructuring
16. Form FIR-1: Financial ITB 17.1 and Clause 4.0
Resources of Section IV
17. Form FIR-2: Current ITB 17.1 and Clause 4.0
Contract Commitments along of Section IV
with Annexure to Form
FIR-2.
18. Letter of Intent to form JV / BDS ITB 41.3 (new)
Consortium and draft JV/
Consortium agreement
19. Form EXP – 1 General ITB 17.1 and Clause 4.0
Construction Experience of Section IV
20. Form EXP – 2(a) Specific ITB 17.1 and Clause 4.0
Construction Experience of Section IV
21. Form EXP – 2(b) ITB 17.1 and Clause 4.0
Construction Experience in of Section IV
Key Activities
22. Site Organization ITB 16.1 and Clause 3.0
of Section IV
23. Method Statement ITB 16.1 and Clause 3.0
of Section IV
24. Works Execution Program ITB 16.1 and Clause 3.0
of Section IV
25. Form PER-1: Proposed Key ITB 16.1 and Clause 3.0
Personnel of Section IV
26. Form PER-2: Resume of ITB 16.1 and Clause 3.0
Proposed Key Personnel of Section IV
Page 106 of 120


Bid Bid Documents
……………………………
Yes / No Ref.
27. Form EQU: Major Plant & ITB 16.1 and Clause 3.0
Equipment of Section IV
28. Form ACK: BDS ITB 2.2, 3.1 and
Acknowledgement of Clause 4.0 of Section IV
Compliance with Guidelines
for Procurement under
Japanese ODA Loans
29. Addenda nos. duly filled in Letter of Technical Bid
Letter of Technical Bid.
30. Dully signed and stamped BDS ITB 11.2 (h) (i)
copy of “Section V. Eligible
Source Countries of Japanese
ODA Loans” of the Bidding
Documents.
31. Any other Documents.
Certificate:
This is to certify that our Technical submission is in full compliance with all the conditions,
requirements and specifications as included in the Bidding Documents including Addenda
thereto.
Name: ……………………………
Position: ………………………….
Date: ……………………………..
Company: ………………………..
Page 107 of 120

6.0. Bid Requirements
Form - JV/Consortium Agreement

Power of Attorney for Authorized Representative of Sole Bidder
Power of Attorney for Authorized Representative of JV/Consortium Members
Power of Attorney to Authorized Representative of JV/Consortium
Form of Bid Security
Page 108 of 120

Form-JV/Consortium Agreement
The Members of the Joint Venture / Consortium shall provide JV/Consortium Agreement
for JV/Consortium Participation which includes at least the following:
[Ref. Form ELI-1 & ELI-2]
M/s____ {Insert Name of Lead Member}____________________. having its registered

office at _________________________ (hereinafter referred to as “___________”), is the
Lead Member of the JV/Consortium and acting as the Authorized Representative of the
JV/Consortium on first part; and
M/s____ {Insert Name of Member}____________________ having its registered office

at_________________________(hereinafter referred to as “______________________”),
shall act in the capacity of a Joint Member of the JV/Consortium on the other part.
M/s____ {Insert Name of Member}______________, having its registered office

at_________________________(hereinafter referred to as “_____________________” in
the capacity of a Joint Member of the JV/Consortium on the other part.
The expressions of _________________________ and _________________________ and

_________________________ shall wherever the context permits, mean and include their
respective legal representatives, successor interest and assigns and shall collectively be
referred to as “the Parties” and individually as “the Party”.
WHEREAS:
National High Speed Rail Corporation Limited, New Delhi, India, which is owned by the
Government of Republic of India, [hereinafter referred to as “Employer”], has invited bids
for the Works of “[insert name of the contract and brief description of the Works]”.
NOW, THEREFORE, THE PARTIES AGREE AS FOLLOWS:

(1) The following documents shall be deemed to form and be read and construed as an
integral part of this JV/Consortium Agreement:
(i) Invitation for Bid.
(ii) Bidding Documents issued by the Employer.
(iii) Any Addenda to the Bidding Documents issued by the Employer.
(iv) The Bid submitted on our behalf jointly by the Authorised Representative from
the Lead Member.
(2) The `Parties’ have studied the Bid Documents and have agreed to participate in
submitting a `Bid’ jointly.
(3) Mr./Ms. _________________________, authorised representative of the Lead
Member and an employee of the Lead Member whose details are provided as under,
Page 109 of 120
shall be the Authorized Representative of the JV/Consortium for all intents and
purposes. He / She shall have the authority to conduct all business for and on behalf
of any and all the members of JV/Consortium during the bidding process and in the
event the JV/Consortium is awarded the Contract, during Contract execution. Thus,
in the event of the award of Contract, the Authorised Representative will be the
Contractor’s Representative as per clause 4.3 of the General Conditions of Contract.
Name, Designation, Address, Tel/Fax no E Mail ID
(3.1) In the event of the above Authorised Representative being replaced by or
dissociating with/leaving the Lead Member, the Lead Member shall
immediately appoint another of its employee as its Authorised Representative
duly with the consent of other JV/Consortium Members. During any such period
when the Lead Member is not able to have an Authorised Representative, the
MD/Chairman of the Lead Member will be considered to be the Authorised
Representative for the purpose of this Bid and subsequent the Contract (if
awarded).
(4) We undertake that
1) The Lead Member of our JV/Consortium---------- (Name of the Lead Member)
shall have the maximum financial stake amongst the other members of the
JV/Consortium.
The share of the Lead Member in JV/Consortium shall be more than 40% of
the Contract Amount and that of each of the other members shall be at least
15% of the Contract Amount.
2) The distribution of responsibilities in execution of the Works and the
percentage participation amongst various members of the JV/Consortium for
the subject work shall be as under:
S. Name of the Role Distribution of %

No. Member (Lead Member/ Responsibilities Participation
Member) in execution of
the Works
(5) Joint and Several Responsibility

The Parties undertake that they shall be jointly and severally liable to the Employer
in the discharge of all the obligations and liabilities as per the Contract with the
Employer and for the performance of Contract awarded to their JV/Consortium.
In case a Party fails or delays to perform its obligations either partially or totally, it
shall be responsible for all the outcomes concerned, and upon such conditions the
Page 110 of 120

other Parties shall be obliged to take measures to perform well and fulfil satisfactorily
all the obligations under the Contract with the Employer.
(6) Assignment and Third Parties
The Parties shall co-operate throughout the entire period of this JV/Consortium
Agreement on the basis of exclusivity and neither of the Parties shall make any
arrangement or enter into any agreement either directly or indirectly with any other
party or group of parties on matters relating to the Works except with prior written
consent of the other Party.
(7) Executive Authority
The said JV/Consortium through its Authorized Representative (as specified above)
shall receive instructions, payments from the Employer. The management structure
for the Works shall be prepared by mutual consultations to enable completion of the
Works to quality requirements within permitted cost and time.
(8) Guarantees
Till the award of the Contract, all the Bank Guarantees to the Employer shall be
furnished in the name of JV/Consortium or in the name of all future members as
named in the letter of intent referred to BDS 4.1 & 20.2 which shall be legally binding
on all the members of the JV/Consortium.
(9) Documents & Confidentiality
Each Party shall maintain confidentiality and not use for any purpose other than those
related to the Project all commercial and technical information received or generated
in the course of preparation and submission of the Bid.
(10) Arbitration
Any dispute, controversy or claim arising out of or relating to this agreement shall be
settled in the first instance amicably between Parties. If an amicable settlement cannot
be reached as above, it will be settled by………………………….[Bidder to specify].
(11) Validity
This JV/Consortium Agreement shall remain in force till the occurrence of any of the
following, unless by mutual consent, the Parties agree in writing to extend the validity
for a further period.
1) The bid submitted by the JV/Consortium is declared unsuccessful;
2) Cancellation/ shelving of the Project by the Employer for any reasons prior
to award of the Contract;
3) Execution of detailed JV/Consortium agreement by the Parties, setting out
detailed terms after award of the Contract by the Employer, substantially
covering the requirements as mentioned in the Bidding Documents; or,
4) Successful execution of the Contract and settlement of all/any disputes
between the Employer and the Contractor.
Page 111 of 120
(12) This JV/Consortium Agreement shall be construed under the laws of India.
(13) Notices
The names, addresses and fax numbers of authorized representative of the other
members of the JV/Consortium to which notices may be given in writing by fax
confirmed by registered mail or commercial courier shall be as follows:
1) _____[Name] ____[Designation] ____[Address] ______ [Ph. No., Fax No.,
E-mail ID]
E-mail ID]
E-mail ID]
Notes:
This Agreement shall be executed in English according to the applicable laws of India,
taking into account the notes stated below:
(1) In case of existing JV/Consortium, the certified copy of JV/Consortium Agreement
shall be furnished.
(2) The mode of execution should be in accordance with the procedure, if any, laid down
by the applicable laws of India and the charter documents of the executants(s) and
when it is so required, the same should be under common seal affixed in accordance
with the required procedure.
(3) Whenever required, the Bidder should submit for verification the extract of the charter
documents and the shareholder resolution in favour of the person executing this
document on behalf of the bidder.
(4) For a required document executed and issued overseas, the document will also have
to be legalised by Embassy of India in the Bidder’s country and notarized in the
jurisdiction where it is being issued. However, documents provided by Bidders from
countries that have signed the Hague Legislation Convention 1961 are not required
to be legalized by the Embassy of India, if they carry a conforming Apostille certificate.
Page 112 of 120

Power of Attorney for Authorised Representative of

Sole Bidder
(To be submitted in Original)
Know all men by these presents, we _________________________do hereby constitute,

appoint and authorize Mr/Ms_________________________ who is presently employed
with us and holding the position of _________________________as our Representative, to
do in our name and on our behalf, all such acts, deeds and things necessary in connection
with or incidental to our Bid for the Works of “[insert name of the contract and brief
description of the Works]”, including signing and submission of all documents and
providing information/responses to National High Speed Rail Corporation Limited,
representing us in all matters, dealing with National High Speed Rail Corporation Limited
in all matters in connection with our Bid for the said Works.
We hereby agree to ratify all acts, deeds and things lawfully done by our said representative
pursuant to this Power of Attorney and that all acts, deeds and things done by our aforesaid
representative shall and shall always be deemed to have been done by us.
Dated this the________ day of _________________________20_____.
(Signature of Authorized Signatory)
_________________________
(Signature and Name in Block letters of Signatory)
Seal of Company
Witness
Witness 1: Witness 2:
Name: Name:
Address: Address:
Occupation: Occupation:
Notes:
This Power of Attorney shall be executed in English according to the applicable laws in the
Bidder’s country, taking into account the notes stated below:
Page 113 of 120

by the applicable law in the Bidder’s country and the charter documents of the
executants(s) and when it is so required, the same should be under common seal
affixed in accordance with the required procedure.
document on behalf of the Bidder.
to be legalised by the Embassy of India in the Bidder’s country and notarized in the
to be legalized by the Indian Embassy, if they carry a conforming Apostille certificate.
Page 114 of 120

Power of Attorney for Authorised Representative of

JV/Consortium Members
Know all men by these presents, we _________________________do hereby constitute,

appoint and authorize Mr/Ms_________________________ who is presently employed
with us and holding the position of _________________________as our Representative, to
do in our name and on our behalf, all such acts, deeds and things necessary in connection
with or incidental to our Bid for the Works of “[insert name of the contract and brief
description of the Works]”, including signing and submission of all documents and
providing information/responses to National High Speed Rail Corporation Limited,
representing us in all matters, dealing with National High Speed Rail Corporation Limited
in all matters in connection with our Bid for the said Works.
We hereby agree to ratify all acts, deeds and things lawfully done by our said representative
pursuant to this Power of Attorney and that all acts, deeds and things done by our aforesaid
representative shall and shall always be deemed to have been done by us.
(Signature of Authorized Signatory)
_________________________
(Signature and Name in Block letters of Signatory)
Seal of Company
Witness
Name: Name:
Address: Address:
Notes:
Page 115 of 120

(1) In case of existing joint venture, the certified copy of (JV/Consortium) Agreement
shall be furnished.
document on behalf of the Bidder.
to be legalized by the Indian Embassy, if they carry a conforming Apostille certificate.
Page 116 of 120

Power of Attorney to Authorized Representative of

JV/Consortium
Appointment of Authorised Representative of the sole bidder/JV/Consortium1
Whereas, The Managing Director of National High Speed Rail Corporation Limited, which
is owned by the Government of India, has invited Bids for the Works of “[insert name of
the contract and brief description of the Works]”, and
Whereas, the members of the JV/Consortium comprising of M/s. _________________

(Lead Member)_____,M/s.__________________, M/s_________________ and M/s-------
-------- (*) are interested in submission of bid for this Works of in accordance with the terms
and conditions contained in the bid documents.
Whereas, it is necessary for the members of the JV/Consortium to designate representative

of the lead member as the authorized representative, with all necessary power and authority
to do, for and on behalf of the JV/Consortium, all acts, deeds and things as may be necessary
in connection with the JV/Consortium’s bid for the Works.
NOW THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY WITNESSETH THAT:
We, M/s. __________________(Lead Member)_______, M/s.

_________________________, M/s_________________________, .... and M/s-------------
-- hereby designate Mr/Ms. _________________________, (*) being representative of the
Lead Member of the JV/Consortium, as the Authorized Representative of the
JV/Consortium, to do on behalf of the JV/Consortium, all or any of the acts, deeds or things
necessary or incidental to the JV/Consortium's bid for the Contract, including submission
of bid, participating in conferences, responding to queries, submission of
information/documents and generally to represent the JV/Consortium in all its dealings with
National High Speed Rail Corporation Limited in connection with the Contract for the said
Works until culmination of the process of bidding till the Contract Agreement is entered
into with National High Speed Rail Corporation Limited and thereafter till the expiry of the
Contract Agreement.
In the event of the above Authorised Representative being replaced by or dissociating

with/leaving the Lead Member, the Lead Member shall immediately appoint another of its
employee as its Authorised Representative duly with the consent of other JV/Consortium
Members. During all such period when the Lead Member is not able to have an Authorised
Representative, the MD/Chairman of the Lead Member will be considered to be the
Authorised Representative for the purpose of this Bid and subsequent contract (if
Page 117 of 120
applicable).
We hereby agree to ratify all acts, deeds and things lawfully done by Authorized
Representative, our said attorney, pursuant to this Power of Attorney and that all acts deeds
and things done by our aforesaid attorney shall and shall always be deemed to have been
done by us (JV/Consortium).
(Signature)
(Name in Block letters of Executants)
Seal of Company
Name: Name:
Address: Address:
1 To be executed by all the Members of the Joint Venture, except the Lead Member of the
JV/Consortium.
Notes:
(1) In case of existing joint venture, the certified copy of (JV/Consortium) Agreement
shall be furnished.
document on behalf of the bidder.
to be legalized by the Embassy of India, if they carry a conforming Apostille certificate.
Page 118 of 120

Form of Bid Security (Bank Guarantee)
[Guarantor letterhead or SWIFT identifier code]
Beneficiary:
Managing Director
National High Speed Rail Corporation Ltd.
Road Number 205, Sector 9 Dwarka
New Delhi -110077, India
Date: [Insert date of issue]
BID GUARANTEE No.: [Insert guarantee reference number]
Guarantor: [Insert name and address of place of issue, unless indicated in the letterhead]
We have been informed that [insert name of the Bidder, which in the case of JV/Consortium
shall be the name of the JV/Consortium (whether legally constituted or prospective) or the
names of all members thereof] (hereinafter called "the Applicant") has submitted or will
submit to the Beneficiary its Bid (hereinafter called "the Bid") for the execution of
“Procurement, Fabrication, Check-Assembly, Painting at workshop(s) and Transportation
to various Bridge Sites of Steel Truss Superstructures alongwith bearings for 33 Nos. of
Bridges for High Speed Rail Corridor for crossing over Roads / Rivers / Railways / other
structures in two (2) Packages [MAHSR P-4(X) and MAHSR P-4(Y)] for the Project for
Construction of Mumbai-Ahmedabad High Speed Rail”, under Loan Agreement: ID-P277
and ID-P279.
Furthermore, we understand that, according to the Beneficiary’s conditions, Bids must be

supported by a bid guarantee.
At the request of the Applicant, we, as Guarantor, hereby irrevocably undertake to pay the
Beneficiary any sum or sums not exceeding in total an amount of [insert amount in words]
([insert amount in figures]) upon receipt by us of the Beneficiary’s complying demand,
supported by the Beneficiary’s statement, whether in the demand itself or a separate signed
document accompanying or identifying the demand, stating that either the Applicant:
1) has withdrawn its Bid during the period of bid validity set forth in the Applicant’s
Letter of Bid (“the Bid Validity Period”), or any extension thereto provided by the
Applicant; or
Page 119 of 120

2) having been notified of the acceptance of its Bid by the Beneficiary during the Bid
Validity Period or any extension thereto provided by the Applicant, (i) has failed to
execute the contract agreement, or (ii) has failed to furnish the Performance Security,
in accordance with the Instructions to Bidders of the Beneficiary’s bidding documents.
This guarantee will expire and shall be returned: (a) if the Applicant is the successful Bidder,
upon our receipt of copies of the contract agreement signed by the Applicant and the
Performance Security issued to the Beneficiary in relation to such contract agreement; or
(b) if the Applicant is not the successful Bidder, upon the earlier of (i) our receipt of a copy
of the Beneficiary’s notification to the Applicant of the results of the bidding process; or
(ii)twenty-eight (28) days after the end of the Bid Validity Period.
Consequently, any demand for payment under this guarantee must be received by us at the
office indicated above on or before that date.
This guarantee is subject to the Uniform Rules for Demand Guarantees (URDG) 2010
Revision, ICC Publication No. 758.
Notwithstanding anything contained herein:

a) Our liability under this Bank Guarantee shall not exceed Rs__________
(Rupees_______ _____________ only);
b) This Bank Guarantee shall be valid up to ___________________;
c) We are liable to pay the guaranteed amount or any part thereof under the Bank Guarantee
only and only if you serve upon us a written claim or demand on or before
____________ (date which is 3 months after date mentioned at (b) above).
_____________________________
[signature (s)]
[Note:
1. All italicized text is for use in preparing this form and shall be deleted from the final
product.
2. Bid Security shall be submitted as under:
 Case 1: Bid Security of INR 145,000,000 (Indian Rupee One hundred and Forty-five
Million only),
 Case 2: Two Bid Securities each of INR 145,000,000 (Indian Rupee One hundred
and Forty-five Million only).
Page 120 of 120

Package No. MAHSR-P-4(X) and P-4(Y) Section V. Eligible Source Countries of Japanese ODA Loans
Section V. Eligible Source Countries of Japanese ODA

Loans
Eligibility for the Provision of Goods, Works and Services in JICA-Financed
Procurement
(1) The Eligible Nationality of the supplier(s) and/or contractor(s) shall be the following:
(a) Japan and/or India in the case of the prime contractor; and
(b) All countries and areas in the case of the sub-contractor(s).
(2) With regard to (1) above, in case where the prime contractor is a joint venture, such joint
venture shall be eligible provided that the nationality of partner, both lead and other
partner is Japan and/or India.
(3) With regard to (1) and (2) above, the nationality of the supplier(s) and/or contractor(s)
can be regarded as Japan (hereinafter referred to as the “Japanese Company”) if all of
the following conditions are satisfied:
(a) Such supplier(s) and/or contractor(s) shall be nationals of Japan and/or juridical
persons incorporated and registered in Japan, and have their appropriate facilities
for producing or providing goods and services in Japan and actually conduct their
business there;
(b) Notwithstanding (a) above, a juridical person incorporated in a country or area
other than Japan that satisfies all of the following conditions can be regarded as the
Japanese Company:
(i) It is a subsidiary included in the scope of consolidation and factored into the
aggregated accounting figure of a consolidated financial statement of the
Japanese Company made in accordance with the Financial Instruments and
Exchange Act of Japan and the related ministerial ordinances; and
(ii) It is registered in the country or area where it was incorporated, has its
appropriate facilities for producing or providing goods and services there, and
actually conducts its business therein.
(4) With regard to (1) and (2) above, the nationality of the supplier(s) and/or contractor(s)
can be regarded as India (hereinafter referred to as the “Indian Company”) if all of the
following conditions are satisfied:
(a) Such supplier(s) and/or contractor(s) shall be nationals of India and/or juridical
persons incorporated and registered in India, and have their appropriate facilities
for producing or providing goods and services in India and actually conduct their
business there;
(b) In the case of a juridical person, a majority of the subscribed shares shall be held
by nationals of India or juridical persons incorporated and registered in India; and
(c) In the case of a juridical person, a majority of the full-time directors shall be
nationals of India.
Page 1 of 3
(5) Procurement of the following components from Japan is mandatory under this Package;
(a) Steel/ Metallic bearing
(6) With regard to the goods procured from the eligible local manufacturing company(ies)
(hereinafter referred to as “the Eligible Local Manufacturing Company(ies)”) invested
by Japanese companies can be regarded and counted as Japanese origin if such Eligible
Local Manufacturing Company(ies) satisfy(ies) the following conditions:
(a) Juridical persons incorporated and registered in India, and which have their
appropriate facilities for producing or providing the goods and services in
India and actually conduct their business there;
(b) Not less than 10 % of shares are held by a single Japanese Company; and
(c) The proportion of the shares held by the Japanese company mentioned in (ii)
above (or the company having the largest share among Japanese companies
if more than one Japanese company meet the condition stated in (ii) above)
is the same as or greater than that of the shares held by any company of a
third country.
(7) With regard to the goods procured from the eligible development partners’
manufacturing company(ies) (hereinafter referred to as “the Eligible Development
Partners’ Manufacturing Company(ies)”) invested by Japanese companies can be
regarded and counted as Japanese origin if such Eligible Development Partners’
Manufacturing Company(ies) satisfy(ies) the following conditions:
(a) Juridical persons incorporated and registered in a country or area on DAC
List of ODA Recipients effective at the time of conclusion of the Loan
Agreement and which have their appropriate facilities for producing or
providing the goods and services in the country or area and actually conduct
their business there;
(b) Not less than one-third of shares are held by a single Japanese Company;
and
third country.
(8) With regard to the goods procured from the eligible developed partners’ manufacturing
company(ies) (hereinafter referred to as “the Eligible Developed Partners’
Manufacturing Company(ies)”) invested by Japanese companies can be regarded and
counted as Japanese origin if such Eligible Developed Partners’ Manufacturing
Company(ies) satisfy(ies) the following conditions:
(a) The consolidated subsidiary of a Japanese company in a foreign country,
such company will be eligible provided that the company is a subsidiary
company whose financial statements are required to be included in a
Page 2 of 3
consolidated financial statement of a Japanese company (as a parent

company) by the Financial Instruments and Exchange Act of Japan and
related ministerial ordinances,
(b) Juridical persons incorporated and registered in a country or area where it is
located and which have their appropriate facilities for producing or
providing the goods and services and actually conduct their business there;
third country.
Page 3 of 3
Package No. MAHSR-P-4(X) and P-4(Y) Section VI
BIDDING DOCUMENTS
FOR
Procurement, Fabrication, Check-Assembly, Painting at workshop(s)

and Transportation to various Bridge Sites of Steel Truss
Superstructures alongwith bearings for 33 Nos. of Bridges for High
Speed Rail Corridor for crossing over Roads / Rivers / Railways / other
structures
for the


Package No. MAHSR-P-4(X) and P-4(Y) Section VI
BIDDING DOCUMENTS
Table of Contents

Section VI-1. Specification (General Specifications)
Section VI-2. Specification (Technical Specifications)
Section VI-3. Drawings
Page 2 of 2
Project for the Construction of Mumbai-Ahmedabad High Speed Rail Bidding Documents - Part 2
Package No. MAHSR-P-4(X) and P-4(Y) Section VI-1. Works Requirements (General Specifications)

VI-1. Specification (General Specifications)
Page 1 of 202
Table of Summary Contents
Divison 01000 : Scope of Works··································································· 3
Divison 02000 : Works Related Information ·················································· 10
Divison 03000 : Information and Communication Management ························· 18
Divison 04000 : Works Administration ························································ 43
Divison 05000 : Contractor’s Drawings ······················································ 119
Divison 06000 : Site Management ····························································· 127
Divison 07000 : Quality Administration ····················································· 159
Divison 08000 : Safety, Health And Environment Management························ 188
Page 2 of 202
Table of Contents
01010 Description of Scope ········································································· 4

01020 Detailed Description of the Scope of Works ··········································· 7
General ....................................................................................................................7
Preparation of Shop drawings .................................................................................7
Procurement & storage of structural steel, bearings and other materials ................7
Fabrication of steel truss superstructure ..................................................................7
Check assembly of the superstructure with Bearing ...............................................7
Painting ...................................................................................................................8
Transportation of steel truss members to the bridges-site/site-delivery-yards,
unloading and stacking ............................................................................................8
Temporary Works ...................................................................................................8
Mandatory approvals from the concerned authorities .............................................9
Interface with Other contractors..............................................................................9
Any other works required by the Contract ..............................................................9
Division 01000 Page 3 of 202

The works under this contract include procurement, fabrication, check-assembly,

painting and transportation to various bridge Sites of steel truss superstructures along
with bearings for 33 Nos. of Bridges for High Speed Rail Corridor for crossing over
roads/Rivers/Railways/other structures for the Project for Construction of “Mumbai-
Ahmedabad High Speed Rail” as per the Employer’s Design and any incidental works
as per the Contract (“the Works”) including but not limited to procurement and
fabrication of steel truss members and accessories as per the Drawings along with
procurement and supply of bearings complete, check-assembly, painting, transportation
of the fabricated materials and bearings to the bridge-sites/site-delivery-yards,
unloading, stacking and handing over of the same to the respective construction
contractors of C-3, P-1(B), P-1(C), C-5 and C-7 packages (hereinafter referred as the
Interfacing Contractors), in two (2) packages P-4(X) and P-4(Y) as under
Package – P-4(X): Procurement, Fabrication, Check-Assembly and Painting at
workshop and Transportation to various bridge Sites of Steel Truss Superstructure
along with bearings for 14 Nos. (GADs 66, 69, 2, 58, 8, 1134, C5-2, C5-3, 25, 28, 1967,
32, 42, and Laundry) of Bridges for High Speed Rail Corridor for crossing over Roads
/ Rivers / Railways / other structures for the Project for Construction of Mumbai-
Package – P-4(Y): Procurement, Fabrication, Check-Assembly and Painting at

workshop and Transportation to various bridge Sites of Steel Truss Superstructure
along with bearings for 19 Nos. (GADs 65, 1, 57, 67, 3, 6, 68, 12, 61, 14, 15, 62, C5-1,
27, 31, 37, 2357-3, 54&55 and Diesel Shed) of Bridges for High Speed Rail Corridor
for crossing over Roads / Rivers / Railways / other structures for the Project for
Construction of Mumbai-Ahmedabad High Speed Rail
The Works include Contractor’s labour, materials, plant & equipment and incidentals
for fabrication, check assembly and required painting of steel truss superstructure. It
shall also include providing insurances, guarantees, warranties, as-built records and
drawings, and fulfilling all Contractor’s duties and obligations as specified in the
Contract.
Details of the Steel Truss Bridges along with their locations are indicated in Table -1
and Table -2 for P-4(X) and P-4(Y) respectively.

Table -1 Details of Bridges under Package No. MAHSR – P-4(X)
Approx.
Crossing Approx. Chainage Span
Bridge Weight
Sl.No. Stake (Km) of Bridge configuration
GAD No. (in Metric
holder Centre Line (m)
Tons)
Ulhas 100+130,130
1 66 28.300 9672
River + 100
2 69 NH, Pipes 33.015 100 1464
Railway 60,100+130,6
3 2 46.578 6127
DFC-1 0
4 58 Railway 71.335 80 1132
Railway 100,100,100,8
5 8 85.600 5524
DFC-3 0
6 1134 NH-53 254.625 70 687
7 C5-2 VMC 398.400 60 632
8 C5-3 Railway 399.050 60, 80 1764
9 25 Railway 400.814 60, 60 1263
10 28 Railway 402.933 60 646
Expressw
11 1967 416.188 100+130 4836
ay-3
12 32 NH8-7 449.589 100,100 2928
AMC
13 42 (Anupam 497.870 80 1132
Bridge)
Railway
14 Laundry 499.375 60 632
(Laundry)
Table - 2 Details of Bridges under Package No. MAHSR – P-4(Y)
Weight
Bridge Approx. Chainage Span
Crossing (approx.)
Sl.No. GAD (Km) of Bridge configuration
Stake holder (in Metric
No. Centre Line (m)
Tons)
1 65 NH-48 21.345 80 1132
2 1 Railway 26.035 100 1795
3 57 Railway 28.130 75,75,75 2073
4 67 Thane Depot 30.170 80 1132
Chinchoti
5 3 Anjur Phata 48.200 80,80 2264
Road

Weight
Bridge Approx. Chainage Span
Crossing (approx.)
Sl.No. GAD (Km) of Bridge configuration
Stake holder (in Metric
No. Centre Line (m)
Tons)
6 6 DFC-2 62.900 70+130+70 3717
Bhilosa
7 68 159.707 100 1464
Industries
8 12 DFC+Railway 285.934 100,60 2096
9 61 DFC 317.382 100 1464
SH64 +
10 14 326.938 100+130 4836
Railway
11 15 DFC 333.428 100+130,100 6631
12 62 DFC 385.000 70 687
13 C5-1 Railway 396.500 80, 80 1132
14 27 Railway 401.618 60, 60 1263
15 31 Railway 446.670 100 1464
16 37 NH-8 494.748 70 687
MEGA
17 2357-3 500.366 100 1464
(Tunnel)
54 &
18 SH-41 505.122 90+90 2547
55
Diesel
19 Railway 507.260 60 632
Shed
The Contractor shall implement all the interfacing works with other contractors as set
out for this package in Sub-Division 04040.
The Contractor shall maintain quality control procedure to the extent necessary to
ensure that all Works are completed as per Specifications provided in the Bidding
Documents.

General
The Works shall include following items:
1.1 Preparation of shop drawings
1.2 Procurement & storage of structural steel, bearings and other materials
1.3 Fabrication of steel truss superstructure
1.4 Check assembly of superstructure with Bearing
1.5 Painting
1.6 Transportation of steel truss members to the bridge-site/site-delivery-
yards, unloading and stacking
1.7 Temporary Works
1.8 Mandatory approvals from the concerned authorities
1.9 Interface with other contractors
1.10 Any other works required as per the Contract
Preparation of Shop drawings
The Contractor shall prepare detailed shop drawings on the basis of the Drawings, in
such size and such details as may be specified by the Engineer. The shop drawings
shall indicate all necessary details including member sizes, edge preparation, welding
sequence, type and size of welding. No work of fabrication shall be started without
approval of the Engineer.
Procurement & storage of structural steel, bearings and other materials
Procurement & storage of structural steels, bearings and other materials including but
not limited to procurement of materials free from all imperfections, mill scales, slag
intrusions, laminations, rusts and storage of the same in or near the workshop in a
specified manner to prevent deterioration and to ensure the preservation of their
quality and fitness for the work. All materials shall be of tested quality and the
Contractor shall submit the test certificates, to the Engineer, in respect of each
consignment of the material.
Fabrication of steel truss superstructure
Fabrication of steel truss superstructure shall include but not limited to cutting, milling,
machining and welding of the structural steel to appropriate shape and size (as per
Drawings), drilling of holes for bolts as per the joint detail shown in the Drawings and
shop drawings to form the truss members following proper procedure as mentioned
in the Technical Specifications. The Contractor shall deploy experienced welders who
have qualified the tests as mentioned in the Technical Specifications.
Check assembly of the superstructure with Bearing
Check assembly of the superstructure with bearing, which are procured by the
Contractor, shall be done at workshop to check the accuracy of fit before handing over
to Interfacing Contractors, for all spans and all components in case of simply
supported span and at least one span along with adequate number of panels of adjacent

span, necessary to represent continuous behaviour, in case of continuous span after

fabrication of all steel truss members. Enough temporary bolts and drift pins shall be
used in the assembly to keep all the parts in place.
Painting
Necessary paint shall be applied, as per the Technical Specification, to the truss
members after dis-assembly of the Check assembly.
Transportation of steel truss members to the bridges-site/site-delivery-yards,
unloading and stacking
Transportation of fabricated steel structural members shall include but not limited to
proper marking, grouping, labelling and packing of the truss members, loading of
truss members on to the trailer truck in an appropriate manner in order not to damage
to the painting and the structure during transit to the bridge-site/site-delivery-yards
along with unloading and stacking of the fabricated material. The Contractor shall
prepare match-marking drawings showing the different parts of the truss and other
necessary guidelines for assembly of the steel truss superstructure at the Site and
handover the same to the Interfacing Contractors after obtaining Engineer’s approval.
Temporary Works
Establishment and maintenance of fully equipped workshops having enough yard
area with all necessary equipment, tools, machinery, skilled workers, system and
procedure to achieve the best quality of fabrication of the steel truss. The
Contractor shall maintain quality control procedure to the extent necessary to
ensure that all works are completed as per the specifications.
The Contractor shall plan for the Test Fabrication using partial Mock-ups
immediately after the Commencement Date. Test Fabrication shall be undertaken
after approval of the Method Statements by the Engineer. Steel plate to be used
for the Test Fabrication shall be of same grade and thickness as of the actual steel
truss. Machinery and equipment to be used for Test Fabrication shall be the same
as those to be used for actual fabrication work. The Test Fabrication shall be
conducted for each workshop separately.
The Contractor shall execute all temporary works required to facilitate fabrication
and transportation. All temporary arrangements and works shall be designed as
required and necessary designs/drawings shall be prepared by the Contractor. The
temporary works carried out at Site shall be subsequently dismantled and
removed by the Contractor after completion of the Works. The Engineer may
however permit retention of some of the temporary works with mutual consent
between the Contractor and the Engineer.
The Contractor shall earmark the area of workshop which will be exclusively used
for storage, fabrication, check-assembly, painting and packing for this Work. This
enclosed area will be referred to as site (workshop site) for this package. In case
the Contractor wants to use the workshop site for any other project, the Contractor
should inform well in advance to the Engineer.

The cost of all temporary works including the design/drawing and dismantling
the same after completion of work mentioned in para a) to c) above is deemed to
be included in the rates of respective items for which these temporary works are
required. No separate payment will be made for temporary works.
Mandatory approvals from the concerned authorities
The Works may require mandatory clearance/approval/sanction from the concerned
Railway Authorities/Road Authorities/Civil Authorities/Fire department/Municipal
Corporations/State Electricity Boards/Police, etc. before they can be undertaken by
the Contractor. The responsibility of obtaining necessary sanction/clearance of the
concerned authorities before undertaking the work rests with the Contractor. No claim
for delay or compensation from the Contractor on this account shall be considered.
Interface with Other contractors
Specific coordination and interfacing with Interfacing Contractors is very critical for
timely execution of Steel Bridge works in the respective contract packages. The
Interfacing requirements are detailed at Sub-Division 04040 [Interface, Coordination
and Cooperation with Other Parties].
Any other works required as per the Contract
The Contractor shall execute any other works not mentioned herein above but are
necessary and required by the Contract to complete the Works.

Table of Contents
02010 Project ························································································· 11

Profile and Background.........................................................................................11
Proposed Works Packages ....................................................................................11
02020 Natural Conditions at the Site ··························································· 15
Meteorological Information ..................................................................................15
Hydrological Information......................................................................................16
Topographical Information ...................................................................................16

Profile and Background

The Mumbai - Ahmedabad High Speed Railway (MAHSR) Project has been
designated as the first HSR networks planned to be constructed in India. For this
network the Japanese system of the Shinkansen Bullet Train has been selected for
its safety, performance and reliability record. The National High-Speed Rail
Corporation Limited (NHSRCL) was formed on the directions of the Ministry of
Railway for the development and implementation of HSR projects and will be the
Project executing agency and act as Employer in the proposed works packages.
The MAHSR Project line connects Mumbai, located in Maharashtra State with
Ahmedabad in Gujarat State in western India, passing through one Union
Territory, Dadra and Nagar Haveli.
Mumbai City in Maharashtra State lies on the west coast of India.
Ahmedabad city in Gujarat state is a metropolitan in West India.
The MAHSR corridor starts in Mumbai with a 21 km long double track tunnel
under urban areas of the city and nearby coastal inlets. The overall total length of
the corridor is approximately 508 Km and will incorporate 12 stations.
The Japan International Cooperation Agency (JICA), in co-ordination with the
Government of India (GOI) has completed a feasibility study with the aim of
designing and implementing on the MAHSR line.
Proposed Works Packages
The Mumbai Ahmedabad high speed rail project is divided into separate contract
packages (tentative) which are broadly as follows:
Package Work
C-1 Design and Construction of Civil and Buildings Works including Testing and
Commissioning on Design-Build Lump Sum Price Basis for Double Line High Speed
Railway for Mumbai Underground Station (By Cut and Cover method) at Bandra-Kurla
Complex in the State of Maharashtra on Project for the Construction of Mumbai-
C-2 Construction of Tunnelling Works including Testing and Commissioning for Double
Line High Speed Railway using Shield Tunnel Boring Machine (TBM) and New Austrian
Tunnelling Method (NATM) between Mumbai Underground Station at Bandra-Kurla
Complex (MAHSR Km. 0.773) and Shilphata (MAHSR Km. 21.150) in the State of
Maharashtra for the Project for Construction of Mumbai-Ahmedabad High Speed Rail.

C-3 Design and Construction of Civil and Building Works including Testing and
Commissioning on Design Build Lump Sum Price Basis for Double Line High Speed
Railway involving Viaducts & Bridges, Crossing Bridges, Maintenance Depot, Tunnels
and Stations(Thane, Virar and Boisar), between Shilphata in the State of Maharashtra
and Zaroli at Maharashtra-Gujarat border from MAHSR Km 21.150 to MAHSR Km
156.600 [excluding fabrication and transportation of steel truss girders, and Thane Depot]
Commissioning on Design Build Lump Sum Price basis for Double Line High Speed
Railway involving Viaducts, Bridges, Maintenance Depots, Tunnel, Stations (Vapi,
Bilimora, Surat and Bharuch), and Surat Depot between Zaroli Village at Maharashtra-
Gujarat Border and Vadodara from MAHSR Km. 156.600 to MAHSR Km. 393.700,
excluding Works for 04 No. PSC Bridges and 07 No. Steel Truss Bridges, in the State of
Gujarat and the Union Territory of Dadra and Nagar Haveli for the Project for
Construction of Mumbai-Ahmedabad High Speed Rail
C-5 Construction of Civil and Buildings Works including Testing and Commissioning for
Double Line High Speed Railway involving Vadodara Station (MAHSR), Viaducts,
Bridges and Associated works in close vicinity of existing Vadodara Station between
MAHSR Km. 393.700 and MAHSR Km. 401.900 in the State of Gujarat on Project for
the Construction of Mumbai-Ahmedabad High Speed Rail.
Commissioning on Design-Build Lump Sum price basis for Double Line High Speed
Railway involving Viaducts, Bridges, Maintenance Depots and Station (Anand/Nadiad)
between MAHSR Km. 401.898 and MAHSR Km. 489.467 [excluding Works for 01 No.
PSC Bridge and 04 Nos. Steel Truss Bridges] in the State of Gujarat on Project for the
Construction of Mumbai-Ahmedabad High Speed Rail..
Commissioning on Design Build Lump Sum Price Basis for Double Line High Speed
Railway involving Ahmedabad Station, Sabarmati Station, Viaduct & Bridges, Crossing
Bridges (excluding fabrication and transportation of steel truss girders) and Associated
works between MAHSR Km. 489.467 and MAHSR Km. 507.599 in the State of Gujarat
C-8 Design and Construction of Civil and Building Works for the Depot on Design Build
Lump Sum Price Basis for Double Line High Speed Railway involving works for Site
Formation, Abutment, Retaining Walls, Roadbed for track, Box Culvert, Roads, Cable
Duct, Foundations of OHE Masts, Piping, Drainage, Water Supply, Water Harvesting,
Fire Fighting, Landscaping, Boundary Wall, General Inspection Train Shed,
Maintenance Depot and other Associated works At Sabarmati between MAHSR Km.
507.599 and MAHSR Km.509.726 in the State of Gujarat for the Project for Construction
of Mumbai-Ahmedabad High Speed Rail.
P-1 (B) Construction of Bridges for Double Line High Speed Railway for 02 No. PSC Bridges
(GAD 9 & 1441) and 07 No. Steel Truss Bridges (GAD 68, 1134, 12, 61, 14, 15 & 62)
[excluding fabrication and transportation of steel truss girders] between Zaroli Village at
Maharashtra-Gujarat Border (MAHSR Km. 156.600) and Vadodara (MAHSR Km.
393.700), in the State of Gujarat and the Union Territory of Dadra and Nagar Haveli for
the Project for Construction of Mumbai-Ahmedabad High Speed Rail.

P-1 (C) Construction of Bridges for Double Line High Speed Railway for 01 No. PSC Bridge
(GAD 33) and 04 No. Steel Truss Bridges (GAD 28, 1967, 31 and 32) [excluding
fabrication and transportation of steel truss girders] between Vadodara (MAHSR Km.
401.898) and Ahmedabad (MAHSR Km. 489.467), in the State of Gujarat for the Project
for Construction of Mumbai-Ahmedabad High Speed Rail
P-2 Construction of PSC Bridge No. GAD 10 over National Highway (NH-48) at MAHSR
Km 235.379, Navsari district, Gujarat for Mumbai- Ahmedabad High Speed Railway
Project.
P-3 Construction of PSC Bridge No. GAD 11 over National Highway (NH-48) at MAHSR
Km 241.640, Navsari district, Gujarat on Project for the Development of Mumbai-
P-4(X) Procurement, Fabrication, Check-Assembly and Painting at workshop and Transportation
to various Bridge Sites of Steel Truss Superstructure along with bearings for 14 Nos.
(GADs 66, 69, 2, 58, 8, 1134, C5-2, C5-3, 25, 28, 1967, 32, 42 and Laundry) of Bridges
for High Speed Rail Corridor for crossing over Roads / Rivers / Railways / other
structures for the Project for Construction of Mumbai-Ahmedabad High Speed Rail.
P-4(Y) Procurement, Fabrication, Check-Assembly and Painting at workshop and Transportation
to various Bridge Sites of Steel Truss Superstructure along with bearings for 19 Nos.
(GADs 65, 1, 57, 67, 3, 6, 68, 12, 61, 14, 15, 62, C5-1, 27, 31, 37, 2357-3, 54&55 and
Diesel Shed) of Bridges for High Speed Rail Corridor for crossing over Roads / Rivers /
Railways / other structures for the Project for Construction of Mumbai-Ahmedabad High
Speed Rail.
T-1 Design, Supply and Construction of Track and Track related Works including Testing
and Commissioning on Design-Build Lump Sum price basis for Double Track High
Speed Railway between Mumbai Station at Bandra-Kurla complex (MAHSR Km. -
0.255) and Zaroli Village at Maharashtra-Gujarat Border (MAHSR Km. 156.600) in the
State of Maharashtra on Project for the Construction of Mumbai-Ahmedabad High Speed
Rail.
and Commissioning on Design-Build Lump Sum Price basis for Double Line High Speed
Railway between Zaroli Village at Maharashtra-Gujarat Border (MAHSR Km. 156.600)
and Vadodara (MAHSR Km. 393.700) in the State of Gujarat and the Union Territory of
Dadra and Nagar Haveli for the Project for Construction of Mumbai-Ahmedabad High
Speed Rail.
and Commissioning on Design-Build Lump Sum price basis for Double Track High
Speed Railway between Vadodara (MAHSR 393.700) and Sabarmati Depot and
Workshop (MAHSR Km. 508.300) in the State of Gujarat on Project for the Construction
of Mumbai-Ahmedabad High Speed Rail.
E-1 Design, Supply, Construction, Installation of 2 x 25 k V Electrification, Signalling
facilities, Telecommunication facilities, Substation system, Overhead Equipment, Light
and Electrical facilities, Building of Electric Equipment, Operation Controlling system,
SCADA system along with Associated Works including Testing and Commissioning on
Design-Build Lump Sum price basis for Double Line High Speed Railway between
Mumbai Station at Bandra-Kurla complex (MAHSR Km. -0.255) and Sabarmati Depot
(MAHSR Km. 508.300) in the States of Maharashtra and Gujarat and Union Territory of

Dadra and Nagar Haveli on Project for the Construction of Mumbai-Ahmedabad High
Speed Rail.
D-1 Design, Construction, Installation, Testing and Commissioning of Thane Depot

consisting of Inspection Shed, various buildings, Maintenance Facilities, and Associated
works on Design-Build Lump Sum Price Basis in the State of Maharashtra for the Project
for Construction of Mumbai-Ahmedabad High Speed Rail.
D-2 Design, Construction, Installation, Testing and Commissioning of Sabarmati Depot
consisting of Workshop, Inspection Shed, various buildings, Maintenance Facilities, and
Associated works on Design-Build Lump Sum Price basis in the State of Gujarat for the
Project for Construction of Mumbai-Ahmedabad High Speed Rail.
R-1 Design, Supply and Construction of Rolling Stocks including Testing and
Commissioning on Design-Build Lump Sum price basis for Double Line High Speed
Railway including Spare Parts for Maintenance, General Inspection Train and Associated
works in connection with Project for the Construction of Mumbai-Ahmedabad High
Speed Rail.
IM-1 Manufacture and Supply including Testing & Commissioning of Inspection and
Maintenance Car for Track, Tunnel, Bridges, OHE and other various machines for
Associated works in connection with Project for the Construction of Mumbai-
TI-1 Design and Build Works for Training Institute Buildings (Phase-II) including Testing and
Commissioning on Project for the Construction of Training Institute for Mumbai-
TI-2 Design and Build Works for Construction of Training Line with Slab Track for Mumbai-
Ahmedabad High Speed Railway Project.
TI-3 Design and Build Works for Construction of Lodging (Phase – I) of Training Institute for
Mumbai-Ahmedabad High Speed Railway Project.

Meteorological Information
Gujarat region, being located on the Tropic of Cancer, falls into the sub-tropical
climatic zone having hot and dry weather and a large part of the State lies between
35°C and 45°C isotherms. The rainfall in the State is moderate as it forms a transition
zone between the heavy monsoon area of Konkan to the south and the arid areas of
Rajasthan to the north. Maharashtra, lying on the Konkan coast on the western part of
India, generally has hot, humid and muggy weather. During the summer, from March
to June, the climate is very warm and humid, particularly in the Eastern region. During
the winter, i.e. from November to February the climate is pleasant, when the humidity
remains low.
In accordance with the definitions of the India Meteorological Department, on the
Indian sub-continent a year comprises the following seasons:
Summer (pre-monsoon) March to May
Monsoon season June to September
Post-monsoon season October to November
Winter December to February
Temperature
During the summer months, the mean daily maximum temperature is around 40°C
and the mean daily minimum temperature is around 25°C, although temperatures
can reach peaks of 44-45°C. During the coldest month of January, the maximum
temperature is normally below 30°C and the normal minimum temperature varies
from 7°C to 18°C (with a mean of around 14°C). Occasionally the temperature drops
to 3-4°C.
From the month of March onwards the temperature starts rising, reaching a
maximum in June of about 45°C in some parts of the State.
Rainfall
The region receives much of its rainfall from the southwest monsoon between the
months of June to September. The amount of rainfall gradually decreases northward;
in the southernmost part of the region it is around 1,200 mm/year, while in Vadodara
it can be as low as 900 mm/year.
Winds
Winds are generally light to moderate, increasing in intensity during the late summer
and monsoon. Coastal areas experience stronger winds.
Humidity
The relative humidity in all parts of the State is low, although in coastal areas it can
be moderately high. Generally, the lowest relative humidity is experienced during
the months of January to March. Relative humidity increases as the temperature

increases and reaches a maximum during the months of June to August. In the
Gujarat region, relative humidity generally varies from 37% to 84%.
Hydrological Information
India is divided into 25 river basins which form the basic hydrological units for water
resource planning and management. This is based on the classification defined by the
Water Resource Information System (WRIS) project of India. MAHSR route falls in
west flowing rivers from Tapi to Tadri, Tapi basin, Narmada basin, Mahi basin and
sabarmati basin.
MAHSR route crosses Ulhas, Vaitarana, Damanganga, Tapi, Narmada, Mahi and
Sabarmati River which ranges from 9 km-139km upstream from mouth of the river.
The width of these rivers at MAHSR cross point varies from 300m-1000m. the
MAHSR route crosses sandbank of Damanganga, Narmada and Mahi river. The land
use of waterfront near MAHSR route is mostly agricultural or forest except for
Sabarmati river area.
MAHSR crossing point with Sabarmati river is planned at just next to Sabarmati rail
bridge. Sabarmati river walkway does exist along Sabarmati river at MAHSR crossing
point.
Topographical Information
General Topography
India lies largely on the Indian Plate, the northern portion of the Indo-Australian
plate, whose continental crust forms the Indian subcontinent. The country is situated
north of the equator between 8°4' and 37°6' north latitude and 68°7' and 97°25' east
longitude. It is the seventh-largest country in the world, with a total area of 3,166,414
square kilometres. India measures 3,214 km from north to south and 2,933 km from
east to west. It has a land frontier of 15,200 km and a coastline of 7,517 km.
The project area is located at west of India facing at Arabian Sea, belonged to
Maharashtra state and Gujarat state. Topographical features of Maharashtra state and
Gujarat states are summarized below.
Topography of Maharashtra state
Maharashtra is located between 15.4° and 22.1° latitude and 72.6° and 80.9°
longitude and it forms a major part of peninsular India with seacoast length of 720km
on western side. The dominant physical trait of the Maharashtra state is its plateau
character. The Sahyadri Range is the physical backbone of Maharashtra, rising on
an average to an elevation of 1000m, it falls in steep cliffs to the Konkan on the west.
Eastwards, the hill falls in steps through a transitional area known as Mawal to the
plateau level. The series of crowing plateau on the crest forms a distinctive feature
of the Sahyadri Range.
The state is divided physically into two unequal parts as “Coastal strip of Konkan”
and “Deccan plateau”.

The coastal area known as Konkan is more rugged in the south than in the north and
characterized by hilly topography. Except for the hilly portion near the Sahyadri
range, the altitude varies from almost 0 to 100 m above mean sea level. The Konkan
lying between the Arabian sea and the Sahyadri Range is narrow coastal lowland,
barely 50km wide, and it is far from being a plain area. Highly dissected and broken,
the Konkan alternates between narrow, steep-sided valleys and low laterite plateau.
Deccan plateau is a land bounded by Satpura and Satmala ranges in the north,
Sahyadri Ghats in the west and extends in the south-east direction to the state
boundary. A number of big rivers like Godavari and Krishna drain at this area.
The river basins are hilly and narrow in the west and broad and flat in the east. The
valley area is flat with long stretches of deep black alluvial soil on the east of the
plateau.
Topography of Gujarat State
Gujarat is located between 20°01' to 24°07' north latitude and 68°04' to 74°04' east
longitude and covers an area of 195,984 square kilometres. Topography of Gujarat
shows a wide range of physical features ranging from physiology, drainage, soil to
coastal and marine environment, etc.
In terms of topography, Gujarat shows a wide variation. The topography of Gujarat
indicates the varied landscape and physical features. The altitude of Gujarat varies
almost to 122 m above mean sea level.
The state of Gujarat is situated on the west coast. Based on the categories of
physiographic units as relief, slopes and landforms, the state is divided into three
parts as “the coastal area”, “the plains”, and “the eastern highlands”. Surat, Valsad,
Vadodara and Navsari districts come under the “mainland Gujarat” regions. The
coastal areas from the Damanganga River upwards north is a narrow coastal belt
which is mainly a barren strip of silt and salt marshes which broadens north towards
Bharuch district and becomes fertile. The plains area is also small strips in these two
districts as they merge with the eastern highlands in Bharuch and Surat districts and
nearly disappear in the south of Surat. The eastern highlands consist of the Vindhya,
Saputara and Sahyadris mountain ranges.

Table of Contents
03010 Definitions and Abbreviations ··························································· 19

Definitions .............................................................................................................19
Abbreviations ........................................................................................................27
03020 Correspondence, Communications and Submission ································ 34
General ..................................................................................................................34
Submission Procedure ...........................................................................................34
Engineer’s Response .............................................................................................35
Document Control Procedure ................................................................................36
Project Information and Communication System .................................................37
03030 Format of Documents and Drawings ··················································· 39
General ..................................................................................................................39
Language of Communication and Units ...............................................................39
Photographs ...........................................................................................................40
Videos ...................................................................................................................40
CAD Standards......................................................................................................41

Definitions
In addition to the words and expressions defined in the General Conditions, following words
and expressions shall have the meaning assigned to them except where the context otherwise
requires:
“Accident” means an incident which has given rise to injury, ill health or fatality.
“Approach Lines” mean MAHSR track and / or alignment which is connecting between
Main Line and maintenance facilities of Depot or Maintenance Depot.
“As-Built Documents” mean the set of drawings and documents which are a true record
of the construction of the Permanent Works prepared by the Contractor.
“As-Built Drawings” means those drawings produced by the Contractor and endorsed by
its true records of construction of the Permanent Works and which have been given a
consent from the Engineer.
“Availability” shall mean the probability that an item will be in a state to perform a
required function under given conditions at a given instant or over a given time interval
assuming that the required external resources are provided.
“CAD Standards” means requirements for CAD, as specified in the Clause 5 under Sub-
Division 03030 [Format of Documents and Drawings] by the Engineer.
“Charted Utilities” mean identified Utilities listed in the Reference Information/Report,
which may infringe and obstruct the execution of the Works under the Contract.
“Classified Distinction” means a distinctive category of the Contractor’s submission to
obtain the Engineer’s response for, as specified in the Clause 1 under Sub-Division 03020
[Correspondence, Communications and Submission] by the Engineer.
“Commissioning Spares” shall be kept on the Site by the Contractor throughout the
construction/installation and testing and commissioning periods, sufficient stocks of
Spare Parts to enable immediate replacement of any items in the Permanent Works found
to be defective or in any way not in accordance with the Works Requirements shall be
available during the construction/installation and testing and commissioning periods.
“Construction Environmental Management Plan” means the plan including, as
required, details of compliance with applicable laws and regulations for environmental
protection and mitigation requirements, including the JICA guidelines for environmental
and social considerations.
“Construction/Installation and/or Manufacture Documents” means the document
which contains all drawings, calculations, computer software, samples, patterns, models,
operation/maintenance manuals and other information to be submitted by the Contractor
and is approved by the Engineer.
“Construction/Installation Drawings” shall be derived directly from the detailed
design and shall detail fully the Permanent and Temporary Works. These drawings are
the ones which the Contractor considers sufficient in detail for construction or installation
and is approved by the Engineer.
“Construction Management Plan” means the plan that shall be co-ordinated with each
other and shall collectively define, describe and encompass the Contractor’s proposed
methods, procedures, processes, organisation, sequencing of activities, etc. and shows

how these combine together to assure that the Works fully meet the requirements of the
Contract in respect of Sub-Division 4020 [Works Management Planning] of the General
Specifications.
“Consumables” means those parts that are not repairable and usually have a relatively
short life span.
“Contractor’s Project Plan” means the plan to provide a clear overview of the
Contractor’s organisation, management systems and the methods to be used for the
execution and completion of the Works
“Contract Spares” means any Spare Parts recommended by the Contractor for the
operation and maintenance of the Permanent Works for a period of five (5) years
following the Taking Over of the Works.
“Contractual Works Programme” shall supersede all other programmes previously
submitted and shall be deemed to be the programme on which the Contractor has based
his Accepted Contract Amount and in accordance with which it shall execute the Works
within the specified Time for Completion It means the programme specified in Sub-
Division 04070 [Works Programme and Schedule].
“Criteria” means the governing specifications and conditions as specified in the
Technical Specifications.
“Critical Path Method” means a schedule network analysis technique used to determine
the amount of scheduling flexibility (the amount of float) on various logical network
paths in the project schedule network, and to determine the minimum total project
duration.
“Day” means calendar day unless expressly stated otherwise.
“Defect” is any part of the Works which is not in accordance with the Contract.
“Defects Management Plan” means the plan as set forth in Sub-Clause 7.6 of Sub-
Division 04020 [Works Management Planning] of General Specifications
“Defect Spares” means sufficient stocks of Spare Parts kept in an off-Site location in
India by the Contractor throughout the Defects Notification Period to enable immediate
replacement of any items in the Permanent Works found to require replacement as part
of the Contractor's obligations during the Defects Notification Period.
“Delivery Plan” means plan that will specify the delivery arrangement of the
Contractor’s Equipment, Plant or machinery from the manufacturing facility to the Site
location where it is required to be installed or utilised.
“Delivery Route Drawings” means drawings demonstrating how the Contractor and
Interfacing Contractors gain access to the Site and carry out the required activities to
ensure safe delivery and installation of the Plant, Contractor’s Equipment and Materials.
“Defined Area” means an area within which Works Trains will be operated and the
Employer’s Defined Area working safety rules will apply.
“Design Certificate” means an undertaking from the designer, which is submitted by
the Contractor, certifying that the design complies with the Works Requirements.
“Design Change Notice” means changes incorporated in the drawings depending upon
the site conditions. The Contractor shall propose a solution and procedure either through
a Design Change Notice or a Field Change Notice.

“Design Data” means all survey and investigations, specifications, plans, drawings,
details, graphs, sketches, models, levels, setting-out dimensions, calculations and other
documents related to the design of the Works.
“Design life” is the period during which the system is expected to work satisfactorily
within its specified parameters; i.e. the life expectancy of the system.
“Design Quality Management Plan” means the document submitted by the Contractor
to the Engineer for consent, as specified in the Clause 3 under Sub-Division 07010
[Quality Management]; detailing provisions, for its management and control of design
works, that are to be implemented and maintained effectively during the period of the
Works.
“DN Line” means the down line of the MAHSR double line track route from Mumbai
to Ahmedabad.
“Emergency Situation” is a particular type of incident having potential to affect many
persons or severe property damage.
“Factory Acceptance Tests” means the tests to be performed on all Plant, Materials and
systems manufactured for incorporation into the Permanent Works at the place of
manufacture prior to delivery to the Site to verify compliance with the Specifications and
quality standards.
“Factory Testing Plan” means the plan prepared by the Contractor for review of the
Engineer, detailing and explaining how the Contractor will plan, perform, and document
all inspections and tests that will be conducted to verify and validate Plant and Materials
prior to their delivery to the Site.
“Field Change Notice” means changes incorporated in the drawings depending upon
the site conditions. The Contractor shall propose a solution and procedure either through
a Design Change Notice or a Field Change Notice.
“First Aid Station” means the station that provides emergency care or treatment before
regular medical aid can be obtained.
“First Article Inspection” means the inspection to be performed on the first article of
the manufacturing multiple product of the same type, shall be referred to Sub-Clause 5.1
(7) of Sub-Division 04020.
“Hazard” means source, situation, or act with a potential for harm in terms of human
injury or ill health or a combination of these.
“HSR Benchmarks” means the benchmarks provided by the Employer, used to locate,
confirm the Right of Way (ROW) & its co-ordinates including levels.
“Incident” means work related event(s) in which an injury or ill health (regardless of
severity) or fatality occurred or could have occurred.
“Independent Laboratory” means a laboratory, submitted by the Contractor to the
Engineer for approval, as specified in the Sub-Clause 5.3 of Sub-Division 07020 [Plant,
Materials and Workmanship]; that is free from outside control and not subject to direct
or indirect influence or authority of the Employer, the Engineer, or the Contractor.
“Indian Railway (IR)” means the rail tracks of the Indian Railway or any other
Organization and any ancillary areas of Indian Railway such as the depots, sidings,
stations, terminus, traction power stations, etc.

“Indian Railway Envelope” means the zone or zones within the works containing the
track work and equipment necessary for the operation of the Indian Railway, within the
Schedule of Dimension (SOD) of Indian Railway
“Inspection and Test Plan (ITP)” means a document, as specified in the Sub-Clause
2.8.2 of Sub-Division 07010 [Quality Management], that states inspection and testing
requirements and actions provisioned for the Works, related process, Plant, or Materials.
It is used to control, check, monitor and record; testing procedures that are required for
quality assurance and to achieve the agreed quality requirements for the Works.
“Installation Tests” means the tests to be performed to verify the conformity of
completion of an installation or assembly to the design documents approved by the
Engineer prior to the start of Commissioning, and they must be successfully completed
before the Inspection and Test on Completion.
“Integrated Testing and Commissioning” means those tests that demonstrate the
integration of the complete system meeting the requirements of the Contract in an
operating environment. Integrated Testing and Commissioning form part of the
Inspection and Test on Completion to be performed by the Contractor in order to achieve
Employer’s Taking Over of the Works or any Section.
“Interface Coordinator” means the person who has the responsibility, and authority
with substantial experience to resolve interface matters to the satisfaction of the Engineer
and provide the necessary support team for the Interface Management System as
specified in, Sub- Division 04040 [Interface, Coordination and Cooperation with Other
Parties].
“Interface Dates” are dates agreed between the Contractor and other interfacing
contractors executing the works on the Project and established in Coordinated
Installation Programme.
“Interface Management Plan” means the plan for all interface issues that may arise
during the design, construction, testing and commissioning of the Works, in consultation
with the Interfacing Contractors or Interfacing Parties and the Engineer under, Sub-
Division 04040 [Interface, Coordination and Cooperation with Other Parties].
“Interfacing Contractor” means the Contractor engaged by the Employer or other
agencies having an interface issue with the Contractor for the Works.
“Interfacing Parties” comprises the interfacing contractors/consultants/service
providers, who are engaged in part of the works, relevant authorities and public utility
agency.
“Interface Table” means the table that describes the relationships between the
Contractor and Interfacing Contractors/Interfacing Parties and their roles and
responsibilities is a key document.
“Isolation” means isolating and earthing of the electrical equipment, by disconnection
of the respective section from all incoming sources of electricity supply and also outgoing
connections.
“ITP for Test on Completion at Proposal Phase” means the Contractor’s submission
of proposed outline of ITP for each Test on Completion; submitted by the Contractor to
the Engineer for review, as specified in the Sub-Clause 3.2 under Sub-Division 07030
[Test on Completion and Tests after Completion].

“ITP for Test on Completion at Submittal Phase” means the Contractor’s submission
of detailed ITP for each Test on Completion; submitted by the Contractor to the Engineer
for consent, as specified in the Sub-Clause 3.2 under Sub-Division 07030 [Test on
Completion and Tests after Completion].
“Key Equipment” means items of Contractor’s Equipment (whether owned by the
Contractor or not) specified as such in the Pre-qualification application and/or Bidding
Documents.
“Key Personnel” means those persons named or positions as such in the Pre-
qualification application and/or Bidding Documents. or so designated by the Engineer at
any time during the Contract.
“Kick-Off Meeting” means the meeting held by the Engineer under Clause 1 of Sub-
Division 04030 [Meetings], which is formally to notify all parties concerned under the
Contract that the project has commenced and to ensure every party has a common
understanding and their role from the Commencement Date up until issuance of the
Performance Certificate.
“Maintainability” means a characteristic expressed as the probability that an item will
be retained in or restored to a specified condition within a given period, when the
maintenance is performed in accordance with prescribed procedures and resources.
“Maintenance Manuals” means the manuals providing detailed instructions for the
maintenance of infrastructure and maintenance facilities included under the Contract as
set forth in Sub-Division 04110 [Sections].
“Manufacturer’s Arrangement” means a document, as specified in Sub-Clause 2.8.1
under Sub-Division 07010 [Quality Management], that states the way a particular work,
task or process along with various associated aspects such as quality, time and resources
are planned to be indirectly controlled by the Contractor or its Subcontractor.
“Manufacturer’s Certificate” means an official document from the manufacturer,
attesting facts and test result about the quality characteristics of the manufactured product
supplied by it and duly certified by the Contractor for acceptance of related product upon
obtaining approval from the Engineer to the Contractor’s submission; as specified in
Clause 4 under Sub-Division 07020 [Plant, Materials and Workmanship].
“Manufacturing Quality Management Plan” means the subsidiary document in the
Works Quality Management Plan (WQMP), submitted by the Contractor to the Engineer
for consent, as specified in Clause 5 under Sub-Division 07010 [Quality Management];
detailing provisions, for its management and control of manufacturing of the Works by
itself or by the Subcontractor’s facilities or by both, that are to be implemented and
maintained effectively during the period of the Works to be carried out off the Site .
“Method Statement” means a document, as specified in the Sub-Clause 2.8.1 under
Sub-Division 07010 [Quality Management], that states the way a particular work, task
or process along with various associated aspects such as quality, safety, environment
protection, time and resources, are planned to be directly controlled by the Contractor or
its Subcontractor.
“Monthly Programme Update” means the Contractor’s update of his programmes in
Sub-Clause 3.3 under Sub-Division 04030 [Meetings].
“Monthly Progress Meeting” means the meeting specified in Clause 3, Sub-Division
04030 [Meetings].

“Monthly Progress Report” means the report that the Contractor shall prepare and
submit to the Engineer in accordance with Sub-Division 04080 [Monthly Progress
Report Requirements],and submitted monthly to the Engineer.
“Near Miss” means an incident or a situation with clear potential for an undesirable
outcome to occur, even though no actual negative consequences happened. In other
words, it is an event with potential to cause injury, property damage, environmental
release or an adverse community reaction.
“Nonconformity Report” means a report documenting non-fulfilment of a requirement,
with objective evidence, the location and time of occurrence or detection, and provision
for its proper resolution by the concerned responsible.
“Notice of No Objection” means a category of Engineer’s response, issued by the
Engineer to the Contractor as specified in Clause 3 of Sub-Division 03020
[Correspondence, Communications and Submission].
“Notice of No Objection with Comments” means a category of Engineer’s response,
issued by the Engineer to the Contractor as specified in Clause 3 of Sub-Division 03020
[Correspondence, Communications and Submission].
“Notice of Objection” means a category of Engineer’s response, issued by the Engineer
to the Contractor as specified in Clause 3 of Sub-Division 03020 [Correspondence,
Communications and Submission].
“Not Reviewed” means a category of Engineer’s response, issued by the Engineer to the
Contractor as specified in Clause 3 of Sub-Division 03020 [Correspondence,
Communications and Submission].
“Occupational Health & Safety” means conditions and factors that affect the well-
being of employees, temporary workers, contractor personnel, visitors and any other
person in the workplace.
“Off-Shore Independent Laboratory” means an Independent Laboratory, submitted
by the Contractor to the Engineer for approval as specified in Sub-Clause 5.4 of Sub-
Division 07020 [Plant, Materials and Workmanship], that is outside the Country.
“On-Site Laboratory” means Contractor’s own laboratory submitted by the Contractor
to the Engineer for approval as specified in Sub-Clause 5.2 of Sub-Division 07020 [Plant,
Materials and Workmanship].
“Operation and Maintenance Manuals (O&M Manuals)” means the manual that will
indicating the provisions which is required for maintenance of various assets created
under the Contract by the Employer under their operation phase.
“Participating Contractor” means the Contractor or an Interfacing Contractor is
assigned a cooperating role (referred to as the “Participating Contractor (Design)” or
“Participating Contractor (Construction)” for specific interface requirement(s) by the
Engineer as described in Chapter 2 under Appendix-04000-1 of Division 04000.
“Particular Bridges” refers to the works package for construction/ implementation of
PSC Bridges and Steel Truss Bridges for MAHSR Project as specified in Sub-Division
02010 [Project] and 06010 [The Site].
“Possession” means possession of the Indian Railway track/line, which is closed to rail
traffic.

“Procurement Quality Management Plan” means the subsidiary document in the

Works Quality Management Plan (WQMP), submitted by the Contractor to the Engineer
for consent in Clause 6 under Sub-Division 07010 [Quality Management]; detailing
provisions, for its management and control of procurement from external provider, that
are to be implemented and maintained effectively during the period of the Works.
“Programme Analysis Report” means the report which the Contractor shall submit,
and that shall, in narrative format, describe the basis and assumptions used to develop
every programme, specified in Clause 3 under Sub-Division 04070 [Works Programme
and Schedule].
“Project” means the project named as “Project for the Development of Mumbai-
Ahmedabad High Speed Rail” as specified in Sub-Division 02010 [Project].
“Project Management Information System” means a document, information and
communication technology system (platform) that is to be implemented by the
Contractor so that the management of information between the Contractor, Employer and
the Engineer is efficient, reliable and secure, as specified in Sub-Clause 5.2 under Sub-
Division 03020 [Correspondence, Communications and Submission].
“Project Management Plan” refers to the plan that will be established by the Contractor
for the management of activities related to design, procurement, manufacture, execution
or construction, delivery, installation, testing and commissioning.
“Reference Drawings” means the drawings prepared by the Employer and included in
the Bidding Documents.
“Railway” means the system comprised of rail tracks, depots, sidings, stations, terminus,
traction power stations, rolling stock etc. within the Right of Way (ROW) of the
Employer.
“Railway Envelope” means the zone or zones within the works including the track work,
OHE, signalling, telecommunication and equipment necessary for operation of the HSR
system, within the Schedule of Dimension (SOD) of HSR.
“Reliability” means the probability that an item/equipment/system can perform a
required function under given conditions for a given time interval.
“Request for Inspection” means the form used to give notice by the Contractor to the
Engineer as specified in Clause 11 of Sub-Division 07020 [Plant, Materials and
Workmanship] when any Work is ready for inspection and test.
“Restriction” means speed restriction, which is a limitation of the normal permitted
speed of rail traffic over a specified length of the Railway.
“Right of Way” means the land area of the Project, either acquired by the Employer or
for which the Employer has the permission of the Stake holder to construct the viaduct
and bridges etc. over their area. The Right of Way has been shown in the ROW Ortho
Map.
“Routine Test” means the test which is required to perform or undergo on each Plant,
Contractor’s Equipment and Materials during or after manufacture to ascertain that it
complies with specified criteria.
“S-curve” is an important project management tool which allows the progress of a
project to be tracked visually over time and form a historical record of what has happened
to date.

“Safety, Health and Environmental Management Plan” means the plan in accordance
with the requirements of Division 08000 [Safety, Health and Environment Management]
of the General Specifications.
“Shop Drawings” means the detailed drawings prepared for further development of the
Employer’s design, such as manufacture/fabrication drawings or the Contractor’s
working drawings including those for the Temporary Works, and other detailed drawings
of similar nature and/or purpose, wherever required.
“Site Offices” means the Provisional Site Office, Sub Site Office and Site Huts for
Employer's and Engineer’s Personnel prepared and maintained by the Contractor as
specified in Clause 1 of Sub-Division 04060 [Facilities for Employer's and Engineer’s
Personnel]
“Site Quality Management Plan” means the subsidiary document in the Works Quality
Management Plan (WQMP), submitted by the Contractor to the Engineer for consent in
Clause 4 of Sub-Division 07010 [Quality Management]; detailing provisions, for its
management and control of execution of the Works, that are to be implemented and
maintained effectively during the period of the Works to be carried out on the Site.
“Software Related Items” comprises (but not limited to) erasable programmable read
only memory (EPROM), digital versatile disc (DVD), other related items which are the
most updated items used in relation to the Works, and those to be supplied by
Subcontractors of any tiers.
“Spare Parts” means those parts and/or components of equipment/machinery that are
replaceable.
“Submission Review Request” means a document accompanying the Contractor’s
submission, as specified in Clause 2 of Sub-Division 03020 [Correspondence,
Communications and Submission], to be used for the review.
“System Acceptance Tests (SATs)” means those tests that demonstrate the
performance of the installation/equipment to the specified requirements as detailed in the
Technical Specifications. SATs form a part of the Test on Completion to be performed
under the Contract in order to achieve Employer’s Taking Over of the Works or any
Section.
“Temporary Traffic Control Plan” means the plan which the Contractor shall submit
to the Engineer under Clause 2 of Sub-Division 06070 [Traffic Management].
“Three Months Rolling Programme” means the programme which the Contractor
shall prepare and update monthly under Clause 5 of Sub-Division 04070 [Works
Programme and Schedule].
“Three Weeks Rolling Programme” means the programme which the Contractor shall
prepare and update monthly under Clause 6 of Sub-Division 04070 [Works Programme
and Schedule].
“Time Bar Chart”, known as “Gantt Chart” too, is a type of bar chart which illustrates
a project schedule, i.e. the start and finish dates of the activities and summary elements
of a project.
“Uncharted Utilities” mean Utilities other than Charted Utilities which will be
identified during a survey conducted or encountered during excavation/ other works by
the Contractor.

“UP Line” means the up line of the MAHSR double line track route from Ahmedabad
to Mumbai
“Utilities” means the electricity, lighting, traffic control, telephone and/or
communication cables, gas, water, sewage and drainage pipes, including all associated
protection, supports, ancillary structures, fittings and equipment.
“Work Segment Programme” means the programme dividing Contractual Works
Programme into sub-programmes of work segments of manageable size, addressing in
more detail certain specific segments of the Works as specified in Clause 4, Sub-Division
04070 [Works Programme and Schedule].
“Working Drawing” means additional drawings developed by the Contractor as
necessary and specifying additional details and procedures for construction of the Works,
such as shop drawings, fabrication drawings, erection drawings, Temporary Works
drawings, bar bending schedules, bar reference drawings.
“Works Areas” means the areas of the Site within the Right of Way and any additional
areas which may be obtained by the Contractor and agreed by the Engineer as additional
working area.
“Works Programme” means the time-scaled and resource-loaded critical path network,
updated from time to time in accordance with the General Conditions of Contract and
Works Requirements, depicting activities, durations, sequences and interrelationships
that represent the Contractor’s work plan, work breakdown, schedule structure for
constructing and completing the Works, distributed over the Time for Completion of the
Contract.
“Works Quality Management Plan” means the document in line with ISO 9001: 2015,
submitted by the Contractor to the Engineer for consent, as specified in Clause 2 of Sub-
Division 07010 [Quality Management]; detailing its Quality Management System to be
implemented and maintained effectively during the period of the Works.
Abbreviations
• 3PVC : Third Party Verifier Certificate
• AC : Alternating Current
• ACB : Air Circuit Breaker
• 2D : two dimensional
• 3D : three dimensional
• ABWF : Architectural Builders Works and Finishes
• ACMP : Air Control and Monitoring Plan
• ACMP : Accommodation Camp Management Plan
• ACPH : Air Changes Per Hour
• AFC : Automatic Fare Collection
• AFR : Accident Frequency Rate
• ANSI : American National Standards Institute
• AREMA : American Railway Engineering and Maintenance
• ASME : American Society of Mechanical Engineers
• ASTM : American Society for Testing Material
• ASLI : Automatic Safe Load Indicator
• ATM : Automatic Teller Machine
• BEE : Bureau of Energy Efficiency

• BG : Broad Gauge
• BIS : Bureau of Indian Standards
• BMS : Building Management System
• BOCW : Building or Other Construction Work
• BOCWA : Building and Other Construction Workers Act, 1996 and amendment done
thereafter
• BOCWR : Building and Other Construction Central Rules, 1998 and amendment done
thereafter.
• BPQSM : Borrow Pit and Quarry Site Management
• BS : British Standard
• CAD : Computer Aided Design
• CADD : Computer Aided Design and Drafting
• CCRZMA : Coastal Regulation Zone Management Authority
• CCTV : Closed Circuit Television
• CD : Compact Disc
• CDPC : Construction Design Package Certificate
• CE : EU Standard
• CEM : Crane Erection Method
• CEMP : Construction Environmental Management Plan
• CGWB : Central Ground Water Board
• CIF : Cost, Insurance and Freight
• CNP : Communication Network Provider
• COTS : Common On The Shelf
• CP : Contract Package
• CPCB : Central Pollution Control Board
• CPHEEO : Central Public Health and Environmental Engineering Organisation
• CPM : Critical Path Method
• CRCA : Cold Rolled and Close Annealed
• CRS : Commissioner of Railway Safety
• CRZ : Coastal Regulation Zone
• CS : Curve to Spiral
• CSD : Combined Service Drawings
• CT : Circular to Transition
• CTC : Centralized Traffic Control
• CV : Curriculum Vitae
• CWC : Central Water Commission
• dB : Decibel
• DB : Distribution Box
• DBR : Design Basis Report
• DC : Design Certificate or Direct Current
• DCN : Design Change Notice
• DFC : Dedicated Freight Corridor
• DFM : Drawing Finalisation Manual
• DG : Diesel Generator
• DGPS : Differential Global Positioning System
• DID : Detailed Interface Document

• DNP : Defect Notification Period

• DPI : Dots per Inch
• DPR : Daily Progress Report
• DQMP : Design Quality Management Plan
• DRC : Design Requirement and Criteria
• DRD : Delivery Route Drawings
• DSS : Distribution Substation
• DVD : Digital Versatile Disc
• E&M : Electrical & Mechanical
• ECB : External Commercial Borrowings
• ECBC : Energy Conservation Building Code
• e.g. : exempli gratia (Latin) mean ‘for example’
• EI : Electronic Interlocking
• EIA : Environmental Impact Assessment
• EL : Elevated
• ELCB : Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker
• EMP : Environmental Management Plan
• EMU : Electric Multiple Unit
• EPROM : Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory
• ESC : Escalator
• EV : Elevator (Lift)
• EWP : Escalator Working Point
• EN : European Norm
• etc. : etcetera (Latin) mean ‘and other similar
• FAT : Factory Acceptance Test(s)
• FCN : Field Change Notice
• FFL : Finished Floor Level
• FIDIC : Fédération Internationale des Ingénieurs- Conseils
• FL : Formation Level
• FMS : Facility Management System
• FSLM : Full Span Launching Method
• GAD : General Arrangement Drawing
• GAIL : Gas Authority of India Limited
• GCC : General Conditions of Contract
• GC : General Conditions of Contract
• GC : General Conditions of Contract
• GDP : Gross Domestic Product
• GFL : Grand Floor Level
• GGCL : Gujarat Gas Limited
• GGL : Green Gas Limited
• GIS : Geographical Information System
• GL : Ground Level
• GNSS : Global Navigation Satellite System
• GOI : Government of India
• GOJ : Government of Japan
• GPR : Ground Penetrating Radar

• GPS : Global Positioning System

• GRC : Grievance Redress Committee
• GRM : Grievance Redress Mechanism
• GS : General Specifications
• GSPL : Gujarat State Petro-net Limited
• GST : Goods and Services Tax
• GTS : Global Telecommunication System
• HDMI : High Definition Multimedia Interface
• HDPE : High Density Polyethylene
• HFL : Highest Flood Level
• HP/BHP : Horse Power / Brake Horse Power
• HPMS : High Pressure Mist Fire hydrant System
• HSR : High Speed Rail
• HV : High Voltage
• HVAC : Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning
• i.e. : id est (Latin) means ‘that is’
• ID : Identification
• IDD : Interface Demarcation Diagrams
• IEC : International Electro-technical Commission
• IEEE : The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
• IGBC : Indian Green Building Council.
• IISWBM : Indian Institute of Social Welfare & Business Management
• ILM : Incremental Launching Method
• IMP : Interface Management Plan
• INR : Indian Rupee
• IP : Point of Intersection
• IPS : Integrated Power Supply
• IR : Indian Railways
• IRC : Indian Road Congress
• IRJ : Insulated Rail Joints
• IRS : Indian Railway Standard
• IS : Indian Standard
• ISHRAE : Indian Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers
• ISO : International Organization for Standardization
• IT : Information Technology
• ITB : Instruction to Bidders
• ITP : Inspection and Test Plan
• IWAI : Inland Waterways Authority of India
• JGS : Japanese Geotechnical Society
• JICA : Japan International Cooperation Agency
• JIS : Japanese Industrial Standards
• JPY : Japanese Yen
• JRS : Japanese Railway Standard
• LAN : Local Area Network
• LCD : Liquid crystal Display
• LCX : Leakey Coaxial Cable

• LED : Light Emitting Diode

• LOA : Letter of Acceptance
• LPMS : Low Pressure Mist fire hydrant System
• LSZHPVC : Low Smoke Zero Halogen Polyvinyl Chloride
• LV : Low Voltage
• LWL : Lowest Water Level
• MA : Manufacturer’s Arrangement
• MAHSR : Mumbai Ahmedabad High Speed Railway
• MC : Municipal Corporation
• MCC/LV : Miniature Circuit Breaker / Low Voltage
• MCCB : Moulded Case Circuit Breaker
• MD : Maintenance Depot
• MDR : Major District Roads
• max. : maximum
• MEP : Mechanical, Electrical Plumbing
• MLIT: Ministry of Land, Infrastructure, Transport and Tourism
• mm : millimetre
• MOEFCC : Ministry of Environment, Forest and Climate Change
• MOR : Ministry of Railways
• MOM : Minutes of Meetings
• MPR : Monthly Progress Report
• MQMP : Manufacturing Quality Management Plan
• MQR : Monthly Quality Report
• MS : Method Statement
• MSDS : Material Safety Data Sheet
• MSL : Mean Sea Level
• NABL : National Accreditation Board for Testing and Calibration Laboratories
• NATM : New Austrian Tunnelling Method
• NCR : Nonconformity Report
• NGO : Non-Governmental Organization
• NEMA : National Electrical Manufacturers Association
• NFPA : National Fire Protection Association
• NH : National Highway
• NHAI : National Highway Authority of India
• NHSRCL : National High Speed Railway Corporation Limited
• NOC : None Objection Certificate
• NONO : Notice of No Objection
• NONOC : Notice of No Objection with Comments
• NOO : Notice of Objection
• NR : Not Reviewed
• NSCP : Newly established Survey Common Points for MAHSR Project
• O&M : Operation and maintenance
• OCC : Operational Control Centre
• OCS : Overhead Catenary System
• ODR : Other District Roads (ODR)
• OEM : Original Equipment Manufacturer

• OFC : Optical Fibre Cable

• OHE : Over Head Equipment
• OHSAS : Occupational Health and Safety Assessment Series
• ONGC : Oil and Natural Gas Co-operation
• PCC : Particular Conditions of Contract
• PCRMP : Physical Cultural Resources Management Plan
• PDU : Power supply wiring diagram
• PCRMP : Physical Cultural Resources Management Plan
• PDF : Portable Document Format
• PESA : Panchayats Extension to Scheduled Areas
• PMIS : Project Management Information System
• PL : Platform Level
• POR : Platform Operation Room
• PPE : Personal Protective Equipment
• PPP : Primavera Project Planner
• PPV : Peak Particle Velocity
• PQMP : Procurement Quality Management Plan
• PR : Public Relation
• PS : Particular Specifications
• PVC : Polyvinyl Chloride
• PWD : Public Works Department
• QA : Quality Assurance
• QC : Quality Control
• QMP : Quality Management Plan
• RAM : Random Access Memory
• RAMS : Reliability, Availability, Maintainability and Safety
• RAP : Resettlement Action Plan
• RDSO : Research Designs and Standards Organisation
• RFI : Request for Inspection
• RL : Rail Level
• ROM : Read Only Memory
• ROW : Right of Way
• RTRI : Railway Technical Research Institute
• RTU : Remote Terminal Unit
• S&T : Signalling and Telecommunication
• SAMP : Stockpile Area Management Plan
• SAT : System Acceptance Test(s)
• SCADA : Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition
• S-EIA : Supplemental EIA
• SCR : Station Control Room
• SEM : Structural Electrical Mechanical
• SER : Signalling Equipment Room
• SG : Standard Gauge
• SH : State Highway
• SHE : Safety, Health and Environment
• SI : International System of Units

• SL : Slab Level
• SMD : Sub Maintenance Depot
• SOD : Schedule of Dimensions
• SP : Sectioning Post
• SPCB : State Pollution Control Board
• SPM : Suspended Particulate Matter
• SQMP : Site Quality Management Plan
• SRPs : Site Rehabilitation Plans
• SRR : Submission Review Request
• SSP : Sub-sectioning Post
• ST : Straight to Transition
• ST : Spiral to Tangent
• S&T : Signalling and Telecommunication
• STP : Sewage Treatment Plant
• TC : Transition to Circular
• TC : Track Centre
• TCP : Traffic Control Plan
• TEFC : Totally Enclosed Fan –Cooled
• TS : Tangent to Spiral
• TS : Transition to Straight
• TS : Technical Specifications
• TSS : Traction Substation
• UG : Under Ground
• UL : Underwriters Laboratories
• UPS : Uninterrupted Power Supply
• USB : Universal Serial Bus
• UTC : Coordinated Universal Time
• UTM : Universal Transverse Mercator
• VFD : Variable Frequency Drive
• VGL : Vadodara Gas Limited
• VN : Variation Notice
• VRF : Variable Refrigerant Flow
• VRV : Variable Refrigerant Volume
• WDFC : Western Dedicated Freight Corridor
• WGS84 : World Geodetic System 84
• WHO : World Health Organisation
• WQMP : Works Quality Management Plan
• WRD : Water Resources Division
• WRIS : Water Resource Information System
• XLPE : Cross Linked Polyethylene

General
Where the Contract requires communications for ‘approval’, ‘certification’,
‘consent’, ‘determination’, ‘notice’, ‘review’, ‘application’, and ‘request’, these
communications shall be in writing. The Contractor shall issue communications
in compliance with such Classified Distinctions, following which the Engineer’s
response to such communications shall generally be given or issued to each
communication in the form (as applicable) of a “Notice of No Objection”, “Notice
of No Objection with Comments”, “Notice of Objection”, or “Not Reviewed”.
The Engineer’s responses to Contractor’s submissions shall be given or issued in
accordance with his authorized duties and shall not relieve the Contractor of any
of his duties, obligations or responsibilities under the Contract, including
responsibility for errors, omissions discrepancies and non-compliance.
Unless otherwise stated in the Contract, each review period for an Engineer’s
response shall not exceed twenty-one (21) days. The Contractor shall make
allowance for the Engineer’s review period in his planning and programming of
submissions under the Contract.
Submission Procedure
As outputs of the Contractor’s activities, all submissions including detail
arrangement of the Contractor’s proposal, Contractor’s proposals for Variation
and adjustment, Statement, notices, and applications shall be submitted to the
Engineer for a relevant Classified Distinction, such as for ‘approval’,
‘certification’, ‘consent’, ‘determination’, ‘notice’, ‘review’, ‘application’, and
‘request’ as specified in the Contract. The requirements of the Technical
Specifications shall prevail over those of the General Specifications in the event
of any discrepancy.
Each of Contractor’s submission of Contractor’s Documents shall include:
A brief introduction to explain which subsystem or part of the Works to
which the submission refers,
A list of the documents enclosed with the submission,
An outline of how the submission meets all relevant requirements of the
Works Requirements, and
Submission Review Request.
The Submission Review Request (SRR), shall include the date of submission, the
submission reference number, the submission title, the stage of submission, and
the authorized signature of the Contractor’s Representative, to confirm that, in the
opinion of the Contractor, and where applicable, the submission:
Complies with all relevant requirements of the Contract;
Conforms to all interface requirements;

Contains, or is based on auditable and proven or verifiable calculations and

designs, as applicable;
Has been properly approved by the Contractor, according to the Contractor’s
Quality Management System, to confirm its completeness, accuracy,
adequacy and validity;
Has accounted for all necessary approvals and permissions required to be
given by statutory bodies or similar organizations, and that, where required,
such approvals and permits have been granted; and
Contains a review and reply sheet.
If, in the Engineer’s opinion, following receipt of a submission there is a benefit
to be gained from a meeting with the Contractor to clarify or discuss any of the
contents of the submission, he shall notify the Contractor accordingly, giving not
less than five (05) working days advance written notice. The Contractor shall
attend at the time and place as notified by the Engineer. The Contractor shall
record and endorse all relevant deliberations and conclusions of any such
meetings and submit to the Engineer the records, duly endorsed by the Engineer,
within seven (07) days after the meeting.
Unless otherwise specified in the Contract or agreed with the Engineer, all
submissions shall comprise one (1) original set and six (06) hard copy sets
accompanied with one (01) electronic set on CD or DVD including PDF files for
the scanned original set and the created set from multiple electronic files.
Engineer’s Response
Unless otherwise specified in the Contract, Engineer’s responses shall be given
within twenty-one (21) days of receipt of a Contractor’s submission. The
Engineer will respond in one of the following four ways:
“Notice of No Objection” (NONO);
“Notice of No Objection with Comments” (NONOC);
“Notice of Objection” (NOO);
“Not Reviewed” (NR).
If the Engineer, having reviewed the submission, has not discovered any non-
compliance with the Contract, it will be returned endorsed with the Engineer’s
signature and the words “Notice of No Objection”. Receipt of such “Notice of No
Objection” entitles the Contractor to proceed to the next stage of the Works.
If the Engineer discovers minor non-compliance, discrepancies, omissions, or
errors that, in his opinion, are not of a fundamental nature, he may return the
submission endorsed with the Engineer’s signature and the words “Notice of No
Objection with Comments”, and include details of the comments that are required
to be incorporated in order for the submission to comply with the Contract. Issue
of a “Notice of No Objection with Comments” entitles the Contractor to proceed
to the next stage of the Works, provided all of the Engineer’s comments are taken
into account and implemented.

If the Engineer issues a “Notice of No Objection with Comments”, the Contractor

shall resubmit the affected part(s) of the submission, clearly demonstrating how
the Engineer’s comments have been taken into account, and resubmit amended or
corrected material by the date specified by the Engineer or (if no such date has
been specified) within fourteen (14) days of issue of the Engineer’s comments.
If the Engineer discovers major non-compliance, discrepancies, omissions or
errors that, in his opinion, are of a fundamental nature, he may return the
communication endorsed with the Engineer’s signature and the words “Notice of
Objection”, and include details of the amendments, inclusions or improvements
required in order to comply with the Contract. The issuance of a “Notice of
Objection” does not entitle the Contractor to proceed to the next stage of the
Works.
If the Engineer issues a “Notice of Objection”, the Contractor shall resubmit the
complete submission, clearly demonstrating how the Engineer’s comments have
been taken into account and resubmit amended or corrected material by the date
specified by the Engineer or (if no such date has been specified) within fourteen
(14) days of issue of the Engineer's comments. If the Contractor proceeds with
any Works without an Engineer’s Notice of No Objection or Notice of No
Objection with Comments having been issued, it does so at its own risk and
responsibility.
If the Engineer discovers that submitted documents are incomplete and the
Engineer could not carry out the required review, then the Engineer may return
the submission endorsed with the Engineer’s signature and the words “Not
Reviewed” and include details of the amendments, inclusions or improvements
that are required in order to comply with the Contract. Issue of a “Not Reviewed”
does not entitle the Contractor to proceed to the next stage of the Works until all
of the Engineer’s comments have been fully taken into account and a satisfactory
resubmission has been made (meaning one which results in either a “Notice of
No Objection” or “Notice of No Objection with Comments”).
For the avoidance of doubt, any change or additional work arising out of or
becoming necessary due to any errors, omissions, discrepancies, or non-
compliances on the part of the Contractor in the preparation, submission or
resubmissions of Contractor’s Documents shall not constitute a Variation.
Document Control Procedure
Within twenty-eight (28) days after the Commencement Date, the Contractor
shall submit the Method Statement for the control of document and management
information to the Engineer for consent, which with regards to control of
document shall include but not be limited to the following:
Identification and description such as title, date, authors (editor, reviewer,
responsible person and reference number),
Format such as letter, submission, transmittal, request, notice, application,
statement, software including their version, and media, and

Review and approval for conformity with the Contract, and adequacy of the
submission or Contractor’s proposal in case of Variation.
Unless otherwise defined in the Contract, the Contractor shall coordinate with
sample forms to be utilized with some submission in its document control
procedure which are provided by the Engineer at the Commencement Date.
Project Information and Communication System
Document Control System
In addition to the Contractor’s submittals referenced in Clause 2 under this Sub-
Division, the Contractor shall implement a secure document control system such
that all documents generated by the Contractor can be transmitted to the
Engineer by electronic means (and vice versa) and that all documents generated
by either party are electronically captured at the point of origin and can be
reproduced later, electronically and in hard copy.
The Engineer shall provide one user facility from his system to the Contractor
for communication and for storing the documents.
The Method Statement for the control of document and management
information as specified in Clause 4 under this Sub-Division shall also detail the
uploading, maintaining, and archiving the following submittals, included but not
limited to:
Contractual Works Programmes, Work Segment Programmes, and
supporting reports (including plans) as per the format and using the
software as defined in the Contract,
Drawings and designs created by the Contractor as per the construction
asset (classification) and on the software platform defined in the Contract,
Records of measurement or Contractor’s Statements or both, in a format
defined in the Contract,
Construction asset details needing to be updated in the Contractor’s
Monthly Progress Reports,
Geo-referencing of the alignment,
Geo-referencing co-ordinates of assets into a geographic information
system (GIS) which the Contractor’s Monthly Progress Report has utilised,
Contractor’s Monthly Progress Reports, and
Source files for submittal as required by the Engineer.
Project Management Information System (PMIS)
PMIS is a platform to monitor and track the progress of the whole project,
tailored to match the specific needs of the project.
The aim is to provide the Employer and the Engineer with insights critical for
the smooth and timely execution of the project. The Contractor will be required
to submit the data and information for the PMIS as described by the Engineer.

The Method Statement for the control of document and management

information as specified in the Clause 4 under this Sub-Division shall also detail
the PMIS.
The information shall include but shall not be limited to:
Schedule related information
Progress related information
Issues related to the project
Safety related information
Quality related information
The integrated system will also take inputs from Primavera and project the
possible delays and achievements of the various Contractors and also the overall
project. The management team can review the overall health and synopsis of the
entire project on the master dashboard.

General
A document may consist of document cover, revision history, table of contents, text,
and attachment(s) in this sequence where applicable. The document control procedure
to be submitted to the Engineer in accordance with Clause 4 of Sub-Division 03020
[Correspondence, Communications and Submission] shall incorporate the
requirements specified in this Sub-Division.
Cover Format (Times New Roman)
Heading and name of client are on top, in capital, size 10.
Name of the project is in bold letters, size 22.
Content of document is in bold capitals, size 16.
Document reference number is in bold capitals, size 12
Company name: capitals, size 14.
Company’s logo is in size 35 x 40 (W x H) mm.
Address of the company is in regular letters, size 10.
Document Format (Times New Roman)
General regulations
Letter size 12.
Paper size A4 (A3 is used for tables and figures.)
Periods, semicolons shall be placed right after the preceding letter or
number.
The space between paragraphs and headings shall be 1.15 lines.
Main headings: are placed in number order, with a period placed right after
the number, followed by a space, with the heading text in bold capital letters.
For example: 1. IN BOLD CAPITAL:
Other headings: are placed in number order, with a period placed right after
the number, followed by a space, with the heading in regular letters. For
example: 1. In bold normal letter:
Notes
Notes relating to tables shall be included in the table; in case they are not
able to be included, it shall be clearly specified that they are notes relating
to a particular table reference.
The text of notes is usually given in italics.
Language of Communication and Units
The ruling language of the Contract shall be as stated in the Particular Conditions of
Contract. If no language is stated, the language for communications shall be the
English language. The Contractor shall utilize the SI system of measurement units.

Photographs
The Contractor shall take digital photographs of the Works on at least a monthly
basis and include them in the Contractor's Monthly Progress Reports. These
photographs shall be taken at locations agreed with the Engineer as appropriate
to record progress, quality and other relevant aspects of the Works. The number
of the photographs shall be sufficient to cover all aspects of the Works in progress.
The digital photograph shall be colour jpeg image format with standard aspect
ratio 4:3 and resolution of 300 DPI for all graphics in the printing. Read Only
Memory (ROM) based electronic media of digital photographs shall be included
as an integral part of the submittal. The locations and directions of the
photographs taken shall be marked on a key plan of the workshop site, to be
included in the submittal.
Each photograph shall be properly numbered and dated and include a brief
explanatory note of the subject matter of the photograph, for ease of
understanding.
Immediately before the issue of any Taking-Over Certificates for Works or
Sections, the Contractor shall commission a professional photographer (or any
person with equivalent skills) and take photographs (where applicable, the interior
to be taken by wide angle lenses) of exteriors and all salient sections and features
of the Works, for record purposes. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer
for approval as an integral part of the As-Built Documents, six (6) separately
bound sets of colour prints of such record photographs, including one (1) set of
Read Only Memory (ROM)-based electronic media containing an original jpeg
image file of each photograph in accordance with the directory and naming
convention agreed with the Engineer. The number of colour print images in a set
shall not exceed 100, and each hard copy set of photographs shall be of A4 size
with a cover page indicating information such as date, titles of the project and the
Contract, and name of the Employer and the Contractor. Each of the photographs
shall be properly numbered, dated and include a brief explanatory note of the
subject matter.
Videos
On a regular basis, or whenever directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall
take digital video records to record the process of the Works at the fabrication-
workshop (minimum duration of each to be twenty minutes, covering all the
activities of the fabrication works/check-assembly and painting) as agreed with
the Engineer, and submit the videos every three months.
Within twenty-eight (28) days of receipt of the Letter of Acceptance, but in no
case later than the Commencement Date, the Contractor shall submit to the
Engineer a proposal for the provision of digital video recordings with
commentary of the progress of the Works.
The videos shall be taken by a competent person from an approved professional
service provider (or any person with equivalent skills). The video shooting

locations are to be identified in the aforementioned proposal. This video shall be

submitted in a video format acceptable to the Engineer, with or without editing.
Immediately before the issue of the Taking-Over Certificate for the whole of the
Works, the Contractor shall complete video recording and start editing the videos
taken, to produce a 60-minute digital video-audio presentation with a suitable title.
Each section of the video shall indicate the date on which it was taken. The
presentation material shall have narration in English. The Contractor shall use a
professional service provider to video, edit and produce the presentation material.
CAD Standards
General
The Contractor shall establish his own CAD operation team utilising Autodesk’s
AutoCAD 2016 or higher release. The Contractor shall provide five (5) five (5)
AutoCAD licenses full version for the Engineer. The Contractor’s CAD manager
shall request the Engineer to obtain CAD resource libraries and file naming
conventions before Commencement of the Works. The Contractor shall also ensure
its quality management of CAD drawings and design is in accordance with the
WQMP under Sub-Division 07010 [Quality Management].
CAD Resource Libraries
The Contractor shall utilise CAD resource libraries provided by the Engineer to
execute routines and scripts for CAD workings. Resource libraries shall include and
use references which include, but are not limited to, the following:
Title block,
Project co-ordination,
Track horizontal alignment,
Track alignment vertical profile reference,
Geo-referencing for alignment,
Existing utility base map,
Batch processing script files,
Layers and symbols,
Plotting and pen table, and
Printing size for each submittal.
File Naming Convention
The Contractor shall adopt the file naming convention provided by the Engineer for
discipline drawings and designs. These conventions shall include, but are not limited
to, the following:
File directories and folders structure,
Sequence of characters for directories, folders, and files,
Fields to comprise a name of directories, folders, and files, and
Codes to interpret in the context of the field.

Drawings and Designs

In addition to the Contractor’s submittal of drawings and designs, the Contractor
shall upload, maintain, and archive its source files utilising the CAD software
defined by the Contract onto his own document control system. The Engineer may
also require the Contractor to upload his working CAD source files onto the
document control system before submission, so that the Engineer can access working
files in order to observe progress. In addition, these working files shall be in
accordance with Sub-Clause 5.2 and 5.3 as well.
CAD Quality Management
The Contractor shall ensure that the quality management of their CAD drawings and
designs are in accordance with the WQMP. Where CAD drawings and designs have
been specified as Contractor’s Documents, the Contractor’s policy in the WQMP
shall be clearly identified. In addition, the process of data checking in the WQMP
shall be determined by the Contractor. This process shall include:
Elimination of spurious data outside normal file extent or limits,
Checks on set-up parameters,
Testing of container allocation within files including layers by switching on and
off containers,
Elimination of information, which is not to scale,
Purging all unnecessary data,
Elimination of references to un-checkable (i.e. uncontrolled) files such as
renditions,
Formats that do not maintain dimensional integrity shall not be used,
CAD resource libraries,
File naming conventions,
Other contents check, and
Data integrity through document control system.

Table of Contents
04010 Laws, Standards and Codes ······························································ 46
Compliance with the Laws:...................................................................................46
Relevant Documents .............................................................................................46
Applicable Standards and Codes...........................................................................46
Other Standards and Codes ...................................................................................47
Copy of Standards and Codes ...............................................................................48
04020 Works Management Planning ··························································· 49
General ..................................................................................................................49
General Organization ............................................................................................49
Project Management Plan .....................................................................................50
Works Quality Management Plan .........................................................................52
Procurement and Manufacturing Plan ...................................................................52
Construction Management Plans ..........................................................................55
Completion Management Plan ..............................................................................58
04030 Meetings ······················································································ 60
Kick-Off Meeting ..................................................................................................60
Regular Meetings ..................................................................................................60
Monthly Progress Meeting ....................................................................................61
Co-ordination Meeting ..........................................................................................63
Meetings Called by the Contractor .......................................................................63
Other Meetings ......................................................................................................63
Minutes of Meetings .............................................................................................63
04040 Interface, Coordination and Cooperation with Other Parties ···················· 64
General ..................................................................................................................64
Responsibilities of the Contractor .........................................................................64
Interface Administration System ..........................................................................67
Dedicated Coordination Team ..............................................................................68
Construction Interface ...........................................................................................68
Preparation of Interface Documents .....................................................................69

Interface Table for Supply and Installation Items .................................................70

Coordination and Interfacing Programme .............................................................70
Interface Management Plan (IMP) ........................................................................71
Employer’s / Engineer’s Input ..............................................................................72
Detailed Interface Description (DID)....................................................................72
04050 Contractor’s Obligations of Getting Authority’s Approval ······················· 74
Approvals from Public Authorities and Agencies ................................................74
Correspondence with Public Authorities and Agencies ........................................74
04060 Facilities for Employer’s and Engineer’s Personnel ································ 75
Site Offices ............................................................................................................75
Site Laboratory ......................................................................................................80
Sign Boards at the Site Office ...............................................................................81
Utility and Services for the Use by Employer’s and Engineer’s Personnel ..........81
Measurement for Payment ....................................................................................82
04070 Works Programme and Schedule ······················································· 83
General ..................................................................................................................83
Methodology .........................................................................................................83
Contractual Works Programme .............................................................................84
Work Segment Programmes .................................................................................84
Three Months Rolling Programme .......................................................................88
Three Weeks Rolling Programme .........................................................................89
Review and Monitoring of Programme.................................................................90
Progress Monitoring ..............................................................................................91
Programme Analysis Report .................................................................................91
Progress Meetings and Programme Updates ........................................................91
Revision of Programme.........................................................................................93
Recovery Programme ............................................................................................93
04080 Monthly Progress Report Requirements ·············································· 95
General ..................................................................................................................95
Executive Summary ..............................................................................................95
Programme Update and Status ..............................................................................95
Three Months Rolling Programme Revisions and Updates ..................................96

Drawing Preparation / Submittal Status ................................................................97

Physical Progress ..................................................................................................97
Contractor’s Personnel, Contractor’s Equipment and Employer’s Equipment ....98
Coordination and Interfacing ................................................................................98
Procurement ..........................................................................................................98
Performance on Quality Management System ......................................................99
Financial Status .....................................................................................................99
Other Matters ........................................................................................................99
04090 Work Area Access Dates ································································ 100
04100 Milestones ·················································································· 101
General ................................................................................................................101
Milestone Schedules............................................................................................101
04110 Sections······················································································ 104
04120 Taking Over of the Works or Sections ··············································· 105
Procedures ...........................................................................................................105
04130 Supply of Spare Parts, Special Tools and Test Equipment and Software
Related Items ············································································ 107
04140 Defects Notification Period ····························································· 108
General ................................................................................................................108
Final Inspection ...................................................................................................108
04150 Tests after Completion··································································· 109
Appendix 04000-1 ················································································· 110

Compliance with the Laws:

The Contractor shall familiarize themselves and conform in all aspects with:
the provision of any enactment in India of any authority having jurisdiction
over any part of the Works, as applicable from time to time;
the Laws of local bodies and utilities applicable to the Works.
The Contractor shall give all notices required by the Laws, and pay all fees, taxes
and bills payable in respect thereof. The Contractor will arrange necessary
clearances and approvals to commence the Works on the site.
Ignorance of the Laws shall not constitute a basis for any claim at any stage of
the Works.
The Contractor shall indemnify the Employer and the Engineer against all
penalties and liabilities of every kind assessed because of breach of any such
Laws by the Contractor.
Relevant Documents
The Bidding Documents shall include Reference Information/Reports. The data
provided in the Reference Information/ Reports is indicative and for reference only.
The Employer bears no responsibility as to its accuracy and adequacy.
Applicable Standards and Codes
The standards and codes described in the Works Requirements or otherwise referred
to in the Contract are those applied to the design, materials and workmanship of the
Works. In general, the standards and codes referred to for the Works are Japanese
and Indian standards and codes.
Where reference is made in the Works Requirements to a particular standard or code,
the provisions of both these documents shall be considered a minimum level of the
quality standard applicable to the Works under the Contract. These standards and
codes shall be adopted by the Contractor unless the Contractor has submitted
proposals to adopt alternative standards or codes and has received a Notice of No
Objection from the Engineer.
Where reference is made to two (2) or more or codes in parallel, the Engineer shall
have the right to apply that which is more stringent, and the Accepted Contract
Amount shall be deemed to have allowed for such decision of the Engineer. Where
there is a conflict or discrepancy between the requirements of the referenced
standards or codes, the Engineer shall determine the governing requirements on the
principle that the higher or more stringent requirements shall govern.
For the purpose of the Contract, and where the applicable standards or codes are
not described in the Works Requirements, the standards and codes used shall be in
accordance with the following sequence:

Applicable Indian/Japanese/International standards or codes which are equivalent to

standards or codes specified in Technical Specifications for the particular Plant,
Materials, equipment, processes or systems proposed by the Contractor.
Unless otherwise expressly stated in the Contract, the latest revision along with
correction slips in effect of the respective standards and codes shall apply.
The Contractor can purchase relevant codes and standards from the following
links:
i. For JIS standards, Contractor can purchase English versions from the below
link: https://webdesk.jsa.or.jp/books/W11M0010/or
https://www.techstreet.com/pages/home
Other Standards and Codes
Other standards and codes may be acceptable as substitutes of these standards and
codes referred to in the Contract, provided that the Contractor can demonstrate to
the approval of the Engineer that the standard or code proposed by the Contractor
as a substitute is equal to or better than the standard or code referred to in the
Contract. The Goods and the workmanship of the Works meeting such approved
substitutes shall in principle be acceptable under the Contract.
Whenever the Contractor wishes to propose a substitute to any standard or code
referred to in the Contracts, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer at his own
risk, cost and responsibility a request for substitution, including all information
and data necessary to demonstrate that the proposed substitute is equal to or better
than the standard or code referred to in the Contract. Differences between the
referred standard or code and the proposed substitute shall be fully and clearly
described in the proposal. Such request for substitution shall be submitted to the
Engineer at least 28 days prior to the date when the Contractor requires the
Engineer’s consent and be sufficiently in advance so as to avoid causing delay to
the progress of the Works. The information and data submitted with the
Contractor’s proposal shall include a copy of the substitute standard or code
proposed by the Contractor, including where applicable an English language
translation of same.
The Engineer shall review the documents of Contractor’s proposal and inform the
Contractor of his decision whether the proposed substitute is acceptable or
otherwise with comments. The Contractor may submit the second proposal when
the first proposal was not accepted, provided that the agreed time schedule of the
Works including Milestones (if any), and Time(s) for Completion will not be
adversely affected. No third proposal will in principle be entertained by the
Engineer.
The Engineer shall have the right to request the Contractor to submit
supplementary information or data or both which he considers is required for
determining the acceptability or otherwise of the Contractor’s proposed substitute
standards or codes. The Engineer, at the risk and responsibility of the Contractor,

may defer response to a Contractor’s request for substitution, unless and until the
Engineer receives copies of such supplementary information or data or both.
In the event that the Engineer does not accept the Contractor’s proposed
substitute:
the Contractor shall comply with the standard or code referred to in the
Contract;
Milestones (if any), and other times for completion (if any) or the Time(s) or
both for Completion shall not be extended and the Contractor shall not be
entitled to additional payment.
Copy of Standards and Codes
The Contractor shall provide and maintain two (02) hard copies in the Engineer’s
office, two (02) hard copies for Employer’s office and two (02) licenses for online
access where applicable, of each of all standards and codes specified or shown in
the Contract, within fifty-six (56) days from the Commencement Date. Copies of
any standards and codes subsequently consented to by the Engineer shall be added
to the archive without delay.
If any standards or codes are not published in the English language, the Engineer
may request the Contractor to translate the non-English language edition into
English: any such translations shall be made by a competent translator. When
further standards and codes have received the Engineer’s consent in accordance
with the provisions of this Sub-Division, the above requirements concerning
provision and maintenance shall apply to such standards and copies, but within
seven (7) days after the Contractor’s receipt of the Engineer’s Notice of No
Objection to the respective standard or code.

General
In order to organise the various submissions required by the Contract, and to ensure
the Contractor’s understanding and compliance with the requirements of the
Contract, the Contractor shall develop a series of management plans. These
management plans will serve to structure the Contractor’s submissions in such a
manner that the Contractor can develop and prepare the submissions and the
Engineer can review and comment on them in a prescribed manner.
The management plans shall be configured as an integrated plan with associated
documents, each covering one of the subjects listed below. These plans and
documents shall be co-ordinated with each other and shall collectively define,
describe and encompass the Contractor’s proposed methods, procedures, processes,
organisation, sequencing of activities, etc. and shall show how these combine
together to assure that the Works fully meet the requirements of the Contract with
respect to the subjects listed. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract, all plans and
documents shall be submitted in preliminary form within fifty-six (56) days after the
Commencement Date, followed by detailed plans within fifty-six (56) days after the
preliminary submission. Further submissions shall be made:
when required in accordance with the Contractual Works Programme;
whenever the development of the Contractor’s planning allows the plan to be
developed further;
in response to comments made by the Engineer in accordance with clause 3.
[Engineer’s Response] of Sub-Division 03020 [Correspondence,
Communications and Submissions] of the General Specifications;
whenever any change occurs that invalidates the information contained in a
previously submitted and reviewed document, within fourteen (14) days of
occurrence of such change; and
when requested by the Engineer from time-to-time.
General Organization
The Plans listed below shall be developed and submitted by the Contractor for the
Engineer's review:
Project Management Plans
Contractor’s Project Plan
Interface Management Plan
Works Quality Management Plan
Procurement and Manufacturing Plans
Factory Testing Plan
Procurement, Manufacturing and Delivery Plan
Construction Management Plans
Construction Plan
Packing, Loading, Transportation, Unloading and Stacking Plan

Safety, Health and Environmental Management Plan
Construction Environmental Management Plan
Completion Management Plans
Commissioning Plan
Operation & Maintenance Manual Plan
Training Plan
Spares Management Plan
Defects Management Plan
Project Management Plan
The overall management of the Works shall be the Contractor’s responsibility. The
organisation of the resources for the procurement, fabrication, check-assembly,
painting, transportation to bridge-site/ site-delivery-yards, unloading and stacking is
to be developed into a Project Management Plan. Each section of this plan shall fully
describe the Contractor’s understanding of the Works and the management skills and
structures required to achieve the same.
Contractor’s Project Plan
The Contractor’s Project Plan shall provide a clear overview of the Contractor’s
organisation, management systems and the methods to be used for the execution
and completion of the Works.
The Contractor’s Project Plan shall include a summary description of each and
every stage of implementation of the Works, clearly showing the principal
organisational interfaces both within the Contractor’s own organisation
(including Subcontractors of every tier) and with Interfacing Contractors and
Interfacing Parties, defining how each of these interfaces is to be managed and
controlled. An organisation chart shall be produced to illustrate the subdivision
of the Works into elements for effective technical and managerial control, the
reporting structure and the interface relationships among all parties involved.
The names, addresses, telephone numbers and email addresses of all principal
contacts shall be listed.
The Contractor’s Project Plan shall contain structured organisation charts
showing the hierarchical relationship of the Contractor’s organisation (including
Subcontractors of every tier). The organisation charts shall be produced in such
a manner that the basic chart shows the overall organisation structure supported
by the subsidiary charts detailing the internal structure of the various
departments or sections of the overall organisation.
The Contractor’s Project Plan shall include full details of the qualifications,
experience, authority and responsibility of the personnel assigned to all key
positions of the Contractor’s organisation (including Subcontractors of every
tier). As a minimum, this shall include all levels down to senior managers and
shall include the personnel responsible for each individual department and

functional group. A clear reference shall be given to the location of staff. The
names, addresses, telephone numbers and email addresses of all principal
contacts shall be listed.
The Contractor’s Project Plan shall define the Contractor’s management
structure for the execution of the Works and for the control of the safety and
quality of the Works and shall, without limitation, identify and set out:
The procedure for audits;
The procedures for the control of receipt and issue of all Works-related
correspondence so as to ensure traceability;
The procedures for the filing system to be implemented to maintain the
Contractor’s records during the course of the Works. The filing system used
by the Contractor (and Subcontractors of any tier) shall be compatible with
the Engineer’s filing system;
The procedures for the identification, production, verification, internal
approval, review (when required) by the Engineer, distribution,
implementation and recording of changes to all drawings, reports, plans and
specifications;
The procedures for the evaluation, selection, engagement and monitoring
of Subcontractors / suppliers together with the means of application of
quality assurance to their works including audit and acceptance;
The procedure for the regular review and revision of each type of quality
plan and its supplemental individual specific quality plans to ensure their
continuing suitability and effectiveness, in addition to the method to be used
for revision and issue of revised documentation;
The procedures for the control, calibration and maintenance of inspection,
testing and measuring equipment;
The procedures for the selection, indexing, disposition and maintenance for
the archiving of project records. A list of items to be archived including
their periods of retention shall be submitted to the Engineer for review;
The procedures for identifying training needs and for the provision of
training of all personnel performing activities affecting quality; and
The procedures for the control of non-conformities.
Contractor’s Representative
The Contractor shall be responsible for the provision of all necessary
supervision during the execution of the Works for as long as the Engineer
considers necessary for the proper fulfilment of the Contractor’s obligations
under the Contract.
The Contractor shall ensure that he is at all times represented on the
workshop site by competent and authorised English-speaking Contractor’s
Representative. Such Contractor’s Representative shall be constantly on the
workshop site and shall give his whole time to directing the Contractor’s
performance of the Works.
The Engineer shall have the authority to revoke consent to the Contractor’s
Representative at any time. If such consent is withdrawn the Contractor
shall forthwith remove the Contractor’s Representative from the workshop
site and shall not thereafter employ him again on the workshop site in any
capacity and shall forthwith replace him by another competent and equally
or better qualified English-speaking Contractor’s Representative, whose
appointment shall be subject to the Engineer’s consent.
Interface Management Plan
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for review Interface Management Plan
in accordance with the requirements of Sub-Division 04040 [Interface, Coordination
and Cooperation with Other Parties] of the General Specifications.
Works Quality Management Plan
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for review a Works Quality Management
Plan in accordance with the requirements of Sub-Division 07010 [Quality
Management] of the General Specifications.
Procurement and Manufacturing Plan
The Procurement and Manufacturing Plan shall be configured as an integrated plan
with associated documents each covering one of the subjects listed below. The plans
shall be co-ordinated with each other and shall collectively define, describe and
encompass the Contractor’s proposed methods, procedures, processes, organisation,
sequencing of activities, etc. and shall show how these combine together to assure that
the Works fully meet the requirements of the Contract with respect to the subjects
listed.
Factory Testing Plan
The Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Engineer for review a Factory
Testing Plan, detailing and explaining how the Contractor will plan, perform,
and document all inspections and tests that will be conducted to verify and
validate Plant and Materials prior to their delivery to the workshop site. The plan
shall consist of a narrative description supported by graphics, diagrams and
tabulations as required.
The Plan shall contain but not be limited to the following topics:
The Contractor’s strategy for inspection and Factory Acceptance Tests for
all constituent Plant and Materials and how this relates to the sequence of
delivery;
The sequencing and interrelationships of the inspections and tests
including:
i) All quality hold points; and
ii) All quality control points;
The type and extent of inspection and Factory Acceptance Tests to be
undertaken and the parts of the Works to be proven by such testing;

The objective of each inspection or test, what particular design and

operating criteria the test or inspection will prove and how the success of
the test or inspection will be demonstrated or measured;
Organisation chart and curriculum vitae of the key personnel in the
Contractor’s inspection and test team;
The plan for the production and submission of the inspection and test
procedures to the Engineer for review, including the submission of the
inspection and test reports and records; and
Details of type tests, routine tests, first article inspections and any other tests
constituting the Factory Acceptance Tests.
The Contractor shall arrange for all Plant, Materials and systems manufactured
for incorporation into the Permanent Works to undergo a Factory Acceptance
Test (FAT) before shipment from the place of manufacture. Any particular
requirements for inspection and testing at the place of manufacture are
prescribed in Works Requirements - Technical Specifications.
The Contractor shall be responsible at his own cost, for any inspection and
testing as described in item 3) of this Sub-Clause above, and any re-inspection
and re-testing, required as a result of any failed inspection, or Factory
Acceptance Test, including regression testing on previously-passed items.
Inspections and tests that are to be witnessed by the Employer or the Engineer
shall be sensibly grouped and scheduled so that as many inspections and tests
as possible may be witnessed during a single visit.
Type tests shall be performed on any items of modified Plant to be installed as
part of the Permanent Works under the Contract. The type test shall be based on
the environmental class of the workshop sites into which the Plant will be
installed.
The Contractor shall prepare two (2) sets of each inspection or test report
immediately after the completion of each such inspection or test, whether or not
witnessed by the Engineer. If the Engineer has witnessed the inspection or test,
he will countersign the inspection or test report to indicate his review of the
information and conclusions (i.e., whether or not the Plant being inspected or
tested has passed satisfactorily) contained therein. If the Engineer has not
witnessed the inspection or test (i.e., if a waiver has been granted, or the
Engineer has not witnessed the inspection or test for some other reason in
accordance with the Contract), the Engineer will countersign the report to
indicate his review of the information and conclusions (i.e., whether or not the
Plant being inspected or tested has passed satisfactorily) and return one set to
the Contractor. Where the results of the inspection or test do not meet the
requirements of the Contract, the Engineer may call for a re-inspection or re-
test.
For standard equipment which is serial or bulk-manufactured or commercial off-
the-shelf, manufacturer’s type tests may be waived with approval from the
Engineer.
Test equipment and instrumentation shall be subject to calibration tests within a

properly controlled calibration scheme. Such calibration checks shall be
undertaken prior to testing and, if required by the Engineer, shall be repeated
afterwards.
Materials and equipment shall not be released for shipment until all applicable
inspections and tests including Factory Acceptance Tests have been
satisfactorily completed and approved by the Engineer.
Procurement, Manufacturing and Delivery Plan
The Contractor shall prepare a procurement, manufacturing and delivery plan
with respect to all Plant and Materials intended for the Works. Separate parts of
the Plan shall be prepared for the Contractor’s and Subcontractors’ off the
workshop site activities and each part of the Plan shall identify the scope of work
to which it applies. In relation to the Plan, it shall, without limitation, define the:
Organisation of the Contractor’s staff directly responsible for the day-to-
day management of the manufacturing activities on or off the workshop
site;
Specific allocations of responsibility and authority given to identified
personnel for the day-to-day management of the Works, with particular
reference to the supervision, inspection and testing of the Works;
Interfacing or co-ordination required with the Contractor's other related
plans;
The relevant method statements which are to be developed to a sufficient
degree of detail for review by the Engineer; and
List of procedures and work instructions to manage and control the quality
of work during purchasing, manufacturing and delivery, without limitation:
i) The purchasing of Plant and Materials, ensuring they comply with the
requirements of the Contract, including (without limitation) purchasing
documentation and specific verification arrangements for the
Contractor’s or Engineer’s or both inspection of the Plant or Materials
or both prior to their release for use;
ii) The manufacturing process so as to ensure compliance with the
Drawings;
iii) The manufacturing process so as to ensure clear identification and
traceability of materials and manufactured parts;
iv) The inspection and testing of incoming Plant and Materials, in process
and final product so as to ensure the specified requirements for the
Plant and Materials are met;
v) The identification of the inspection and test status of all Plant and
Materials during all stages of the manufacturing process to ensure that
only products that have passed the required inspections and tests are
dispatched for use or installation or both;

vi) Review and disposal of any non-conforming Plant or Materials or both

so as to avoid unintended use;
vii) The assessment and disposal of any non-conforming Plant or Materials
or both and approval for reworking or rejection;
viii) The identification of preventive action so as to prevent recurrence of
any non-conformances; and
ix) The handling, storage, packaging, preservation and delivery of Plant
and Materials.
The Contractor shall propose a structured set of inspection hold points. The
hold points shall be structured such that a formal hold point is allowed for each
significant element of the manufacturing process. At each hold point, the
Engineer shall undertake a formal inspection or advise that the inspection has
been waived.
Once the inspection and any required remedial actions are completed to the
satisfaction of the Engineer, the Engineer shall give consent for shipment. The
Engineer will not unreasonably withhold his consent for shipment, provided
that all pre-delivery assembly and testing has been successfully completed.
Any Plant or Materials or both delivered to the fabrication-workshop site
without first having obtained the Engineer’s consent for shipping shall be
rejected at the fabrication-workshop site and all expenses thereby incurred shall
be borne by the Contractor.
Construction Management Plans
The Construction Management Plans shall be configured as integrated plans and
associated documents, each covering one of the subjects listed below.
The Plans shall be co-ordinated with each other and shall collectively define, describe
and encompass the Contractor’s proposed methods, procedures, processes,
organisation, sequencing of activities, etc. and shall show how these combine together
to assure that the Works fully meet the requirements of the Contract with respect to
the subjects listed.
Construction Plan
The Contractor shall prepare plans for fabrication activities on and off the
workshop site and shall ensure that these are properly co-ordinated with other
relevant plans, including those for procurement, delivery, testing and
commissioning activities.
The Construction Plan shall contain separate parts for the Contractor’s and
Subcontractors’ on and off the fabrication-workshop site activities.
Each Construction Plan shall identify the scope of activity to be controlled. In
relation to such scope of activity, it shall, without limitation, define:
The organisation of the Contractor's staff directly responsible for the day-
to-day management of the activity on or off the workshop site;

The specific allocations of responsibility and authority given to identified

personnel for the day-to-day management of the Works with particular
reference to the supervision, inspection and testing of the Works;
The interfacing and co-ordination required with the Contractor's other
related plans;
The relevant method statements which are to be developed to a sufficient
degree of detail for review by the Engineer;
The list of procedures and work instructions to manage and control the
fabrication and installation works, including without limitation:
i) The Contractor’s arrangements for the security of the workshop site
and the works area(s); and
ii) The Contractor’s accommodation, storage, car parking, other
temporary works or facilities or both, etc.
The Contractor’s arrangements for temporary traffic control, including but
not limited to the following:
i) Type and main specifications of traffic control devices and facilities;
ii) Scale plan of the location/s, clearly identifying existing roads, proposed
diversions of pedestrian and road traffic, locations of warning signs and
traffic control measures;
iii) Details of all lane widths, temporary surfaces, etc.;
iv) Construction details of any proposed diversion(s);
v) Safety measures including signage and staffing;
vi) Programme for installation and erection of traffic control devices and
facilities;
vii) Traffic control measures during non-working times (including during
holiday periods and at night);
viii) Details of the personnel responsible for overseeing implementation of
all aspects of the temporary traffic control measures.
The inspection and testing activities for fabrication or installation activities
or both so as to ensure the specified requirements for the Works are met;
The fabrication processes including Temporary Works so as to ensure
compliance with the Contract. In addition, any software to be used in the
fabrication and installation process shall be identified;
The fabrication and installation process so as to ensure clear identification
and traceability of Plant and Materials;
The identification of the inspection and test status of all Plant and Materials
during all stages of the fabrication and installation process to ensure that
only products that have passed the required inspections and tests are used
in the construction or installation or both;
The review and disposition of any non-conforming Plant or Materials or
both so as to avoid unintended use/installation;

The assessment and disposition of any non-conforming Plant or Materials

or both and approval for reworking or rejection;
The identification of preventive action so as to prevent any recurrence of
similar non-conformance; and
The handling, storage, packaging, preservation and delivery of Plant and
Materials.
Drawings showing the layout within the workshop site of the Contractor’s
temporary/permanent facilities, including the Contractor’s offices, temporary
access roads and other facilities required early in the Contract shall be submitted
to the Engineer for review within fourteen (14) days after the Commencement
Date.
Drawings showing the location of stores, laydown/storage areas, workshops,
area for check assembly, work areas and other major facilities shall be submitted
to the Engineer for review as early as possible, but in any case, not later than
twenty eight (28) days before construction of any such facilities.
Packing, Loading, Transportation, Unloading and Stacking Plan
1) The Contractor shall prepare and submit a Packing, Loading, Transportation and
Unloading Plan to the Engineer for review, detailing and explaining how the
Contractor will plan and perform to deliver the fabricated steel structural
members along with bearings, to the Interfacing Contractors, at various bridge-
sites/ site-delivery-yards.
2) The Plan shall contain but not be limited to the following :
Marking of each truss members and other accessories along with grouping
and labelling appropriately for Site identification including the assembly
matching code drawings for each bridge GAD separately.
The lifting arrangement to load and unload the fabricated steel structural
members and bearings at fabrication workshop.
The necessary supporting arrangements inside the trailer truck and other
preventive measures to prevent any damage to painting and the fabricated
steel structural members including the bearings, during transit.
The detail of the transportation route from the fabrication-workshop to the
Bridge-sites/site-delivery-yards for each bridge GAD.
The lifting arrangement to unload and stack the fabricated steel structural
members and bearings at bridge-sites/ site-delivery-yards.
Safety, Health and Environmental Management Plan
The Contractor shall submit a Safety, Health and Environmental Management Plan
in accordance with the requirements of Sub-Division 08020 [Safety and Health] of
the General Specifications for the Engineer’s review within twenty-eight (28) days
of issue of the Letter of Acceptance.

Construction Environmental Management Plan

Within twenty-eight (28) days of issue of the Letter of Acceptance but in no case
later than the Commencement Date, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to
the Engineer for review a draft construction Environmental Management Plan
(CEMP) which includes the Contractor’s proposed means of complying with the
obligations detailed in Sub-Division 08040 [Environment] of the General
Specifications. The CEMP shall include, as required, details of compliance with
applicable laws and regulations for environmental protection and mitigation
requirements, including the JICA guidelines for environmental and social
considerations.
The CEMP will set out in detail the Contractor’s approach for dealing with each
of the potential environmental impacts arising from the various construction,
installation and other activities involved in the execution of the Works, both on
and off the workshop site.
The Contractor shall submit the final CEMP, for review by the Engineer, at least
twenty-eight (28) days prior to the commencement of construction activities.
Completion Management Plan
General
The Contractor shall detail the various services required under the Contract to
bring the Works to completion into one plan. This co-ordinated approach shall
allow the Engineer to review all aspects of completion in an integrated manner.
The Completion Management Plan shall be configured as an integrated plan
with associated documents each covering one of the subjects described herein.
The Plans shall be co-ordinated with each other and shall collectively define,
describe and encompass the Contractor’s proposed methods, procedures,
processes, organisation, sequencing of activities, etc. and shall show how these
combine together to assure that the Works truly meet the requirements of the
Contract with respect to the matters listed.
Commissioning Plan
Not Used
Operation and Maintenance Manuals Plan
The Contractor shall develop an Inspection and Maintenance Manuals Plan to
suit the staged commissioning of the Works and to ensure the timely preparation
of the Inspection and Maintenance Manuals and the ‘As-Built’ documents in a
format and to such a level of detail as may be specified in the Contract, such that
they can be reviewed by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall submit the Inspection and Maintenance Manuals Plan by
the date specified in the Contract or, if no date is given, not later than three
hundred and sixty four (364) days prior to the due date for the issue of the
Taking-Over Certificate for the Works or any Section.

Training Plan
Not Used
Spares Management Plan
Not Used
Defects Management Plan
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for review a Defects Management Plan
for the repair or replacement or performance or both of such remedial actions as
required to correct any defects in the Works, as may be notified by (or on behalf of)
the Employer during the Defects Notification Period (DNP). The first submission of
this Plan is required not less than one hundred and eighty two (182) days prior to the
due date for issue of the Taking-Over Certificate for the Works or any Section.
During the Defects Notification Period the Contractor shall:
endeavour to complete all necessary work in a timely and responsible manner;
not proceed with any remedial work without the consent of the Employer and
Engineer;
submit a plan that details the methods and timing of any proposed work; and
update the plan monthly, showing progress of the work and the time to
completion.

Kick-Off Meeting
The Engineer shall hold Kick-Off Meeting within 7 calendar days from the
Commencement Date. Purpose of the Meeting is formally to notify all parties
concerned under the Contract that the project has begun, and every party has a
common understanding and his role from the Commencement Date until issuance of
the Taking-Over Certificate.
At the Kick-Off Meeting, followings will be, but not limited, discussed.
Outline of the Works
Profile of the bridge Sites and workshop sites
Time Schedule List of Contractual Events/Submissions, including Milestones,
Time(s) for Completion and Defects Notification Period(s).
Introduction of key persons of the Contractor and Employer, with role, function
and authority of each person.
Role and responsibility of Emergency notification process.
Communication rules (process, emails, approvals, etc.)
Other matters regarding proceeding and management of the Contract.
Regular Meetings
The Engineer shall hold regular meetings with the Contractor as necessary for the
proper management and co-ordination of the Works. The Contractor’s
Representative and other personnel as considered necessary by the Engineer, shall
attend such meetings.
Within twenty eight (28) days after the Commencement Date, the Engineer and
the Contractor’s Representative shall agree upon a programme for weekly and
monthly meetings covering the first three (3) months after such twenty eight (28)
days. The Contractor’s Representative shall make sure that the Contractor’s
Personnel designated to attend meetings make themselves available for the
meetings. The Engineer shall prepare the agenda for the meetings and the relevant
documents to be submitted to the meeting, including as a minimum the minutes
of the previous meeting. Thereafter, the programme for weekly and monthly
meetings shall be updated monthly in the monthly progress meetings.
The Engineer may initiate ad-hoc meetings as and when the need arises, through
prior consultation with the Contractor’s Representative where possible, and the
Contractor’s Representative and other Contractor’s Personnel designated by the
Engineer and/or the Contractor’s Representative shall attend such meetings. The
Engineer shall prepare a proposed agenda of the meeting, for prior consultation
with the Contractor’s Representative where possible.

Monthly Progress Meeting

General
A Monthly Progress Meeting shall be called by the Engineer and shall be held every
month preferably within three (3) days and in any case no later than ten (10) days
following issuance of the Contractor’s Monthly Progress Report as described in
clause 1 of Sub-Division 04080 [Monthly Progress Report Requirements] of the
General Specifications. If the day specified, is not a working day, then the meeting
shall be held on the next working day after the specified date. The Engineer shall
notify the Contractor of any change in the date or time, or both, of the meeting. The
main purpose of the meeting is to discuss progress of the Works and if there is any
delay in progress, being encountered by the Contractor, the Contractor shall indicate
the cause of delay and present the method of recovery. The results of the discussions
of the meeting shall be included in the Contractor’s next Monthly Progress Report
to be provided as described in Sub-Division 04080 [Monthly Progress
Requirements] of the General Specifications.
Meeting Agenda
The meeting agenda shall include the following:
progress planned, and progress achieved, along with the Contractor’s stated
reasons for any delay and actions proposed to be or being taken to reduce or
eliminate delays;
actual returns of Contractor’s Personnel and Contractor’s Equipment assigned
compared with the planned requirements, along with the Contractor’s stated
reasons for any differences and actions proposed to be or being taken to improve
the situation;
any difficulties being encountered in the execution of the Works, along with the
Contractor’s proposed actions or solutions and any actions required of the
Engineer;
any outstanding information/actions required of the Employer, the Engineer or
authorities or all with jurisdiction; and
any outstanding information/actions required of the Contractor.
Meeting Procedure
The detailed procedure of the Meeting is as follows:
The Employer shall chair progress meetings every month with the Contractor
and the Engineer. These meetings shall be held at dates and times to be advised
by the Engineer.
The Engineer shall convene at his discretion, at any time upon reasonable notice
to the Contractor, any meeting, either on or off the workshop site, to discuss and
address any aspect of the works or the Contract. The Contractor shall attend any
such meetings convened by the Engineer.
On monthly basis, the Contractor shall arrange for its Project Manager,
Superintendent, and Scheduler to meet at the workshop site with the Engineer

to review Contractor’s Monthly Programme Update before Monthly Progress

Meeting. A turnaround document as per the agreed computer software
generated by the Contractor shall be marked-up to show the agreed upon
progress, signed by the Contractor, and a signed copy issued to the Engineer.
The Monthly Programme Update shall show up-to-date and accurate progress
of the work and shall forecast the completion date for activities in progress based
on the approved Contractual Works Programme. The Monthly Programme
Update shall be prepared by the Contractor in co-ordination with all its principal
subcontractors and suppliers and the other Contractors if necessary.
Monthly Programme Update shall include actual activity data for progress to
date, but in the Monthly Programme Update, the Contractor shall not change the
schedule logic, the activity relationships/dependencies, or planned activity
durations and shall not add or delete activities. If the Contractor believes that
any of these items should be changed, then a proposed revised Work Segment
Programmes shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Engineer. Although
activities shall not be added or deleted in the Monthly Programme Update,
activities that have been recommended and consented by the Engineer shall be
included in the next Monthly Programme Update.
The Contractor will be notified by the Engineer, in writing, as to acceptance,
reasons for rejection, or any revisions required to the Programme. Changes to
the Programme agreed upon by the Contractor and the Engineer and consented
by the Employer shall be incorporated by the Contractor into the Programme
within seven (7) calendar days after such agreement. Changes on which the
Contractor and the Engineer cannot agree shall be documented and shall be
subject to the final decision of the Employer and which shall be binding.
The Contractor shall adjust the data as of date to be the same as the end date for
the invoicing period.
Monthly Programme Update shall show actual activity commencement and
completion dates, the actual remaining duration in workdays and physical
percent complete for those activities commenced and not complete. For the
stored materials, the update shall show the amount of material stored,
representing the total cost of the materials delivered and properly stored. The
Monthly Programme Update shall also show a graphic comparison of the current
status and the Contractual Works Programme for each activity in the network.
Each Monthly Programme Update shall continue to show all work activities
including those already completed. These completed activities shall accurately
reflect “as built” information by indicating when activities were actually started
and completed.
Monthly Programme Updates shall also contain the following information for
each activity:
Activity identification number, description and estimated original duration
in workdays;
Calculated early and late finish dates;

Actual start and actual finish dates, and remaining duration, in calendar, for
those activities started and not completed;
Days ahead and/or behind schedule of milestones related to the Section and
the Times for Completion;
Physical percent complete for each activity;
A float analysis of the longest path through the Programme detailing
potential delays and areas for acceleration. Actual start and finish dates
shall be indicated for each activity as appropriate. Completed activities shall
be omitted from remaining float and late start sorts.
The deliberation of all meetings shall be recorded by the Engineer as Minutes
of Meeting.
Co-ordination Meeting
The Contractor shall organise co-ordination meetings as required with related parties.
Before conducting such co-ordination meetings with the related parties, the Contractor
shall give prior notice and agenda of the meeting to the Engineer and the Employer.
Meetings Called by the Contractor
The Contractor’s Representative may request the Engineer to meet him and other
Contractor’s Personnel whenever necessary to discuss the issues pertaining to the
Works and the Contract. The Engineer shall comply with the request where physically
possible. The Contractor shall prepare a proposed agenda for the meeting and submit
it to the Engineer when making request for the meeting.
Other Meetings
The Contractor’s Representative shall attend, and shall arrange for representatives of
the Subcontractors, public departments, transportation companies, utility undertakings
and other contractors employed by the Employer to attend, meetings when required
by the Engineer. The Contractor shall inform the Engineer in 48 hours (or such a
shorter period as agreed by the Engineer) before conducting meetings with the public
departments, transportation companies, utility undertakings and/or the other
contractors and shall give the Engineer an opportunity to attend such meetings.
Minutes of Meetings
The Engineer in principle shall be responsible for the preparation of the minutes of
meetings, circulating it to the parties who attended the meeting before the next
relevant meeting. The Engineer shall also be responsible for the minutes of ad-hoc
meetings in a similar manner, unless otherwise agreed with the Employer. All minutes
of meetings shall be prepared in the Language stipulated in the Particular Conditions.
The Engineer shall submit six (6) copies of such minutes to the Employer, unless
otherwise instructed by the Employer. The Contractor will have the liberty to respond
to MOM within a week, if the recorded minutes are at variance from what was
discussed in the meeting.

General
The construction of the Mumbai-Ahmedabad High Speed Rail Project is to be
implemented through several packages of works as defined in Sub-Division 02010
of the General Specifications
The careful coordination of all technical and programming matters between the
relevant parties is a critical element in achieving a fully coordinated design and
construction process. This Sub-Division describes the Contractor’s responsibilities
with regard to interface management and coordination and includes interfacing with
other contractors employed by the Employer (referred to as “Interfacing Contractors”
hereinafter), and Interfacing Parties including entities such as local authorities,
statutory bodies, public utility companies, private service providers, consultants or
contractors whether or not specifically mentioned in the Contract. This responsibility
is not limited to a particular number of Interfacing Contractors and Interfacing
Parties, and all interfaces as required in the Contract are the sole responsibility of the
Contractor.
Interfaces internal to the Contract are the sole responsibility of the Contractor and
are not covered by this Sub-Division.
Responsibilities of the Contractor
So as to ensure that the whole Project including Interfacing Contractors’ works as
well as the Contractor’s Works shall be executed in the most efficient manner in the
best interest of the Employer, the Contractor shall:
Take the lead in the management of the coordination process with Interfacing
Contractors and Interfacing Parties.
Accord access to the workshop site and/or services to any related party in the
Contract including members of the Interfacing Contractors, Interfacing Parties
and the Engineer/Employer.
Not impede the work of the Interfacing Contractors and Interfacing Parties and
shall accord them all reasonable opportunities and facilities.
The Contractor shall, in accordance with the Works Requirements, coordinate and
integrate the:
Contractor’s own works under the Contract with the works of the Interfacing
Works of the Interfacing Contractors and Interfacing Parties.
The Contractor’s responsibilities shall neither be mitigated nor in any way affected
by virtue of similar responsibilities being placed on the Interfacing Contractors. The
Contractor shall be responsible for the detailed coordination of his manufacturing,
installation, construction, and testing activities.

Where the Contractor or an Interfacing Contractor is assigned a leading role, he is

referred to as “Lead Contractor (Construction)”, and in the case of a cooperating
role he is referred to as the “Participating Contractor (Construction)” for specific
interface requirement(s) by the Engineer as mentioned in Chapter 2 under Appendix-
04000-1 of Division 04000. The Lead Contractor (Construction) shall take the lead
in the management of the coordination for specific interface requirement(s), with the
Contractor and Interfacing Contractors cooperating according to the Lead
Contractor’s request.
The Contractor shall carefully review any pertinent information made available by
the Engineer relating to the nature and programming of all related parties’ contracts
and use such information in his planning of the Works.
The Contractor shall communicate and exchange information directly with the
Interfacing Contractors and Interfacing Parties with a copy to the Engineer for
information. Information as necessary to fulfil the Contractor’s interface obligations
shall be directly requested and obtained from the Interfacing Contractors and
Interfacing Parties with a copy to the Engineer for information and receipt
acknowledged.
The Contractor shall ensure that the Contractor’s requirements, including any design
inputs to other packages, are provided to all related parties of the Interfacing
Contractors and Interfacing Parties before the cut-off dates as identified in the
Interface Management Plan to be developed by the Contractor and consented to by
the Engineer.
Where other contracts requiring interface are yet to be awarded, the Contractor shall
proceed with coordination activities with the Engineer, until such time as the
Interfacing Contractors are employed by the Employer.
The Contractor shall take all reasonable steps to ensure that the Works are integrated
with the manufacture, installation, execution and testing of such other works and
shall in particular but without limitation to:
Comply with any instruction which the Engineer may give for the integration of
the Works with the design construction of any other part of the Project;
Consult, liaise and cooperate with those responsible for carrying out such other
works, including where necessary, in the preparation of the respective designs
and drawings, the preparation of coordinated programmes, method statements,
coordination drawings and specifications together with arrangements of service
priorities and zoning to coordinate the priorities of tasks and division of the area
together with the items mentioned previously;
There shall be a continuous requirement for coordination by the Contractor between
Interfacing Contractors/Interfacing Parties.
During the Works the Contractor shall provide within the workshop site, the facilities
including, but not limited to, staging, storage and unloading, and temporary storage
areas for the temporary use of Interfacing Contractors and/or Interfacing Parties, as
may reasonably be required during the construction/installation and commissioning
process. Where separate locations need to be provided for each of the Interfacing
Contractors and/or Interfacing Parties, prior to construction commencing, specific

details shall be coordinated and agreed between the Contractor and the Interfacing
Contractors and/or Interfacing Parties.
The Contractor shall attend meetings with Interfacing Contractor and Interfacing
Parties (if necessary) and raise/provide correspondence in this regard in accordance
with the Works Requirements and/or as instructed by the Engineer. The identity of
the Interfacing Contractor(s) and/or Interfacing Parties may not be known before the
execution of the Contract but this shall not be a grounds for the Contractor to object
to the subsequent appointment of any Interfacing Contractor and/or Interfacing Party.
The Contractor shall in accordance with the requirements of the Contract and
instructions of the Engineer coordinate his own Works with the works of Interfacing
Contractors and/or Interfacing Parties strictly adhering to the Coordination and
Interfacing Programme as detailed in Clause 8 [Coordination and Interfacing
Programme] in this Sub-Division, and shall accord the Interfacing Contractors
and/or Interfacing Party’s all reasonable opportunities for carrying out their works.
If the Contractor suffers delay by reason of failure caused by any Interfacing
Contractors and/or Interfacing Parties to meet the specified installation interfacing
and/or coordination completion dates resulting in delay beyond the extent which
could be reasonably foreseen by an experienced contractor at the time when the
Coordination and Interfacing Programme is formulated and consented by the
Engineer, then the Engineer shall take such delay into consideration in determining
any extension of time to which the Contractor is entitled under the Contract.
If any act or omission of the Contractor, whether directly or indirectly, results in the
delay in execution of the works of an Interfacing Contractor and/or Interfacing Party
associated with the execution of the project, the matter shall be settled by the
Engineer under Sub-Clause 3.5 [Determination] and Sub-Clause 2.5 [Employer’s
Claim] of the General Conditions of Contract.
The Contractor shall coordinate the access and delivery routes and ensure that all
provisions for access and the delivery of Plant, Goods and Materials are coordinated
with the delivery route drawings of Interfacing Contractors and/or Interfacing Parties.
The Contractor shall coordinate with the Interfacing Contractors and/or Interfacing
Parties with regard to the details to be provided by them for the provision of any
access to the Works for the Contractor’s Goods and Materials in accordance with the
Coordination and Interfacing Programme.
All requests for information or clarification, acknowledgement of receipt of
information and any official communication between the Contractor and Interfacing
Contractors and/or Interfacing Parties shall be made in writing with a copy to the
Engineer for information.
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing of any problems encountered in
obtaining necessary information and/or lack of cooperation from an Interfacing
Contractors and/or Interfacing Parties. In the event that the Engineer considers that
the resolution of an interface is not proceeding satisfactorily, the Engineer shall

review the matter and establish a coordinated plan directing the Contractor and the
Interfacing Contractors/ Interfacing Parties regarding the required action.
The Contractor shall arrange meetings with the Interfacing Contractors and the
Interfacing Parties to clarify particular aspects of interface requirements of the
Works. The Contractor shall advise the Engineer in advance of the date, time and
location of such meetings. The Engineer may elect to attend such meetings as he
deems necessary.
The Contractor shall prepare minutes recording all the matters discussed and agreed
at all the meetings.
The Contractor shall ensure that copies of all correspondence, drawings, meeting
minutes, programmes, etc. relating to the Contractor’s coordination and interfacing
meetings with the Interfacing Contractors and Interfacing Parties or the sharing of
correspondence, drawings, programmes, etc. are issued to all concerned parties and
the Engineer no later than seven days from the date of such meetings and the date of
issue of such correspondence, drawings, programmes, etc.
The Contractor shall, in carrying out his coordination and interfacing responsibilities,
raise and provide sufficient information for the Engineer to decide on any
disagreement between the Contractor and the Interfacing Contractors/Interfacing
Parties. If the Contractor, despite having made all reasonable efforts, cannot resolve
such disagreement with the Interfacing Contractors and/or Interfacing Parties in the
execution his interfacing duties, the Contractor shall then refer said disagreement to
the Engineer. The Engineer shall then issue a final and binding decision on the
Contractor and the Interfacing Contractors.
Should it appear to the Engineer that the Three Months Rolling Programme does not
conform with the Coordination and Interfacing Programme, the Contractor shall be
required to revise all such programmes so as to conform to the approved Contractual
Works Programme.
Interface Administration System
The Contractor shall establish an Interface Administration System (the “IAS”)
and participate in the activities with the Interfacing Contractors and Interfacing
Parties. The IAS shall include, but not be limited to, the following provision of:
An Interface Manager who shall be responsible for and the authority to
resolve interface matters to the satisfaction of the Engineer;
The necessary support team for the IAS;
Procedures and details for response to, confirmation of and making written
agreements with regard to interfaces;
Details of the arrangement for attendance at coordination and interface
meetings (including those that may be arranged by Interfacing Contractors,
Interfacing Parties or the Engineer). The representatives of Contractor,
Interfacing Contractors and Interfacing Parties shall be empowered to make
agreements on coordination and interfaces. The Contractor shall arrange
regular meetings for the Engineer to monitor the status of coordination and

interfaces and may arrange special coordination and interface meetings as

may be necessary to resolve specific issues. The Engineer can require the
Contractor to arrange a special coordination and interface meetings if
necessary. The Contractor may request assistance from the Engineer to
arrange coordination and interface meetings on particular subjects;
Details to the Engineer of regular status information and/or details of
coordination and interfaces including copies of relevant correspondence and
material; and
Details to the Engineer of access to information for the purpose of conducting
audits on interface compliance and for confirming that interface coordination
and interface management is proceeding consistently with the requirements
of the Contract.
Dedicated Coordination Team
The Contractor shall establish a dedicated coordination and interface team led by an
Interface Manager reporting to the Contractor’s Representative. The primary
function of the team is to provide a vital link between the Contractor’s construction
teams and the Interfacing Contractors and Interfacing Parties.
The Interface Coordinator shall assess the progress of the coordination with
Interfacing Contractors and Interfacing Parties by establishing lines of
communications and promoting regular exchange and updating of the information
so as to maintain the Contractor’s progress and programme.
The Interface Manager in conjunction with the Interfacing Contractors and
Interfacing Parties shall identify necessary provisions in the Works for Plant, Goods,
Materials and facilities of the Interfacing Contractors and Interfacing Parties.
Construction Interface
Construction coordination and interface shall be required throughout the duration of
the Contract and shall commence from the time of the LOA until the Taking Over
of the Works.
The Contractor shall coordinate and interface with the Interfacing Contractors and
Interfacing Parties to execute the respective construction/fabrication activities
efficiently.
The Contractor shall cooperate with Interfacing Contractors and Interfacing Parties
on all necessary site-related matters including but not limited to site access and
occupation, safety, verification of work compatibility and survey control, etc. The
Contractor shall advise the Interfacing Contractors and Interfacing Parties in
advance when a construction item is ready for site inspection to verify compatibility
with the Interfacing Contractors’ and Interfacing Parties’ needs and shall facilitate
access to the workshop site for the Interfacing Contractors and Interfacing Parties.
At or near the completion of the construction fabrication of any interface-related
element of the Contractor’s Work, the Contractor shall:

Advise the Interfacing Contractors and Interfacing Parties that the as-
constructed interface-related Works can be inspected. and provide the necessary
access to the workshop site and its occupation.
Agree in writing to the Interfacing Contractors and Interfacing Parties, and as
consented by the Engineer, on the adoption of any Interfacing Contractors’
and/or Interfacing Parties’ applicable comments on the constructed Works.
On advice from the Interfacing Contractor or Interfacing Party that an as-constructed
interface-related element is ready for inspection, the Contractor shall:
Conduct on-site inspections of the Works elements and give comments in
writing to the Interfacing Contractor and/or Interfacing Party.
Agree in writing to the Interfacing Contractor or Interfacing Party that the as-
constructed Works meet the coordination and/or interface requirements.
Prior to applying for a Taking-Over Certificate, the Contractor shall obtain written
confirmation from each Interfacing Contractor and each Interfacing Party, that the
interface elements meet the requirements of the Interfacing Contractors and
Interfacing Parties. If any Interfacing Contractor or Interfacing Party withholds such
confirmation, the Engineer shall decide on further action, as requested by the
Contractor prior to the issue of a Taking-Over Certificate.
Where Contractor’s Works are identified as failing to meet the requirements of the
Contract and such shall impact the Interfacing Contractors’ works or Interfacing
Parties’ works, the Contractor shall submit the proposed remedial measures to the
Engineer for review and shall copy the same to the Interfacing Contractors and/or
Interfacing Parties.
The Contractor shall coordinate and interface with the Engineer with respect to all
construction/installation/fabrication activities and shall follow the Engineer’s
instructions for requesting access for such activities.
The Contractor shall undertake construction/installation/fabrication in accordance
with the approved Contractual Works Programme.
The Contractor shall coordinate and interface with Interfacing Contractors and/or
Interfacing Parties for the planning and execution of the Test on Completion testing
and commissioning activities.
Preparation of Interface Documents
The Contractor shall prepare as required the following coordination and interface
documents which shall be used to completely define the Contractor’s coordination
and interface details:
Interface Table;
Coordination and Interfacing Programme; and
Interface Management Plan (IMP).
These coordination and interface documents shall be submitted for review by the
Engineer in order to obtain the Engineer’s Approval. For all subsequent updates,
these documents shall be submitted to the Engineer for information, review and

comment. A summary of principal issues with suitable solutions shall be included in

each Monthly Progress Report.
Interface Table for Supply and Installation Items
The Interface Table shall include at least (but without limitation) the items related
with the Contractor’s Contract described in Appendix 04000-1 of Division 04000.
The Interface Table, which describes the relationships between the Contractor and
Interfacing Contractors and/or the Interfacing Parties and their roles and
responsibilities, shall be submitted to the Engineer for consideration after further
development of the above attached Interface Table.
The Interface Table shall indicate the demarcation of scope of responsibilities
between the Contractor and the Interfacing Contractors and the Interfacing Parties.
Within sixty (60) days of notification from the Engineer of the identity of each
Interfacing Contractor, the Contractor shall develop and submit to the Engineer an
Interface Table that is mutually acceptable to both the Contractor and the Interfacing
Coordination and Interfacing Programme
The Contractor shall prepare and submit a Coordination and Interfacing Programme
to the Engineer in accordance with the Works Requirements and/or as instructed by
the Engineer as detailed below.
The Coordination and Interfacing Programme is one of the Works Programme (or
Work Segment Programmes) as detailed in Clause 4 of Sub-Division 04070 [Works
Segment Programme] of the General Specifications.
The Coordination and Interfacing Programme shall be submitted to the Engineer for
consent within sixty (60) days from the Letter of Acceptance (LOA) to allow for
checking and monitoring by the Engineer.
The Coordination and Interfacing Programme shall include detailed activities
describing all aspects of the works of Interfacing Contractors and Interfacing Parties
to meet all Sections or Milestones given in the Contract and be clearly linked to other
programmes such as the (Contractual) Works Programme (or Work Segment
Programmes) to streamline the Works and the works of the Interfacing Contractors
and Interfacing Parties.
The Coordination and Interfacing Programme shall indicate the physical areas to
which the Interfacing Contractors and Interfacing Parties require access, with access
dates, durations required and the required degree of completion of the Works prior
to the access dates by Interfacing Contractors and Interfacing Parties.
It is the Contractor's responsibility to ensure timely coordination with the Interfacing
Contractors and Interfacing Parties to review, revise and finalise his Coordination
and Interfacing Programmes so as not to affect the progress of the Works and/or the
works of the Interfacing Contractors and Interfacing Parties.
The Contractor shall note that the following conditions apply to the works of the
Interfacing Contractors and/or Interfacing Parties:

The Interfacing Contractors and/or Interfacing Parties shall not have exclusive
access to any part of the site except with the consent of the Engineer;
The Contractor shall take note that concurrent time allocations for certain areas
may be given to more than one Interfacing Contractors and or Interfacing Parties.
The Contractor shall coordinate the Works in such areas with the works of the
Interfacing Contractors and/or Interfacing Parties and report to the Engineer for
his review and consent;
The absence of a Coordination and Interfacing Programme date or
construction/installation period for the Interfacing Contractors and/or
Interfacing Parties in a specific area shall not prejudice the right of the Engineer
to establish a reasonable Coordination and Interfacing Programme date or
construction/installation period for that area;
The Contractor and the Interfacing Contractors shall comply with the Sections
or Milestones and other successive activities specified in the Coordination and
Interfacing Programme.
Interface Management Plan (IMP)
The Contractor shall develop and submit to the Engineer, within sixty (60) days from
the LOA, an IMP for all interface issues that may arise during the construction,
testing and commissioning of the Works, in consultation with the Interfacing
Contractors / Interfacing Parties and the Engineer. The IMP shall allow adequate
time periods for each of the Interfacing Contractors / Interfacing Parties and the
Contractor to install their Plant, equipment and Materials in the designated areas.
The IMP shall:
Identify all the systems and sub-systems and facilities with interfacing
requirements;
Define as far as possible the authority and responsibility of the contractor's, the
Interfacing Contractor’s and interfacing party’s involved in interface
management and development;
Identify the information to be exchanged, together with the management and
technical skills required for the associated development of the works, at each
phase of the contractor’s and Interfacing Contractor’s and Interfacing Parties’
project life-cycles;
Address the Contractual Works Programme (or Work Segment Programmes) of
the Contract to meet the Contractor’s Sections or Milestones and the Interfacing
Contractors’ sections or milestones and highlight any programme risks requiring
the Engineer’s attention;
Include relevant consideration of the requirements of “Safety, Health and
Environment Management” as described in Division 08000 of the General
Specifications;
Address the supply, installation, testing and commissioning programmes of the
Contract to meet Interfacing Contractors’ Sections or Milestones, and highlight
any programme risks requiring management attention; and
Indicate dates for commencement and completion of each principal activity by

the Contractor and those of the Interfacing Contractors and Interfacing Parties,
including delivery and installation of Plant, equipment, and Materials.
An example of the typical contents to be described in an IMP is included in Chapter
2 [Contents of Interface Management Plan] under Appendix 04000-1 of Division
04000.
After the Engineer reviews and issues approval to the IMP, the Contractor shall
execute the Works accordingly.
The Contractor shall raise and apprise the Engineer immediately of any difficulty in
developing a mutually acceptable IMP.
Employer’s / Engineer’s Input
The Employer or Engineer or both will coordinate the activities of the Contractor
with reference to interfacing with third parties during all the phases of the Contract.
The Employer or Engineer, within the scope of the relevant Contract provisions, may
assist the Contractor in the following fields:
Coordination and interface with state and local authorities for the timely receipt
of required permits, certificates and approvals related to the construction
process;
Coordination and interface with state and local authorities for the
implementation of acquisition procedures for any additional land areas that may
be required by the Contractor; and
Any other fields or activities related to the Contract as may be required for the
purposes of facilitating the Contractor's performance.
The Engineer shall conduct a coordination and interface meeting with the interfacing
parties every fortnight with the Contractor which may be attended by the Employer.
The primary objective of the meeting will be to review progress of the coordination
and interface activities.
The support and assistance of the Employer and/or the Engineer shall not release the
Contractor of any of his obligations under this Contract.
Detailed Interface Description (DID)
The DID is the document that provides a clear technical description of each of
interface in the Interface Table.
Any revision to the DID shall be mutually acceptable to both the Interfacing
Contractors and Interfacing Parties. Only then shall this be submitted to the Engineer
for his review.
DID shall contain the following items:
Table 4.1 Detailed Interface Descriptions
Detailed Interface Description

1 Item number and name of interface in Interface Table

2 Name of the Contractor and Interfacing Contractors and/or

Interfacing Parties
3 Confirmation Table of both the Contractor and Interfacing
Contractors and/or Interfacing Parties
4 Creation date and modification date
5 Correction history
6 Detailed interface descriptions:
The following items shall be described:
physical interface, functional interface, protocols, software and data
interface, naming conversion, design constrains, environmental
conditions, and drawings
7 Reference Documents

Approvals from Public Authorities and Agencies

The Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements with and obtain all necessary
approvals from public authorities and agencies, utility agencies and other relevant
/competent authorities. Such public authorities and agencies will include the
following:
NHAI (National Highway authority of India);
State Highway Authorities
Indian Railway;
Local Authorities and stake holders;
Local Municipal Corporation or Council;
Local State Electricity Boards;
Urban Local Bodies; and
Any other agency or stakeholder whose approval, consent or permit is necessary
for the implementation of the Works.
The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all necessary approvals and permits
from public authorities and Government or Private agencies and other relevant
organizations necessary with respect to the construction/fabrication activities and
meetings with Public Authorities and Agencies. The Employer shall facilitate these
activities to support the Contractor.
When the Contractor arranges meetings with Interfacing Parties including
government departments, utility agencies or Interface Contractors, it shall inform the
Engineer at least four (4) official working days (excluding general holidays) or such
shorter period permitted by the Engineer, before they are to be held and shall give
the Engineer and the Employer the agenda and the objective of the meetings. The
Employer and Engineer may require that certain organizations are not contacted
directly by the Contractor and that communication is initiated by the Employer,
should this be necessary the Engineer shall provide a list of such organizations to the
Contractor.
Correspondence with Public Authorities and Agencies
Both, hard (one (1) set) and soft copies of correspondence received from or dispatched
to public authorities, utility undertakings, and other agencies shall be submitted to the
Engineer and the Employer for information within two (2) days of receipt or dispatch.

Site Offices
General
The Contractor shall provide and maintain Provisional Site Office, Sub Site Offices
and Site Huts (hereinafter referred to as the “Site Offices”) during the periods as
specified hereafter for the use of the Employer's and Engineer’s Personnel.
Site Offices shall be situated in close proximity to the Contractor’s Site offices
and the fabrication-workshop site.
Access roads and areas surrounding the Site Offices shall be suitable for
vehicular access and be well-drained, with concrete walkways and covered
carparking spaces for the number of Employer’s and Engineer’s vehicles
specified in this Sub-Division. Site Offices compounds shall be securely fenced
and have suitable access gates and lighting.
Site Offices shall be located in a position to be approved by the Engineer. If the
location of any of the Site Offices is situated outside the right-of-way (ROW),
any costs related to securing the necessary areas required for the Site Offices
and the required access thereto shall be deemed to have been included in the
Accepted Contract Amount.
Site Offices are to be of a layout and construction (using either pre-fabricated
units or custom-built construction) acceptable to the Engineer.
Site Offices buildings shall be of sound design and constructed from materials
consented to by the Engineer, in compliance with the National Building Codes
of India. Site Offices shall be of sound, weatherproof construction, be well-lit
and secure, complete with lockable doors and windows, insect screens, sun
protection blinds, telephones, internet, Environment Control Systems, fire
protection, lightning protection, safety and other signage, drainage, sanitary
facilities, electrical power and any other required utility services. All sets of
keys for lockable doors and windows shall be delivered to the Engineer.
Electricity, telephone and internet supply and receptacles shall be provided in
various locations appropriate to the usage of a particular room or area.
Materials used for the construction of the Site Offices shall be new and of good
quality. Materials shall be selected such that the buildings, when erected,
provide good temperature and sound insulation, and when combined with air
conditioning equipment installed by the Contractor. Site Offices shall have a
minimum floor-ceiling height of 2.3 m with suitable internal partition walls with
lockable doors and shall as a minimum contain the number of rooms and areas
as specified in this Sub-Division. Open plan offices shared by more than one
person shall be sub-divided by means of 1,200 mm high movable partitions.
Both external and internal walls shall be sound-proof.
The area of the windows to each room shall be not less than ten percent (10 %)
of the floor area. All windows shall be fitted with venetian blinds and insect
netting.
Wet areas in toilets/washrooms and kitchen/pantry shall be tiled.

Plumbing and sanitary fixtures shall be standard types made from porcelain or
stainless steel and all pipework and fittings shall be polyvinyl chloride (PVC).
All works, materials and fixtures shall comply with the national plumbing code,
sanitary engineering standards, and other applicable regulations.
The Contractor shall provide all furniture, furnishings, fittings, fixtures,
equipment, etc. as specified in this Sub-Division, which shall be new and of the
make and quality as consented to by the Engineer.
The design of the Site Offices shall be submitted to the Engineer for review and
consent prior to the procurement of any materials for construction.
The Contractor shall be responsible for providing and maintaining all necessary:
access roads and vehicle parking areas;
fencing, gates and external lighting;
buildings/structures;
furniture, furnishings, fittings, fixtures, equipment, etc.;
utility services, other services and consumables, including but not limited
to the following:
i) electricity, gas and potable water supplies: including payment for all
connections and service charges;
ii) internet lines/connections; minimum speed thirty (30) mbps for
download and upload;
iii) fire protection systems and firefighting equipment in accordance with
the recommendations of local building codes or the relevant fire
department or both;
iv) earthing and lightning protection systems;
v) sanitation and sewerage systems, including the regular emptying of
sewage storage tanks and the hygienic disposal of effluent in
accordance with the environmental requirements of the Contract;
vi) cleaning on a daily basis and disposal of all garbage and waste;
all necessary consumables, etc. required for running/maintaining the Site
Offices, including but not limited to the following:
i) office and stationery consumables: including for example paper for
printing and photocopying, toner and ink cartridges, files, CDs/DVDs,
pens, pencils, staplers, etc.;
ii) kitchen consumables: including for example drinking water, tea, coffee,
milk, sugar, detergent, etc.;
iii) toilet/washroom consumables: for example soap, towels, toilet tissue,
etc.;
iv) general office cleaning materials, tools and consumables: for example:
vacuum cleaners, cleaning detergents and liquids, brushes, mops, etc.;

The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining the Site Offices in good
condition and repair until the issue of the Taking-Over Certificate, unless
otherwise authorized by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall dismantle the Site Offices at the end of the Contract,
unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer.
Following the issue of the Taking-Over Certificate for the Works, all
materials and equipment (including IT equipment), furniture, furnishings,
fixtures, fittings, etc. recovered from the dismantling of the Site Office and
their associated utilities and access roads, etc. shall be the property of the
Contractor.
The Contractor shall provide internal finishing for Site Offices wall and ceiling
as approved by the Engineer.
Summary of Site Office
The Contractor shall design, construct, equip and furnish the Site Offices for the
Employer’s and Engineer’s use at the time specified below. The Contractor shall
also maintain Site Offices in good conditions and provide services including,
but not limited to maintenance of the office equipment and furniture, repairing
and mending, daily cleaning and disposal of all garbage and waste, consumable
replenishment in respect of toiletries, cartridges for the plotter and colour laser
writers, first aid box, batteries/battery cells, drinking water etc. Design of the
Site Offices shall be submitted to the Engineer for review, prior to
commencement of the construction of those facilities. Details of Site office shall
comprise of the following.
All furniture, furnishings, fittings & fixture and equipment etc. shall be of the
configuration, make and quality as consented by the Engineer.
Within fifty-six (56) days after the Commencement Date, as required by the
Engineer, Contractor to establish the temporary arrangements for Site Office
until the final arrangements made by the Contractor.
Provisional Site Office
Sub Site Office
Site Huts
Provisional Site Office
Not Used
Sub Site Office
The Contractor of each package shall provide and continue to maintain Sub Site
Office specified in the table 4.2 for the Employer/Engineer during the period
from the start of construction to the end of the Contract and/or after issuance of
Engineer’s certification. The Contactor shall provide one Sub Site Office at each
fabrication-workshop close to or inside of Contractor’s workshop site Office. In
case of the Contractor provide Employer’s and Engineer’s Sub Site Office
within the Contractor’s Office, the main entrance shall have independent access
from outside with lockable door.
The Contractor shall obtain the consent about the locations of the Sub Site
offices from the Engineer.
Within 91 days after the Commencement Date, Sub Site Offices shall be
constructed, furnished and maintained in good condition for use.
The Contractor shall provide all facilities and fixtures in the offices following
the Works Requirement.
The Contractor shall provide the facilities shown in the table 4.2 and the fixtures
shown in the table 4.3 for the Sub Site Office.
The Contractor shall maintain the necessary and latest infrastructure for Sub Site
Office (Water supply/drainage, electricity, gas, telephone line, internet line with
sufficient speed etc.).
The Contractor shall pay all service charges (Water supply/drainage, electricity,
gas, telephone line, internet line etc. and land use charges if necessary) for the
Employer/Engineer’s offices.
Sub Site Office shall be provided with adequate lighting and drainage.
Sub Site Office shall be fitted with ample windows shuttered on the outside and
lockable from inside.
All windows shall have venetian blinds or equivalent equipment.
All internal and entrance doors shall be lock-fast.
The Contractor shall provide and maintain ten (10) covered parking lots and
shall improve the access road to the Sub Site Office.
The Contractor shall dismantle the offices at the end of the Contract and/or after
the issuance of Engineer’s certification.
The Contractor shall consult with the Engineer about disposal of fixtures.
The Contractor shall perform daily cleaning and disposal of all garbage and
waste (except on general holidays).
The following equipment and the associated consumables shall be supplied:
Fire extinguishers;
Medical first aid kit with medical supplies (1 Set);
Air conditioning and ventilation system;
Consumables for kitchen (crockery, drinking glasses etc.);
Consumables for cleaning (washing bowls, brushes, buckets and mops,
etc.);
Consumables for bedroom (sheets and comforters); and
Consumables for emergency generator (Fuel, cables etc.).

Table 4.2: Room Requirements for Sub Site Offices

Room Designation Minimum Area (m2)
Main space for

1. 120
1. Engineer 2. 40
2. Employer
Meeting room 30
Kitchen/pantry 10
Toilets/washrooms 25
4 nos. of toilet including 2 western-style and hand-wash
facilities
Medical/ Nursing room Not required
Store room for documents 20
Table 4.3: Furniture, Fixtures and Fittings for each Sub Site Office
Item Quantity
・Office Area
Desk (1200x900) with lockable drawers & chair 10
Partition(H=300) (For desktop) 10
Lockers with key (900x300x500) 10
Rubbish bin 10
Desk (Long Table(1800x600)) & chair (For Main Space) For 30 staff
18
Desk (Long Table(1800x600)) & chair (For Meeting room) For 20 people
5
Desk (Long Table(1800x600)) & chair (For meeting room 2) -
Additional chair(foldable) 10
Bookshelf (2000x850x350: 5 shelf) 10
Whiteboard (2000x1000) 2
Telephone (Line) 5
・1 PABX in Site office with 5 extensions
Shredder (A3 size, Capacity: 40L) 1

Video conference system (MCU) 1
*The model shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
TV set (LCD, 40”) 1

Power strip 10
Combined machine for photo copy and scan (Digital full color, A3 1
size, network)
Color Laser Printer (A3 size, network) 1
Projector (Screen size 40”-300”) and project screen (72”x72”, 1
white) with stand
Wireless LAN access point (with Lan cable) (To be designed by Necessary
the Contractor) amount
Switching HUB (with Lan cable) (To be designed by the Necessary
Contractor) amount
Wall clock 2
・Pantry & Bed room Area
Refrigerator (400L) 1
Microwave oven (700W) 1
Coffee machine 1
Mineral Water Server 1 set
Cupboard (table height) 1
Refuse bin 1
Vacuum cleaner 1
Bed & Mattress 4 set
・Others Area
Emergency generator (50 KVA) including connection to Sub Site 1
Office
Flashlight 1
Front door mat 1
All dimensions are in mm unless otherwise specified.
Site Huts
Not Used
Site Laboratory
The Contractor shall allow the Employer and the Engineer to use the Contractor’s
Material Testing Laboratories, mention in Clause 12 of Sub-Division 06040
[Temporary Facilities of Contractor], and its laboratory personnel for carrying out
sampling and testing necessary for the construction works.
The Contractor shall have no right to claim any issue relating to the Employer’s and
Engineer’s use of the Contractor’s Laboratories and its personnel.

Sign Boards at the Site Office

The Contractor shall provide one project profile sign board at each Employer’s and
Engineer’s Site Office of a size, minimum 1.5 m x 2.5 m, and maintain them in good
condition. All information on the signboards will be written in English and local
language for separate signboard. The signboards shall be positioned on a steel frame
as directed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall submit proposals for the signboard
materials, the text layout (in English and local language) and installation method of
the signboards at the Site Office, for Engineer’s approval. Each sign board shall show:
the name of the Project and the Works,
the Location Map,
the name of the funding agency,
the name of the Employer,
the name of the Engineer,
the name of the Contractor, and
all other details as required by the Engineer
The Contractor shall maintain the sign boards and remove them on completion of the
Works or when instructed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall clean, update,
maintain and replace the signs if damaged, throughout the duration of the Contract.
No additional payment shall be applicable for damaged signs which are required to be
replaced.
Utility and Services for the Use by Employer’s and Engineer’s Personnel
The temporary utility services to be provided by the Contractor for the use by the
Employer and Engineer’s Personnel (up until issue of the Taking Over Certificate,
unless otherwise directed by the Engineer), shall include the following.
Electricity and Water Supply
Electrical power and potable water supply systems for the Employer’s and
Engineer’s Site Office shall be installed and made operational within the specified
period of construction as mentioned above for each of the Site Offices. The
Contractor shall maintain and provide continuous and adequate supplies unless
otherwise authorized by the Engineer.
Sanitation and Sewerage
Sanitation and sewerage systems for the Employer’s and Engineer’s Site Offices
shall be installed and made operational within the specified period of
construction as mentioned above for each of the Site Offices.
The Contractor shall provide a properly designed and constructed septic tank as
consented by the Engineer for the disposal of domestic sewage from each
building in the Engineer’s Site Offices.
Each septic tank shall be regularly emptied, maintained and serviced by the
Contractor to ensure proper functioning.

Office Cleaning, Waste and Garbage Disposal

The Contractor shall provide personnel and perform daily cleaning of all rooms
and area in the Employer’s and Engineer’s Site Offices.
The Contractor shall collect and dispose of, in a location and manner consented
by the Engineer, all domestic waste and garbage from the Employer’s and
Engineer’s Site Offices on daily basis. Collection times shall be arranged for the
convenience of the Employer and Engineer.
Fire Fighting Equipment:
Firefighting equipment shall be provided in all Employer’s and Engineer’s Site
Offices in accordance with the applicable laws and regulations of local Fire
Authority.
Office Security
The Contractor shall provide a full-time security service for all Employer’s and
Engineer’s Site Offices.
Use of Contractor’s First Aid Stations
The Contractor’s emergency medical care and first aid services shall be made
available, for use by the Employer’s and Engineer’s personnel. Suitable provision
for the Clinic shall be provided by the Contractor according to the SHE Management
Manual within office area.
Measurement for Payment
Facilities for Employer’s and Engineer’s Personnel shall be measured as a Lump
Sum item as described below;
Lump sum item for Providing Site Office along with furnishing for the
Employer’s and Engineer’s Personnel including dismantling of Site Office
and restoration to original condition.
Monthly rate item for housekeeping & maintenance expenses for the Site
Office of the Employer’s and the Engineer’s personnel.
The stage-payment schedule for item 1) a) above shall be in accordance with Sub-
Clause 2.4 of Section IV of the Bidding Documents.
The Payment for item 1) b) above shall be made through monthly interim
payments, starting from the takeover of the offices until the issuance of Taking-
Over Certificate.

General
The programme has the following three primal purposes in three respective phases of
the contract procedure. Those purposes on respective phases are clarified as follows:
Bid Programmes in Technical Proposal
The Bid Programme submitted as a part or parts of the Technical Proposal, which is
a part of this Contract, shall bind the Contractor until the Contractual Works
Programme specified hereunder is consented by the Engineer.
Contractual Works Programme
As required in Sub-Clause 8.3 of the General Conditions, the Contractor shall submit
a detailed work programme to the Engineer for his consent within twenty-eight (28)
days after the Commencement Date. While preparing this, the Contractor shall duly
consider his various obligations including, but not limited to, interface, coordination
and cooperation with other parties employed by the Employer. Upon consent by the
Engineer to this programme, it shall be referred to as the Contractual Works
Programme, and become an integral part of the Contract; and
Work Segment Programmes and Supporting Reports
Based on the Contractual Works Programme, the Contractor shall submit sub-
divided and detailed programmes in respect of all work segments, along with status
reports of the Works to the Engineer for checking and monitoring the Works. Each
programme produced and submitted to the Engineer shall be a detailed time window
of the Contractual Works Programme.
Methodology
Unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer, the programme shall be in the form
of a Critical Path Method (CPM) network showing critical path together with
narrative statements. The programme shall also be submitted in the form of a time
bar-chart showing a critical path and S-curve (cumulative progress in percentage).
The time bar-chart programme shall list all main activities and connected sub-
activities
The network shall be prepared in accordance with current recognised and
accepted good planning and programming practice and shall show graphically the
chain of activities/sub-activities and their sequential relationship with each other
from the Commencement Date to the day of issue of Taking-Over Certificate of
whole of the Works. It shall include all activities with their durations and shall
meet the provisions of the Contract in all respects. It shall be noted that the
Contractor does not have an exclusive right to use free and total floats without
consent of the Engineer.
In preparing the CPM network and the time bar-chart programme showing a
critical path and S-curve, the Contractor shall make due allowances for delays,
holidays, local working conditions, maintenance of equipment, trial runs, and
similar items. Under no circumstances the CPM network or the time bar-chart

programme shall not show a date for the taking over of the Works date beyond
the Time for Completion.
Contractual Works Programme
The Bid Programme in the Contractor’s Technical Proposal shall be further
developed by the Contractor into the detailed work programme referred to in Sub-
Clause 8.3 of General Conditions and shall be submitted to the Engineer within
twenty-eight (28) days after the Commencement Date. Upon consent by the
Engineer, it shall be referred to as the Contractual Works Programme which shall
serve as the base against which the Contract progress shall be monitored. The
Contractual Works Programme shall supersede all other programmes submitted
earlier and shall be deemed to be the programme on which the Contractor has
based his Accepted Contract Amount and in accordance with which he shall
execute the Works within the specified Time for Completion.
The Contractual Works Programme shall be the highest priority programme.
Other programmes in respect of structure/priority, shall be a particular time
window taken from the Contractual Works Programme shall be programme
detailed in terms of their purposes.
If, at any time, actual progress is too slow to complete within the Time for
Completion, or progress has fallen (or will fall) behind the planned progress
indicated in the current Contractual Works Programme, or both, by a time of four
(4) weeks, then the Engineer shall instruct the Contractor to submit a revised
Contractual Works Programme and supporting report describing the revised
methods and resources which the Contractor proposes to adopt in order to
expedite progress and to complete the Works within the specified Time for
Completion as stipulated in Sub-Clause 8.2 of the General Conditions.
Any changes to the Contractual Works Programme shall be subject to the consent
of the Engineer and shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to
complete the work within the Time for Completion as per the Contract.
Work Segment Programmes
General
The Contractual Works Programme shall be divided into sub-programmes of
work segments of manageable size, addressing in more detail certain specific
segments of the Works, which shall collectively be referred to as Work Segment
Programmes. The categories of Work Segment Programmes include but are not
limited to the following:
Shop Drawing Submission Programme;
Procurement Programme;
Construction Programme;
Transportation and Delivery Programme;
Programme of Inspection and Testing including Test on Completion

The Work Segment Programmes shall be further substantiated by

supplementary programmes upon request by the Engineer such as Three Months
Rolling Programmes addressing a succeeding time window (weeks or months)
in more detail. Further supplementary programmes shall be added as required to
adequately plan and monitor specific Work Segments or sets of activities.
All the Work Segment Programmes shall be submitted to the Engineer for
consent within fifty-six (56) days from the Commencement Date.
Programme Requirements
The Work Segment Programmes and all other programme required to be provided
in accordance with the Contract shall comply with the following requirements unless
otherwise instructed by the Engineer;
All programmes under this Contract shall be prepared, scheduled, executed and
reported using the latest version of CPM scheduling software of Primavera
Project Planner. The Contractor shall supply to the Engineer with one (1)
original licensed copy of the said software including manuals and training and
subsequent versions thereof at no extra cost to the Employer.
All programmes shall be accompanied by a Programme Analysis Report as
described hereinafter.
The Contractor is responsible for determining the sequence of activities, the time
estimates for the detailed construction activities and the means, methods,
techniques and procedures to be employed. Programmes identified herein shall
represent the Contractor’s best judgment of how it will execute the Work in
compliance with the Contract requirements. The Contractor shall ensure that the
programmes are current and accurate and are properly and monitored in a timely
manner, updated and revised to accommodate current conditions of the Works
and so as to be in compliance with the requirements in the Contract.
The Gregorian calendar shall be used for planning and execution of the Works.
All programme submissions shall include details of the Contractor’s allowance
for public holidays, recognized festivals, days of rest and other non-working
periods. If a Milestone falls on a public holiday or non-work day, it shall be
effective the next working day.
The planning unit for the duration of all programme activities shall be the day.
Any activity having a duration of more than sixty (60) days shall be divided into
sub-categories that shall not exceed sixty (60) days.
CPM programmes shall reflect status using remaining duration and percent
complete.
All programmes shall be fully resource loaded as appropriate or as required by
the Engineer, covering all stages and aspects of the Contract and shall include,
but not be limited to:
i) major manpower for both design and construction;
ii) number of itemized Contractor’s equipment;
iii) drawings and other deliverables;

iv) principle quantities of components or parts;

v) principle quantities of bulk materials inclusive of cut/fill volumes, blanket
material, piles, steel, concrete, steel reinforcement, cabling, piping,
ducting, etc. and
vi) sub-contractor’s deliverables
Each activity shall be coded to indicate, as a minimum, the work group or entity
responsible for the activity, the area, facility or location when the other
Contractors or other entities are involved and
All the activities including Milestone shall be coded so as to be separately
identifiable. The Contractor shall be required to assign additional activity codes
as required by the Engineer.
Respective Work Segment Programmes
Respective Work Segment Programmes shall be identified and detailed in the
categories as specified herein below.
Shop Drawing Submission Programme
Within twenty-eight (28) days of the Commencement Date the Contractor shall
prepare and submit to the Engineer for review and consent a detailed Shop
Drawing Submission Programme on the basis of the Drawings for checking
and approval of the same so as to match the sequence of
construction/fabrication activities as per Contractual Works Programme.
Shop Drawings shall confirm to Division 05000 [Contractor’s Drawings] of
the General Specifications.
Procurement Programme
Within twenty-eight (28) days from the Commencement Date the Contractor
shall prepare and submit to the Engineer for review and consent an initial
Procurement Programme for items manufactured off-site.
Not less than one (1) month prior to the first shipment of each category of
manufactured Plant or Materials or both, the Contractor shall prepare and
submit an updated Procurement Programme to the Engineer for review and
consent.
The Procurement Programme shall:
show the interdependencies of the various Contractor’s, Subcontractors’
and suppliers’ design disciplines;
identify items produced or assembled within and outside the Country or
both, together with the durations required for manufacture, shipping,
inland transportation and off- and on-site storage;
separately identify any Plant and Materials which are subject to long lead
times or component parts or items manufactured outside the country of
assembly or testing or all;

include relevant information for each major/significant item of Plant and

Materials (including any major/significant components), which shall
include, but not be limited to the following:
i) name and description detailing the supplier/sub-supplier;
ii) drawing information (where appropriate), title, drawing status,
submission dates, shop drawings/ fabrication drawing preparation,
etc.;
iii) the manufacturing process, manufacturing of test pieces, testing
programme (type tests and factory acceptance tests), trial
production, monthly production and supply of components;
iv) the assembly process, erection and assembly sequences
(particularly for the first pieces) prior to shipment, test assemblies,
monthly assembly requirements;
v) quality release from factory, factory storage, transportation and
delivery to the workshop site; and
vi) off-site inspections and tests, which shall include details of factory
inspections, tests and witnessing required for the Contractor’s,
Subcontractors’ and suppliers’ procurement and manufacturing
activities.
From the base data above, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the
Engineer an exceptions report, detailing any Plant or Materials (including
components) that are in delay. This report shall include the reason for each
delay and indicate what action the Contractor is taking to recover the delay.
Construction Programme
The Contractor shall prepare and submit a Construction Programme to the
Engineer for review and consent. The Construction Programme shall in
general consist of separate Construction Programmes for fabrication and check
assembly of each steel truss superstructure along with bearings and accessories.
A Construction Programme for individual steel truss superstructure along with
bearings and accessories shall be composed of sub-programmes for each
separate activities like cutting, drilling, assembling, welding, grinding check
assembly, painting etc.
The Construction Programmes shall be identified by distinctive names and / or
numbers. Programmes for all major activities with respect to each steel truss
superstructure along with bearings and accessories, shall be submitted to the
Engineer for consent:
Transportation and Delivery Programme
The Contractor shall prepare and submit a Transportation and Delivery
Programme to the Engineer for review and consent. The Transportation and
Delivery Programme in general consist of separate Transportation and
Delivery Programme for fabricated steel structural members and bearings
corresponding to each bridge GAD.

The Transportation and Delivery Programme for fabricated steel structural

members and bearings corresponding to each bridge GAD shall be properly
coordinated with the Site assembly and erection schedule of corresponding
bridges by the respective Interfacing Contractors.
The Contractor shall prepare and submit a Coordination and Interfacing
Programme to the Engineer for review and consent. The requirements for the
Coordination and Interfacing Programme are set out in Clause 8 [Coordination and
Interfacing Programme] of Sub-Division 04040 of the General Specifications.
Programme of Inspection and Testing including Test on Completion
Within fifty-six (56) days from the Commencement Date the Contractor shall
prepare and submit an initial Programme of Inspection and Testing including
Test on Completion to the Engineer for review and consent.
Not less than three (3) months prior to the first inspection or test, the Contractor
shall prepare and submit to the Engineer for review and consent an updated
Programme of Inspection and Testing including Test on Completion.
The Programme of Inspection and Testing including Test on Completion shall
include:
activities for the preparation, submittal, review and consent of the various
inspection and testing procedures;
demonstrate the sequencing and logical dependencies and correlations
between the various on-site inspection, testing and check-assembly
activities required for the Works.
Prior to accepting any manufactured Plant and Materials item for use,
in the Permanent Works;
in the case of Temporary Works, to the extent required for safety
considerations;
The Engineer shall either:
i) carry out an inspection;
ii) witness the testing carried out by the Contractor;
as prescribed in the respective standards and codes.
Three Months Rolling Programme
Once the Contractual Works Programme and the Works Segment Programme are
established, within fourteen (14) days thereafter, the Contractor shall submit to
the Engineer for consent an initial Three Months Rolling Program. The Initial
submission shall show in detail all activities that have commenced or are due to
start within the first three calendar month period to meet Milestones and any other
dates set out in the Contract. Thereafter, the Contractor shall submit a new Three
Months Rolling Program every month as part of the Monthly Progress Report.
The Three Months Rolling Programme shall be an expansion of the Work
Segment Programmes, covering sequential periods of three months. The Three
Months Rolling Programme shall provide more detail of the Contractor’s plan,
organization and execution of the work within these periods. In particular, the
Contractor shall expand each activity planned to occur during the next two (2)
month period, if necessary, to a daily or weekly level of detail.
The Three Months Rolling Programme shall be developed as a Critical Path
Method (CPM) network and shall be presented in bar chart and time-scaled
network diagram format. Bar charts shall be presented on an A3 size and time-
scaled networks diagrams on an A1 size reproducible media. Tasks in the
programme shall be derivatives of and directly related to tasks in the consented
Work Segment Programmes.
The Contractor shall describe the discrete work elements and work element inter-
relationships necessary to complete all works and any separable parts thereof,
including work assigned to subcontractors / suppliers. Each activity in the Three
Months Rolling Programme shall be coded or described so as to indicate the
corresponding activity in the Work Segment Programmes.
The Three Months Rolling Programme shall be issued on monthly basis.
The Three Months Rolling Program shall after the initial submittal:
Provide details of all activities that are in progress, or are due to start, within
the forthcoming two (2) month period and the previous one (1) month period
shall also be shown;
Be updated every month and be submitted concurrent with the Monthly
Progress Report;
Highlight all required dates for transmittal or receipt of information to or
from the Engineer, subcontractors or interfacing parties; and
Consist of a three months’ time window extracted from the Detailed Works
Program.
Three Weeks Rolling Programme
Prior to the start of the workshop site mobilization and each week during the
construction and testing phases, a time-scaled Three Weeks Rolling Program shall
be prepared and submitted to the Engineer for each section of the Works.
The Three Weeks Rolling Program shall show in detail the current week’s
progress, and the following two weeks plan, all activities that are in progress or
due to start or finish within two weeks of its submission. The program shall
clearly tie into the Three Months Rolling Program in all respects. The activities
shown on the Three Weeks Rolling Program shall be an amplification of and
compatible with the latest version of the Three Months Rolling Program in all
respects. The Three Weeks Rolling Program need not be computer generated and
does not require a detailed program analysis report. Any activity exceeding one
week in duration shall be divided into sub-activities, the duration of which shall
not exceed one (1) week.

Review and Monitoring of Programme

Programme Review
The Contractor shall submit all programmes as required in the Contract to the
Engineer for review and consent.
The Engineer shall, within twenty-one (21) days of receipt of the initial
submission of any programme for consent, either give a Notice of No Objection
or provide specific details as to why a Notice of No Objection is not given. If
the Contractor is advised that the programme is not given a Notice of No
Objection, the Contractor shall amend the programme taking into account the
Engineer’s comments and/or requirements and resubmit the programme within
fourteen (14) days.
In the case of further re-submittals, the resubmission shall be made within
fourteen (14) days after the notice.
Work Segment Programme Revisions
The Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer in writing of the need for
any change in the Work Segment Programme, whether due to a change of
intention or circumstances or for any other reason. Where such proposed
changes affect timely completion of the respective works, stretch or stage; the
Contractor shall within fourteen (14) days from the date of notifying the
Engineer, submit for the Engineer’s consideration his proposed revised Work
Segment Programme and accompanying Programme Analysis Report. The
proposed revised Work Segment Programme shall show the sequence of
operations of any and all work related to the change and the impact of changed
work or changed conditions on the Works and other Contractors’ works.
If at any time the Engineer considers that the actual or anticipated progress of
the work reflects a significant deviation from the Work Segment Programmes,
he shall request the Contractor to submit a revised Work Segment Programmes.
Upon receipt of such a request, the Contractor shall submit within fourteen (14)
days a revised Work Segment Programmes, together with an accompanying
Programme Analysis Report and narrative statement, if any, including the
reasons/repercussions of such deviations and the likely delays arising out of
such deviations. The Contractor’s resubmission of the programme shall
demonstrate the means including deployment of additional resources etc. by
which the Contractor shall eliminate the deviations and make good the delays
occurred or likely to occur due to the same.
Unless and until an amended version has the consent of the Engineer, the
existing programme shall remain as the Work Segment Programme for all
purposes of the Contract.
Consent by the Engineer to a Work Segment Programmes shall not relieve the
Contractor of any of his duties or responsibilities under the Contract, nor in the
event that a Work Segment Programmes indicates that a Milestone or any
intermediate targeted date has not or will not be met, it shall not constitute any

form of acknowledgement that the Contractor is or may be entitled to an

extension of time in relation to such Milestone/intermediate target date. In any
such circumstance the Contractual Works Programme shall always prevail over
other programmes.
Notwithstanding the above, the Engineer may at any time during the course of
the Contract require the Contractor to reproduce the computer-generated
schedule report described above to reflect actual activity dates and generate
programmes based upon “what if” statements.
Progress Monitoring
The Contractor shall monitor the progress and his subcontractors’ performance and
against programmes to ensure its compliance with its obligations under the Contract.
Monitoring of the Works shall include direct, daily monitoring of the progress of the
works and the preparation of written reports to be submitted to the Engineer. The
reports shall include all necessary supporting data to apprise the Engineer of the status
of the completion of the works. The Contractor shall prepare the Monthly Progress
Reports covering all aspects of the execution of the works.
Programme Analysis Report
The Contractor shall submit a Programme Analysis Report that shall, in narrative
format, describe the basis and assumptions used to develop each programme. The
Programme Analysis Report shall be prepared in a format which has received the
Engineer’s consent and contain as a minimum the following:
cycle times and work sequences;
the deployment of Contractor’s Equipment and labour;
the production rates used in determining duration;
the shifts assumed in determining duration;
the breakdown of labour requirements by trades;
details of quantities used in developing the programme, to the extent that such
information is not provided elsewhere; and,
interfaces with the Engineer and Other Contractors / Interfacing Parties and other
constraints.
Progress Meetings and Programme Updates
The Employer shall chair progress meetings every month with the Contractor as
described in Clause 3.3 [Meeting Procedure] in Sub-Division 04030 [Meetings]
of the General Specifications.
On a monthly basis, the Contractor shall arrange for their Contractor’s
Representative, Construction Manager and Planning Manager to meet at the
workshop site with the Engineer to review the Contractor’s Monthly Programme
Update. A turnaround document as per the agreed computer software generated
by the Contractor shall be marked-up to show the agreed upon progress, signed
by the Contractor, and a signed copy issued to the Engineer. The Monthly

Programme Update shall show up-to-date and accurate progress of the Work and
shall forecast the completion date for activities in progress based on the
Contractual Works Programme. The Monthly Programme Update shall be
prepared by the Contractor in co-ordination with all its principal Subcontractors
and suppliers and the Interfacing Contractors and Interfacing Parties, if necessary.
The Monthly Programme Update shall include actual activity data for progress to
date, but in the Monthly Programme Update, the Contractor shall not change the
schedule logic, the activity relationships/dependencies, or planned activity
durations and shall not add or delete activities. If the Contractor believes that any
of these items should be changed, then a proposed revised Work Segment
Programmes shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Engineer. Although
activities shall not be added or deleted in the Monthly Programme Update,
activities that have been recommended and received the consent of the Engineer
shall be included in the next Monthly Programme Update.
The Contractor will be notified by the Engineer, in writing, as to the acceptance,
reasons for rejection, or any revisions required to the Work Segment Programmes.
Changes to the Programmes agreed upon by the Contractor and the Engineer and
which have received the Engineer’s consent shall be incorporated by the
Contractor into the Programmes within seven (7) calendar days after such
agreement. Changes on which the Contractor and the Engineer cannot agree shall
be documented and shall be subject to the final decision of the Employer which
shall be binding.
The Contractor shall adjust the data date (“as of date”) to be the same as the end
date for the invoicing period.
The Monthly Programme Update shall show actual activity commencement and
completion dates, actual remaining durations in workdays and the physical
percentage complete for those activities commenced and not yet complete. For
the stored materials, the update shall show the amount of material stored,
representing the total cost of the materials delivered and properly stored. The
Monthly Programme Update shall also include a graphic comparison of the
current status and the Work Programme for each activity in the network.
Each Monthly Programme Update shall continue to show all work activities
including those already completed. These completed activities shall accurately
reflect the “as built” information by indicating the dates when activities were
actually started and completed.
The Monthly Programme Updates shall also contain the following information
for each activity:
Activity identification number, description and estimated original duration in
workdays;
Calculated early and late finish dates;
Actual start and actual finish dates, and remaining duration, in calendar, for
those activities started and not completed;

Days ahead or behind or both schedule of the Milestones representing the

identified contracted Milestones and Times for Completion;
Physical percentage complete for each activity;
A float analysis of the longest path through the Programmes detailing
potential delays and areas for acceleration. Actual start and finish dates shall
be indicated for each activity as appropriate. Completed activities shall be
omitted from remaining float and late start sorts.
The deliberation of all meetings shall be recorded, by the Engineer, in the minutes
of meeting.
Other Programme Meetings
The Engineer shall convene routine or ad-hoc review meetings or both.
Requirement of the meetings shall be provided by the Engineer
Revision of Programme
If at any time it is evident to the Engineer that the current Work Segment
Programmes or Monthly Programme Update, no longer represents the actual
progress or planned execution of the Work, and the Work is delayed by a period
of four (4) weeks, the Engineer shall require the Contractor to submit a revised
Work Segment Programmes within seven (7) days after the Engineer's
instructions.
Revisions to the programme shall be made by the Contractor by:
modification of activities or activity durations or both;
modification in logic connections between activities;
with a supporting report describing any additional resource loadings (e.g.
labour, equipment, material etc.) and / or revised construction methods /
sequences from those included in the current Work Segment Programmes or
other sub-programmes, at the risk and cost of the Contractor.
Any proposed revisions to the Work Segment Programmes and other sub-
programmes shall be submitted to the Engineer for consent with the supporting
reports as stated above. This submittal shall include, as a minimum, a written
narrative with a full description and reasons for each revision to a Works activity,
a full printout of Contractual Works Programme, and an electronic copy of the
revised Work Segment Programmes (and/or the sub-programme). For revisions
affecting the sequence of work, the Contractor shall provide a programme
diagram “fragment” which compares the original sequence to the revised
sequence of the work. This diagram shall maintain all the Milestone and Times
for Completion and comply with the Contractual Works Programme.
Recovery Programme
Should an updated Work Segment Programme, sub-programme, Monthly
Programme Update or Three Months Rolling Programme at any time during the
Time for Completion show that the Contractor’s progress is ten (10) or more
calendar days in delay in relation to any forthcoming Milestone(s) or any other

identified time(s) for completion on the Contractual Works Programme, the

Contractor shall prepare a Recovery Programme separate from the updated
Monthly Programme Update at no additional cost to the Employer (unless the
Employer is responsible for the event or occurrence which has caused the
progress slippage) explaining and demonstrating how the Contractor shall
reschedule its Works in order to regain compliance with the Contractual Works
Programme.
If a Recovery Programme is required as detailed above, the Contractor shall
prepare and submit a Recovery Programme to the Engineer, incorporating the best
available information from the Contractor, Subcontractors, Interfacing
Contractors and Interfacing Parties, which shall permit the forecast completion
date(s) to achieve the designated Milestone(s) or other identified time(s) for
completion in the Contractual Works Programme. The Contractor shall prepare
a Recovery Programme to the same level of detail as the originally consented-to
Work Segment Programme(s), sub-programme(s), Monthly Programme Update
or Three Months Rolling Programme or both.
The Contractor shall discuss and finalise their proposed Recovery Programme
with the Engineer within seven (7) working days after the date of its initial
submission by the Contractor. Once it has received the Engineer’s consent, the
Recovery Programme shall be implemented as the Revised Work Segment
Programme(s), sub-programme(s) or Three Months Rolling Programme(s) or
both as the case may be, for the remaining Works in the Contractor’s scope.

General
This Sub-Division is to provide detailed requirements for the Contractor’s
Monthly Progress Report in addition to those stipulated in Sub-Clause 4.21 of the
General Conditions.
The Contractor shall submit a Progress Report to the Engineer on a monthly basis
(called referred to as the “Monthly Progress Report” or “MPR”) in accordance
with the Sub-Clause referenced in the previous paragraph above. This Monthly
Progress Report shall be submitted on the last working day of each calendar
month and shall account for all work actually performed from the first (01st) day
of the month up to and including the last day of the month of the MPR submission:
this period shall be referred to as the ‘Reporting Month’.
The Monthly Progress Report shall be submitted in a format to which the
Engineer shall have given his consent, describing, but not limited to, the topics
listed below.
Executive Summary
The Contractor shall provide an executive summary covering the major achievements
made during the Reporting Month, the activities planned for the next month and any
issues that are affecting or may in future affect the progress of the Works. These items
shall be dealt with in full detail within the body of the MPR.
Programme Update and Status
The Contractor shall provide a programme update for the Works which shall include
but not be limited to the following items:
a Monthly Programme Update, which shall be prepared by recording actual
activity completion dates and percentage of activities completed up to the end of
the Reporting Month, together with estimates of remaining durations and
expected activity completion based on current progress. The Monthly Programme
Update shall:
account for the actual progress of the Works;
include updated Work Segment Programmes to reflect modifications in the
design, construction and testing programme’
include the status of every activity in progress, its graphic representation
(completed and remaining) with respect to the identified works in the
Reporting Month, as well as for all the major works and relevant activities;
and
include a progress ‘S’ curve indicating the baseline ‘S’ curve for the accepted
programme and physical progress.
The Monthly Programme Update shall be accompanied by an activity report and
a narrative statement which shall explain the basis of the Contractor’s submittal
regarding:

Work Segment Programmes – explaining the determination of activity

durations and describing the Contractor’s approach for meeting Milestones,
other identified time(s) for completion and Time(s) for Completion as
specified in the Contract;
Updated Work Segment Programmes – stating in the narrative the Works
actually completed and reflecting along the critical path in terms of days
ahead or behind allowable dates. Specific requirements for the narrative are:
i) identification of causes of actual and potential delays (if any) with
respect to Milestones, other identified time(s) for completion and
Time(s) for Completion;
ii) provision of an explanation for any works affected by delays and
proposed corrective actions / mitigation measures to achieve the
Milestones, other identified time(s) for completion and Time(s) for
Completion and mitigate potential delays;
iii) identification of any deviation from the previous month’s critical path;
iv) clear identification of every activity with a number and description for
activities in progress and activities scheduled to be completed;
v) provision of time required to cater for any design changes or Variation,
if any.
Programme Status presenting:
i) the status of Work Segment Programmes up to and including the current
Reporting Month, with cumulative progress to date and a forecast of
remaining work;
ii) a programme bar-chart in A3 size and a time-related logic network
diagram in A1 size, including activity listings.
Activity Variance Analysis - analysing activities planned to start prior to or
during the Reporting Month but not started at the end of the Reporting
Month, as well as activities started or completed in advance of the Work
Segment Programmes or both.
Three Months Rolling Programme Revisions and Updates
The Three Months Rolling Programme shall be extended forward each month as
described above. Each submission of the Three Months Rolling Programme shall
be accompanied by a Programme Analysis Report, describing actual progress to
date, and the forecast for activities occurring over the next three-month period.
If the Three Months Rolling Programme is at variance with the Work Segment
Programmes, the Programme Analysis Report shall be accompanied by a
supporting narrative statement describing the Contractor’s plan for the execution
of the activities to be undertaken over the three month period, including
programme assumptions and methods to be employed in achieving timely
completion.

The Contractor shall revise the Three Months Rolling Programme or propose
revisions of the Work Segment Programmes, or both, from time-to-time as may
be appropriate to ensure consistency between them.
Drawing Preparation / Submittal Status
Status of drawing preparation shall be reported, including but not limited to:
A report detailing with progress of drawing preparation made for ‘shop drawings’,
‘Temporary Work design drawings’, ‘fabrication drawings’ and ‘as built records’,
as the case may be, and any outstanding issues to be resolved with solutions
during the Reporting Month; and
The progressive and detailed version of the schedule of ‘shop drawings’,
‘Temporary Work design drawings’, ‘fabrication drawings’ and ‘as built records’
or its sub-programme indicating actual achievement dates and forecast dates for
outstanding items.
Physical Progress
The MPR shall describe the status of Works performed, significant accomplishments,
including critical items and any problem areas, corrective actions taken or planned
and other pertinent activities, with respect to all items/sub-items of the Milestones/cost
centre in each Work Segment Programme and shall, in particular, address any
interface issues, problems and resolutions, and including a representation of progress
measured in percentage terms compared with percentage planned, as derived from the
Work Segment Programmes.
The Physical Progress shall be reported including:
a listed description of all Works performed during the Reporting Month with
quantified progress and updated Work Segment Programmes showing both the
programmed and actual progress of each sub-item of the work corresponding to
each Milestone/cost centre pertaining to each Work Segment;
the percentage of each main work activity completed as well as the projected
percentage thereof to be completed to the end of the Reporting Month;
the total overall percentage of the Works completed as well as the projected
percentage thereof to be completed with respect to each target dates, each Work
Segment and the Works as a whole to the end of the Reporting Month, and with
appropriate comments to explain any differences and how to regain any lost time
or set-backs which may have occurred;
a list of quantities of each major item of the Works (including Temporary Works)
performed during the month vis-a-vis the total estimated quantities to be
executed, and illustrations showing the exact location of the work done, such as
for example, a schedule of concrete lifts; and
a list of major Works (including Temporary Works) activities to be started within
the next two (2) months and estimated quantities thereof. If the expected starting
or completion dates are different from those shown on the updated programme or
both, an explanation is to be given.

Contractor’s Personnel, Contractor’s Equipment and Employer’s Equipment

A detailed description and record of Contractor’s and Employer’s Personnel shall
include in the MPR.
The Contractor’s Equipment report shall include but not be limited to the
following:
a list of all the construction equipment located at the workshop site vis-à-vis
that required during the month to achieve targeted progress (segment wise);
the daily working and operation records of each item of equipment;
the inspection, repair and maintenance records;
quantities of fuel, lubricant, oil and tires consumed;
overhaul records;
accident reports; and
a list of unserviceable equipment and action being taken to put back in
operation.
details of the construction equipment required at workshop site and the
Contractor’s proposed mobilization programme for the next three months.
Coordination and Interfacing
The status and any outstanding issues relating to coordination and interfacing
activities with Interfacing Contractors and other entities as described in Sub-Division
04040 [Interface, Coordination and Cooperation with Other Parties] of the General
Specifications. Items to be reported shall include:
a summary of the coordination and interfacing activities during the Reporting
Month and details of outstanding actions; and
a schedule of all submissions and consents/approvals outstanding, as well as those
obtained.
Procurement
The procurement status of procurement of major items Plants, Equipment and
Materials shall be reported, including but not limited to:
a summary of all significant procurement activities during the Reporting Month,
including action taken to overcome any problems;
a list of major items with description detailing their manufacturer, date of letter
of credit, status of manufacturing and its origin, transportation and date of arrival
at workshop site (scheduled / actual), reasons for delay, if any, procured
immediately and made available for the Works,
delays in procurement, if any, including reasons thereof and the Contractor’s
mitigation measures.

Performance on Quality Management System

The MPR shall also include the Contractor’s monitoring report on performance of the
Contractor’s Quality Management System and shall include the following as a
minimum:
The submission status and review status of the quality system documents;
An up-to-date audit schedule and status;
An up-to-date nonconformity register, providing the status of all nonconformity
identified by the Engineer or the Contractor within the Reporting Month and those
nonconformities not yet satisfactorily closed;
A narrative appraisal of the performance of the Contractor’s Quality Management
System, including any nonconformities, shortcomings or problem areas identified
and the corrective and preventative action(s) taken or proposed; and,
All the pending issues/references with the Engineer, Employer and the Contractor
and the action(s) proposed.
Financial Status
The MPR shall include the following aspects of the financial status of the Works:
A narrative review of all significant financial matters, and actions proposed or
taken with respect to any outstanding matters;
A spread sheet summarizing each major activity as defined in Sub-Division 04070
[Works Programme and Schedule] of the General Specifications, the budget,
costs incurred during the period, costs to date, costs to go;
A spreadsheet summarizing the Contract value, value of work during the period,
value of work to date, remaining work value, cash flow forecast and variance
(difference between cost forecast and Contract value);
An ‘S’ curve for the cash flow planned as per the Contract and the actual up to
the date of MPR including description of the any variance;
A report of the status of any outstanding claims, including a list of claims (if any)
submitted during the month, with claimed amounts and details of any extension(s)
of time;
The interim updated accounts of any continuing claims;
Any other information as required by the Engineer.
Other Matters
The MPR shall also include but not limited to the following:
a list of local workers (in man-days by trade classification) employed during the
Reporting Month and the statement concerning labour relations, including details
of any shifts and hours of works executed and an explanation of any actual or
potential problems;
a list of expatriate personnel (in man-month by position) employed during the
Reporting Month;

A table showing actual working hours of each item of construction equipment, a

list of stand-by equipment and a list of unserviceable (inoperable) equipment,
describing the actions being taken to return it to operation;
a list of the quantities of the Contractor’s construction materials consumed or used
during the Reporting Month and accumulated quantities thereof;
photographs of progress of the workshop site Site activities;
a summary of the quality control tests (routine tests and check tests) performed
on Materials and the products for the Permanent Works during the Reporting
Month including results (in values) of performance on each test and contrasted
fluctuations of the properties with the specified range of their acceptability, the
results of Quality Audits shall be summarized in the Contractor’s MPR;
a general description of the weather, listing rainfall in mm, maximum and
minimum temperatures, and river water levels, for each day through the Reporting
Month;
a statement concerning the effectiveness of the safety/security activities,
including a list of each accident involving the hospitalization or death or both of
any person and a list of any major thefts. Also, a list of any accidents in which
equipment was damaged to the extent it become inoperable, and any fire which
occurred;
a list of the amount and date of each payment received and amount of any monthly
invoice which has been submitted but not yet paid;
a list of letters, drawings, and documents received from or submitted to the
Engineer and/or Employer during the Reporting Month;
Resources Mobilization: Status in respect of key persons and major construction
material, indicating the resources already available at the workshop site and the
proposed mobilization programme for the next three months;
The status of all the Temporary Works, including temporary facilities and utility
services for the Contractor’s use;
The status of temporary facilities and utility services for the use of
Engineer/Employer; and
Details of any assistance required from the Employer.
Not Used

General
The construction of the Works includes a number of Stages. These Stages, called
Milestones, which are inter-related and essential to the completion of the Project,
are to be achieved in the respective stipulated Time for Completion.
Milestones are to be achieved in stipulated Time for Completion from the
commencement of the Works and all works to be achieved shall be constructed
by midnight on the day given. Milestone shall be considered to be achieved on
the date stated in the Milestone Certificate by the Engineer.
If a Milestone is not achieved by the stated Time for Completion, Delay Damages
shall apply as stipulated in the Particular Conditions.
Description of each Milestone together with the Interface Contractors to which
the Milestone relates, are given below.
If Time for Completion of a Milestone falls on a Public Holiday or non-working
day, it shall be effective the next working day.
Handing over means “the Contractor’s handing over of fabricated truss members,
bearings and accessories to the Interfacing Contractors (C-3, P-1(B), P-1(C), C-5
and C-7 Contractors) through the Engineer for their works.”
Milestone Schedules
A) Package No. MAHSR–P-4(X)
Time for
Description of Milestone Completion
(Day No.)
Submission of the set of Shop drawings for 1st bridge for
MS-01 each workshop, based on tender Drawings for fabrication 28 days
of the steel truss superstructures, for Engineer’s approval.
Achievement: Completion of Check assembly of the complete steel
truss at the fabrication workshop after the completion of the
fabrication along with accessories of the same bridge in presence of
Interfacing Contractors and Engineer.
MS-02 GAD 66 520 days
MS-07 GAD 1134 470 days
MS-08 GAD C5-2 770 days


MS-12 GAD 1967 660 days
MS-15 GAD Laundry 840 days
Achievement – The following works shall have been completed for
achieving the Milestone:
a) Complete painting of the Steel truss after dis-assembling of the
Check assembly.
b) Transportation of the fabricated steel structural members after
proper marking, grouping, labelling and packing of the Truss
members and safe loading on to the trailer at workshop unloading
from the trailer at the bridge-sites/site-delivery-yards.
c) Handing over the steel truss superstructure to the Interfacing
Contractors.
MS-21 GAD 1134 560 days
MS-26 GAD 1967 790 days
MS-29 GAD Laundry 910 days

B) Package No. MAHSR–P-4(Y)
Time for
Description of Milestone Completion
(Day No.)
Submission of the set of Shop drawings for 1st bridge for
MS-01 each workshop, based on tender Drawings, for fabrication 28 days
of the steel truss superstructures for Engineer’s approval.
Achievement: Completion of Check assembly of the complete steel
truss at the fabrication workshop after the completion of the
fabrication along with accessories of the same bridge in presence of
Interfacing Contractors and Engineer.
MS-14 GAD C5-1 920days
MS-18 GAD 2357-3 930 days
MS-19 GAD 54 & 55 810 days
MS-20 GAD Diesel Shed 860 days
Achievement – The following works shall have been completed for
achieving the Milestone:
a) Complete painting of the Steel truss after disassembling of the
Check assembly.

b) Transportation of the fabricated steel structural members after

proper marking, grouping, labelling and packing of the Truss
members and safe loading on to the trailer at workshop unloading
from the trailer at the bridge-site/site-delivery-yards.
c) Handing over the steel truss superstructure to the Interfacing
Contractors.
MS-25 GAD 3 940days
MS-37 GAD 2357-3 1000 days
MS-38 GAD 54 & 55 940 days
MS-39 GAD Diesel Shed 930 days
Note:
GAD No. 65, 1, 57, 66, 67, 69, 2, 3, 6, 58 and 8 belongs to C-3 package.
GAD No. 68, 1134, 12, 61, 14, 15 and 62 belongs to P-1(B) package.
GAD No. 28, 1967, 31 and 32 belongs to P-1(C) package.
GAD No. C5-1, C5-2, C5-3, 25 and 27 belongs to C-5 package.
GAD No. 37, 42, Laundry, 2357-3, 54&55 and Diesel Shed belongs to C-7 package.
Not Used

Procedures
Inspection and Testing
General
Within seven (7) days of receipt of the Contractor’s written application for
a Taking-Over Certificate, pursuant to Sub-Clause 10.1 of the General
Conditions of Contract, the Engineer, accompanied by the Contractor, will
inspect the Works or Sections covered by the application, as per the
requirements described in this Sub-Clause. During the joint inspection, the
Works or Sections will be examined and relevant documentation will be
reviewed. The Engineer will prepare a written list of outstanding items, if
any, to be completed or corrected before issuance of the Taking-Over
Certificate and a separate written list of items to be completed or corrected
during the Defects Notification Period. The list shall include an agreed date
of correction for each deficiency.
The Contractor shall also obtain written confirmation from all applicable
Interfacing Contractors that all interfacing matters have been concluded.
If there are no outstanding items to be completed or corrected before the
Taking Over of the Works, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer all
guarantees, warranties, final certifications or similar documents or both as
are required under the Contract.
Static Inspection (Ground Inspection) and Testing
The inspection listed in the following table shall be conducted specifically
for MAHSR by the Engineer, in coordination with Interfacing Contractors
as necessary. If there is any duplication of inspection items with those set
out in other parts of the Contract Documents, the Contractor may propose
suitable adjustment to the given table below for the Engineer’s
consideration and approval.
The Contractor shall prepare and submit for review and approval by the
Engineer a Static Inspection and Testing Plan detailing and explaining how
the Contractor will plan, perform and document all tests and inspections
that shall be conducted to verify and validate the Works. The Static
Inspection and Testing Plan shall consist of a narrative description
supported by graphics, diagrams, photographs, videos and tabulations as
required.

Table 4.8 List of Static Inspection and Testing

Inspection Method
Inspection Item Confirmation
Visual Measurement
of “As-Built”
Inspection Test Check
Records
Members of
steel truss Match making drawings
✔ ✔
and prepared by the Contractor.
accessories
Dimensional
and
Geometrical
As Built drawings prepared by
accuracy of ✔ ✔
the Contractor
steel truss
members and
accessories
Camber
Measurements done during
detail of steel ✔
Check assembly
truss
Manufacturer’s test certificates ✔
Strength and
quality of Tests conducted on the
structural specimen taken from the mock-
steel and the ups and other Destructive and ✔
welded joint Non-Destructive Testing
(NDT).
Photos, Test Certificate
Bearings ✔ ✔ ✔
including dimensions.
Painting Manufacturer’s Test Certificate,
✔ ✔ ✔
Quality Field test records
Manufacturer’s test certificates
Studs ✔ ✔ ✔
and Dimensional details
After Static Inspection and Testing of the Works as mentioned above, the Contractor
shall submit the Inspection Report in the agreed format in six (6) signed copies to
the Engineer for review and approval.
Remedial Action and Re-inspection
Within twenty eight (28) days of receipt of a written application for a Taking-Over
Certificate, the Engineer shall proceed in accordance with Sub-Clause 10.1 and 10.2
of the General Conditions of Contract.
Taking Over Certificate
If the Engineer does not issue a Taking-Over Certificate, but gives instructions in
accordance with Sub-Clause 10.1(b) of the General Conditions of Contract, the
Contractor shall, when he considers the work specified by the Engineer completed,
give written notice to the Engineer and the Contractor and Engineer shall again
follow the procedure in sub-clause 1.1 of this Sub-Division.

Not Used

General
The Contractor shall be responsible for the rectification of any defect, fault or
failure in the Works that is attributable to the Contractor, as may be notified by
(or on behalf of) the Employer on or before the expiry date of the Defects
Notification Period for the Works or Sections (as the case may be).
The Contractor shall carry out the rectification of any defect, fault or failure in
the Works that is attributable to the Contractor in accordance with the Defects
Management Plan specified in Sub-Clause 7.6 [Defects Management Plan] in
Sub-Division 04020 [Works Management Planning] of the General
Specifications and which has received the consent of the Engineer.
During the Defects Notification Period, if any defect, fault or failure in the Works
that is attributable to the Contractor requires any design modification to a system,
sub-system or component, the Defects Notification Period of such part of the
Works shall re-commence from the date on which such modification has been
completed to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the system, sub-system or
component has been commissioned into service.
Final Inspection
Subject to having completed the works in item 5) of Clause 2 below and all
outstanding Works, no earlier than thirty (30) days prior to the expiry of the
Defects Notification Period for the Works or Sections (as the case may be), the
Contractor may request the Employer and the Engineer to conduct a final
inspection of the Works or Section.
The Employer, the Engineer and the Contractor will conduct a joint final
inspection of the Works or Sections (as the case may be). The final inspection
will include Contractor clean-up and Site restoration requirements. The final
inspection will be completed within twenty one (21) days from the Engineer’s
receipt of the Contractor’s request for final inspection.
During the joint final inspection, the Employer and the Engineer will identify a
list of any deficiencies and agree with the Contractor a programme for the
rectification of each of any such deficiencies.
The Contractor shall correct every deficiency before the Engineer issues a defects
correction certificate for the Works or Sections (as the case may be). After
correction of any deficiencies identified during the joint final inspection, the
Contractor shall request re-inspection by the Employer and the Engineer. The
Employer and the Engineer shall re-inspect the Works or Sections within seven
(7) days from the Engineer’s receipt of the Contractor’s request for re-inspection.
The Contractor shall complete the following works prior to final inspection. In
completing these works, the Contractor shall if necessary co-operate and co-
ordinate with any Interfacing Contractors or Interfacing Parties and shall not
interfere in their works.

works to be completed prior to the final inspection of any Sections

i) any outstanding works or defects listed on the Taking-Over Certificate
for the Sections;
ii) all Contractor’s documentation required under the Contract has been
submitted;
iii) all interface work requirements have been completed, including but not
limited to, utilities, drainage and services; and
iv) rectification of any defect occurred during DNP attributable to the
Contractor.
Not Used

Schedule of Interface, Coordination and Cooperation with Other Parties
Table of Contents
Chapter 1. Contents of Interface Management Plan····································· 111
Chapter 2. Assignment of Lead Contractor ··············································· 111
Chapter 3. Interface Table for Design, Supply and Installation Items ·············· 114
Chapter 4. Interface requirement between P-4(X) & P-4(Y) Contractors and C-3, P-
1(B), P-1(C), C-5 & C-7 Contractors ········································· 114

Interface Management Plan (IMP) should be prepared including necessary

contents referring Table 1. The intention of each section is described by the text
inside angle brackets.
Table 1 Sample Contents of Interface Management Plan
1 Introduction
1.1 Purpose of the Document
<Describe the methodology to be adopted by the Contractor in managing all
interface issues>
1.2 Overview
<Project overview of the Contractor and Interface Contractor>
2 Resource Management
2.1 Organization and Roles & Responsibilities
2.2 Resource Requirement
<Detailed description of the manpower, tools, logistics shall be included in this Sub-
Clause.>
3 Interface Requirements
3.1 Allocation of Interface Requirements
<This is an introduction to Sub-Clause 3.2 below>
3.2 Interface Description between Contractors
<Task Allocation Table (TAT) shall be included in this Sub-Clause>
3.3 Areas of Concern
<Process for managing the interface concern>
4 Process Management
4.1 Change of Interface Requirement
<The process for the management of interface requirement change shall be addressed
in this Sub-Clause>
4.2 Verification and Validation of Interface Requirements
<The approach to be adopted by the Contractor to manage verification and
validation of interface requirements shall be addressed in this Sub-Clause>
4.3 Testing and Commissioning on Interfaces (Not applicable for this package)
<The approach to be adopted by the Contractor for the management of interface in
the Testing and Commissioning stage shall be addressed in this Sub-Clause>
4.4 Quality Procedures
<Contractor’s internal quality procedures applicable for the interface management
shall be listed here>
4.5 Systems Assurance Plans
<Considered requirement of the Systems Assurance>
5 Document Management
5.1 Reference Documents
<All applicable reference documents shall be listed in this Sub-Clause>
5.2 Structure of Reference Documents

<The structure of reference documents shall be addressed in this Sub-Clause>

5.3 Version Control of Interface Documents
<Configuration management of interface documents shall be addressed in this Sub-
Clause>
6 Communication
6.1 Terms of Reference of Interface Meetings
<The terms of reference of interface meetings shall be addressed here>
6.2 Exchange of Information between Contractors
<The process for the exchange of information between the pair-wise contractors
(Interface Contractors and relevant External Interfacing Parties) shall be stated
here>
6.3 Submission to Engineer
<The approach to be adopted by the pair-wise contractors on the submission of the
Interface Management Plan to the Engineer shall be described here>
6.4 Request for Employer Attention
<The criteria and methodology on requesting for the Employer attention shall be
mentioned here>
7 Interface Hazard Management
7.1 Strategy and Approach
8 Programme
8.1 Key Activities
<Include schedule of meetings, schedule of exchange of information, etc.>
8.2 Section and Milestone
<Include Design Freeze Dates, Integrated Test Dates, Critical Items dates, etc.
Should include reference to appropriate programmes so that any future changes in
programme date need not result in resubmission of this plan for approval.>
8.3 Critical Items/Critical Paths
<This Sub-Clause shall highlight all the critical items and critical paths to the
Employer>

The following shall be read in conjunction with Chapter 3 of this appendix.

Assignment of Lead Contractor (Construction) and Participating Contractor
(Construction) are described below.
Table 2 Lead Contractor (Construction) and Participating Contractor

(Construction)
Participating
Lead
Contractor
No Description Period Contractor
(Construction/
(Construction)
Production)
C-3
Check-assembly, During the period when
P-1(B)
Transportation and fabrication, check-
P-4(X) P-1(C)
1 unloading at bridge- assembly and
P-4(Y) C-5
sites/site-delivery- transportation is in
C-7
yards progress
Any disagreement as to the scope and extent of the work specified in this table
shall be referred to the Engineer.
This annexure shall be read in conjunction with the relevant Clauses of the Works
Requirements. The Contractor and Interfacing Contractors shall be responsible for
ensuring that all requirements of the Specification pertaining to interfaces are
properly satisfied.
‟testing” does not include “Integrated Test”.
Civil Work Contractor” means C-1, C-2, C-3, C-4, C-5, C-6, C-7, C-8, P-1(B), P-
1(C), P-2, P-3, P-4(X) or P-4(Y) Contractor.
“Track Work Contractor” means T-1, T-2, or T-3 Contractor.
“Electric Work Contractor” means E-1 Contractor.

Responsible for
Responsible
the Technical Responsible Responsible
Interface for the
No. Requirements for the for the Remarks
Description Installation /
for the Design Supply
Construction
Interface Design
1 Steel Truss In accordance In P-4(X) C-3 P-4(X) and P-4(Y) Contractors shall interface with
girder members with the Works accordance C-3, P-1(B), P-1(C), C-5 and C-7 Contractors
and other bridge Requirements with the P-4(Y) P-1(B) regarding the following:
materials as per Works P-1(C)
Drawings. Requirements 1. Check assembly of steel truss girders at P-
C-5 4(X) and P-4(Y) workshop site.
2. Handing over by P-4(X) and P-4(Y)
C-7
Contractor to C-3, P-1(B), P-1(C), C-5 and
C-7 Contractors through the Engineer at
respective bridge-sites/site-delivery-yards.
The delivery schedule shall be interfaced as per
Sub-Division 04100 [Milestones]. Further details
of interface are mentioned at Chapter 4
[Appendix 4000-1].

Responsible for
Responsible
the Technical Responsible Responsible
Interface for the
No. Requirements for the for the Remarks
Description Installation /
for the Design Supply
Construction
Interface Design
2 Bearings for In accordance In P-4(X) C-3 The check assembly at workshop-sites by P-4(X)
steel bridges with the Works accordance P-4(Y) P-1(B) and P-4(Y) Contractor shall be done with actual
Requirements with the P-1(C) bearings in the presence of C-3, P-1(B), P-1(C),
Works C-5 C-5 and C-7 Contractors.
Requirements C-7 Handing over by P-4(X) and P-4(Y) Contractor to
C-3, P-1(B), P-1(C), C-5 and C-7 Contractors
through the Engineer shall be done at respective
bridge-sites/site-delivery-yards.
Further details of interface are mentioned at
Chapter 4 [Appendix 4000-1].
3 Area for P-4(X) C-3 C-3 C-3 Requirements of area for unloading shall be given
unloading of P-4(Y) P-1(B) P-1(B) P-1(B) by P-4(X) and P-4(Y) contractors. Area for
steel truss P-1(C) P-1(C) P-1(C) unloading shall be provided by other civil works
members at C-5 C-5 C-5 contractors.
bridge-sites/site- C-7 C-7 C-7
delivery-yards

General
1) The Contractor shall interface and co-ordinate with the Interfacing Contractors
who carries out Site assembly and erection of Steel Truss superstructures after
receiving the fabricated Steel Truss girder members and other bridge materials
including bearings, at the bridge-site/ site-delivery-yards,
2) The Contractor shall interface and co-ordinate regarding, but not limited to, the
following matters:
Progress of fabrication of Steel truss girder and delivery schedule;
Terms of Handing Over of the fabricated material and bearings;
Check-assembly at Contractor’s fabrication workshops;
Handing over of fabricated material including bearings by the Contractors at
the bridge-site/ site-delivery-yards;
Interfacing documents (match-marking, bolting-plan and paint specifications
etc.) including handing over documents for each activity;
Site assembly clarifications and handling procedures; and
Any other related issue.
Interface
Terms of Handing Over of the fabricated material:
The Contractor shall interface with Interfacing Contractor(s) on the terms of
handing over of the fabricated material along with their schedule including that
of the interface documentation requirements, both for the Check-assembly stage
and for the final delivery at the bridge-sites/site-delivery-yards, all in accordance
with the Drawings and provisions of their contracts, subject to the final approval
of the Engineer. This shall be done at the earliest after being notified for the same
by the Engineer.
Check-assembly at fabrication workshops:
The Contractor shall coordinate and interface with Interfacing Contractors to
conduct the Check-assembly, along with the achievement of required
Camber as per Camber diagram and match-marking system completely in
accordance with the Drawings, in presence of the Interfacing Contractors, at
the workshop, for the full understanding of the process and getting necessary
expertise to conduct the Site-assembly properly, by the Interfacing
Contractors.
The Contractor shall jointly sign with Interfacing Contractors after the
successful Check-assembly as approved by the Engineer.
Transportation and delivery of material at bridge-sites/site-delivery-yards
Transportation including unloading, stacking and delivery to C-3/ P-1(B)/ P-
1(C)/ C-5/ C-7 Contractor at bridge-sites/site-delivery-yards of the fabricated

material including bearings shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. This

includes making/strengthening of access roads suitable for plying of trailers
carrying the fabrication material. However C-3/ P-1(B)/ P-1(C)/ C-5/ C-7
Contractors shall allow the use of their access roads, if available, by the
Contractor, for this purpose.
The Contractor shall coordinate and interface with Interfacing Contractors on
delivery plan including route, schedule, and handling and stacking
requirements at the Site.
The Contractor shall make arrangements for unloading and stacking of the
fabricated material at bridge-sites/site-delivery-yards. The Interfacing
Contractors shall ensure that adequate handling and stacking space is
available at each bridge-site/site-delivery-yard for receiving the full
fabricated material as per the delivery schedule. The Interfacing Contractors
shall make this space available at least one month prior to the delivery of the
fabricated material, so that the Contractor can make own arrangements for its
unloading and stacking. For this, the Interfacing Contractors shall keep the
stacking area ready along with necessary staging above ground, which shall
be suitably levelled and prepared for no settlement in any contingency. The
entire stacking arrangement shall be done in close coordination and approval
of the Engineer. Further upkeep of the stacked material till the use of the
same in the works of the Interfacing Contractors, shall remain the
responsibility of the Interfacing Contractors. The Employer stands
indemnified for any claims on this account.
Handing/Taking Over of fabricated material and bearings at bridge-sites/site-
delivery-yards :
The delivered fabrication material along with bearings at bridge-sites/site-
delivery-yards shall be checked and verified jointly with Interfacing
Contractors.
The Contractor is responsible for proper identification & correct marking of
all components of each girder. It shall be ensured during disassembly after
the successful check-assembly at fabrication workshop, duly grouping and
labelling components.
Any fabricated material found with defects/deficiency shall be brought to the
notice of the Engineer by the Interfacing Contractors immediately with all
details.
The list of the finally accepted fabricated material along with bearings, with
details of matching parameters, shall be jointly signed by the Contractor and
Interfacing Contractors.
The Contractor shall provide all the agreed and approved interface
documentation giving details of the painting system followed,
member/material identification and marking details, matching requirements,
storage and handling procedures etc. to Interfacing Contractors.

After the taking over of the fabricated material including bearings,

Interfacing Contractors are fully responsible for their proper care, custody
and control while handling and installation of the same in the Works, without
any further liability to both Employer and the Contractor.

Table of Contents
05010 Contractor’s Drawings ·································································· 120
Employer’s Drawings..........................................................................................120
Contractor’s Drawings ........................................................................................120
05020 Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings ······································· 121
Shop Drawings Schedule ....................................................................................121

Shop Drawings - Particular Requirements ..........................................................122
05030 As-built Drawings and Documents ···················································· 124
General ................................................................................................................124
Detailed Requirements: .......................................................................................125
Submittals: ..........................................................................................................126

Employer’s Drawings
The structural Drawings for various Bridges shall be provided by the Employer and
based on these Drawings the Contractor shall develop Shop Drawings. In case of any
discrepancies in Drawings the Contractor shall immediately notify the same to the
Engineer.
Contractor’s Drawings
This section covers the drawings to be prepared and submitted by the Contractor
Approval of the Engineer of any drawing submitted by the Contractor shall not
relieve the Contractor from any of his responsibilities or liabilities under the
Contract.
The Contractor’s drawings specified herein shall include, but not be limited to,
temporary works design drawings, shop drawings, fabrication drawing,
coordination drawings and as-built drawings and documents forming part of the
Contractor’s Documents.
The Contractor’s drawings shall be provided as and when necessary for the proper
procurement, execution, completion, testing and as-built recording of the works
or any part thereof.
The Contractor’s drawings shall be prepared in a format acceptable to the
Engineer. The Contractor shall submit the proposed format within twenty-eight
(28) days from the Commencement Date.
Upon receipt of the further Drawings or documents from the Engineer and prior
to the Contractor’s use the same information contained therein for preparation of
the Contractor’s drawings or other Contractor’s Documents, the Contractor shall
examine them carefully and advise the Engineer in writing of any errors,
discrepancies, ambiguities and the similar defects found therein.

Shop Drawings Schedule

The shop drawings shall include drawings for further development of the
Employer’s Drawing, manufacture/fabrication drawings to be prepared by the
Contractor. The Contractor’s working drawings including those for the
Temporary Works, and other detailed drawings of similar nature for the purpose
of fabrication. The Contractor shall note that, where necessary for the Engineer’s
comprehensive review of the shop drawings, the relevant coordination drawings
as specified below shall be submitted together with the shop drawings.
Within twenty-eight (28) days from the Commencement Date the Contractor shall
submit to the Engineer, for review and comments, five (5) printed copies of a
proposed schedule of shop drawings indicating at least the following:
drawing categories;
section titles (e.g. civil);
drawing titles and numbers (preliminary);
planned submission date; and
planned date for completion of the Engineer’s review.
In preparing the above schedule, the Contractor shall ensure that a minimum
period of twenty-one (21) days for each submission is allowed for the Engineer’s
review, comment or approval. The Contractor shall also allow sufficient time for
modification, correction and resubmission where so required by the Engineer.
This process of resubmission shall continue until the drawing is accepted by the
Engineer, provided that the Contractor may be allowed to proceed with the Works
upon the relevant drawings receiving the “Notice of No Objection” or “Notice of
No Objection with Comments”.
This schedule shall be updated on a monthly basis and submitted to the Engineer,
in five (5) copies, for his review and comments. This submission should include
where possible:
the actual drawing title, number and revision number as and when they are
known;
the Contractor’s drawing preparation status;
revised planned dates for submission or re-submission; and
status of all submissions.
The Contractor shall prepare and submit 1st Shop drawings for each workshop to
the Engineer for approval within twenty eight (28) days from the Commencement
Date.
Any failure of the Contractor to list any shop drawings in the Schedule will not
relieve him from his responsibility to submit all required shop drawings in a
timely manner.

Shop Drawings - Particular Requirements

The Contractor shall submit shop drawings in a timely manner when and where
required in accordance with the Contract or as instructed by the Engineer. The
shop drawings shall accompany the relevant coordination drawings specified in
Sub-Division 4040 [Interface, Coordination and Cooperation with Other Parties]
of the General Specifications, which are essential for the Engineer’s
understanding of the conditions of the coordination or interface with the related
works. The shop drawings shall be developed in strict accordance with the Works
Requirements set out in the Contractor’s documents to be submitted to a suitable
approved scale, and clearly show all working details for procurement,
manufacture, fabrication, assembly and construction or installation for all
elements and parts of the Works. The shop drawings shall include but not limited
to the following:
plans, layouts, sections, elevations and details,
connections, fixings, hangers and supports.
Detailed Camber drawings
Match-marking drawings for Site assembly
The respective shop drawings shall be submitted as early as possible to the
Engineer for review, comment or approval or issue of Notice of No Objection,
but in any event not later than the “planned date for submission” indicated in the
shop drawings schedule accepted by the Engineer.
All shop drawings shall be prepared in an approved CAD format and submitted
to the Engineer in five (5) printed copies.
All shop drawings submitted, including those produced by Subcontractors,
manufacturers, fabricators or suppliers, shall be signed by the Contractor's
Representative and a responsible person in the Contractor’s quality assurance
department on the fabrication-workshop site, to warrant that the Contractor has
verified the adequacy of the shop drawings submitted and accepts all
responsibilities pertaining thereto. Any shop drawing which have clearly not been
reviewed by the Contractor as set out below and/or do not bear the signatures as
aforesaid may be returned to the Contractor without the Engineer’s review.
Shop drawings prepared by Subcontractors, manufacturers, fabricators, suppliers
or the like, shall be thoroughly reviewed by the Contractor before submission to
the Engineer. Such review by the Contractor shall include a study of all technical
and dimensional aspects together with a review for coordination purposes to
ensure that the work indicated on the shop drawings is correctly coordinated with
all related works according to the constraints of these related works. The
Contractor’s requirements, comments or corrections, deriving from his review,
shall be incorporated by the respective Subcontractor, manufacturer, fabricator,
supplier, etc. prior to submission by the Contractor to the Engineer. Any shop
drawing which has clearly not been reviewed by the Contractor, or corrected as
aforesaid, may be returned to the Contractor by the Engineer without review.

The submitted shop drawings shall be reviewed, commented, approved or

otherwise by the Engineer and will be returned to the Contractor within twenty
one (21) days after the Engineer’s receipt of the submission, indicating the
appropriate status.

General
The Contractor shall prepare throughout the progress of the Works and keep up-
to-date the “As-Built” documents of the Works as part of the Contractor’s
Documents. These documents shall show all changes or revisions from the
original documents and show the exact “As-Built” site-measured condition of the
Works.
The master copy of these documents shall be kept by the Contractor on
fabrication-workshop site for the inspection of the Engineer whenever needed and
shall be used as a record set for the ad-hoc entering of any changes made to the
Works. The originals of the as-built documents shall be promptly revised to
reflect these entries made.
At the end of every month, or such other time(s) as the Engineer may instruct,
three (3) hard copies of the originals of the “As-Built” documents reflecting all
entries made to the master copy shall be submitted to the Engineer for review.
Prior to issue of the Taking-Over Certificate for the whole of the Works or any
Section or part thereof, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, copies of the
final version of the As-Built Documents for the Engineer’s review and issue of
Notice of No Objection. Prior to their issue to the Engineer these documents shall
be fully checked and certified by the Contractor regarding the completeness,
accuracy, quality, etc. in accordance with the requirements of the Contract. At
least twenty eight (28) days before the date for the Taking Over of the Works or
Section, substantially the whole of the final version of the As-Built documents
shall have been submitted to the Engineer. Any remaining minor portion thereof
may be submitted to the Engineer for review and consent at least fourteen (14)
days before the date for the Taking Over of the Works.
The Works shall not be considered to be complete for the purposes of taking over
under Clause 10 of the General Conditions until the final version of all As-Built
Documents have received the Engineer’s consent in writing.
The final version of the As-Built Documents shall accurately show the Works as
constructed/fabricated, incorporating the effect of all site changes, Variations and
instructions and will particularly highlight and detail the locations, elevations,
sizes, dimensions, materials used and workmanship applied in the Works.
Accuracy of the as-built documents shall be certified by a responsible person in
the Contractor’s quality assurance department on the fabrication-workshop site.
After approval by the Engineer, these documents shall be securely bound by the
Contractor into separate volumes, with covers and contents pages added, as
agreed with the Engineer. The final submission shall be made to the Engineer for
transmission to the Employer.
All As-Built drawings and documents shall be certified by the Contractor’s
designated representative responsible for each particular element or part of the

Works, prior to certification by the Contractor’s designated quality assurance

representative and the Contractor’s Representative for completeness, accuracy,
quality, etc. in accordance with the requirements of the Contract.
The Contractor shall input the information of the structures or facilities of
permanent works required for the Facility Management System for civil
structures, buildings and station machinery into the form provided by the Other
Contractor (referred to as “FMS Initial Data” hereinafter) and submit it to the
Other Contractor. The proposal date of input form and submission date of the
information shall be agreed by both the Contractor and the Other Contractor. In
this regard, Sub-Division GS04040 of General Specifications shall be referred to.
The information input into the form provided by the Other Contractor shall be
basically quoted from As-built Drawings. Other information not described in As-
built Drawings shall be obtained. The information submitted to the Other
Contractor shall be reviewed by the Engineer prior to the submission.
Detailed Requirements:
As-Built drawings and documents shall show all the changes from the Drawings of
the Permanent Works. The As-Built information shall include, but not be limited to
the following;
As-Built Drawings
Changes to dimension and detail from the Drawings;
Components left in place, including temporary support systems, concrete
outside of neat lines of permanent structures, and other such matters;
Location of appurtenances and public utilities concealed within a structure;
and
Changes due to variation orders.
As-Built Documents
Records data, as-built records, damage or settlement surveys, property
surveys and similar final record information;
Compiled project photographs defined as Progress Photographs (as specified
in Division 03000 of General Specifications);
As-built survey data and drawings as specified;
Official letters regarding the Design Change Notice;
Certificates of acceptance between the Contractor and the Engineer;
Certificates of acceptance between the Contractor and the relevant
authorities;
List of utility agencies/company;
Construction diary; and
Operation and Maintenance Manuals if any.

Submittals:
The following copies of the final version of the As-Built documents shall be submitted
to the Engineer.
Full size (A-3) hard (printed) copy: three (3) sets
Soft (electronic) copy both of “DWG” and “PDF” Formats on Compact Disks or
DVD-R: one (1) set

Table of Contents
06010 The Site ····················································································· 129
Location and Boundaries.....................................................................................129
Access to the bridge-sites/site-delivery-yards from workshop site.....................130
Contractor’s Operations outside the Site: ...........................................................131
Site Security ........................................................................................................131
Possession of Third Party’s Facility (As applicable) ..........................................132
Damage and Interference ....................................................................................133
Defined Area and Train Operation (As applicable) ............................................135
Work in the Vicinity of Operational and Energized Tracks (As applicable) ......136
06020 Survey and Setting-Out·································································· 136
06030 Site Surveys/Investigations ····························································· 136
06040 Temporary Facilities of Contractor ·················································· 137
General ................................................................................................................137
Location of Area for Temporary Facilities .........................................................137
Contractor’s Site Offices .....................................................................................138
Project Information Signboard ............................................................................138
First Aid Station ..................................................................................................139
Labour Accommodation Camps .........................................................................139
Site Storage and Yards ........................................................................................139
Check-assembly area ...........................................................................................140
Borrow Area and Quarries ..................................................................................140
Stockpile Areas ...................................................................................................140
Contractor’s Plants ..............................................................................................140
Material Testing Laboratories .............................................................................140
Wheel Washing Facilities (As applicable) ..........................................................141
Temporary Roads (As applicable) ......................................................................141
Vehicles ...............................................................................................................143
Contractor’s Equipment ......................................................................................143
Utilities for Temporary Facilities ........................................................................144
Fencing and Site Security and Safety..................................................................145
Inspection by the Employer or Engineer .............................................................145
Final Clean-Up (As applicable) ..........................................................................145

Maintenance of Temporary Facilities .................................................................146

Damage to Existing Property ..............................................................................146
06050 Mobilization and Demobilization······················································ 147
General ................................................................................................................147
Engineer’s Consents ............................................................................................147
Records................................................................................................................148
Mobilization ........................................................................................................148
Demobilization (As applicable) ..........................................................................148
06060 Public Utilities and Facilities ··························································· 149
06070 Traffic Management ····································································· 150
General ................................................................................................................150
Temporary Traffic Control Plan (TCP) ..............................................................150
Extraordinary Traffic ..........................................................................................152
Maintenance and Protection of Traffic ...............................................................152
Vertical Clearance ...............................................................................................153
Materials ..............................................................................................................153
Construction Requirements (Not applicable) ......................................................154
06080 Packaging, Storage, Shipping and Delivery ········································· 155
General ................................................................................................................155
Storage of Plant and Materials ............................................................................156
Crating .................................................................................................................156
General Precautions ............................................................................................157
Packaging Procedures .........................................................................................158
Shipping ..............................................................................................................158
Delivery ...............................................................................................................158

Location and Boundaries

The Site for the Package C-3, P-1(B), P-1(C), C-5 & C-7 Contract are the area
within or adjacent to the ROW of MAHSR as mentioned in Table 6.1 and 6.2
below and as shown in the Drawings.
The Contractor is to deliver the fabricated material at the bridge-sites/site-
delivery-yards of respective Interfacing Contractors.
The Works Area for fabrication workshops shall be the area identified by the
Contractor and agreed by the Engineer.
The Site for the Works related to the packages P-4(X) and P-4(Y), namely
Package C-3, P-1(B), P-1(C), C-5 & C-7 Contract Site, are the area within or
adjacent to the ROW of MAHSR as mentioned in Table 6.1 and 6.2 below and as
shown in the Drawings. The Site is indicated on the ROW Ortho Map contained,
with the Site boundaries being denoted by ROW.
Table 6.1 Related Site of Particular Bridges under Package No. MAHSR – P-4(X)
Sl. Chainage (Km)

Bridge GAD Number
No From To
1 66 28.570 29.030
2 69 32.956 33.056
3 2 46.453 46.803
4 58 71.277 71.357
5 8 85.286 85.666
6 1134 245.590 245.660
7 C5-2 398.370 398.430
8 C5-3 398.980 399.120
9 25 400.754 400.874
10 28 402.902 402.962
11 1967 416.017 416.247
12 32 449.489 449.689
13 42 497.83 497.91
14 Laundry 499.345 499.405

Table 6.2 Related Site of Particular Bridges under Package No. MAHSR – P-4(Y)
Sl. Chainage (Km)

Bridge GAD Number
No From To
1 65 21.305 21.385
2 1 25.969 26.069
3 57 28.085 28.160
4 67 30.130 30.210
5 3 48.122 48.282
6 6 62.723 62.993
7 68 159.670 159.770
8 12 285.877 286.037
9 61 317.347 317.447
10 14 326.772 327.002
11 15 333.276 333.606
12 62 384.941 385.011
13 C5-1 396.420 396.580
14 27 401.558 401.678
15 31 446.617 446.717
16 37 494.713 494.783
17 2357-3 500.316 500.416
18 54 & 55 505.032 505.212
19 Diesel Shed 507.23 507.29
The Contractor shall be deemed to have inspected, examined and made himself
fully familiar with the bridge-site/site-delivery-yard. The Contractor shall be
deemed fully aware that the Site are not for the Contractor’s exclusive use, that
the Contractor shall allow the interfacing contractors and other parties to have
reasonable access thereto and that the areas may be subject to change in location
and/or size during the execution of the works. The Contractor shall be responsible
in all respects for these areas while they are in his possession or under his custody
and control, even when others are working in these areas.
Access to the bridge-sites/site-delivery-yards from workshop site
The Contractor shall be deemed to have inspected, examined and made himself
fully familiar with the access roads necessary for the proper transportation of the
fabricated members and any costs arising in connection with the accessibility to

the bridge-sites/site-delivery-yards shall be included in the Accepted Contract

Amount. The Employer will not be responsible for any claims which may arise
from the use or otherwise in connection with access route. The Employer does
not guarantee the suitability or availability of any particular access route and will
not entertain any claim for any non-suitability or non-availability of any such
route for use (whether continuous or otherwise) during the Contract Period.
The Contractor shall make its own arrangements subject to the consent of the
Engineer, for access required to the bridge-sites/site-delivery-yards. The
Contractor shall negotiate with the land owners or other appropriate government
agencies to seek temporary occupation of land and seeking necessary permission
for construction of temporary access roads at their own cost.
Contractor’s Operations outside the Site:
The Contractor shall be solely responsible for acquiring the additional land (land
in addition to the ROW) required by him for his works area outside the ROW, at
his own expenses, including maintaining and reinstating the same on completion
of the Works to the entire satisfaction of the land owner and the Engineer.
The Contractor shall make necessary arrangement with land owners and relevant
government authorities for any work to be undertaken outside the Site. Two
copies of all the relevant documents/permissions/agreements etc. as required by
the Engineer in respect of the land arranged by the Contractor outside the ROW
shall be submitted to the Engineer. Before commencing operations, the
Contractor shall also submit the Engineer a detailed plan and a programme of the
Works to be carried out in the work area including the areas outside the ROW.
When using and/or occupying the work area on the existing public roads, the
Contractor shall take necessary procedural and mitigation measures as
requirements set by the relevant authority.
The Contractor shall submit the Engineer proposals for the use and occupation of
such of the work area. Any such proposal shall be submitted to the Engineer at
least Twenty-eight (28) days prior to the programmed use of the specific works
area.
Site Security
The Contractor shall be wholly responsible for security on the workshop site and
any other areas being used by him or the Subcontractors for the purposes of the
Contract. The Contractor shall implement and cause the Subcontractors to
implement proper security management procedures in accordance with the
approved security management plan described in Appendix 08000-1 [Safety,
Occupational Health and Environment Management Manual] and Sub-Division
08000 [Safety, Health and Environment Management] of the General
Specifications.
The Contractor shall assign on the workshop site an appropriate safety and
security organisation headed by experienced and professionally qualified safety
and security personnel, who shall be primarily responsible for the Contractor’s

security services and shall fully cooperate with the Employer’s security
organization throughout the Time for Completion.
The Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Engineer for approval a security
management plan (it may be included in the Safety, Health and Environment
Management Plan) fully complying with not only the relevant applicable Laws
but also regulations of the Employer which may be imposed from time to time on
the Project within twenty-eight (28) days after the Commencement Date or at
least one week before commencing the Works on the workshop site or any other
area being used by the Contractor (whichever is the earlier). The plan shall
include detailed procedures for security management operations as described in
Division 08000 [Safety, Health and Environment Management] of General
Specifications.
Possession of Third Party’s Facility (As applicable)
The definition of “Possession” to be applied in this Clause is ‘possession of a
segment or stretch of the Works and/or Indian Railways (IR) track(s) and/or other
related authorities required by the Contractor from the Employer and/or IR and/or
other related authorities for execution of the Works during the Time for
Completion and/or after issue of the Taking-Over Certificate and during the
Defects Notification Period for maintenance / rectification of any defects in the
Works’.
While undertaking construction activities within an existing railway line or road
under the Contractor’s Possession, the Contractor shall abide by the
rules/guidelines included within the relevant manuals of Indian Railways and/or
the National Highways Authority of India (NHAI)/Panchayats/State
Highways/Municipal Corporations and/or any other authority.
The Contractor shall undertake any construction activities on existing ‘live’ or
operating lines only after the grant of Possession by the relevant authorities.
An area under the Contractor’s Possession is the sole responsibility of the
Contractor and all issues relating to safe working within that area, including the
movement of traffic, are his responsibility.
If the Contractor has more than one work front within the same Possession, one
person shall be nominated by the Contractor as the person responsible for the
coordination for all work fronts within the Possession.
The Contractor shall ensure that the construction activities shall be undertaken
strictly to the area which shall be under the possession.
The Contractor shall appoint a responsible person who shall coordinate with the
Employer, IR / relevant authorities, Interfacing Contractors and Interfacing
Parties as applicable and who shall act as the Possession Coordinator for the
Contractor. The person appointed shall have experience of IR / relevant
authorities operations and shall be fully aware of IR Rules and Regulations related
to possession of track for construction of railway works and in accordance with
IR / relevant authorities regulations to issue Possession requests. For the purposes

of the Works, such person shall be duly certified in accordance with the said Rules
and Regulations, if required.
The Contractor shall use possessions on the line as follows:
For each particular Possession, and depending on the duration and the
location of the Possession, alternative route(s) of transport may be required,
such alternative route(s) of transport shall be at the Contractor’s cost.
The normal alternative mode of transport will be proposed by the Contractor,
and the route and timings of this alternative transport are to be agreed with
the Engineer / IR / Road Authorities / Panchayat prior to obtaining
Possessions.
The Employer shall provide assistance necessary to the Contractor to enable him
to obtain the Possessions required by him, subject to being approved by IR, NHAI
or relevant authorities. No claim shall be entertained by the Employer on this
account.
The Contractor’s request for Possession shall include a technical and
organizational schedule and submit the same to the Engineer for his consent.
The Contractor shall submit his requests for Possessions well in advance as per
requirements of relevant authorities.
Damage and Interference
General
Work shall be carried out in such a manner that there is no damage to or
interference with:
watercourses and drainage system,
Utilities,
Structures (including foundations), roads including street fixtures or other
properties;
Public or private vehicular or pedestrian access, and
Monuments, graves or burial grounds other than to the extent that it is
necessary for them to be removed and reinstated to permit the execution
of the Works.
Heritage structures shall not be damaged or disfigured on any account. The
Contractor shall inform the Engineer as soon as practicable of any items which
are not stated in the Contract to be removed or diverted but which the Contractor
considers necessary to be removed or diverted to enable the Works to be carried
out. Such items shall not be removed or diverted until the approval of the
Engineer has been obtained.
Assets / items of the Employer, Indian Railway (IR), Other Contractors and any
other entities and relevant authorities which include, but are not limited to water
sewage, gas authority, electrical, OFC communication cables etc. carried out
shall be replaced / reinstated by the Contractor at his own cost to the same

condition as existed before the Work started and to the satisfaction of the
Engineer and the concerned entity.
In case of damage to the existing cables, the Contractor shall have suitable
procedure for cable joining under the technical supervision of IR or the relevant
authority.
The Contractor shall indemnify the Engineer and Employer against any
damages or any penal action, any claim or legal action as a result of any damage
done by the Contractor .
Utilities
The Contractor shall follow the requirements on care for utilities as specified in Sub-
Division 06060 of the General Specifications.
Structures, Roads and Other Properties
The Contractor shall carry out a precondition survey of all roads and structures
and drainage channels adjacent to the site. Any deterioration of the roads and
damage to adjacent structures and drainage facilities shall be reported to the
Engineer with appropriate records.
The Contractor shall maintain / replace / reinstate at his own cost to the same
condition as existed before the Work started and to the satisfaction of the
Engineer and the concerned entity.
The required approval from Road authority and other relevant departments shall
be obtained for the movement of over dimensioned consignment by the
Contractor.
Access
Where existing access to premises either public or private is damaged or
unusable, alternative access shall be provided by the Contractor to enable the
works to proceed. The arrangements for the alternative access shall be made as
required and agreed by the Engineer, the relevant authorities and the owners of
the premises affected.
Unless agreed otherwise, the permanent access shall be reinstated as soon as
practicable after the Work is complete and the alternative access shall be
removed immediately when it is no longer required, and the ground surfaces
reinstated. Proper signage and guidance shall be provided for traffic/users
diversions.
Trees
Materials, including excavated materials, shall not be banked around trees.
Trees shall always be protected from damages.
Unless otherwise consented to by the Engineer, trees shall not be trimmed or cut
as stated in Division 08000 [Safety, Health and Environment Management] of
this General Specification.

Removal of monuments, graves, burial grounds and other obstruction

If any graves and other obstructions are required to be removed in order to execute
the Works, the Contractor shall draw the Engineer's attention to them in good time
to make the necessary arrangement for authorization for removal.
Protection of the Other Adjacent Structures and Works
The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions during the construction to protect
structures or works being carried out by others, adjacent to or within the site from
the effects of vibrations, undermining or any other earth movements or the diversion
of water flow, arising from its work.
Defined Area and Train Operation (As applicable)
When the Project under construction has been made available for track and
system related installation works, the area will be classified as a Defined Area for
train movement. The defined area shall be controlled by the Lead Contractor with
regard to access.
All persons whose duties require them to work within a Defined Area must have
been required to be examined for safety knowledge and to have been safety
inducted. Evidence of safety induction must be exhibited whenever present or
working in a Defined Area. All persons present in Defined Areas are required to
observe safety rules and procedures to be defined by the Contractor and reviewed
without objection by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall ensure that the necessary rules and procedures for all persons
are published from time to time and communicated to the workers and/or agents
and the Interfacing Contractors on the Site. The Contractor shall also ensure that
all such rules and procedures are being followed during the course of all works
and construction activities at the Site.
Persons working on or near the tracks in the Defined Area, either by themselves
or supervising a working party, must be suitably trained by the Contractor, with
regard to the safety provisions of the rules and procedures. Persons who are not
confirmed shall not attempt to gain access to the railway tracks unless
accompanied by a confirmed person. See item 2) of this Clause 7 in respect of
Safety Induction.
When overhead lines are energized, Train Sets/Cars may be moving in the
Defined Area. No work shall be undertaken on the tracks when Train Sets/Cars
are moving. Procedures for obtaining access to the energized tracks will be
detailed in the rules. The Contractor shall make requests for obtaining access to
the energized track or in the vicinity of the tracks as per the approved and notified
rules and procedures.
After overhead lines are installed, the lines are energized, the Contractor shall
comply with the rules / measures against electric shock

Work in the Vicinity of Operational and Energized Tracks (As applicable)

In the case of working in the vicinity of IR/DFC tracks, the Contractor shall
comply with the contents described in Sub-Division 08000 [Safety, Health and
Environmental Management].
To work in the vicinity of the operating Employer’s tracks, the Contractor shall
follow the rules and procedures of which the Engineer shall give notice as the
works proceed.
Not Used
Not Used

General
The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for the provision, erection,
maintenance and, if required, removal on completion of all required temporary
facilities, as part of the temporary works, which are required for the proper
execution and completion of the Permanent Works. Such temporary facilities
shall include the Contractor’s offices, laboratories, workshops, stores, services
including utilities, accommodation, canteens, recreational facilities, health, safety,
security and environmental protection facilities and the like, whether on or off the
site. All costs for such temporary facilities, including without limitation the
license or similar fees payable to the relevant authorities and the utilities bills,
shall be deemed to have been included in the Accepted Contract Amount.
The Contractor’s personnel shall not be allowed to live on the workshop site. Only
security personnel designated to secure the Contractor’s facilities will be
permitted to stay after working hours subject to the approval of the Engineer. The
Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements for off-site accommodation and
transport for the Contractor’s personnel.
All of the Contractor’s temporary facilities within the workshop site shall be
designed, provided, erected, maintained and removed to the approval of the
Engineer and in strict accordance with the applicable Laws. The Contractor shall
obtain all necessary approvals and permits from the relevant authorities having
jurisdiction for provision, erection, operation, maintenance and removal of the
Contractor’s temporary facilities.
All of the Contractor’s temporary facilities, other than those designated to remain,
are to be removed on completion of the Works and the ground surfaces reinstated
to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
When deemed essential for the preservation or maintenance of health, safety,
security and/or environmental protection, the Engineer may instruct the
Contractor to modify the Contractor’s temporary facilities regardless of any
approvals previously given, and the Contractor shall promptly comply with such
instructions. These instructions shall not constitute Variations.
Location of Area for Temporary Facilities
The Contractor shall be aware that the area for temporary facilities is not for the
Contractor’s exclusive use, and the Contractor shall fully cooperate fully with the
Engineer if coordination and compromise among the Interfacing contractors on
the Project become necessary for efficient use of the limited area among the
Interfacing contractors.
The precise locations of the Contractor’s Temporary Works including the
temporary facilities within this area and the site area shall be proposed by the
Contractor and approved by the Engineer.

The Contractor shall submit drawings showing the proposed locations and
outlines of the proposed temporary facilities. Drawings and details of the
Temporary Works for a particular part of the Permanent Works may be submitted
as part of the shop or working drawings and/or the work method statements
forming part of the Contractor’s Documents. These location and outline drawings
for the temporary facilities shall be submitted within twenty-eight (28) days
before commencing the construction of any temporary facility or within twenty-
eight (28) days after the Commencement Date. These drawings and outlines shall
be updated whenever addition or removal of any facility is planned. Detailed
drawings for any particular temporary facility, showing all necessary utilities and
services, shall be submitted at least fourteen (14) days before the planned
commencement date of construction thereof.
The areas for the Contractor’s temporary facilities may also be used for temporary
storage of excavated material suitable for reuse in embankment or fill for the
Works. (As applicable)
The Contractor shall dispose of all surplus topsoil and all subsoil materials arising
from the Works in the designated area wherever available within the ROW of the
Project or as instructed by the Engineer. In case area for disposal of surplus soil
is not available, the Contractor shall make his own arrangements outside the
ROW and the Contractor shall bear all costs in connection therewith. Any
payment of royalty for using/disposing of excavated material shall be borne by
the Contractor. (As applicable)
The Contractor is free to make his own arrangements for any additional areas
required for proper execution of the Works, and the costs of the same shall be
deemed to have been included in the Accepted Contract Amount.
Contractor’s Site Offices
The Contractor shall be responsible for identifying and establishing suitable
facilities for the Contractor’s office as approved by the Engineer.
The Contractor’s Site offices and facilities shall be provided within or in the
vicinity of the workshop site, with all necessary facilities including furniture,
office equipment, office supply, utility services, sanitary system, vehicle parking,
etc. The Contractor shall establish the same number of Contractor’s Site Offices
in close proximity to the Engineer’s Site Offices as per Sub-Division 4060 of the
General Specification.
Project Information Signboard
Within twenty eight (28) days from the Commencement Date, the Contractor
shall provide and install Project information signs, as per the requirements of
signboard at Employer’s and Engineer’s Site Offices, at each of the entrance
points to each Site office location (both the Contractor’s and
Employer’s/Engineer’s offices) and the site entrances, or, as directed by the
Engineer.

These Project information signboards shall be in accordance with the

requirements under Clause 3 of Sub-Division 04060 [Facilities for Employer’s
and Engineer’s Personnel].
The Contractor shall maintain the signboards and remove them on completion of
the Works or when instructed by the Engineer, so as to inform the public of the
implementation of the Works and Project and to advise the road users of the on-
going construction.
The Contractor shall clean, update, maintain and replace the signboards if
damaged, throughout the duration of the Time for Completion. No additional
payment shall be applicable for damaged signs which are required to be replaced.
First Aid Station
The Contractor shall construct, equip, and maintain the First Aid Station at each
workshop and at each labour camp.
The Contractor shall comply with all requirements specified in the Works
Requirements (including Division 08000 [Safety, Health and Environment
Management]) and the Conditions of Contract.
Labour Accommodation Camps
The Contractor shall supply, equip and maintain facilities as necessary for the
living accommodation and welfare of its employees by providing, servicing, and
maintaining a camp at the Contractor’s Site Offices or other appropriate
location(s), as necessary.
The Contractor shall comply with all requirements specified in the Works
Requirements (including Division 08000 [Safety, Health and Environment
Management]) and the Conditions of Contract.
Site Storage and Yards
The Contractor’s site storage areas and yard shall be utilized for, among other
things, materials, and equipment storage, workshops, warehouses and secure
storage.
The Contractor shall erect a 2.0 meter height wall fencing around the site storage
areas and yards, complete with suitable lighting and lockable gates.
All materials shall be stored at proper places so as to prevent their deterioration
or intrusion by foreign matter and to ensure their satisfactory quality and fitness
for the fabrication Work. The storage space must also permit easy inspection,
removal and re-storage of the materials. All such materials even though stored in
approved godowns/places, must be subjected to acceptance test where required,
prior to their immediate use
The location of each site for storage area and yard shall be determined prior to the
commencement of the Works and the Contractor shall propose the locations and
details and submit to the Engineer for consent.

Check-assembly area
Prior to commencement of Check-assembly work, the Contractor shall submit
Method Statement including but not limiting to detail of platform system,
handling, assembly bolting-plan and match-marking etc., all as per the Drawings,
for the approval of the Engineer.
The Check-assembly shall be witnessed by the concerned interface contractor and
receive his acceptance as per Sub-Clause 2.5 of the Technical Specifications, and
approval by the Engineer before dis-assembly.
The Check-assembly area shall be located within the workshop or in close vicinity
of workshop.
Borrow Area and Quarries
Not used
Stockpile Areas
Not used
Contractor’s Plants
The Contractor shall plan, install, erect, maintain, dismantle and remove all plants
required for the Works of sufficient number and capacity to meet planned peak
requirements during fabrication. The capacity of such plants shall be subject to
consent by the Engineer. All control and measuring equipment shall be regularly
checked and calibrated and the Contractor shall regularly submit calibration
certificates for same to the Engineer.
Material Testing Laboratories
The Contractor shall design, construct, equip, maintain, dismantle and remove all
required material testing laboratories and associated facilities at each fabrication-
workshop as are required for the sampling and testing of materials as required in
the Works Requirements. The Engineer’s consent shall be obtained to the location
of material testing laboratories.
Laboratory buildings shall be supplied with adequate electricity, water, air-
conditioning, etc., and shall have sufficient area(s) for storing samples.
The laboratory equipment to be supplied and the methods of testing shall be in
accordance with relevant Japanese, Indian and/or other standards and codes as
detailed in the Works Requirements. All apparatus and equipment shall be brand
new and of the latest design and manufactured by a reputable manufacturer. The
proposed type and number of items of laboratory equipment shall be submitted to
the Engineer for review and consent prior to purchase.
The laboratory equipment and apparatus shall be checked and calibrated before
testing starts and thereafter at regular intervals as specified by the manufacturer
and as directed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall regularly submit calibration
certificates for same to the Engineer.
The Contractor shall complete the construction and installation of the facility for
operation within fifty-six (56) days before the planned date of test require and

operate and maintain the facility until the issue of Taking-Over Certificate, unless
otherwise authorized by the Engineer. The Contractor shall also make all facilities
and services available to the Employer/Engineer as required. All sampling and
testing to be undertaken shall be under the direct supervision of the Engineer. The
Material Testing Laboratory shall be run by the Contractor’s personnel fully
experienced in sampling and testing of materials, and quality control.
Any testing which may be required in accordance with the Works Requirements
and which cannot be performed in the Contractor's laboratory due to lack of time
or equipment shall be assigned to an independent organization having NABL
accreditation and as duly consented to by the Engineer. The Contractor shall
accept all results, instructions or restrictions stipulated by the Engineer based on
such tests. The cost of all such tests shall be borne by the Contractor.
Wheel Washing Facilities (As applicable)
In and around residential and commercial area, the Contractor is required to install
wheel washing area within the fabrication workshop at the “Exit” points/gates of the
construction area to ensure the removal of wheel/band dirt from construction vehicles
and machines. Wheel washing area design shall be proposed in CEMP. As a part of
the Contractor’s method statement for the site preparation plans, wheel washing area
shall be proposed and approved by the Engineer before the commencement of the
work. The facilities are required to have access for cleaning out the sludge which
collects together with provision for two (2) high pressure hose connections and
adequate water supply.
Temporary Roads (As applicable)
The Contractor shall permit access to temporary road, constructed by him, for
other package Contractors for their Works.
The Contractor shall note that the temporary roads are not for the Contractor’s
exclusive use and may be subject to relocation or restrictions during the execution
of the Works as and when such relocation or restriction is inevitable. Except in
an emergency, the Contractor will be given a prior notice of any such relocation
or restriction. The road layout and design proposal shall be revised and re-
submitted to the Engineer for consent whenever road arrangements are to be
modified for whatsoever reasons.
Within forty-two (42) days after the Commencement Date and consequent to the
surveys performed by the Contractor in accordance with Sub-Division 06020
[Surveys and Setting-Out] of the General Specifications, the Contractor shall
submit for the Engineer’s review and consent the proposed design, including
layout, structural calculations and details, of all temporary bridges, temporary
fences, temporary protection to underground pipes and culverts at road-crossing
points and all additional temporary pipes and culverts that shall be provided by
the Contractor, to sustain road traffic, irrigation and drainage flow in all existing
streams, irrigation canals and ditches, drainage canals and ditches, and utilities or

services, whether buried or exposed, all of which, in the opinion of the Engineer,
are necessary for the proper execution of the Works.
During the transportation of Goods and Contractor’s Personnel, the Contractor
shall be responsible for keeping all railways, roads, bridges, watercourses,
utilities services, etc. free from damage and from spillage of construction
materials, detritus, oils, etc. and shall repair any damage howsoever caused to any
such structure or property (whether on or off the Site) by Contractor’s Equipment
(including that of any Subcontractor). In that respect the Contractor will be
required to carry out a condition survey of all roads and other facilities in and
adjacent to the works area which will show in detail the state of those items prior
to the commencement of construction. The full records shall be submitted to the
Engineer and the status monitored throughout the course of construction with
further records maintained. All costs in connection therewith shall be deemed to
have been included in the Accepted Contract Amount.
At the junction of temporary roads including construction road with existing roads,
the Contractor shall provide suitable traffic marshals to warn and regulate the
traffic as per the requirements.
The Contractor shall be responsible for upholding and protecting all slopes at the
boundaries of the Site against slippage into adjacent properties. As adjacent areas
may be irrigated, this requirement will also therefore include the provision of
temporary coffering as appropriate.
The temporary road within ROW, where allowed, shall not be dismantled/altered
during the Contract period unless otherwise it is necessary to dismantle/alter for
execution of the Works connected with the Contract or any other Contracts. The
dismantling/altering shall require the approval of the Engineer.
Temporary roads outside the ROW
The Contractor at his own discretion and cost shall construct and
dismantle/alter/dispose of the temporary roads after the completion of
Contract as deemed fit.
Before constructing any temporary roads outside the ROW, the Contractor
shall make all necessary arrangements, including payment if required, with
the public authorities or land owners concerned, for the use of the required
land and shall obtain the consent of the Engineer. Such consent will be
dependent on the Engineer being satisfied with the Contractor's proposals for
items such as capacity, signage, lighting and surface quality of the temporary
road, together with proposed maintenance arrangements. Such consent shall
not relieve the Contractor from any of its responsibilities under the Contract.
Till the expiry of the Time for Completion of the Contract, all construction roads,
culverts, ditches and the like required for the Contractor’s or Subcontractors’ or
any other Contractor’s operations shall be provided and maintained by the
Contractor, kept in good condition by cleaning, watering, rolling, grading,
repairing and maintaining, all to the approval of the Engineer.

The Contractor’s temporary roads, as well as any permanent roads being used by
the Contractor and Subcontractors, shall be maintained in a dust-free condition
by daily watering, rolling and grading, all to the approval of the Engineer.
If the Engineer has provided drawings or details of any temporary works, then
such drawings or details shall be understood to be indicative of the minimum
required standard only. The Contractor shall remain responsible for the design of
Temporary Works.
Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, the demolition of any existing roads,
culverts, etc. shall not commence until the replacement facilities therefor have
been completed by the Contractor.
When any of the temporary approach roads become no longer required, or earlier
if so directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall carefully dismantle the
temporary bridge or road and remove and dispose of all surplus materials in
compliance with the applicable Laws, and reinstate the original conditions of the
area to the approval of the Engineer.
With respect to Contractor's temporary roads and the like, the Contractor shall
submit design and other documentation to the Engineer for review and comment,
including but not limited to the following:
design calculations and detailed design drawings;
a complete traffic control plan; and
evidence of relevant approval, license and permit from the authorities having
jurisdiction.
Vehicles
The Contractor shall provide all necessary vehicles required for the transportation
and movement of Goods and Contractor’s Personnel, including but not limited to
trucks, cranes, trailers, cars, motorcycles, etc.
The Contractor shall provide competent and licensed drivers and operators for all
such vehicles. Vehicles shall be licensed and insured in accordance with the
applicable Laws and the Contractor shall be responsible for all servicing, repairs
and maintenance required.
Contractor’s Equipment
The Contractor shall ensure that all Contractor’s Equipment whether on or off the
fabrication- workshop, (including that of his Subcontractors) to be used for the
execution and/or testing of the Works, are serviced, repaired and maintained and
operated in a good, safe condition.
All lifting and hoisting equipment shall be regularly certified in accordance with
the applicable Laws, and the safe working load limits shall not be exceeded.
The Contractor shall operate and maintain an equipment repair facility within or
in the vicinity of the fabrication-workshop, so that downtime of Contractor’s
Equipment can be minimized. Temporary fuel and lubricant stores shall be

properly designed, constructed, secured, fire- and spill-guarded, and be well

ventilated so as to comply with the relevant applicable Laws.
Utilities for Temporary Facilities
Power Supply and Illumination
Electric power supplies for the Contractor’s temporary facilities, including but
not limited to Contractor’s camps, offices, site, work areas and other facilities
as described herein, shall be arranged by the Contractor at his own cost.
The Contractor shall install, operate and maintain its own electrical distribution
systems for the electrical supply required for his temporary facilities as
described in paragraph (1) above.
The Contractor shall also furnish, install and keep operational the diesel power
generating facilities of such capacity as the Contractor considers necessary to
prevent any interruption to the progress of the Works.
The Contractor shall ensure adequate lighting is provided for all his operations
at the workshop site and the temporary facilities and camp according to the
National Building Code of India (2005).
Water Supply
The Contractor shall design, install, operate and maintain water supply systems
including pumps, piping systems, valves, storage tanks etc., at the workshop site
at their own cost with respect to:
Industrial water supply system;
For construction use the water quality shall meet the quality requirements
in the Works Requirements.
Potable water supply system:
For supply to all the Contractor’s temporary facilities including but not
limited to Contractor’s camps, offices, site, work areas and other facilities
for human consumption and use.
In case the Contractor plans to install bore well(s) for water supply, he shall
thoroughly investigate the relevant legislation and regulations imposed by the
competent authorities and the installation shall be subject to approval by the said
competent authorities and/or consent of the Engineer.
Throughout the Time for Completion the Contractor shall take samples from all
water supplies at regular intervals and test it for suitability for the intended use.
Sanitation and Sewerage
All sites, offices, fabrication-workshop (in case of Steel Bridges), laboratory,
camp and other buildings etc. shall be provided with sanitation and sewage
handling & disposal system complying with the statutory requirements and
applicable laws, Codes & Standards.
If required, portable chemical toilets shall be provided and maintained by the
Contractor for the use of all personnel at all work locations.

All the requirements of the Works Requirements (including Division 08000

[Safety, Health and Environment Management] of the General Specifications)
and the Conditions of Contract shall also be complied with.
Waste and Garbage Disposal
The workshop site and the work areas shall be kept clean and free of detritus at
all times.
The Contractor shall collect waste material and garbage from site, camp, offices,
yards, workshops, etc. on a daily basis and dispose of same in an approved
disposal area(s) and as per guidelines prescribed by local and governmental
authorities having jurisdiction. No waste of any kind shall be deposited in any
watercourses.
Fencing and Site Security and Safety
The Contractor shall be responsible for the security and safety of the workshop
site. Accordingly, the Contractor's temporary facilities including offices,
fabrication-workshop and storage compounds, campsites, all construction areas,
storage areas shall be adequately fenced, gated, lighted and guarded on a twenty-
four hour, seven days a week basis. Firefighting equipment shall be provided in
accordance with the applicable Codes and the requirements of local authorities.
Any storage facilities for explosives shall comply with the relevant Laws and
regulations of India and shall be situated at locations approved by the competent
authorities. Detonators and fuses shall be stored in facilities separate from
explosives. In no case shall detonators and fuses be transported in the same
vehicle as explosives. Storage facilities for explosives, detonators, fuses, etc. shall
be secure, kept locked and the keys shall be accounted for at all times. (As
applicable).
The Contractor shall be responsible for any losses occurring within the workshop
site premises.
Inspection by the Employer or Engineer
The Employer and the Engineer have the right at any time to inspect any part of
the Contractor's temporary facilities and to require immediate rectification to
comply with the specified requirements.
Final Clean-Up (As applicable)
Upon the completion of Works, or when any of the Contractor’s Equipment
and/or temporary facilities have fulfilled or completed their function, the
Contractor shall dismantle and demobilize such Contractor’s Equipment and/or

temporary facilities and remove all equipment, machinery, materials, refuse,

debris, objectionable material, and reinstate, including filling, grading and
dressing all areas to their original condition prior to completion of the Works.
The Contractor shall not proceed with any demobilization and/or removal of
temporary facilities and equipment without the prior consent of the Engineer.
Maintenance of Temporary Facilities
The Contractor shall provide all necessary maintenance requirements and shall
keep the temporary facilities and other areas established for the Works, clean, tidy
and litter-free.
The Contractor shall be responsible throughout the Time for Completion for
keeping the site and temporary facilities vermin-free, to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
The Contractor shall maintain all existing security fences required for the Works
until completion of the Works. Existing fences which interfere with construction
operations, shall not be relocated or dismantled, until written permission has been
obtained from the fence owner.
Damage to Existing Property
The Contractor shall be responsible for any and all damage that may occur to any
existing structures, works, materials, or equipment that is due to any operation(s)
for which the Contractor is responsible, including any operation(s) of any
Subcontractor.
The Contractor shall repair or replace any damaged structures, works, materials,
or equipment to the satisfaction of the Engineer, and at the Contractor’s own cost.
The Contractor shall be responsible for all damage to roads, railway infrastructure,
curbs, sidewalks, highways, shoulders, embankment, ditches, drains, culverts,
bridges, or other public or private property, which may be caused by their
construction activities and shall indemnify for losses due to such damages.

General
The Contractor shall mobilize to the workshop site the Contractor’s Equipment
and the Contractor’s Personnel as appropriate for the execution and completion
of the Works in strict accordance with the requirements of the Contract.
The Contractor may demobilize from the workshop site the Contractor’s
Equipment and the Contractor’s Personnel as appropriate when they are no longer
required for the Works.
Engineer’s Consents
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for consent an application for
mobilization of Contractor’s Equipment, including that required for use by any
Subcontractor, at least seven (7) days before the date planned for the mobilization
of same to the workshop site. Provided that:
the proposed mobilization is generally in accordance with the Contractual
Works Programme and method statement(s) to which the Engineer has given
consent;
the Contractor shall be solely responsible for the consequence of any such
mobilization;
the relevant insurances shall be in place as evidenced by insurance documents
included in the application;
then, the Engineer shall not unreasonably withhold consent.
The Contractor’s Equipment shall be mobilized to the workshop site complete
with all necessary spare parts, consumables and the like indispensable for proper
operation and maintenance thereof. Provision of a maintenance facility complete
with qualified maintenance personnel on or in the vicinity of the site will be
required as a prerequisite condition for the issue of the Engineer’s consent.
The Contractor shall obtain a written consent from the Engineer before removing
any of the Contractor’s Equipment from the workshop site or any managerial
person among the Contractor’s Personnel mobilized exclusively for the Contract.
Provided that the proposed demobilization is in accordance with the Contractual
Works Programme to which the Engineer has given consent and that the
Contractor shall be solely responsible for any consequences of such
demobilization, the Engineer shall not unreasonably withhold consent.
Although they are deemed intended for exclusive use on the Works as set forth in
Sub-Clause 4.17 of the General Conditions, the Contractor may divert any of the
Contractor’s Equipment to other uses within the workshop site, provided that the
Contractor’s written undertaking to return the same to the Works whenever
needed is submitted to the Engineer and the Engineer’s written consent to such
diversion is granted.

Records
In addition to the Monthly Progress Reports described in Sub-Division 04080
[Monthly Progress Report Requirements] of the General Specifications, the
Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, on a daily basis, details of the
mobilization and demobilization of any of the Contractor’s Equipment or any
managerial person among the Contractor’s Personnel.
Without undue delay after demobilization from the site, the Contractor shall
submit to the Engineer copies of certified evidence of lawful re-export from the
Country of any Contractor’s Equipment imported into the Country on a temporary
basis exclusively for use on the Contract.
Mobilization
The Contractor shall mobilize to the site the Contractor’s Equipment and the
Contractor’s Personnel as appropriate for the execution of the design, planning,
construction and completion of the Works. An Initial Mobilization Plan for the
three (3) months following the Commencement Date shall be submitted to the
Engineer within fourteen (14) days after the Letter of Acceptance has been
received by the Contractor. An overall Mobilization Plan for the Works shall be
submitted to the Engineer for his approval within twenty-eight (28) days after the
Commencement Date.
In the event that design, procurement and/or fabrication activities are to be carried
out outside India, the Contractor shall submit detailed organizational structure(s)
for such design and manufacturing teams. This submission shall include the
organization of such teams and details of the key personnel, including contact
address, i.e., the addresses of the locations where such design procurement and/or
fabrication activities are carried out and the e-mail address of each key personnel.
The Mobilization Plan shall include, but not be limited, following:
Details of each major item of Contractor’s Equipment, i.e., the name, size
and capacity etc. of each item.
The number of each equipment and the time of mobilization and duration of
the use of each equipment.
The name and details of key personnel for each section of the Works and
their responsibilities.
Details and time for installation of temporary facilities for the Works
including temporary facilities for the Employer and the Engineer.
The numbers of Contractor’s Personnel, including site engineers,
administrative staff and labour in each trade category.
Demobilization (As applicable)
Demobilization shall be carried out in accordance with the provision of Sub-Clause
4.23 [Contractor’s Operation on Site], and Sub-Clause 11.11 [Clearance of Site] of
General Conditions. Upon receiving the Performance Certificate under Sub-Clause
11.9 [Performance Certificate], the Contractor shall carry out the Clearance of the Site

and the Contractor shall inform in writing to the Employer the completion of
Demobilization or Clearance of Site and obtain the consent of the Employer. In case
the Clearance of the Site has not been completed in a specified period by the
Contractor, the Employer may carry out the Clearance of the Site. The third paragraph
of the Sub-Clause 11.11 states that “If these moneys are less than the Employer’s costs,
the Contractor shall pay the outstanding balance to the Employer” and the Employer
shall be entitled to receive or deduct the outstanding balance from the Final Payment
or any money due to the Contractor under the Contract. The Employer has a right to
hold the Final Payment until the Clearance of the Site under the Sub-Clause 11.11 is
complete. In case the Taking-Over is conducted section by section, the Contractor
shall inform in writing to the Employer the completion of Demobilization of the
section and obtain the consent of the Employer or the Engineer as a representative or
on behalf of the Employer.
Not Used

General
The Contractor shall thoroughly acquaint itself with existing traffic conditions
and understand the importance of maintaining traffic safety and the avoidance of
excessive traffic delay. The Contractor shall co-operate with the relevant agencies
regarding traffic control and all details shall be subject to the Engineer's approval.
The cost for this shall be borne by the Contractor.
Prior to the transportation, the Contractor shall investigate the transportation route
and its condition and specify detail management of its transportation of materials
to be procured and delivery of the fabricated steel truss members to Interfacing
Contractors. The Contractor shall obtain all the required permits for roadway
transportation and the required approval from road authorities and other relevant
local government/authorities. The approval shall also be obtained for the
movement of over sized consignment, if any.
The requirements concerning temporary road works shall include, but not be
limited to, construction of detours, temporary bridge approach roads, traffic
control devices and services for the control and protection of traffic through areas
of construction as well as throughout the transportation route.
The Contractor shall be responsible for investigating and establishing the
requirements for traffic control and ensuring safety at each site and along
transportation route and shall submit such details in the form of a Temporary
Traffic Control Plan for the Engineer’s review and consent.
All temporary roadworks and traffic management shall be as specified in this Sub-
Division, unless specified otherwise elsewhere in the Contract or local Indian
regulations and standards, and the more onerous provision shall apply.
Temporary Traffic Control Plan (TCP)
Submission, Approval and Change
shall submit a Temporary Traffic Control Plan (TCP) to the Engineer for review
and consent. The Engineer’s consent shall be obtained prior to the start of Works
on the site.
The Contractor shall comply with the TCP which has received the Engineer’s
approval and any Engineer’s instructions issued concerning traffic control.
Should the Contractor propose any changes to the TCP which has received the
Engineer’s approval, the Engineer shall be notified in writing at least seven (7)
calendar days prior to the date planned for the implementation of any such
proposed change. Changes proposed are subject to receipt of the Engineer’s
consent. If the Engineer makes any subsequent recommendations or issues
instructions concerning the TCP in writing, the Contractor shall revise the TCP
accordingly.

Contents of Temporary Traffic Control Plan

The main contents of the Temporary Traffic Control Plan shall include, but not
be limited to, the following:
Type and main specifications of traffic control devices and facilities;
A scale plan of the location(s), clearly identifying existing road(s),
proposed diversions of pedestrian and road traffic, locations of warning
signs and traffic control measures;
Details of all lane widths, temporary surfaces, etc.;
Construction details of any proposed diversion(s);
Safety measures including signage and staffing;
Program for installation and erection of traffic control devices and facilities;
Traffic control means during non-working time and during night time;
Protection/diversion of any existing utilities;
Environmental measures to be implemented, e.g. dust suppression, noise
abatement, watercourse diversion and the like; and
Person responsible for overseeing implementation of all aspects of the TCP.
In addition to the above and prior to the implementation of any site-specific
traffic control schemes, the Contractor shall obtain any necessary approval
letters from relevant authorities who have jurisdiction over or ownership of the
existing traffic way including the Traffic Police, NHAI, PWD and any other
local government/authorities and other related parties having jurisdiction, as
applicable and as required.
Number of Lanes for Traffic Control
The existing traffic on roads at the site/transportation route must be maintained
at all times during the execution of the Works and if diversions are required
these must be of the same traffic capacity as the original road. Notwithstanding
the above, the Engineer may give consent to reductions in traffic capacity if the
Contractor can demonstrate that such will not cause excessive delays to traffic
flow. If such consent is given, the Engineer may specify the hours during the
day when the reduction in capacity may be applied and it should be anticipated
by the Contractor that these hours will not include any peak periods for the
traffic movement.
The Contractor shall cooperate with relevant authorities having jurisdiction
regarding traffic control and all details will be subject to receipt of the Engineer's
consent.
Temporary Traffic Ramps and Speed Breakers
In locations where it is necessary (for example, pipeline crossing a road above
ground), the Contractor shall construct and maintain temporary traffic ramps.

In cases where it is necessary (for example, requirement by an agency having

jurisdiction) or required by the Engineer, the Contractor shall provide and
maintain temporary speed breakers.
Traffic Control for Public Roads
The Contractor shall maintain close liaison with the Traffic Police, NHAI,
PWD and any other local government/authorities and other related parties
having jurisdiction, as applicable to traffic control requirements and shall
comply with all approval and permit requirements from such authorities.
In order to facilitate traffic through or around the Works, or wherever ordered
by the Engineer, the Contractor shall erect and maintain at prescribed points on
the site roads and at approaches to the Works, a temporary fence made of
corrugated metal sheet supported by hard posts with foundations and horizontal
bars, traffic signs, lights, barricades, traffic cones with traffic warning lamps
and other facilities for the direction and control of traffic. The fence is to be
painted and maintained in good condition. Drawings and details of the fence
are to be prepared and submitted to the Engineer for review and issue of an
approval.
Where required, or as directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall provide
competent flagmen whose sole duties shall consist of directing the movement
of traffic through or around the Works.
In addition to the requirements as described above, the Contractor shall furnish
and erect, within or near Works Areas, such warning and guide signs as may
be ordered by the Engineer.
For all traffic safety precautions, the Contractor shall refer to Sub-Clause 4.36
[Traffic Management and Site Barricading] of Section VI-1, Appendix 08000
– 1.
The repair of any existing roads that have been damaged by the Contractor
during the execution of the Works (including any damage caused by
Contractor’s Equipment) shall be at the risk and cost of the Contractor.
Extraordinary Traffic
The Contractor shall be responsible for carrying out any necessary investigations and
the obtaining of approvals, licenses, escorts and any other necessary facilities in order
to enable extraordinary traffic to be moved on the roads in the Works area.
Maintenance and Protection of Traffic
During the execution of the Works the Contractor shall keep open to traffic
existing roads, provided that where required or as directed by the Engineer, the
Contractor shall arrange detours subject to the consent of the Engineer. The
Contractor shall at all times keep roads and footpaths affected by its operations,
free from obstruction and nuisance and suitable for public use.
The Contractor shall take necessary care at all times during the execution of the
Works to ensure the convenience and safety of residents along and adjacent to

public roads and highways that may be affected by the Works. Street lighting
shall be relocated as necessary to maintain the same standard of lighting during
the course of the Works, until new lighting facilities are brought into operation.
Any failure of the Contractor to meet these requirements will entitle the Engineer
to carry out such works as he deems to be necessary and to charge the Contractor
with the full cost thereof plus ten percent of such cost, which sum will be deducted
from any money due or which may become due to the Contractor under the
Contract.
Vertical Clearance
In general, any Temporary Works placed over roads or diversions used by public
traffic shall maintain a vertical clearance of at least 5.5 metres unless otherwise
directed by the Engineer. Where required by the Engineer the Contractor shall erect
and maintain suitable check-gates, fitted with warning signs indicating the vertical
clearance.
Materials
Materials and other specifications related to traffic control devices shall conform to
IRC Standards unless otherwise specified elsewhere in the Contract.
Retro-reflective Material
Unless otherwise specified in the Contract, sign panels, barricades, traffic cones,
vertical panels, and flagmans’ paddles shall have retro-reflective sheeting, as
consented to by the Engineer.
Sign Panels
Sign panels shall be yellow with black legend unless otherwise specified in the
Contract or local Indian regulations and standards.
Sign Posts
Sign posts shall be fabricated from materials as acceptable to the Engineer. Signs
shall be provided with suitable foundations and be designed so as to be capable of
remaining in position during normal traffic flow and wind conditions.
Barricades
Barricades shall be constructed from metal or plastic as appropriate and as consented
to by the Engineer.
Traffic Cones
Traffic cones shall be capable of withstanding impact without damage to the
cones or vehicles. All cones shall be orange with highly reflective white bands
which is easily visible both in daylight and darkness. Traffic cones shall be
capable of remaining visible and in position during normal traffic flow and wind
conditions in the area where they are used. Lamps for cones shall be suitable for
purpose.
Where traffic cones are used for the diversion of pedestrians the cones shall be
fitted with yellow/black reflective cone bars to prevent pedestrians walking
outside the protected walk area. All cones shall be as above unless otherwise

specified in the Contract or local Indian regulations and standards, whichever is

more onerous.
Warning Lights (flashing or steady)
High visibility traffic warning lights shall be provided and used at all locations where
Works are being carried out and visible warnings are required, i.e. road works,
excavations, pedestrian diversions, etc. The requirements for warning lights shall be:
Lens colour shall be amber;
Lens diameter shall be not less than 185mm;
Flashing shall be 110 per minute;
Suitable for fitting to traffic cones;
Battery operated; and
Continuous operation of more than 600 hours.
Construction Requirements (Not applicable)

General
Unless otherwise required by the Particular Conditions, Plant and Materials shall
be delivered to the workshop site in accordance with the Works Programme and
Procurement Work Segment Programme, so as to avoid undue damage and/or
deterioration due to a storage period of excessive duration.
All Plant and Materials, if manufactured or assembled off-site, shall be properly
and securely packed at the point of origin, in order to prevent damage during
transport to the workshop site and due to storage in the weather conditions to be
encountered at the site.
The Contractor shall securely crate or box all consignments for ocean shipment
in a manner suitable to protect them from damage in transit and shall be
responsible for and rectify any and all damage due to any improper packing.
Crates shall have external markings identifying the Contract reference number,
origin, destination, contents and consignee.
The Contractor may be required to furnish the Employer, by courier or other
approved means with advance copies of shipping documents, invoices and other
pertinent papers showing the date and origin of shipment, a description of the
Goods, the shipping weight of each item, destination, name of the vessel and other
pertinent information.
The Contractor shall also be responsible for the trans-shipment up till the delivery
to the installation sites.
The Contractor shall ensure, prior to delivery of Plant and Material, that adequate
storage facilities and/or areas are available on the workshop site to properly store
and protect the Plant or the Material so as to prevent any damage or deterioration.
Air-conditioned or other controlled-environment storage shall be provided for
Plant items sensitive to high humidity and/or temperature.
Materials of an inflammable, explosive, toxic or similarly hazardous nature shall
be securely stored separately at approved locations. The Contractor shall provide
adequate security and safety control at such locations throughout the storage
period. Before delivery of such Materials to workshop site, all necessary permits
and licenses shall have been obtained from the authorities having jurisdiction, all
in accordance with the applicable Laws.
When Plant or Materials arrive on the workshop site, it shall as soon as practicable
be inspected by the Contractor in the presence of the Engineer, for damage or
deterioration. The Contractor shall be responsible for unpacking and re-packing
in an appropriate manner and for provision of all necessary equipment, tools,
materials and labour at his own expense. If damage or deterioration has occurred
as determined by the Engineer, payment shall not be made for such damaged or
deteriorated Plant or Materials, and such shall be removed from the workshop site

and repaired or replaced according to the instructions of the Engineer, at the

Contractor’s risk and cost.
For the Plant or the Material which is subject to deterioration after opening the
packing, appropriate alternative inspection measures shall be determined on the
workshop site between the Engineer and the Contractor. No payment shall
become due to the Contractor for those uninspected Plant or Material, unless
otherwise determined by the Employer.
Packing materials shall remain the property of the Contractor and shall be
removed from the workshop site immediately when no longer required on the
workshop site, as determined by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the safe and secure storage and handling
of Plant and Materials on the workshop site until the issuance of the Taking-Over
Certificate for the relevant part of the Works, regardless of any transfer of
ownership thereof to the Employer.
Any action taken by the Engineer in inspecting Plant or Materials upon arrival on
the workshop site or any determination subsequently made by the Engineer shall
not relieve the Contractor of any of his responsibilities under the Contract.
Storage of Plant and Materials
The Contractor shall provide and maintain storage facilities at acceptable
locations in consultation with the Engineer, for the equipment and materials of all
kinds intended for use in carrying out the Permanent Works or for incorporation
into the Permanent Works.
The Contractor shall prepare, protect, provide security and store in an agreed
manner for all Works, Contractor’s Equipment and materials until the Project
completion so as to safeguard them against any loss, damage and any other
hazards arising during shipment, storage on/off the site or climatic influences.
Crating
The Contractor shall provide all packing, crates and markings. In doing so, it shall
comply with the following requirements:
Each case, crate or package shall be waterproof, rot, insect and rodent proof. It
shall be of robust construction and fit for its intended purpose. The Contractor
shall, in determining the packaging materials to be used, take into consideration
the climatic conditions likely to occur during the period of transport, shipment
and storage.
Each case, crate or package shall be legibly and indelibly marked in large letters
with the Site/fabrication-workshop address, Contract number, "right way up",
opening points and other markings as necessary to permit materials to be readily
identified and handled during transit and when received at the Site/fabrication-
workshop.
Each case, crate or package shall contain a comprehensive packing list showing
the number, mark, size, weight and contents, together with any relevant drawings.

A second copy of the packing list shall be enclosed in a watertight enclosure on

the outside of each case, crate or package. Distribution of additional copies of
each packing list shall be in accordance with the Engineer's instructions.
All items heavier than 100 kg shall be marked on the outside of the case, crate or
package, indicating the gross and net weights, the points for slinging, and where
the weight is bearing.
Care shall be taken to prevent movement of items within cases, crates or packages
by the provision of bracing, straps and securing bolts as necessary. Bags of loose
items shall be packed in cases and shall be clearly identified by well-secured
metal labels on which the quantity and name of the parts and their index or
catalogue number have been stamped.
All packing shall be free from sharp edges to prevent injury to persons or other
objects.
Each bulky/heavy case, crate or package shall include wedge(s) for easy loading
and unloading by mechanical handling equipment such as forklift truck.
Electronic circuit boards, integrated circuits and the like shall be well protected
by using appropriate packing, e.g. anti-static bubble wrap or similar.
Rubber products and the like shall be suitably packed to avoid damage including
but not limited to hardening, deformation and peel-off.
General Precautions
Spare parts shall be tropicalized in their packing for prolonged storage in
accordance with appropriate international / Indian/ Japanese standards and shall
be suitably and individually labelled to indicate:
Name of parts;
Shelf life and date of manufacture;
Type or condition(s) of storage and special handling information;
Description of item and relevant part number;
Serial number, if applicable;
Inspection/test certificate number and batch number; and
Contract number, order number and item number.
Tubes, cable, conductor and other similar openings shall be properly sealed and
blanked off to prevent ingress of dirt or moisture.
Spare ball and roller bearings and similarly protected items shall not be removed
from the manufacturer’s wrappings or packing.
Fragile materials shall be packed in such a way that they shall not be damaged
during transit and when they are properly unpacked for quality inspection. Glass
items shall be capable of being easily re-packed without removing the original
wrappings or packing for long-term storage within the same packing case.
Appropriate precautions in accordance with the Contractor’s safety regulations,
the regulations of the Employer, Division 08000 [Safety, Health and
Environmental Management] and statutory regulations in respect of all hazardous,
toxic, inflammable, etc. materials.

Packaging Procedures
All required inspection/test certificates shall be supplied and packed together with
individual materials. All packaging materials and procedures shall be subject to
review by the Engineer.
All empty cases, crates or packages, whether or not returnable, shall be removed
from the workshop site by the Contractor or stored by the Contractor in such a
way that they do not interfere with the progress of the Works.
Shipping
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer at least fifteen (15) days in advance of
any expected shipment date and give further notification of the actual shipment
date and routing when such information is subsequently established. This shall
complement the inspection requirements prior to delivery as specified herein.
Two (2) copies of packing lists and quality certificates shall be attached with each
case or package to be shipped. One copy shall be placed inside the package and
the second copy shall be enclosed in a watertight enclosure on the outside of each
case or package. A copy of packing lists and quality certificates shall be sent to
the Engineer after each package of the Works, the equipment, spare parts and
other items have been shipped.
Without prejudice to any other provisions of the Contract, the Contractor shall be
responsible for all legal requirements, insurance, customs, duties, dues, taxes and
other such requirements and expenditures required for the plant, equipment, spare
parts and other items to be supplied under the Contract.
Delivery
The Contractor shall deliver Plant and Materials required for the Works and all
items to be supplied under the Contract to the designated delivery point .
The Contractor shall unload all items to be supplied under the Contract at the
designated delivery point and place them in position or store them.
Any part of the Works or any item to be supplied under the Contract that is
damaged in transit shall not be considered as delivered until repairs or
replacements have been made and all necessary spare parts or items have been
delivered to the fabrication-workshop site.
All documents, manuals, drawings and other deliverables shall be delivered to an
address to be designated by the Engineer in writing.
The Contractor shall store and secure Plant and Materials until the same have
been inspected by the Engineer and are considered delivered at the designated
point.
The Contractor shall remove temporary fittings required for shipment and re-
assembly of Plant and Materials and shall complete this prior to the inspection of
same and before they are considered delivered.
An item shall be considered delivered when all damage has been repaired and all
documentation and post-delivery preparation has been completed.

Table of Contents
07010 Quality Management ····································································· 160
General ................................................................................................................160
Works Quality Management Plan (WQMP) .......................................................160
Design Quality Management Plan (DQMP) .......................................................169
Site Quality Management Plan (SQMP) .............................................................170
Manufacturing Quality Management Plan (MQMP) ..........................................172
Procurement Quality Management Plan (PQMP) ...............................................173
07020 Plant, Materials and Workmanship ·················································· 175
General ................................................................................................................175
Contractor’s Submission Relating to Consent for Subcontractors ......................176
Contractor’s Submissions Relating to Consent for Contractor’s Approach to the
Works under the Contract ...................................................................................176
Contractor’s Submissions Relating to Approval for Plant and Materials ...........177
Contractor’s Submissions Related to Approval for Laboratories .......................178
Contractor’s Submissions Related to Consent for Procurement of Plant and
Materials ..............................................................................................................180
Substitution of Plant or Materials .......................................................................181
Delivery of Plant and Materials to the Site/ workshop site .................................182
Samples and Mock-Ups ......................................................................................182
Execution of Inspection and Test Plan (ITP) ......................................................183
Request for Inspection (RFI) ...............................................................................184
Coordination of Plant and Materials Installed/supplied by Interfacing Contractors
.....................................................................................................................184
Rejection and Remedial Works ...........................................................................184
Spares, Special Tools and Consumables .............................................................185
07030 Test on Completion and Tests after Completion ··································· 186
General ................................................................................................................186
Contractors Documents for Test on Completion ................................................186
ITP for Test on Completion ................................................................................186
Tests After Completion .......................................................................................187

General
The Contractor shall establish and maintain a quality management system that
shall remain in effect throughout the execution of the Works. The Contractor’s
quality management system shall be tailored specifically to the Contract and the
Works in accordance with ISO 9001:2015. The Contractor shall submit for the
Engineer’s consent a Works Quality Management Plan (WQMP) as specified
herein, detailing the quality management system to be implemented.
The WQMP may be supplemented by a number of subsidiary quality plans, which
may include, but not limited to, the following;
Design Quality Management Plan (DQMP) (see Clause 3),
Site Quality Management Plan (SQMP) (see Clause 4),
Manufacturing Quality Management Plan (MQMP) (see Clause 5), and
Procurement Quality Management Plan (PQMP) (see Clause 6).
shall submit the WQMP to the Engineer duly approved by the International
Expert for Welding and Quality Management, for approval. After Engineer's
approval of WQMP, the Subsidiary Quality Management Plans duly approved by
the International Expert for Welding and Quality Management shall be submitted
to the Engineer for the approval. These Subsidiary plans shall be submitted for
the Engineer’s approval at least twenty-eight (28) days in advance of the date
planned for the commencement of the works described in the particular
Subsidiary Plan.
Works Quality Management Plan (WQMP)
The WQMP shall include the Contractor’s quality policy, quality objectives,
organization, and processes to achieve the Contract requirements through planning,
control and improvement.
Context of the Contractor
The Contractor shall determine its internal and external issues considering
Contract requirements including General Conditions, Particular Conditions, and
Annex to Particular Conditions - Contract Forms and the site conditions.
The Contractor shall determine the needs and expectations of interested parties
whose activities, potentials and requirements will affect the quality management
system. These interested parties may include the Employer, the Employer’s
Personnel, the Contractor’s Personnel, Subcontractor(s), Interfacing
Contractor(s) and/or Interfacing Parties, including relevant authorities.
The Contractor shall determine the scope of its quality management system by
describing each interested party, together with the boundaries and applicability
of the system. Where the precise identity of a specific party has not been
finalized by the due date for submission, the description used may indicate the
function to be fulfilled by such party. Whenever such party has been identified,

the relevant details shall be notified and submitted to the Engineer as a revision
of or addendum to the WQMP.
The Contractor shall establish the processes of the quality management system,
including its interactions by referring to Sub-Clause 0.3.1 General and Figure 1
[Schematic representation of the elements of a single process] of ISO 9001:2015.
Leadership and Commitment
The Contractor’s Representative shall demonstrate his leadership and commitment
with respect to the quality management system as assured and detailed in the WQMP.
Quality Policy
The Contractor’s Representative shall determine the Contractor’s quality policy to
be included in the WQMP. The quality policy shall meet the requirements of ISO
9001:2015 and the relevant requirements of the Contract.
Organisation
The Contractor’s Representative shall establish organizational departments,
with the person-in-charge of each department being assigned the responsibility
and authority for the implementation and management of the quality
management system in their particular department. Each department shall be
efficiently structured to implement and maintain the quality management system,
and the Contractor’s organization chart shall illustrate each sub-department
together with the main tasks, lines of authority and interactions, including:
Interface between the Contractor, the Engineer and the Employer,
interface between the Contractor’s departments including the quality
function,
details of the person-in-charge of each of the Contractor’s departments,
interface between the Contractor and Subcontractor(s), including design
consultants, suppliers and testing laboratories,
person-in-charge of each of the departments within each Subcontractor, and
coordination between the Contractor, Interfacing Contractors and
Interfacing Parties, including relevant authorities.
The organisation chart in the WQMP, may be in a summary format where the
ones in the subsidiary quality management plans provide further details of the
above-referenced personnel, interfaces and coordination.
Job titles for each designated person in the organisation shall be given in a
tabular format, together with their responsibilities. The Contractor’s
Representative may have the discretion to organise his personnel; however,
directly controlled departments viz. safety, environment, and quality shall be
ensured against influence from other departments. For each job title, the
Contractor shall include details of the intended duration of the assignment on
the Works. Any changes proposed to the organisation charts shall be submitted
to the Engineer for review prior to implementation.

The resume of each person-in-charge shall demonstrate their experience and

competence to conduct their designated responsibilities. The Contractor shall
submit the resume of each person-in-charge to the Engineer for review,
including certified true copies of any relevant academic certifications, and
qualifications, as applicable and provide complete and accurate details of the
qualifications and experience of Key Personnel in accordance with the
requirements, elsewhere in the Contract.
The organisation chart shall be updated where any amendment is required
regarding interactions such as: interface between the Contractor’s department
and consented Subcontractors; coordination between the Contractor, the
authorities of jurisdiction, and Interfacing Contractor’s or Interfacing Parties or
both; and designation of each anticipated information.
The organisation chart, the job title table, and the job descriptions may be
appended to the WQMP. In this case, the Contractor may separately submit its
revised organisation chart with amendment sheet for the Engineer’s review.
Quality Objectives
The Contractor shall plan and programme to achieve the quality objectives for
the Works within the Time for Completion by allocating its functions such as
organisation, Contractor’s Equipment and processes accordingly. The quality
objectives shall be consistent with the quality policy and shall be achieved in
time as per the programme.
The quality objectives shall be measurable. These may separately be established
in the subsidiary quality management plans such as;
Design Quality Management Plan (DQMP) (see Clause 3),
Site Quality Management Plan (SQMP) (see Clause 4),
Manufacturing Quality Management Plan (MQMP) (see Clause 5), and
Procurement Quality Management Plan (PQMP) (see Clause 6).
In such case, measurability of quality objectives shall be demonstrated in each
subsidiary plan.
The Contractor shall recognise that achievement of the quality objectives shall
not relieve the Contractor of any of his duties, obligations or responsibilities
under the Contract.
Planning
Actions to address risks and opportunities
The Contractor shall determine the opportunities [circumstances that makes it
possible to do something] for the Contractor to execute the Works in order to
comply with the Specifications and to improve the performance of its quality
management system. It shall also determine the risks [effects of uncertainty] that
may adversely impact its Works or its quality management system. The
Contractor shall plan actions to address the determined opportunities and risks.
Quality objectives and planning to achieve them

The Contractor shall plan, in accordance with ISO 9001:2015 its activities,
resources, persons-in-charge, due dates and method of evaluation for achieving
its objectives.
Planning of changes
Whenever changes are necessary, the Contractor shall submit a revised WQMP
to the Engineer for his consent. The Contractor shall ensure the integrity of its
systems, the arrangement of resources and responsibilities for the effective
adoption of any changes.
Support
Resources
The Contractor shall determine the required resources such as persons,
facilities, monitoring equipment, and knowledge for the execution of the
Works. The resources that are required for the quality objectives in each
subsidiary plan (see Clause 1) may be separately determined therein.
Where the Contractor is required to establish his own Laboratory at
fabrication-workshop in accordance with Sub-Division 06040 [Temporary
Facilities of Contractor] of the General Specifications, or organises his own
laboratory(ies) to carry out the tests specified in the Contract, the Contractor
shall submit to the Engineer for consent a Method Statement (MS) for the
operation of the Laboratory at fabrication-workshop which shall include the
requirements of Sub-Clause 7.1.5 [Monitoring and measuring resources] of
ISO9001: 2015, and shall especially ensure that the MS complies with the
requirements of Sub-Clause 7.1.5.2 [Measurement traceability]. In addition,
reference to this MS shall be included in the WQMP.
Where the Contractor proposes an Independent Laboratory(ies) to carry out
its quality control, acceptance and conformity testing of the works, the
Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for consent, a Manufacturer’s
Arrangement (MA) for Independent Laboratory(ies) that shall detail
applicable quality assurance activities to be managed by the Contractor for
the Independent Laboratory(ies). In addition, reference to this MA shall be
included in the WQMP.
Where the Contractor intends to utilise a Manufacturer’s Certificate(s) from
a manufacturer or a supplier for its submission regarding Plant, Materials
or for quality control in the Inspection and Test Plan (ITP) submitted in
accordance with Sub-item d) of 1), under Clause 4 [Contractor’s
Submissions Relating to Approval for Plant and Materials] of Sub-Division
7020 [Plant, Materials and Workmanship] under the General Specifications,
the Manufacturer’s Certificate(s) shall be recognised as the Contractor’s
resources after obtaining Engineer’s approval on each submission for Plant
and Materials.

Competence, awareness and communication

The job titles together with their respective responsibilities in the
organisation as detailed in the Sub-Clause 2.4[Organisation] of this Sub-
Division are deemed to be the competence that is required for the abilities
to implement and maintain the quality management system. The Contractor
shall ensure that employee performance is evaluated at least annually.
The Contractor shall plan and implement employee guidance and training,
so that the Contractor’s Personnel acquire the awareness of the quality
management system and maintain communications for the system with
stakeholders such as the Employer, the Engineer, relevant authorities,
subcontractors, manufacturers, suppliers, local communities adjacent to the
Works. The WQMP shall document these communications and establish
suitable formats for same.
The Contractor shall ensure that all persons under its control on the Works
are made aware of the quality policy, relevant quality objectives, the
benefits of improved performance and the consequences of not conforming
with the quality management system requirements.
Documented information
Documented information for the system and Works shall be controlled and
managed in line with the Clause 4 and Clause 5 of Sub-Division 03020
[Correspondence, Communications and Submission]. The Contractor shall
establish relevant formats to manage the documented information following the
Method Statement for the control of document and management system required
at Sub-Division 03020 [Correspondence, Communications and Submission] of
Operation
Operations at the Works shall be executed in accordance with the WQMP and
other subsidiary plans (refer to Clause 1) as follows:
Design Quality Management Plan (DQMP) (see Clause 3): Management
plan related to the Contractor’s Shop Drawing under the Contract regarding
the Works and Contractor’s Equipment,
Site Quality Management Plan (SQMP) (see Clause 4): management plan
related to the Contractor’s execution of the works and provision of
Contractor’s Equipment (excluding its procurement but including its
installation) to be carried out on the workshop-site and bridge-site/site-
delivery-yards under the Contract,
Manufacturing Quality Management Plan (MQMP) (see Clause 5):
management plan related to the Contractor’s execution of the works and
provision of Contractor’s Equipment, and its transportation to delivery
places (other than its procurement but including its installation) to be
carried out off the site under the Contract, and

Procurement Quality Management Plan (PQMP) (see Clause 6):

management plan related to the Contractor’s procurement of any Plant and
other major item of Goods, and its transportation to delivery places
(excluding Goods manufactured by the Contractor) under the Contract.
The WQMP shall determine categories of each operation to be subsidiary.
Where the Contract is deemed not to be adequate for establishing a subsidiary
plan, the plan may respectively be eliminated as “Not Applicable”.
Each subsidiary plan shall be detailed in accordance with the relevant
requirements of ISO 9001:2015. The WQMP shall detail the required
process(es) for the Inspection and Test on Completion, and the Tests after
Completion (if any).
Reference to Method Statement and Manufacturer’s Arrangement
The WQMP and other subsidiary plans may refer to the following:
Method Statement (MS) means details of the methods to directly execute
the Works by the Contractor or Subcontractors or both, which shall
specify the scope, the organisation including responsibilities,
communications with the Engineer and other entities if any, resources,
procedures, schematic diagrams, drawings, allocated ITPs, environmental
precautions, and safety precautions including rail possession procedures
(for Works adjacent to running railway lines/Highways) if any; and
Manufacturer’s Arrangement (MA) means details of the arrangement to
indirectly execute the works by the Contractor or Subcontractors or both,
which shall specify (as applicable) the scope, arranging of manufacturers,
the organisation including responsibilities, communications with the
Contractor and other entities if any, resources, procedures, schematic
diagrams, drawings, approved quality management plans and
corrigendum, certification procedures by the Contractor including
allocated ITPs, the endorsement procedure to be adopted by the Engineer,
consented environmental plan, and consented safety plan including rail
possession plan (for works adjacent to running railway lines) if any.
The lists of Method Statements and Manufacturer’s Arrangements shall be
included as appendices in the WQMP and other subsidiary plans with the ID,
title, revision number, and their hierarchy. The Contractor shall promptly
revise an appendix where another reference document is to be introduced or
where a previously-submitted reference document is to be removed.
Reference to Inspection and Test Plan (ITP)
The WQMP or other subsidiary plans may refer to the Inspection and Test Plan
(ITP), which means the detailed test and inspection plan for the Plant, Materials,
and Works as the case may be. The ITP shall include all quality requirements
considering the ‘concept to commissioning stage’ approach and also the
complete supply chain stages with due diligence. The timely submission of

inspection and test records shall be included in the ITP for the issuing of
certification by the Contractor and endorsement (if required) by the Engineer.
The ITP shall include, but not limited to, the following information (as
applicable):
quality level required in the Specification,
particulars of the materials to be used in the manufacturing process,
particulars of procurement,
Particulars of materials supplied by the Employer through another
interfacing contractor, and the inspection or acceptance requirements of
the same,
the works specifications, and drawings,
the requirements of ISO 9001:2015 and other compliance requirements of
the Contract,
scope of activities covered by the plan,
a sequence of the activities related to the Works in the scope,
personnel responsible for undertaking the inspections and tests and the
personnel responsible for certifying the inspections and tests,
definition of inspection section,
inspections and/or test methods, their frequency, and reference materials
to the relevant standard of the inspections and/or the tests,
compliance criteria of the inspections and tests with clear descriptions of
the quality hold point and the quality control point,
documents to be used for reporting the results of inspections and/or tests
with sample documents and formats incorporated,
identification or referencing procedures for traceability of the
manufactured items,
identification of the inspection and test status of materials, procured items,
the final manufactured items,
handling, storage, packing, presentation and delivery of the manufactured,
procured items and supplied items,
procedure for monitoring and recording of the ordering, release before
shipping, delivery and acceptance of the items,
methods of record keeping and document storage as to the locations to be
maintained and stored and procedures for these to be acknowledged and
filed,
procedure for monitoring and recording of the ordering, delivery, and
acceptance of procured items, and
possibilities of other external bodies in the inspection.
ITPs shall be listed in the quality management plans as an appendix and list
shall be tabulated with the ID, title, revision number and their hierarchy. The

Contractor shall promptly revise an appendix where another reference

document is to be introduced or where a previously-submitted reference
document is to be removed.
Performance Evaluation
Monthly Quality Report (MQR)
The Contractor shall regularly monitor the performance of the quality
management system and shall include the results of such performance
monitoring in the Monthly Progress Report that is required as per the Sub-
Division 04080 [Monthly Progress Report Requirements] of the General
Specifications.
The Contractor shall provide and maintain at all stages of the works a
quality control register(s) to identify the status of inspections, sampling and
testing of the works and all certificates. Such register(s) shall be updated by
the Contractor to show all activities in previous months and shall reach the
Engineer’s office before the 7th working day of each month. Each register
shall:
i) Align with the relevant ITPs,
ii) provide a summary of results of inspections and test activities,
traceable to the test reports and work components and batches and
shall be compared with ITP provisions with respect to frequency of
performance, and
iii) show the results of each report of inspection and test and any required
analysis of these results and compare these results against the pass or
fail criteria.
The test report may be submitted monthly as agreed with the Engineer.
The MQR shall also comprise of:
i) a register of the NCRs that details and compiles the nonconformities
at the works, their close-out status and the number of “Open NCRs”,
ii) a calibration and verification register that details overall calibration
and verification plan, calibrations performed during the month and
plans for the next month. It shall highlight any overdue the calibration
and verification with respect to calibration and verification plan,
iii) a section detailed key highlights and events in the Works with respect
to quality management during the month and those planned for next
month,
iv) a section on performance status on the quality objectives, and
v) a section for highlighting quality improvements carried out during the
month and improvements planned for the forthcoming period.
The Engineer shall submit the MQR to the Employer along with his
observations and comments after receiving each Monthly Progress Report
(MPR) from the Contractor.

Quality Audit
The Contractor shall carry out internal quality audits on the Works at
quarterly intervals, or at such other intervals as the Engineer may require,
to ensure the continuing suitability and effectiveness of the quality
management system. Reports of each such audit shall be submitted within
7 days after completion of the audit to the Engineer for review.
The Contractor shall submit details of the authority, qualifications and
experience of personnel assigned for carrying out internal quality audit
activities, for review by the Engineer before carrying out quality audits.
The Engineer may require quality audits on the Contractor and his
Subcontractors of any tier to be carried out by his representative or the
Employer’s staff. In such case, the Contractor shall afford to such auditors
all necessary facilities and access to the activities and records to permit such
audit to be performed. The auditor shall notify the dates, time, criteria and
scope of audit which shall not be beyond the scope of the consented WQMP.
Upon receipt of the reports or findings issued by the Engineer as a result of
quality audits carried out, the Contractor shall promptly investigate the
causes of any non-conformities and within fourteen (14) days from the
receipt of the audit report, submit to the Engineer for review proposed
corrective actions. The Contractor shall take timely corrective actions to
rectify any non-conformity so as to prevent re-occurrence. Evidence to
demonstrate the effective implementation of corrective actions shall be
submitted by the Contractor to the Engineer for review and verification (if
needed) and the Contractor shall close-out the results of any such audits
after specified surveillance period by the Engineer.
The
Management Review
The WQMP shall specify details for the management review of the quality
management system. The Contractor’s quality manager shall arrange for the
management reviews to be chaired by the Contractor’s Representative and be
attended by various department heads. He shall prepare inputs for the reviews
and shall compile review outputs in accordance with the requirements of ISO
9001: 2015. A management review shall be held at least once in every twelve
(12) months and be timed to be held after internal quality audit. Reports of each
such management review shall be submitted to the Engineer for review within
seven (7) days of the review meeting.

Quality Improvement
Nonconformity and corrective action
If, prior to the issue of the Taking-Over Certificate for the Works or any
Section, the Contractor has used or proposes to use or repair any item of the
Works which does not conform to the requirements of the Contract, the
Contractor shall immediately submit for the Engineer’s review any such
proposal and supply full particulars of the nonconformity and, if appropriate,
of the proposed means of correction.
If the Engineer issues a nonconformity report or similar document to notify
the Contractor of any item of the Works which does not conform to the
requirements of the Contract, the Contractor shall promptly investigate the
matter and, within fourteen (14) days of notification by the Engineer,
submit to the Engineer for review the remedial measures and necessary
actions to be taken to rectify the item(s) and to prevent re-occurrence.
The Contractor shall maintain and update a nonconformity register to
indicate the status of all nonconformities which are identified either by the
Engineer or the Contractor. The Contractor shall submit the register for
review upon request by the Engineer.
Continual Improvement
The Contractor shall continually improve the quality management system
in accordance with the result of quality audits, the output of its management
reviews of the system, and the identified nonconformities.
The Contractor shall, at quarterly intervals, submit to the Engineer for
review the details of all such improvements made or to be made.
Design Quality Management Plan (DQMP)
General
The Contractor may submit a DQMP separately. It shall detail the quality
management plan for its preparation of shop drawing works under the Contract for
the Works. The DQMP shall be developed in line with the requirement at item 2) of
Clause 1 and quality policy of Sub-Clause 2.3 by the Contractor’s Representative;
and shall, without limitation, specify the following:
organisation of the Contractor’s shop drawing department in accordance with
the requirements of Sub-Clause 2.4 [Organisation]. It shall also refer to the
information that the WQMP has defined;
quality objectives in accordance with the requirements of the Sub-Clause 2.5
[Quality Objectives] for carrying out the drawing works in compliance with the
tender Drawings, Specification and the Conditions of Contract. The DQMP may
be cross-referenced with any relevant parts of WQMP;
support in accordance with the requirements of Sub-Clause 2.7 [Support]
including a hierarchy of the relevant documentation. Drawing production shall
be guided by Clause 5 of Sub-Division 03030 [Format of Documents and

Drawings], so as to manage and control the shop drawing works (including

drawing works by the Subcontractors of any tier) in order to avoid conflicts in
the drawing submissions; and
processes in accordance with the requirements of Sub-Clause 2.8 [Operation].
The DQMP shall particularly specify internal and external verifications;
coordination with Interfacing Contractors and Interfacing Parties; and the
Subcontractors’ drawing(s) of particular parts of the works, drawing review
procedures, and a list of the possible contents and check points to monitor and
measure performance of the shop drawing works.
Nonconformity of Design
The DQMP shall detail or shall refer to the control procedure to be implemented for
any part of the preparation of shop drawings which is found to be nonconforming.
The Contractor’s shop drawing department shall be responsible for ensuring
compliance with the DQMP and for establishing and implementing appropriate
corrective actions.
Site Quality Management Plan (SQMP)
General
The Contractor may submit SQMP separately. It shall detail the quality management
plan the Works on the workshop site/site-delivery-yard and Contractor’s Equipment
(excluding its procurement but including installation) on workshop site/site-
delivery-yard under the Contract. The SQMP shall be further subdivided into the
following subsidiary quality plans (as mentioned and described in the Sub-Clause
2.7 Quality management of the Technical Specifications), and to be developed
separately, in order to meet the quality objectives of structural steel work.
• Processing Quality Management Plan (PCEQMP)
• Assembling Quality Management Plan (AQMP)
• Welding Quality Management Plan (WELQMP)
• Painting Quality Management Plan (PAIQMP)
• Check-assembly Quality Management Plan (CQMP)
• Packaging, Transportation and Unloading Quality Management Plan (TQMP)
• Traceability Work Quality Management Plan (TrWQMP)
The SQMP shall be developed in line with the requirement at item 2) of Clause 1
and quality policy (see Sub-Clause 2.3) by the Contractor’s Representative and shall,
without limitation, specify the following:
organisation of the Contractor’s construction department in accordance with the
requirements of Sub-Clause 2.4 [organisation] and the person(s) directly
responsible for the day-to-day management of the construction and installation
activities on the Site/ workshop site. It shall also refer to the information that the
WQMP has defined;

quality objectives in accordance with the requirement of Sub-Clause 2.5

[Quality objectives] for carrying out construction and installation activities
required for the execution of the works in compliance with the Specification and
Conditions of Contract. The SQMP may be cross-referenced with any relevant
parts of WQMP;
support in accordance with the requirements of Sub-Clause 2.7 [Support],
including a hierarchy of relevant quality management system documentation (in
addition to drawings) for the; management and coordination of construction and
installation of the Works; and management of Subcontractors of any tier so as
to avoid conflicts in the execution of the Works; and
processes, in accordance with the requirements of Sub-Clause 2.8 [Operation].
The SQMP shall particularly specify inputs from the shop drawing department;
coordination with Interfacing Contractors; the allocation of responsibilities and
authorities given to delegated Contractor’s staff or Subcontractors for the
construction and installation of particular elements of the Works; the sequences
and interactions to be applied to manage, control and record the construction
and installation of the Works.
References in SQMP
The processes detailed in the SQMP may refer to relevant Manufacturer’s
Arrangements (for external bodies) and Method Statements (for the Contractor’s
or Subcontractor’s own activities) which are detailed procedures for particular
construction and installation activities required for the execution of the Works
on the Site/ workshop site.
The processes detailed in the SQMP may also refer to the quality manuals or
plans or both, produced by other external bodies including Subcontractors. The
Contractor shall submit such reference documents, which shall complement the
SQMP for the Engineer’s review. If these are planned for separate submission,
it shall be stated accordingly in the SQMP.
The processes detailed in the SQMP may refer to relevant Inspection and Test Plans
for possible controls and check points. The ITPs shall ensure that only delegated
Contractor’s Personnel (including approved Independent Laboratories) have the
responsibility to execute works.
Nonconformity at Site
The SQMP shall detail or shall refer to the control procedure to be used for the
nonconforming product on the Site/ workshop site. The Contractor’s construction
and production departments shall be responsible for ensuring compliance to agreed
corrective actions.

Manufacturing Quality Management Plan (MQMP)

General
The Contractor may submit a MQMP separately. It shall detail the quality
management plan for off-site execution of its Works and provision of the Plant and
Materials (such as bearings, steel plates, paint material, welding consumables etc.)
and their transportation to the workshops (excluding procurement but including
installation). The MQMP shall be developed in line with the requirement at item 2)
of Clause 1 and quality policy (see Sub-Clause 2.3) by the Contractor’s
Representative; and shall, without limitation, specify the following:
Organisation of the Contractor’s and Subcontractor’s manufacturing department
in accordance with the requirements of Sub-Clause 2.4 [Organization], and the
person(s) directly responsible for the day-to-day management of the
manufacturing activities required for the execution of the Works. It shall also
refer to any other information that the WQMP has defined;
quality objectives, in accordance with the requirements of Sub-Clause 2.5
[Quality Objectives], for carrying out manufacturing activities required for the
execution of the Works in compliance with the Specification and Conditions of
Contract. The MQMP may be cross-referenced with any relevant parts of the
WQMP;
support, in accordance with the requirements of Sub-Clause 2.7 [Support],
including a hierarchy of relevant quality management system documentation (in
addition to drawings) for the; management and coordination of manufacturing
Works; and management of Subcontractors of any tier so as to avoid conflicts
in the execution of the Works; and
processes, in accordance with the requirements of Sub-Clause 2.8 [Operation].
The MQMP shall particularly specify inputs from the Drawings ; coordination
with Interfacing Contractors; delivery of items for site installation; the
allocation of responsibilities and authorities given to identified personnel or
Subcontractors for manufacturing particular elements of the Works; the
sequences and interactions to be applied to manage, control and record the
manufacturing required for the Works.
References in MQMP
The processes detailed in the MQMP may refer to relevant Manufacturer’s
Arrangements (for external bodies) and Method Statements (for the Contractor’s
or Subcontractor’s own activities) which are detailed procedures for particular
manufacturing activities for the execution of the Works off-site.
The processes detailed in the MQMP may also refer to quality manuals or plans
or both produced by other external bodies including Subcontractors. The
Contractor shall submit such reference documents, which shall complement the
MQMP, for the Engineer’s review. If these are planned for separate submission,
it shall be stated accordingly in the MQMP.


The processes detailed in the MQMP shall refer to relevant Inspection and Test
Plans, for possible controls and check points. The ITPs shall ensure
identification or referencing procedures for the traceability of manufactured
items.
In addition to inspection and testing by the Contractor, the Engineer and the
Employer may, at their own cost, delegate their representative or an independent
inspection agency for the supervision, monitoring, inspection and testing of raw
materials and manufacturing processes at the manufacturing facility(ies). To
facilitate such an inspection, the Contractor shall provide a detailed
manufacturing plan and timeline at least six weeks in advance of the date
planned for the commencement of the manufacturing process so that the
Employer’s delegate is able to participate in the inspection along with the
Employer and Engineer. These plans and timeline shall include the description
of mandatory specifications and tests proposed during the manufacturing
process and the tests intended to be conducted on the finished product along
with specified permissible tolerances.
Nonconformity of Manufacturing
The MQMP shall detail or shall refer to the control procedures to be used for the
nonconforming product encountered off-site. The Contractor’s construction and
production departments shall be responsible for ensuring compliance to establish
corrective actions.
Procurement Quality Management Plan (PQMP)
General
The Contractor may submit a PQMP separately. It shall detail the quality
management plan for procurement of any Plant, other major items of Goods
(except those manufactured by it) and their transportation to the delivery places
under the Contract.
The Contractor shall specify the criteria for the evaluation, selection,
performance monitoring and re-evaluation of external providers in the PQMP.
The Contractor shall keep documented information of such activities and of any
actions arising from the evaluations.
The PQMP shall be developed in line with the requirement of Clause 1 and
quality policy (see Sub-Clause 2.3) by the Contractor’s Representative; and
shall, without limitation, specify the following:
Organisation, of the Contractor’s procurement department, in accordance
with the requirements of Sub-Clause 2.4 [Organisation]. It shall also refer
to any other information that the WQMP has defined;
quality objectives, in accordance with the requirements of Sub-Clause 2.5
[ Quality Objectives], for carrying out procurement activities required to
execute the Works in compliance with the Specification and Conditions of

Contract. The PQMP may be cross-referenced with any relevant parts of the
WQMP;
support, in accordance with the requirements of Sub-Clause 2.7 [Support],
including the documentation for managing; monitoring and recording the
on-site receipt of general construction resources, such as construction
materials, personnel, works, services, and Contractor’s Equipment (e.g.
welding machine, NC drilling machine, distortion correction machine,
welding manipulators, and so on) at the places of the delivery; and
processes, in accordance with the requirements of Sub-Clause 2.8
[Operation].The PQMP shall particularly specify inputs from the
construction and manufacturing department (especially Plant and Materials
which have received the Engineer’s approval); coordination with
Interfacing Contractors; delivery of the procured items to the site and
manufacturing plants; the sequences and interactions to be applied to
manage, control and record the procurement of the Works.
The processes detailed in the PQMP shall refer to relevant Inspection and Test
Plans for possible controls and check points. The ITPs shall ensure that
procedures are in place for the monitoring and recording of the ordering,
delivery and acceptance of an item.
For the procurement of critical items, in addition to inspection and testing by
the Contractor, the Engineer and the Employer may, at its own cost, delegate
their representative or independent inspection agency for the supervision of the
processes and products at a production facility. To facilitate such an inspection,
the Contractor shall provide a detailed production plan and timeline sufficiently
in advance for the required logistics. These plans and timeline shall include a
description of the inspections and tests proposed to be conducted on the products
which have been ordered, along with their acceptance criteria.
Nonconformity of Procurement
The PQMP shall detail or shall refer to the control procedures to be used for the
nonconformities encountered in any procured item on-site before their acceptance.
The Contractor’s procurement department shall be responsible for ensuring
compliance to establish corrective actions.

General
Unless otherwise specified, all Plant (including components), Materials,
workmanship, construction and installations for the Works, shall meet the
specified standards. Where no such standard is specified, the standard shall be
developed and submitted to the Engineer for consent.
Unless otherwise specified, the Works shall not commence before obtaining the
Engineer’s response in the form of either a NONO or NONOC as specified in
Clause 3 of Sub-Division 03020 [Correspondence, Communications and
Submission] under the General Specifications. The Contractor shall comply with
the requirements specified or otherwise consented, which shall be one of the
criteria for these acceptances of the Works. Unless specified otherwise, the
Engineer shall send his response to submit within twenty-one (21) days.
The Engineer’s response to the Contractor’s submission for any Plant (including
components), Materials or workmanship shall not relieve the Contractor of any
of his responsibilities and liabilities under the Contract.
The Works shall be executed in a professional and workmanlike manner using
such Contractor’s Personnel and Contractor’s Equipment as are necessary to
achieve the requirements of the Contract and with due care in accordance with
the Safety Health and Environment (SHE) requirements of the Contract. The
workmanship shall attain the specified dimensions, lines, levels, alignment,
tolerances, finish, features, functions, performance, reliability, durability,
serviceability and aesthetics requirements.
The works shall be carried out by competent persons, who shall be subject to
evaluation by the Engineer, as specified in the Contract or if so directed. Persons
declared unsuitable by the Engineer for the intended works shall not be utilised
for those works and the Contractor shall ensure compliance with the Engineer’s
instructions.
Unless specified otherwise in the Contract, the Plant and Materials for the Works
shall be of the specified quality and new. The Plant and Materials shall have been
used in similar types of works or functions or both specified elsewhere in the
Contract; however, this requirement shall not apply where it is not specified so.
The Plant and Materials shall be transported, handled, stored and protected on the
workshop site or elsewhere in such manner as to prevent, shortages, damages and
deterioration. The Plant and Materials shall display the approval, and certification
or compliance information, wherever practicable, along with identification
information such as name plates, rating plates, labels and the like. Unless
otherwise specified in the Contract or approved by the Engineer, such information
shall be in the language of the Contract, easily readable, be placed at a prominent
position and be tamper-proof.

The Contractor shall plan its procurement with due expedition considering the
need for spares, lead time, training, shipping and transport, necessary clearances,
Make in India objective (if applicable), coordination and administration. The
Plant and Materials shall be made available sufficiently in advance at workshop
site taking into consideration the time required for the acceptance process on
receipt, as no Plant and Materials shall be incorporated into the Works until the
Engineer’s response in the form of either a NONO or NONOC has been obtained.
Contractor’s Submission Relating to Consent for Subcontractors
This clause shall apply to all Subcontractors.
In accordance with the Conditions of Contract, the Contractor is not required to
obtain the Engineer’s consent to any sub-contract for which the Subcontractor is
named in the Contract; however, the Engineer’s prior consent shall be obtained
to other proposed Subcontractor. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer
such details of any proposed Subcontractor as the Engineer may reasonably
require for review.
Before any such submission, the Contractor shall assess the Subcontractor’s
capability to carry out the part of the Works, manufacture or produce the
Materials or Plant of the same or similar type to that to be manufactured or
supplied for the Works. The Contractor shall prior to any submission, assess the
Plant and Materials to be supplied with regards to their compliance with the
Contract requirements, as applicable and specified elsewhere in the Contract.
The proposed manufacturers and suppliers shall have achieved a quality level of
the production output acceptable to the Engineer in their manufacturing of the
Material, or Plant of the same or similar type to that to be manufactured or
supplied for the Works.
Contractor’s Submissions Relating to Consent for Contractor’s Approach to
the Works under the Contract
The Contractor’s submission of the Works Quality Management Plan (WQMP)
including its subsidiaries (DQMP, SQMP, MQMP, and PQMP), Inspection and
Test Plans (ITP), Method Statements (MS), and Manufacturer’s Arrangements
(MA) in accordance with the Sub-Division 07010 [Quality Management] to be
consented by the Engineer shall include criteria for the workmanship to be applied
to the Works.
When the Contractor proposes to submit new materials or products or specialist
works or propriety items for the Engineer’s review, manufacturer’s
recommendations and specifications shall be assessed against the materials and
workmanship standards specified in the Contract and the most suitable solution
for the purpose shall be selected for submission. The Contractor shall then submit
to the Engineer the full specifications, together with a comparison with the
materials and workmanship standards for the Works and the required inspections
and tests.

Identification Labels on Equipment for Plant

Method Statements (MS) and Manufacturer’s Arrangements (MA) for Plant shall
include a labelling system in accordance with the asset identification in the Contract.
The Contractor shall make due allowance for the Engineer’s review period (at least
three (3) months before the planned delivery date to workshop site of the shipment
of the first individual item of equipment forming part of the Plant) in the submission
of MS and/or MA. ‘Individual item of equipment’ refers to a complete assembly of
components and to each removable sub-module within a complete assembly. Each
identification label in the labelling system shall:
be permanent,
not become detached or illegible during the lifetime of Plant from any cause
including wear, tear, environmental effects (such as rain, direct sunlight, etc.),
or any other influence, and
be easily cleaned to remove dirt and debris (including grease and oil) without
affecting its legibility.
Contractor’s Submissions Relating to Approval for Plant and Materials
Unless otherwise stated in the Contract, the Employer shall make no Employer’s
Equipment available for the use of the Contractor in the execution of the Works, and
supply no “free issue materials”. The technical and other documents relating to Plant
and Materials which the Contractor is required to submit to the Engineer for approval
shall include, but not limited to, the following:
a review by the Contractor of the Contract requirements and compliance listings,
showing in a simple tabulated form a list of all the pertinent Contract
requirements compared with the properties and, specifications for the proposed
item, indicating if compliant or non-compliant for each,
all relevant details along with manufacturer’s original brochures, specifications
and certificates,
the ITP and the results of latest testing to demonstrate compliance with the
Contract,
the Manufacturer’s Certificate (controlled copy of the certificate by the
manufacturer or supplier may be substituted if the original cannot be obtained)
which the Contractor intends to utilise for its acceptance and quality control in
the ITP,
a letter to the Contractor with the official seal of the manufacturer or supplier,
stating that the Manufacturer’s Certificate (if any) regarding the material to be
delivered to the workshop site,
competent samples as applicable,
shop drawings and coordination drawings, as applicable,
sample of manufacturer’s guarantee or warranty statement,
programme and methodology for any related factory and on-site tests proposed,

spare parts list with interchangeability record and list of consumables including
Indian equivalent and tools,
list and details of entities capable of providing maintenance and repair services
and supply spare parts, consumables and tools, as applicable, and
any other requirement, as specified in the Contract.
Mineral Resources (Not applicable for this Package)
The mineral resources (such as coarse aggregates, fine aggregates, sand, gravel
etc.) to be used in the Works shall be approved by the Engineer before their use
in the Work.
The Contractor shall explore possible mineral resources with reference to the
Specification and Conditions of Contract, including the quantities required and
the programme of the Works and propose the potentiality of resources to the
Engineer along with its priorities.
The Engineer shall confirm a suitable time for a joint visit with the Contractor
for assessment of the proposed resource(s), and to witness the taking of samples
of the proposed raw and processed materials from the proposed quarry.
The samples taken shall be sent to approved laboratories for testing which, may
be witnessed by the Engineer, as per the relevant applicable specifications and
requirements in the Contract. Sealed laboratory test reports shall be sent to the
Engineer for review, with a copy to the Contractor.
The Contractor shall be responsible for all administrative and compliance
requirements in accordance with the applicable Laws related to obtaining the
materials from the approved source(s).
Material Substitution in the Plant Submission
Where the Technical Specifications permit that the materials for inclusion in the
Plant may be substituted by other materials; the Contractor shall carry out its design
to make allowance for the substituted materials. In such case, the submission for the
Plant shall include the substituted materials, if required, by means of its trade or
proprietary names. The Engineer shall review the information and issue its response
for the submission.
Contractor’s Submissions Related to Approval for Laboratories
General
The Contractor shall be responsible for all on-site and off-site testing including any
in-situ testing that is required. Both the calibration of testing equipment and the
testing of Plant and Materials shall be carried out in approved and competent
laboratories, details of which shall, prior to their commissioning, be submitted to the
Engineer for approval. The requirements for such laboratories shall include, but is
not limited to, the following:
shall be a legal entity, except for Laboratory at workshop site, and be accredited
to carry out each test specified in the Contract, or be approved by the Engineer
to carry out each test in which the entity is not accredited,

maintain a management system appropriate to the scope of its activities,

cooperate in clarifying any requests and in monitoring its performance in
relation to the works performed,
have a system for managing and resolving complaints, including any made in
regard to any aspect of its testing and calibration works which do not conform
to its own procedures or the agreed requirements,
retain records of original observations and a copy of each test report or
calibration certificate issued, for a defined period and; include the identity of
personnel responsible for the sampling, performance of each test, calibration
and checking of results,
ensure the competence of all who operate specific equipment, perform tests, and
calibrations, evaluate results, and sign test reports and calibration certificates,
have equipment, environmental conditions and facilities for testing and
calibration, to facilitate correct performance of the tests and calibrations,
have restricted access and use of areas affecting the quality of the tests and/or
calibrations,
propose alternatives where no standard method is applicable to the tests and
calibrations,
use calibrated equipment along with programme and procedure for the
calibration of its equipment,
ensure that calibrations and measurements made by the laboratory are traceable
to the National or International System of Units (SI),
report the results accurately, clearly, unambiguously and objectively, and in
accordance with any specific instructions in the test or calibration methods,
report results, usually in a test report or a calibration certificate that include all
the information requested and that is necessary for the interpretation of the test
or calibration results and all information required by the method used,
document the basis for any opinions and interpretations given, and
transmit test or calibration results by telephone, email, facsimile, courier or other
means also where so requested.
On-Site Laboratory
Material Testing Laboratory at each workshop site shall be established by the
Contractor to carry out the tests specified in the Contract. Unless otherwise
specified, the Contractor shall establish the Laboratory at each workshop site in
accordance with Sub-Division 06040 [Temporary Facilities of Contractor] of
the General Specification, or may organise his testing resources (including
apparatus, assistance, documents and other information, electricity, equipment,
fuel, consumable, instruments, labour, material and suitable qualified and
experienced staff) as the Laboratory at workshop site.
The location of the laboratory shall be within or near the Contractor’s workshop
site and such location shall be subject to the consent of the Engineer.

Within fifty six (56) days after the Commencement Date, in accordance with the
requirements of Sub-Clause 5.1 [General] and having due regard to the matters
described below, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval details
of any Laboratory at workshop site to be provided. In the provision of an
Laboratory at workshop site, matters to be considered by the Contractor shall
include, but not are limited to, the following:
the detailed and overall inspection and testing requirements and plan,
the various categories of testing and adequacy of layout and size of working
areas,
standards of construction considering the quality and Safety Health and
Environment (SHE) requirements,
infrastructure requirements such as equipment, electrical power,
furnishings and fixtures, and
the competency requirements for the personnel.
Independent Laboratory
Within fifty-six (56) days after for the Commencement Date, in accordance with
requirements of Sub-Clause 5.1 [General] and having due regard to the matters
described below, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval details
of any Independent Laboratory to be used.
The proposed laboratory shall be independent and impartial and shall implement
a system to ensure that information related to the Work remains confidential.
Off-Shore Independent Laboratory
Within fifty-six (56) days after for the Commencement Date, in accordance with
the requirements of Sub-Clause 5.1 [General] and having due regard to the
matters detailed below, the Contractor shall propose to the Engineer for approval
of any Off-Shore Independent Laboratory to be used. Any such laboratory shall
also meet the requirements of Sub-Clause 5.1 [General] and have accreditation
at the country of origin or international accreditation for the services offered.
The location shall have ease of access, in terms of legal or regulatory access and
also logistics. Any such laboratory shall have no objection to any
representative(s) of the Employer, the Engineer or any other third party’s
independent agency attending at the said laboratory to witness or inspect any
inspection or test being carried out in connection with the Works.
Contractor’s Submissions Related to Consent for Procurement of Plant and
Materials
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval a procurement timeline
for the approved Plant and major items of other Goods to be procured from
eligible source countries, including Country and/or domestic market to the
Engineer for approval. The Engineer will lay down a detailed approval procedure
to be followed by the Contractor.

The procurement timeline shall include the name of the Plant and/or Materials,
source country, name and address of the supplier, planned dates of shipping (ex-
factory) and arrival on the Site, locations of storage place and other information
as appropriate.
The procurement timeline shall be compatible with the Contractual Works
Programme and the Work Segmental Programmes submitted by the Contractor in
accordance with Sub-Division 04070 [Works Programme and Schedule] of the
General Specifications.
The monthly procurement status of the procurement timeline shall also be
included in the Monthly Progress Report to be submitted to the Engineer in
accordance with Sub-Division 04080 [Monthly Progress Report Requirement] of
Records of procurement such as each certificate for Plant and major items of other
Goods, all reports (to comply with the Contract) of inspection and/or tests by the
manufacturer or supplier, names and address of manufacturers, suppliers or
vendors, and proofs of purchase for Plant and Materials shall be kept in the
custody and care of the Contractor.
Substitution of Plant or Materials
Notwithstanding any Contractor’s Technical Proposal in their Bid for Plant and
Materials to be incorporated into the Works, or any subsequent approval by the
Engineer for any such items, the Engineer shall have the right to instruct the
Contractor, without any extra cost or impact to Programme or Time for
Completion, to substitute any such items that the Engineer, upon subsequent
examination, considers not to comply with the requirements of the Contract.
In exceptional circumstances acceptable to the Engineer, the Contractor may be
allowed to the proposed substitution of Plant and/or Materials named in the
Contract or included in the Specification or which have previously received the
Engineer’s approval, if they are equal to or better than the Plant and Material so
named, included or approved, and there is no additional cost to the Employer or
impact to the Programme and Time for Completion.
In the above circumstances, the Contractor shall submit his proposal to the
Engineer in a timely manner, together with samples where necessary, including a
full and detailed explanation of the reason(s) for such substitution and a
description of the advantages or benefits to the Employer. The proposal shall
include full documentary evidence showing clearly the substitute product equals
or is better in all respects to the Plant and/or Materials so named, included or
approved to.
Any proposal for substitution must also include review and proposals for
substitution of all other related or affected parts of the Works, and any
modification(s) that are necessary to make them compatible with the proposed
substitute Plant and Materials. This shall be supported with evidence of
equivalent durability, functionality and appearance of the Works as a whole. If

such substitution has received the Engineer’s consent, and before ordering any
such substitute Plant and Materials, the Contractor shall provide revised design,
shop and coordination drawings, specifications and manufacturer’s guarantees as
per the submission criteria specified in the Contract, for review and consent by
the Engineer.
Delivery of Plant and Materials to the Site/ workshop site
If Sub-Clause 14.5 [Plant and Materials intended for the Works] of the General
Conditions of Contract applies, the records of the Plant and Materials kept by the
Contractor in accordance with Sub-Clause 14.5(a) (i) shall be in such a form as is
acceptable to the Engineer. The Contractor shall include all such records in its
Statement.
Samples and Mock-Ups
Samples
The Contractor shall submit manufacturer’s standard samples for Plant and
Materials and those samples that are specified in the Contract, all (including
transportation) at the Contractor’s cost. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract,
the Contractor shall provide a minimum of two (2) samples to be submitted to
the Engineer for information or consent. Following the Engineer’s review, both
shall be marked to indicate the review status and one shall be retained by the
Engineer and one shall be retained on the workshop site in the custody and care
of the Contractor.
The Contractor shall propose quantity of the samples, in the submission, to be
reverted that those samples are available on each workshop site where the
Engineer would reasonably access it for reference. If the Engineer is of the
opinion that the Contractor’s proposal does not include sufficient number of
samples such as would ensure reasonable access, the Engineer may, at his sole
discretion, request the Contractor to provide additional samples all at the
Contractor’s cost.
Each sample shall have an identification label affixed, indicating the Contract
reference number, name of the item (including its submittal reference), the
referenced Drawing numbers, Specifications (Division - Sub-Division - clause),
the manufacturer’s name, the model number, brand name, supplier’s name, and
any other relevant data.
The Engineer may, at his sole discretion, reject any materials and goods which
are inferior to the reference samples which have previously received his consent
on the submission by the Contractor. The Contractor shall promptly remove any
such materials and goods from the site and promptly provide replacements
complying with the reference samples.
Constructional Mock-Ups/Test-Fabrication
The Contractor shall construct, fabricate, maintain, and remove (all at his cost)
any mock-ups that are specified in the Contract. The Contractor shall maintain

any such mock-ups in his custody and care until their removal is directed by the
Engineer.
The Contractor shall, sufficiently in advance of the planned commencement date
of subject part of the Permanent Works, be required to demonstrate his proposed
standard of workmanship through the provision of mock-ups (of sufficient size
as to permit the Engineer to observe constructability and appearance of the
subject part) for various civil and building works, such as plastering, tiling,
painting, and other specified items in the Contract, all as may be reasonably
instructed and consented by the Engineer. Where the Engineer has issued his
approval, a mock-up to be used as reference for the Permanent Works may be
constructed or installed as part of the Permanent Works acceptable. Any such
mock-ups may be termed as the reference mock-ups. Any such mock-ups which
have received the Engineer’s consent shall be deemed to indicate the minimum
acceptable level of workmanship and/or appearance for the respective part(s) of
the Works.
A minimum of twenty-one (21) days before the start of the subject Works, the
Contractor shall submit a Method Statement for the construction/fabrication or
installation of the mock-up(s). The programme shall be fully in compliance with
the Contractual Works Programme and the Work Segment Programmes. The
timeline of provision for mock-up(s) shall be updated as the case may be. The
Contractor shall offer Test-fabrication to the Engineer for Inspection within
eighty-four (84) days of the Commencement Date.
Subsequent to the Engineer’s issue of consent to a mock-up, the subject Plant,
Materials and part(s) of the Permanent Works, shall be delivered to the Site/
workshop site and/or executed/fabricated in conformity with the said mock-
up(s).
Execution of Inspection and Test Plan (ITP)
The Engineer shall have the right, at any time, to inspect the manufacturing of
any Plant and Materials at the manufacturer’s facilities.
Inspection and testing shall be carried out in accordance with the Inspection and
Test Plan (ITP) which has received the Engineer’s consent. The ITP shall be
prepared in accordance with the requirements of Sub-Division 07010 [Quality
Management] of the General Specifications and the Works Quality Management
Plan which has received the Engineer’s consent.
The ITP, amongst other information, shall also specify such Manufacturer’s
Certificate(s) as the Contractor intends to issue for acceptance without further
confirmatory testing.
Following the completion of a test or inspection, the Contractor shall promptly
forward the results to the Engineer for endorsement, using the consented forms
and formats in the ITP, duly completed and certified. If Sub-Clause 14.5 of the
Conditions of Contract applies, the Plant and Materials records kept by the
Contractor shall include the relevant inspection and test records.

Inspection and testing carried out by an approved Independent Laboratory or Off-

Shore Independent Laboratory or both shall be effectively coordinated by the
Contractor, taking into consideration the programme for the Works. The
requirements for the Contractor’s submission relating to laboratories shall be
taken up in accordance with the provisions of Sub-Clause 5 [Contractor’s
Submissions Relating to Approval for Laboratories].
Request for Inspection (RFI)
The Contractor shall give an RFI to the Engineer whenever any parts of the Works
are ready for inspection and test at the stages so designated in the Method
Statements (MS) or Manufacturer’s Arrangements (MA) or Inspection and Test
Plans (ITP) which have received the Engineer’s consent.
The RFI format shall either be that specified in the Contract, or if none is specified
therein, the format which has been proposed by the Contractor and consented by
the Engineer.
Each MS, MA, and ITP shall indicate the timing to issue each RFI as the
Contractor’s advance notice to the Engineer which, unless specified otherwise in
the Contract, shall be not less than 48 hours after its receipt it by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall preferably give the Engineer notice of weekly schedule of
RFIs in which the procedure shall be agreed with the Engineer, and then report
the updated RFI status in each Monthly Progress Report.
The Engineer shall, unless specified otherwise elsewhere in the Contract, give the
Contractor not less than 24 hour notice of his intention to attend an inspection or
test. The Contractor shall provide the necessary facilities, access, and
arrangement of any specific permissions and resources that are required for the
Engineer to carry out any requested inspection or witnessing of any test.
Coordination of Plant and Materials Installed/supplied by Interfacing
Contractors
Not Used
Rejection and Remedial Works
If as a result of any inspection, examination or test, any Plant, Materials or
workmanship is found to be defective or otherwise not in accordance with the
requirements of the Contract, the Contractor shall promptly forward to the
Engineer the relevant test report(s) in the forms and formats required by the
related ITPs.
The Engineer may notify the Contractor that retests are required or reject such
defective or non-compliant Plant, Materials and/or works after receiving the
above-referenced test reports. The Contractor shall propose rectification
procedures for the Engineer’s consent, including any Method Statements or
Manufacturer’s Arrangements that are required. Rectification works shall not
commence before the Engineer’s consent has been obtained to the Contractor’s
rectification proposals. Upon the Engineer’s acceptance of the rectification
proposal and following completion of the rectification works, the tests required

by the Contractor shall be repeated under the same terms and conditions. Unless
otherwise accepted by the Engineer, all inspection and testing shall be performed
by an approved external testing laboratory or Laboratory at workshop site.
In the event that the Engineer’s response to the above rectification proposal is
NOO or the Contractor fails to provide any rectification procedures, the Engineer
may instruct the Contractor to comply with the provisions of Sub-Clause 7.6
[Remedial Work] of the Conditions of Contract.
The Engineer may notify the Contractor of any such nonconformity as described
above by issuing a Nonconformity Report, In the event of receipt of such a
Nonconformity Report, the Contractor shall proceed to close out such
nonconformity in accordance with the provisions of their Works Quality
Management Plan which has received the Engineer’s consent.
Spares, Special Tools and Consumables
Not Used

General
The Contractor shall submit the necessary Contractor’s Documents for Inspection
and Test on Completion in accordance with the requirements of the Contract. The
Contractor shall have received a “Notice of No Objection” response from the
Engineer before commencement of the Inspection and Test on Completion.
The Contractor shall propose ITP for Test on Completion at Proposal Phase in
accordance with the Contract within fifty-six (56) days after the Commencement
Date.
The Contractor shall also submit ITP for Test on Completion at Submittal Phase
in accordance with the Contract not less than fifty-six (56) days in advance of the
date from which the Contractor will be ready to carry out each of the Inspection
and Test on Completion.
Each Contractor’s application for a Taking-Over Certificate issued in accordance
with Clause 10 [Employer’s Taking Over] and application for issue of the
Milestone Certificate as per of the Conditions of Contract shall include, for each
Test on Completion, a certified report of the results of these inspections and tests
detailed in the ITP.
Contractors Documents for Test on Completion
As-built documents along with the test results at various stages of Procurement,
Fabrication, Check-assembly and Painting shall be in accordance with the
requirements of Division 05000 [Contractor’s Drawings] of the General
Specifications.
ITP for Test on Completion
Additional requirements
In addition to the requirements for ITPs in Sub-Division 07010 [Quality Management]
the following requirements shall also be applied.
If the Works are divided into Sections, the ITP for the Test on Completion may
be separated into the Inspection and Tests required for each Section.
The ITP for the Test on Completion may refer to other ITPs and the Engineer’s
endorsement the Contractor’s certified results of ITPs.
The Contractor shall clearly designate the location and expected duration for the
Inspection and Test on Completion. If the Inspection and Test on Completion
are conducted outside the Country, all costs and expenses for accommodation,
travel and the services for the Employer shall be borne by the Employer and the
same for the Engineer shall be borne by the Contractor.
The ITP for the Test on Completion shall include an evaluation procedure for
the related As-Built documents and test results.

Proposal and Submittal Phase

ITP for Test on Completion shall have two phases. Firstly, a proposal phase for
review by the Engineer to declare the Contractor’s intention for execution of the
Works, and then a submittal phase for consent by the Engineer to execute the
Works.
ITP for Test on Completion at Proposal Phase shall identify in it any other ITPs
that are related to it. The Engineer shall review the proposal and those other
ITPs referred in it.
The ITP for Test on Completion at Proposal Phase can be revised till the
submittal phase sets in and actioned as set out in item 3) of Clause 1 above.
The Contractor shall give to the Engineer notice of the date after which the
Contractor will be ready to carry out each of the Inspection and Test on
Completion.
The ITP for Test on Completion at Submittal Phase must have the Engineer’s
Notice of No Objection before the date mentioned in the above notice otherwise
it shall be considered as the failure of the Contractor for Test on Completion.
Execution of Test on Completion
Test on completion consist of the Static Inspection and testing as per prescribed in
Sub-Division 04120 [Taking Over of the Works or Sections] of General
Specifications (GS) and examining the test reports for the test prescribed at various
stages of the Work as described in the Sub-Clauses of Technical Specifications (TS)
given below:
1) Sub-Clause 2.1.6 [Inspection and testing of material],
2) Sub-Clause 2.4.6.5.4 [Welding of stud shear connectors],
3) Sub-Clause 2.4.7 [Inspection and Testing of fabrication works],
4) Sub-Clause 2.5 [Check-assembly],
5) Sub-Clause 2.6.6 [Inspection and Testing for painting],
6) Sub-Clause 3.1.4 [Acceptance of Bearings] and
7) Sub-Clause 3.2.4 [Acceptance of Bearings]
All the references mentioned above shall also apply to completion of Milestones.
As soon as the Works, or a Section, have passed any Inspection and Test on
Completion, the Contractor shall submit a certified report of the results of these Tests
in accordance with the Engineer’s consented ITP for Test on Completion at
Submittal Phase.
Tests After Completion
Not Used

Table of Contents
08010 General Requirements of Safety, Health and Environment (SHE) ············ 190
General ................................................................................................................190
08020 Safety and Health ········································································· 191
Contractor’s Obligation .......................................................................................191
Site SHE Management Plan ................................................................................191
SHE Management Manual ..................................................................................193
SHE Facilities and Equipment ............................................................................193
08030 Staff and Labour ·········································································· 194
Engagement of Staff and Labour ........................................................................194
Rates of Wages and Conditions of Labour .........................................................194
Persons in the Service/Retired of the Employer/Engineer ..................................194
Labour Laws........................................................................................................194
Working Hours ....................................................................................................195
Facilities for Staff and Labour ............................................................................195
Safety and Occupational Health ..........................................................................195
Contractor’s Superintendence .............................................................................195
Provision of Efficient and Competent Staff ........................................................195
Preservation of Peace and Orderly Conduct .......................................................196
Labour to be Contractor’s Employee ..................................................................196
Report of Accidents to Staff and Labour ............................................................196
Claim on Account of Violation of Labour Laws ................................................196
08040 Environment ··············································································· 198
General ................................................................................................................198
Environmental Management Plan: Background .................................................199
Frameworks for Environmental Management ....................................................199
Enforcement of Mitigation Measures..................................................................199
Monitoring and Reporting ...................................................................................200
08050 Publicity and Public Relations ························································· 201

General ................................................................................................................201
Stakeholder Consultation (If required)................................................................201
Grievance Redress Mechanism ...........................................................................201
APPENDIX
08000-1 Safety Occupational Health And Environment Management

General
The Contractor shall be wholly and solely responsible for Safety, Health and
Environment (SHE) on the fabrication-workshop and any other areas being used
by him for the purposes of the Contract. The Contractor shall ensure that all
appropriate SHE protection measures are implemented throughout the execution
of the Works. The Contractor's attention is drawn to the relevant provisions
regarding SHE in the Contract Documents.
Attention shall be paid to the HIV-AIDS Prevention requirements set out in
Appendix- 08000-1 [Attachment-2] of the General Specifications. Costs for all
necessary measures in Division 08000[Safety, Health and Environmental
Management Plan] and Appendix-08000-1[Safety, Occupational Health and
Environmental Management Manual] shall be deemed to have been included in
the Accepted Contract Amount.

Contractor’s Obligation
Within twenty-eight (28) days of receipt of the Letter of Acceptance, but not later
than the Commencement Date, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the
Employer/Engineer for Notice of No Objection a SHE Management Plan fully
complying with not only the relevant applicable latest Laws of Lands but also the
regulations of the Employer which may be imposed from time to time on the
Project. It is to be noted that the Employer (or the Engineer on its behalf) be
entitled to amend Safety and Health related terms and conditions and the same
shall be binding on the Contractor to implement without any financial claim from
the Contractor to the Employer.
The SHE Management Plan shall contain adequate control measures and
procedures, in accordance with the relevant applicable latest Laws of Lands and
the Employer-imposed regulations as per Conditions of Contract, SHE
Management Manual attached as Appendix 08000-1, State BOCW Acts and
Rules, Indian Electricity Acts and Rules, BS:6164: 2011 and other applicable
latest Indian Legislations, whichever is more stringent, as well as internationally
accepted good practice, for the prevention of contamination, food poisoning,
epidemics, diseases, accidents, fires and public nuisance. The SHE Management
Plan shall be implemented by the Contractor and the Subcontractor properly and
diligently throughout the execution of the Works.
The Contractor is required to prepare method statement for each activity. The
method statement is required to cover the Hazard Identification and Risk
Assessment in detail obtaining approval from the Engineer.
The Contractor shall identify the SHE requirements related to each activity
planned and, in advance the Contractor will arrange the required safety gears and
equipment, to control the hazards and obtain the relevant licenses, permissions
and fulfil the construction machine/equipment safety requirements.
All accidents and dangerous occurrences must be investigated by the Contractor.
On all such occurrences, the Contractor convene all the persons involved
including workers and carry out re-induction about safety for half a day. In case
a stop order is issued by the Engineer, the Contractor shall not resume the Works
until the corrective action’s compliance is accepted/approved issued by the
Employer/Engineer.
Site SHE Management Plan
The SHE Management Plan shall have approval from the Engineer. The Plan shall
be made in accordance with the latest amendments/revisions/Clauses as
applicable, as per The Maharashtra BOCW Rules 2007; The Gujarat BOCW Act
2003; ISO 45001:2018; ISO 14001: 2015; Bureau of Indian Standard
Specifications; National Building Codes and BS 6164: 2011, whichever is more
stringent The Contractor’s SHE Management Plan shall address the following:

The Contractor’s SHE Management Policy;

The Contractor’s SHE Management Organization plan (Roles,
Responsibilities and Powers of key members of the SHE Organization);
Compulsory Safety Induction Training, Job Specific Safety Training, the
Contractors’ Engineers training as per Appendix 08000-1 (SHE
Management Manual);
Applicable Laws of the land;
Enforcement of health and safety regulations;
System of warnings;
Weekly, monthly and tool-box meetings;
Safety and health management reports including accident reports &
statistics and investigation procedure;
Corrective measures to improve unhealthy/unsafe conditions;
Waste Management plan;
Accident prevention signs and notices;
Safety and health audits and inspection;
Permits for work in dangerous or restricted work areas;
Safety gears and protective equipment;
Emergency procedures;
First aid medical facilities and occupational health centre;
Traffic control including signalling and barricading;
Visitors/guests permit and control;
Fire prevention and fire-fighting;
Electricity leakage, and electric shock;
Oxygen/Acetylene/Fuel gases;
Deep boring with hydraulic rigs, excavation and trench shoring;
Excavation near underground utilities if any;
Operations in confined spaces;
Operations in or under water if any;
Guard-railing, Hand-railing, Barricading and Opening Protecting;
Scaffolding and Staging and Fall protection if any;
Elevated Work including roofing and structural steel erection if any;
Craning and Hoisting – Testing, ASLI calibration, Trained lifting
supervisor and rigger;
Handling and Storing of Toxic Paints, explosive and blasting material,
Harmful Chemical Material with (MSDS), Flammable Material;
Hazard Identification and Risk Assessment;
Housekeeping;
Safety of Public & Public Property nearby Work Place;
Provision of Identity Card for Workers & Supervisors
SHE Committee management;

Accident Investigation and Reporting Procedures;

Project Site and Labour Colony Hygiene, Living, Water Supply, Sanitation
and Fumigation to control insects; and
SHE Submission of Contractor: Monthly SHE Report as asked by the
Engineer including SHE Statistics, Audit & Inspection Report, SHE
Committee Minutes, Monthly Electrical Safety Audit Report. Management
Audit Rating Score Report and Closing Report of the Engineer.
The Chief SHE Officer shall be responsible for fully implementing the SHE
Management Plan.
The Contractor shall ensure that the Contractor’s Personnel on the
Site/fabrication-workshop are all fully aware of and trained in the SHE practices
set out in the SHE Management Plan.
SHE Management Manual
The Contractor shall submit the SHE Management Plan for all the above-mentioned
items complying with Appendix 08000-1 SHE Management Manual.
SHE Facilities and Equipment
The Contractor shall provide, operate and maintain the first aid facilities as
needed to fully comply with the health and safety requirements. Maintenance of
the first aid facilities shall include supply of appropriate disinfectants, medicines,
bandages, equipment, transportation and nurses as may be required, to treat types
of injury and sickness that would usually be expected on the construction site of
similar projects. The Contractor shall display clearly at the first aid stations the
location and directions to the nearest hospital or medical centre where first-aided
patients can be sent, in accordance with the latest Gujarat BOCW Acts 1996,
amended in 2003 and the latest Maharashtra BOCW Rules 2007.
The Contractor shall provide all guests and visitors on the Site/fabrication-
workshop with appropriate safety gears and protective clothing including hard
hats with chin strap, retro-reflective jacket and safety shoes, and make sure that
the safety gears and protective clothing are worn by them while they are on the
Site/fabrication-workshop. No shoes other than proper safety shoes will be
allowed on the Site/fabrication-workshop. All safety helmets shall bear the
sticker by which the category of the person, wearing it, could be identified.
The Contractor shall provide all his staff and the labour on the Site/fabrication-
workshop with appropriate safety gears and protective clothing including hard
hats with chin strap, retro-reflective jacket and safety shoes, any other job specific
safety gears, personal protective equipment (PPE) and make sure that the safety
gears and protective clothing are worn by them while they are on the
Site/fabrication-workshop. No shoes other than proper safety shoes will be
allowed on the Site/fabrication-workshop. The Contractor shall give and ensure
that his labour and staff using PPE/Safety Gears have got awareness training
related to handling and usage of PPE/Safety Gears.

Engagement of Staff and Labour

The Contractor shall make his own arrangements for the engagement of staff and
labour at his own cost.
Rates of Wages and Conditions of Labour
Apart from compliance of statutory requirements apart, the Contractor shall pay
rates of wages and observe conditions of labour not less favourable than those
established for the trade or the industry where the work is carried out.
In the event of default being made in the payment of any money in respect of
wages of any person employed by the Contractor or any of his subcontractors of
any tier in and for execution of this contract and if a claim therefore is filed in the
office of the Labour Authorities and proof thereof is furnished to the satisfaction
of the Labour Authorities, the Employer may, failing payment of the said money
by the Contractor, make payment of such claim on behalf of the Contractor to the
said Labour Authorities and any sums so paid shall be recoverable by the
Employer from the Contractor.
Persons in the Service/Retired of the Employer/Engineer
The Contractor shall not recruit or attempt to recruit, staff and labour from
amongst the Employer's and the Engineer’s personnel.
The Contractor either at the bidding stage or during construction stage shall not
employ any retired employee of the Employer or that of the Engineer in any
capacity unless such employee has completed at least one year post retirement
period or has obtained the No Objection Certificate from the Employer for being
employed with the Contractor. It will be responsibility of the Contractor to collect
the Employer’s No Objection Certificate from such retired employee and submit
the same to the Employer.
Labour Laws
In dealing with labour and employee, the Contractors and his subcontractors
(including piece rate and petty contractors) shall comply fully with all the latest
laws and statutory regulations pertaining to engagement, payment and upkeep of
the labour in India.
The Contractor shall have a labour welfare organization headed by a Labour
Welfare Officer (qualified as per the state BOCW Acts). The Contractors’ project
manager and the LWO shall be responsible for labour welfare and compliance
with prevalent labour laws, statutes and guidelines. In this context, the Contractor
is also required to familiarize himself with the latest Labour Welfare Fund Rules
and comply with the same.
The Contractor shall prepare and submit compliance reports of adherence to
labour laws as and when desired by the Employer/Engineer.

Working Hours
The Contractor, if required, shall carry out work during night hours or in shift, unless
specifically provided otherwise in the Contract. No increase in rates or extra payments
shall be admissible for night work other than the contract. The Contractor shall
provide adequate lighting and safety arrangements.
Facilities for Staff and Labour
The Contractor shall provide and maintain at his own expense, all necessary
accommodation and welfare facilities as per prevailing labour and welfare laws for
his (and his subcontractor’s) staff and labour. All accommodation shall be maintained
in a clean and sanitary condition by the Contractor.
Safety and Occupational Health
Precaution shall be taken by the Contractor to ensure the safety and occupational
health of his staff and labour. The Contractor shall ensure that medical staff, first
aid facilities, sick bay and ambulance service are always available at the
accommodation and on the Site/fabrication- workshop always, and that suitable
arrangements are made for all necessary welfare and hygiene requirements and
for the prevention of epidemics.
The Contractor shall maintain records and make reports concerning safety,
occupational health and welfare of persons, and damage to property, as per the
Employer/Engineer’s requirement. The Contractor's SHE Management Plan shall
be developed from his outline safety plan as per the Works Requirements.
The Contractor shall appoint a member of his staff at the Site/fabrication-
workshop to be responsible for maintaining the safety, and protection of
personnel against accidents, of personnel on the Site/fabrication-workshop. This
person shall be qualified for his work and shall have the authority to issue
instructions and take protective measures to prevent accidents.
Contractor’s Superintendence
The Contractor shall provide all necessary superintendence during execution of the
Works, and as long thereafter as the Engineer may consider necessary for the proper
fulfilling of the Contractor's obligations under the Contract. Such superintendence
shall be provided by sufficient persons having adequate knowledge of the operations
to be carried out (including the methods and techniques required, the hazards likely to
be encountered and methods of preventing accidents) for the satisfactory and safe
execution of the Works.
Provision of Efficient and Competent Staff
The Contractor shall employ (or cause to be employed) only persons who are careful
and appropriately qualified, skilled and experienced in their respective trades or
occupations. The Employer/Engineer can instruct the Contractor to remove (or cause
to be removed) any person employed on the Site/fabrication-workshop or the Works,

including the Contractor's Representative, who in the opinion of the

Employer/Engineer:
Persists in any misconduct;
Is incompetent or negligent in the performance of his duties; and
Fails to conform to any provisions of the Contract or persists in any conduct
which is prejudicial to safety, health, or the protection of the environment.
Preservation of Peace and Orderly Conduct
The Contractor shall be responsible for preservation of peace and orderly conduct
at the Site/fabrication-workshop and its neighbourhood by the Contractor’s
employees, representatives, petty contractors, subcontractors etc. In case,
deployment of a special police force becomes necessary at or near the
Site/fabrication-workshop, during the tenure of the Works, the expenses for the
same shall be borne by the Contractor.
The Contractor shall always take all reasonable precautions which will include
that no labour or employee is permitted to work at the Site/fabrication-workshop
under the influence of alcohol ,an intoxicated state or under influence of drugs, to
prevent any unlawful, riotous or disorderly conduct by or amongst his staff and
labour, and to preserve peace and protection of persons and property in the
neighbourhood of the Works against such conduct.
Labour to be Contractor’s Employee
If the Contractor directly or through petty contractors or subcontractors supplies any
labour to be used wholly or partly under the direct orders and control of the Engineer,
whether regarding any work being executed by the Contractor or otherwise for the
purposes of the Employer, such labour shall, for this clause, be deemed to be persons
employed by the Contractor.
Report of Accidents to Staff and Labour
The Contractor shall be responsible for safety of all persons, employed by him on
the Works, directly or through petty contractors or subcontractors, and shall report
accidents to any of them, however, and wherever occurring on the Works, to the
Engineer or the Engineer’s Representative, and shall make every arrangement to
render all possible assistance and to provide prompt and proper medical attention
to the affected persons.
The compensation for affected workers or their relatives shall be paid by the
Contractor in such cases with utmost expedition in accordance with the latest
Workmen’s Compensation Act.
Claim on Account of Violation of Labour Laws
The Contractor shall be solely accountable for violation of any labour law by it,
its subcontractors (including petty contractors) and will pay any such
claim/damage to the authorities forthwith on demand. If any money shall, as a
result of any instructions, directions or decisions from the Authorities or claim or

application made under any of the labour laws or regulations, be directed to be

paid by the Employer, such money shall be deemed to be money payable to the
Employer by the Contractor and he will pay the same to the Employer forthwith
on demand, without demur and without asking for any reasons/explanations from
the Employer. On failure of the Contractor to repay the Employer any money
paid or to be paid by it as aforesaid within seven days after the same shall have
been demanded, the Employer shall be entitled to recover the amount from any
money due or accruing to the Contractor under this or any other contract with the
Employer.
Any violation (unsafe act or unsafe condition) of the SHE requirements as
mentioned above shall attract financial deductions to be withheld from the
Contractor as per the provisions of Clause 7 of Appendix 08000-1 of the General
Specification.

General
The Contractor shall avoid, minimize and mitigate, as per concerned laws and
regulations and practicable good practices, the adverse effects of all its and the
Subcontractors’ activities on the natural and social environment throughout the
execution of the Works. This project being a JICA loan project, the Works must
comply not only with regulatory requirements but also with the JICA guidelines
for environmental and social considerations, 2010.
(https://www.jica.go.jp/english/our_work/social_environmental/guideline/index.
html).
After the award of contract within the period specified by the Sub-Division 04020
[Works Management Plan], the Contractor shall prepare and provide its work
specific Construction Environmental Management Plan (CEMP) based on the
Contractor’s past experiences and good practices in India as the given in the SHE
Manual (Appendix 08000-1). The Contractor shall propose construction
methodologies/plans that shall demonstrate assurance of environmental
protection and enforcement of necessary counter measures as required under the
Contract. All potentially affected areas within and in the vicinity of the
Site/fabrication workshop, as instructed by relevant authorities and the Engineer,
shall be covered by the Contractor’s CEMP.
The Contractor shall obtain necessary approvals from competent authorities, such
as state pollution control board, central pollution control board, district agencies
or phanchayat/Gram Sabha in scheduled area, by its own costs and efforts to
establish and operate the work, use local resources including water, treat and
discharge permissible exhaust and wastewater, and storage and disposal of all
construction materials and wastes including hazardous waste by
licenced/authorized management agencies (ex. batching plants, casting yard, DG
set, etc.).
The Contractor shall prepare its work specific CEMP considering the following
main points:
Environmental and social impacts due to site preparation and construction
activities;
Acquisition of prior clearances from competent authorities and concerned
local bodies if it is applicable and No Objection Certificates from concerned
authorities/stakeholders;
Compliance with applicable laws and regulations not only for
environmental considerations but also for social considerations;
Practical management programmes and institutional framework to
adequately implement CEMP;

Public relation tools, which aims to build understanding of the Project and
its construction activities by the Project affected communities and to
provide an initial dispute resolution mechanism at the construction sites;
Continuous CEMP programme schedule until the Time for Completion;
Continuous monitoring systems and improvement systems;
Reporting system (daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, annually,
completion); and
Appointment of a qualified Environmental Manager
Environmental Management Plan: Background
The EMP applies to the Construction Phase and is to be implemented over the
time duration provided in the Contract. The Project is categorized as Category
“A” in accordance with JICA Guidelines for Environmental and Social
Considerations (2010), which specifies the principle requirements of the JICA
Loan conditions and mandatory commitments by the Employer and its Contractor
to implement the Works.
In addition to the JICA requirements, some other clearances/approvals not only
from central or state government authorities but also from local authorities would
be required if it is applicable for the construction methodologies by the
Contractor.
Frameworks for Environmental Management
An institutional framework for the appropriate environmental management and
social safeguard will be established at the Project implementation units of the
Employer. The CEMP prepared by the Contractor shall be treated as the binding
condition of the Contract between the Employer and the Contractor.
Before the Commencement of the Works, the Contractor shall prepare its own
CEMP covering “Overall” and “Construction specific” management strategies
and clarifying responsibilities of the Contractor and shall be reviewed and given
approval by the Engineer prior to the Commencement of the Works, and
implemented during the course of the Works.
Enforcement of Mitigation Measures
The Contractor is responsible for implementing mitigation measures related to the
listed items below (Refer to Appendix 08000-1) :
6.1 General conduct of the Works
6.2 Legislation
6.3 Site preparation
6.4 Borrow pits and quarry sites
6.5 Construction Water and Rain Water Harvesting
6.7 Water Quality Management
6.8 Air Quality Control

6.9 Noise Control

6.10 Vibration Control
6.11 Waste Management
6.12 Hazardous Waste Storage and Management
6.13 Use of Land for Construction Purposes
6.14 Protection of Community Values
6.15 Archaeology
6.16 Monitoring and Reporting
The Contractor shall be responsible for designing and implementing practical

mitigation measures to comply with permissible disposal or emission and for
appropriate management in and around the construction site and proposed in the
CEMP and/or the Method Statements for the Works.
Monitoring and Reporting
The Contractor shall monitor the items specified in accordance with the approved
SHE Management Plan.
The monitoring results shall be compared with the applicable permissible
standards. Necessary counter measures to comply with the requirements shall be
proposed by the Constructor if they are required. The monitoring reports shall be
prepared as per the formats and submitted to the Engineer within the submission
periods as specified.

General
In the case of dispute with the Project affected persons, project affected community
representatives, the Contractor shall be principally responsible for making best efforts
and solving the issues by himself and simultaneously keeping the Engineer/Employer
informed about the issues. However, in the case of unresolved dispute, either the
Contractor or those who claim the issues shall approach the Grievance Redress
Mechanism (GRM) set by the Employer. (Ref. Clause-3)
Stakeholder Consultation (If required)
The Contractor shall carry out stakeholder consultation with the guidance of the
Employer/Engineer, but not be limited to, the following stakeholder consultation
works:
The Contractor shall inform and consult with the relevant government
authorities concerning the Project, local residents, property management
offices, shops, schools and sensitive receivers at least 15 days prior to the
Commencement of the Works;
The Contractor (or the specialized subcontractor if hired) shall organize and
participate in commissions and stakeholder consultations with relevant
authorities concerning the civil, ecological and archaeological issues;
The Contractor shall gain support, ease concerns and minimize objections
from the stakeholders affected by the Works during the stakeholder
consultation; and
The Contractor shall address stakeholders’ concerns and feedbacks as far
as possible to minimize disturbance to the public during construction at the
Contractor’s own expenses.
The Contractor shall ensure proper communications to the public by establishing
an effective communication channel. The communications shall be open and
transparent in the form of mutual communication from both sides. Public
Relations Tools.
The Contractor shall post on-site/at fabrication-workshop notices with the
consent of the Employer/Engineer with clear description of the Works and
indication of anticipated completion Advance notices shall be given in carrying
out the Works with great impact on local residents. The design of this notice shall
be well considered to be in harmony with the local landscape and surrounding
features.
Grievance Redress Mechanism
A Grievance Redress Mechanism (GRM) will be independently established to
receive and appropriately solve complaints among the Project affected
individuals and representatives, the Contractor, and other stakeholders by the
Employer.

The Contractor shall set up a 24-hour hotline with the consent of the
Employer/Engineer to provide enquiry services to the public and the Contractors
shall ensure queries and enquiries regarding the Project are taken seriously and
dealt with swiftly. Whenever complaint/query is received, the Contractor’s
response shall be made available within 14 calendar days. If a longer processing
time is needed, an interim reply shall be served to the complainant within 14
calendar days.

Package No. MAHSR – P-4(X) and P-4(Y) Section VI-1. Works Requirements (General Specifications)
Appendix 08000-1: Safety, Occupational Health and

Environment Management Manual
Table of Contents
1. SHE FRAME WORK ...........................................................................5

1.1. General ................................................................................................................... 5
1.2. Scope ...................................................................................................................... 5
1.3. Definition ............................................................................................................... 5
1.4. Application and Purpose of This Document .......................................................... 8
2. SHE MANAGEMENT .........................................................................9

2.1. General ................................................................................................................... 9
2.2. SHE Targets and Goals .......................................................................................... 9
2.3. Contractors Obligation to Abide by Mandatory Standard ..................................... 9
2.4. Contractors SHE Management Policy and Plan .................................................. 10
2.5. Designers Role ..................................................................................................... 10
2.6. Site SHE Organisation ......................................................................................... 10
2.7. Responsibility of SHE Personnel ......................................................................... 11
2.8. SHE Committee ................................................................................................... 11
2.9. ID Card and Safety Induction .............................................................................. 14
2.10. Other SHE Training ............................................................................................. 14
2.11. SHE Inspection .................................................................................................... 15
2.12. SHE Audit ............................................................................................................ 17
2.13. SHE Communication ........................................................................................... 22
2.14. SHE Submittals .................................................................................................... 23
2.15. Accident Reporting and Investigation ................................................................. 24
2.16. Emergency Preparedness Plan ............................................................................. 27
3. LABOUR PROTECTION .................................................................29

3.1. General ................................................................................................................. 29
3.2. Engagement of Staff and Labour ......................................................................... 29
3.3. Payment of Wages ............................................................................................... 29
3.4. Conditions of Labour ........................................................................................... 29
3.5. Labour Laws ........................................................................................................ 29
Appendix 08000-1 Page 1 of 181

3.6. Working Hours..................................................................................................... 31
4. SAFETY GENERAL ..........................................................................31

4.1. General ................................................................................................................. 31
4.2. Housekeeping ....................................................................................................... 31
4.3. Working at Height................................................................................................ 32
4.4. Overhead Protection............................................................................................. 36
4.5. Lifting Appliances including cranes/tower cranes ............................................... 36
4.6. Launching Operation ........................................................................................... 38
4.7. Construction Machinery....................................................................................... 39
4.8. Machine Guarding ............................................................................................... 40
4.9. Manual Lifting ..................................................................................................... 40
4.10. Site Electricity ...................................................................................................... 40
4.11. Illumination .......................................................................................................... 42
4.12. Welding, Cutting .................................................................................................. 42
4.13. Excavation General .............................................................................................. 44
4.14. Mechanized Excavation ....................................................................................... 45
4.15. Tunnelling Works ................................................................................................ 48
4.16. Blasting and Drilling ............................................................................................ 53
4.17. Compressed Air Works ........................................................................................ 56
4.18. Material Transportation ....................................................................................... 59
4.19. Foundation Works (Piling & open caisson) ......................................................... 60
4.20. Batching Plant and Casting Yard ......................................................................... 60
4.21. Form Works ......................................................................................................... 61
4.22. Concrete Works ................................................................................................... 61
4.23. Pier Casting Works .............................................................................................. 61
4.24. Bridge Erection Works ........................................................................................ 62
4.25. Building and Roof Erection Works ...................................................................... 64
4.26. Roof Erection Works ........................................................................................... 65
4.27. Overhead Contact Wire Works ............................................................................ 65
4.28. Locomotives and Wagons .................................................................................... 67
4.29. Driving and Operation of Track Motor Vehicle etc. ............................................ 68
4.30. Rolling Stock Works ............................................................................................ 68
4.31. Confined Space Entry .......................................................................................... 70
4.32. Fire Protection ...................................................................................................... 70

4.33. Corrosive Substance ............................................................................................. 71

4.34. Demolition ........................................................................................................... 71
4.35. Permit to Work ..................................................................................................... 71
4.36. Traffic Management and Site Barricading ........................................................... 73
4.37. Working near Railway ......................................................................................... 75
4.38. Working near Waterbody ..................................................................................... 81
4.39. Other Works to be Scrutinized ............................................................................. 81
4.40. Working when overhead electrical facility is energised ...................................... 82
4.41. Personal Protective Equipment ............................................................................ 83
4.42. Visitor at Site ....................................................................................................... 85
4.43. Site Security ......................................................................................................... 86
4.44. Lock Out/ Tag Out (LOTO) ................................................................................. 87
5. OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND WELFARE ............................87

5.1. Physical Fitness of Workmen .............................................................................. 87
5.2. Medical Facilities ................................................................................................. 87
5.3. Occupational Noise .............................................................................................. 90
5.4. Ventilation and Illumination ................................................................................ 90
5.5. Radiation .............................................................................................................. 91
5.6. Welfare Measures for Workers ............................................................................ 91
5.7. Heat Stress ........................................................................................................... 93
6. ENVIRONMENT AND SOCIAL MANAGEMENT ......................94

6.1. General Conduct of the Works ............................................................................ 94
6.2. Legislation............................................................................................................ 94
6.3. Site Preparation .................................................................................................... 95
6.4. Borrow Pits and Quarry Sites .............................................................................. 97
6.5. Construction Water Management and Rain Water Harvesting ............................ 97
6.6. General Pollution Control .................................................................................... 98
6.7. Water Quality Management ................................................................................. 98
6.8. Air Quality Control ............................................................................................ 101
6.9. Noise Control ..................................................................................................... 101
6.10. Vibration Control ............................................................................................... 102
6.11. Waste Management ............................................................................................ 102
6.12. Hazardous Waste Storage and Management ...................................................... 103
6.13. Use of Land for Construction Purposes ............................................................. 103

6.14. Protection of Community Values ....................................................................... 104

6.15. Archaeology ....................................................................................................... 104
6.16. Monitoring and Reporting.................................................................................. 105
7. FINANCIAL DEDUCTION/WITHHOLDING ............................111

7.1. Financial deductions from Contractor on occurrences of an incident. .............. 111
7.2. Withholding and deduction of payments from Contractor ................................ 112
7.3. Suspension of work ............................................................................................ 113
8. ATTACHMENT ...............................................................................123
Attachment -1 Contents of SHE Management Plan .................................................. 123
Attachment -2 Work Place Policy (on HIV/AIDS Prevention & Control) ................ 127
Attachment -3 Reference for SHE Activities ............................................................. 135
Attachment -4 Instruction Manual for the Usage of Track bound Motor
Cars/Machines.................................................................................... 149
Attachment -5 Instruction Manual for the Control of Electrical Work during the
Period when the Overhead Contact System is Energized .................. 166
Attachment -6 Instruction Manual for the Control of Other Work during the Period
when the Overhead Contact System is Energized ............................. 176

1. SHE FRAME WORK
1.1. General
1.1.1. The Contractor shall be responsible for Safety, Health and Environment (SHE) on
the Site and any other areas being used by him for the purposes of the Contract. Each
Contractor shall develop his own contract specific SHE Management Plan, which
will represent his approach to the management of safety on his work, sites under the
Contract with the Employer.
1.1.2. The Contractor shall ensure that all appropriate SHE protection measures are
implemented throughout the execution of the Works.
1.2. Scope
1.2.1. The Safety, Occupational Health and Environmental Management Manual defines
the principal requirement of the Employer and forms an essential part of the overall
Safety, Occupational Health and Environment Management System proposed to be
employed by the Employer for the construction of the Project.
1.3. Definition
1. OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH & SAFETY – Conditions and factors that affect the
well-being of employees, temporary workers, contractor personnel, visitors and any
other person at the workplace;
2. ENVIRONMENT – Surroundings in which an organization operates, including air,

water, land, natural resources, flora, fauna, humans, and their interaction;
3. ENVIRONMENT ASPECT – Element of an organization’s activities or products or

services that can interact with the environment;
4. ENVIRONMENT IMPACT – Any change to the environment, whether adverse or

beneficial, wholly or partially resulting from an organization’s environmental
aspects;
5. HAZARD – Source, situation, or act with a potential for harm in terms of human
injury or ill health or a combination of these;
6. Ill Health – Identifiable, adverse physical or mental condition arising from and/or
made worse by a work activity and/or work-related situation;
7. Incident – Work related event (s) in which an injury or ill health (regardless of
severity) or fatality occurred, or could have occurred:
⚫ “Accident” is an incident which has given rise to injury, ill health or fatality;

⚫ “Emergency” is an incident having potential to affect many persons or severe

property damage;
⚫ “Near Miss” is an incident or a situation with clear potential for an undesirable

outcome to occur, even though no actual negative consequences happened. In
other words, it is an event with potential to cause injury, property damage,
environmental release or an adverse community reaction; and
⚫ “Dangerous Occurrence” is an unplanned and undesired occurrence (incident)

which has the potential to cause injury and which may or may not cause
damage to property, equipment or the environment.
8. AUDIT – Systematic examination to determine whether activities planned are

implemented effectively and related results are suitable for achieving the
organization policy and objectives;
9. INTERESTED PARTIES – Individual or group concerned with or affected by the

SHE Management Performance of an Organization;
10. NON-CONFORMITY – Any deviation from work standards, practices, procedures,

regulations, management system performance, etc. that could either directly or
indirectly lead to injury or illness, property damage, damage to workplace
environment, or a combination of these;
11. OBJECTIVES – Goals in terms of SHE Management Performance that an

organization sets itself to achieve;
12. SHE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM – Parts of overall management system that

facilitates the management of the SHE risks associated with the business of the
organization. This includes the organizational structure, planning activities,
responsibilities, practices, procedures, processes and resources for developing,
implementing, achieving, reviewing and maintaining the organization’s SHE
Management Policy;
13. ORGANIZATION – Company, operation, firm enterprise, institution or association,

or part thereof, whether incorporated or not, public or private, that has its own
functions and administration;
14. PERFORMANCE – Measurable results of the SHE Management System, related to

the organization’s control on environment, health and safety risks, based on its SHE
Management Policy and objectives;
15. RISK – Combination of the likelihood and consequences of a hazardous event

occurring;

16. RISK ASSESSMENT – Overall process of establishing the magnitude of risk and
deciding whether the risk is tolerable;
17. ACCEPTABLE RISK – Risk that has been reduced to a level that can be tolerated
by the organization having regard to its legal obligations and its own SHE Policy;
18. DEVIATION – Is defined as something not in compliance with quality standard,

specification or measuring requirements, or as deviations from specified procedures
or way of working within production, environment, working environment (safety) or
security;
19. CORRECTIVE ACTION – Action taken to eliminate the causes of an existing non-
conformity, defect or other undesirable situation;
20. PREVENTIVE ACTION – Action taken to eliminate the causes of a potential non-
conformity, defect or other undesirable situation to prevent occurrence or
recurrences;
21. ENGINEER – Employer’s Representative
22. ENVIRONMENT RELATED DEFINITIONS:
⚫ “Waste” is unwanted surplus substance arising from the application of all

construction operations and any substance or article, which is required to be
disposed;
23. Abbreviation
⚫ “Suspended Particulate Matter” is abbreviated as SPM;
⚫ “Environmental Quality Management Manual” is abbreviated as EQM;
⚫ “Air Monitoring and Control Plan” is abbreviated as AMCP;
⚫ “Noise Monitoring and Control Plan” is abbreviated as NMCP;
⚫ “Ministry of Env. And Forests, Government of India” is abbreviated as

MOEF;
⚫ “Central Pollution Control Board” is abbreviated as CPCB;
⚫ “SHE” means Safety, Occupational Health and Environment;
⚫ “National High Speed Railway Corporation Limited” is the Employer

abbreviated as NHSRCL;

⚫ “Chief SHE Officer” is an officer approved by the Engineer who is overall

responsible for monitoring all SHE functions prescribed in this document on
behalf of the Contractor;
⚫ “BOCWA” is Building and Other Construction Workers (Regulation of

Employment and Conditions of Service) Act, 1996 and amendment done
thereafter;
⚫ “BOCWR” is Building and Other Construction Workers (Regulation of

Employment and Conditions of Service) Central Rules, 1998 and amendment
done thereafter or The Gujarat Building and Other Construction Workers
(Regulation of Employment and Conditions of Service) Rules, 2003/ or The
Maharashtra Building and Other Construction Workers (Regulation of
Employment and Conditions of Service) Rules and amendment done
thereafter, which ever is applicable.
⚫ “BOCWWCA” is Building and Other Construction Workers’ Welfare Cess

Act, 1996;
⚫ “BOCWWCR” is Building and Other Construction Workers’ Welfare Cess

Rules, 1998;
⚫ “CIIBOC” is the Chief Inspector of Inspection of Building and Other

Constructions of Government of Gujarat/Maharashtra;
⚫ “HIRA” is Hazard Identification and Risk Assessment; and
⚫ “The Worker” is the Building and Other Construction Worker defined by

BOCW.
1.4. Application and Purpose of This Document
1.4.1. This document applies to all aspects of the Contractor’s Scope of Work including all
aspects conducted by the Subcontractors and all other agencies. There shall be no
activity associated to the Contract, which is exempted from the purview of this
document.

2. SHE MANAGEMENT
2.1. General
2.1.1. This document defines the principal requirements to be practiced at the Site at all
times. The Contractor’s project manager shall hold the ultimate responsibility in
ensuring implementation of SHE Management system during the construction work.
2.2. SHE Targets and Goals
2.2.1. SHE Targets and Goals to be set and achieved by the Contractor/Subcontractor based
on time bound work plan:
1. Zero total recordable injuries;
2. Zero reportable environmental incidents;
3. Total compliance of conducting inspections and audits as per approved SHE

Management Plan;
4. 100% incident recording and reporting;
5. 100% adherence to usage of appropriate PPEs at work; and
6. Executing construction work with least disturbance to the environment, adjoining

road users and traffic.
2.3. Contractors Obligation to Abide by Mandatory Standard
2.3.1. The construction works shall be undertaken in accordance with the Employer’s SHE
Management Policy and Management Systems as amended from time to time
provided in SHE Management Manual.
2.3.2. Contractor shall prepare safe work method statement for every critical activity and
get it approved by Engineer prior to the construction work. The list of critical activity
shall be submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. The method
statement shall contain work description, resource required, roles and responsibility
of personal, HIRA, emergency response etc.
2.3.3. Every contractor shall refer ISO Literature listed below during the currency of the
Contract:
1. ISO 9001:2015: Quality Management System;
2. ISO 45001:2018: Occupational Health and Safety Management System; and
3. ISO 14001:2015: Environmental Management System.

2.4. Contractors SHE Management Policy and Plan
2.4.1. The Contractor as per BOCWR, shall formulate SHE management policy and plan
and get it approved by Engineer. The Contractor shall display approved SHE Policy
at conspicuous places at the Site in Hindi and languages understood by most of the
Workers.
2.4.2. The Contractor shall revise and submit the SHE Management Plan if at any time the
SHE Management Plans is insufficient in the Engineer’s opinion. The Contractor
shall within 7 days submit the revised SHE Management Plan to the Engineer for
review.
2.4.3. Any omissions, inconsistencies and errors in the SHE Management Plan or the
Engineer’s acceptance or rejection of the SHE Management Plan and/or supplements
thereto shall be without prejudice to the Contractor's obligations with respect to site
safety, industrial health and environment and shall not be excused for any failure by
the Contractor to adopt proper and recognized safety practices throughout the
execution of the Work. The Contractor shall adhere to the SHE Management Plan
and shall ensure, as far as practically possible, that all supervisors and subcontractors
of all tiers each have a copy of the SHE Management Plan on the Site and comply
with its provisions.
2.4.4. The details of contents to be covered in the SHE Management Plans are given in
Attachment -1[Contents of SHE Management Plan] of this document.
2.5. Designers Role
2.5.1. The Designer’s primary role includes to minimize the risk to safety and health of
those who are going to construct, maintain, clean, repair, dismantle or demolish the
structures and anyone else like adjoining road users/public, who might be affected by
the work.
2.5.2. Every temporary structure like scaffold, temporary deck, launching girders, earth
retaining structures etc. shall be properly designed and shall have its design
calculations proof checked by third party and submitted to engineer along with the
relevant certificate.
2.6. Site SHE Organisation
2.6.1. The Contractor shall appoint the required SHE Management Personnel as prescribed
in Clause 8. Attachment-3[General Instruction: SHE/GI/001].
2.6.2. The Contractor shall provide all SHE Management Personnel with such facilities,
equipment and information that are necessary to enable him to discharge his duties
effectively. The minimum Works Requirements of such facilities/equipment to be
provided for SHE Management Personnel are given in Attachment-3[General

Instruction: SHE/GI/003].
2.7. Responsibility of SHE Personnel
2.7.1. PICOW (Person In-Charge of Work)
2.7.1.1. “Person in Charge of Work” under whose supervision, the Workers operate as per
approved method statement and SHE Management Manual.
2.7.1.2. PICOW shall lead/supervise and direct the Workers to undertake the work in a safe
manner.
2.7.1.3. Each Request for Inspection (RFI) must indicate the name of PICOW for that work.
2.7.2. Responsibility of a PICOW
PICOW shall ensure that:
1) A safe system of work is adopted;
2) Everyone in the group is briefed and understand the system of work before work
starts;
3) The current system of work is altered whenever there is any change in conditions
or circumstances makes it necessary and ensure that everyone understands the new
arrangements; and
4) The work is stopped, and everyone moved to a position of safety immediately if

there is any doubt whether the work may safely continue.
2.7.3. All SHE Management Personnel are to report to the Chief SHE Officer who shall
always report directly to the Contractor’s project manager. Their primary role is to
oversee safety at work site. The Engineer shall monitor adherence to this procedure
always. In case of non-adherence penalty shall be levied.
2.8. SHE Committee
2.8.1. The Contractor shall form Project SHE Committee and Site SHE Committee and
conduct Monthly Meetings for both.
2.8.2. The Terms of Reference for both the committee shall be as follows:
1) To oversee implementation of company safety policies and practices;
2) To monitor the adequacy of the contractor’s SHE management plan and ensure its
implementation;
3) To review SHE training;

4) To review the monthly contractor SHE reports;
5) To identify probable causes of accident and unsafe practices in construction work

and to suggest remedial measures;
6) To stimulate interest of the employer and the workers in safety by organizing safety
week, safety competition, talks and film-shows on safety, preparing posters or
taking similar other measures as and when required or as necessary;
7) To go around the site with a view to check unsafe practices and detect unsafe
conditions and to recommend remedial measures for their rectifications including
first-aid medical and welfare facilities;
8) Committee team members shall perform a site inspection before every committee
meeting and to monitor SHE inspection reports;
9) To bring to the notice of the employer regarding the hazards associated with use,
handling and maintenance of the equipment used during the course of construction
work;
10) To suggest measures for improving welfare amenities in the site and other
miscellaneous aspect of safety, health and welfare in construction work;
11) To investigate the health hazards associated with handling different types of
explosives, chemicals and other construction materials and to suggest remedial
measures including personal protective equipment; and
12) To review the last safety committee meeting minutes and to act against the
subcontractors for non-compliance if any.
2.8.3. Within 60 days of award of the Contract, the SHE Committee shall be constituted
and notification regarding the same shall be communicated to the members and
employees as per the format.
2.8.4. Project SHE Committee meeting shall be conducted at least once in a month with the
minimum members listed below:
Chairman Project Director

Secretary Chief SHE Officer (In-charge)

i. Labour Welfare Officer;

ii. In charge of Plant and Machinery & Site Electricals;
iii. In charge of Special Work Operations (e.g. bridge, viaduct, and
building, etc.);
iv. In charge of Stores;
Members v. Senior Managers/Engineers heading different sub functions;
vi. Subcontractor’s representative;
vii. Labour contractor’s representative;

viii. Workers’ representative; and
ix. Co-contractor representative SHE staffs.
Employer’s
The Engineer SHE in charge and other representatives
Representatives
2.8.5. Site SHE Committee meeting shall be conducted at least once in a month with the
minimum members listed below:
Chairman Project Manager

Secretary Sr. SHE Manager (In-charge)
i. Labour Welfare Officer;

ii. In charge of Plant and Machinery & Site Electricals;
iii. In charge of Special Work Operations (e.g. bridge, viaduct, and
building, etc.);
iv. In charge of Stores;
Members
v. Senior Managers/Engineers heading different sub functions;
vi. Subcontractor’s representative;
vii. Labour contractor’s representative;
viii. Workers’ representative; and
ix. Co-contractor representative SHE staffs.
Employer’s
The Engineer SHE in charge and other representatives
Representatives
2.8.6. The agenda shall broadly cover the following:
1) Confirmation of minutes;
2) Chairman’s review/overview of site SHE Management Performance/condition;
3) Previous month SHE statistics;
4) Incident and accident investigation/Dangerous occurrence/Near miss report;

5) Site SHE inspection;
6) The Subcontractors’ SHE issues;
7) Safety presentation by members; and
8) Report from the Employer and Engineer.
2.8.7. In case of depot, station and other contiguous areas where more than one main
contractor is working together, the Employer shall instruct the other contractors to
join for the monthly SHE committee meeting of the main civil contractor, to discuss
and decide about the common provision of safety, security, lighting, toilet, drinking
water etc. and sharing the maintenance cost of the same etc.
2.8.8. The Minutes of the Meeting shall be prepared as per the format provided and sent to
all members within 2 working days preferably by mail/fax followed by hardcopy.
Safety Committee Meeting Minutes shall also be displayed in the notice board for
wider publicity to all concerned.
2.8.9. The chairman shall inform the members of any outstanding issues in the meeting and
in case of repeated offence/ non-compliance by some members or other
Subcontractors and propose suitable disciplinary action including provisions of
monitory penalty as per Clause 7. [Financial Deduction/Withholding].
2.9. ID Card and Safety Induction
2.9.1. The Contractor shall ensure that all personnel working at the Site receive an induction
SHE training explaining the nature of the work and likely hazards. The training shall
cover the relevant contents as given in Attachment-3[General Instruction:
SHE/GI/006].
2.9.2. All personnel shall be issued a photo identity card as per the format given in
Attachment-3[General Instruction: SHE/GI/005].
2.9.3. The Contractor shall also issue a SHE Booklet in a language known to the Workers,
which provides information on SHE and emergency procedures.
2.10. Other SHE Training
2.10.1. Guideline Manual: Final Report on the Study of Safety Management for Construction
Work in Japanese ODA Project -Workers’ Training Materials for Hazard Protection,
February 2012, a JICA publication-Link:
https://www.jica.go.jp/english/our_work/types_of_assistance/c8h0vm00008zx0m8-
att/guidance_en.pdf.
2.10.2. The Contractor shall organize the SHE training to engage managers, supervisors and

other personnel in behavioural change and improve safety performance. The contents
of SHE training to managers/supervisors as given in Attachment-3[General
Instruction: SHE/ GI004 and SHE/GI/006].
2.10.3. The Contractor shall provide a training/workshop on SHE to all its

workers/staff/employees/subcontractors of at least 2 days. It shall be completed in
various modules and each employee/worker shall have a record of completing all
modules.
2.10.4. On-the spot practical skill development training on height safety including scaffold
safety, crane safety, welding safety, electrical safety, and traffic safety for marshals
shall also be conducted.
2.10.5. Every employee including workman shall take a safety oath followed by tool box talk
every day.
2.10.6. All vehicles and machine drivers including heavy work vehicle and machine
operators shall be trained on defensive driving with necessary certificate or license.
2.11. SHE Inspection
2.11.1. The purpose of SHE inspection is to identify any deviation in construction activities
and operations, machineries, plant and equipment and processes against the SHE
Management Plan and its supplementary procedures and programs.
2.11.2. The Contractor shall initiate a weekly joint site SHE Management inspection with
the Engineer and report shall be generated on the same day with the corrective action
and accepted target date (within a week) by the Engineer.
2.11.3. The Compliance of the joint inspection “Non- Conformances” shall be

witnessed/accepted by the Engineer.
2.11.4. The Contractor shall evolve and administer a system of conducting SHE inspection
and other risk management analysis on a periodical basis.
2.11.5. Following SHE inspections program shall be adopted:
1) Planned general inspection;
2) Routine inspection;
3) Specific inspection; and
4) Other inspection.
2.11.6. Planned general inspections are performed at predetermined intervals and it usually
involves the representation from both the Contractor and the Engineer.

Inspections that will be classified under this inspection program are:
1) Monthly contractor and subcontractor’s site safety committee inspection;
2) Weekly safety inspection by construction supervisors (the Contractor and the

Subcontractor); and
3) Daily safety inspection by the Contractor site SHE team.
2.11.7. Routine inspections are often referring to the inspection of the Site, equipment and
temporary structures performed by the Site and equipment operators and temporary
structure erectors.
Inspections that will be classified under this inspection program are:
1) Daily inspection of plant and equipment by operators;
2) Weekly inspection of scaffold by scaffolding supervisors;
3) Monthly Inspection of electrical hand tools by competent electrical supervisors;
4) Quarterly inspection of temporary electrical systems by competent electrical

supervisors; and
5) Half-yearly inspection of lifting machinery, lifting appliances, equipment and

gears by Govt. approved competent persons.
2.11.8. The list mentioned above is not exhaustive. The Contractor may add additional
categories. The Chief SHE Officer will ensure that a system of routine inspections is
carried out periodically to all plants, equipment, powered tools and any other
temporary structures that will pose a hazard to operators and workmen.
2.11.9. Specific inspections are performed on activities without a predetermined date.

Competent supervisors usually perform inspections for ensuring an activity whether
it is executed in accordance to a general set of rules; Method Statement submitted or
developed procedures.
The following are examples that will be commonly performed as required on the Site:
1) Inspection performed before a heavy lifting operation;
2) Inspection performed before and after the entry of person into a confined space;
3) Inspection performed before and after a welding and gas cutting operation;
4) Inspection of formwork before concreting by formwork erector.
2.11.10. The list mentioned above is not exhaustive. The Contractor shall ensure that a

competent supervisor inspects all high-risk processes and activities.
2.11.11. Other inspections include the following:
1) Mandatory inspections by Labour Department of Government; and
2) NHSRCL site SHE management team.
2.11.12. The Contractor shall prepare all required safety inspection checklist for all activity
operations and equipment. Checklists will be prepared based on the Indian Safety
Standards, Rules and Regulations and the Works requirements.
2.11.13. All inspection records and reports will be properly kept and filed for audit purpose.
Inspection reports of planned general inspection and routine inspection will be used
for discussion during safety committee meetings.
2.12. SHE Audit
2.12.1. General
2.12.1.1. The purpose and scope of SHE Audit is to assess potential risk, liabilities and the
degree of compliance of the SHE Management Plan and its supplementary
procedures and programs against applicable and current SHE legislation regulations
and the Works requirements.
2.12.1.2. The Contactor’s project manager shall hold the ultimate responsibility in ensuring
implementation of SHE audit program during the construction work.
2.12.2. Monthly Audit Rating Score (MARS)

2.12.2.1. Monthly Audit Rating Score (MARS) will be performed once in a month. A team
consisting of the Contractor’s project manager and the Engineer’s representative
based on the pre-designed score-rating format will conduct it. The details of the pre-
designed monthly audit score rating formats are given in the SHE Management
Manual.
2.12.2.2. This Monthly SHE Audit Rating Score (MARS) report will enable the Engineer to
evaluate the general compliance by the Contractor with the Conditions of Contract,
and the SHE Management Plan.
2.12.2.3. The Contractor’s project manager accompanied by the Engineer’s representatives

shall carry out the Audit. The Contractor’s senior manager and the SHE In-Charge
shall also be invited to attend.
2.12.2.4. Timing
The Monthly Audit Rating Score (MARS) shall be conducted at least 7 days prior
to the scheduled date of monthly SHE Committee Meeting.
2.12.2.5. Evaluation
The numerical scoring has been weighed on a 1-10 scale. The audit team will use
their observations noted in evaluating the points to be awarded against each of
the elements of the audited section. Wherever some topics and sub-topics are not
applicable the score rating need not be given. The overall audit ratings shall be
achieved by:
𝐴𝑐𝑡𝑢𝑎𝑙 𝑆𝑐𝑜𝑟𝑒 𝐴𝑐ℎ𝑖𝑒𝑣𝑒𝑑

𝑂𝑣𝑒𝑟𝑎𝑙𝑙 𝐴𝑢𝑑𝑖𝑡 𝑟𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑛𝑔 = 𝑥 100
𝑀𝑎𝑥𝑖𝑚𝑢𝑚 𝑃𝑜𝑠𝑠𝑖𝑏𝑙𝑒 𝑆𝑐𝑜𝑟𝑒
The criticality of the required actions for the respective sections of the Audit
will be classified as:
Sl. No. Score Description Action

Require the Contractor to rectify within 24
1 < 60% Immediate
hours
Improvement The Contractor rectification within 7 days and

2 < 75%
Necessary confirmed in writing to the Engineer
Improvement The Contractor rectification within 1 month

3 < 90%
Desirable and confirmed in writing to the Engineer

2.12.2.6. Report
A copy of each Audit Report will be sent to the Engineer and to all subcontractors,
with whom it will then be discussed in detail at the monthly SHE Committee
Meeting to ensure that any corrective actions are agreed upon.
2.12.3. Monthly Electrical Safety Audit
A team comprising of contractor’s senior SHE (Electrical) engineer and the

Engineer’s representative shall conduct Monthly Electrical Safety Audit covering the
following and submit the report to the Engineer:
1) Electrical accidents investigation findings and remedy;
2) Adequacy of power generation and power requirements;
3) Power distribution and transmission system in place;
4) Updated electrical single line diagram showing the current condition of power
source and distribution including the IP44 DBs arrangement;
5) Electrical protection devices – selection, installation and maintenance;
6) Earth or ground connection and earth pit maintenance details;
7) Education and training of electrical personnel undertaken;
8) Routine electrical inspection details;
9) Electrical maintenance system and register;
10) Name plate details of major electrical equipment; and
11) Classified zones in the site, if any.
2.12.4. External SHE Audit
External SHE Audit is to be conducted by the external agencies that are competent
with ISO qualified auditors with the prior approval of the Engineer.
2.12.4.1. Areas of Competence of Audit Team
Practical understanding of BOCWR/A statutory requirements on health/medical

and welfare of workmen, construction hazards and its prevention and control,
traffic management, electrical safety, rigging, safety of construction equipment
and environment management:
1) Audit shall be conducted as per the guidelines of ISO, ILO, and national
standards. Audit report shall also be presented as per the above formats; and

2) External SHE Audit shall be conducted on a quarterly basis throughout the

currency of the Contract.
2.12.4.2. Targets of SHE Audit:
The contents and coverage of the audit shall include the following items.
2.12.4.3. SHE Management:
1) Organization;
2) Communication and motivation;
3) Office hour;
4) Inspection;
5) Emergency preparedness;
6) Budget allocation;
7) Education and training; and
8) Work permit system.
2.12.4.4. Technical:
1) Building and structure;
2) Construction operational safety;
3) Material safety;
4) Hand tools and power tools;
5) Electrical system;
6) Safety appliances;
7) Fire prevention and control;
8) Housekeeping;
9) Maintenance and machinery safety;
10) First-aid and medical facilities;
11) Welfare measures; and

12) Environmental management.
2.12.4.5. Audit Documents:
The Contractor shall make the below itemized documents available for the review
by the Audit team;
1) SHE Policy;
2) SHE Management Manual;
3) SHE rules and regulation;
4) SHE organization chart;
5) Annual SHE objectives/programs;
6) Accident/near miss statistics and analysis;
7) SHE training program/records for all personnel;
8) Operating manuals and maintenance manual of all equipment;
9) Safe worthiness certificates of all lifting appliances and gears;
10) Medical fitness record for all personnel;
11) Risk identification, Assessment and Control details;
12) Environmental management reports; and
13) Emergency management records including mock drill.
2.12.4.6. Reporting
Audit report shall be prepared and directly sent to the Engineer within 7 days of
conducting the audit.
2.12.4.7. Report Contents:
1) Executing Summary - based on the finalized checklists as written the findings

to the Engineer by the audit team members, the audit leader will compile a
concise and accurate summary of observations and findings;
2) Introduction - this will contain basic information regarding the facilities or

organization audited, the specific audit dates (inclusion of those for
preparation and post-audit activities);

3) Principal Positive Findings - This will contain the summary of positive

aspects as observed by the auditors. It will also contain highlights of those
issue, which may warrant dissemination as best practice regarding
methodology used or achievement;
4) Audit Findings - All audit findings as detailed in the audit checklists shall be
grouped together as priority 1 and 2 as detailed below in a separate listing:
a. Priority 1: Actions to rectify gaps or weakness shall generally be

implemented within two week time if risk potential is high or
unacceptable; and
b. Priority 2: Actions shall be generally implemented or rectified with a

maximum of three to four weeks, if not rectified would create a
likelihood of minor injury or business loss.
2.12.4.8. Conformity Report Action by the Engineer:
1) The auditor shall inspect the site after 14 days of conducting initial audit for
checking the adequacy of implementation of items maintained under priority
1 by the Contractor and shall submit a Conformity/Non-conformity Report to
the Engineer;
2) The auditor shall again inspect after 28 days of conducting initial audit for
checking the adequacy of implementation of items mentioned under priority
2 by the Contractor and shall submit a Conformity/Non-conformity Report to
the Engineer; and
3) In case of non-conformity of items mentioned by auditor, the Engineer shall

take necessary steps including stoppage of work and or imposing any penalty
for getting the item implemented.
2.12.4.9. If the Contractor fails to conduct the External, SHE Audit in time, the Engineer shall
get it done and penality shall be imposed as per Clause 7.2/ Table 2/ Sl No.7.
2.12.4.10. All expenses related to the external SHE audits shall be borne by the Employer.
2.13. SHE Communication
2.13.1. The Contractor shall take every effort to communicate the SHE Management
measures through posters campaigns/billboards/banners/glow signs being displayed
around the Site as part of the effort to rise safety awareness amongst to the work
force. Posters shall be in Hindi, English and other suitable language deemed
appropriate. Posters/billboards/ banners/glow signs shall be changed at least once in
a month to maintain the impact.

2.13.2. The Contractor shall also observe important days as listed in Attachment-3[General
Instruction: SHE/GI/007] and printing and displaying safety signage and posters as
listed in Attachment-3[General Instruction: SHE/GI/008].
2.14. SHE Submittals
2.14.1. The Contractor’s SHE Management shall send the following reports to the Engineer
periodically:
1) Daily reporting of total number of workmen;
2) Monthly SHE reports;
3) SHE committee meeting minutes;
4) SHE inspection reports;
5) SHE audits reports;
⚫ Monthly Audit Rating Score (MARS) reports;
⚫ External SHE audits;
⚫ Electrical Safety audits; and
6) Environment Quality Monitoring (EQM) reports.
2.14.2. The Contractor shall report to the Engineer the total number of workmen engaged by
all including any Subcontractor within 2 hours of starting of any shift in any day.
This daily reporting shall be the primary duty of the Chief SHE Officer and reporting
shall be through tele-fax/email.
2.14.3. The Contractor shall prepare a Monthly SHE Report consisting of the following and
submit 3 copies within 7th of next month to the Engineer as specified in the SHE
Management Manual:
1) Monthly man-hour details as specified in the SHE Management Plan;
2) Monthly accident/incident details as specified in the SHE Management Plan;
3) SHE committee details;
4) Details of SHE training conducted in the month;
5) SHE inspection;
6) SHE internal audit details like electrical audit etc.;

7) SHE communication activities under taken in the month indicating the number of
posters displayed and balance availability in stock;
8) Air quality/Noise monitoring details;
9) Toolbox talks details;
10) PPE details: Quantity purchased, issued to the workmen and stock available;
11) Details on IP 44 panel boards, lighting poles, welding and cutting equipment,
Ladders, Hoists, Tools & Tackles;
12) Monthly lux meter study results;
13) Housekeeping;
14) Barricade maintenance details;
15) No of critical excavations;
16) Health and welfare activities;
17) Safety patrol conducted by the Contractors’ project manager in the month; and
18) SHE activities planned for next month.
2.15. Accident Reporting and Investigation
2.15.1. All accidents and dangerous occurrences shall immediately be informed through
message to the Engineer and the Employer. This will enable the Engineer to reach to
the scene of accident/dangerous occurrences to monitor/assist any rescue work and/or
start conducting the investigation process so that the evidences are not lost.
2.15.2. Reports of all accidents (fatal/injury) and dangerous occurrences shall also be sent
within 24 hours by the Contractor.
2.15.3. No accident/dangerous occurrences are exempted from reporting to the Employer.
2.15.4. Any wilful delay in verbal and written reporting to the Employer and Engineer shall
be penalized as per Clause 7. [Financial Deduction/Withholding].
2.15.5. In addition to the above verbal and written reporting to the Employer and Engineer,
as per BOCWR, notice of any accident to a worker at the Site that:
1) Causes loss of life; or;
2) Disables a worker from working for a period of 48 hours or more immediately

following the accident;

3) Shall forthwith be sent by telegram, telephone, fax, or similar other means

including special messenger within 4 hours in case of fatal accidents and 72 hours
in case of other accidents, to:
⚫ The Regional Labour Commissioner (central), wherein the Contractor has

registered the firm/work;
⚫ The Board with which the Worker involved was registered as a

beneficiary; and
⚫ The Director General of Government of Gujarat/Maharashtra and the next

of kin or other relative of the Worker involved in the accident.
2.15.6. Further, notice of accident shall be sent in respect of an accident which:
1) Causes loss of life; or;
2) Disables the injured worker from work (for a period of more than 10 Days) to;
⚫ The Officer-in-charge of the nearest police station;
⚫ The District Magistrate or, if the District Magistrate by order so desires;

to
⚫ The Sub-Divisional Magistrate.
2.15.7. In case of an accident causing minor injury, first-aid shall be administered, and the
injured worker shall be immediately transferred to a hospital or other place for
medical treatment.
2.15.8. Where any accident causing disablement that subsequently results in death, notice in
writing of such death, shall be sent to the authorities within 72 hours of such death.
2.15.9. The following classes of dangerous occurrences shall be reported to the inspector
having jurisdiction, whether any disablement or death caused to the Worker, namely:
1) Collapse or failure of lifting appliances, or hoist, or conveyors, or similar

equipment for handling of building or construction material or breakage or failure
of rope, chain or loose gears; or overturning of cranes used in construction work;
2) Falling of objects from height;
3) Collapse or subsidence of soil, tunnel, pipe lines, any wall, floor, gallery, roof or
any other part of any structure, launching girder, platform, staging, scaffolding or
means of access including formwork;

4) Explosion of receiver or vessel used for storage of pressure greater than

atmospheric pressure of any gas or any liquid or solid used as building material;
5) Fire and explosion causing damage to any place on the Site where the Workers
are employed;
6) Spillage or leakage of any hazardous substance and damage to their container;
7) Collapse, capsizing, toppling or collision of transport equipment; and
8) Leakage or release of harmful toxic gases at the Site.
2.15.10. In case of failure of launching girder, lifting appliance, loose gear, hoist machinery
and transport equipment at the Site, such appliances, gear, hoist, machinery or
equipment and the site of such occurrence shall, as far as practicable, be kept
undisturbed until inspected by the authorities.
2.15.11. Every notice given for fatal accidents or dangerous occurrences shall be followed by
a written report to the concerned Authorities under Section 39 of BOCWA and the
Director General of Government of Gujarat/Maharashtra in the specified Forms of
BOCWR.
2.15.12. Accident Investigation:
1) Investigations shall be conducted in an open and positive atmosphere that

encourages the witnesses to talk freely. The primary objective is to ascertain the
facts with a view to prevent future and possibly more serious occurrences;
2) Accidents and dangerous occurrences which result in death, serious injury or

serious damage must be investigated by the Contractor immediately to find out
the cause of the accident/occurrence so that measures can be formulated to
prevent any recurrence; and
3) Near misses and minor accidents shall also be investigated by the Contractor as
soon as possible as they are signals that there are inadequacies in the SHE
Management System.
2.15.13. Procedure of Incident Investigation
It is important after any accident or dangerous occurrence that information relating

to the incident is gathered in an organized way. The following steps shall be followed:
1) Take photographs and make sketches;
2) Examine involved equipment, work place or material and the environmental

conditions;

3) Interview the injured, eye-witnesses and other involved parties;
4) Consult expert opinion where necessary; and
5) Identify the specific contractor or subcontractor involved.
2.15.14. Having gathered information, it is then necessary to make an analysis of incident:
1) Establish the chain of events leading to the accident or incident;
2) Find out at what stage the accident took place;
3) Considering all possible causes and the interaction of different factors that led up
to the accident and identify the most probable cause the cause of an accident shall
never be classified as carelessness; and
4) The specific act or omission that caused the accident must be identified.
2.15.15. The next stage is to proceed with the follow-up action:
1) Report on the findings and conclusions;
2) Formulate preventive measures to avoid recurrence; and
3) Publicize the findings and the remedial actions taken.
2.15.16. The Engineers’ Independent Incident Investigation
In case of fatal/dangerous occurrence, the Engineer shall also conduct independent

investigation. The Contractor and his staff shall extend necessary co-operation and
testify about the accident.
2.15.17. The Contractor shall take every effort to preserve the scene of accident till the
Engineer completes the investigation.
2.15.18. All persons summoned by the Engineer in connection to witness recording shall obey
the instructions without delay. Any wilful suppression of information by any person
shall be removed from the site immediately and/or punishable as per Clause 7.
[Financial Deduction/Withholding].
2.16. Emergency Preparedness Plan
2.16.1. The Contractor shall prepare as required under BOCW Act & Rules, an Emergency
Response Plan for all Sites as a part of the Contractor SHE Management Plan. The
plan shall integrate the emergency response plans of the Contractor and all other
subcontractors. The Emergency Response Plan shall detail the Contractor’s
procedures, including detailed communication arrangements, for dealing with all
emergencies that could affect the Site. This include where is applicable, such as

injury, sickness, evacuation, fire, chemical spillage, severe weather and rescue.
2.16.2. The Contractor shall ensure that the Emergency Response Plan is prepared to deal
with emergencies arising out of but not limited to:
1) Fire and explosion;
2) Collapse of lifting appliances and transport equipment;
3) Collapse of building, sheds or structure etc.;
4) Gas leakage or spillage of dangerous goods or chemicals;
5) Bomb threatening, Criminal or Terrorist attack;
6) Drowning of workers; and
7) Landslides getting workers buried floods, earthquake, storms and other natural
calamities etc.
2.16.3. Arrangement shall be made for emergency medical treatment and evacuation of the
victim in the event of an accident or dangerous incident occurring, the chain of
command and the responsible persons of the Contractor with their telephone numbers
and addresses for quick communication shall be adequately publicized and
conspicuously displayed in the workplace.
2.16.4. The Contractor shall require to tie-up with the hospitals and fire stations located in
the neighbourhood for attending to the casualties promptly and emergency vehicle
kept on standby duty during the working hours for the purpose.
2.16.5. The Contractor shall conduct an onsite emergency mock drill once in every month
for all his workers and his sub-contractor’s workers.
2.16.6. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to keep the Local Law and Order
Authorities informed and seek urgent help to mitigate the consequences of an
emergency. Prompt communication to the Employer and Engineer, through
telephonically initially and followed by a written report, shall be made by the
Contractor.

3. LABOUR PROTECTION
3.1. General
3.1.1. The Contractor shall comply in full of the project Workplace Policy as described in
Attachment-2[Work Place Policy (on HIV/AIDS Prevention & Control)].
3.2. Engagement of Staff and Labour
3.2.1. The Contractor shall ensure that the employees deployed by him in the premises of
the Employer are physically and mentally fit and do not have any criminal record.
3.3. Payment of Wages
3.3.1. The Contractor shall ensure payment of at least the minimum wages as prescribed
and applicable from time to time under the Minimum Wages Act, 1948 in the
presence of an authorised representative of the Engineer and shall maintain proper
records of their timely disbursement. These records shall be preserved for a period of
at least 3 years and made available even after the Contract is over for any verification
by the statutory authorities.
3.4. Conditions of Labour
3.4.1. The Contractor shall observe conditions of labour that are no less favourable than
those established for the relevant trade or industry, and which at least comply with
model standing orders provided under the Industrial Employment (Standing Orders)
Act, 1946.
3.4.2. During the work, the Contractor shall afford all employees all basic rights
enumerated in the conventions of the International Labour Organisation, including
freedom of association, right to freedom from forced labour, and right to freedom
from discrimination based on race, colour, sex, religion, political opinion and social
origin.
3.4.3. The Contractor shall ensure coverage of his employees under the Employees
Provident Fund and Miscellaneous Provisions Act, 1952 and the Employees State
Insurance Act, 1948 via independent code numbers allotted to him by the Central
Provident Fund Organisation and Employees State Insurance Corporation
respectively.
3.4.4. The Contractor shall insure all his employees under Group Personal Accident
Insurance scheme through a recognised and registered insurance company.
3.5. Labour Laws
3.5.1. The Contractor shall ensure that all his employees and the Subcontractors obey

applicable the following laws and regulations, including those concerning safety at
work.
1) Minimum Wages Act, 1948;
2) Payment of Wages Act, 1936;
3) Equal Remuneration Act, 1976;
4) Employees Provident Fund and Miscellaneous Provisions Act, 1952;
5) Payment of Gratuity Act, 1972;
6) Employees State Insurance Act, 1948;
7) Payment of Bonus Act, 1965;
8) Maternity Benefit Act, 1951;
9) Industrial Disputes Act, 1947;
10) Industrial Employment (Standing Orders) Act, 1946;
11) Trade Unions Act, 1926;
12) Child Labour (Prohibition and Regulation) Act, 1986;
13) Building and Other Construction Workers (Regulation of Employment of

Service) Act 1996;
14) Building and Other Construction Workers Cess Act of 1996;
15) The Contract Labour (Regulation and Abolition) Act, 1970;
16) Inter State Migrant Workmen’s (Regulation of Employment and Conditions of

Service) Act, 1979;
17) Workmen Compensation Act. 1923;
18) Factories Act, 1948;
19) Mines Act, 1952; and
20) Safety Code for Plant Railways Part II Locomotives, Wagons and Their
Movement (IS 8218).
3.5.2. The Contractor shall comply with all other statutory requirements, rules, regulations
and notifications in relation to employment of his staff and workers that may be

issued from time to time by the concerned government authorities.
3.6. Working Hours
3.6.1. No work shall be carried out beyond the statutory limit given under BOCWA, 1996.
3.6.2. No work shall be carried out outside the normal working hours stated in contract
unless otherwise
1) The Engineer gives his consent in writing for additional work; and
2) The work is unavoidable or necessary for the protection of life or property or for
the safety of the works, in which case the Contractor shall immediately inform
the Engineer.
4. SAFETY GENERAL
4.1. General
4.1.1. The following standards whichever is more stringent shall be applicable:
1) The Maharashtra & The Gujarat State BOCW Acts and Rules framed there under;
2) The Guidance for the Management of Safety for Construction Works in Japanese
ODA Projects, issued by Japan International Cooperation Agency (JICA) on
September 2014; and
3) Other relevant National Legislations & IS Codes.
4.2. Housekeeping
4.2.1. General Housekeeping shall be carried out by the Contractor and ensured always at
the Site, Construction Depot, Batching Plant, Labour Camp, Stores, Offices and
Toilets/Urinals.
4.2.2. Full height fence, barriers, barricades etc. shall be erected around the Site wherever
required as approved by the Engineer to ensure Site safety along the length and width
of the Site and also to prevent the surroundings from excavated soil, rubbish etc.,
which may cause inconvenience to public and/or may endanger the safety of the
public. The Contractor shall provide steel barricading in urban areas, near habitation,
road crossings, area under excavation and any other areas as instructed by the
Engineer. The fence, barriers, to prevent the surrounding from excavated soil, rubbish
etc., which may cause inconvenience to and endanger the public. The barricade
especially those exposed to public shall be aesthetically maintained by regular
cleaning and painting as directed by the Engineer. These shall be maintained in one
line and level.

4.2.3. All surplus earth and debris are removed/disposed of from the working areas to
officially designated dumpsites. Trucks carrying sand, earth and any pulverized
materials etc. to avoid dust or odour impact shall be covered while moving. The tyres
of the trucks leaving the site shall be cleaned with water, wherever the possibility of
spillage on carriageways meant for regular road traffic exists.
4.2.4. Water logging or bentonite/polymer spillage on roads shall not be allowed. If

bentonite/polymer spillage is observed on road endangering the safety of road users,
the Contractor shall be penalized as per Clause 7. [Financial
Deduction/Withholding].
4.2.5. No parking of trucks/trolleys, cranes and trailers etc. shall be allowed on roads, which
may obstruct the traffic movement.
4.2.6. Roads shall be kept clear and materials like: pipes, steel, sand boulders, concrete,
chips and brick etc. shall not be allowed on the roads to obstruct free movement of
road traffic.
4.2.7. Proper and safe stacking of material are of paramount importance at yards, stores and
such locations where material would be unloaded for future use. The storage area
shall be well laid out with easy access and material stored/stacked in an orderly and
safe manner.
4.3. Working at Height
4.3.1. Working at height means work in any place, including a place at or below ground
level or obtaining access to or egress from such place while at work, except by a
staircase in a permanent workplace where, if protective measures were not taken, a
person could fall a distance liable to cause personal injury.
4.3.2. The Contractor shall ensure that work at height is properly planned, appropriately
supervised and carried out in a safe manner and without any appreciable risk.
Appropriate care shall be taken during bad weather.
4.3.3. Adequate protection in the form of working platform with railing, toe board, safe
access, safety net, roof ladder etc. shall be provided. No person is required to work
at height only depending on a full body harness. Where fall hazards cannot be
eliminated, use fall-arrest systems while erecting, modifying, and dismantling
scaffolds.
4.3.4. A trained and certified person shall check working platform, railing, toe board, safe
access, safety net, roof ladder etc. after erection and once in a week. A certificate
shall be tagged on this equipment.
4.3.5. Employees involved in the erection, dismantling, moving, repairing, etc., of

scaffolding and also workers who perform work on a scaffold shall receive training

from a competent person. The purpose of the training is to recognize any hazards
associated with the work.
4.3.6. When the height of a scaffold exceeds three times of the smallest width of the base,
secure it to the building or structure at every other lift and every 9.0 m horizontally.
The scaffold and scaffold working platform with handrails approximately 1.0 m high,
mid rails, and toe boards, all secured rigidly by both ties and braces to prevent
movement. Working Platforms shall be completely decked with Safety Planks,
Manufactured Scaffold Decking, or Metallic Planks.
4.3.7. Metal frame working scaffold is permitted only. As a means of raising and lowering
the metal frame working scaffold, steel stairs are used, except for special cases, it is
prohibited to directly raise and lower the framework with limbs or to use only ladder.
4.3.8. Where it is not reasonably practicable to carry out work safely and under appropriate
ergonomic conditions without passing across or near, or working on, from or near, a
fragile surface, every contractor shall ensure, so far as is reasonably practicable, that
suitable and sufficient platforms, coverings, guard rails or similar means of support
or protection are provided and used so that any foreseeable loading is supported by
such supports or borne by such protection.
4.3.9. Where any person at work may pass across or near, or work on, from or near, a fragile
surface, every contractor shall ensure that prominent warning notices are so far as is
reasonably practicable affixed at the approach to the place where the fragile surface
is situated
4.3.10. The contractor shall ensure that:
Where a workplace contains an area in which, owing to the nature of the work, there
is a riskto any person at work;
a) Falling a distance; or
b) Being struck by a falling object:
Such area is clearly indicated.
4.3.11. The Contractor shall ensure that work equipment exposed to conditions causing
deterioration, which is liable to result in dangerous situations, is inspected at suitable
intervals and after any exception occurrence jeopardizing the safety of
work/equipment.
4.3.12. In relation to work at height involved in construction work;
a) The top guard-rail or other similar means of protection shall be at least 950 mm
above the edge from which any person is liable to fall;

b) Toe-boards shall be suitable and sufficient to prevent the fall of any person, or
any material or object, from any place of work; and
c) Any intermediate guardrail or similar means of protection shall be positioned so

that any gap between it and other means of protection does not exceed 470 mm.
4.3.13. Requirements for all Working Platforms:
1) Every working platform requires a firm & stable supporting structure for holding
it;
2) A working platform shall possess a suitable surface and be so constructed that the
surface of the working platform has no gap through which a
person/material/object could fall;
3) A working platform and any supporting structure shall not be loaded to give rise
to a risk of collapse or to any deformation, which could affect its safe use
4) When altered or modified, be so altered or modified as to ensure that it remains

stable;
5) A working platform shall be of sufficient dimension to permit the safe passage of

persons and the safe use of any plant or materials required to be used and to
provide a safe working area having regard to the work being carried out there;
6) Depending on the complexity of the scaffolding selected, a responsible person

shall draw up an assembly, use and dismantling plan;
7) A copy of the plan, including any instructions it may contain, shall be kept
available for the use of persons concerned in the assembly, use, dismantling or
alteration of scaffolding until it has been dismantled; and
8) While a scaffold is not available for use, including during its assembly,
dismantling or alteration, it shall be marked with general warning signs in
accordance with and be suitably delineated by physical means preventing access
to the danger zone.
4.3.14. Requirements for collective safeguards for arresting falls:
1) Collective safeguard is a safety net, airbag or other collective safeguard for

arresting falls;
2) A safeguard shall be used only if:
a) A risk assessment has demonstrated that the work activity can (so far as
is reasonably practicable) be performed safely while using it and without
affecting its effectiveness;

b) The use of other safer work equipment is not reasonably practicable; and
c) A sufficient number of available persons have received adequate training

specific to the safeguard, including rescue procedures.
4.3.15. Requirements for personal fall protection systems:
1) A personal fall protection system shall be used only if;
2) A risk assessment has demonstrated that;
i. The work can (so far as be reasonably practicable) be performed safely

while using that system; and
ii. The use of other safer work equipment is not reasonably practicable.
The user and a sufficient number of available persons have received adequate
training specific to the operations envisaged, including rescue procedures; and
3) A personal fall protection system designed for use with an anchor shall be
securely attached to at least one anchor, and each anchor and the means of
attachment thereto shall be suitable and of sufficient strength and stability to
supporting any foreseeable loading.
4.3.16. Requirements for Ladders:
1) Every contractor shall ensure that a ladder is used for work at height only if a risk
assessment has demonstrated that the use of more suitable work equipment is not
justified because of the low risk;
2) The short duration of use;
3) Existing features on the Site, which he cannot alter;
4) Only metal ladders shall be allowed. Bamboo ladders are prohibited;
5) Any surface upon which a ladder rests shall be stable, firm, of sufficient strength
and of suitable composition safely to support the ladder so that its rungs or steps
remain horizontal, and any loading intended to be placed on it;
6) A ladder shall be so positioned as to ensure its stability during use;
7) No interlocking or extension ladder shall be used unless its sections are prevented
from moving relative to each other while in use;
8) Where a ladder or run of ladders raises a vertical distance of 9.0 m or more above
its base, there shall, where reasonably practicable, be provided at suitable
intervals sufficient safe landing areas or rest platforms;

4.4. Overhead Protection
4.4.1. All contractors shall provide overhead protections as per BOCW Act & Rules.
4.5. Lifting Appliances including cranes/tower cranes
4.5.1. Lifting appliances means a crane, hoist hydra, derrick, winch, gin pole, sheer legs,
jack, hoist drum, slewing machinery, slewing bearing fasteners, lifting machinery
sheaves, pulley blocks, hooks or other equipment used for lifting materials, objects
or the Workers and lifting gears means ropes, chain slings, shackles, hooks, lifting
lugs, wire ropes, Mac-alloy bars, lifting eyebolts and eye nuts and other accessories
of a lifting appliance.
4.5.2. Each of the lifting appliances and lifting gear including all parts thereof, whether
fixed or moveable shall be thoroughly tested and examined by a competent person
once at least in every 6 months or after it has undergone any alterations or repairs
liable to affect its strength or stability.
4.5.3. The Contractors shall utilize the services of any competent person as defined in
Factories Act, 1948 with the permission of the Engineer.
4.5.4. No machine shall be selected to do any lifting on a specific job until its size and
characteristics are considered adequate:
4.5.5. The Contractor shall ensure that a valid certificate of fitness issued is available for
all lifting appliances including synchronized mobile jacks, pre-stressing hydraulic
jacks, jacks fitted with launching girders etc. and the Engineer approval needs before
inducting to the site. Only after obtaining the approval from the Engineer any lifting
appliances and gear shall be used.
4.5.6. The laminated photocopies of fitness certificate issued by competent person, the
Engineer’s approval letter, the operators’ photo, manufacturer’s load chart and
competency certificate shall always be either kept in the operator cabin or pasted on
the visible surface of the lifting appliances.
4.5.7. All lifting appliances and loose gears shall be clearly marked for its safe working
load and identification by stamping or other suitable means.
4.5.8. The Contractor shall do quarterly colour coding of lifting tools and tackles and also
maintain a register containing a system of identification of all tools and tackles, its
date of purchase, safe working load, competent person date of examination etc.
4.5.9. Every lifting appliances and gears like cranes, hoist, hydras etc., if so constructed that
the safe working load may be varied by raising or lowering of the jib or otherwise
shall be attached with an Automatic Safe Load Indicator (ASLI) approved by Bureau
of Indian Standard/International Certifying Body which gives a warning to the

operator and arrests further movements of the lifting parts. These ASLI shall be
calibrated by the manufacturer or its authorized representative every 6 months or after
repair of the lifting equipment. All such lifting equipment shall match the age criteria
and mechanically and electrically sound.
4.5.10. Minimum lighting is to be ensured at all lifting operations.
4.5.11. The Contractor shall not employ any person to drive or operate a lifting machine-like
crane, hydra etc. whether driven by mechanical power or otherwise or to give signals
to work as an operator of a rigger or derricks unless he:
1) Is above 21 years of age and possesses a valid heavy transport vehicle driving
license as per Motor Vehicle Act and Rules;
2) Is competent and reliable;
3) Possesses the knowledge of the inherent risks involved in the operation of lifting
appliances by undergoing a formal training at any institution of national
importance acceptable to the Engineer; and
4) Is medically examined periodically as specified in schedule VII of BOCW Rules.
4.5.12. All hydraulic piping and fittings shall be maintained leak proof.
4.5.13. Only four legged slings shall be allowed which includes master link (ring),
intermediate master link (ring) if necessary, chain / wire rope sling, sling hook or
other terminal fitting.
4.5.14. Hand spliced slings up to 32mm diameter shall not be used at site for any lifting
purpose. The slings used shall confirm to IS 2762: 2009 Wire rope slings and sling
leg specification.
4.5.15. No load shall be slewed over public areas without stopping the road traffic first.
4.5.16. Failure to do any of the above shall attract penalty from the Employer as per Clause
7. [Financial Deduction/Withholding].
4.5.17. Automatic Safe Load Indicator (ASLI) to be provided in crane with audible and
visible warning system and made functional and calibrated by the recognized
authority (manufacture/authorised representative of the ASLI).
4.5.18. The crane shall have a substantial/durable safe working load chart which has clearly
legible characters in English and Hindi and figures displayed inside the crane and is
easily visible to the crane operator.
4.5.19. Every tower crane must have the following specific requirement:

1) A hook height limit switch that causes the hoist drum to stop whenever the load
hook reaches a predetermined maximum height position;
2) Lifting jib limit switches that cause the jib hoist drum to stop whenever the jib is
raised to too high an angle or lowered to too low an angle.
3) A trolley travel limit switch that causes trolley motion to stop whenever the
trolley reaches a predetermined maximum out or maximum in position;
4) An overload limit switch that causes the hoist drum to stop whenever the load
being hoisted exceeds the maximum rated load for any radius or jib angle.
5) Travel limit switches for rail mounted cranes that apply the carriage brake
whenever the crane comes near the ends of the track.
4.6. Launching Operation
4.6.1. As launching operation is one of the riskiest jobs, the Contractor shall take utmost
precaution at all stages like; planning, establishing casting yard, casting segments,
transporting segments, fabrication and erection of launching girders, launching of
tunnerl boring machines, erection of tunnel segments, launching of segments, pre-
stressing, auto launching of girders and dismantling of launching girders.
4.6.2. The Contractor shall prepare a comprehensive Method Statement for the launching
operation, adhering to the SHE conditions laid down in conditions of contract on the
SHE Management Manual. Reference shall be made to the provisions on working at
height. As the entire process of launching must be undertaken at an elevated level
the safety of workers and the girder is paramount important. In addition to general
precautions, such as trained personnel, PPE, etc. listed in earlier clauses, the
following general guidelines shall be adhered to throughout the launching operation:
1) The segments shall rigidly secure to the truck with necessary wooden wedges and
necessary red indicators/safety tapes provided so that the vehicle is clearly seen
by other road users both in day/night time;
2) Every launching operation shall have a responsible engineer on duty all the time;
3) All the time from erection to dismantling the area between the two piers wherein
launching is in progress shall always be barricaded;
4) Auto launching shall be done only after approval from the Engineer. After every
auto launching the stability of launching girder shall be ensured;
5) The vertical deflection of launching girder shall be monitored at all critical stages
like with/without loads and after every auto launching;

6) A register containing all important operational details from erection to

dismantling of launching girders shall be maintained and made available to the
Engineer whenever called for;
7) Driver shall also have undergone proper medical examination as per sub-Clause-
5.2 (Medical Facilities) and checked for influence of alcohol before any kind of
lifting operation; and
8) Test certificate for all lifting gears including Macalloy Bars shall be maintained
at a location closer to the launching girder itself so that it can be referred during
all inspections.
4.6.3. Failure to do any of the above shall attract penalty as per Clause 7. [Financial
4.7. Construction Machinery
4.7.1. Construction machineries may include dumpers and dump trucks, lift trucks and
telescopic handlers piling rigs, vibration hammers, rail welding equipment, mobile
elevating work platforms, cranes, tipper lorries, lorry loaders, skip wagons, 360°
excavators, 180° backhoe loaders, crawler tractors, scrapers, graders, loading
shovels, trenchers, side booms, pavers, planers, chippers, road rollers, locomotives,
tankers and bowsers, trailers, Compressor, locomotives and wagons, tunnel boring
machines, concrete pumps, boom placers, transit mixers, hydraulic and mechanical
breakers etc.
4.7.2. Every construction equipment shall be in sound mechanical working condition and
certified by either competent person under Factories Act or manufacturers’ warranty
in case of brand new equipment or authorized persons/firms approved by the
Engineer before induction to any site and same shall be verified by P&M in-charge
of Contractor and approved by the Engineer.
4.7.3. All vehicles shall be fitted with audible reverse alarms and maintained in good
working condition. Reversing shall be done only when there is adequate rear-view
visibility or under the directions of a banksman.
4.7.4. Drivers entering site shall be instructed to follow the safe system of work adopted on
site. These shall be verbal instructions or, preferably, written instructions showing
the relevant site rules, the site layout, delivery areas, speed limits, etc.
4.7.5. All wood working machines shall be fitted with suitable guards and devices such as
top guard, riving knife, push stick, guards for drive belts and chains, and emergency
stop switch easily accessible by the operator.

4.7.7. The contractor shall mobilise truck transmission type pick and carry hydra cranes
second generation model only or higher model.
4.8. Machine Guarding
4.8.1. The contractor shall ensure at the site all motors, cog wheels, chains and friction
gearing, fly wheels, shafting, dangerous and moving parts of machinery are securely
fenced or legged. The fencing of dangerous parts of machinery is not removed while
such machine is in motion or in use.
4.8.2. All gears, revolving shafts, couplings and all other dangerous parts of machinery shall
be effectively guarded unless they are so constructed, installed or placed as to be as
safe as if they were guarded.
4.8.3. Fencing of dangerous parts of machinery shall not be removed while the machinery
is in use or in motion and when removed, it shall be replaced as soon as practicable
and in any case before the machinery is again brought into use.
4.9. Manual Lifting
4.9.1. Contractor shall ensure at the Site of a construction work that no worker lifts by hand
or carries overhead or over his back or shoulders any material, article, tool or
appliances exceeding in weight as per BOCWR, unless aided by another worker or
device.
4.10. Site Electricity
4.10.1. The Contractor shall refer to the applicable guideline “Indian Electricity Rules, 1956”
and any amendment thereafter. SHE requirements are:
1) Graduate Electrical Engineer having Electrical Supervisory Competency

Certificate;
2) Diploma Electrical Engineer having Electrical Supervisory Competency

Certificate;
3) ITI Certificate Holder Electrician with Wiremen Permit; and
4) Assessment of Electrical Load and properly designed power distribution system
4.10.2. The Contractor shall assess the size and location of the electrical loads and the
manner in which they vary with time during the currency of the Contract.
4.10.3. The Contractor shall elaborate as to how the total supply is to be obtained/generated.
The details of the source of electricity, earthing requirement, substation/panel boards,
distribution system shall be prepared and necessary approval from the Engineer
obtained before proceeding of the execution of the job.

4.10.4. The main contractor shall take consideration, the requirements of the Subcontractors’
electric power supply and arrive at the capacity of main source of power supply from
diesel generators.
4.10.5. No electrical equipment shall be put into use where its strength and capability may
be exceeded in such a way as may give rise to danger.
4.10.6. Adverse or Hazardous Environments:
1) Power supply from public utility service provider is preferable;
2) The Contractor shall provide sufficient ELCBs (maintain sensitivity 30 mA)/

Residual Current Circuit Breakers (RCCBs) for all the equipment (including
Potable equipment), electrical switchboards, distribution panels etc. to prevent
electrical shocks to the Workers;
3) Lightening Protection for all structures, gantry, metal portable cabins, silos etc;
4) No single insulation cable shall be used;
5) Cables shall be selected after full consideration of the condition to which they
shall be exposed and the duties for which they are required. Supply cable up to
3.3 kV shall be in accordance with BS 6346:1997;
6) Cables buried directly in the ground shall be of a type incorporating armour or

metal sheath or both;
7) Cabling passing under the walk way and across way for transport and mobile
equipment shall be laid in ducts at a minimum depth of 0.6 m;
8) The Contractor shall ensure plugs, socket-outlets, and couplers available in the
Site as “splash EM proof” type. The minimum degree of Ingress Protection shall
be of IP44 in accordance with BS EN 60529;
9) No loose connections or tapped joints shall be allowed anywhere in the Site,

office area, stores and other areas. Penalty as per Clause 7. [Financial
Deduction/Withholding] shall be put in case of observation of any tapped joints;
10) All equipment shall have the provision for major switch/cut-off switch in the
equipment itself;
11) Precautions shall be taken, either by earthing or by suitable means, to prevent

danger arising when any conductor (other than circuit conductor) which may
reasonably foreseeable become charged because of either the use of a system, or
a fault in a system, becomes so charged; and

12) All electrical equipment shall be permanently numbered, and a record kept of the
date of issue, date of last inspection and recommended inspection period.
4.10.7. Appropriate electrical protection shall be provided for all circuits, against over load,
short circuit and earth fault current.
4.10.8. For supplies to mobile or transportable equipment where operating of the equipment
subjects the cable to flexing, the cable shall conform to any of these codes BS
6007/BS 6500/BS 7375.
4.10.9. Flexible cords with a conductor cross sectional area smaller than 1.5 mm2 shall not
be used and insulated flexible cable shall conform to BS 6500 and BS 7375.
4.10.11. Power Tools:
The Contractor shall ensure that:
1) Electric tools are properly grounded or/and double insulated;
2) Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters (GFCIs)/Residual Current Circuit Breakers

(RCCBs) shall be used with all portable electric tool operated especially outdoors
or in wet condition;
3) All power tools shall have guards at their nip points.
4) Safety guards used on right angle head or vertical portable grinders must cover a
minimum of 180 degree of the wheel and the spindle / wheel specifications shall
be checked.
5) When any work / operation need to be performed repeatedly or continuously,

tools specifically designed for that work shall be used. The same is applicable to
detachable tool bit also.
6) Leather aprons and gloves shall be used as an additional personal protection

auxiliary to withstand kickback.
4.11. Illumination
4.11.1. The Contractor shall provide sufficient site lighting, of the right type and at the right
place for it to be properly effective as per the guidelines of BOCW Act & Rules
4.12. Welding, Cutting
4.12.1. Gas cylinders in use shall be kept upright on a custom-built stand or trolley fitted

with a bracket to accommodate the hoses and equipment or otherwise secured. The
metal cap shall be kept in place to protect the valve when the cylinder is not connected
for use.
4.12.2. Test Certificate for cylinders and Vendor license shall be obtained. Gas Cylinder Act
& Rules shall always be followed at workplace.
4.12.3. All gas cylinders shall be fixed with pressure regulator and dial gauges.
4.12.4. Non-return valve and flashback arrester shall be fixed at both end of cylinder and
torch.
4.12.5. Domestic LPG cylinders shall not be used for gas welding and cutting purpose.
4.12.6. Dry Chemical Pressure (DCP) or CO2 type Fire Extinguisher not less than 5 kg shall
be fixed at or near to welding process zone in an easily accessible location. Fire
extinguisher shall confirm to IS 2190:1992.
4.12.7. Oxygen cylinders and flammable gas cylinders shall be stored separately, at least 6.6
m (20 feet) apart or separated by a fire proof, 1.5 m (5 feet) high partition. Flammable
substances shall not be stored within 15 m of cylinder storage areas.
4.12.8. Welding grounds and returns shall be securely attached to the work by cable lugs, by
clamps in the case of stranded conductors, or by bolts for strip conductors. The
ground cable will not be attached to equipment or existing installations or apparatus.
4.12.9. All electrical installations shall meet the IS: 5571: 1997 and NFPA 70 for gas cylinder
storage area and other hazardous areas.
4.12.10. Hose clamp or clip shall be used to connect hoses firmly in both sides of cylinders
and torches.
4.12.11. Use firewatchers if there is a possibility of ignition unobserved by the operator (e.g.
on the other side of bulkheads).
4.12.12. Transformer used for electrical arc welding shall be fixed with ammeter and
voltmeter and fixed with separate main power switch.
4.12.13. Use a low voltage open circuit relay device if welding with alternating current in
constricted or damp places.
4.12.14. The contractor shall ensure that all welding sets used are of adequate capacity and of
suitable type approved by CIIBOCC.
4.12.15. Competency Certificate as specified by Engineer shall be ensured for the Welders &
Gas cutters.

4.13. Excavation General
4.13.1. References:
1) The Gujarat / Maharashtra BOCW Acts and Rules;
2) IS: 3764 -1992 (Re-affirmed 1996): Excavation Work Code of Safety;
3) IS: 4756 -1978 (Reaffirmed 1996): Safety Code for Tunnelling Work;
4) BS 6164: 2011 (Code of practice for health and safety in tunnelling in the
construction industry);
5) BS EN 16191: 2014 (Tunnelling Machinery-Safety requirements);
6) Technical Guideline for Safety Construction of Public Works, 2009 (Ministry of

Land, Infrastructure and Transport) JAPAN;
7) Industrial Safety and Health Law -The Second Section-Works for Tunnel
Construction, Japan;
8) Guideline for Accident Preventive Measures by fall of Rocks at Tunnel Face

under Rock Tunnelling Works, 2016, the Ministry of Health, Labour and
Welfare, Japan;
9) Guideline for Dust Measure under Tunnel Work Condition, 2008, the Ministry of
Health, Labour and Welfare, Japan;
10) Guideline for Safety Measure for Shield Tunnelling, 2017, the Ministry of Health,
Labour and Welfare, Japan;
11) High Pressure Air Act Rev.2016, Japan; and
12) IS 4081:2013 Blasting and related drilling operations-code of safety.
4.13.2. Notification of Intention of carry out Excavation.
The Contractor carrying out any excavation work or tunnelling work shall, within 30
days, prior to the commencement of such excavation work, inform in writing the
detailed layout plans, method of construction and schedule of such excavation work
to the Chief Inspector as per the Gujarat BOCW Rules, 2003 /Maharashtra BOCW
rules 2007 in concurrence with the Engineer.
4.13.3. Warning Signs and Notices:
The Contractor shall ensure that suitable warning signs or notices, required for the
safety of workers carrying out the work of an excavation, shall be displayed or erected

at conspicuous places in Hindi, Gujarati, Marathi and in a language understood by

most of such workers at such excavation work;
4.13.4. Register of Employment etc.:
The Contractor shall ensure that at the Site, where an excavation is being carried on,
a register of employment of the Workers carrying out such excavation work, is
maintained and produced on demand to the Engineer’s inspector having jurisdiction.
4.13.5. Stability of Structure
1) Where any worker engaged in excavation is exposed to hazard of falling or sliding

material or article from any bank or side of such excavation which is more than
1.50 m above his footing, such worker is protected by adequate piling and bracing
against such bank or side;
2) The excavation and its vicinity are checked by a responsible person referred in
BOCW rule after every rain, storm or other occurrences carrying hazards and in
case a hazard is noticed at such checking, adequate protection against slides and
cave in to prevent such hazard;
3) Temporary sheet piling installed for the construction of a retaining wall after
excavation is not removed except on the advice of the responsible person referred
to in BOCW after an inspection carried out by such responsible person;
4) Excavated material is not stored at least 0.65 m from the edge of an open
excavation or trench and the banks of such excavation or trench are stripped of
loose rocks and other materials which may slide, roll or fall upon a worker
operating below such bank;
4.14. Mechanized Excavation
4.14.1. Apart from general precautions, the Contractor shall ensure that:
1) Continuous and proper super vision is arranged if the excavation work is more
than 2.0m deep;
2) The installation of a head guard on the driver's seat in case of risk for rock falling;
3) The arrangement of a conductor when working at following location:
a. Near roads, Buildings, and Other facilities;
b. Cliff top;
c. Place with risk for rock falling and collapse;

d. Place where machine works with other workers at the same time;
e. Working on the road;
4.14.2. The Contractor shall follow the safe excavation gradient according to kinds of soil
and excavation height mentioned below.
Excavation Surface
Kind of Soil Bank Height
Gradient (Degree)
Less than 5m high 90

- Rock and Hard Clay
More than 5m high 75
Less than 2m high 90
More than 2m high, 75
- Others
Less than 5m high
More than 5m high 60
- Sand Less than 5m high, or Less
than 35deg.
- Condition of Easy
Ground Collapse by Less than 2m high, or Less
than 45deg.
Blasting
*) Select the moderate excavation gradient in case of soft soil condition.
4.14.3. Piling, Shoring and Bracing
1) Shores and braces used in excavation are of adequate dimensions and are so
placed as to be effective for their intended purposes; and
2) Earth support shores or braces used in excavation bear against a footing of

sufficient area and stability to prevent the shifting of such shores and braces.
4.14.4. Safe Access
The Contractor shall ensure at the Site that ladders, stair cases or ramps are provided
for safe access to and egress from excavation where the depth of such excavation
exceeds 1.5 m and such ladders, stair cases or ramps comply with the relevant
national standards.
4.14.5. Trenches
The Contractor shall ensure that a trench or excavation is protected against falling of
a person by suitable measures if the depth of such trench or excavation exceeds 1.5
m and such protection is an improved protection in accordance with the design and
drawing of a responsible person, where such depth exceeds 4.0 m.

4.14.6. Depth of Trenches
The Contractor shall ensure at the Site of a construction work that:
1) Where the depth of a trench requires two length of sheet piling, one above the
other, the lower piling is set inside the bottom strings or wales of the upper piling
and such sheet piling is driven down and braced as the excavation continues; and
2) All metal sheet piles used in excavation or a trench are welded end to end and
secured by other similar means.
4.14.7. Positioning and Use of Machinery
The Contractor shall ensure that any machinery used in excavation work is positioned
and operated in such a way that such machinery does not endanger the operator of
such machinery or any other person in the vicinity.
4.14.8. Breathing Apparatus
1) Suitable breathing apparatus is provided to a worker wherever there is a risk of

oxygen deficiency or presence of harmful gases; and
2) Such breathing apparatus is maintained in good working condition always.
4.14.9. Pneumatic Tools
1) The Contractor shall ensure at the Site that supply lines to pneumatic tools used
are fitted with water trap or safety chain or safety wire.
2) Cylinders shall be tested and certified by competent person as per the national
guidelines.
4.14.10. Signals
The Contractor shall ensure at the Site that the standard audio or video signals are
used in excavation work and are conspicuously located or displayed near entrance to
the workplace and in such other locations as may be necessary to bring such signals
to notice of all workers employed in such excavation work.
4.14.11. Clearances
The contractor shall ensure that:
1) The minimum lateral clearance of is maintained between any part of a vehicle

and any fixture or any equipment used in an excavation work after allowing the
throw or swing of such fixture or equipment; and

2) For a locomotive drive at excavation or tunnelling work ,Adequate overhead

clearance or of any other dimension in accordance with the relevant national
standard above the seat of the driver and above the platform where such driver
stands is maintained
4.14.12. Storing of Oil and Fuel
1) All oils, greases or fuels stored in the Site are kept in tightly sealed containers
and in fire resistant areas at safe distance away from explosive and other
flammable chemicals, as per the legal standard and all permissions from relevant
authority shall be obtained.
2) Appropriate flame proof installation is used in such storage areas as specified in

above clause; and
3) The instructions regarding steps to be followed to fight outbreak of fire, at the

Site, written in Hindi, local language and understood by most of the Workers
employed on such area, are displayed at conspicuous and vulnerable places of
such excavation work.
4.14.13. Diaphragms
The Contractor shall ensure that all diaphragms which are in the form of horizontal
decks across a shaft used at excavation work are securely anchored.
4.14.14. Portable Electrical Hand Tool
The Contractor shall ensure that all portable electrical hand tools and inspection
lamps used underground or in a confined space at an excavation work are operated at
a voltage not exceeding 24 V.
4.14.15. Live Wire
The Contractor shall ensure that there is no exposed live wire in working areas-at the
excavation work which is accessible to the Workers other than those authorized to
work on such live lines.
4.15. Tunnelling Works
4.15.1. The Contractor shall inform in writing to the Director General of Government of
Gujarat/Maharashtra within 30 days, prior to the commencement of any tunnelling
work.
4.15.2. The Contractor shall appoint a Project Engineer and responsible person for safe
operation for tunnelling work and who shall perform duties as mentined in BOCW
Act and Rules.

4.15.3. In addition to general precaution such as display of warning sign/notices, deployment

of trained staff, housekeeping, etc., the Contractor shall ensure that:
1) Every compressed air system in a tunnel is provided with emergency power

supply for maintaining continued supply of compressed air as per BOCWR;
2) Watertight bulkhead doors are installed at the entrance of a tunnel to prevent

flooding;
3) All portable electrical hand tools and inspection lamp used in underground and
confined space at an excavation or tunnelling work is operated at a voltage not
exceeding 24V;
4) Only flame proof equipment of appropriate type as per IS: 5571:2000 and or
another relevant national standard is used inside the tunnel;
5) Petrol or LPG of any other flammable substances are not used, stored inside the
tunnel except with prior approval from the Engineer, and no oxy-acetylene gas is
used in a compressed air environment in excavation or tunnelling;
6) Adequate number of water outlets provided for firefighting purpose, an audible

fire alarm and adequate number and types of fire extinguishers are provided and
maintained;
7) Temperature in any working chamber in an excavation or tunnelling work where

workers employed does not exceed 29°C as per BOCWR; and
8) All working areas in a free air tunnel are provided with ventilation system as
approved by the Director General of Government of Gujarat/Maharashtra and the
fresh air supplied in such tunnel is not less than 6 m3/min for each worker
employed in tunnel as per BOCWR.
9) The excavated areas are made safe by use of suitably designed and installed steel
sets, rock bolts or similar other means;
10) The responsible person referred to in BOCW examines and inspects the
workplaces in a tunnel before the commencement of work in such tunnel, and at
regular intervals thereafter, to ensure safety of the Workers in such tunnel; and
11) The portal areas of a tunnel with loose soil, or rock, likely to cause injury to a
person are adequately protected with supports.
12) Surroundings of a shaft used in excavation or tunnel work are protected from
being washed away;

13) The Contractor shall ensure safe means of access to enter a shaft. A lift is
provided for transport of the Workers and materials of articles at an excavation
or tunnelling work required to descent more than 40 m in a shaft.
4.15.4. Means of Communication
1) Reliable and effective means of communication such as telephone or walkie-

talkie is provided and are maintained in working order for arranging better and
effective communication at an excavation or tunnelling work at the following
locations, namely:
a) Working chamber at the face of an excavation;
b) Intervals of 100 m along the tunnel;
c) Working chamber side of a man lock near the door of such man lock;
d) Interior of each chamber of a man lock;
e) Location conspicuous a lock attendant's station;
f) A compressor plant;
g) A first aid station; and
h) Outside the portal and the top of the shaft.
2) Such number of bells and whistles are made available always at the locations
referred to in Sub-Clauses a) to h) above as are necessary for the safety of persons
at such locations.
4.15.5. Fire Resistant Hoses
The Contractor shall ensure that no fire hydraulic hoses other than fire resistant
hydraulic hoses are used when hydraulically activated machinery and equipment is
employed in tunnels.
4.15.6. Water for Firefighting
1) Adequate number of water outlets are provided on excavation or tunnelling work

and are readily made accessible throughout the tunnel for firefighting purposes
and such water outlets are maintained for effective firefighting;

2) All air locks are equipped with firefighting facilities at excavation or tunnelling
work;
3) An audible fire alarm is provided to warn the Workers whenever a fire breaks out
on an excavation or tunnelling work;
4) Adequate number and types of fire extinguishers, m or in accordance with

relevant national standards, and made readily available to fight any outbreak of
fire at an excavation or tunnelling work;
5) Fire extinguishers with vaporizing liquids and high-pressure carbon dioxide are
not used in tunnels or other confined spaces; and
6) The instructions regarding steps to be followed to fight outbreak of fire, at an

excavation or tunnelling work, written in Hindi, local language and understood
by most of the Workers employed on such excavation or tunnelling work, are
displayed at conspicuous and vulnerable places of such excavation or tunnelling
work.
4.15.7. Flooding
1) Water tight bulkhead doors are installed at the entrance of a tunnel to prevent
flooding during a tunnelling work, where more than one tunnel is driven from a
shaft;
2) All necessary measures are taken to ensure that no worker is trapped in any
isolated section of a tunnel when any bulkhead door of such tunnel is closed; and
3) Where there is likelihood of flooding or water rushing into a tunnel during a

tunnelling work, arrangements are made for immediate starting of water pumps
to take out water of such flooding or water rushing and for giving alert signals to
the Workers and other persons to keep them away from danger.
4.15.8. Steel Curtains
The Contractor shall ensure that air tight steel curtains are provided in areas liable to flooding
at tunnelling work and in case of descending tunnel such curtains are provided in the top half
of such tunnels to ensure the retention of pockets of air for rescue purpose.
4.15.9. Rest Shelters
1) Where workers employed in a compressed air environment in a tunnelling work

are required to remain at the Site for one hour or more after decompression from

pressure exceeding 1.0 bar, adequate and suitable facilities are provided for such
workers to rest;
2) A first aid room is provided and is readily available at the Site of a tunnelling
work.
4.15.10. Permissible Limit of Exposure of Chemicals
The Contractor shall ensure that the responsible person referred to in BOCW
conducts necessary test before the commencement of a tunnelling work for the day
and at suitable intervals as fixed by CIIBOC to ensure that the permissible limits of
exposure are not exceeded, and a record of such test is maintained and is made
available for inspection to CIIBOCC, on demand.
4.15.11. Ventilation
The Contractor shall ensure that all working areas in a free air tunnel are provided
with ventilation system as approved by CIIBOC and the fresh air supplied in such
tunnel is not less than 6.0 m3/min for each worker employed underground in such
tunnel and the free air flow movement inside such tunnel is not less than 9.0 m/min.
4.15.12. Rock Fall Prevention (NATM)
The Contractor shall:
1) Draw up a method statement that includes preventive measure to fall of rock,

tunnel face watching, evacuation methods from the face, and the construction
sequence etc. to ensure that workers are informed.
4.15.13. Dust Emission Control (NATM)
Dust control plan shall be prepared and followed by the Contractor against dust
emission in the tunnel
1) Monitoring regularly every month for dusts concentration, wind velocity, air
capacity of ventilation system;
2) Direct air flow with the upper limit of dust concentration less than 3mg/m3;
3) Keep monitoring record including date, method, location, condition, results, and
evaluation of results, measurer’s name; and
4) The effective and good quality respiratory protective devices shall be provided
for all workers and ensured constant monitoring of their usage.
4.15.14. Tunnel Boring Machine Works (TBM)
Bored tunnelling by using Tunnel Boring Machine, hereafter called "TBM"

sometimes causes serious industrial accident due to extraordinary flooding or

collapse of segmental linings at a face of tunnels. The Contractor shall take adequate
measures for TBM operation in terms of not only observance of laws and rules, but
also the latest case study to eradicate such industrial accident and as per good
industrial practices to maintain safety at all times.
4.15.15. Method Statement shall be prepared based on adequate risk assessment.
4.15.16. Evacuation and Training
1) Implementation of the training for evacuation and firefighting immediately

before the distance reaches about 100m from the portal to the tunnel face; and
2) Implementation of evacuation training by a responsible person appointed in

terms of dealing with technical matters.
4.16. Blasting and Drilling
4.16.1. The following standards whichever is more stringent shall be applicable:
1) Safety Code for Blasting and Drilling IS 4081:2013;
2) Safety Code for tunnelling Work IS 4756-1978;
3) Code of practice for construction of tunnels IS 5878; and
4) Other Relevant National Legislations & IS Codes.
4.16.2. The Contractor shall:
1) Appoint the manager, the deputy manager and officer in charge of handling
explosives to prevent handling accidents;
2) When doing blasting work, the Contractor shall appoint a work supervisor from
among those who can take on the blasting work;
3) Blast workers shall be able to distinguish themselves from other workers by signs
of armbands, protective caps, etc.; and
4) The Contractor shall establish a danger zone, with the warning signs displayed
like, clearing card, red flag, etc. and make the restricted entry zone.
4.16.3. Storage in Gunpowder:
1) Storage of explosives is regulated by the Indian Explosives Act, 1884 and

provision thereunder shall be strictly observed;

2) Permissions shall be taken by the relevant authority when the explosive amount
is more than the prescribed amount mentioned in the act;
3) Explosive of a prescribed volume or less are to be stored in a safe place and as

per prescribed precautions with the approval of the authority by "the Provision of
the Storage Facility outside the Gunpowder";
4) If the estimated number of explosives to be consumed per day is more than the
prescribed amount, it is necessary to prepare explosives handling stations to
prepare for explosives management and blasting (excluding the production of a
master dynamite and handling works); and
5) Adequate precautions shall be taken for storing the gunpowder as per the relevant
applicable laws.
4.16.4. Manage Quantity
Records shall be maintained related to explosives requirements, consumption and

remaining quantity.
4.16.5. Precautions:
1) When there is a danger of lightning strikes then blasting works shall be stopped;
2) Before blasting, sufficient warning shall be given to enable the people working
in the blasting area to get off the danger zone;
3) All persons, other than the blaster, shall leave the danger area at least 10 minutes
before the blasting starts;
4) The danger zone shall be suitably cordoned off and flag men posted at important
points;
5) No loose materials, such as tools, drilling implements, etc., shall be left on the
rock surfaces to be blasted;
6) Blasting in the open shall be carried out during fixed hours every day or on fixed
days in the week. This information shall be amply publicized, and the following
precautions observed:
a. All approaches to the Site, where regular blasting operations are

undertaken, shall be sign-posted for warning the public and indicating the
days and timings when blasting is to be carried out;
b. All approaches to the Site, shall be closed by barriers at not less than 400
m, 10 min before firing is to take place; and

c. Loud wailing note of not less than 1 min duration shall be sounded on
sirens to warn the public before commencement of firing; and
d. The end of firing operations shall be followed by sounding an all clear

signal on the sirens as a continuous long note of not less than 1-minute
duration etc.
4.16.6. Drilling and Loading:
1) No drilling shall be started until previous holes in the blasted area are flushed
with air and water;
2) Use of short pieces of fuse shall be prohibited for detonation purposes;
3) Loading and drilling shall not be carried out at the same time in the same area;
4) Drilling shall not be resumed after blasts have been fired until a thorough
examination has been made to make sure that there is no unexploded charge in
the remaining butts of old holes or otherwise, which the drills may strike;
5) Rock drillers shall be equipped with approved respirators for use in siliceous
dusty atmosphere arising out of drilling operations. Wet drilling may be used for
arresting generation of silica and other harmful dust; and
6) In tunnelling work, welding/cutting of metal shall not be done, inside the tunnel
at the time of loading at the face, until the blast has been fired.
4.16.7. Connection Work of the Electric Wire of the Electric Detonator:
1) Be sure to inspect the bus before connecting it to the leg line so that there is no
disconnection, connection leakage, connection difference etc.;
2) Considerations on Ignition Work of Electric Blasting:
a. The ignition position shall be a safe place isolated according to the degree
of blast; and
b. The connection between the blasting machine and the bus bar shall be
done just before ignition.
4.16.8. In deciding the sizes of wire, fuses, circuits, exploders, blasting switches, etc.
instructions issued by the manufacturers of these articles shall be followed.
4.16.9. All electric blasting caps shall be tested singly and when connected in a circuit in
series using only an approved type of circuit continuity tester or ohmmeter.
4.16.10. As far as possible, blasting shall be carried out using suitable exploder with 2.5

percent excess capacity. Electric power from the mains shall be used only when it is
necessary.
4.16.11. Transportation of Explosive:
1) Transportation of explosive shall be done in properly labelled, non-metallic and

leak proof container and covered with the waterproof and fire-resistant tarpaulin;
2) Adequate number of fire extinguishers shall be carried in the explosive van;
3) Permission from local authority shall be taken for transportation of explosive;
4) Vehicle shall not be refuelled if explosive is loaded in it, except emergency even
then only when the motor has been stopped; and
5) When transporting an electric detonator, make sure that the legs are not drawn
out.
4.16.12. Blasting with Safety Fuse
The minimum length of fuse shall not be less than that required by state laws; in any
case, it shall not be less than 750 mm. The burning rate of the fuse shall be not more
than 600 mm/min.
4.16.13. Disposal of Explosive
No explosive shall be abandoned. These shall be disposed of strictly as per approved

method.
4.17. Compressed Air Works
In case compressed air is used in such excavation or tunnelling work or any work
incidental to or required for such excavation or tunnelling work, the technical details and
drawings of all man-locks and medical locks together with names and addresses of all
construction medical officers having qualification as laid down in Schedule XI annexed
to Maharashtra/Gujarat BOCW Rules and so appointed by the Contractor for the purpose
of such excavation or tunnelling work shall be sent to CIIBOC.
4.17.1. Air Supply Intake Point
The Contractor shall ensure that the air intake points for all air compressors are
located at places where such intake air does not get contaminated with dust, fumes,
vapor and exhaust gases or other contaminants.
4.17.2. Emergency Generators

1) Every compressed air system in a tunnel is provided with emergency power

supply system for maintaining continued supply of compressed air.
2) The emergency power supply system is maintained and is readily available

always at an excavation or tunnelling work.
4.17.3. Bulk Head and Air Locks
1) A bulk head or air tight diaphragms retaining compressed air, when used within
a tunnel or a shaft, is constructed to withstand the maximum pressure at 1.25
times of the maximum working pressure of such bulk head or diaphragm and such
bulk head or diaphragm is tested before its each use by a responsible person
referred to in BOCW rule to ensure that such bulk head or diaphragm is in proper
working order; and
2) Such responsible person keeps the record of each test referred to in Clause 1) and
such record is produced for inspection to the inspector having jurisdiction on
demand.
4.17.4. Transformer
The Contractor shall ensure that no transformer is used in any section of a tunnel
under compressed air unless such transformer is of the dry type and conforms to the
relevant national standards.
4.17.5. Quality and Quantity of Air
1) Every working chamber at an excavation or tunnelling work where compressed

air is used, the supply of such air is maintained not less than 0.3 m3/min per
person working therein; and
2) A reserve supply of compressed air is made available always for man-locks and
medical-locks used at a tunnelling work.
3) The air supplied in a compressed air environment at a tunnelling work is as far as

practicable free from odour and other contaminants, namely dust, fumes and other
toxic substances
4.17.6. Man-Locks and Working in Compressed Air Environment

1) Man-locks used at a tunnelling work are of adequate strength, made of sound

material and designed to withstand any air pressure, internal or external, to which
it may be subjected to in the normal use or in an emergency;
a. Man-locks used at a tunnelling work are airtight and devices are provided
for sealing the doors when such locks are under pressure;
b. There is adequate room available for the Worker for operating in the man
lock used at tunnelling work; and
c. Where work is carried out in any compressed air tunnel, a man lock in
accordance with the relevant national standards is used for such tunnel.
2) In addition:
a. Where a man-lock is used at tunnelling work, safety instructions in Hindi

or Gujarati and in language understood by majority of the Workers
employed therein are displayed at conspicuous place at such tunnelling
work;
b. Except in an emergency, compression and de-compression operations are

carried out in a man-lock used at tunnelling work;
c. The Worker and who had previously received training with a trained
worker to work in a compressed air environment at tunnelling work is
employed to work independently in such a compressed air environment;
d. The Worker who had undergone three de-compressions from a pressure

exceeding 1.0 bar in a period of 8.0 hours at tunnelling work is not
allowed to enter a compressed air environment except for the purpose of
carrying out rescue work;
e. The Worker employed in a compressed air environment for a period of

8.0 hours in a day at tunnelling work is not employed again in such
environment unless he has spent not less than 12.0 consecutive hours of
rest at atmospheric pressure;
f. No worker is engaged in a compressed air environment at a pressure

which exceeds 3.0 bars at tunnelling work unless prior permission, in
writing, has been obtained from CIIBOC for such engagement;
g. No worker is employed in a compressed air environment for more than

14.0 consecutive days in a month at tunnelling work;
h. A register of employment of all the Workers employed in compressed air

environment at tunnelling work is maintained;

i. An identification badge is supplied to the Worker employed in

compressed air environment work. The badge contains his name, location
of the medical lock allotted to him for work, the telephone number of the
construction medical officer concerned for his treatment and the
instructions in case of his illness of unknown and doubtful causes;
j. Record of all identification badges supplied to the Workers;
k. Every worker whose name appears in the register wears the badge
supplied to him at all times during his duty hours at tunnelling work; and
l. Suitable warning signs are displayed, in the compressed air environment

at tunnelling work, for the prohibition of followings.
4.17.7. Use of Alcoholic Drinks:
Use and carrying of lighters, matches or other sources of ignition, smoking and entry
to person who has consumed alcoholic drinks are strictly prohibited.
4.17.8. Medical Lock
1) A suitably constructed medical lock is maintained at tunnelling work where the

Workers are employed in a working chamber at a pressure exceeding 1.0 bar; and
2) Where more than 100 workers are employed in a compressed air working
environment exceeding 1.0 bar at tunnelling work, one medical lock is provided
for every 100 workers or part thereof and such medical lock is situated as near as
possible to the man lock used at such tunnelling work.
4.18. Material Transportation
4.18.1. The Contractor shall develop the System Procedure/Methods Statement for heavy/big
material/machinery transportation such as Rolling Stock, Transformer, and Bridge
Main Girder, etc.
4.18.2. The Contractor shall ensure that the person in charge shall inspects the safety
implementation like properly fixing of wire with vehicle slab bed, condition of
vehicle breaks etc. before starting the job and record the accidents and records.
4.18.3. The Contractor shall ensure that every vehicle/moving machinery shall have a signal
man who has a whistle, a flag or a signal light (in the night) with striking clothes and
stands at a safe visible place from a machine operator by means of the proper signal
and way determined.
4.18.4. The induction related to moving and parking safely shall be given to driver/operator

like parking construction vehicles at a specified place with a parking brake and
making sure to put a drag.
4.18.5. The driver /operator shall follow the guidelines while transporting materials as per
The Rules of Road Regulations, 1989.
4.19. Foundation Works (Piling & open caisson)
4.19.1. The Contractor is required to evaluate the risk in each activity and suggest a control
measures of piling works:
1) Covering of bore holes with adequate warning signs;
2) Cage to be lowered by using crane;
3) The auxiliary hook of the rig shall not be used to pull or lower the cage in bore
hole;
4) The tremie pipe lowering and lifting after concreting shall be done by using crane;
5) Control measure to arrest polymer spillage from the Site to avoid contaminating
the surface drains;
6) An entry restraining fence shall be provided around the pier excavation

completion;
7) No man suffering from any chronic disease, alcoholic excess, ear or heart troubles
or having a sluggish blood circulation or who has excess of fat shall be employed
as a diver;
8) After underwater concrete working, ventilation inside the caisson shall be

prepared sufficiently; and
9) When using the Pneumatic Caisson Construction Method (PCCM), refer to 4.17
Compressed Air Works.
4.20. Batching Plant and Casting Yard
4.20.1. The Contractor is required to evaluate the risk in each activity and suggest Control
Measures:
1) Adequate space between the casting bed, segment storage area and the adjoining
road shall be maintained so that a steel railing could be installed to segregate the
gantry crane movement area from the road;
2) LOTO (Lock Out Tag Out) system shall be installed.

3) The aggregate/sand storage area shall be kept under the full coverage of effective
water sprinkler to avoid dust generation;
4) The entire batching plant/aggregate storage Area shall be adequately walled of

sufficient height, above which the Contractor is required to erect green dust
protective net. This is a mandatory requirement to avoid dust in surrounding
environment;
5) The batching plant and casting yard required to obtain ‘’Consent to Establish’’
and ‘’Consent to Operate’’ certificate from State Pollution Control Board;
6) The batching plant/casting yard shall be barricaded and made as a compulsory

Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) zone;
7) Time office, canteen, drinking water, toilet and rest place shall be suitably located
for the easy access to workers. All the facilities shall be properly cleaned and
maintained during the entire period of operation;
8) Drainage shall be effectively provided, and waste water shall be disposed after
proper treatment; and
9) Manual handling of cement shall be avoided. Whenever it is necessary the

workmen shall be given full body protection, hand protection and respiratory
protection as a basic measure of ensuring better health.
4.21. Form Works
1) Ensure the inspection of the formwork assembly before and during the placement of
concrete; and
2) Ensure no attaching equipment to the formwork assembly unless specifically

designed for this purpose; and not using a stripping process which may cause damage
to the permanent structure
4.22. Concrete Works
1) Concrete pumping equipment, trucks etc. are not to be washed down on site and any
waste-water, concrete slurry or other contaminants are to be contained; and
2) These contaminants are not to be discharged into or onto roadways, footpaths, gutters,
drainage systems, watercourses or any other surface area that will result in damage
to the environment or contravenes environmental legislation.
4.23. Pier Casting Works
1) Using crane to hold the pier reinforcement during the time gap between de-staging
and placement of shutter; and

2) Vertically placed re-bar rods shall be properly tied.
4.24. Bridge Erection Works
4.24.1. References:
1) The Gujarat BOCW Acts and Rules;
2) The Maharashtra BOCW Acts and Rules;
3) Bridge Manual Indian Railways;
4) Safety Management Guideline for Prestressed Concrete Bridge Works (Revised

Edition 2015), Japan Prestressed Concrete Engineering Association;
5) Safety Assessment with regard to Steel Bridge Erection Works 1985, Ministry of
Health, Labour and Welfare;
6) Safety Precautions at the Site Adjacent to Track 2015, Indian Railways; and
7) Standard Specifications of Construction Works about Safety Track Open for

Traffic 2005, East Japan Railway Company.
4.24.2. General
As bridge erection works are one of the riskiest jobs, the Contractor shall take utmost
precaution at all stages like; planning, establishing temporary yard, casting segments,
transporting segments, fabrication and operation of erection machinery, if any,
launching of segments/lifting of segments, pre-stressing, cutting and welding, auto
(or manual) launching and dismantling of erection machineries.
For pre-stressed concrete bridges, the Contractor shall further ensure that:
1) A responsible person shall be appointed for post-tensioning works testing and

inspection of tendon tensioning devices and using material;
2) Installation of protective board behind a tensioning jack and keep out behind a
jack during tensioning;
3) Use of protective glasses, laver gloves, and masks during grouting for safety of
the Workers; and
4) Fall prevention installation of overall boarding at the bottom of a bridge and

installation of funnel type boarding at the side of a bridge during construction in
case of RFO (Railway Flyover) or ROB (Road over Bridge) for preventing the
flying and fall of materials and tools by safety net, shall be ensured.
4.24.3. The Contractor’s Obligation

The Contractor shall prepare a comprehensive method statement for the bridge
erection works, adhering to the SHE conditions laid down herein. Particular reference
shall be made to the provisions on working at height. As the entire process of
launching/lifting has to be undertaken at the Site especially during night time, the
safety of workers is of paramount important. Daily inspection of scaffold structure
and mechanical equipment for the traveller crane shall be done.
4.24.4. Basic Consideration under Site Condition:
1) Erection works over or adjacent roads or highways:
a. The work area shall be demarcated properly, and route map and traffic
management plan shall be developed and implemented with proper sign
ages and cautions;
b. The Contractor shall ensure the implementation of proper stop traffic and
detour plan;
c. The Contractor shall arrange the proper guide and signs to be followed
while working on highway or adjacent roads, railways; and
d. The Contractor shall plan and establish all the required measures for the
protection of overhead wires and buried utilities.
i. The regular inspection is done for all the installed protection

equipment’s;
ii. The movement restriction site plan to be developed with defined

operation path for safe working at site;
iii. watchmen shall be appointed who are given training related to all
type of traffic management and all signals used for smooth traffic
flow and site transportation and works;
iv. The railway schedule is taken in consideration while planning the

site works and ensures the safe management system with the
details given regarding the kind of works suspended while a train
is passing and clarifying the way of opening or closing railway in
case of track closure works.
e. For steel truss bridges;
i. The Contractor must install the protective net just after erecting
truss upper chord material; and
ii. The Contractor must install safety operation path to an end of

erected member and a cross point of lateral bracing.

f. The Contractor may use any of the erection methods. However, following
general points will be kept in view and ensured as applicable-
i. The Contractor shall develop and confirm the Engineer his

Method Statement with details of position of bearing, jacking
operation, roller passing etc.;
ii. Detailed inspection report related to the movement and condition

of superstructure from the place of launching equipment and
rollers shall be given to the Engineer;
iii. The Contractor shall give confirmation of binding situation such

as a bolting erection member;
iv. The Contractor shall give confirmation of displacement per every

erection phase;
v. The Contractor shall give confirmation of fixing situation for

bearings;
vi. The Contractor must take measures to avoid a fall and lateral
buckling of member; and
vii. The Contractor shall take measures of fall prevention for main
superstructure.
4.25. Building and Roof Erection Works
4.25.1. The Contractor shall plan erection sequence and work procedures properly under
competent and experienced personnel to ensure the safety of workers and prevent
structure failure during erection:
1) Contractor shall develop and confirm with the Engineer his method statement
with details;
2) The stability of structural members is to be ensured by means of ties, braces,

anchor/fixing bolts, or other suitable means before releasing lifting gear, slings,
chains etc;
3) Tag lines must be attached to the ends of components/loads to maintain control

during crane lifting operations; and
4) Structure stability is to be ensured always. Unattended and incomplete

buildings/structures are NOT to be left in an unsafe and hazardous condition, to
pose a risk to the safety and health of site personnel or the public.

4.26. Roof Erection Works
1) The Workers placing and securing roof battens are to be protected and are to work
from an enclosed environment (e.g. scaffolding, deck guardrail or equivalent) and
work up from the bottom of the truss/rafter towards and finish at the ridge /peak of
the roof framing;
2) The Workers are having at least one secured batten to stand on and one secured batten
in front of them as a fall protection/rest while they are securing the third or subsequent
battens in place and/or they can work from an approved work platform;
3) When the spacing of trusses and roof battens exceed 600mm the appropriate
procedures are to be considered and applied after conducting a risk assessment to
provide the optimum fall protection directly under the Workers during placement of
roofing battens and/or roof sheeting.
4) The Workers are not to work in the areas that are not protected by edge protection,
scaffolding, fall barriers etc. unless a risk assessment has been conducted and they
have other means of protection such as a travel restraint system; and
5) If the roof pitch exceeds 26 degrees a further risk assessment must be undertaken to
assess if extra precautions shall be put in place. Any extra measures
identified/implemented can also be put in place for roof pitches less than 26 degrees
especially if the risk is assessed at medium or high or the nature of the project
warrants their use.
4.27. Overhead Contact Wire Works
4.27.1. Before starting of works using rack vehicle/moving scaffold/ladder/insulation

tower/step ladder, etc., the Contractor’s operation in charge shall confirm as follows:
1) The work sequence shall be determined while using Ariel Track vehicle.
Communication system between drivers and conductors shall be developed and
adopted;
2) A deck which must be used by workers, shall have enough capacity of carry
necessary loads for work at a high place with a pre-operation inspection; and
3) The Workers shall be given the safety protection equipment which has enough
capacity to hold necessary loads to prevent any accidental fall with a pre-
operation inspection.
4.27.2. During working, the Contractor’s operation in charge shall confirm as follows:
1) State of electrical equipment installation and a route of going up and down from
ground;

2) The Worker is given required training for electrical works at height and the
Worker must use a safety rope, an auxiliary rope, a fall prevention equipment
such as a rolip which is a fall arrest device for a fixed rope when they work at
high place;
3) The Worker shall fix the grip of an auxiliary ropes at the upper position of their
safety ropes;
4) The Worker uses special wires or a lift when delivering materials and tools from
ground to high place;
5) The Contractor shall ensure that no one lean out of the rail of the track vehicles,
or take a foot on the rail;
6) Shall take all the precautions for self-propellant or roll prevention when bringing
the track vehicle to a stop;
7) Making sure that the regular connection and signal is maintained when moving
the track vehicle;
8) The installation of medium rail at the place where handrail is more than 85cm
high;
9) The training is given to all, for putting on a foot brake when bringing the rolling
tower to a stop or working on the deck of the rolling tower suspended;
10) The rolling tower is moved after checking that no one is on the deck;
11) Fixing the ladder by an assistant constantly when using;
12) Putting on a foot brake and fixing the insulation tower by an assistant when
bringing the insulation tower to a stop or working on its suspension;
13) Moving the insulation tower after contacting workers on the insulation tower and
making the signal in advance when moving. and
14) Not to work on the top of the stepladder.
4.27.3. While going up and down along an Electric Pole, the Contractor shall ensure the
safety precautions mentioned below:
1) Use of a safety rope, an auxiliary rope and a fall prevention equipment with using
an exclusive scaffold when going up and down along the electric pole;
2) Conformation of corrosion of a root of the electric pole in advance when going

up and down along the electric pole made of steel or the illumination post; While

going up and down along a Power Pylon or a High Steel Structure or working
above it, the Contractor shall ensure the safety precautions mentioned below:
3) Use of an escort rail, or both a Full Body Harness and an auxiliary rope when
going up and down along the power pylon or the high steel structure;
4) While working on a Beam, the Contractor shall ensure the safety precautions
mentioned below:
a. Use of a horizontal rope on working consecutively on the beam or

painting the beam surface without an auxiliary rope; and
b. Use of a safety rope and an auxiliary rope when moving on the beam
under unavoidable circumstances.
4.27.4. Others:
1) Let workers operate on a beam or a stage plank more than 30 cm wide when
working on the roof or attic; and
2) Use of an auxiliary rope, a rolip, and main rope when moving or working on the
slope more than 2m high, or the upper part of exterior wall or a truss bridge.
4.28. Locomotives and Wagons
4.28.1. Speed limit is determined and traffic signs of speed limits, lights and related hazards
signage and cautions shall be installed at work place.
4.28.2. Person in charge shall be nominated as maintenance officer to inspect and repair
temporary rails or track surface situation regularly.
4.28.3. Overrun prevention equipment is installed on vehicles.
4.28.4. Ensure the installation of an alarm device such as a horn and a buzzer, a head light,
and a flood light for the driver's seat.
4.28.5. Ensure the installation of fences, an entrance, seats, and hand hold for a man car.
4.28.6. Every driver of locomotive shall have the Valid Driving License.
4.28.7. Training and education shall be given to the driver and the signal man regarding how
to send standard signal and operate vehicle diagram and turning off and putting on
the brakes while the driver leaves his seat. And making sure to set wheel stoppers
when stopping or parking at the slope track.
4.28.8. The driver shall be educated regarding following measures when pushing by
locomotive driving or keeping out the area: - Arrangement of a conductor must be

ensured.; - Installation of a head light required; - Installation of communication

equipment between a conductor and a driver is required.
4.28.9. Inspection shall be done according to each vehicles function. Monthly and yearly
self-inspection system for fixed matters shall be implemented and records shall be
kept for three years.
4.28.10. Explosive gases are easily ignited by flames or sparks from fuel-fired locomotives.
Where such gases may be present, electric, compressed air, or storage battery
locomotive shall be used.
4.28.11. A major hazard with electric locomotive, in addition to that of sparking in explosives
atmospheres, is the possibility of employees contact with the trolley.
4.28.12. The trolley shall be guarded at all points where employees may pass under it and
shall be high enough to prevent contact at all places. Deck walks shall have hand rails
around the outside.
4.28.13. Each locomotive shall carry an extinguisher for oil fires.
4.29. Driving and Operation of Track Motor Vehicle etc.
4.29.1. The Contractor shall prepare a work procedure relating to operation such as track
bound motor vehicles etc. or the like by referring to Appendix-4 " Instruction Manual
for the Usage of Track Bound Motor Cars, etc." before the start of track
works/electrical works to obtain the approval of the Engineer.
4.29.2. Based on the work procedure relating to operations such as track motor vehicles etc.,
the Contractor shall carry out general training courses one after another for new
supervisors, operations leaders and drivers and safety training courses one after
another for new workers entering into track works area for various construction
works.
4.29.3. The Contractor shall deliver work specific safety trainings and distribute a sticker to
be affixed on their helmets to those who have completed courses and those who have
certificates of completion would be allowed to work at site.
4.30. Rolling Stock Works
4.30.1. General
1) All the compliances related to logistic of the rolling stocks according to the
relevant local laws and regulations;

2) To comply with all the traffic rules and regulation and obtain all the permissions
from the concern’s local authority well in advance;
3) The Contractor will develop Risk assessment of each individual activity with the
Safe operating procedure;
4) The Rolling Stock shall be prohibited to move while the Rolling Stock is not
planned to move and signage to this effect put on the rolling stock;
5) The Contractor shall indicate the energizing or de-energizing condition of the

Rolling Stock by means of any way;
6) To inform/confirm a caution to all Workers in advance prior to energize or de-

energize the Rolling Stock or the OHE;
7) Prior to energize or de-energize the OHE, the Rolling Stock shall be de-energized,
and the pantographs shall be locked at housed position; and
8) The driver of vehicle such as shunter shall have enough knowledge and
experience of driving skill and shall be sufficiently trained.
4.30.2. Transportation on Public Road
The Contractor Shall ensure that:
1) The vehicle fitness and safety gears shall be tested, and inspection report will be
submitted to engineer prior to loading the rolling stock on the vehicle;
2) The Contractor shall ensure that the rolling stock has tied up properly on the
transporting vehicle to avoid falling while moving on road; and
3) All the relevant safety forms and inspections done to ensure the safety while
moving in traffic, loading, unloading and assembly at Depot.
4.30.3. Testing and Commissioning and Trial Run Requirements
The Contractor shall ensure:
1) The electrical isolation at the time of commissioning of the rolling stock;
2) Proper earthing system is provided at site;
3) The permit system duly approved by the Engineer while working with the various
interface contractors; and
4) To follow all the system developed by the Engineer to ensure the safety in
interfacing various contractors.

4.30.4. Electrical Precautions;
The Contractor shall ensure to discharge electrical energy from high voltage circuit prior to
work on the roof.
4.31. Confined Space Entry
4.31.1. The Contractor must ensure all confined spaces are identified and managed using
documented site confined space management methods.
4.31.2. When internal combustion engines are to be used into confined space or excavation
or any other workplace where natural or artificial ventilation system is inadequate to
keep carbon monoxide below 50ppm, exposure of workers shall be avoided unless
suitable measures are taken and provided by the Contractor.
4.31.3. No worker shall be allowed into any confined space or tank or trench or excavation
wherein there is given off any dust, fumes/vapours or other impurities which is likely
to be injurious or offensive, explosive or poisonous or noxious or gaseous material
or other harmful articles unless steps are carried out by the Contractor and certified
by the responsible person to be safe.
4.32. Fire Protection
4.32.1. The Contractor shall ensure that the Site is provided with fire extinguishing
equipment sufficient to extinguish any probable fire at the Site.
4.32.2. The extinguishers shall be chosen as per type of fire load and surrounding location.
4.32.3. An adequate water supply is provided at ample pressure as per national standard.
4.32.4. All construction machinery including crane shall carry a portable fire extinguisher in
operator’s cabin.
4.32.5. Emergency plan and Fire Evacuation plan in SHE Management Plan shall be
prepared and issued by the Contractor. Mock drills shall be held on a regular basis to
ensure the effectiveness of the arrangements and as a part of the programme, the
telephone number of the local fire brigade shall be prominently displayed near each
telephone on site.
4.32.6. Recharging of fire extinguishers and their proper maintenance shall be ensured and
as a minimum shall meet Indian National Standards.
4.32.7. All drivers of vehicles, foreman, supervisors and managers shall be trained on
operating the fire extinguishers and firefighting equipment.
4.32.8. The Contractor shall also consider the provision of adequate firefighting
arrangements within the underground and tunnelling operations including the

provision of Fire Service compatible hose connections and emergency lighting.
4.32.9. Combustible scrap and other construction debris shall be disposed of site on a regular
basis. If scrap is to be burnt on site, the burning site shall be specified and located at
a distance no less than 12 m from any construction work or any other combustible
material.
4.32.10. Every fire, including those extinguished by the Contractor shall be reported to the
Engineer.
4.33. Corrosive Substance
4.33.1. As per BOCWR, corrosive substances including alkalis and acids shall be stored and
used by a person dealing with such substances at the Site in a manner that it does not
endanger the Workers and suitable PPE shall be provided by the Contractor to the
Workers during such handling and work.
4.33.2. In case of spillage of such substances on the Workers, the Contractor shall take
immediate remedial measures.
4.34. Demolition
4.34.1. All demolition works be carried out in a controlled manner under the management of
experienced and competent supervision.
4.34.2. The concerned department of the Government or local authority is informed, and
permission obtained wherever required. Media shall also be informed regarding this
concern.
4.34.3. All glass or similar materials or articles in exterior openings are removed before
commencing any demolition work and all water, steam, electric; gas and other similar
supply lines are disconnected.
4.34.4. No demolition work be performed if the adjacent structure seems to be unsafe unless
and until remedial measures life sheet piling, shoring, bracing or similar means be
ensured for safety and stability for adjacent structure from collapsing.
4.34.5. Debris/bricks and other materials or articles shall be removed by means of chute,
bucket or other safe method.
4.34.6. No person other than the Workers or other persons essential to the operation of
demolition work shall be permitted to enter a zone of demolition and the area be
provided with substantial barricades.
4.35. Permit to Work
4.35.1. The Contractor shall develop work permit system, which is formal written system

used to control certain types of work that are potentially hazardous. A work permit is
a document, which specifies the work to be done, and the precautions to be taken.
4.35.2. Examples of high-risk activities include but are not limited to:
1) Entry into confined spaces;
2) Work at height;
3) Hot work;
4) Excavation;
5) Work with heavy moving machinery;
6) Heavy lifting operations and lifting operations closer to live electric power line;
7) Work with using track motor vehicles etc;
8) Work under electric facility and overhead electric (OHE) line energized; and
9) Blasting.
10) Piling.
4.35.3. The Contractor shall prepare operation manuals above mention and implement
training course at any time based on such manuals to the Workers and given
completion certificates before the commencement of works.
4.35.4. A work permit authorization form shall be completed with the maximum duration
period not exceeding 12 hours or end of shift, which is earlier.
4.35.5. A copy of each permit to work shall be displayed at work place and the permit shall
be completed with Clearance of Man and Material declaration by permit holder.
4.35.6. The Contractor shall prepare a work control procedure relating to electrical and other
works during the period when the overhead electrical facility is energized or the like
by referring to Appendix-5 " Instruction Manual for the Control of Electrical Work
during the Period when the Overhead Contact System is Energized" and Appendix-6
" Instruction Manual for the Control of Other Work during the Period when the
Overhead Contact System is Energized" before the start of energizing such electric
facilities to obtain the approval of the Engineer.
4.35.7. Based on the work control procedure relating to electrical and other works during the
period when the overhead electrical facility is energized, the Contractor shall appoint
control managers concerning both electrical construction and surrounding
construction within their organization to decide whether to grant permission for the

work application from the Subcontractors during the energisation period of electrical
facilities such as substation and overhead electric power lines.
4.35.8. Based on the work control procedure relating to electrical and other works during the
period when the overhead electrical facility is energized, the Contractor shall carry
out general training courses one after another for new operations team leaders of the
Subcontractors. In addition, the Contractor shall deliver the certificate of completion
to them and distribute the armband to oblige to wear it during their works.
4.36. Traffic Management and Site Barricading
4.36.1. The guiding principles to be adopted for safety in construction zone are to:
1) Warn the road user clearly and sufficiently in advance;
2) Provide safe and clearly marked lanes for guiding road users;
3) Provide safe and clearly marked buffer and work zones; and
4) Provide adequate measures that control driver behaviour through construction

zones.
4.36.2. In all cases, the Contractor shall employ proper precautions. Wherever operations
undertaken are likely to interfere with public traffic, Specific Traffic Management
Plans shall be drawn up and implemented by the Contractor in consultation with the
approval of Local Police Authorities and/or the concerned politburo/Civil
Authorities.
4.36.3. All workers shall be provided with high visibility jackets with reflective tapes as most
of viaduct/tunnelling and station works or either above or under right-of way.
Conspicuity of workmen always shall be increased to protect from speeding vehicular
traffic.
4.36.4. The primary traffic control devices used in work zones shall include signs,
delineators, barricades, cones, pylons, pavement markings and flashing lights.
4.36.5. Regulatory signs impose legal restriction on all traffic. It is essential, therefore, that
they are used only after consulting the local police and traffic authorities.
4.36.6. Warning signs in the traffic control zone shall be utilized to warn the drivers of
specific hazards that may be encountered.
4.36.7. The Contractor shall place detour signage at strategic locations and install appropriate
warning signs. To minimize disruption of access to residences and business, the
Contractor shall maintain at least one entrance to a property where multiple entrances
exist.

4.36.8. A warning sign shall be installed an at all secondary road which merges with the
primary road where the construction work is in progress at sufficient distance before
it merges with the primary road so as to alert the road users regarding the ‘Work in
Progress’.
4.36.9. Materials hanging over/protruded from the chassis/body of any vehicle especially
during material handling shall be indicated by red indicator (red light/flag) to indicate
the caution to the road users.
4.36.10. The delineators are the elements of a total system of traffic control and have two
distinct purposes:
1) To delineate and guide the driver to and along a safe path; and
2) As a taper to move traffic from one lane to another.
4.36.11. These channelizing devices such as cones, traffic cylinders, tapes and drums shall be
placed in or adjacent to the roadway to control the flow of traffic. These shall
normally be retro-reflectors complying to Section 79 of Indian Road Congress (IRC)
-Recommended Practice for Road Delineators.
4.36.12. Traffic cones of 500mm, 750mm and 1000mm high and 300mm to 500mm in
diameter or in square shape at base and are often made of plastic or rubber and
normally have retro-reflectorized red and white band shall be used wherever required.
4.36.13. Drums about 800mm to 1000mm high and 300mm in diameter can be used either as
channelizing or warning devices. These are highly visible, give the appearance of
being formidable objects and therefore command the respect of drivers.
4.36.14. Such traffic management plans shall include provision for traffic diversion and
selection of alternative routes for transport of equipment. If necessary, the Contractor
shall carry out road widening before commencement of works to accommodate the
extra load.
4.36.15. The road construction and maintenance signs which fall into the same three major
categories as do other traffic signs, that are regulatory signs, warning signs and
direction (or guidelines) signs shall only be used. The IRC: 67 (Code of Practice for
Road Signs) provide a list of traffic signs. The size, colours and placement of sign
shall confirm to IRC: 67.
4.36.16. Same the way barricades protect the road users, public and Animals from the danger
due to construction activities, equipment and other temporary structures. The road
barricades need to be as per the IRC_SP_55, IRC 67 but not limit to the same.
4.36.17. The barricades shall be erected around the Site to prevent the surrounding area from
excavated soil, rubbish etc., which may cause inconvenience to and endanger the

public. The barricade especially those exposed to public shall be aesthetically

maintained by regular cleaning and painting as directed by the Engineer. These shall
be maintained in one line and level.
4.36.18. The structure dimension of the barricade, material and composition, its colour
scheme, the Employer’s logo and other details shall be in accordance with
specifications laid down by Engineer/Employer.
4.36.19. All barricades shall be erected as per the design requirements of the contract,
numbered, painted and maintained in good condition and barricade in-charge
maintains a barricade register in the Site.
4.36.20. All barricades shall be conspicuously seen in the dark/night time by the road users so
that no vehicle hits the barricade. Conspicuity shall be ensured by affixing retro
reflective stripes of required size and shape at appropriate angle at the bottom and
middle portion of the barricade at a minimum gap of 1,000 mm. In addition, minimum
one red light or red-light blinker shall be placed at the top of each barricade.
4.36.21. Site barricades maintenance inspection shall be done regularly.
4.36.22. The Contractor shall decide keeping van/manpower to tow away any breakdown
vehicle in the traffic flow without losing any time at his cost.
4.36.23. The Contractor shall ensure the cleanliness of roads and footpaths by deploying
proper manpower for the same. The Contractor shall have to ensure proper blooming,
cleaning washing of roads and footpaths on all the time throughout the entire stretch
till the currency of the Contract including disposal of seepage.
4.36.24. The Contractor shall ensure that all his construction vehicles plying on public roads
(like dump trucks, trailers, etc.) have proper license to ply on public roads from the
State Transport Authority. Drivers holding proper valid license as per the
requirements of Motor Vehicles Act shall drive these vehicles.
4.36.25. The Contractor shall not undertake loading and unloading at carriageways
obstructing the free flow of vehicular traffic and encroachment of existing roads by
the Contractor applying the excuse of work execution.
4.37. Working near Railway
4.37.1. Operational Safety
Where the Schedule of Dimensions of Indian Railways (IR) for the running tracks is
likely to be infringed by the Contractor, the following safety measures for the basis
of “Indian Railways: Safety Precautions at the Worksite Adjacent to Track
(SEP2015)” shall be ensured.

4.37.1.1. Measures Prior to Start of the Work:
1) The Contractor to provide necessary training to their supervisors and staff

and shall ensure that they know about the safety norms to be followed for
working in the premises of IR and near running tracks and electrified
territories;
2) To inform the Engineer about:
a. Name and address of the Contractor’s suppliers/Subcontractors

assigned to execute the work;
b. Name of the vehicle drivers/equipment operators identified for the

work; and
c. Location, duration and timings during which the Schedule of

Diameter (SOD) of IR is to be infringed.
3) To provide the Engineer with:
a. Copy of detailed planning of work including protection of IR track

and safety measures proposed (duly approved by the Engineer); and
b. Copy of the competency certificate of the Contractor’s supervisor in

charge of the work (to be issued by the Engineer).
4) To demarcate the working area at site in consultation with the Engineer;
5) Barricade/temporary fencing along the stretch of the concentration of the

work area along the IR track as approved by the Engineer; and
6) To provide adequate watch and ward, flagmen, lighting etc. including

signage boards.
4.37.1.2. Before starting of work, Specific Method Statement for the works near railway shall
be prepared by the Contractor and shall be submitted to the Engineer and to the
Employer for further submission to IR for discussion, approval and permission.
4.37.1.3. Measures during Execution of Work:
1) It shall be ensured that no workmen and staff is working on line/trackside

unless proper ‘Permit to Work’ is issued for those lines by Indian Railways
(IR) and the Engineer;
2) It shall be ensured that the moving dimensions of IR shall not be infringed.

In case of track crossing, the work is required; the same shall not be carried

out without permission from IR and the Engineer. Safety of all the existing
fixed structures near the vicinity of the Site shall also be ensured;
3) No vehicles shall be plied within 6m of centre of the IR track without the

specific approval from IR and the Engineer. Individual vehicle/construction
equipment shall not be left un-attended. No vehicle shall ply from sun-set to
sunrise and during the period when the visibility is impaired, except in case
of emergency and with the consent of IR and the Engineer;
4) Where the construction vehicles are required to ply along the existing
running tracks of IR, the Contractor shall deploy the adequate patrolmen to
prevent tendency of the vehicle drivers to come close to the tracks and
infringe;
5) All the drivers of the road vehicles/machines plying near the running tracks
of IR shall be provided with a red flag/red lamp so that in the event of any
obstruction, they can stop the incoming train;
6) It shall be ensured that the line of demarcation shall not be infringed by the
road vehicles/ construction equipment;
7) It shall be ensured that only eligible and competent staff shall be employed
for the work and they must wear identity card while working near running
tracks of IR;
8) For working during night, sufficient illumination shall be provided for the
entire work area for safety of the workmen and public;
9) Temporary engineering signals as required shall be provided;
10) Existing engineering indicator boards shall be lit as per Permanent Way
Manual (PWM) of IR;
11) Lookout man with red and green flags/hand signals and whistle shall be
deployed wherever required;
12) No part of the stacked material shall infringe the moving dimensions of IR.
Material shall be stacked to such a height that it does not lead to infringement
of Schedule of Diameter (SOD) in case of accidental toll off;
13) Any temporary arrangement shall not infringe with the moving dimensions
of IR;
14) Where the work is planned to be done within 3.5m from the centre of the IR
tracks, it shall require traffic block and all the necessary safety precautions

shall be ensured as per the requirements of Para No. 806 and 807 of PWM
of Indian Railways;
15) First aid kit shall be readily available at the site;
16) In case any cable/utility is found while working, the Contractor shall inform
IR and the Engineer immediately. In case many cables/utilities are found
during excavation; the work shall be carried out in the presence of
representative from the concerned owning agency of the utility/cable; and
17) It shall be ensured that the existing emergency sockets of IR are not damaged.
4.37.1.4. Additional Measures Required during Traffic Block:
1) Any work when infringing the moving dimensions of IR shall be started only
after traffic block has been imposed and IR track is protected;
2) All the work intended to be completed during traffic block shall be completed
within the duration of the traffic block and the duration of the traffic block
shall not be exceeded; and
3) Traffic block shall be considered as cleared only when all the temporary
arrangements/machinery is cleared of the moving dimensions and the IR
track is left with proper track geometry so that IR trains can run safely.
4.37.1.5. Safety Measures while Working in Over Head Electrical Lines (OHE) Area:
1) While working near the OHE area, the safety guidelines as specified in para
20301, 20327, 20334, 20335, 20529, 20612, 20614, 20714, 20825, 20833,
21206 and 21207 of Volume II, Part 1 of AC Traction Manual of Indian
Railways shall be followed;
2) No electric work close to the live OHE shall be carried out without power
block and specific approval from IR and the Engineer;
3) A minimum distance of 2.0 m shall be maintained between live OHE wire

and any body part of the workmen or tools or metallic support etc.; and
4) No electric connection shall be tapped from OHE.
4.37.2. Excavation Affecting Existing Tracks

4.37.2.1. While doing excavation near the vicinity of the existing tracks including for bridges
and other structures, special care must be taken to ensure that formation of the
existing Railway line is not excavated, for that matter any activity involved in
construction/execution of the project shall not endanger the safety of existing running
line of IR.
4.37.2.2. If excavation or any other activity involving working and or modification and or
alteration of the existing permanent way then, before execution of such work, the
Contractor shall prepare a drawing clearly indicating such alternation/modification
of the existing permanent way, and the protection measure intended to be taken by
the Contractor to ensure safety of the existing running line. The effectiveness of
design of such protection measures is the sole responsibility of the Contractor.
4.37.2.3. These protection measures duly indicating the extent of alternation/modification to

the existing formation shall be incorporated in the design and drawing submitted
during preliminary design submission as per the Contract. Such work shall not be
undertaken unless and until these drawings are approved by IR and the Engineer.
4.37.2.4. The Contractor shall indemnify IR and the Engineer against any damage to the
existing tracks/structures/utilities etc. caused by the actions of the Contractor or his
subcontractors, and shall make good the same, as directed by the concerned
authorities, at his own cost and shall also pay any penalty (is) /demurrages if levied
by the concerned authorities.
4.37.2.5. Safety Requirements for Electrical Works:
1) The Indian Electricity Rules 1956, as amended up to date, shall be followed.

The detailed instructions on safety procedures given in IS code. and Indian
Electricity Rules, respective State Electricity Authorities’ regulation with up
to date amendment shall be applicable;
2) The Low Tension (LT)/High Tension (HT) distribution diagrams of sub

stations shall be prominently displayed. The substation premises, main
switch rooms and Distribution Box (D.B.) enclosure shall be kept clean
whenever works are carried either inside or outside;
3) No inflammable materials shall be stored in places other than the rooms

specially constructed for this purpose in accordance with the provisions of
Indian Explosives Act, 2008;
4) Rubber insulating mats of suitable size and thickness shall be provided in

front of the main switch boards of sub-station or any other control equipment
of medium voltage and above;

5) Protective and safety equipment such as rubber gauntlets or gloves, earthing

rods, linemen’s belt, portable artificial respiration apparatus, safety goggles
etc., shall be provided as per the requirement of the works;
6) Necessary number of caution boards such as “Man working on line, don’t

switch on” shall be readily available near electrical installation;
7) Standard first aid boxes containing materials as prescribed by the St. John’s
Ambulance Brigade or Indian Red Cross shall be made available;
8) Charts displaying methods of giving artificial respiration to a recipient of

electrical shock (one in English and another one in the regional language)
shall be prominently displayed at appropriate places;
9) No work shall be undertaken on live installations, or on installation, which

could be energized unless one another person is present to immediately
isolate the electric supply in case of any accident and to render first aid, if
necessary;
10) No work on live L.T. bus bar or pedestal switch board in the sub stations
shall be handled by a person below the rank of a licensed wireman and such
a work shall preferably be done in the presence of a qualified engineer;
11) When working on or near live installations, suitable insulated tool shall be
used, and special care shall be taken to see that those tools accidentally do
not drop on live terminals causing shock or dead short;
12) The electrical switch controls in distribution boards shall be clearly marked
to indicate the areas being controlled by them;
13) Before starting any work on the existing installation, it shall be ensured that
the electric supply to that portion is cut off. Precautions, like displaying
“Men at Work” caution boards on the controlling switches, removing fuse
carrier from these switches shall be taken against accidental operation.
Caution boards shall be kept with the person working on the installation;
14) All electrical panels and switchgear shall conform to relevant IEC standard;
15) All external enclosures shall have degree of protection not less than IP-54;
16) All equipment/system shall conform to relevant IEC standard on

Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC); and
17) Cable routes of all the newly laid cables by the Contractor shall be identified
with electronic or concrete markers.

4.38. Working near Waterbody
4.38.1. When any worker proceeds to or from any working place by water for purposes of
carrying on a construction work, proper measures are taken to provide for his safe
transportation and vessels used for such purpose are used in charge of a responsible
person and are properly equipped for safe navigation and are maintained in good
condition.
4.38.2. Maximum number of persons which can be safely carried in a vessel as certified
under the relevant law in force is marked.
4.38.3. Adequate protection is provided to the Workers in such vessel from inclement
weather.
4.38.4. In case the building of such vessel is lower than 60cm from the level of the deck of
such vessel, the open edge of such bulwarks is fitted with suitable fencing to a height
of at-least 1.0 m above such deck and the post and stanchions and similar parts used
in such fencing are not spaced more than 2.0 m apart.
4.38.5. The number of life buoys on deck of such vessel is equal to the number of people on
such vessel and is not less than two.
4.38.6. All life buoys on deck of such vessel are kept in good state of maintenance and are
so placed that if such vessel sinks then they remain to float and one of such buoys is
within the immediate reach of the Steer-man of such vessel and another is situated
after part of such vessel.
4.38.7. The Engineer shall ensure at the Site of a construction work that where, on or adjacent
to the work place of any site to which these rules apply, there is water into which a
worker employed for work on such site is, in the course of his employment, may fall
and has the risk of drowning, suitable rescue equipment is provided and kept in an
efficient state for ready use and measures are taken to arrange for the prompt rescue
of such worker from the danger of drowning and where there is a special risk of such
fall from the edge of adjacent land or from a structure adjacent to or above the water
or from floating stage on such water, secure fencing is provided near the edge of such
land, structure or floating stage, as the case may be, to prevent such fall, and such
fencing may be removed or allowed to remain un-erected for the time and to the
extent necessary for the access of the Workers to such work or the movement of
material of such work.
4.39. Other Works to be Scrutinized
4.39.1. Other works including, but not be limited to, the works in the Site (the ROW), the
works in the Borrow Pit, the works in the Quarry and Works on road shall be included
to be scrutinised with respect to the accident prevention.

4.39.2. If blasting is anticipated in excavation in rock, preventive measures against accidents

and protective measures against environmental/social impacts shall be of paramount
importance.
4.39.3. The Contractor shall include all those items as well as work elements to formulate
the preventive and protective measures considering envisaged conditions, situations,
and activities of the works which may induce accidents or hazard to environment
and/or society.
4.40. Working when overhead electrical facility is energised
4.40.1. Driving and Operation of Track Motor Vehicle etc.
4.40.1.1. The Contractor shall prepare a work procedure relating to operations of track bound
motor vehicles etc. or the like by referring to Attachment-4 " Instruction Manual for
the Usage of Track Bound Motor Cars, etc." before the start of track works/electrical
works to obtain the approval of the Engineer.
4.40.1.2. Based on the work procedure relating to operations of track motor vehicles etc., the
Contractor shall carry out general training courses one after another for new
supervisors, operations leaders and drivers and safety training courses one after
another for new workers entering into track works area for various construction
works.
4.40.1.3. The Contractor shall deliver work specific safety trainings and distribute a sticker to
be affixed on their helmet to those who have completed courses and those who have
certificate of completion would only be allowed to work at site.
4.40.2. Permit to Work.

4.40.2.1. The Contractor shall prepare a work control procedure relating to electrical and other
works during the period when the overhead electrical facility is energized or the like
by referring to Attachment-5 " Instruction Manual for the Control of Electrical Works
during the Period when the Overhead Contact System is Energized" and Attachment-
6 " Instruction Manual for the Control of Other Works during the Period when the
Overhead Contact System is Energized" before the start of energizing such electric
facilities to obtain the approval of the Engineer.
4.40.2.2. Based on the work control procedure relating to electrical and other works during the
period when the overhead electrical facility is energized, the Contractor shall appoint
control managers concerning both electrical construction and surrounding
construction within their organization to decide whether to grant permission for the
work application from the Subcontractors during the energisation period of electrical
facilities such as substation and overhead electric power lines.
4.40.2.3. Based on the work control procedure relating to electrical and other works during the
period when the overhead electrical facility is energized, the Contractor shall carry
out general training courses one after another for new operations team leaders of the
Subcontractors. In addition, the Contractor shall deliver the certificate of completion
to them and distribute the armband to oblige to wear it during their works.
4.41. Personal Protective Equipment
4.41.1. The PPEs and safety appliances provided by the Contractor shall be of the standard
as prescribed by Bureau of Indian Standards (BIS). If materials conforming to BIS
standards are not available, the Contractor as approved by the Engineer shall procure
PPE and safety appliances.
4.41.2. All workers shall be provided with high visibility jackets with reflective tapes
confirming to the requirement specified under BS EN 471: 1994 as most of works
are executed either above or under right-of-way. Conspicuity of workmen always
shall be increased to protect them from speeding vehicular traffic.
4.41.3. The Contractor shall provide safety helmet, safety shoe and high visibility clothing
for all employees including workmen, traffic marshal and other employees who are
engaged for any work under this contract as per the following requirement.
4.41.4. The Contractor shall at all time maintain a minimum of 10% spare PPEs and safety
appliances and properly record and show to the Engineer during the inspections.
Failing to do so shall invite penalty as per Clause 7. [Financial
4.41.5. The Contractor shall provide required PPEs to workmen to protect against safety
and/or health hazards. Primarily PPEs are required for the following protection:

1) Head protection (Safety helmet with a chin strap) ;
2) Foot protection (Safety footwear, Gumboot, etc.);
3) Body protection (High visibility clothing (Waistcoat/Jacket), Apron, etc.);
4) Personal fall protection (Full body harness, Rope-grip fall arrester, etc.);
5) Eye protection (Goggles, Welders Glasses, etc.);
6) Hand protection (Gloves, Finger coat, etc.);
7) Respiratory protection. (Nose mask, Self-contained breathing apparatus, etc.) ;

and
8) Hearing protection (Ear plugs, Ear muffs, etc.).
Safety Helmet Colour Code

(Every Helmet shall have the LOGO* Person to use
affixed/painted)
Hard hat with company Logo (Employees) Hard hat with reflective tape (Marshals)
White The Employer/Engineer
Grey All designers, Architect, Consultants, etc.
Violet Main contractors (Engineers/Supervisors)
Blue All subcontractors (Engineers/Supervisors)
Red Electricians (Both Contractor and Subcontractor)
Safety professionals (Both Contractor and
Green
Subcontractor)
Orange Security guards/Traffic marshals
Yellow All workmen
White (with “VISITOR” sticker) Visitors
Safety Shoes (Anyone at the Site incl.
Marshals)
Safety Jacket
All employees of the Contractor including
Traffic marshals
workmen

Safety Helmet Colour Code

(Every Helmet shall have the LOGO* Person to use
affixed/painted)
Hi-visibility waistcoat covering upper body and Hi-visibility jacket covering upper body and
meeting the following requirements as per BS EN meeting the following requirements as per BS EN
471:1994: 471:1994:
(a) Background in fluorescent Green (Engineers (a) Background in fluorescent orange-red in

& Supervisors ) and orange-red (Workmen) in colour
colour
(b) Jackets with full-length sleeves with two
(b) Two vertical green strips of 5cm wide on front bands of retro reflective material, which shall
side, covering the torso at least 500 cm2 be placed at the same height on the garment
as those of the torso. The upper band shall
(c) Two diagonal strips of 5 cm wide on back in encircle the upper part of the sleeves between
an ‘X’ pattern covering at least 570cm2 the elbow and the shoulder; the bottom of the
lower band shall not be less than 5cm from
(d) Horizontal strips not less than 5cm wide
the bottom of the sleeve.
running around the bottom of the vertical strip
in front and ‘X’ pattern at back. (c) Two vertical green strips of 5cm wide on
front side, covering the torso at least 500 cm2
(e) The bottom strip shall be at a distance of 5cm
from the bottom of the vest. (d) Two diagonal strips of 5 cm wide on back in
an ‘X’ pattern covering at least 570cm2
(f) Strips must be retro reflective and fluorescent
(e) Horizontal strips not less than 5cm wide
Waistcoat shall have a side adjustable fit and a
running around the bottom of the vertical strip
side and front tear-away feature on vests made of
nylon. in front and ‘X’ pattern at back.
(f) The bottom strip shall be at a distance of 5cm

from the bottom of the vest.
Strips must be retro reflective and fluorescent.
4.42. Visitor at Site
4.42.1. No visitor can enter the Site without the permission. All authorised visitors shall
report at the site office. The Contractor shall provide visitor’s helmet (White helmet
with visitor sticker) and other PPEs like Safety Shoe, reflective jacket, respiratory
protection etc. as per requirement of the Site. Entry of visitors in underground shall
be suitably controlled.
4.42.2. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for safety and health of all visitors within
the Site.

4.43. Site Security
4.43.1. The Contractor shall be wholly responsible for security on the Site and any other
areas being used by him or the Subcontractors for the purposes of the Contract. The
Contractor shall implement and cause the Subcontractors to implement proper
security management procedures in accordance with the approved SHE Management
Plan.
4.43.2. The Contractor shall assign on the Site a security officer (adequately trained person,)
and his alternate(s), who shall be primarily responsible for the Contractor’s security
services and fully cooperate with the Engineer’s security organization throughout the
Time for Completion. Necessary approval of agency shall be obtained from the
Engineer.
4.43.3. The security plan covered by the SHE Management Plan shall contain the following:
1) Security policy statement and objectives;
2) The Contractor’s security organization;
3) Role, responsibility and authority of each member of the security organization;
4) Procedure for enforcement of security regulations;
5) Daily, weekly and monthly security meeting procedures;
6) Sample forms for security reports;
7) Personnel security control procedures;
8) Goods security control procedures;
9) On-site security patrol procedures;
10) Liaison and coordination procedure with local fire/police and other authorities;
11) Liaison and coordination procedure with the Employer and relevant other
authorities; and
12) Liaison, coordination and joint security inspection procedure with other
contractors.
4.43.4. Where necessary, the Contractor shall install, modify, maintain and remove the
temporary security fences, gates, posts, security lightings and other facilities required
for proper security control, in addition to those to be constructed as part of the Works.
The Contractor shall operate these facilities to properly control ingress to and egress
from the areas under his control throughout the Time for Completion. This control

shall apply to every person including the Employer’s Personnel.
4.44. Lock Out/ Tag Out (LOTO)
4.44.1. The Contractor shall develop a procedure for LOTO system for performing
maintenance or repair, wherever reasonability applicable and the same be ensured
through work permit system.
5. OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND WELFARE
5.1. Physical Fitness of Workmen
5.1.1. The Contractor shall ensure that his employees/workers subject themselves to such
medical examination as required under the law or under the contract provision and
keep a record of the same.
5.1.2. The Contractor shall not permit any employee/workers to enter the work area under
the influence of alcohol or any drugs.
5.1.3. The Contractor shall maintain the confidential records of medical examination or the
physician authorized by the Engineer.
5.1.4. No worker is charged for the medical examination and the cost of such examination
is borne by the Contactor employing such worker.
5.1.5. If the Contractor fails to get the medical examination conducted as mentioned above,
the Engineer will have the right to get the same conducted through an agency with
intimation to the Contractor and deduct the cost and overhead charges from his dues.
5.2. Medical Facilities
5.2.1. Occupational Health Centre (First Aid Station)
The Contractor shall provide at the Site an Occupational Health Centre (OHC) as a
first aid station and maintain it in good order in terms of BOCWR. At least the one
OHC shall be provided to serve a length of about 20 km along the alignment and shall
have:
1) Minimum floor area of 15 m2, adequately illuminated and ventilated;
2) Two air-conditioned rooms with smooth walls and intern service; and
3) Adequate and necessary equipment for day-to-day requirement and to manage

any medical emergency.
5.2.2. The Contractor shall appoint one construction medical officer in charge of the OHC
where the total number of employees is up to 1,000 and one additional construction
medical officers for every additional 1,000 employees or part thereof. The

qualifications of such construction medical officer shall be as per BOCWR.
5.2.3. The Contractor shall appoint appropriate full-time staff including one nurse, one
dresser-cum-compounder, one sweeper-cum-ward boy with each construction
medical officer.
5.2.4. The Contractor shall communicate the complete including name, qualification and
experience of the construction medical officer, to the inspector having jurisdiction
under BOCWR.
5.2.5. Ambulance Room, Ambulance Van and Stretchers:
1) At the Sites where 500 or fewer workers are employed, the Contractor shall
provide an ambulance room in terms of BOCWR. Alternatively, the Contractor
shall arrange with a nearby hospital for providing suitable ambulance rooms.
Such ambulance rooms shall have a qualified nurse in charge and its services are
available to all workers during working hours;
2) In the Site where 500 or more workers are employed, the Contractor shall provide
an ambulance room with a suitably qualified Construction Medical Officer in
charge, provided with an effective communication system;
3) An ambulance room shall be equipped at least with the articles listed in Schedule
IV, BOCWR; and
4) The Contractor shall provide an ambulance van at all Sites or arrange with a
nearby hospital for providing such an ambulance van for prompt transportation
of workers who meet with serious accident or who are sick. It is the Contractor’s
responsibility to ensure that all such ambulances are maintained in good repair
and equipped with standard facilities specified in Schedule V of BOCWR.
5.2.6. The Contractor shall provide enough stretchers at each site for use in an emergency.
5.2.7. First Aid Boxes and Emergency Care:
1) The Contactor shall ensure at the Site one first-aid box for 100 workers provided
and maintained for providing first-aid to the Workers. Every first-aid box shall
be distinctly marked “First-Aid” and equipped with the articles specified in
Schedule III of BOCWR;
2) At all Sites, the Contractor shall provide essential life-saving aids and appliances
under the supervision of a construction medical officer, where he may be required
to handle. Such lifesaving aids shall be provided to any worker who meets with
an accident, before and during his transportation to a hospital and until he is
attended by a doctor in such hospital; and

3) The Contractor shall also provide other equipment or facilities that may be
required for emergency care or treatment of a worker arising from local
conditions and specific construction processes.
5.2.8. HIV/AIDS Prevention and Control:
1) The Contractor shall adopt the Employer’s “Workplace Policy on HIV/AIDS

Prevention and Control for Workers Engaged by Contractors” and implement it.
A copy of the policy is given in Attachment-4 [Workplace Policy on HIV/AIDS
Prevention & Control]; and
2) The Contractor shall prepare and submit the Manual for HIV/AIDS Prevention
and Control for his workers in terms of the aforesaid the Employer’s Policy
within 28 days of the date of notification of the Contract.
5.2.9. Prevention of Mosquito Breeding
Measures shall be taken to prevent mosquito breeding on the Site. The measures to
be taken shall include:
1) Empty cans, oil drums, packing and other receptacles, which may retain water,
shall be deposited at a central collection point and shall be removed from the site
regularly;
2) Stagnant water shall be treated at least once every week with oil to prevent
mosquito breeding;
3) The Contractor’s equipment and other items on the site, which may retain water,
shall be stored, covered or treated in such a manner that water could not be
retained; and
4) Water storage tanks shall be provided.
5.2.10. Posters in local language, Hindi and English, which draw attention to the dangers of
permitting mosquito breeding, shall be displayed prominently on the Site.
5.2.11. The Contactor at periodic interval shall arrange to prevent mosquito breeding by
fumigation/spraying of insecticides, and the ideal larvicide etc.
5.2.12. Alcohol, Smoking, and Drugs
The Contactor shall always ensure that no employee is working under the influence
of alcohol/drugs which are punishable under BOCWR.
5.2.13. Smoking
Smoking at public places by any employee is also prohibited as per Government

Regulations. The Contractor shall comply with the legal provisions in this regard,

such as; Prohibition of Smoking in Public Places Rules, 2008. He shall be solely
responsible for any penalty or punitive action by the government authorities because
violations of the provisions contained in these rules by him or his representatives or
his employees or his subcontractors. Requisite notice boards, posters, etc., shall be
put by him, as per the Rules.
5.3. Occupational Noise
5.3.1. The Contractor shall comply with the codes, regulations and standards regarding
noise pollution and control as notified and amended by Central Government and State
Government from time to time on the Site including but not necessarily limited to:
1) Rule and Schedule VI of the Building and Other Construction Workers

(Regulation of Employment of Service) Central Rules of 1998;
2) Noise Pollution (Regulation and Control) Rules, 2000;
3) Environment (Protection) Act, 1986;
4) Environment (Protection) Amendment Rules, 2000; and
5) Central Motor Vehicles Rules, 1989; VI) Notification on Control of Noise from
DG Sets, 2002.
5.3.2. The Contractor shall always comply with any specific requirements of these and any
other relevant statutes, including prescribed noise limits and standards as follows:
1) Permissible Exposure Levels of Impulse or Impact Noise for Work Zone Area
[as per Model Rules of Factories Act, 1948]; and
2) Permissible Exposure in Case of Continuous Noise for Work Zone Area [as per
Model Rules of Factories Act, 1948].
5.4. Ventilation and Illumination
5.4.1. The Contactor shall ensure at the Site of construction works that all working areas in
a free tunnel are provided with ventilation system and the fresh air supply in such
tunnel is not less than 6m3/min for each worker employed underground in such tunnel
or underground workings and the free air flow movement inside such working area
is not less than 9m/min.
5.4.2. The oxygen level shall not be less than 19.5% in the working environment.
5.4.3. The Contactor shall make every effort to illuminate the Site as mentioned in Clause
4. [Safety General], Sub-Clause 4.13. Illumination as well as that provided in the
relevant national standards.
5.4.4. The Contactor shall conduct a weekly illumination monitoring by a Lux meter for all

the locations and the report shall be sent to the Engineer within 7th of the next month
and the same shall be reviewed during the Monthly SHE Committee Meeting.
5.5. Radiation
5.5.1. The use of radioactive substances and radiating apparatus shall comply with the
Government Regulatory Requirements and all subsidiary legislations.
5.5.2. Operations involving risk of exposure to ionising radiation shall only be carried out
after having been reviewed without objection by the Engineer and shall be carried
out in accordance with the Contractor’s Method Statement.
5.5.3. Each area containing irradiated apparatus shall have warning notices and barriers, as
required by the regulations, conspicuously posted at or near the area.
5.5.4. Radioactive substances shall be stored, used or disposed, strictly in accordance with
the Government Enactments.
5.5.5. The Contactor shall ensure that all sites personnel and members of the public are not
exposed to radiation.
5.6. Welfare Measures for Workers
5.6.1. Latrine and Urinal Accommodation:
1) Latrine and urinals shall be provided as per Section 33 of BOCWA and

maintained as per BOCWR and shall also comply with the requirements of public
health authorities; and
2) When women are employed, separate latrine and urinals accommodation shall be
provided.
5.6.2. Moving Sites:
1) In case of works like track laying, the zone of work is constantly moving at
elevated level or at underground level. In such cases, mobile toilets with proper
facility to drain the sludge shall be provided at reasonably accessible distance;
and
2) In case the Contactor fail to provide required number of urinals and latrines or
fail to maintain it as per the requirements of Public Health Laws, the Engineer
shall have the right to provide/maintain through renowned external agencies at
the cost of the Contactor.
5.6.3. Canteen

In every workplace wherein not less than 250 workers are employed, the Contractor
shall provide an adequate canteen conforming to Section 37 of BOCWA, as
stipulated in Rule 247 of BOCWR. 5.6.4. Drinking Water.
5.6.4. As per Section 32 of BOCWA, the Contractor shall make in every site, effective
arrangements to provide sufficient supply of wholesome drinking water. Quality of
the drinking water shall conform to the requirements of national standards on Public
Health Laws.
While locating these drinking water facilities due care shall be taken so that these are
easily accessible within 200m from the place of work for all workers at all location
of the Site. All such points shall be legible marked “Drinking Water” in a language
understood by most of the workmen employed.
5.6.5. Crèche
In every workplace where in more than 50 female workers are ordinarily employed,
there shall be provided and maintained a suitable room for use of children under age
of 6 years, conforming to the provisions of Section 35 of BOCWA.
5.6.6. Labour Accommodation Camps
Labour camp management plan shall be prepared and approved by Engineer
Where workers are based some distance from their normal place of residence, the
Contractor shall provide them with suitable and safe accommodation free of charge
and shall take all necessary precautions to protect their health and welfare. The
accommodation shall conform to the requirements of Section 34 of BOCWA and
include but not be limited to the further measures specified hereunder.
5.6.7. All accommodation camps shall be provided always with a sufficient supply of clean
drinking water (of potable quality according to national legal standards), in suitable
and easily accessible locations:
1) The quality of drinking water shall be tested once a fortnight as prescribed in IS

1050:1991 and immediate remedial action shall be taken if quality falls below the
standard. Test results shall be provided to the Engineer at least monthly.
5.6.8. The Contractor shall provide all accommodation camps with clean and properly
equipped and staffed kitchen and canteen facilities to supply meals for workers.
5.6.9. The Contractor shall provide sufficient toilet and bathroom facilities for the numbers
of workers accommodated in each camp. Separate accommodation and
toilet/bathroom facilities shall be provided for men and women and all facilities shall
be kept in full working order always and cleaned and re-equipped daily.
5.6.10. The Contractor shall provide a laundry facility for the Workers at the Labour
Accommodation Camps.

5.7. Heat Stress
5.7.1. The Contractor/Subcontractor will establish the necessary programs to ensure that
project employees work safely in heat stress conditions.
5.7.2. The reduction of adverse health effects can be accomplished by engineering controls,
work practices, training, acclimatization, monitoring, water and electrolyte balance
and the recognition and treatment of heat stress emergencies.

6. ENVIRONMENT AND SOCIAL MANAGEMENT
6.1. General Conduct of the Works
6.1.1. The Contractor shall review and comply with the environmental management plan
(EMP) prepared in the Supplemental Environmental Impact Assessment (S-EIA)
report available on the NHSRCL information disclosure website
https://www.nhsrcl.in/environmental-impact-assessment-report) and will note and
implement any requirements therein, in addition to those found in this specification.
6.1.2. Before the start of construction, the Contractor will prepare a Construction
Environmental Management Plan (CEMP) based on the CEMP Form to be reviewed
and approved by the Engineer and implemented during the work. The CEMP shall
sufficiently address the items contained in this specification.
6.1.3. The Contractor shall appoint Environment professionals as per the guidelines given
in General Instructions: SHE/G1/002
6.1.4. The Contractor is required to build good public relations before the commencement
of the Works particularly with the local level representatives such as the panchayat
and village councillor, by informing the expected impacts by the Works and their
schedule and dispute resolution mechanism known as GRM set by the Employer.
6.1.5. The Contractor shall post a public notice regarding the rationales of the Works, major
impacts of the Works and schedule with the GRM information at the entrance to the
Site and the Contractor’s site offices. The notice shall be written in the dominant
language of the project sites (Marathi or Gujarati), Hindi, and English.
6.2. Legislation
6.2.1. The Contractor shall always comply with all relevant national and state legislation
regarding environmental and social protection, pollution prevention and control,
waste management and other relevant environmental and social matters, including
but not necessarily limited to the following:
1) The Environment (Protection) Act, 1986 and Environment (Protection)

Amendment Rules, 2002 (amended 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007 and 2008);
2) The Indian Wildlife (Protection) Act, 1972;
3) The Forest (Conservation) Act, 1980 & rules there under;
4) The Tree Preservation and Felling Acts of respective States;
5) The Coastal Regulation Zone (CRZ) Notification, 2011;
6) The Noise Pollution (Regulation and Control) Rules, 2000;

7) The Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1981 (amended 1987);
8) The Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1974 (amended 1988);
9) The Ground Water (Regulation, Development and Management) Rules 2007;
10) The Solid Management Rules, 2016;
11) The Construction and Demolition Waste Management Rules, 2016;
12) The Hazardous and Other Wastes (Management and Transboundary Movement)
Rules, 2016;
13) The Bio-medical Waste (Management and Handling) Rules, 1998; and
14) The Batteries (Management and Handling) Rules, 2001.
6.2.2. Some guidance on the applicability and demands of these statutes is relevant below.
This is not intended to be definitive and it is the Contractor’s responsibility to obtain
detailed guidance from the competent authorities regarding the specific requirements
of all applicable legislation.
6.2.3. It is also the Contractor’s responsibility to obtain all official approvals, consents or
other authorizations as may be necessary to comply with the relevant statutes, and to
pay all related fees and other costs. The Contractor shall obtain all authorizations in
a timely manner and submit to the Engineer as the evidences for the regulatory
obligations before commencement of any related construction activity.
6.3. Site Preparation
6.3.1. In addition to the legislations given in subsection 6.2.1 above, the Contractor shall
comply with Guidance on Environmental Management of C&D Wastes (Central
Pollution Control Board (CPCB) 2017), Specifications for Road and Bridge Works
(Ministry of Road Transport and Highways 2000) and applicable road and bridge
manuals and/or guidelines prepared by Indian Road Congress (IRC). Particularly for
the following Works shall be carefully planned and conducted as per the given
legislations, manual, guidelines and good practices in India.
6.3.2. The contractor shall prepare a detailed Accommodation Camp Management plan
(ACMP) which shall be submitted to the Engineer for review before constructions
begins.
6.3.3. Preservation of Trees:
1) The Contractor shall not cut trees as per the regulations within or outside the Site
without the explicit written approval of the competent authorities such as local
Forest Department with the final instruction by the Engineer;

2) The Contractor shall design all the Temporary Works in such a way as to retain
trees to the extent possible, without impeding operational requirements and
safety; and
3) Before the commencement of the Works, the Contractor shall physically mark
the permitted boundaries of all areas in which trees are removed and protect any
area in which trees or vegetation are to be retained, by robust, readily visible
fencing, with signs to prohibit entry of vehicles or personnel as well as cutting
for any use.
6.3.4. Vegetation Removal and Tree Cutting:
1) The Contractor shall be responsible for clearing of Site including cutting and
removal of shrubs, vegetation and trees wherever required for execution of the
work after obtaining necessary approval from the Engineer. The studs and roots
as existing at site shall also be removed by the Contractor. The cut material is to
be disposed of by the Contractor outside the ROW at his own cost with the
approval of concerned authorities. The permission for cutting the trees within the
ROW shall be arranged by the Employer.
2) The Contractor is not permitted to remove any vegetation, cut trees or deliberately
damage any vegetation and trees outside of the ROW without authorization by
the competent authorities, including near accommodation camps; and shall ensure
that prohibition of tree cutting and wood collection outside of the ROW for any
use;
3) The Contractor shall keep appropriate records of the ROW boundaries and other
measures and shall regularly monitor to ensure that no vegetation is damaged
outside of the ROW without authorization by the competent authorities; and
4) The Contractor is responsible for obtaining necessary authorization from the

competent authorities to remove vegetation and/or cut trees outside the ROW.
Once the Contractor obtains the authorizations from the authorities, the Engineer
shall confirm the authorization and gives the final approval for the vegetation
removal and/or tree cutting.
6.3.5. Soil Removal and Storage:
1) The Contractor shall prepare a detailed Topsoil Management Plan, as per the
C&D Waste Management Rules (2016) and guidelines/manuals given in
subsection 6.3.1 above, which shall be submitted to the Engineer for review and
NONO before physical works. It shall include topsoil salvage, storage and
utilization/placement, stockpile locations, prevention of runoff and dust control
of fine particles;

6.3.6. Sites of Temporary Works:
The Contractor shall reinstate the land as per the lease agreement(s) after use with
the entire satisfaction of the legal owner(s).
6.3.7. Flood Prevention:
1) The Contractor shall prepare a detailed Site Drainage and Flood Prevention Plan
(SDFPP) to maintain natural drainage and avoid causing flooding of the Site or
surrounding areas and shall submit these to the Engineer for information before
construction begins; and
2) The Contractor shall not dispose of any material into rivers, streams, natural
culverts or drains.
6.4. Borrow Pits and Quarry Sites
6.4.1. The Contractor shall prepare a detailed Borrow Pit and Quarry Site Management Plan
(BPQSM) which shall be submitted to the Engineer for review before construction
begins. It shall include proposed location and transportation routes, and
environmental and social impacts and its management and mitigation measures.
6.4.2. The Contractor is also solely responsible for obtaining all consents and approvals
from government competent authorities as required by law and shall provide the
Engineer with copies of all necessary approvals and landowner agreements
(including confirmation of receipt of payments made as per the agreement with the
legal land owner(s)), before commencing any work associated with the borrow
operation.
6.5. Construction Water Management and Rain Water Harvesting
6.5.1. In addition to the legislations given in subsection 6.2.1 above, the Contractor shall
comply with Guidance on Environmental Management of C&D Wastes (CPCB,
2017) and Guidelines on Techno-Economic Feasibility of Zero Liquid Discharge
(ZLD) for Water Polluting Industries (CPCB, 2015), applicable road and bridge
manuals and/or guidelines prepared by Indian Road Congress (IRC). Particularly in
the water scarce region, the Contractor shall carefully review the available water
resources for the Work and plan the most effective water resource management with
economically viable means as per the given legislations, manual, guidelines and good
practices in India.
6.5.2. The Contractor shall prepare a detailed Construction Water and Rain Water
Harvesting Plan which shall be submitted to the Engineer for review and NONO
before the physical Works.
6.5.3. The Contractor shall not abstract water from existing ponds, without the consent of

the local people/panchayat.
6.5.4. Where feasible as part of the construction works, the Contractor shall develop plans
and implement rainwater harvesting schemes as per Central Ground Water Board
(CGWB) guidelines. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining approval from
the competent authority for any such proposals.
6.6. General Pollution Control
6.6.1. The Contractor shall prepare a detailed Pollution Prevention and Control Plan
(PPCP), which shall be submitted to the Engineer for review before construction
begins. It shall describe pollution control measures relating to air, water, noise and
vibration. Inter alia, this shall describe how compliance with the above legislation
will be achieved, how liquid and solid emissions/wastes will be controlled. It shall
also describe how clean-up any pollution occurs including operational procedure and
monitoring methods.
6.7. Water Quality Management
6.7.1. General:
1) The Contractor shall comply in full of all relevant requirements of national

legislation governing water quality, including but not necessarily limited to The
Environment (Protection) Act, 1986 and Environment (Protection) Amendment
Rules, 2002 (amended 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007 and 2008), and the Water
(Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act ,1974 (amended 1988);
2) The Contractor shall comply always with any specific requirements of these and
any other relevant statutes, including prescribed water quality limits and
standards as per the following IS codes/CPCB norms/EP rules, and any other
relevant legislation, code or guidelines;
3) Drinking Water Quality Standards (as per IS: 10500);
4) Water Quality Criteria and Standards for Freshwater Classification (CPCB,

1979);
5) Tolerance Limits for Inland Surface Waters (as per IS:2296);
6) General Standards for Discharge of Effluents [as per Environment (Protection)

Rules, 1986]; and
7) The Contractor is solely responsible for obtaining all consents and approvals from
government competent authorities as required by national laws on water quality
and shall provide the Engineer with copies of all necessary approvals.

6.7.2. Siltation Control:
1) The Contractor shall not obtain any construction materials from the beds of rivers,
streams, lakes or other water bodies, except with prior approval of the competent
authority. He shall bear related all costs and abide by the stipulated conditions, if
any;
2) The Contractor shall install silt runoff prevention measures as consented by the
Engineer at the base of embankments constructed near surface water bodies; and
shall maintain such measures in place until embankment slopes are fully
stabilized by grassing or other means as approved;
3) Stockpiled soil, sand and any other fine-grained construction materials shall be
covered with secure tarpaulins or via an alternative method subject to the
approval by the Engineer, and stored in fully waterproof enclosures, located more
than 100 m from any surface water;
4) Where construction work is conducted in a natural waterway, the Contractor shall

prepare and submit to the Engineer for information before such work begins,
detailed plans to minimize and contain sediment disturbance;
5) During the construction period, the Contractor shall arrange for removal/cleaning
of deposited silt from drainage channels and outlet points within the project
influence area before the monsoon season. Rejuvenation of the drainage system
by removing encroachments/congestions shall also be ensured; and
6) Return flows from hydraulic dredging will be contained within an earth

sedimentation basin before release. No return flows from hydraulic dredging can
leave the property boundary with Suspended Solids Content (TSS) more than the
DOE standard of 100 mg/L (ECR Schedule – 9: Standards for Sewage
Discharge).
6.7.3. Erosion Control:
1) The Contractor shall provide adequate temporary or permanent drainage

alongside all slope areas before excavation/cutting begins and shall provide
adequate settlement lagoons/chambers to collect runoff and allow sediment to
settle out before water is discharged to a natural waterway; and
2) Soil erosion shall be visually checked by the Contractor periodically on slopes

and high embankment areas. In case soil erosion is found, suitable measures shall
be taken to control soil erosion.
6.7.4. Wastewater Disposal:

1) Wastewater from toilets, washrooms and other sanitary facilities shall be treated
to national legal standards and discharged as prescribed by consent conditions
applied by the statutory authority;
2) Any oil and grease contents of waste water shall be trapped and recovered before
discharge to drain or water body; and
3) Direct and untreated discharge of waste water into water bodies is prohibited as
is the discharge of wash water from concrete trucks to waterways.
6.7.5. Transit Mixer Wastewater Disposal:
1) The Contractor shall be responsible for disposal of transit mixer wastewater

(mixture of cleaning water and concreate residues) including the Subcontractors
concreate mixers as per the applicable regulations. Disposal of the transit mixer
wastewater is only allowed at the approved disposal sites, typically designated at
the concrete suppliers’ batching plants.
6.7.6. Accidental Spillage:
1) The Contractor shall comply in full of the requirements of all relevant legislation
pertaining to the storage, handling and disposal of hazardous chemicals used in
the construction process, including, but not necessarily limited to the
Manufacture, Storage and Import of Hazardous Chemicals (Amendment) Rules,
2000, and the “The Hazardous and Other Wastes (Management and
Transboundary Movement) Rules, 2016” and its amendment;
2) The Contractor shall locate all parking areas, vehicle/machinery or equipment

maintenance yards, and storage areas for fuel, oil or any other potentially toxic
materials within the ROW of construction areas, and more than 100 m from any
water body;
3) Appropriate spill containment and clean-up equipment shall be provided at all

fuel storage, refuelling and vehicle maintenance areas; and operators shall be
appropriately trained in their normal activities as well as pollution control and
remediation;
4) Waste oil from vehicle maintenance shall be collected in sealed containers and
stored safely in sealed damage-proof containers prior to collection and disposal;
5) All waste oil shall be disposed of as per the Central Pollution Control Board
(CPCB) and/or State Pollution Control Board (SPCB) guidelines as applicable;
6) Fuel, oil and any other hazardous liquid shall be stored only in concrete floor and
bonded areas; and the volume of the bonded areas must be sufficient to retain all
the stored liquid in the event of leakage; and

7) Refuelling shall only be conducted in areas that are dedicated for this purpose and
provided with floors of waterproof concrete from which all drainage is collected
and passed through an oil/water separator before discharge.
6.8. Air Quality Control
6.8.1. General
1) The Contractor shall comply in full of all relevant requirements pertaining to all
activities under scope of works as laid down in applicable regulations governing
air quality; and
2) The Contractor is expected to maintain the highest standards of environmental

performance throughout all his work and to take all necessary precautions to
avoid causing any significant air pollution. Precautions shall include but not be
limited to those specified below.
6.8.2. Dust Control:
1) Vehicles transporting dirt, sand and construction materials capable of producing

dust will be covered when traveling through community areas or along roadways
in use by the public;
2) In and around residential and commercial area, the Contractor is required to

install wheel washing area within ROW at the “Exit” points/gates of the
construction area to ensure the removal of wheel/band dirt from construction
vehicles and machines. As a part of the Contractor’s method statement for the site
preparation plans, wheel washing area shall be proposed and approved by the
Engineer before the commencement of the work; and
3) The contractor is responsible for spraying of roadway surfaces in use as haul

routes and of sites under construction as well as temporary detours where these
locations are accessed by the public.
6.9. Noise Control
6.9.1. The Contractor is responsible for complying with the Noise Pollution (Regulation
and Control) Rules (2000), particularly residential area and silence zone as per the
rule.
6.9.2. The Contractor shall ensure that noise generated by work carried out by the
Contractor and his subcontractors during daytime and night time shall not exceed the
stipulated maximum permissible noise limits, whether continuously or intermittently.
In the event of a breach of this requirement, the Contractor shall immediately re-
deploy or adjust the relevant equipment or take other appropriate measures to reduce
the noise levels and thereafter maintain them at levels which do not exceed the said

limits. Such measures may include without limitation the temporary or permanent
cessation of use of certain items of equipment.
6.9.3. The Contractor shall cease any activity likely to produce “Significant” noise at all
locations that are less than 150 m from residential area and silence zone as per the
Noise Pollution (Regulation and Control) Rules (2000), between the hours of 10.00
pm and 6.00 am, and on Sundays and public holidays. The Site near sensitive zone
as per the Noise Pollution (Regulation and Control) Rules (2000) shall be surrounded
by the temporary noise barriers if adjacent work is necessary.
6.10. Vibration Control
6.10.1. At the locations where the alignment is close to sensitive structures,

historical/heritage structures, the Contactor shall control vibration at such locations.
The control measures of vibration level at such sites shall be submitted to the
Engineer for his review. The scheme shall include:
1) Monitoring requirements for vibrations at regular intervals throughout the

construction period;
2) Pre-construction structural integrity inspections of sensitive structures in project

activity;
3) Information dissemination about the construction methods, probable effects,

quality control measures and precautions to be used; and
4) The vibration level limits at the Site adjacent to the alignment shall conform to
the permitted values of Peak Particle Velocity (PPV) as given in Directorate
General Mining and Safety (DGMS) (Tech) S&T) Circular Vo.7 of 1997.
6.11. Waste Management
6.11.1. The Contractor shall comply in full of the requirements of all relevant legislation
pertaining to the management and disposal of solid waste, including, but not
necessarily limited to the Environment (Protection) Act, 1986, Environment
(Protection) Amendment Rules, 2002 (amended 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007 and
2008), the Solid Management Rules, 2016, and the Construction and Demolition
Waste Management Rules, 2016.
6.11.2. No fuel, oil, or parts cleaning fluids shall be spilled, wasted or disposed of at the
project.
6.11.3. Drip pans shall be used under connecting hoses and at points of filling during fuel
transfer and refuelling operations.
6.11.4. The Contractor will promptly collect, store, transport and dispose of solid waste

generated at the Site. No solid wastes will be allowed uncollected at the jobsite or
accumulated in storage for periods more than a month. Transport and disposal will
be by recognized means approved by local authorities.
6.11.5. The Contractor will obtain necessary approval for disposal of concrete waste, scrap
lube oil, domestic waste from the statutory authority. If hazardous materials are
contained, the Contractor will handle them with special attention and properly
disposed with consultation of the statutory authority.
6.11.6. As per the Construction and Demolition Waste Management Rules, 2016, the
Contractor shall study the best practices and include in its respective method
statement.
6.11.7. The method statement of any construction activity, which involves generation of
waste, shall invariably include the details of contractor’s plan for waste management.
6.12. Hazardous Waste Storage and Management
6.12.1. The Contractor shall comply in full of the requirements of all relevant legislation
pertaining to the storage, handling and disposal of hazardous chemicals and wastes
used in the construction process, including, but not necessarily limited to the
Environment (Protection) Act, 1986, Environment (Protection) Amendment Rules,
2002 (amended 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007 and 2008), the Hazardous and Other
Wastes (Management and Transboundary Movement) Rules, 2016.
6.12.2. The Contractor will obtain necessary approval for disposal of concrete waste, scrap
lube oil, domestic waste from the statutory authority. If hazardous materials are
contained, the Contractor will handle them with special attention and properly
disposed with consultation of the statutory authority.
6.12.3. All waste oil shall be disposed of as per the Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB)
and/or State Pollution Control Board (SPCB) guidelines as applicable.
6.12.4. Special arrangements for hazardous waste shall be described, including the way such
waste will be deposited to prevent escape of any material over the long term.
6.12.5. The asbestos waste from demolition debris, if any, shall be separated and disposed of
as per the Hazardous Wastes Rules.
6.13. Use of Land for Construction Purposes
6.13.1. The Contractor will not encroach upon vacant land, or damage forests, wildlife or
fisheries in the project area. The Contractor will execute a plan for preventing
resource harvesting in the project area and prohibit among workers possession of
instruments or poisonous substances for killing or capturing fish or wildlife.

6.13.2. After completion of occupancy, all affected areas within the general project boundary
shall be graded to their final elevation, providing continuous sloping grade that
allows positive drainage. Machinery, equipment, structures, contaminated earth,
plant matter and waste or unused materials shall be removed and disposed of at
locations approved by the Engineer. Temporary pits and sumps installed on the
premises shall be backfilled.
6.14. Protection of Community Values
6.14.1. The Contractor shall locate aggregate crushing and batch mix plants at sufficient
distance (at least 1 km) from populated areas, houses, schools and hospitals to reduce
air pollution and noise. The Contractor shall protect, conserve and maintain access
to social and cultural properties in the project area including schools, mosques,
hospitals, temples, shrines, graveyards, tourism sites and other public places.
6.14.2. The Contractor shall post flagmen at intersections of transit paths for construction
vehicles and local traffic, and along traffic lanes where work is in progress. Traffic
detours shall be clearly marked.
6.14.3. The Contractor shall designate a path for transit of pedestrians and vehicular traffic
around the construction area; and barricade open excavations to prevent injury to the
public.
6.14.4. The Contractor shall avoid blocking access to land, homes and businesses; where
unavoidable, the Contractor shall provide temporary access to affected properties and
reinstate permanent access on completion of work.
6.14.5. The Contractor shall install a gate, signs and lighting at the entrance to the site, and
restrict access to the site by the public.
6.14.6. The Contractor shall promptly reinstate any services and reinstall any physical
facilities that are cut, disconnected or damaged during construction activities, and
shall maintain or provide temporary services that are interrupted by construction.
6.15. Archaeology
6.15.1. When the working near scheduled ancient monuments or sites, the Contractor shall
follow the requirements according to ancient monuments and Archaeological Sites
and Remains Act, 1958.
6.15.2. The Contractor shall commission archaeological expert(s), if required to conduct a

detailed assessment of all work areas to estimate the risk of encountering previously
undiscovered historical remains during excavation and prepare a Physical Cultural
Resources Management Plan (PCRMP). The PCRMP shall set out procedures to be
adopted to minimise the risk of causing accidental damage during excavation work
and other ground disturbance and to ensure that any material discovered is recognised

and dealt with appropriately.
6.16. Monitoring and Reporting
6.16.1. Audit and Inspection:
1) The Contractor shall audit the activities described in his CEMP with approve
forms of daily inspection, and weekly, monthly and quarterly intervals depending
on the nature of the impacts or as otherwise instructed by regulatory authorities
or the Engineer and shall keep appropriate records of such monitoring activities;
2) The Engineer shall inspect the Contractor’s environmental and social

performance during his normal supervision activities, and the Contractor shall
cooperate by providing access to sites, equipment, staff, records, etc. as may be
requested by the Engineer either in writing or verbally; and
3) At least three days’ advanced notice shall be given to the Contractor by the
Engineer of any formal audit of the Contractor’s environmental and social
performance, and the notice shall indicate the areas and activities to be audited
and any special requirements, including records to be provided. The Contractor’s
Senior Environment Manager and other appropriate staff shall accompany the
Engineer’s staff throughout such an audit as may be requested by the Engineer.
6.16.2. Permissible Standards:
The Contractor shall comply with permissible standards as per relevant law and
regulations as well as special instructions from judicial orders, local authorities, the
Engineer, and JICA.
6.16.3. Monitoring:
1) Baseline study: Before commencement of actual construction work, all items and
parameters specified by CEMP shall be monitored once as the baselines of the
environmental condition prior to the construction and compared with the
monitored values during the construction period;
2) Qualification of monitoring agency: Monitoring shall be conducted by the

qualified agencies approved by the Engineer having capabilities of conducting
environmental monitoring; and
3) Enforcement of the Monitoring: Monitoring plan shall be proposed in the

Contractor’s CEMP and must be approved by the Employer/Engineer before
enforcement of the monitoring. The Contractor shall monitor the instructed
environmental parameters and confirm the compliances of the permissible
standards. Once the Contractor confirms the excess of the permissible standards
and baseline through the monitoring programmes, cause analyses and necessary

counter measures shall be proposed to the Engineer in the monitoring reports

specified in Sub-Clause 6.19.5 below.
a. Location, parameters, and frequency of the monitoring.
Types of the Works Packages

Monitoring Rolling stock,
Category Civil, Bridge, Maintenance
Track Electric
Depot /Inspection
car
Air Required Required N/A N/A
Noise Required Required N/A N/A
Vibration Required Required N/A N/A
Drinking Water
Quality-Ground Required Required Required* Required*
Water
Water Quality-
Required Required Required* Required*
Surface Water
Waste Required Required Required Required
Hazardous waste Required Required Required Required
Complaints Required Required Required Required
Regulatory
Required Required Required Required
framework updates
* only construction yards and camps and/or inspection yards
Frequency – Once in 3 months or as per regulations, whichever is earlier
Parameters for monitoring – The parameters to be monitored will be proposed by

contractor (usually monitored as good industrial practice) and approved by Engineer.
Category Sampling Standards Location Frequency

Quarterly
one representative location
(April, July,
within each construction
October,
CPCB (2011) Guidelines for yard
January)
the Measurement of
the closest residential or
Air Ambient Air Pollutants,
commercial area (one
Manual Sampling &
location) within 100m from
Analyses Monthly
each active construction site
or representative locations
approved by the Engineer

Category Sampling Standards Location Frequency

CPCB (2015) Protocol for commercial area (one
Noise Ambient Level Noise location) or within 100m Weekly
Monitoring from each active
construction site.
commercial area (one
Vibration IS 14884 (2000) location) or within 100m Weekly
from each active
construction site
Quarterly
Drinking water: construction (April, July,
yards and labour camps October,
Drinking Water January)
IS 3025 (2008)
Quality-Ground Groundwater: one
& IS 10500 (2012)
Water representative tube/bore well
in the adjacent residential
area or within 100m from
each active construction site
Upstream and downstream
of the river/stream and any
IS 3025 (2008) Quarterly
natural water (ex. pond)
Water Quality- & IS 2296 (1982) & CPCB (April, July,
course located or within 100
Surface Water (2012) Guide Manual Water October,
m of each construction yard,
and Wastewater Analysis January)
labour camp, and active
construction site
Not available but fully
complying with monitoring
the quantities of wastes
specified by the Solid Each construction yard and
Waste Quarterly
Management Rules 2016 & construction site
the Construction and
Demolition Waste
Management Rules 2016
Not available but typed
reporting (not hand writing)
fully complying with
monitoring the quantities of
Each construction yard and
Hazardous waste wastes specified by the Quarterly
active construction site
Hazardous and Other Wastes
(Management and
Transboundary Movement)
Rules 2016,
Complaints and
PR activities if All Works’ related locations weekly
any

6.16.4. Environmental monitoring standards and guidelines
The table below lists the key standards and guidance manuals applicable for the
monitoring, measurement, analysis and management of air, water, noise and
associated environmental parameters. While an attempt has been made to populate
the list based on the latest resources available from the regulatory authorities,
contractors are advised to use updated and more recent guidance available at the time
of execution of the Works.
Sr. List of Environmental Monitoring Standards and Guidelines

No. (not limited to the following)
Drinking Water
1. Drinking Water Specification - IS 10500, 2012, Bureau of Indian Standards (BIS)
Environmental Emission and Discharge Standards

Environmental Emission / Discharge Standards, Schedules I, III, IV, VI and VII,
2.
Environmental Protection Rules, 1986 and Amendments thereof
Waste Water
Methods of Sampling and Test (physical and chemical) for water and wastewater,
3.
BIS 3025 (Part 1): Reprint 2008
Additional Parts under IS 3025 cover analytical methods of specific wastewater
parameters.
IS 2296 (1982) provides the water quality standards for surface water bodies as per
CPCB
4. Guidelines for Water Quality Monitoring, MINARS /27/2007-08
Designated Best Uses of Water by Class of River, The Environment (Protection)
5.
Rules, 1986, Central Pollution Control Board
Guidelines on Construction & Maintenance of Bore wells and Tube wells, Ministry
6.
of Railways, GoI, 2014
Guide Manual: Water and Wastewater Analysis, Central Pollution Control Board
7.
(CPCB), 2012
Manual on Sewerage and Sewage Treatment, Central Public Health and
8.
Environmental Engineering Organization, 2012
Air, Noise and Vibration
Guidelines for the Measurement of Ambient Air Pollutants, Manual Sampling &
9.
Analyses – Volume I, Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB), 2011
Guidelines for the Measurement of Ambient Air Pollutants, Real Time Sampling &
10.
Analyses – Volume II, Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB), 2011
Protocol for Ambient Level Noise Monitoring, Central Pollution Control Board
11.
(CPCB), 2015

Sr. List of Environmental Monitoring Standards and Guidelines

No. (not limited to the following)
Noise Pollution (Regulation and Control) Rules, 2000
Stack Monitoring – Material and Methodology for Isokinetic Sampling, Central
12.
Pollution Control Board (CPCB)
Monitoring Guidelines (Draft) of Indoor Air Pollution, Central Pollution Control
13.
Board (CPCB), 2014
IS 14884 (2000): Mechanical Vibration and Shock – Vibration of Buildings -
14. Guidelines for the Measurement of Vibrations and Evaluation of Their Effects on
Buildings [MED 28: Mechanical Vibration and Shock]
Waste
Manual on Sampling, Analysis and Characterization of Hazardous Waste, Central
15.
Pollution Control Board (CPCB), 2014
Guidelines on Implementing Liabilities for Environmental Damages due to Handling
16. & Disposal of Hazardous Waste and Penalty, Central Pollution Control Board
(CPCB), 2016
Guidelines on Environmental Management of Construction & Demolition (C & D)
17.
Wastes, Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB), 2017
6.16.5. Reporting:
1) SAMPLE environmental daily site inspection record

forms/Weekly/Monthly/Quarterly report forms shall be provided by The
Employer after the award of contract. Then, the daily inspection forms shall be
revised and proposed as per the Contractor’s Works and its methods by the
Contractor at the time of the Construction Environmental Management Plan
submission first. Then, the Contractor is responsible to continuously improve the
initial form(s) or propose other daily site inspection record form(s) to adapt the
changes of construction activities and the daily inspection;
2) The Contractor shall submit reports with the Employer’s reporting forms to the
Engineer as specified below; and
3) Non-compliance shall be recorded, and practical/realistic self-improvement

measures including withholding of payments shall be proposed to comply with
the conditions of the Contract.

Submission Contents
Weekly Report ⚫ Chainage-wise project activity summary

Submission: Monday of the ⚫ Chainage-wise activity plan for next two
next week weeks
Form Env.2 shall be ⚫ All applicable items specified in the table in
provided by the Employer the section 6.16.3. Monitoring (Weekly)
Monthly Report ⚫ Updates of relevant legal and policy

framework
Submission: 10th of the
next month ⚫ Chainage-wise project activity summary
Form Env.3 shall be ⚫ All applicable monitoring items specified in
provided by the Employer the table in the section 6.16.3. Monitoring
(Monthly)
⚫ Compliances of the monitoring items and
counter measures if it is applicable within next
month
Quarterly Report ⚫ Updates of relevant legal framework

Submission: 20th of the ⚫ Chainage-wise project activity summary
next month after each three- ⚫ All applicable items specified in the table in
months the section 6.16.3. Monitoring (Quarterly)
Form Env.4 shall be ⚫ Compliances of the monitoring items and
provided by the Employer counter measures if it is applicable within next
quarter

7. FINANCIAL DEDUCTION/WITHHOLDING
7.1. Financial deductions from Contractor on occurrences of an incident.
7.1.1. Table No. 1 below indicates SHE incidents and the corresponding deductions to be
made from the Contractor under Sub-Clauses 2.5 [Employer’s Claims], 14.3 (f)
[Application for Interim Payment], 14.6 [Issue of Interim Payment Certificates] and
14.7 [Payment] of the Conditions of Contract.
7.1.2. The affected part of the Works shall remain suspended until all necessary
investigations are completed as prescribed in Clause 2. [SHE Management], Sub-
Clause 2.15 Accident Report and Investigation and as per the related local laws of
the state.
7.1.3. Following a joint inspection of the affected part of the Works by the Employer,
Engineer and the Contractor, upon the Contractor’s Request for Inspection (RFI)
submission, the Contractor may resume work on receipt of the Engineer’s Consent
(Notice of No Objection: NONO).
7.1.4. The Contractor shall not be entitled to any extension of time or to the payment of any
cost or profit due to any suspension in accordance with this clause 7.1
7.1.5. The maximum amount of delay damages set out in Sub-Clause 8.7 [Delay Damages]
of the Conditions of Contract shall not be applicable where the cause of delay to
completion is suspension of part of the Works due to the Contractor’s non-
compliance as described in this clause 7.1.
Table No. 1: Incidents
Sl. Financial deductions from the

Incident
No. Contractor in Indian Rupees
1 Injury and i) Fatal accidents i) Rs.1,000,000 for first fatality
Incidence and Rs.1500,000 for every
ii) Injury accident
reporting subsequent fatality.
iii) Abnormal delay in
reporting accidents or ii) Rs.300,000 for first grievously
injured person and Rs.500,000
wilful suppression of
for every subsequent
information about any
grievously injured person
accidents / dangerous
(Grievous Injury as defined by
occurrence as per Clause
Workmen Compensation Act)
2.15.4.
iv) Non-compliance of the iii) Rs. 1,00,000 for first violation
and Rs. 2,00,000 for
Clause 2.15.16.,2.15.17.,
subsequent violations
and 2.15.18.

Sl. Financial deductions from the

Incident
No. Contractor in Indian Rupees
iv) Rs. 50,000 for first violation
and Rs.1,00,000 for
7.2. Withholding and deduction of payments from Contractor
7.2.1. The Engineer may issue a notice to the Contractor in accordance with Sub-Clause 3.3
[Instructions of the Engineer] of the Conditions of Contract to rectify any unsafe act
or condition (including but not limited to error, default or omission) upon discovery
of same on the Site by the Engineer, in a form of Nonconformity Report.
7.2.2. Table No. 2 below indicates Contractor’s non-conformances from the SHE
requirements of the Contract and the corresponding amounts to be withheld and
deducted by the Engineer from payment due to the Contractor under Sub-Clauses
14.3 (f) [Application for Interim Payment], 14.6 [Issue of Interim Payment
Certificates] and Sub-Clause 14.7 [Payment] of the Conditions of Contract.
7.2.3. The Engineer shall have the right to withhold and deduct charges for any other unsafe
act and/or condition depending upon the gravity of the situation on a case-to-case
basis. The charge shall be comparable to that, which is the closest to the unsafe
act/condition, indicated in Table 2.
7.2.4. Except as may be required otherwise by the Laws of the Republic of India, upon
receipt of the Engineer’s notification concerning an unsafe act or condition as
described in Table No. 2, the Contractor shall promptly comply with such
notification, investigate the cause of the unsafe act or condition and as soon as
possible (but no later than 7 days, or within such other period from receipt of the
Engineer’s notification as may be approved by the Engineer), submit to the Engineer
for review full details of the proposed correction, prevention and any other measures
(hereinafter referred to as the “measures”) to be taken by the Contractor to rectify
and close-out the matter and to prevent re-occurrence. Such measures shall be to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
7.2.5. The Engineer are entitled to withhold amounts from the Contractor’s payment until
the Engineer have verified the Contractor’s measures, submitted to the Engineer for
review as above, and accepted them after a joint inspection in response to the RFI for
the same.
7.2.6. Shall the Contractor default in implementing any measures within the time previously
agreed between the Contractor and the Engineer or the Contractor makes subsequent
violations as specified in Table No. 2, the Engineer shall be entitled to the deduction
to be recovered from the Contractor under Sub-Clause 2.5 [Employer’s Claims] of
the Conditions of Contract. Such deductions shall be made via the certification and

payment process provided for in the Contract, including Sub-Clauses 14.3 (f)
[Application for Interim Payment], 14.6 [Issue of Interim Payment Certificates] and
14.7 [Payment] of the Conditions of Contract. Without limiting to the unsafe acts and
or conditions mentioned above in Table 2.
7.2.7. The release or deduction of amount shall happen in the next payment process.
7.3. Suspension of work
7.3.1. The Engineer may issue a notice to the Contractor in accordance with Sub-Clauses
3.3 [Instructions of the Engineer] and 8.8 [Suspension of Work] of the Conditions of
Contract to suspend the progress of part of the Works in a form of Nonconformity
Report, if in the Engineer’s opinion such work is non-compliant with the SHE
requirements of the Contract. Such notification shall include details of the cause of
the suspension. During such suspension, the Contractor shall protect, store and secure
such part of the Works against any deterioration, loss or damage.
7.3.2. The Contractor shall not proceed with the affected Works until its measures are
accepted by the Engineer.
7.3.3. Suspension of part of the Works as described in clause 7.3.1 above and withholding
of the amount from the Contractor’s payment clause 7.2 above shall continue together
or independently until the Engineer has verified the Contractor’s correction and
close-out of any such non-conformity.
7.3.4. The Contractor shall not be entitled to any extension of time or to the payment of any
cost or profit due to any suspension in accordance with the clause 7.2.
7.3.5. The maximum amount of delay damages set out in Sub-Clause 8.7 [Delay Damages]
of the Conditions of Contract shall not be applicable where the cause of delay to
completion is suspension of part of the Works due to the Contractor’s non-
compliance as described in this Clause 7.
Table No. 2: Unsafe Acts/Conditions
Sl. Deductible amount from the

Unsafe Act/Condition
No Contractor in Indian Rupees
1 SHE Management 1) SHE policy For first violation warning letter, 2nd
Policy & Plan violation withholding Rs 5,000 along
a) Non-compliance of with undertaking from the Contractor
Clause 2.4.1
There after deduction Rs.25,000 for
b) (Per Month) subsequent violations.


1) SHE plan: For first violation warning letter, 2nd

violation withholding Rs 100,000
a) Delay in submission along with undertaking from the
(Clause 2.4.2.) Contractor
b) Not updated as per There after deduction of amount
employer’s instruction as Rs100,000 for single violation,
per Clause 2.4.2. compounded to a maximum of
Rs.2,00,000 at any single instance.
c) Copies not provided to all
required supervisors /
engineers (Clause 2.4.3.)
2 SHE i) Not complying to the For first violation warning letter, 2nd
minimum manpower violation withholding Rs 100,000
Organization
requirements as mentioned in along with undertaking from the
Contractor
General Instruction SHE/GI/
002 (Clause 8. Attachment-1) There after deduction of amount
ii) Not filling up the vacancies i) Rs.1,00,000 per month for first
created due to SHE personnel month and Rs.2,00,000 for
leaving the Contractor within subsequent months.
30 days. (Clause 2.6.1.) ii) & iii) Rs.50,000 per month for
iii) SHE organization not first month and Rs.1,00,000 for
provided with required subsequent months.
Audio-visual and other
equipment as per General
Instruction SHE/GI/ 003
(Clause 8. Attachment-3)
3 SHE Committee i) Failed to formulate or conduct For first violation warning letter, 2nd
SHE Committee meeting for violation withholding Rs 1,00,000
any month (Clause 2.8.1.) along with undertaking from the
Contractor
ii) The Contractor and Sub-the
There after deduction of amount
Contractor representatives not
attending SHE Committee i) Rs.100,000 for the first violation
meetings (Clause 2.8.4.) and Rs.500,000 for the
iii) Failed to conduct Site
inspection before conducting ii) Rs.5,000 to the member of the
SHE Committee meeting contractor who had not attended
(Clause 2.11.9.) the meeting for first violation and


iv) Failed to send SHE Rs.25,000 for subsequent
Committee Minutes of violations.
Meeting or Agenda to For item iii) & iv)
Employer in time (Clause
2.8.6 & 2.8.8.) Rs.25,000 for first violation and
Rs.50,000 for subsequent violations
4 ID Card i) Non-adherence of Clause 2.9. For first violation warning letter, 2nd
along with undertaking from the
Contractor
There after deduction of amount Rs.
100,000 per month.
5 SHE Training i) Not complying to the For first violation warning letter, 2nd
requirements as mentioned in violation withholding Rs 50,000
conditions of contract on SHE along with undertaking from the
Contractor
and project SHE manual
(Clause 2.9.1, 2.10.2, 2.10.5 There after deduction of Rs.1,00,000
and 2.10.6) for subsequent violations
6 SHE Inspection i) Not complying to the For first violation warning letter, 2nd
requirements as mentioned in violation withholding Rs 50,000
conditions of contract on SHE along with undertaking from the
Contractor
and project SHE manual as
per Clause 2.11. There after deduction of Rs.1,00,000
for subsequent violations
7 SHE Audit Internal Audit: MARS & External For first violation warning letter,
Audit withholding Rs 50,000 along with
undertaking from the Contractor
i) Not conducted as per SHE
Plan (2.12.2 & 2.12.4) There after deduction of Rs.1,00,000
for subsequent violations.
ii) Report not sent to Employer
(2.12.2.6)
iii) Corrective action not taken
for any month (2.12.4.8)
8 SHE i) Important days to be observed i) Rs.10,000 for first violation and

Communication for SHE awareness as Rs.50,000 for subsequent
furnished by employer not violations
observed (2.13.2) ii) 200,000 per month


ii) Posters as directed by
Employer not printed and
displayed (2.13.2)
9 SHE Submittals Non-compliance of Clause 2.14 For first violation warning letter, 2nd
Contractor
There after deduction of Rs.1,00,000
for subsequent violations
10 Traffic a) Non-compliance of Clause For first violation warning letter, 2nd

Management 4.36 violation withholding Rs 1,00,000
Contractor
There after deduction of Rs.2,00,000
b) The Contractor Vehicles For first violation warning letter, 2nd

(Clause 4.7) violation withholding Rs 25,000
i) Over loading of vehicles Contractor
ii) Unfit drivers or operators There after deduction of amount
iii) Unlicensed vehicles Rs.25,000 per single violation
compounded to a maximum of
iv) Absence of traffic Rs.1,00,000 at any single instance.
marshals
v) Absence of reversing
alarm
vi) Absence of fog light (at
winter)
vii) vii) Power / hand
brakes not in working
condition
11 Emergency Non-compliance of Clause 2.16 For first violation warning letter,

Preparedness Plan withholding Rs 1,00,000 along with
Rs.1,00,000 for subsequent violation.


12 Permit to work Non-compliance of Clause 4.35 For first violation warning letter,
withholding Rs 1,00,000 along with
Rs.1,00,000 for subsequent violation.
13 Occupational Non-compliance of Clause 5.2 For first violation warning letter, 2nd
Health violation withholding Rs 50,000
Contractor
50,000 per month for subsequent
violations.
14 Labour Welfare Non-compliance of Clause 5.6 For first violation warning letter, 2nd
Measures violation withholding Rs 50,000
Contractor
There after deduction of Rs.50,000
per month for subsequent violations.
15 Environmental i) Tyre wash facility not For first violation warning letter, 2nd
Management provided for vehicle running violation withholding Rs 50,000
on metaled public roads along with undertaking from the
Contractor
(4.2.3)
ii) Spillage from vehicles (6.7.6) for subsequent violations.
iii) Dust control measures (6.8.2)
iv) Improper disposal of debris /
residues (6.11)
16 Housekeeping i) Surrounding areas of For first violation warning letter, 2nd

(4.2) drinking water tanks / taps violation withholding Rs 50,000
not hygienically cleaned / along with undertaking from the
Contractor
maintained
ii) Office, stores, toilet / urinals for subsequent violations.
not properly cleaned and
maintained.


iii) Required garbage bins at
appropriate places not
provided / not cleaned.
iv) Stairways, gangways,
passageways blocked.
v) Lumber with protruding nails
left as such
vi) Openings unprotected
vii) Excavated earth not removed
within a reasonable time.
viii) Truck carrying excavated
earth not covered/tyres not
cleaned. (Clause 4.2.4.)
ix) After close of work Vehicles
/ equipment not parked at
designated place
x) Unused surplus cables / steel
scraps lying scattered
xi) Wooden scraps, empty
wooden cable drums lying
scattered
xii) Water stagnation leading to
mosquito breeding
17 Working at Height Non-compliance of Clause 4.3. For first violation warning letter, 2nd
/ Ladders and violation withholding Rs 50,000
Scaffolds along with undertaking from the
Contractor
18 Lifting Non-compliance of Clause 4.5 For first violation warning letter, 2nd
Appliances and violation withholding Rs 50,000
Gear along with undertaking from the
Contractor
Rs.50,000 for subsequent violations.


19 Launching Non-compliance of Clause 4.6 For first violation warning letter, 2nd
Operation violation withholding Rs 50,000
Contractor
5,000 compounded to Rs.1,00,000 for
subsequent violations.
20 Site Electricity Non-compliance of Clause 4.10 For first violation warning letter, 2nd
21 Power Tools along with undertaking from the
(4.10.11) Contractor
10,000 compounded to Rs.1,00,000
22 Gas Cutting-4.12 i) Wrong colour coding of For first violation warning letter, 2nd
cylinder. violation withholding Rs 10,000
ii) Cylinders not stored in Contractor
upright position.
iii) Flash back arrester, non- 10,000 compounded to Rs.100,000
return valve and regulator for subsequent violations.
not present or not in working
condition.
iv) Fail to put cylinders in a
cylinder trolley.
v) Damaged hose and fail to use
hose clamps
vi) Using domestic LPG
cylinders
vii) Fail to store cylinder 6.6m
away from fire prone
materials
viii) Fire extinguisher not placed
in the vicinity during
operation
23 Welding (4.12) i) Voltmeter and Ammeter not For first violation warning letter, 2nd
working violation withholding Rs 10,000


ii) Non-availability of separate along with undertaking from the
switch in the transformer Contractor
iii) Improper grounding and There after deduction of amount Rs.

10,000 compounded to Rs50,000 for
return path.
iv) Damaged and bare openings
in the welding cable.
v) Damaged holder
vi) vi) Fire extinguisher not
placed in the vicinity during
operation
24 Fire Precaution i) Smoking and open flames in For first violation warning letter,
(4.32) fire prone area withholding Rs 10,000 along with
ii) Using more than 24V portable
electrical appliances in the
fire prone area subsequent violations.
iii) Not proper ventilation in
cylinder storage area.
iv) Absence of fire extinguishers
v) Fire extinguishers not refilled
once in a year.
vi) Fire extinguisher placed in a
not easily accessible location
25 Excavation, Non-compliance For first violation warning letter, 2nd

Tunneling and violation withholding Rs 10,000
Confined Space along with undertaking from the
(4.13, 4.14, 4.15 Contractor
& 4.16) There after deduction of amount Rs.
26 Traffic a) Barricades – Items of For first violation warning letter, 2nd

Management and attention are as under - violation withholding Rs 25,000
site barricading along with undertaking from the
(4.36) i) Not Cleaned Contractor
ii) Not in alignment
iii) Not numbered


iv) Not painted There after deduction of amount Rs.
25,000 compounded to Rs1,00,000
v) Red lights / reflectors not for subsequent violations.
working
vi) Damages not repaired
vii) Not secured properly
viii) Barricade inspector not
employed
ix) Protruding parts
27 Batching plant Non-compliance of Clause 4.20 For first violation warning letter, 2nd
and Casting yard violation withholding Rs 10,000
Contractor
28 Personal Non-compliance of Clause 4.41. The deduction of amount from item i)

Protection to vi).
Items of attention are as under –
Equipment Rs.200 per single violation
i) Not having
Rs.50,000 for first violation and
ii) Not wearing (or) using and Rs.1,00,000 for subsequent
kept it elsewhere violations.
iii) Using damaged one
iv) Using wrong type
v) Using wrong colour helmet or
helmet without logo
vi) Using for other operation (e.g.
Using safety helmet for
storing materials or carrying
water from one place to other)
29 Working near Non-compliance of Clause 4.37. For first violation warning letter and
Railway withholding Rs 50,000 along with



8. ATTACHMENT
Attachment -1 - Contents of SHE Management Plan
1. General
1.1. The Contractor shall prepare a Safety, Occupational Health and Environment (SHE)
Management Plan, which provides measures to protect the safety and health of
employees always when engaged in the construction process and the public when
exposed to construction activities either on- or off-site.
1.2. The Contractor’s SHE Management Plan shall be based on safety and health
considerations submitted with the Bid and shall have the content shown in the
previous section [Contents of SHE Management Plan].
1.3. 1.3. The Contractor shall submit his for review by the Engineer within 28 days after
the Commencement Date of the Services and shall amend the SHE Management Plan
to address any comments made by the Engineer and submit a Final SHE Management
Plan within 14 days of receipt of comments.
1.4. The Final SHE Management Plan shall be binding on the Contractor for the duration
of the Services.
2. Content of SHE Management Plan
2.1. The Contractor’s SHE Management Plan shall cover the following aspects:
Contract No.
Contractor Name
Project Name
1 Project Highlights
i) Title of the content
ii) The Contractor Number
iii) Brief scope of work
iv) Location map/key plan
v) Period of the project
2 SHE Management Policy with Senior management responsibility;
3 Site Organization Chart


1) Chart indicating reporting of SHE Management Personnel and
Appointment, duties and responsibilities
4 Roles & Responsibility

Individual responsibility of the
i) The Contractor’s Representative
ii) Chief SHE Officer
iii) Chief Accident Prevention Officer
iv) Construction Manager
v) Construction Supervisors
vi) SHE Committee Members
vii) SHE in Charge
viii) Site Engineers
ix) First Line Supervisors
x) Subcontractors
5 SHE Committee
i) Details - Chairman, Members, Secretary and Engineer
ii) Procedures for effective conduct of meeting
6 SHE Training
7 Subcontractor Safety and health procedures for Subcontractors;
8 SHE Inspection and Audit
10 Accident, diseases Investigation Reporting Procedures
11 Occupational Health First aid and emergencies Measures ;
12 Staff and Labour Welfare Measures at site
13 Policy for identifying hazards and risks with Risk Assessment and
Mitigation Procedures

14 Safe Work Procedures e.g.

i) Excavation
ii) Structural Steel Erection
iii) Form Works
iv) Concrete Placement
v) Other Special Works (if any.)
vi) Work at Height
vii) Switch-over works
viii) Floor, Wall Openings and Stairways
ix) Welding, Cutting and Bracing
x) Lifting appliances
xi) Work Permit System
xii) Electrical Equipment
xiii) Mechanical Equipment
xiv) Fire Prevention
xv) Hazardous Chemicals and Solvent
xvi) Ionizing Radiation
xvii) Lighting
xviii) Abrasive Blasting
15 Work Permit System
16 List of standard job specific PPEs to be used in the site
17 Maintenance of Regime for construction Equipment and

Machinery
18 Traffic Management
19 Housekeeping
20 Environmental and Social Management
21 Visitors and Security arrangement
22 Disciplinary procedures

23 Safety and health promotion and awareness;
24 Safety and health equipment and Safety and health of the

Contractor’s construction and office equipment;
Note: -The Safety, Occupational and Health (SHE) Management Plan shall be
incorporated in the relevant sections.
3. Training
3.1. The Contractor shall describe the training program and content he will provide for
workers and staff to:
a) Raise awareness of: the role and importance of safety and health matters; the
potential negative impacts of construction work in general and the ways in which
impacts can be prevented; and the expected construction impacts and long-term
environmental and social benefits of the applicable project;
b) Disseminate the philosophy and approach of the SHE Management Plan

throughout the workforce, and explain the roles of all parties in implementing the
SHE Management Plan; and
c) Inform all employees of the safety and health activities they are required to
comply with when conducting their work, and the penalties for non-compliance.
3.2. Training to raise the awareness and capacity of the Subcontractors and their
employees shall also be incorporated where necessary.
3.3. The Contractor shall prepare the following plans to supplement the SHE
Management Plan:
a) Emergency Preparedness and Response Plan; and
b) Fire Prevention, Control and Evacuation Plan.

Attachment -2 Work Place Policy (on HIV/AIDS Prevention & Control)
1. Background and Rationale
1.1. The Employee recognizes that the continuing spread of HIV/AIDS constitutes a
serious obstacle to the process of development and realizes that there is a need to
have coordinated and sustained response to the HIV/AIDS epidemic.
1.2. The Employee recognizes that access to medication in the context of pandemics such
as HIV/AIDS is one of the fundamental elements necessary to achieve progressively
the full realization of the right of everyone to the enjoyment of the highest attainable
standard of physical and mental health.
1.3. The Employer recognizes that care, support and treatment can contribute to effective
prevention through increased acceptance of voluntary and confidential counselling
and testing, and by keeping people living with HIV/AIDS and vulnerable groups in
close contact with health-care systems and facilitating their access to information,
counselling and preventative supplies.
1.4. The Employer recognizes that effective prevention, care and treatment strategies will
require behavioural changes and increased availability of and non-discriminatory
access to, inter area, vaccines, condoms, microbicides, sterile injecting equipment,
drugs including anti-retroviral therapy, diagnostics and related technologies as well
as increased research and development;
2. General
2.1. The transmission of the Human Immunodeficiency Virus (HIV) is through:
a) Unprotected sexual contact with an infected person;
b) Transfusion of infected blood or blood products;
c) Sharing of infected needles or syringes; and
d) From infected mother-to-child during pregnancy, childbirth or breast feeding.
2.2. There is no scientific or epidemiological evidence to suggest that HIV can be

transmitted through ordinary workplace contact (talking to or touching the person,
using the same office equipment, tools, utensils or bathroom). Transmission is
therefore not likely in the regular workplace setting.
2.3. People with HIV may remain healthy and fit to work for several years despite their
infection.

2.4. With the availability of Anti-Retroviral Treatment, the life of people living with HIV
can be prolonged substantially and they can lead a normal productive life.
3. Aim
3.1. The policy aims to:
a) Prevent transmission of HIV infection amongst workers engaged by the

Contractor including those of his subcontractors and consultants and their
families;
b) Provide access to care, support and treatment to those who are infected; and
c) Protect workers from stigma and discrimination related to HIV/AIDS by assuring

them equity and dignity at the workplace.
4. Scope
4.1. This policy applies to all contractors, subcontractors, consultants and their employees
(including applicants applying them for work) in the Site, office locations,
accommodation camps, all other workplaces and contracts of employment, and all
aspects of work, formal and informal and the self-employed worker engaged with the
Contractor for providing goods or services at any work location and their spouse and
children or other family members, residing with the Worker.
5. Guiding Principles
5.1. The policy adopts the key principles of the International Labour Organisation (ILO)
‘Code of Practice on HIV/AIDS and the World of Work’ that are in line with the
Government of India’s ‘National HIV/AIDS Policy’ and approach of Japan
International Cooperation Agency (JICA).
5.2. Based on above, the Contractor shall:
1) Provide a safe and healthy work environment for employees;
2) Educate its employees and their family members on prevention, care and
treatment of HIV/AIDS;
3) Provide counselling service;
4) Educate its employees on safe blood donation and transfusion;
5) Maintain confidentiality regarding the identity and medical information of an

infected employee. Only the immediate senior would be kept advised to prevent
any medical eventuality;

6) Allow an HIV positive employee to continue to work in his or her job unless
medical conditions interfere with the job requirement. On health grounds, the
employee may be shifted to another job for which he is medically fit;
7) Ensure continued employment and benefits to people living with HIV (PLHIV);
8) Ensure that the co–employees do not shun their HIV positive peer or refuse to
work alongside them;
9) Not discriminate against any employee infected by HIV/AIDS regarding

promotions, training and any other privileges, applicable to all employees of his
organisation;
10) Not ask any person who is being offered a job to undergo HIV/AIDS prevalence
test, without an informed consent and pre-test counselling of the candidate, as a
part of general medical examination before the issue of the appointment letter, or
otherwise;
11) Educate its employees and encourage them to participate in voluntary counselling
and testing of HIV/AIDS. However, HIV/AIDS tests shall not be a part of any
annual or regular health check-ups, without the employee’s informed consent and
pre-test counselling;
12) Ensure that proper treatment is available to employees infected with HIV/AIDS
and prescribe a reasonable limit on expenditure in meeting the cost of anti-
retroviral (ARV) drugs. All other costs related to treatment of HIV/AIDS (non-
ARV) shall be borne by the Contractor; and
13) Empanel appropriate hospital(s) for treatment of HIV/AIDS of an infected

employee and release payment directly to such hospital.

6. Action Plan
6.1. The Contractor shall engage a professional agency (PA), with approval of the
Engineer, to facilitate implementation of the guidelines laid down in this policy by
the Contractor.
6.2. The Contractor shall undertake measures to reduce the risk of the transfer of HIV
virus between and among the Contractor’s employees including those engaged by his
subcontractors and the local community, to promote early diagnosis and to assist the
affected individuals.
6.3. The Contractor shall conduct Information, Education and Communication (IEC)
campaigns via, the appointed professional agency, once in every month, addressed to
all employees including the employees of the Subcontractors and consultants, all
truck drivers, helpers, crew making material deliveries at the site and the local
communities. The IEC campaign shall focus on risks, dangers, impact, and avoidance
behaviour in respect of:
a) Sexually transmitted diseases (STD);
b) Sexually transmitted infections (STI) ; and
c) HIV/AIDS.
The IEC campaign shall include distribution of informative leaflets, screening of

educative films, display of posters and banners, small group lectures, street plays etc.
6.4. The Contractor shall identify peer educators (one for every hundred workers) from
among his employees and refer them for professional training to the appointed
professional agency.
6.5. The peer educators on completion of the training shall serve as the focal point for any
information, education and awareness campaigns among the Workers throughout the
contract period.
6.6. The peer educators shall be paid a monthly honorarium as fixed by the Contractor for
rendering these services in addition to their regular duties.
6.7. The total number of peer educators (1 for 100 workers) shall always be maintained
by the Contractor.
6.8. If a peer educator leaves the Contractor’s employment, then the Contractor at his own
expense shall train the new replacement peer educator via the Engineer/Employers’
appointed agency for the purpose.

6.9. The Contractor shall establish on-site health clinics to provide free of charge
counselling and information on STI/HIV/AIDS, and first-aid services.
6.10. The Contractor shall provide facility for STI and HIV/AIDS screening, diagnosis,
and referral to a dedicated national STI and HIV/AIDS programme in such clinics.
6.11. The Contractor shall arrange for health checks including HIV/AIDS screening before
work begins and annually thereafter.
6.12. 6.12. The Contractor shall arrange for free supply of condoms at accommodation
camps.
6.13. The Contractor shall submit, as a part of the SHE Management Plan, a comprehensive
action plan listing the activities to be undertaken regarding prevention of STI and
HIV/AIDS, within 28 days of award of the Contract, for approval of the Engineer.
6.14. The action plan shall contain various activities to be undertaken by the Contractor
during the period of contract as mentioned in this policy and specified in the Contract.
7. Implementing Organization
7.1. A project coordination committee (PCC) shall be constituted by the Employer in

respect of each contract awarded where this policy is required to be implemented.
The PCC shall consist of the following members:
1) The Employer/Engineer;
2) The Contractor;
3) Representative of the professional agency appointed by the Employer;
4) Representative of SACS/Local Health Department of the state; and
5) Representative of workers.
7.2. The PCC shall monitor the implementation of the Employer’s workplace policy on
HIV/AIDS prevention and control for employees engaged by the Contractors at the
project level.
8. Role of Key Stakeholders
8.1. The following shall be the role of the key stake holders regarding implementation of
this policy:

Key
Role
Stakeholder
PCC The PCC shall:

a) Examine the action plan submitted by the Contractor under
this policy or the Contract and recommend the same for
approval of Employer;
b) Monitor and evaluate the progress of activities, budget
utilisation etc. under this policy or the Contract;
c) Provide guidance for implementation of the action plan ;
d) Monitor and review the activities being undertaken including
resource (budget) utilisation;
e) Advise on problems being faced by the Contractor during
implementation;
f) Give periodic progress report to the Engineer.
The PCC shall meet once in 2 months or whenever necessity
arises.
The Engineer The Engineer shall:

a) Formulate, in consultation with the Employer, the project
specific HIV/AIDS prevention programme;
b) Approve the Contract specific HIV/AIDS prevention
programme submitted by the Contractor;
c) Approve the Terms of Reference (TOR) submitted by the
Contractor for hiring the Professional Agency (PA);
d) Coordinate with other stakeholders to modify or revise the
action plan as and when required;
e) Supervise the programme implementation;
f) Monitor, evaluate and report the implementation progress;
g) Supervise the Contractor’s obligation under this policy or the
Contract for prevention and control of HIV/AIDS.
Contractors The Contractor shall:

a) Submit to the Engineer for his approval, the Contract
specific detailed HIV/AIDS prevention programme;
b) Submit to the Engineer for his approval, the Terms of
Reference (TOR) for hiring the Professional Agency (PA);

Key
Role
Stakeholder
c) Engage a professional agency with approval of the Engineer;
d) Work with the Professional Agency (PA) in implementing
HIV/AIDS prevention programme among his employees
including the employees of his subcontractors and
consultants.
e) Establish on-site health clinics to provide the following
without any charge, to his employees and their families:
i) Information and counselling on STI/HIV/AIDS;
ii) First-aid services on universal precaution for
HIV/AIDS prevention;
iii) Screening and diagnosis facility;
iv) Referral facility to a national programme; and
v) Supply of contraceptive devices to males/females,
including condoms.
f) Ensure participation of his employees and employees of his
subcontractors and consultants including self-employed or
piece rated employees, in the HIV/AIDS prevention
programme while their employment and during normal
working hours;
g) Do nothing to dissuade the employees as mentioned in (f)
above from participating in HIV/AIDS prevention
programme;
h) Encourage employees to work as peer educators on
HIV/AIDS prevention after being trained by the Professional
Agency (PA);
i) Ensure active participation of his occupational health staff in
implementing the key tasks organized by the Professional
Agency (PA);
j) Arrange distribution of contraceptive devices including
condoms in the employee accommodation camps without
any charge;
k) Arrange distribution of IEC materials among the employees
and their family members prepared through the Professional
Agency (PA);

Key
Role
Stakeholder
l) Establish linkage with SACS and/or local health authorities
for their help, guidance and integration with the national
programme;
m) Facilitate monitoring activities and undertake supervision to
ensure that the programme is implemented as planned;
n) Convene monthly meeting with the Professional Agency
(PA) for updates on progress of the programme; and
o) Report progress to the Engineer and PCC monthly.
8.2. The Contractor is expected to apply the above concepts to promote the same in a
positive and proactive manner during the execution of its contract.

Attachment -3 Reference for SHE Activities
General Instruction: SHE/GI/001
MINIMUM MANPOWER REQUIREMENTS OF SHE ORGANIZATION
Labou
Sr. r
Chief Dy. Chief SHE
SHE SHE SHE Welfa
SHE SHE (Electrical)
Manag Manager Executive re
Officer Officer Engineer
er Office
r
Refer Refer Refer Refer Note
01 02 01
Note 01 Note 02 Note 02 02
OH
Officer
Senior House
Communi with
Traffic Barricade Keeping/ Sr.
ty Liaison Necessary Environmen
Enginee maintenan Site Environmen
officer Nursing tal manager
r (Refer ce Squad Maintenan tal Manager
(CLO) Assistants
Note 4) ce Squads
(each
shift)
At each Refer
As As Refer Note
01 occupatio Note 2 01
required required 02
nal centre &3
Note 1. Minimum number of Sr. SHE Manager required is Four (4) or One (1) every 40 km
(rounded off to higher whole number), whichever is higher. In case of Sabarmati and
thane depot minimum number of Sr. SHE manager required will be Two in each
Note 2. The number of the staff for the package will be proposed by the contractor and
approved by the Engineer.
Note 3. Senior Traffic Engineer Post (including the staff) is applicable to contracts where the
work must be executed either below or over the ROW like viaduct, station contracts
wherein erection and maintenance of barricades are paramount important.
Note 4. The actual manpower will depend on project specific requirements. The Contractor
shall advise the Engineer its complete organization chart within 28 days from the
commencement date.

MINIMUM QUALIFICATION AND EXPERIENCE FOR (SHE) SAFETY,

ELECTRICAL, ENVIRONMENTAL, TRAFFIC ENGG. AND OCCUPATIONAL
HEALTH PROFESSIONALS
Sl. Experience
Designation Qualification
No (in years)
Chief SHE Officer shall have minimum

qualification in any of the following
degree/diploma:
B.E/B. Tech with Govt. recognized full
time Diploma in Safety.
BE/B. Tech in safety. 15
1 Chief SHE Officer (Similar
Government recognized PG Degree in
Environmental Engineering/Sciences with work=5)
Full Time Govt. Recognized Safety
diploma/Degree.
International Qualifications like CSP
(Certified safety professional), NEBOSH
Diploma, Grad IOSH, CMIOSH.
12
Dy Chief SHE
2 Same as above (Similar
officer
work=5)
B.E/B. Tech/ with Govt .recognized full

time Diploma in Safety.
BE/B. Tech in safety.
Government recognized PG Degree in
10
Senior SHE Environmental Engineering /Science.
3 With Full Time Safety diploma/Degree (Similar
Manager
from state Govt. recognized university in work=3)
safety.
International Qualifications like CSP
(Certified safety professional), NEBOSH
Diploma, Grad IOSH, CMIOSH.
Any Graduate with Govt. recognized full

time Diploma in Safety. with 5 years of 5
work experience in full-fledged SHE
4 SHE Manager (Similar
department of any Public Sector/Leading
Private Sector/MNC/with prior approval work=2)
of the Engineer on a case to case basis

Sl. Experience
Designation Qualification
No (in years)
Govt. recognised PG degree/PG

5 CLO diploma/Degree in sociology/Social 5
Science.
SHE (Electrical) Degree in Electrical Engineering + Govt.

6 5
Engineer recognized Electrical Licence holder
MBBS with Govt. recognized

Occupational
7 degree/diploma in Industrial/ occupational 1
Health Officer
health
Govt. recognized PG
Degree/Degree/Diploma in
8 Traffic Engineer 5
Traffic/Transportation Engineering or
Planning or another similar course
Any Degree with Govt. Recognized

Labour Welfare Degree/Diploma/PG Diploma in Labour
9 3
Officer Welfare related fields like Law,
Personnel/Industrial Relations etc.
Senior BE or MSc. Environmental 7

10 Environment Engineering/Environment Sciences from (Similar
Manager govt. recognised institutions. work=3)
BE or MSc. Environmental 5
Environment
11 Engineering/Environment Sciences from (Similar
Manager
govt. recognised institutions. work=2)
The qualifications and experience in respect of the following positions shall be

proposed by the Contractor and seek consent of the Engineer before their mobilization
at Site:
a) Director/Chief/Senior and other Safety, Occupational Health and Environment

Managers; and
b) Community Liaison Officer.
Note 1: In some exceptional cases where the candidate had earlier worked successfully in
Railway Projects, they can be considered, depending upon the qualification and no.
of years of experience on a case to case basis even if they do not possess the prescribed
qualification as listed above.

MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS OF SHE MONITORING AND AUDIO-VISUAL

EQUIPMENT
1) Every contractor shall provide the following audio-visual aids for conducting weekly
review, monthly safety committee and other post review meeting of all fatal and major
incidences effectively. This audio-visual equipment is a must for conducting periodical in-
house safety presentations in the training programs; and
2) In addition to the above, portable hand held digital sound level meter (SLM) and portable
hand held digital Lux meter are also to be provided.
3) The minimum requirement of the quantity to be provided in SHE management Plan and
Sl. No SHE Monitoring and Audio-Visual Equipment details
1 Portable hand-held Digital Sound Level Meter (SLM)
2 Portable hand-held Digital Lux Meter

Laptop computer with standard configuration including multimedia
3
facilities
4 Colour printer
5 Computer projector with screen
6 Overhead projector
Camera (For taking accident investigation photos in which case the
7
images cannot be easily altered)
Digital camera/camera equipped mobile phone with flash of minimum 8
8
mega pixel and video facility
Digital still camera /camera equipped mobile phone with flash of
9
minimum 8 mega pixels
10 Portable loudspeaker (for tool-box talk and emergency purpose)
11 Communication facility like mobile phone, walky-talky etc.
12 Accident investigation Kit containing the following:
a) Chalk piece for marking

Sl. No SHE Monitoring and Audio-Visual Equipment details
Measuring tape for measuring

b)
Flexible tape – 2m length Metal Foot long scale and Metal tape – 30m
c) Equipment tags
d) Multipurpose Flash light
e) Barrier tape
f) Accident investigation Forms and checklists
g) Enough Paper for witness recording and other noting
h) Emergency Phone Numbers list

Topics for SHE Orientation Trainings for Workmen for First Day at Work
1) Hazard Identification Procedure

Hazards on site:
⚫ Falls;
⚫ Earthing work;
⚫ Electricity;
⚫ Machinery;
⚫ Handling materials;
⚫ Transport;
⚫ Site housekeeping;
⚫ Fire;
⚫ Safety of nearby located structures;
⚫ Works close to railway tracks or roads.
2) Personal Protective Equipment
⚫ What is available?
⚫ How to obtain it?
⚫ Correct use and care.
3) Health
⚫ Site welfare facilities;
⚫ Potential health hazards;
⚫ First Aid/Cardiopulmonary Resuscitation (CPR). /Automated External
defibrillator(AED)
4) Duties of the Contractor
⚫ Brief outline of the responsibilities of the Contractor by law;
⚫ Details of the Contractor’s accident prevention policy;
⚫ The Employer SHE Management Manual (if any);
⚫ Building and other Constructions Welfare Law.
5) Employee's Duties
⚫ Brief outline of responsibilities of employee under law
⚫ Explanation of how new employees fit into the Contractor's plan for accident
prevention (induction and orientation).

ID CARD FORMAT (85 mm x 55mm) FRONT SIDE OF ID CARD:

General Instruction: SHE/GI/006 [SHE Training Matrix]

SHE Training Details for Managers and Supervisors
1. The Law and Safety 2. Policy and Administration

Statutory requirement Effect of incentive on accident prevention
Appropriate regulations SHE Policy
Duties of employee Industrial relations
Safety Officer: duties, aims, objectives
3. Safety and the Supervisor 4. Principles of Accident Prevention
Safety and efficient production Attitudes of management, supervision and
Accidents affect morale and public operations
relations Methods of achieving safe operations
Accident and injury causes
5. Site Inspection 6. Human Behavior
The role of management Motivating agencies
Hazard Identification Procedure Individual behavior
Records results Environmental effects
Follow-up procedures Techniques of persuasion
Feedback
7. Site housekeeping 8. Health
Site organization Medical examination
Relationship of site housekeeping to Hazard to health on site
accident occurrence Sanitation and welfare
Site access Protective clothing
Equipment storage First Aid/CPR
Material stacking
Materials handling
9. Personal Protective Equipment 10. Electricity
Eye, face, hands, feet and legs Appreciation of electrical hazards
Respiratory protective equipment Power tools
Protection against ionizing radiation Arc welding
Low voltage system
Lighting and power system on sites
ELCB, RRCB, Grounding/Ground fault
circuit interrupters (GFCIs)
11. Oxygen and Acetylene Equipment 12. Equipment
Cylinder storage and maintenance Accidents related to moving parts of
Condition and maintenance of valves, machinery
regulators, and gauges Appreciation of principles of guarding
Condition and maintenance of hoses and Importance of regular maintenance
fittings
Pressures
13. Transportation 14. Excavations
Transport to and from site Method of shoring

Hazard connected with site transport Precautions while shoring

Competent drivers Precautions at edge of excavations
Dumpers Removal of shoring
Tipping trucks Sheet steel piling
Movement near excavations
15. Working platforms, Ladders, and
16. Cranes and other Lifting Machines
Scaffolding
Hazards connected with the use of ladders Licensing, certification and training
Maintenance and inspection required for operation of cranes
Type of scaffold Slinging Methods
Overloading Signalling
Work on roofs Access to crane(s)
Fragile material Maintenance and examination
Openings in walls and floors Ground conditions
Use of Full Body Harness and nets Hazards and accident prevention methods
connected with the use of different types
of cranes/heavy equipment
Crane Lift Plan for all lifts
17. Lifting Tackle 18. Fire Prevention and Control
Slings - single and multi-legged Principle causes determining fire
Safe working loads (SWLs) Understanding fire chemistry
Safety hooks and eyebolts Fire fighting equipment
Cause of failure Firefighting training
Maintenance and examination
19. Communications
Effective methods of communication
(interest to non-English speaking workers)
Method and preparation of reports
Safety committees
Safety meeting

WEEK/DAYS TO BE OBSERVED FOR CREATING SHE AWARENESS
Road Safety Week (Subjected to confirmation

1st Monday to Sunday
from Ministry of Road Transport, Govt. of India
of January
every year.)
16th February Kyoto Protocol Day
March Red Cross Month
1st to 7th May Emergency Preparedness Week
4th March National Safety Day
7th April World Health Day
14th April Fire Safety Day
18th to 22nd April Earth Week
20th April Earth Day
20th April Noise Awareness Day
ILO World Day for Safety and Health at Work
28th April
Day
5th June World Environmental Day
12th June World Day against Child Labours
9th July Occupational Health Day
17th October World Trauma Day
1st December World AIDS Day
22nd March World Water Day
21st June World Yoga Day

Minimum Requirements of SHE Communication Posters/Signage/Video:
1) For Minimum requirements of SHE Communication Posters/Signage/Video for every 50

km
2) Every contractor falling into the above groups shall prepare a SHE Communication Plan
as a part of site specific SHE Management Plan and shall include the following minimum
requirement of Posters/Signage/Video as applicable. In case readymade posters are
available in any of the category from National Safety Council or any other safety related
organizations they may procure the same and display it. In case the same is not available,
then the Contractors shall make necessary arrangements to get the posters designed and
printed on their own. All posters shall each be in Hindi, English and the regional language;
and
3) All the above is to be detailed in the Contractor’s SHE Management Plan and he shall
obtain the Engineer’s prior consent for the numbers, contents, locations, etc.
Table No.: 1 - Minimum No. of Posters
Minimum No. of
Sl. No. of
SHE Poster Title concepts in each
No Posters/Signage/Video
title
1 Safety Culture 5 Each 10
2 Daily Safety Oath 1English, 1 Hindi Each 50
& 1 in regional
language
3 Signage to display the 2 types of sizes Each 25
a) messages like PPE ZONE, made up of metal
NO PPE ZONE, HARD sheet to be
HAT AREA etc. mounted at
different locations
b) Helmet 5 Each 25
c) Shoe 5 Each 25
d) Goggles & Ear Protection 5 Each 25
e) Full Body Harness 5 Each 25
f) Hi-Vi Jacket 5 Each 25
4 Emergency Management 5 Each 25
Plan
5 Working at Heights 10 Each 25
a) Ladder, Stairway, Scaffold 5 types of sizes Each 25
- Signage to display the made up of metal
messages like SAFE, sheet to be

Minimum No. of
Sl. No. of
SHE Poster Title concepts in each
No Posters/Signage/Video
title
UNSAFE, FIT FOR USE, mounted at
AVOID USE etc. different locations
6 Site Electricity 5 Each 25
7 Crane Safety 5 Each 25
8 Slings 5 Each 25
9 Rigging Procedures 5 Each 25
10 Excavation 5 Each 25
11 Occupational Health 10 Each 25
(Mosquito Control,
HIV/AIDS awareness,
Dust Control, Noise
Control, No
Smoking/Spitting, etc.)
12 First – Aid 3 Each 25
13 Labour Welfare Measures 5 Each 25
(Payment of Minimum
Wages, Avoidance of
Child labour, signing in
the Muster Roll, in case of
accidents-what to do? Etc.
14 Importance of “Safety 1 25
Handbook”
15 Traffic Safety 5 Each 25
(Speed limit, safe crossing
and working within
barricaded area etc.)
16 Environmental Monitoring 5 Each 25
(Spillage of Muck,
hazardous material,
Improper drainage, water
spray for dust containment
etc.)
17 Video in Hindi on PPE 1 -
usage – 15 minutes
duration
Note 1: Items mentioned under 17 is video. Items under 3 (a) and 5 (a) are metal signage
boards and all other items are posters.
Note 2: The above minimum numbers are for guidance only. The actual number will
depend on the project’s specific requirements. The Contractor shall propose and
obtain Engineer’s prior consent to the final numbers, locations, etc.

Table No.: 2 – Size of Posters/Signage
Sl. No Item Size

17”x22” –135 GSM 4 Colour
1 Posters – Standard
Printing
Posters – Special (Wherever
2 17”x22” card laminated FA Poster
required)
Posters - Mega size (Wherever
3 32”x40” Flex FA Poster
required)
4 First-Aid Booklet 6”x4”
5 Safety Handbook 6”x4”
6 Signage Small: 12”x6”
Big: 24”x12”
Strictly as per Indian Road Congress
7 Road Traffic Sign Boards
(IRC) specifications
Table No.: 3 – Safety Signage Colour (as per IS: 9457)
Sl. No Type of signage Colour

1 Mandatory Blue
2 Danger Yellow
3 Prohibitory Red
4 Safe conditions Green

Attachment -4 Instruction Manual for the Usage of Track bound Motor

Cars/Machines
1. General Rules
1.1. Unless otherwise specified in the other regulations and guidelines, the following rules
in this manual apply to the use of track bound motor cars/machines and other vehicles
for the track works/electrification works etc. Mumbai-Ahmedabad High Speed
Railway Construction Work include electrical and civil engineering work to be
carried out using track bound motor cars/vehicles and machines etc. on the main line.
1.2. Listed below are the other regulations and guidelines:
1) Indian Railways Manual of AC Traction Maintenance and Operation Vol-II(

Part-I)
2) Indian electricity Act and Rules;
3) Rules for the Management and Operation of Construction Machines (JRTT

Regulations No. 165, October 2003);
4) Standard Specification of Track-related Construction Work (JRTT Regulations

No. 66, February 2006); and
5) Standard Specification of Electricity-related Construction Work (JRTT

Regulations No. 176, October 2003).
1.3. Terms and Definitions:
1) [Track motorised or self-propelled vehicles, etc.]: Vehicles such as track

motorised or self-propelled cars, special-purpose cars (with a road-rail device),
tamping machines, slab track service cars, track inspection cars, electricity-
related service cars, carriage wagons (including ballast hopper cars) (hereinafter
referred to as “vehicles”) and other service cars used for work;
2) [Service cars]: Simple trolleys (excluding those with a brake that can easily be
removed or with materials and equipment that are hard to be removed), rail-
carrying wagons, rail warmers, hand wagons, bolt power wrenches, transportable
generators for construction work and other equipment that run on the track;
3) [Persons engaged in the use of vehicles and service cars]: The persons who are
directly engaged in the use of vehicles and service cars for work; specifically, the
Administrator, Supervisor, Operations Leader, Driver, Persons in charge of work
for vehicles on tracks, and Service Engineers;
4) [Ground-based workers]: The Operations Team Leader and Security Guards;

5) [Work line]: The tracks or sections where work is performed with any of the
vehicles and service cars;
6) [Passage line]: The tracks or sections where vehicles and service cars pass
through;
7) [Engineer]: The Director of the Employer’s project office in charge of the track;
8) [General section]: Sections where the maximum gradient is lower than 15‰;
9) [Steeply-sloped section]: Sections where the maximum gradient is 15‰ or

higher;
10) [Uncompleted section]: Sections where the track conditions have not met the
completion standards;
11) [Completed section]: Sections where the track conditions have met the
completion standards; and
12) [Double- headed]: Two power cars connected with their double headed functions
that have been confirmed.
1.4. Designation of persons engaged in the use of vehicles and service cars are listed in
the following items.
1) Administrator
The deputy project manager of director of the Contractor’s project office who is
appointed by the Chief Project Manager Director.
2) Supervisor
A person with the qualification of Chief Project Manager of the contractor’s

project office in charge of Track-related Construction Work, the Standard
Specification of Electricity-related Construction Work and other guidelines, who
is approved by the Administrator in advance.
3) Operations Leader
A person who has full knowledge of the vehicle or service car to be used,
including its performance and functions, and has leadership skills regarding the
operation, who is approved by the Supervisor in advance.
4) Driver
Regarding self-propelled or traction vehicles, such as track bound motor cars or

tamping machines, Drivers have to have a certificate of skills issued by the Indian

Railway Authority or qualifications by the Indian Designated Training Institute.

Drivers shall be persons with full knowledge of the vehicle or service car to be
used, who are approved by the Supervisor in advance.
Regarding other vehicles, Drivers for each type of vehicles shall be persons who
are approved respectively by the Engineer in advance.
5) Persons in charge of work for vehicles on tracks
Persons with the knowledge and skills of coupling vehicles, operating the point
machine, and preventing operation accidents, who are approved by the Supervisor
in advance.
6) Service Engineer
Persons with qualifications that are equivalent to or higher than those of Drivers,
who are approved by the Supervisor in advance. (They can also serve as Drivers.)
1.5. Duties of persons engaged in the use of vehicles and service cars are listed in the
following items.
1) Administrator
After receiving an order from the Engineer, the person makes adjustment with
relevant parties for the use of a vehicle or service car and carries out tasks
regarding operation in the area under the jurisdiction of his office, approval and
management.
2) Supervisor
Regarding the use of vehicles or service cars, the person communicates with the
Administrator, and carries out paperwork, such as filing of an application for use.
The person also instructs and supervises the Operations Leader, the Driver, the
Persons in charge of work for vehicles on tracks, and the Service Engineers.
3) Operations Leader
The person informs all workers of his/her group of the operation plan given by
the Supervisor and ensures that they understand it. The person also communicates
accurately with the Driver and the Persons in charge of work for vehicles on
tracks, and then concentrates on taking command of the operation.
4) Driver
The Driver carries out a pre-operational check to make sure that the vehicle is in
good condition and properly maintained, and then concentrates on driving it,
following the Operations Leader’s instructions.

5) Persons in charge of work for vehicles on tracks
They carry out coupling and decoupling of the vehicle and operate point
machines, following the Operations Leader’s instructions.
The Operations Leader may also take up the role.
6) Service Engineer
Service Engineers maintain and manage vehicles to make sure that the vehicles
are in good condition and properly operated.
1.6. Duties of ground-based Contractor’s workers are listed in the following items.
1) Operations Team Leader
The person takes charge of the work group, supervises them and carries out tasks
to prevent an accident at the construction site.
2) Look out & Safety Guard
The Look out & Safety Guard concentrate on checking the passage line, the work
line and the area adjacent to them for an approaching train in order to ensure the
safety of vehicles, service cars and workers.
1.7. Belongings of persons engaged in the use of vehicles and service cars
The persons engaged in the use of vehicles and service cars and Security Guards shall
have the following minimum items with them during work.
Item Name Smoke Hand Signal Train

Whistle Watch Armband
Job Name Grenade Flag Light Operation
Operations Red,
⃝ ⃝ ⃝ ⃝ ⃝ ⃝
Leader Green
Driver ⃝ ⃝ ⃝ ⃝
Persons in
charge of work Red, ⃝ ⃝ ⃝
for vehicles on Green
tracks
Red,
Security guard ⃝ ⃝ ⃝ ⃝ ⃝ ⃝
Green
The shape of the armband shall be as follows.

Name of the job

Name of the Approx. 80 mm (Black characters on a yellow background)
company
For communication, suitable and reliable tele communications may be installed, or each
worker may have a transceiver with them as needed.
2. Operation of Vehicles or Service Cars
2.1. For the use of a vehicle or service car, the general guidelines are mentioned below
must be observed.
1) Submission of “Vehicle Operation Plan”
By the end of each week, the Supervisor creates “Vehicle Operation Plan” for the
next week and submits it to the Administrator.
2) Submission of “Application for the Use of Vehicles”
For using the vehicles specified in the Vehicle Operation Plan, the Supervisor
submits “Application for the Use of Vehicles” to the Administrator at least 3 days
before the date of use.
3) Creation and issuance of “Operation Timetable”:
a. Based on the “Application for the Use of Vehicles” submitted by the

Supervisor, the Administrator arranges the matter with relevant parties,
make adjustment, creates “Operation Timetable” and submits it to the
Supervisor by at least 2 days before the date of use; and
b. The Supervisor hands the copies of the issued “Operation Timetable” to

the relevant workers and makes it known to everyone.
4) Submission and approval of “Application for the Use of Service Cars”:
a. The Supervisor creates and submits “Application for the Use of Service
Cars” to the Administrator by at least 3 days before the use of service cars;
and
b. The Administrator makes arrangements for the use of the service cars and
approves it.

5) The Administrator, when he/she determines the need for the use of a section
outside of their jurisdiction, obtains prior consent from the Engineer of the
relevant agency based on the Vehicle Operation Plan.
2.2. As a rule, two or more vehicles or service cars shall not be used on the same work
line or passage line. However, this excludes cases where the Administrator
determines the need.
2.3. Regarding the composition of a vehicle, the following items must be observed:
1) Each vehicle must be equipped with a brake (electromagnetic brake, hereinafter

referred to “braking equipment”). Each track motor car, special-purpose car (with
a road-rail device) or service car for overhead wiring must be equipped with an
“overrun prevention system”; and
2) When a train is composed of vehicles with a through brake system, the brake pipe
or electrical train pipe must run through the vehicles.
2.4. When a service train is composed of vehicles for work, the Operations Leader must
confirm the coupling device between each vehicle, the couplings of the brake pipe or
electrical train pipe, release condition of air valves, etc.
2.5. Before driving a train or when compose vehicles, the Operations Leader and the
Driver must carry out a brake test, using the method described in the table below, and
confirm that the braking function and the overrun prevention system work properly.
The Operations Leader must record the results of the brake test and the confirmation
of the overrun prevention system in the Inspection Record Book.
The Inspection Record Book must always be placed near the driving seat.
Item Operations Leader Driver
1. Immediately charge the

When the vehicles are compressed air into the
completely composed
brake pipe.
2. Gives the signal to the

Driver to “fasten the brake”
from a position near the
back of the train.
(Daytime) Raises his/her arm

high and moves it in a circular
motion.

(Night-time) Holds a white

light in his/her hand, raises the
arm and moves it in a circular
motion.
3. Confirms the signal, check

that air for breaking is not
leaking, and gives the
whistle signal.
Whistle signal (Brake is
tightened) “- ・- ”
4. After confirming that the

brake of each vehicle is
tightened and hearing the
whistle signal from the
Driver, the Operations
Leader gives the signal to
“release the brake.”
high and moves it from side to
side.
light in his/her hand, raises the
arm and moves it from side to
side.
5. After confirming the signal,

releases the brake and gives
the whistle signal.
Whistle signal (Brake is
released) “- -”
6. After confirming that the

brake of each vehicle is
released, gives the signal to
tell the Driver that the brake
test is completed.
high.


light in his/her hand and raises
the arm.
7. Confirms the signal and

responds with the whistle
signal.
Whistle signal (The brake test
is completed) “- - -”
Overrun prevention Confirm functions based on the “Overrun Prevention System

system Flow”.
When a vehicle has a

When the brake does not work properly, replace the vehicle with a
problem with the
good one.
brake
2.6. The Driver can start driving a vehicle only after the Operations Leader told him/her
to do so.
2.7. The Driver must repeat each direction of the Operations Leader and follow the
Operations Leader’s directions when driving a vehicle.
The table below shows the permitted speed limits for vehicles.
General section Steeply-sloped section

Type Remarks
Uncompleted Completed Uncompleted Completed
section section section section
When a single
Track motor
20 40 20 35 vehicle is
car
used
Special-
purpose car Same as
20 40 20 35
(with a road- above
rail device)
Tamping Same as
20 40 20 35
machine above
Service car
Same as
for overhead 15 35 15 25
above
wiring
⚫ As a rule, the Driver must use the holding brake system while driving a vehicle
down a slope.

⚫ Before reaching a turnout or point, the Driver must stop the vehicle and confirm
the course to take, and then, drive the vehicle at a very low speed to pass through
it.
2.8. For the use of a vehicle with traction capability, the work procedure and method, and
the calculation of the tractive capacity, braking distance, maximum speed, etc. must
be submitted to the Engineer to receive the prior approval.
2.9. As a rule, vehicles shall be used based on the predetermined operation timetable.
2.10. If this is impossible due to a trouble with a vehicle or delay in work, the work team
shall report the situation to the Administrator and follow his/her directions.
2.11. When shunting or coupling work is performed in a depot, the following items must
be observed to prevent an accident:
1) The Operations Leader communicates with the Persons in charge of work for
vehicles on tracks to determine the order of shunting vehicles in advance.
Shunting work shall be performed according to the order;
2) Speed limits in a depot are prescribed as follows:
a. Turnouts or points must be passed at a very low speed; and
b. Others: 10 km/h or lower.
3) The Operations Leader confirms that the course for shunting the vehicle is
properly opened, and then gives the Driver the signal to shunt the vehicle;
4) Point machines in the depot must be operated by Persons in charge of work for
vehicles on tracks;
5) When the point machine is set to the reverse position, the operator must set it
back to the normal position immediately after using it; and
6) When parking a vehicle in the depot, the Driver must completely activate the
brake equipment, and then, completely tighten the hand brake. After confirming
that the Operations Leader securely set wheel chocks, the Driver stops the engine
and gives the vehicle a buffer stop. The same procedure must be taken for each
vehicle without a hand brake.
2.12. Regarding the use of turnouts and crossovers installed for construction work, the
following items must be observed:
1) As a rule, the opening of each turnout or crossover installed for construction work
shall be set to the normal position. When you set a turnout or crossover to the

reverse position, be sure to set it back to the normal position immediately after
using it for work;
2) Before reaching a turnout or crossover installed for construction work, the Driver
must stop the vehicle. The Operations Leader gets off the vehicle, walks to the
point to confirm the opening route, and guides the Driver to pass the vehicle
through the point at a very low speed; and
3) When the turnout is equipped with a key bolt or securing lock, the locking state
must be confirmed before the vehicle reaches the point.
2.13. When two or more vehicles are used on a same work line or passage line, the
1) The distance between two vehicles must be kept at least 200 meters. When the
distance cannot be confirmed due to conditions of low visibility, the Driver
behind must slow down the vehicle and follow the vehicle in front; and
2) When the Driver of the front vehicle finds a problem with running it due to a
breakdown or an abnormality, he/she must report it immediately in order to stop
the vehicle behind.
2.14. Regarding the overrun prevention for vehicles and service cars, the following items
must be observed to take all possible safety measures:
1) Before using a track motor car or other type of vehicle, take measures to prevent
the vehicle from overrunning the ends of the work area;
(Note) “Overrun prevention measures” refers to buffer stops, which may be

wooden sleepers or sandbags.
2) The Driver must be on standby without leaving the vehicle (including when
he/she is not driving the vehicle);
3) When the Driver needs to leave the vehicle due to unavoidable reasons, he/she
must obtain the Operations Leader’s consent, completely apply the air brake,
completely tighten the hand brake, and then, stop the engine after confirming that
the Operations Leader securely set wheel chocks;
4) When the Driver parks the vehicle for a long period of time, he/she must obtain
the Operations Leader’s consent, completely apply the air brake, completely
tighten the hand brake, and then, stop the engine after confirming that the
Operations Leader securely set wheel chocks;
(Note) “A long period of time” means an hour or longer.

5) The couplings, fittings, mounting pins shall be designated ones;
6) Regarding the overrun prevention for service cars, the following items must be
observed:
a. The brake equipment of a service car must be operated all the more
carefully because it is simple and easy to operate;
b. A simple trolley must have overrun prevention equipment. Be sure to

confirm functions of the braking device before use;
c. When a simple trolley is being used, at least two workers must be present.
Do not use it to carry a heavy object that is hard to be unloaded;
d. When it is necessary to use a simple trolley, the Use Plan (that includes
specifications, the intended use, place, and time period, the person in
charge of inspection, the form of the Inspection Record Book, photos, the
reference number, etc.) must be submitted to the Engineer to receive the
prior approval;
e. The summary of the records of inspecting the brake equipment and other
mechanisms of the simple trolley must be maintained;
f. When parking the trolley for a while during the work process, workers
must securely set wheel chocks; and
g. Service cars that are not in use must be removed from the track and placed
outside the structure gauge in an orderly manner.
3. Safety Equipment for Driving
3.1. When there is a temporary building for construction work beside the railway to be
used, and the clearance between the vehicle and the building is not enough, “warning
signs or equipment” must be set up at the far side and near side of the building.
(Note) Warning signs or equipment refer to “markings”, “warning equipment”, or

other signs calling for attention. The Administrator determines the shape and the
installation method. When a vehicle needs to be used in a tunnel or at night, red
lamps, fluorescent paint, or reflective sheet shall be used.
3.2. 3.2. For each turnout or crossover installed for construction work, the “fouling point
marker” shall be installed.

3.3. For each crossover installed for construction work, the “point machine marker” shall
be installed.
3.4. A buffer stop must be installed on the dead end of the line in a depot, which is always
used for parking the vehicle. In addition, the “buffer stop sign” must be placed there.
3.5. The buffer stop signs placed on the both ends of the work area shall be illuminated
triangular safety reflectors (called reflector in the Road Traffic Law) or the like.
3.6. At each location where the Driver needs to stop the vehicle to confirm safety, the
“stop sign” shall be set up.
3.7. The vehicles shall have signal lamps that are clearly visible at a distance:
1) The signal lamps must always be well inspected and maintained;
2) A red lamp must be installed on the back of the unpowered vehicle at the end of
a train towed by a powered vehicle. If this is impossible, red reflective sheet can
be used; and
3) During pushing operation by locomotive, a rotating-type warning lamp must be

installed on the front of the train.
3.8. The “use-of-vehicle indication panel” shall be put up in the railway construction
project office in charge of the track. The panel shows the locations of vehicles and
service cars, the Driver route, work methods, etc.
4. Hand/Whistle Signals
4.1. When shunting or moving a vehicle to another track, signals in the following table
shall be used.
Message
Daytime Night time or in a tunnel
Signal type
Hold a green flag and move it

Drive the vehicle from side to side. Hold a green light and move it
towards the person
Or move your hand from side to from side to side.
giving the signal.
side when a green flag is not there.
Drive the vehicle Hold a green flag and move it up

away from the and down. Hold a green light and move it up
person giving the Or move your hand up and down and down.
signal. when a green flag is not there.

Message
Daytime Night time or in a tunnel
Signal type
Stop moving the green flag in your

hand, and then, move it up and
down once as far as your arm
goes. Stop moving the green light in
your hand vertically or laterally,
Decrease the speed. Or, when a green flag is not there, and then, move it up and down
stop moving your hand vertically once as far as your arm goes.
or laterally, and then, move your
arm up and down once as far as it
goes.
Hold a rolled-up red flag and give

the signal to the Driver to drive the
vehicle forward or backward while
moving the rolled-up flag over After moving up and down the red
Drive the vehicle a your head. light in your hand, give the signal
little bit forward or
backward. Or, when a flag is not there, move to the Driver to drive the vehicle
your hand to give the signal to the forward or backward.
Driver to drive the vehicle forward
or backward while waving the
other hand over your head.
Show a red flag.

Stop the vehicle. Or raise your arms instead when a Turn on the red light.
red flag is not there.
Hold a red flag and a green flag

and raise them over your head, Turn on the red and green lights
Coupling
showing both flags by putting the several times by turns.
bottom ends of the sticks together.
4.2. The Driver of a vehicle or service car shall give the whistle signals in the following
table as needed.
Signalling
Whistle signals
method
1. To ask the Operations Team Leader to come. --
2. To warn about a danger. ・・・・・

3. To start driving the train that has two or more driven vehicles
・・-
backwards.
4. To start coasting the train that has two or more driven vehicles. - ・・

Signalling
Whistle signals
method
5. To start power running of the train that has two or more driven vehicles. ・
6. To call attention. -
7. To start moving (the vehicle). -
8. To respond to a coupling sign. ・・
9. To respond to ground-based workers. -
(Note) Regarding the symbols in the signalling method column, “-” means a middle
whistle and “・” means a short whistle.
4.3. When vehicles or service cars are pushed by a locomotive, the Operations Leader
must be in the front part of the front vehicle, pay attention to the front, and give the
Driver signals as listed in the table below.
General case Verbal signals

Message using
Signal type Night-time or in a communication
Daytime
tunnel equipment
No problem
Show a green flag. Turn on a green light. Ahead is all right.
ahead
Turn on a yellow light.
Hold a green flag and Or, when a yellow light
Something is is not there, hold a
move the arm up and Be careful. Slow
ahead. Decrease green light in your hand
down once as far as down.
the speed. and move the arm up
your arm goes.
and down once as far as
it goes.
Stop the
Show a red flag. Turn on the red light. Stop.
vehicle.
4.4. The following table lists signals used in the brake test after vehicles or service cars
are coupled into a train.
Signal type Daytime Night-time or in a tunnel
Hold a white light in your hand,

Raise your arm and move it in a
Tighten the brake. raise the arm and move it in a
circular motion.
circular motion.
Raise your arm and move it Hold a white light in your hand
Loosen the brake.
from side to side. and move the arm from side to

Signal type Daytime Night-time or in a tunnel

side.
Hold a white light in your hand

The test is finished. Raise your arm.
and raise the arm.
4.5. The following table shows the signals used by ground-based workers as needed to
express the presence or absence of a problem with the vehicles or service cars passing
them.
Signal type Daytime Night time or in a tunnel

When there is no Show a white flag. Hold a white light in your hand
problem with the Or, raise your arm about 45 move it in a circular motion.
passage of the degrees from directly overhead.
vehicles or service
cars
When there is a Show a red flag. Hold a red light in your hand and
problem with the Or, when a red flag is not there, shake it strongly from side to side.
passage of the raise your arms or hold Or, when a red light is not there,
vehicles or service something else other than a green use a smoke grenade or hold a
cars. flag and shake it fast instead. light other than a green light and
shake it fast instead.
5. Prevention of Accidents
5.1. When a vehicle is used, workers must observe the following items in order to prevent
an accident:
1) The Operations Leader must display his/her name and the name of the Driver on
each vehicle to be used;
2) The Operations Leader must give directions to the Driver to inspect the braking
device, functions of signal lamps and the couplings before he/she drives the
vehicle;
3) Workers who are on board with the Driver for moving the vehicle must be on the
designated place in safe postures so that the Driver can concentrate on the
operation;
4) When necessary, the Operations Leader must give clear instructions or

information to the Driver while he/she is driving the vehicle. The Driver repeats
the words, replies and confirms the safety; and
5) Jumping onto or off a vehicle that is not completely stopped is prohibited.

5.2. For the transportation of workers, use a passenger car designed for carrying people
or a vehicle with equipment that is made for the purpose. Do not use a carriage wagon
or a vehicle without such equipment.
(Note) Such equipment shall include flat space, railing, and steps for the safety and
ease of getting aboard.
5.3. As a rule, two or more tasks shall not be carried out on a same passage line or work
line. However, this excludes small tasks that are permitted exceptionally by the
Administrator.
When a task is performed pursuant to the preceding paragraph, or work is performed

in the vicinity of a track in use, the following items must be observed to ensure the
safety of the workers:
1) The Operations Team Leader must allocate the Security Guards who watch the
operation of the vehicles in the work site as needed and ensure that the work does
not impede the track in use;
2) When a vehicle or a service car is approaching, the Security Guards must take
action to evacuate the workers, check the railway for a problem, and give the
predetermined signal to the Operations Leader, etc;
3) When work needs to be performed on a railway in service due to unavoidable

reasons, workers must work in groups of two or more;
4) In order to call attention to the Operations Leader and crew of vehicles in

operation, the “construction work sign" must be set up in the work area;
5) After confirming the “construction work sign” described above, the Operations
Leader or the Driver of a vehicle must give a warning whistle, confirm the safety,
and slow down the vehicle to pass the place;
6) Do not cross the tracks right in front of or right behind any of the vehicles or
service cars being used for work (or being maintained).
7) The workers must communicate well with each other when switching equipment.
When it is unavoidable to lubricate, inspect or adjust a machine of a vehicle while

driving, and then, confirm the condition of each portion of the machine. Be very
careful when approaching any of the driving parts and hazardous parts (painted in
red). The Operations Team Leader must be assigned in each work group and the
reporting line must be clearly defined.

5.4. If a derailment, accident or emergency occurs in the use of vehicles, the following
items must be observed to take proper actions without delay:
1) If a derailment or an accident made it impossible for workers to drive a vehicle

or continue working, take immediate actions needed for recovery, and report the
situation to the Administrator;
2) If an accident caused a personal injury, immediately give the injured first-aid and
report the accident to the relevant parties;
3) If an accident caused damage to any of the vehicles, fully investigate the

circumstances of the accident even when it was a minor accident, take actions to
prevent it from causing another accident and report it to the Administrator; and
4) The reporting system in case of an emergency must be formulated based on the

construction plan and approved by the Engineer in advance.
5.5. When a vehicle has something wrong with it, attach a sign to the vehicle in order to
indicate the state of all workers, which includes information, such as the damaged
parts and precautions.
5.6. The following items must be observed to control brake shoes.
5.7. In order to indicate the limit of abrasion, paint the side of the brake shoes with white
paint, excluding the thickness of 20 mm (25 mm for those of the track motor car
290PS).
5.8. Regarding the storage, inspection and maintenance during the lending period, the
1) The workers must communicate well with each other to confirm the safety during
the inspection and maintenance work; and
2) Regarding the storage, inspection and maintenance of the vehicles, the workers
must follow the rules set forth in the “Construction Machine Handling Procedure
Manual, issued by the Contractors’ Project Office”.

Attachment -5 Instruction Manual for the Control of Electrical Work during the
Period when the Overhead Contact System is Energized
1. General rules
1.1. This manual is intended for the control of work, etc. and, in order to prevent an
electrical accident during the period when power is supplied to the equipment of
substations, etc. and equipment of power distribution lines, etc. between Mumbai and
Ahmedabad stations of the High Speed Railway, and also the control of the system
of all electrical driving equipment, signal maintenance equipment and electrical
communication equipment during the period of comprehensive audit and inspection.
1.2. The scope of application of the Electrical Control work for the prevention of an
substations, etc. and equipment of power distribution lines, etc. (hereinafter referred
to as “Electrical Control work”), and the applicable sections and periods shall be as
follows.
1) Scope of application:
a. Entry into and work in substations, etc.;
b. Dead-line work for power distribution lines, etc. and work performed near
these lines; and
c. Work to break a return circuit (including rail).
2) The applicable sections between Mumbai and Ahmedabad stations and the
period.
1.3. The scope of application of the system control of the electrical driving equipment,
signal maintenance equipment, and electrical communication equipment during the
period of the comprehensive audit and inspection (hereinafter referred to “electrical
system control work”).
1) Scope of application:
a. Entry into and work in substations, etc. and in the communication

equipment room;
b. Dead-line work for power distribution lines, etc. and work performed near
these lines;
c. Work to break a return circuit (including rail);
d. Work that stops signals; and

e. Other work that affects the operation of each system
1.4. Terms and Definitions:
1) [Electrical Driving Equipment]: Collective term for the electrical equipment of

substations, power distribution stations, contact lines, distribution lines, etc.;
2) [Specified Section]: Railway’s Facilities Control sections and sections being used
by Indian Railway Authority;
3) [The section where power shutdown must be confirmed]: Since the section is
connected to a railway, dead-line work for power distribution lines and work
performed near these lines requires the confirmation of power shutdown with
Indian Railway Authority;
4) [Substations, etc.]: Collective term for substations, sectioning posts, auxiliary

sectioning posts, power distribution stations, and post-transformers;
5) [Power Distribution Lines]: Collective term for contact lines and distribution
lines;
6) [Contact Lines]: Collective term for feeders, overhead contact lines, line
transformers, etc. and the structures that support them;
7) [Return Circuit]: Normal relays, neutral cables, and protective wires;
8) [Feeding System]: The system from the feeding bus line of a substation up to the
overhead contact system;
9) [Distribution System]: The system from a distribution station through the contact
lines to the loads;
10) [Signal System]: A systematic method of integrating the functions of signal

equipment for ensuring the safety of driving;
11) [Communication System]: A systematic method of integrating the functions of

electrical communication equipment for transmitting codes, sounds or images;
12) [Dead-Line Work]: Collective term for work that must be performed with the
electrical driving equipment de-energized. This includes [Work with the feeder
de-energized] and [Work with distribution lines de-energized];
13) [Work performed near these lines]: Work performed in the area within a 2-meter
radius of the energized portion of a contact line, the area within a 0.3-meter radius
of the energized portion of a high-voltage distribution line, work performed on
lines in a high-voltage cable duct (excluding the case that they are covered with
cable ducts, etc.);

14) [Work that stops signals]: Collective term for work that needs to replace, stop
functions or temporarily remove signal system equipment, which directly affects
train operation;
15) [Test Energization, Test Feeding]: Application of voltage in order to test

distribution lines after an automatic shutdown and to investigate the cause or
determine the circuit;
16) [Substation, etc. monitoring station]: A place in a substation, etc., where staff
members stay and monitor the equipment of the substation or other facilities;
17) [Electrical Control]: The organization that manages and controls all items
covered in this manual. The head of the organization is called “Electrical Control
Manager” and the members in this office are called “Electrical Control
Members”;
18) [Facilities Control]: The organization that manages and controls all items
regarding the rules and procedures of maintenance work and entry into the inside
of the railway’s safety fence. The chief of the organization is called the Facilities
Control manager;
19) [Work Control Supervisor]: The person in charge of electrical and Facilities
Control in the comprehensive audit and inspection;
20) [The Chief of the Relevant Party]: Chief Project Manager of the contractor that
has jurisdiction over the subcontractors performing the said work or the chief in
charge of the relevant site of the applicable railway authority;
21) [Operations Team Leader]: The leader who instructs and supervises his/her team
in performing work covered in this manual;
22) [Person in charge of Applications]: The person, who receives the applications for
work covered in this manual, examines and investigates the contents before
passing them to the “Electrical Control Manager”. The Chief Project Manager of
railway electrical contractor of each applicable section acts as such a person; and
23) [Equipment Operators]: Persons who are familiar with the operation of machinery
used in the place and approved by the Electrical Control Manager. They operate
the equipment of substations and other facilities in supplying or stopping power
to electrical driving equipment.

2. Electrical Control
2.1. In order to implement the rules outlined in this manual, the following organizations
shall be established:
1) For the Electrical Control work and electrical system control work specified, the
Electrical Control shall be established in the Contractor’s railway electrical
project office, and Electrical Control Members shall be placed there; and
2) Regarding the Electrical Control work and electrical system control work
specified, the chief of the Contractor’s railway electrical project office shall act
as the Electrical Control Manager.
2.2. The Electrical Control Manager shall manage and control the Electrical Control
Members and Equipment Operators and perform the following duties to prevent an
substations, etc. and equipment of power distribution lines, etc. and ensure the safety
of the workers during the period of comprehensive audit and inspection:
1) Approval (change, rejection, etc.) of work plans, and reporting to relevant

dispatchers and substation, etc. monitoring stations;
2) Examination of the state of the electrical driving equipment as a whole system;
3) Information gathering regarding the times of starting/stopping operation of

substations, etc. for train operation and starting/stopping power to contact lines,
reporting of such information to relevant people and provision of instructions to
Equipment Operators;
4) Provision of instructions to Equipment Operators regarding the operation and

stoppage of substations and power distribution lines relating to the work;
5) Provision of instructions on the methods of recovery from a disaster (occurrence

or prediction) or accident, giving of advice to Work Control Supervisors, and
reporting to relevant people;
6) Mutual adjustment with relevant dispatchers, substation, etc. monitoring station

and Facilities Control managers; and
7) Provision of instructions and various information of other system control or work

control to relevant people.
2.3. The Electrical Control Members perform the following duties under the direction of
the Electrical Control Manager:
1) Receipt of work applications and adjustment;

2) Receipt of reports at the start/end of work and confirmation;
3) Mutual communication with Equipment Operators, Substation, etc. monitoring

station, relevant dispatchers and the Facilities Control;
4) Information gathering and reporting of the circumstances in case of the

occurrence of a disaster or accident;
5) Duties of the Electrical Control Manager on behalf of the manager when

necessary; and
6) Adjustment with relevant people regarding other work control.
2.4. In preparation for any kind of natural disaster or accident, the Electrical Control
Manager must have established a communication flow, recovery system, etc., in
advance and made them known to all relevant people.
2.5. The Electrical Control Manager must maintain all documentation required for the
implementation of the rules outlined in this manual.
3. Procedures for work
3.1. The Operations Team Leader for work specified in this manual must have worked as
a team leader in the high speed railway construction project, have received the
specified training program regarding the contents of this manual, etc., and been
approved by the Chief Project Manager of contractor.
3.2. Any party who needs to perform work specified in this manual must file an
application and receive prior approval, observing the rules as follows.
1) The rules regarding Electrical Control work are as follows:
a. The Operations Team Leader must fill in the “Electrical Control Work
Application” and file the application to the Electrical Control Manager by
noon of Thursday of the previous week;
b. The Electrical Control Work Application must be agreed by The Chief of

the Relevant Party and the Person in charge of Applications before
submitted to the Electrical Control Manager for approval; and
c. When any information of an Electrical Control Work Application is

changed, the Operations Team Leader must report it to the Electrical
Control Manager by 4:00 p.m. of the day before the work day to obtain
approval.
2) The rules regarding electrical system control work are as follows:

a. The Operations Team Leader must fill in the “Detailed Work Plan” and
file it to the Electrical Control Manager by Thursday of the previous
week;
b. The detailed work plan must be agreed by the Chief of the Relevant Party
and the Person in charge of Applications before submitted to the Electrical
Control Manager for approval;
c. When any information of the detailed work plan is changed, the

Operations Team Leader must immediately report it to the Electrical
Control Manager to obtain approval;
d. When an application for the work in the section including both a specified
section and a section where power is shutdown, which affects the system
control is received, the Electrical Control Manager must obtain the
confirmation of the relevant dispatchers;
e. When an application for the work in the section where power is shutdown
or the section including the section where power is shutdown, which
affects the system control is received, the Electrical Control Manager
must obtain the confirmation of the relevant dispatchers;
f. For dead-line work or work that causes signals to stop in the period of
comprehensive audit and inspection, the Operations Team Leader shall
confirm the work plan with the Electrical Control by the day before the
implementation; and
g. For the work that causes signal equipment to stop in the period of
comprehensive audit and inspection, the turnout must be locked with the
key bolt and the use of the applicable ATC sectional route must be
stopped.
3.3. The rules of communication regarding work specified in this manual are as follows.
1) Reporting at the start of work:
a. Before the start of work (or entry), the Operations Team Leader shall
report on the necessary information in the Electrical Control Work
Application or the work plan to the Electrical Control, receive approval,
and then tell the team members to start working;
b. Before team members start performing approved dead-line work, the

Operations Team Leader must confirm that no voltage is applied, using a
voltage detector, and that the grounding conductor is properly installed.
Workers who use a voltage detector or install a grounding conductor must
have an experience of dead-line work of a distribution line or contact line

of 20,000 volts or higher, or a high-voltage distribution line of 6,000 volts

or higher, and have been approved by the Electrical Control Manager;
c. When it is necessary to use a maintenance car, the Operations Team

Leader must report it in accordance with the rules set by the chiefs;
d. When work is done in a specified section, the Electrical Control Manager

must report to the relevant dispatchers; and
e. When work is done in the section where power is shutdown, the Electrical
Control Manager must report to the relevant dispatchers.
2) Reporting at the end of work:
a. After the work for the day is completed, the Operations Team Leader shall
report on the necessary information in the Electrical Control Work
Application or the work plan to the Electrical Control before leaving the
office;
b. Dead-line work must be completed at least 20 minutes before the

scheduled time. The Operations Team Leader must ensure that all work
needed for the recovery of power, such as the removal of grounding
conductors, is finished and then, make a report;
c. If there is a possibility that work may not be finished by the scheduled

time specified in the Electrical Control Work Application and the work
plan, the operation team leader must report to the Electrical Control at
least 30 minutes before the scheduled time to seek for their directions;
d. When work is done in a specified section, the Electrical Control Manager

must report to the relevant dispatchers; and
e. When work is done in the section where power is shutdown, the Electrical
Control Manager must report to the relevant dispatchers.

4. Work Control
4.1. For the use of maintenance cars or work inside the railway’s safety fences (hereafter
referred to “work inside the fences”), all workers must observe the applicable rules.
4.2. Each person who enters the inside of the fences must wear an armband in accordance
with the applicable rules.
4.3. Without prior approval of the Electrical Control Manager, the Operations Team
Leader must not tell the members to start working. Or, the Operations Team Leader
must not change any part of the work plan without permission. The Electrical Control
Members must not change the section or time period for energization without
permission from the Electrical Control Manager.
4.4. Actions in case of a problem or emergency:
1) If electrical equipment has a problem, or an electrical shock accident occurs, the

Operations Team Leader must immediately take appropriate actions and report
on it to the Electrical Control Manager;
2) Upon receiving such a report, the Electrical Control Manager must give the leader
instructions in taking the safest possible actions, and inform the relevant parties
of the situation of the accident;
3) Unless the cause of the accident or emergency is not determined, the Electrical
Control Manager must not allow the workers to operate equipment in the recovery
process after the accident;
4) Upon receiving a report of an accident from a relevant dispatcher or substation,

etc. monitoring station, the Electrical Control Manager must give the relevant
people instructions about the recovery, investigation of the causes, etc. and take
necessary actions; and
5) Any worker who noticed a potential of problem with electrical equipment, which
can cause an accident, must report it immediately to the Electrical Control or the
relevant dispatcher to seek for their directions.

5. Electrical equipment system control
5.1. For driving operations during the period of electrical equipment system control, the
use of maintenance cars, work inside the railway’s safety fences, the use of armbands
and other procedures, all workers must observe the rules set by the Contractor’s
Project Office.
5.2. The feeding and distribution systems of the railway shall be directly monitored during
the period from the start of the operation of substations, etc. and distribution stations
to the day before the remote monitoring starts after the function of operation
command is switched.
5.3. Distribution systems shall be operated and controlled directly by the Equipment
Operators.
5.4. Only Equipment Operators are allowed to operate the switches of substations, etc.
However, this shall not apply to cases where the operation of switches does not affect
any of the distribution lines. The Equipment Operators must enter the substation, etc.
by the time specified in the test train driving manual or the work plan, operate
switches according to the directions of the Electrical Control.
5.5. Upon noticing a problem with signal equipment, workers must immediately report it
to the Work Control Supervisor.
5.6. The Electrical Control and the relevant dispatchers shall communicate with each
other regarding the operation of equipment, monitoring, etc.
5.7. Upon receiving the report of an accident from a relevant dispatcher or substation, etc.
monitoring station, the Electrical Control must give the relevant people instructions
about the recovery, investigation of the causes, etc. and take the actions specified in
the following items:
1) If an accident (or electrical power failure) occurs in a substation, etc., the

Electrical Control must report it the power company and take necessary actions;
2) If an accident of a feeding system occurs and there is a train in the section, the
Electrical Control must request relevant people to check the train for
abnormalities, lower the pantographs, and take necessary actions after they
receive permission from the Work Control Supervisor;
3) Perform test energization or test feeding required to determine the section or

circuit that caused the accident, to confirm the recovery, etc.;
4) Re-energization or re-feeding the circuit, etc., whose recovery is confirmed, must

be performed with the permission of the Work Control Supervisor;

5) If an accident of signal equipment occurs, the Electrical Control must direct the
relevant people to investigate the cause, determine the coverage of suspension or
prohibition of use, and report it to the Work Control Supervisor; and
6) When the emergency device is activated, the Electrical Control must take
appropriate actions. When there is no problem with the conditions (operation), it
shall be treated as a recovery. When there is a failure, the Electrical Control must
determine the coverage of prohibition of use and report it to the Work Control
Supervisor.
Any worker who noticed a potential of a problem with electrical equipment, which can
cause an accident, must report it immediately to the Electrical Control to seek for their
directions.
5.8. When the Electrical Control receives information from relevant dispatchers, etc.
about the occurrence or prediction of natural disaster, it shall direct the relevant
people to investigate the status, report it to the Work Control Supervisor, and take
necessary measures according to his/her instructions.
5.9. Work and operations outlined in this manual must be performed with the approval of
the Electrical Control Manager. Workers must not do the followings when handling
signal equipment. However, this shall not apply to items 1 through 4 only when
approved by the Electrical Control Manager:
1) Do not connect a jumper wire between contacts of a relay, circuit controller or

other devices without permission;
2) Do not make a change to signal equipment (including wire connection change

and revision of software) without approval;
3) Do not use a lever or other tools, whose use is limited to qualified workers;
4) Do not use an improper power supply to operate a relay or other devices;
5) Do not use other conductors in place of circuit breakers (for signals) or fuses:
6) Do not remove the seal from the relay; and
7) Do not constitute a contact by pushing the armature.

Attachment -6 Instruction Manual for the Control of Other Work during the Period
when the Overhead Contact System is Energized
1. General Rules
1.1. The purpose of this manual is to prevent an electrical accident and ensure the safety
of all workers who use a maintenance car or work inside the railway’s safety fences
(hereafter referred to “work inside the fences”) during the period from the day on
which energization starts to the day before the start of the comprehensive audit of the
equipment of substations, etc. and equipment of Power Distribution Lines.
1.2. This manual applies to the following:
1) Work that requires track possession;
2) Driving of maintenance cars used for work and the handling of service cars used
on the track;
3) Return circuit breaking work; and
4) Other work inside and near the fences and entry into the area inside them.
1.3. 1.3. Terms and Definitions:
1) [Substations, etc.]: Collective term for facilities such as substations, sectioning

posts, auxiliary sectioning posts, disconnecting switches that are used in case of
an accident, and power distribution stations;
2) [Power Distribution Lines, etc.]: Collective term for feeders, auxiliary lines,
contact lines, return circuits, line transformers, high-voltage distribution lines,
and facilities that belong to them;
3) [Work that requires track possession]: The following construction work or tasks
that are carried out with the railway track closed:
a. Renewal of rails;
b. Partial renewal of turnouts or expansion joints, or detailed inspection that

requires disassembly work;
c. Continuous welded rail temperature restressing;
d. Welding of rails mounted on tracks;
e. Renewal of sleepers or tie plates;
f. Track maintenance;

g. Construction work or tasks, which disturb the structure gauge; and
h. Other exceptional tasks or those similar to the above-mentioned

construction work or tasks.
4) [The Chief of the Relevant Party]: The Chief Project Manager of Contractor’s
construction project office of the applicable section;
5) [Facilities Work Control]: The organization that manages and controls the items
specified in this manual;
6) [Facilities Control Manager]: A person appointed by the Employer/the Engineer,

who is in charge of managing the Facilities Work Control;
7) [Facilities Control Members]: Persons appointed by the Employer/the Engineer,

who assist the Facilities Control Manager;
8) [Person in charge of Work Applications]: The Chief Project Manager of the

contractor’s track construction project office; and
9) [Operations Team Leader]: Persons who are responsible for work specified in
Section 1.1.2. Scope of Application. When they are employees of the
Subcontractors, they must have been certified as construction managers and have
received the training program regarding the contents of this manual. Or, qualified
leaders of construction or work, or persons in charge of various inspections and
tests, who have received the training program regarding the contents of this
manual and exceptionally approved by the Chief of the Relevant Party.
1.4. An organization that carries out work control Operations at MASHR Project Office
shall be established, where the Facilities Control Manager and members are
stationed.
1.5. The Facilities Control Manager supervises the Operations of the Facilities Control
Members and performs the following duties:
a) Approval of applications for work that requires track possession;
b) Approval of applications for using a maintenance car;
c) Approval of work specified in Section 1.1.2 (4);
d) Actions and reporting after an accident; and
e) Adjustment with the electrical work control manager and other tasks necessary
for the control

1.6. The Facilities Control Members perform the following duties under the direction of
the Facilities Control Manager. In the event of absence of the Facilities Control
Manager, a facilities control member who is appointed by the Facilities Control
Manager shall carry out the manager’s duties;
a) Receipt of applications for using service and maintenance cars and adjustment;
b) Approval of starting and confirmation of finishing of the use of maintenance cars;
c) Creation and distribution of a diagram for the maintenance cars;
d) Actions and reporting after an accident; and
e) Other tasks necessary for the control.
1.7. The Person in charge of Work Applications performs the following duties:
a) Management of the applications for work and the use of maintenance cars, which
are received from the Chief of the Relevant Party;
b) Submission of the work applications to the Facilities Control Manager and the
electrical control manager, and reporting of the approval to the Chief of the
Relevant Party;
c) Reporting of the applications for the use of maintenance cars to the Facilities
Control Manager and reporting of the approval to the Chief of the Relevant Party;
and
d) Actions and reporting after an accident.
2. Procedures for Work
2.1. Application prior to work:
1) The Operations Team Leader must fill out the work application form and file it,
through the Chief of the Relevant Party, to the Person in charge of Work
Applications on a weekly basis by noon of Thursday of the previous week;
2) The applicant must include the week plan in the application form for the use of
maintenance cars, and file it, through the Chief of the Relevant Party, to the
Person in charge of Work Applications on a weekly basis by noon of Thursday
of the previous week;
3) The Chief of the Relevant Party must summarize the contents of the work
applications, create a facilities control work application (Summary), and submit
it, together with the work applications, to the Person in charge of Work
Applications;

4) The Person in charge of Work Applications must submit the work applications,
the applications for the use of maintenance cars, and the facilities control work
application (Summary) to the Facilities Control Manager and obtain the person’s
approval for the plans of work and use of maintenance cars, etc;
5) After receiving approval for the work and maintenance car operation diagrams,
the Person in charge of Work Applications must return them to the Chief of the
Relevant Party by noon of the next day (Friday). However, when the day for work
and use of maintenance cars falls on one of the separately-specified days on which
electrical power is not supplied, only the work diagrams shall be returned;
6) The Operations Team Leader must confirm the details of approved work together
with Facilities Control Members by 4:00 p.m. of the day before the work.
However, this confirmation is not necessary when the day for work falls on one
of the separately-specified days on which electrical power is not supplied; and
7) The Operations Team Leader must confirm the details of the approved use of
maintenance cars together with Facilities Control Members by 4:00 p.m. of the
day before the use. However, this confirmation is not necessary when the day for
work falls on one of the separately-specified days on which electrical power is
not supplied.
2.2. Change or addition:
1) When the work plan needs to be revised, the Operations Team Leader must fill
out the work application form and/or the application for the use of maintenance
cars and file them, through the Chief of the Relevant Party, to the Person in charge
of Work Applications by noon of the second day before the work day;
2) The revised and approved work plan and maintenance car operation diagrams
must be returned to the Person in charge of Work Applications, through the Chief
of the Relevant Party, by noon of the next day. However, when the day for the
revised work plan and use of maintenance cars falls on one of the separately-
specified days on which electrical power is not supplied, only the revised work
diagrams shall be returned;
3) When a crane or other tall equipment is used in the vicinity of a viaduct or a

section under construction, the operation team leader must fill out the work
application form and report the work plan, through the Chief of the Relevant
Party, to the Person in charge of Work Applications on a weekly basis by noon
of Thursday of the previous week; and
4) The Chief of the Relevant Party must summarize the contents of the applications
for work near a viaduct, etc., create a facilities control work application

(Summary), and submit it, together with the work applications, to the Person in
charge of Work Applications.
2.3. Before entering the inside of the fences to start working or using a maintenance car,
the Operations Team Leader must report the location of work and the time to the
Facilities Control Members and obtain approval. However, reporting at the time of
entry is not necessary when the day for work falls on one of the separately-specified
days on which electrical power is not supplied.
2.4. Immediately after all workers left the fenced area after the end of work and use of
maintenance cars, the Operations Team Leader must report the location and the time
to the Facilities Control Members. If there is a possibility that work and use of
maintenance cars may not be finished by the scheduled time, the operation team
leader must report it to the Facilities Control Members at least 30 minutes before the
scheduled time to seek for their directions. However, reporting at the time of exit is
not necessary when the day for work falls on one of the separately-specified days on
which electrical power is not supplied.
2.5. When there is a possibility that the construction work may disturb any part of the
MAHSR structure, the Chief of the Relevant Party must exchange confirmation
documents, etc. regarding the prevention of an electrical accident during the period
when power is supplied.
3. Things that are Prohibited
3.1. Without prior approval of the Facilities Control Manager, the Operations Team
Leader must not tell his/her members to start working or using maintenance cars. The
operation team leader and all workers must not change the work plan or any details
regarding the use of maintenance cars without permission.
4. Actions in Case of an Emergency
4.1. Reporting, etc. in case of an emergency:
1) If an emergency or electrical accident occurs, the Operations Team Leader must

immediately take appropriate actions and report the situation to the Facilities
Control Manager. Upon receiving such a report, the Facilities Control Manager
must inform the relevant parties of the situation;
2) When workers need to work or use maintenance cars to deal with an emergency,
the Operations Team Leader must communicate with the Chief of the Relevant
Party, and report it to the control manager to obtain approval; and
3) Upon receiving such an urgent request regarding work or the use of maintenance
cars, the Facilities Control Manager communicates with relevant parties, and
when there is no problem, approves it. All necessary documents, such as work

applications, applications for the use of maintenance cars and a facilities control
work application (Summary), must be submitted to the Person in charge of Work
Applications immediately after the completion of work.
5. Others
5.1. Each person who enters the inside of the fences during the work control period must
wear an armband that is specified separately.
5.2. The Facilities Control Manager and members must create charts, diagrams, tables,
etc. necessary in performing their duties.

Package No. MAHSR-P-4(X) and P-4(Y) Section VI-2. Works Requirements (Technical Specifications)

VI-2. Specifications (Technical Specifications)
Table of Contents
1. FABRICATION OF STRUCTURAL STEELWORK FOR BRIDGES ........................ 4

1.1 Scope of Specifications ......................................................................................................... 4
1.2 Applicable Standards............................................................................................................. 4
1.3 Fabrication-Workshop and Yard ........................................................................................... 9
1.4 Submittals ............................................................................................................................ 10
Method Statement ............................................................................................................... 10
Resources Report................................................................................................................. 11
Fabrication and Inspection Record ...................................................................................... 11
1.5 Additional Tests .................................................................................................................. 12
1.6 Measurements...................................................................................................................... 12
1.7 Contractor’s Painting and Welding Engineers / Supervisors .............................................. 12
Painting Engineers / Supervisors......................................................................................... 12
Welding Engineers / Supervisors ........................................................................................ 12
International Experts for Welding and Quality Management. ............................................ 13
2. STRUCTURAL STEEL WORK ..................................................................................... 14
2.1 Materials .............................................................................................................................. 14
General ................................................................................................................................ 14
Steel ..................................................................................................................................... 15
Welding material/consumables ........................................................................................... 16
Bolts, nuts, washers (high strength and ordinary) and studs ............................................... 17
Paints ................................................................................................................................... 17
Inspection and testing of material ....................................................................................... 17
2.2 Handling and Storage .......................................................................................................... 17
2.3 Fabrication ........................................................................................................................... 18
General ................................................................................................................................ 18
Independent Examining Body (IEB) ................................................................................... 19
Shop drawings ..................................................................................................................... 20
Test-fabrication (Using Partial Mock-Ups)......................................................................... 20
Page 1 of 83
2.4 Method of Fabrication ......................................................................................................... 20

General ................................................................................................................................ 20
Straightening and bending of materials ............................................................................... 21
Cutting of materials ............................................................................................................. 21
Drilling of holes .................................................................................................................. 22
Welding ............................................................................................................................... 23
Welding procedure .............................................................................................................. 23
Inspection and Testing of fabrication works ....................................................................... 31
Repair of fabrication defects ............................................................................................... 32
2.5 Check-assembly .................................................................................................................. 33
2.6 Painting at fabrication shop ................................................................................................. 34
General ................................................................................................................................ 34
Painting Specification ......................................................................................................... 34
Surface preparation for painting work ................................................................................ 34
Painting Procedure .............................................................................................................. 35
Hot-dip galvanizing ............................................................................................................. 36
Inspection and Testing for painting ..................................................................................... 36
Repair of painting defects ................................................................................................... 36
2.7 Quality management ........................................................................................................... 36
General ................................................................................................................................ 36
Subsidiary plans of WQMP................................................................................................. 37
Non-conformity and its rectification ................................................................................... 38
2.8 Packing, loading, Transportation or shipping, Unloading and Stacking ............................. 38
2.9 Measurement for Payment .................................................................................................. 38
3. Bearings .............................................................................................................................. 39
3.1 Elastomeric bearings for steel superstructure...................................................................... 39
General ................................................................................................................................ 39
Procurement ........................................................................................................................ 39
Manufacturing and Workmanship ....................................................................................... 41
Acceptance of Bearings ....................................................................................................... 45
Certification and marking.................................................................................................... 45
Transportation and Storage ................................................................................................. 45
Check-assembly and delivery of bearings ........................................................................... 45
Measurement for Payment of Bearings ............................................................................... 46
3.2 Metallic bearing for Steel Superstructure............................................................................ 46
Page 2 of 83
General ................................................................................................................................ 46
Procurement and Fabrication/manufacturer ........................................................................ 46
Manufacturing and Workmanship ....................................................................................... 47
Acceptance of Bearings ....................................................................................................... 49
Certification and marking.................................................................................................... 49
Transportation and Storage ................................................................................................. 49
Check-assembly and delivery of bearings ........................................................................... 49
Measurement for Payment of Bearings ............................................................................... 49
Appendix-1 Dimensional Tolerance of Fabricated Steel Structure Elements. ........... 50
Appendix-2 Test of Welder for Fillet Welding .............................................................. 53
Appendix-3 Test of welder for Stud Welding................................................................. 56
Appendix-4 Hot-Dip Galvanizing.................................................................................... 58
Appendix-5 Sample Format of Method Statement ........................................................ 60
Appendix-6 Sample Work Control Sheets ..................................................................... 63
Appendix-7 Test-fabrication of steel bridge components (partial mock-ups) ............ 68
Appendix-8 Painting Specification for Steel Truss Bridge ........................................... 76
Appendix-9 Bearing Test Samples .................................................................................. 79
Appendix-10 Preheating Temperature (TP)for Welding (Sample calculation) ............ 81
Appendix-11 Contents of subsidiary of WQMP (but not limited to the below)............ 82
Page 3 of 83
These technical specifications shall apply to the works which shall include fabrication
of structural steelwork for superstructure, along with all materials, labour, supervision,
management, tools, equipment, services and incidentals necessary for the fabrication,
and procurement and supply of bearings, Check-assembly, corrosion protection,
packing, loading, transportation or shipping of fabricated materials and bearings to the
bridge-sites/site-delivery-yards of Interfacing Contractors, unloading, stacking , and
handing over of the same to the respective Interfacing Contractors, for MAHSR steel
bridge works, all complete in accordance with the provisions of the Contract.
In case specifications have not been provided for any works, the Contractor shall follow
the best practices suited for the purpose after obtaining approval of the Engineer.
Fabrication work shall include fabrication of steel truss members and accessories along
with all the related activities, but not limited to procurement of steel material, connection
material, corrosion protection materials, bearings, accessory materials etc., and all
required operations like cutting, milling, machining and welding of the structural steel
to fabricate steel members of required shape and size as per the Drawings, along with
conducting Test-fabrication and Check-assembly of the steel structure with bearings,
and then the required painting of the steel work.
Precedence of codes (the latest revisions) shall be in the following order, unless otherwise
explicitly mentioned in the Bidding Documents:
IRS
JIS
IRC
IS
Other International Codes.
The codes listed hereunder are indicative, and not exhaustive:
IRS - Indian Railway Standards:
Specification for Fabrication and Erection of Steel Girder Bridge and Locomotive
Turn-Tables (Fabrication Specification): SERIAL NO. B1-2001.
M: 28 Indian Railways Standard Specification for Classification, Testing and
Acceptable Criteria of Manual Metal Arc Welding Electrodes and Gas Welding
Rode.
M: 39 Classification, Testing and Approval of Submerged Arc Welding Wire-Flux
Combinations for Use on Indian Railways.
M: 46 Indian Railway Standard Specification for Classification, Testing and
Acceptable Criteria of Filler Wires for MIG/MAG Welding – with and without gas
shielding.
M&C/PCN/129/2010: Specification for full gloss Polysiloxane based painting
Page 4 of 83
system for the bridges, exterior of railway coaches, diesel, electric locomotives and
other industrial applications.
BS-S-7.5.3.1-6 : Specification for Phased Array Ultrasonic Testing Procedure for
Butt Welded Joints in Bridge Girders.
JIS - Japanese Industrial Standards
JIS B 0403(1995): Castings−System of dimensional tolerances and machining
allowances (CT13,14,15 means grade).
JIS B 0405: General Tolerances−Part 1: Tolerances For Linear And Angular
Dimensions Without Individual Tolerance Indications.
JIS B 1178: Foundation bolts.
JIS B 1180: Hexagon Head Bolt and Hexagon Head Screw.
JIS B 1181: Hexagon Nuts and Hexagon Thin Nuts.
JIS B 1186: Sets of High Strength Hexagon Bolt, Hexagon Nut and Plain Washers
for Friction Grip Joints.
JIS B 1198: Headed Stud.
JIS B 0601: Surface Roughness.
JIS G 3101: Rolled steels for general structure
JIS G 3106: Rolled Steels for Welded Structure.
JIS G 3131: Hot-rolled Mild Steel Plates, Sheet and Strip.
JIS G 3191: Dimensions, Mass and Permissible Variations of Hot Rolled Steel Bars
and Bar in Coil.
JIS G 3192: Dimensions, Mass and Permissible Variations of Hot Rolled Steel
Sections.
JIS G 3193: Dimensions, Mass And Permissible Variations Of Hot Rolled Steel
Plates, Sheets And Strips.
JIS G 3194: Dimensions, Mass and Permissible Variations of Hot Rolled Flat Steel.
JIS G 3452: Carbon Steel Pipes for Ordinary Piping.
JIS G 4304: Hot-rolled stainless steel plate, sheet and strip.
JIS G 5101: Carbon Steel Casting.
JIS G 5102: Steel Casting for welding structure.
JIS G 5111: High Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Casting and Low Alloy Steel
Casting for Structural Purpose.
JIS G 5501: Grey Iron Casting.
JIS H 8641: Zinc Hot Dip Galvanizing.
JIS H 8617: Electroplated coatings of nickel and chromium.
JIS K 6254: Rubber, Vulcanized Or Thermoplastic-Determination Of Stress-Strain
Properties.
JIS K 6386: Rubber Material for Vibration Isolators.
Page 5 of 83
JIS K 7137: Plastics – Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) Semi-finished Products

JIS Z 2305: Non-Destructive Testing—Qualification and Certification of NDT
Personnel.
JIS Z 3060: Method for Ultrasonic Testing for Welds of Ferritic Steel.
JIS Z 3104: Method Of Inspection And Acceptance Levels For Resistance Spot
Welds.
JIS Z 3118: Method for Measurement of Amount of Hydrogen Evolved from Steel
Welds.
JIS Z 3121: Methods of Tensile Test for Butt Welded Joints.
JIS Z 3122: Methods of Bend Test for Butt Welded Joints.
JIS Z 3211: Covered Electrode for Mild Steel, High tensile Strength Steel and Low
Temperature Service Steel.
JIS Z 3312: Solid Wires for MAG and MIG Welding of Mild Steel, High Strength
Steel and Low Temperature Service Steel.
JIS Z 3313: Flux Cored Wires for Gas Shielded and Self-Shielded Metal Arc
Welding, High Strength Steel and Low Temperature Service Steel.
JIS Z 3351: Solid Wires for Submerged Arc welding of Carbon Steel and Low Alloy
Steel.
JIS Z 3801: Standard Qualification Procedure for Manual Welding Technique.
JIS Z 3841: Standard Qualification Procedure for Semi-Automatic Welding
Technique.
JIS Z 9003: Single Sampling Inspection Plans having Desired Operation
Characteristics by Variables (Standard Deviation Known).
IRC (Indian Roads Congress) and MORTH
IRC:83(Part II): Standard Specifications and Code of Practice for Road Bridges
(First Revision) – Jan 2015
MORTH Specifications for Road and Bridge Works 5th Revision 2013
IS - Indian Standards
IS: 210: Grey Iron Casting.
IS: 808: Dimensions for Hot Rolled Steel Beam, Column, Channel and Angle
Sections.
IS: 813: Scheme of Symbols for Welding.
IS: 814: Covered Electrodes for Manual Metal Arc Welding of Carbon and Carbon
Manganese Steel-Specification.
IS: 817: Code of Practice for Training and Testing of Metal Arc Welders.
IS: 1030: Carbon Steel Casting for General Engineering Purpose.
IS: 1161: Steel Tubes for Structural Purpose.
IS: 1173: Hot Rolled and Slit Steel Tee Bars.
IS: 1182: Recommended Practice for Radiographic Examination of Fusion Welded
Page 6 of 83
Butt Joints in Steel Plates.

IS: 1269: Legal Metrology – Material measures of length, part 2.
IS: 1239: Steel Tubes, Tubulars and Other Wrought Steel Fittings- Specification.
IS: 1363-1: Hexagon Head Bolts, Screws and Nuts of Product Grade “C”, prat 1:
Hexagon Head Bolts (size range M5 to M64).
IS: 1363-3: Hexagon Head Bolts, Screws and Nuts of Product Grade “C”, prat 1:
Hexagon Nuts (size range M5 to M64).
IS: 1364: Hexagon Head Bolts, Screws and Nuts of Product Grades A and B.
IS: 1367-3: Technical Supply Condition for Treated Steel Fastener.
IS: 1395: Low and Medium Alloy Steel Covered Electrode for Manual Metal
Welding.
IS: 1477 Part-1: Code for Practice for Painting of Ferrous Metal in Buildings.
IS: 1730: Dimensions for Steel Plates, Sheets, Strips and Flats for General
Engineering Purpose.
IS: 1852: Rolling and cutting tolerance for hot rolled steel products.
IS: 1875: Carbon Steel Billets, Blooms, Slabs and Bars for Forgings – Specification.
IS: 2062: Hot Rolled Medium and High Tensile Structural Steel - Specification
(Seventh Revision).
IS: 2629: Recommended Practice for Hot-Dip Galvanizing of Iron and Steel.
IS: 3502: Steel Chequered Plates.
IS: 3601: Steel Tubes for Mechanical and General Engineering Purpose.
IS: 3658: Code of Practice for Liquid Penetrant Flaw Detection.
IS: 3703: Recommended Practice for Magnetic Particle Flaw Detection.
IS: 3757: High Strength Structural Bolts.
IS: 4000: Code of Practice for High Strength Bolts in Steel Structures.
IS 4260: Recommended Practice For Ultrasonic Testing Of Butt Welds In Ferritic
Steel.
IS: 4899: Ferric and Martensitic Steel Casting for Use at Low Temperature.
IS: 4923: Hollow Steel Sections for Structural Use.
IS: 6586: Recommended Practice for Metal Spraying for Protection of Iron Steel.
IS: 6623: High Strength Structural Nuts.
IS: 6639: Hexagon Bolts for Steel Structure.
IS: 6649: Hardened and Tempered Washers for High Strength Structural Bolts and
Nuts.
IS: 6745: Method for Determination of Mass of Zinc Coating on Zinc Coated Iron
and Steel Articles.
IS: 7280: Bare Wire Electrode for Submerged Arc Welding of Structural Steel.
IS: 7283: Hot-Rolled Bars for The Production of Bright Bars and Machined Parts
Page 7 of 83
for Engineering Applications- Specification.

IS: 7307-1: Approval Test for Welding Procedures, part 1: Fusion Welding of Steel.
IS/ISO: 7452: Hot-Rolled Structural Steel Plates Tolerances on Dimensions and
Shape.
IS: 9595: Metal-Arc Welding of Carbon and Carbon Manganese Steels –
Recommendations.
IS: 12778: Hot Rolled Parallel Flange Steel Section for Beams, Columns and
Bearing Piles.
IS: 12779: Rolling and Cutting Tolerances for Hot Rolled Parallel beam and column
section.
IS: 13805: General Standard for Qualification and Certification of NDT Personnel.
IS: 14589: Zinc Priming Paint, Epoxy Based, Two-Pack –Specification.
IS: 15911: Structural Steel (Ordinary Quality).
IS: 16003: Specified and Qualification of Welding Procedures for Metallic
Materials-General Rules.
Other International Codes.
• ISO - International Organization for Standardization:
ISO 812: Rubber, vulcanized or Thermoplastic-determination of low
temperature brittleness.
ISO 815-1: Rubber, vulcanized or Thermoplastic-Determination of
compression set at ambient, elevated temperatures.
ISO 1106-1: Recommended practice for radiographic examination of fusion
welded joints. Part 1: Fusion welded butt joints in steel plates up to 50 mm
thick.
ISO 1431-1: Rubber, vulcanized or Thermoplastic-Resistance to ozone
cracking- Part 1 static and dynamic strain testing.
ISO 1817: Rubber, vulcanized or thermoplastic-Determination of the effect of
liquids.
ISO 2400: Welds in Steel-Reference block for the calibration of equipment for
ultrasonic examination.
ISO 2409: Paints and varnishes – Cross cut test.
ISO 2768-1: General Tolerances part 1: Tolerance for Linear and Angular
Dimensions without Individual Tolerance Indications.
ISO 3400: Method of test for vulcanized Rubber-Determination of tensile
stress-strain properties.
ISO 3690: Welding and allied processes -- Determination of hydrogen content
in arc weld metal.
ISO 4287: Geometrical Product Specifications (GPS)-Surface Texture: Profile
Method-Terms, Definitions and Surface Texture Parameters.
Page 8 of 83
ISO 6272-1: Paints and varnishes -- Rapid-deformation (impact resistance)

tests -- Part 1: Falling-weight test, large-area indenter.
ISO 6272-2: Paints and varnishes -- Rapid-deformation (impact resistance)
tests -- Part 2: Falling-weight test, small-area indenter.
ISO 6506-1: Metallic materials-Brinell hardness test-test method.
ISO 6158: Metallic Coating-Electroplated Coatings of Chromium for
Engineering Purpose.
ISO 7270-1: Rubber-Analysis by pyrolytic gas-chromatographic methods Part
1: Identification of polymers (single polymers and polymer blends).
ISO 7452: Hot-Rolled Structural Steel Plates – Tolerance on Dimensions and
Shape.
ISO 7743: Rubber, vulcanized or Thermoplastic-Determination of
compression stress-strain properties.
ISO 7619-1: Rubber, vulcanized or Thermoplastic-Determination of
indentation hardness.
ISO 9001: Quality Management Systems – Requirements.
ISO 9712: Non-Destructive Testing – Qualification and Certification of NDT
Personnel.
ISO 9924-1: Rubber and rubber products- Determination of the composition of
vulcanizates and uncured compounds by thermogravimetry -- Part 1: Butadiene,
ethylene-propylene copolymer and terpolymer, isobutene-isoprene, isoprene
and styrene-butadiene rubbers.
ISO 13000-1:2005: Plastics – Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) semi-finished
products.
ISO 15184: Paints and varnishes -- Determination of film hardness by pencil
test.
• European Norms (EN), American and British Standards (BS):
BS EN ISO 13918: Welding-Studs and Ceramic Ferrules for Arc Stud Welding.
EN 14399-3: High-strength structural bolting assemblies for preloading Part 3:
System HR – Hexagon bolt and nut assemblies.
EN 14399-6: High-strength structural bolting assemblies for preloading Part 6:
Plain chamfered washers.
EN 14399-10: High-strength structural bolting assemblies for preloading Part-
10: System HRC – Bolt and nut assemblies with calibrated preload.
ASTM D471: Standard Test Method for Rubber Property-Effect of Liquids.
The Contractor shall carry out the fabrication in the existing factory premises or in a
dedicated fabrication-workshop set up for the purpose on any other location in
accordance with the Contract (with all the necessary plant and equipment, workforce
and establishment to maintain required quality standards), as approved by the Engineer.
Page 9 of 83
The Contractor shall also ensure the availability of adequate yard area and proper
environment (free from rain, wind, direct sun light and dust) for conducting activities
including but not limiting to storage and handling, templating, fabrication, painting, etc.
However, activities such as storage for large size steel material (such as steel plates) and
fabricated material, Test-fabrication and Check-assembly may be conducted in open
space.
The Contractor shall also have a suitable storage yard for storage of the fabricated steel
structural members and other materials till delivery of the same to the MAHSR
construction contractors. This yard shall have proper facilities such as drainage and
lighting including access for cranes, trailers and other heavy equipment.
The Contractor shall submit following statements and records for approval of the Engineer.
Any other statement/record not herein mentioned but demanded by the Engineer, shall also
be submitted in the required format as desired.
Method Statement
Prior to commencement of any works, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the
Engineer for approval the Method Statements detailing the execution of the works involved,
including information regarding calculations and shop drawings, references and information
as may be relevant, and satisfying all the requirements under the Contract, as needed and
demanded by the Engineer, including but not limited to the following. A typical Method
Statement format is given at Appendix-5 for reference.
Working organization
Working period
Main materials including but not limited to their procurement, testing, handling, storage,
quality control, and disposal etc. (structural steel, connection material (bolts, nuts,
welding consumables), corrosion-protection, bearings etc.)
Structural steel fabrication (Test-fabrication with mock-up for the Engineers approval,
steel material procurement, NC marking/cutting/drilling, member assembly/welding,
straightening, drilling, painting etc.), and other issues influencing fabrication (girder’s
length, curve, inclination and camber).
Check-assembly (work-site preparation including providing suitable platform with
stable foundation and any lighting, assembly and dismantling schedule and sequence,
handling of components, temporary staging design and drawings, plant and machinery
employed including their stand-by arrangement and upkeep, ensuring the required
design camber after assembly and its recording stage wise, and necessary match marking
before dismantling, quality control, inspection and acceptance, reporting formats and
schedule) and any other relevant information.
Storage for delivery of the fabricated steel structural members and other materials
including but not limited to proper marking, grouping, labelling etc. of the fabricated
steel structural members.
Machinery (type, numbers, capacity, their location, mobilization and de-mobilization
Page 10 of 83
schedule of the equipment, measuring devices and their accuracy etc.)

Quality control planning (acceptance criteria, quality control items, methods and
position of quality control, document style of quality control records, records of
construction, etc. along with appropriate testing methods).
Packing, loading and transportation or shipping of fabricated materials and bearings to
the bridge site/site-delivery-yard of Interfacing Contractors including unloading and
stacking.
Any other detail that may be considered necessary and/or required by the Engineer or
the Contractor.
Resources Report
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval, detailed list of employed
manpower (along with their trade classification) and of all serviceable major items of plant
and equipment deployed during the report period, and such reports and returns as
mentioned in detail under the Contract and as required by the Engineer to ensure efficient
and timely execution of the Works.
Fabrication and Inspection Record
The Contractor shall submit or report the following data to the Engineer. Two copies of
such record shall be made and out of which one copy duly signed by the Contractor and its
site engineer, shall be submitted to the Engineer. Wherever required, the data being
submitted shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer prior to the commencement of
relevant works. In this regard, the Engineer’s decision shall be final:
Manufacturers test report (steel materials, bolts, nuts, washers and welding
consumables).
Schedule for documentation (relevant calculation, shop and/or working drawings, plan
and/or procedures).
Records of test results as and when tests conducted and as required by the Engineer.
Structural steel fabrication record:
Approval of fabrication-workshop
Test-fabrication
Material procurement and inspection
Radiographic or PAUT testing on welding
Ultrasonic testing on welding
DPT (Dye-penetration test)
Components inspection
Check-assembly
Paint material inspection (quality of paint, certifications, quantity of paint
materials purchased along with expiry date etc.)
Painting inspection (surface preparation, amount of use, management report of
painting, dry film thickness and others if necessary)
Hot-dip galvanizing inspection (if any)
Assembly matching code drawing
Page 11 of 83
Acceptance inspection for purchasing or outsourcing

All Quality Control (QC) records,
Others
Welding Procedure Qualification Record (WPQR)
Work control sheet for fabrication record of each work (drilling, welding, Check-
assembly, painting). Refer Appendix-6 for samples.
Inspection (at fabrication-workshops, at bridge site/site-delivery-yards of Interfacing
Contractors)
Employer reserves the right to conduct any additional tests as deemed necessary during the
course of execution of works, over and above those specified in the Contract. Some of these
tests may be carried out at relevant laboratories in Japan and any other country. The expenses
for these additional tests shall be borne by the Employer.
All measurements shall be made in the Metric System. Different items of work shall be
measured in accordance with the procedures set forth in the relevant sections read in
conjunction with the General and Particular Conditions of the Contract, General and
Technical Specifications and from limits shown on the Drawings. All measurements and
computations unless otherwise indicated, shall be carried nearest to the following limits.
Length, Breadth, Height, Depth or Thickness: – 1 mm.
Area - 0.001 Sq. meter.
Cubic contents - 0.0001 Cu. meter.
Weight – 0.001 MT or 1 Kg.
In recording dimensions of work, the sequence of length, breadth and height or depth or
thickness shall be followed.
Painting Engineers / Supervisors

Prior to carrying out painting works, the Contractor shall appoint appropriate number of
Painting engineers / supervisors for supervising the painting work, with at least ten years of
experiences of painting work.
Welding Engineers / Supervisors
Prior to carrying out welding works, the Contractor shall appoint appropriate number of
Welding engineers / supervisors for supervising the welding work with minimum ten years’
experience of welding work, management work and welding design work.
Qualification of Welding engineer / supervisors shall be in accordance with following:
Plan and design of welding work (including equipment and support system etc.).
Procurement management of welding consumables.
Management of execution of welding and its quality control.
Management of Safety, Health and Environment (SHE) for welding.
Page 12 of 83
The credentials of the Welding Engineers / supervisors shall be examined and accepted by
the International Expert for Welding and Quality Management (refer definition in Sub-
Clause 1.7.3).
International Experts for Welding and Quality Management.
The Contractor shall engage International Experts for Welding and Quality Management,
on fulltime basis, in order to ensure technical accuracy, sound technical practice and
compliance to the Quality Management System approved by the Engineer in order to
achieve International Quality in the fabrication of steel truss members.
Qualification of the International Experts shall be in accordance with following:
1. Shall have a minimum experience of 20 years as supervisor or quality assurance
engineer or quality control engineer in the field of fabrication. The experience is
inclusive of at least 5 years of experience in International High-Speed Rail projects/
Japanese High-Speed Rail Projects as team lead for fabrication of steel truss/plate
girder superstructures for High Speed Railway bridges.
2. Preferably, shall have sound knowledge of Japanese Codes as well as International
Codes and Standards on fabrication of steel structures such as Japan Welding
Engineering Society Standard, Japanese Industrial Standards (JIS) & weld inspection
requirements, AWS D1.1.
3. Shall be a certified International Welding Engineer (IWE) or International Welding
Technologist (IWT) person, with sufficient knowledge on quality systems for
fabrication of welded structures.
Page 13 of 83
General
Materials shall conform to the Drawings and shall be in accordance with the standards
given in Table 2.1 below, unless otherwise specified in these technical specifications.
However, in case of non-availability of type and grade of any material, the Contractor can
propose alternate options, conforming to these technical specifications, for approval of the
Engineer. Any alternative option shall be of equivalent or of higher specification to that
indicated in the Drawings. No claim shall be entertained from the Contractor on this
account and payment shall be as per relevant items in the schedule of items, quantities and
rates.
Table 2.1: Reference Standards
Referred Standard
NO. Item/Description Indian Standard Japanese and Other
Industrial Standard
IS:808, IS:1730, IS:1852, JIS B 0601, JIS G 3101, JIS
Steel plate, Steel sections, IS:1161, IS:1173, IS:2062, G 3131, JIS G 3191, JIS G
1 Rolled steel, Rolled steel IS:3601, IS:4923, IS/ISO 3192, JIS G 3193, JIS G
3194, JIS G 3106
section, Rolled steel bar 7452, IS:12778, IS:12779, IS:
1875, IS: 7283.
2 High strength bolts, nuts and IS:3757, IS:4000, IS:6623, JIS B 1186
washers IS:6649
IS:1363-1, IS:1363-3, JIS B 1180, JIS B 1181
3 Ordinary bolts, nuts and
washers IS:1364, IS:1367-3, IS:6639
4 Cracks and defects-Flaw

IS: 3658, IS: 3703
detection
IS:814, IS:1395, IS:4353, JIS Z 3211, JIS Z 3312, JIS
5 Electrode, wire and flux IS:7280, IRS M:28, IRS Z 3313, JIS Z 3351, flux
M:39, IRS M:46, IS:9595 suitable for wire.
6 Stud IS:2062 JIS B 1198, ISO 13918

7 Chequered plate IS:3502
8 Cast steel IS:1030, IS:4899
9 Carbon Steel Pipe IS:1161, IS:1239Part1 JIS G 3452
10 Handling and storage of steel IS 4082, IRS: B1-2001

and connection material
11 Painting As per Appendix-8
Note:
Priority shall be given for Indian Standards.
Page 14 of 83
Prior to procurement of materials, the Contractor shall submit list and detail of suppliers
or manufactures to the Engineer for approval. This detail shall include but not limited
to capacity, location, lead time for delivery and credentials of suppliers or manufacturers.
However, the same does not absolve the Contractor of the overall responsibility for the
timely completion of the work.
Steel
The Contractor shall procure steel material only from primary manufacturers approved
by the Engineer. However, only certain isolated sections of structural steel, not being
rolled by primary approved manufacturers, can be procured from the authorized re-
rollers of primary approved manufacturers or authorized licensee of BIS having
traceability system and who use billets produced by primary approved manufacturers.
Traceability shall be ensured by the Contractor and submitted to the Engineer for
approval. It may be noted that quality of steel used for fabrication shall be the essence
of the contract and shall be rigidly followed.
All the steel plates and rolled sections used in the fabrication must have
Manufacturer’s Certificates clearly indicating specifications to which they conform.
The Contractor shall ensure that the steel materials received at fabrication-workshop
are colour coded to identify its grade.
The steel plates shall have STRA value more than 20%, as per IS 9595. The Contractor
shall conduct short transverse tensile test as per IS 9595 (Appendix-H) for each
production batch of the steel plate procured.
Steel plate to be welded shall conform to provisions of IS 2062, however for E450,
Charpy impact value shall be 47J or more at the test temperature of (-)5 degrees-C as
specified in JIS G 3106. Applicable member thickness and corresponding steel grade
shall conform to Table 2.2 of these technical specifications.
Table 2.2: Applicable Member Thickness and corresponding steel grade
Member Thickness t(mm) IS Steel Grade JIS Steel Grade
9≦t≦16 B0 A
16<t≦25 E250 B0 SM400 B
25<t≦75 C C
Primary 9≦t≦25 B0 B
Member E350 SM490
25<t≦75 C C
Or
9≦t≦25 B0 SM490Y B
Secondary E350
Member 25<t≦75 C SM520 C
9≦t≦25 B0 ― ―
E410
25<t≦75 C ― ―
9≦t≦75 E450 -5℃,47J SM570 C
The tolerance of the thickness of the steel plate shall conform to IS: 1852. However,
Page 15 of 83
for plate thickness 22mm or more, the tolerance on the minus side of plate shall be in
accordance with JIS G 3193.
Tolerance for flatness of steel plate shall conform to table 5 Class N, Type L of IS/ISO
7452: 2002 for all steel grades.
The use of steel plates with scratches, exceeding maximum height of 100 μm (Rz) on
the surface as specified in JIS B 0601, shall be decided by the Engineer, depending on
extent of damage.
Pitted /corroded material should not be used.
Each production batch of steel procured, shall be tested by Ultrasonic Testing (UT) as
per relevant provisions at the manufacturer’s premises before dispatch, duly witnessed
by the Contractor and sample checked by the Engineer. Only tested steel shall be used
for fabrication.
The upper limit of Sensitivity Composition for steel plate material (hereinafter referred
to as “PCM”) shall conform to provision mentioned in Table 2.3 of these technical
specifications.
Table 2.3: Sensitivity Composition (upper limit) for Weld Crack (PCM)
Grade PCM (%)
t≦25 25<t≦40 40<t≦75
(mm) (mm) (mm)
E 250 0.24 0.24 0.24
E 350 0.26 0.27 0.29
E410, E 450 0.26 0.27 0.29
Note:
1) PCM (%) shall be calculated by chemical composition (%) based on manufacturer’s test
certificate of steel plate, as below.
PCM= C＋Mn/20＋Si/30＋Ni/60＋Cr/20＋Mo/15＋V/10＋Cu/20＋5B
2) “t”- Plate thickness.
Steel for drifts shall be in accordance with IS: 1875 for forged quality steel or IS: 7283
for hot rolled bars.
Welding material/consumables
Welding consumables shall conform to relevant IS and IRS reference standards listed
in Table 2.1 of these technical specifications.
All welding consumables (electrodes, wire, flux etc.) shall be procured only from the
manufacturers approved by the Engineer. Low hydrogen type covered electrodes shall
be used.
The electrodes where covers are peeled, stained or damaged due to moisture, shall not
be used. All welding consumables shall be thoroughly dried up in the drying furnace
where time and temperature shall be controlled.
Page 16 of 83
Bolts, nuts, washers (high strength and ordinary) and studs

Bolts, nuts, washers and studs shall conform to the relevant reference standards listed in
Table 2.1 of these technical specifications and the Drawings.
Paints
Paint materials and other accessories shall conform to relevant standards listed in Table
2.1 of this Technical Standard.
Paints only from manufacturer approved by the Engineer shall be used. The Contractor
shall furnish to the Engineer, the date of manufacture of paint as certified by the
manufacturer with the necessary container marking and test certificate for paint
conforming to relevant code.
Inspection and testing of material
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer copies of test certificates including steel,
bolts, paints etc., from the manufacturers including proof sheets, mill sheets etc.
showing that the materials have been tested in accordance with the requirements of
various specifications and relevant provisions.
All materials for the work shall pass tests and/or analysis prescribed by the relevant
reference standards listed in Sub-Clause 2.1.1 and elsewhere, in these technical
specifications. If the test results do not conform to above mentioned applicable
references, then the lot of material shall be rejected and got removed from the
Contractor’s fabrication-workshop.
Additional tests as instructed by the Engineer shall conform to Sub-Clause 1.5 of these
technical specifications. Even satisfactory outcome of such tests or analysis shall in no
way limit, dilute or interfere with the absolute right of the Engineer to reject the whole
or part of such materials supplied by the Contractor, which in the judgment of the
Engineer does not comply with the conditions of the Contract.
Paint material:
The tests for density (Weight per litre), consistency test, scratch test, flexibility
and adhesive test, shall be carried out in the field.
The Engineer reserves the right to get the paint re-tested at the Contractor’s
expenses as considered necessary, before giving approval, if the test results do not
conform to these technical specifications.
Steel tape: The Contractor shall use steel tape conforming to IS: 1269-Part-2 duly
tested and issued with certificate of accuracy by an accredited National testing house
for templating, fabrication of drilling jig etc.
The storage and handling/delivery plan as part of the overall Method Statement, shall
be proposed by the Contractor for the approval of the Engineer.
The Contractor shall have a suitable storage yard for storing the procured structural steel,
fabricated steel structural members and all other materials. The yard shall have proper
facilities such as drainage and lighting including access for cranes, trailers and other
heavy equipment.
Page 17 of 83
Stacking of steel girder material shall be in accordance with IRS: B1-2001 CL. 4.
All materials shall be stored at proper places so as to prevent their deterioration or
intrusion by foreign matter and to ensure their satisfactory quality and fitness for the
fabrication Work. The storage space must also permit easy inspection, removal and re-
storage of the materials. All such materials even though stored in approved
godowns/places, must be subjected to acceptance test where required, prior to their
immediate use.
Connection material: All connection material shall conform to the relevant codes
mentioned in Sub-Clause 2.1.1 hereinabove. All welding consumables, bolts, nuts,
washers, screws, small plates and articles generally shall be suitably identified, handled
and stored as per manufacturer’s specifications and shall be stored on racks and
platforms, off the ground in a properly covered building.
Welding consumables shall be governed as per relevant para of IS: 9595.
Paint material: All paint material shall be stored strictly in accordance with the
requirements laid down by the paint manufacturers. The containers shall be opened only
at the time of use. The following further precautions shall be exercised:
The storage area shall be well ventilated and protected from sparks, flame, direct
exposure to sun or excessive heat, preferably located in an isolated room or in a
separate building. All paint material containers shall be clearly labelled to show
paint identification, date of manufacture, batch number, order number and special
instructions in legible form.
Paints which have gelled or otherwise deteriorated during storage shall not be used.
Paints for which the shelf life specified by the supplier has expired shall not be used.
Damages if any during handling and storage: The Contractor shall be liable for all losses
and damages of the materials stored and handled by him.
General
Classification of fabricated steel material into primary members and secondary
members shall be in accordance with Table 2.4 below.
Table 2.4: Primary Member and Secondary Member
Primary member Secondary member
Floor beam, stringer, end stiffener, end Lateral bracing, sway bracing, diaphragm,
diaphragm, main truss structural brake truss, members to connect the above
member, connection member for members with primary members, splice
erection, beam, splice and joint and joint members for the above members,
members for the above members, shear intermediate stiffener, horizontal stiffener,
connector. outside beam, reinforcement materials for
slab end.
Other fabrication material, apart from the main truss members as indicated above, to
be fabricated as per the Drawings by the Contractor include among others, embedded
Page 18 of 83
steel shuttering formwork for RCC deck of track, Sole plates for bearings, hanging
lugs for launching and erection, support fixtures for OHE (hanging lugs for feeder and
GW, supports for trolley wire), Supports for other accessories, attachment plates for
earthing etc.
The fabrication-workshop staff shall have requisite experience, proven skill and
experience in the technique of fabricating large components. Accuracy of fabrication
shall be realized through controlled high precision jigs, fixtures and templates, which
shall be inspected and passed by the Engineer or any other inspection agency as
approved by the Engineer. The approval of the Engineer shall in no way absolve the
responsibility of the Contractor.
The Contractor, prior to commencing Test-fabrication, shall submit following details
of fabrication-workshop to the Engineer for approval:
Location, address, space (covered and open) and layout of fabrication-workshop
building, including but not limiting to following details:
Storage and handling area for Fabrication Works materials (steel material,
connection materials, paints etc.) and fabricated items.
Area and space for fabrication activities including but not limiting to area
and space for preparation of full scale drawings (template shop) and marking,
straightening, cutting, bending, drilling, welding, assembly and Check-
assembly, paint shop including surface preparation (blasting rooms) etc.
Details of plant and equipment for handling of steel, fabricated material and
consumables.
Flow chart showing the fabrication process.
Assembly and administrative office area.
Organization chart including manpower for management and operation structure
(engineers, welding operators and other skilled and semi-skilled work force)
including their trade classification, responsibility and authority matrix.
All serviceable major items, and plant and equipment, with their deployed number
and specification, for power supply, transportation and Fabrication Works (lifting
equipment, straightening, bending, cutting, forming steel shapes, drilling, welding,
bolting, bolt holding, gas supply lines, rotating device, scaffolding, blasting
machines etc.).
Details of paint shop including blasting machine and rooms.
Details of Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) and Welding Procedure
Qualification Record (WPQR) conforming to Sub-Clause 2.4.5 of these technical
specifications.
Details of Check-assembly area including pavement, plant and equipment.
The Contractor shall maintain stable electric power supply to welding equipment.
Disturbance to stable electric power supply to welding equipment shall not be
permitted.
Independent Examining Body (IEB)
IEB shall be an independent institution engaged by the Contractor, with competency
Page 19 of 83
in inspection, testing and certification. In general, IEB shall report directly to the
Engineer unless instructed in writing otherwise.
For selection of IEB, the Contractor shall submit credentials to the Engineer for
approval, ensuring that IEB has no conflict of interest with the Contractor, the
Engineer and the Employer, and have adequate competency of inspection, testing and
certification for the work to be assigned to them.
Shop drawings
Shop Drawings shall conform to General Specifications (Division 05000: Contractor’s
Drawings) of these technical specifications.
The Contractor shall prepare detailed shop drawings on the basis of tender/design
drawings supplied by the Employer, in such size and in such details as may be specified
by the Engineer. The fabrication drawings shall indicate member sizes, edge
preparation, welding sequence, type and size of welding. No work of fabrication shall
be started without approval of such drawings by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall give due consideration to the need of Check-assembly at shop,
weight and size limitation of elements for transportation from shop to bridge site/site-
delivery-yard.
Test-fabrication (Using Partial Mock-Ups)
The Test-fabrication shall be carried out in accordance with Appendix- 7 of these
technical specifications and the Method Statement that shall be approved by the
Engineer prior to commencement of Test-fabrication.
The Contractor shall carry out the Test-fabrication (using Partial Mock-ups), at each
workshop, as soon as possible, after the award of the contract but before the
commencement of actual fabrication work. The objective of Test-fabrication shall be
to establish ‘Optimised and Standardised Fabrication work Sequence (OSFS)’. After
the successful completion of the test, the Contractor shall define and plan the actual
operation and quality management of the contract.
For Test-fabrication, the Contractor may use the steel material from the market instead
of manufacturer; however, the material shall confirm to these technical specifications.
Test certificates, including Manufacturer’s Certificate or additional tests, to confirm
the same shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
Test-fabrication shall be carried out using resources representing actual fabrication.
Test-fabrication shall be evaluated by the Engineer as required for the actual
fabrication.
Test-fabrication material shall not be reused in the actual fabrication work and will
remain the property of the Contractor.
General
The Contractor, prior to commencing fabrication, shall submit Method Statement, to
the Engineer for approval, including but not limiting to detail of work sequence,
process for cutting, welding and bolt hole drilling.
Page 20 of 83
For primary members, Numerical Control (NC) method shall be used for marking,
cutting and drilling holes.
For secondary members, NC method shall be preferred; however, high precision
template, jigs and fixtures approved by the Engineer, may also be used for marking,
cutting and drilling holes. For fabrication of template, jigs and fixtures, NC method
shall be used.
When marking is carried out, the members shall not be scratched or damaged by chisel,
punch or carving.
Cutting plan shall preferably be aligned to the direction of rolling.
No fabrication work shall be started by the Contractor without having obtained
approval of Engineer on the relevant drawings and Test-fabrication. Approval by the
Engineer of any of the drawings shall not relieve the contractor of his responsibility of
workmanship, fit of parts, details, materials and errors or omissions of any work.
Straightening and bending of materials
All rolled sections and plates shall be straight and free from defects like twists and
bends before they are used for marking and cutting.
If any rolled section or plate has minor defects, it shall be cold straightened by pressure
with the help of plate and section straightening machine, with the approval of the
Engineer. Pressure applied for straightening shall be such as not to damage the surface
or microstructure of grains in the steel member.
Plate can be bent by cold bending, where permitted, with inner radius not less than 15
times plate thickness. Direction of bending must be at right angles to the direction of
rolling.
Flattening, straightening and bending in hot condition shall not be carried out, unless
otherwise specified in the Drawings or approved by the Engineer.
Cutting of materials
Cutting shall be carried out either mechanically or by controlled oxy-acetylene flame
torch or plasma process. All flame cut edges shall be ground to secure clean and square
edges.
No shearing of section or plates is permitted.
Requirement for tolerance and quality of cutting and groove face shall conform to
Table 2.5 below. The repair of defects shall conform to Table 2.11 of these technical
specifications.
Table 2.5: Quality of Cutting Face and Groove Face
Primary members Secondary members
Roughness (specified in Maximum height 50μmRZ Maximum height 100μmRZ
JIS B 0601)
Notch Not permitted Maximum 1 no. of notch with
depth equal to or less than 1
mm per 1 m length is
Page 21 of 83
permitted.
Slag Only slag which can be removed during surface treatment for
painting, is permitted.
Melting of upper edge Cutting face roundness shall not exceed 0.5 mm in radius.
The free edge of the member shall be rounded with a radius of about 2.0 mm.
The butting surfaces at all joints of steel truss members shall be planes using edge
planning machine and end milling machine, so as to butt in close contact throughout
the finished joint.
Drilling of holes
The hole diameter and distance between bolt hole and plate edge shall conform to the
Drawings. The bolt hole shall be cylindrical and perpendicular to the surface of the
member unless otherwise specified in the Drawings.
The bolt holes of primary members shall be drilled to the prescribed size using NC.
However, hand drilling using splice plate may be allowed as template in special
situation, after the Engineer approval. No punching or hand drilling of holes is
permitted. If template is applied, plate shall not be welded and shall be fixed by jig.
The tolerance of the hole diameter shall be as per Table 2.6 below, unless otherwise
specified in the Drawing.
Table 2.6: Tolerance of Hole Diameter
Primary member Secondary member
+0.5mm for 100% holes, +1.0mm for 100% holes,
however, +1.0mm for 20% holes however, +2.0mm for 20% holes
in the bolt group in the bolt group
In the joints of the primary members and splice plates, the position of pilot holes for
erection shall be indicated on the members.
Over-sized holes shall not be permitted, unless otherwise prior approval of the
Engineer is taken. The locations of over-size holes shall be identified in the shop
drawing and the diameter of the holes shall not exceed the value of bolt diameter +4.5
mm.
After joining the members, through-ratio (go) and stoppage-ratio (no-go) of the gauge
against hole shall be checked as per Table 2.7 below.
Table 2.7: Through ratio and stoppage ratio of the gauge
Bolt type Nominal Through- Through- Stoppage- Stoppage-
diameter gauge (mm) ratio (%) gauge (mm) ratio (%)
TTHS M20 20.5 100 22.5 More than 80
M22 22.5 100 24.5 More than 80
M24 24.5 100 26.5 More than 80
Ordinary M8 9.0 100 11.0 More than 80
Page 22 of 83
bolt M10 11.0 100 13.0 More than 80

M12 13.0 100 15.0 More than 80
M16 17.0 100 19.0 More than 80
M20 21.0 100 23.0 More than 80
M22 23.0 100 25.0 More than 80
M24 25.0 100 27.0 More than 80
Drilling to enlarge unfaired holes shall not be accepted.
Welding
General
All welding shall be carried out in accordance with the Drawings and Welding
Procedure Specification (WPS). Provisions of the Welded Bridge Code and IS: 9595
may be followed, if not in contravention to the provisions mentioned hereinafter.
All welding shall be by Submerged Arc Welding (SAW) or Gas Shielded Arc
Welding (GSAW) or Shielded Metal Arc Welding (SMAW).
Mist, rust, paint, slag etc. shall be removed from welding surface prior to welding.
Furthermore, mill scale and primer shall be removed for SAW.
Welding work shall be carried out at indoors in the fabrication-workshop to have
necessary environment control (against wind, dust, moisture and water) to avoid
entrapment of hydrogen, which is likely to cause crack initiation in weld or under
bed of weld (i.e. Heat Affected Zone HAZ). Also baking of flux used for submerged
arc welding in oven for an hour at 200 degree-C shall be carried out to ensure that no
moisture is contained in flux during welding.
The Contractor shall appoint welding engineers/supervisors as per Sub-Clause 1.7.2.
All welds shall be carried out under their direction / supervision.
Welding procedure
General
Welding procedure shall conform to IS: 16003 Annex C.
The Contractor shall provide preliminary Welding Procedure Specification for
welding parameter (including essential and non-essential, but important parameter to
be controlled in welding work). Subsequently, the Contractor shall carry out Welding
Procedure Qualification Test (WPQT) to confirm welding quality and workability of
WPS, which shall be validated by the International Expert for Welding and Quality
Management. This shall be further audited by Independent Examining Body (IEB).
The Contractor shall provide Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) based on
Welding Procedure Qualification Record (WPQR) which shall be accepted by the
International Expert for Welding and Quality Management and approved by the
Engineer.
Qualification of welder
The welder shall pass the tests specified in IS 817 or JIS (JIS Z 3801 and JIS Z 3841)
Page 23 of 83
or equivalent. However, welder already having passing certificate conforming to JIS

may be exempted from the tests.
The welder should have minimum experience of three year and worked as a welder for
a minimum period of total 6 months in the last one year.
If the welders are from India, the Contractor shall get the welders trained in “Welding
Research Institute (WRI), Trichy” or other suitable institute approved by the Engineer,
and the certificate (photocopy) shall be submitted to the Engineer for record. The
expertise of the welders shall also be examined and accepted by the International
Expert for Welding and Quality Management.
All welders engaged shall pass the fillet welding test specified in Appendix-2. Welders
engaged in stud welding shall pass the stud welding tests as specified in Appendix-3 .
Routine re-testing of welding operators by the International Expert for Welding and
Quality Management may be required every six months, if deemed necessary, by the
Engineer who also reserves the right to retest any welding operator at any time during
the contract.
The Contractor shall submit list of welders, clearly identifying each welder along with
passing certificates and their suitability for type of welding, for approval of the
Engineer.
Preparation of fusion faces
Fusion faces and the surrounding surface up to 50 mm shall be free from mill scale,
moisture, oil, paint dirt and any other substance which may affect the quality of the weld,
and same shall be removed by grinding or flame cleaning/grit blasting. Details of joint,
fusion faces, root face and gap shall be as per shop drawings.
Preheating
Preheating temperature (TP) shall be calculated as shown below and submitted to the
Engineer for approval. The Contractor may refer Appendix-10 for reference.
TP＝1440Pw－392
Pw＝PCM＋HGL/60＋K/400000
Where:
TP : Preheating temperature (degree Celsius)
PCM : Sensitivity composition for weld crack (%) (Refer Sub-Clause 2.1.2)
HGL : Diffusible hydrogen amount of weld metal (ml/100g) determined directly
by glycerine displacement method. (JIS Z 3118)
HGL : 0.79HIIW-1.73 as per (JIS Z 3118)
HIIW : Diffusible hydrogen amount of weld metal (ml/100g) determined by
mercury method as per ISO 3690
K : Restraint degree of welding =200t (N/mm・mm)
t : Lesser of plate thickness (mm) or 50mm.
Where necessary, preheating shall be carried out to satisfy temperature requirement
within 100mm range of the welding run. Preheating shall be maintained at required
Page 24 of 83
temperature for welding run.

Temperature measuring device (for example, temperature sensitive crayon, contact
type thermometer, thermocouple, non-contact type thermometer, etc.). shall be
specified in the Method Statement.
Heating equipment, temperature, measuring location shall be recorded in approved
format and reported for traceability.
Welding operation
Assembly welding
Parts to be welded shall be assembled such that the joints to be welded are
accessible and visible to the welder. As far as possible, assembly jig and fixture
shall be used for accuracy.
Assembly welding (tack welding) shall not be temporary welding and shall be of
the same quality as that of final welding and shall be performed on the same weld
line as that for final welding. Length, size and space between assembly weld shall
be 80mm (or more), 4mm (or more) and 400mm (or less) respectively.
Assembly welding shall be performed by SMAW with low hydrogen type covered
electrode or by GSAW.
As Assembly weld shall become part of the final weld, it shall be free from all
cracks and other welding defects. If the crack appears on the assembly welding, it
shall be removed till sound metal appears, subsequently assembly welding shall be
conducted again if necessary.
Run-in and run-out plate (end-tabs)
Run-in and run-out plate with same groove and grade as that of the member joint,
shall be attached within 1 mm gap from members and shall be welded for
fabrication of members to ensure that weld will start on run-in plate and weld will
stop on run-out plate and thus avoid crater defects on the components. For run-in
and run-out plate, for different groove or grade, trial welding shall be carried out.
Lower grade up to E250 is permitted for Run-in and run-out plate.
Welding of components
Welding shall be carried out as per the approved WPS.
As far as possible, welding position of components shall be flat or horizontal
position. To ensure flat position, the welding component shall be placed in a
manipulator. The welding components shall be assembled and rotated in the
manipulator to assist welding sequence and prevent distortion of member. In
absence of manipulator, special jig and fixtures shall be provided for positioning
and careful handling by crane.
Temporary struts and strong back etc. used in the welding work, which are not part
of the permanent structure shall not be welded to the parent metal. For the auxiliary
jigs to be used in the unavoidable circumstances, the Contractor shall submit the
details of installation/removal methodology to the Engineer for approval.
The fit-up work shall accurately be carried out as per following tolerances:
Page 25 of 83
Root gap: specified value ±1.0mm or less

(If it is not possible to maintain root gap less than 1mm, groove shall be made
before welding)
Misalignment in the thickness direction: 10% or less of the thinner plate
(maximum 5mm).
Contact gap between parent metal and backing metal: 0.5mm or less
Groove angle: specified value ±5degrees
Welding of stud shear connectors
Welding of stud shear connectors shall be as per manufacturer’s instruction
including preheating, if not in the contravention to following provisions.
The Contractor shall use stud welding machines for welding of stud shear connectors,
as approved by the Engineer.
The stud and the surface to which studs are welded shall be free from scale, moisture,
rust and other foreign material. The stud base shall not be painted, galvanized or
cadmium plated prior to welding.
Inspection of stud welding after completion shall be as follows. If welding fails,
stud shall be removed and re-welded as per approved procedure.
Visual test
Weld area all around the stud shank shall be of more than 1mm height
and 0.5mm width.
Crack and slag inclusion shall not be permitted.
Undercut like sharp notch and undercut more than 0.5 mm depth shall
not be permitted.
Height of stud shall not exceed ±2mm of design value.
Bend test
Bend test shall be carried out for 1 % of all studs satisfying visual
inspection.
Stud shall be bent to 15 degrees by hammer. After bending, no crack or
defect shall appear.
Studs which were bent for testing shall be left as it is in case no defect
observed.
Precautions during welding
All equipment shall be provided with calibrated gauges to observe current, arc voltage,
speed of travel of equipment etc.
Welding shall be prohibited in the ambient temperature below zero degree-C in the
fabrication-workshop.
For full penetration grooves, back welding work weld shall be conducted only after
back chipping exposes sound fusion metal, with liquid penetrant inspection
conforming to IS 3658, showing no defects.
Welding line by SAW shall be conducted on the same day so that the members to be
Page 26 of 83
welded shall be free of moisture after assembly. If welding work is suspended and
continued next day, welding shall be resumed after confirmation of rust free surface
through cleaning and drying.
For same strength parent materials, consumables with properties equivalent to that of
parent materials shall be used. For different strength parent materials, consumables
with mechanical property equivalent to that of lower strength parent materials shall be
used.
Fillet welding with end return shall be conducted without stoppage at the end of
member. The length of end return shall be more than two times of fillet size.
Crater at end/joint of bead shall be fully filled up.
Arc of SAW shall not be stopped in the middle weld length. If arc is stopped, welding
shall be continued after chipping the end of bead with slope of more than 50mm length.
If SAW is changed over to another welding method such as SMAW, end of SAW bead
shall be chipped more than 50mm length with slope and only then the substitute
welding work shall be started.
Weld heat input of one run shall be 7000 J/mm or less for E 450, 410, 350.
The member shall not be harmfully impacted or vibrated during welding and cooling.
Welding sequence and direction shall be selected to avoid the distortion and reduce
the residual stress. If jig is used for controlling distortion, no crack of weld shall be
permitted.
Final layer of multiple pass welding shall be completed within the day. Each run of
weld surface shall be cleaned by removing of slag and spatter before next layer welding.
Also it shall be cleaned when welding consumable is replaced or final layer is
completed. Inter run temperature shall be strictly controlled. Especially for quenched
and tempered steel, inter run temperature shall be appropriately set up and strictly
controlled to maintain ductility and strength of steel material.
Stray arcing of components, which cause local hard spots or cracking of parent metal,
shall be avoided.
Rectification of distortion caused by welding
In case any distortion due to welding is noticed, the Contractor shall report the same
along with a Method Statement to rectify, to the Engineer for approval. Rectification
required if any shall be carried out only after obtaining Engineer’s approval.
Distortion caused by welding shall be straightened by mechanical device or heating,
without damage to parent metal and weld.
Temperature of heating for repairing shall not exceed 900 degrees-C and water cooling
shall be avoided in red heat condition. Grades E 350 and E 410 shall not be cooled
down by water till its temperature comes down under 650 degrees-C.
For quenched and tempered steel, repairing work shall not be carried out by heat-
straightening. Even if heat-straightening is applied, steel surface temperature shall be
controlled below 600 degrees-C and cooling down shall be carried out in the air.
Even if heat straightening for Thermo Mechanical Controlled Process (TMCP) steel is
Page 27 of 83
approved by the Engineer, heating shall be controlled as follows:

Carbon Equivalent (Ceq) more than 0.38: The steel shall be straightened by
heating below 900 degrees-C and shall be cooled down in the air or it shall be
cooled under 500 degrees-Celsius by air then cooled by water.
Ceq less than 0.38: The steel shall be straightened by heating below 900 degrees-
C and shall be cooled down in the air or water.
Where, Ceq = C+Mn/6+Si/24+Ni/40+Cr/5+Mo/4+V/14 (+Cu/13) %
(Value in parenthesis to be used when Cu is 0.5% or more).
Weld profiles
There shall be no crack at welding bead and in its vicinity.
There shall be no lack of penetration, slag inclusion, harmful blow hole and overlap,
crater and pit 0.3mm diameter or more. Even if pit diameter is less than 0.3mm, repair
shall be carried out in the area to be painted.
There should not be any irregularity in weld bead.
If finishing is specified in the Drawings, undercut shall not be permitted.
If finishing is specified for butt welding in the Drawings, the surface of butt welding
with groove which shall have an excess-weld of 10 % height or more of plate thickness
shall be smoothly finished to direction of stress. In this case the parent metal shall not
be scraped 0.5mm or more deep.
If the toe of weld bead root run shall be round finished with 5mm radius is specified
in the Drawings, the parent metal shall not be scraped more than 0.5mm deep for
finishing.
Tolerance of welding profile shall conform to Table 2.8 and Figure 2.1 below of these
technical specifications.
Table 2.8: Tolerance of Welding profile
No Check item (* Refer Figure 2.1) Tolerance
1 Difference in height of bead 2mm or less in any 25mm length in run direction
surface (*1)
2 leg length (except front fillet +3mm to 0mm
welding) +4mm to -1mm (within 10% total length of a run)
3 Difference between two leg 3mm or less
length (at any section) (*2) 4mm or less (within 10% total length of a run)
4 Throat thickness (at any +2mm to 0mm
section) (*3) +4mm to -0.7mm (within 10% total length of a run)
5 Depth of primary 0.3mm or less
undercut members 0.5mm or less (within 10% total length of a run)
(where no
secondary 0.5mm or less
finishing)
Page 28 of 83
members 0.7mm or less (within 20% total length of a run)

6 Excess-weld (where no H≦<3mm as b<15mm, h≦<4mm as
finishing) (*4) 15mm≦<b<25mm, h≦<4b/25mm as 25mm≦<b
where b as bead width, h as excess-weld height
7 Difference in height of joint and 2mm or less
end return (*1)
8 concave/convex value at any 2mm or less

section (*5)
*1 *3 *5
Leg length
25mm Leg length
*4
*2
Leg length
Leg length
Figure.2.1: Weld Profiles
Non-destructive testing (NDT)
General
The Contractor shall confirm suitability of NDT operators through test-
fabrication on partial mock-ups. The Contractor shall judge operator’s ability of
flaw detection and shall decide whether their suitability for fabrication.
NDT shall be carried out using RT and UT, as specified below; however, if the
Contractor wants to use PAUT instead of RT, ensuring same performance level as
that for RT, the Contractor shall submit Method Statement to the Engineer for
approval. If the Contractor use PAUT, The Contractor shall carry out PAUT as
per RDSO document No. BS-S-7.5.3.1-6 Ver 1.0
Qualification and responsibility of operators for RT/UT as applicable shall
conform in the relevant categories to IS: 13805 or JIS Z 2305 or ISO 9712 and the
minimum qualification of operator shall confirm to following.
For operation of device: Level II
For judgement: Level III
Also, the Contractor shall check the ability of NDT operators through Test-
fabrication by using partial mock-ups.
If the welding fails the test, then weld shall be repaired in accordance with Sub-
Page 29 of 83
Clause 2.4.7 (Table 2.11) and retest shall be carried out after repair.
Procedure for Radiography Testing (RT)
RT shall conform to IS 1182 or JIS Z 3104 or ISO 1106 and Image for RT shall
be quality of grade A. If the surface treatment by removal of excess-weld is
specified in the Drawings, it shall be carried out before, prior to Radiography.
The film length of radiography shall be more than 300 mm. The film shall be
overlapped partially when photograph needs more than 2 films.
The area of RT shall include end-tabs for at least 20 mm length. Target area of
test shall be weld portion of parent metal.
If RT is carried out after cutting end-tabs, the lead metal plate shall not cover
parent metal more than 1 mm from edge of plate.
RT shall be carried out for all butt welding; however, for butt welding where plate
thickness is 40 mm or more, UT may be carried out. If the Contractor decides that
RT can be carried out for over 40 mm thickness plate, the Contractor can use RT
after the Engineer’s approval.
RT application:
RT shall be carried out at the locations mentioned in Table 2.9 and shall pass
these classifications. If test fails, re-test shall be carried out and failed
welding shall be repaired.
Table 2.9: Radiography Testing
RT location RT area Classification
(Note 1)
Members Tension All welding Class 1

mainly flange lines
subject to
Compression Class 2 or higher
bending
flange
moment
(Note 2) Web Tension end: Class 1
(vertical Others: Class 2 or
joint) higher
Web All welding Class 2 or higher
(horizontal lines
joint)
Members Tension All welding Class 1
mainly members lines
subject to (Note 4)
axial force
Compression Class 2 or higher
(Note 3)
members
(Note 1) Class shall conform to JIS Z 3104 Appendix IV. For plate thickness of 25mm
Page 30 of 83
or more, follow JIS Z 3060-G.

(Note 2) Members with bending moment, for example, plate girder, stringer, rib, floor
beam, portal frame.
(Note 3) Members with mainly axial force (e.g. truss chord, arch rib (axial only)).
(Note 4) Members with tension stress.
Procedure for Ultrasonic Test (UT)
UT shall conform to IS 4260 or JIS Z 3060 and the standard test blocks for
calibration of angle probe shall conform to ISO: 2400. Reference block used for
adjustment of working sensitivity and Distance-Amplitude Characteristic Curve
(DAC) shall conform to RB-41B as described in JIS Z 3060. Reference block shall
be of highest grade of steel materials to be used for fabrication.
Prior to UT application, sensitivity of probe shall be estimated in accordance with
JIS Z 3060 Appendix-B, by comparing measurement of sensitivity between actual
steel plate and reference block. The difference should be within range of ±2dB,
else the equipment shall be calibrated.
Prior to UT application, sound velocity ratio shall be estimated in accordance with
JIS Z 3060 CL. 8.5, by measurement of sound velocity between actual plate and
reference block. If sound velocity ratio exceeds 2%, the equipment shall be
calibrated. Rejection level shall be “L-line” as per JIS Z 3060.
Classification of apparent flaw length shall be in accordance with JIS Z 3060-G.
The “Class 1” or higher weld joint shall be accepted.
For transverse butt and load transfer type cruciform joints where fatigue strength
of class D is expected as per drawing, acceptance criteria shall be as per Table
2.10.
Table 2.10: Permitted actual flaw length
Parent metal thickness in the
thinner plate (t in mm)
18 or less Over 18
Permitted actual 3 t/6
flaw length (mm)
Inspection and Testing of fabrication works
The Contractor shall submit the Inspection and Test Plan (ITP) to the Engineer for
approval in accordance with the relevant provisions under Division 07000 of General
Specifications. Through the ITP, the Contractor shall achieve the approved
requirements and maintain the work progress in accordance with WQMP for each
work. ITP shall include and clarify quality control objective, applied standard,
conformation to these technical specifications, requirement and tolerance, inspection
method, Weld Test Plan (WTP), test frequency, inspection result, criteria for
acceptance and rejection, status of result, approval from the Engineer and hold point
to proceed with subsequent work.
Page 31 of 83
The Contractor in principle, may statistically analyse nature of non-conformity and

rectification to maintain stable product quality as specified by these technical
specifications.
Repair of fabrication defects
If the Quality Management (QM) team of the Contractor finds any defect during and/or
after inspection work as per Inspection and Test Plan (ITP), the Contractor shall report
it to the Engineer in accordance with Sub-Clause 2.7.3 of this Technical Specification.
Repair of the following defects shall be carried out as per Table 2.11 below. For other
defects if any, the Contractor shall propose the rectification method for the approval
of the Engineer.
Table 2.11: Types of Defects and Repair
No. Types of defects Repair methodology
1 Crater and scratch on the 0.1mm≦depth≦1mm: smoothen by grinding.
steel surface 1mm < depth: weld and finish by grinding.
2 Layered crack at end of Repair by gouging a quarter depth of plate thickness,
steel plate then weld and finish.
3 Notch on gas cutting edge Depth ≦2mm: smoothen by grinding.
Depth > 2mm: After scraping more than 10mm width
in the vicinity area then weld and finish by grinding.
4 Arc strike After scraping the area of defect by grinder, then weld
and finish. However, for E 350, E410 and E 450 of
steel material, preheating shall be carried out before
scraping work by grinding. Preheating shall be
maintained at 650 degrees Celsius for few minutes.
5 Crack of weld and crack by Remove the cracked part then re-weld with preventive
bending measures against re-cracking.
6 Lack of penetration, Remove the defect with arc-air gouging and/or
incomplete fusion, slag mechanical devices then re-weld.
inclusion, blowhole and pit
7 Unevenness of bead Scrape and smoothen by grinding.
8 Undercut Depth <0.5mm: scrape and smoothen by grinding
0.5mm ≦Depth: after weld, finish by grinding.
9 Overlap Remove defect by grinder or arc-air gouging or
mechanical devices then re-weld.
10 Hole by failed drilling Primary members: replace with new material, or after
filling by weld into hole then finish by grinding. In the
latter case, radiography testing shall be carried out and
acceptance criteria shall conform to Table 2.9.
Page 32 of 83
Secondary members: after filling by weld, finish by

grinder.
Disc grinder shall not be used for repair of steel surface flaw and weld bead. Conical
grinder shall be used for repair of weld bead. Repair the weld bead so that it becomes
smooth in the direction of the bead without damage.
Short bead shall be avoided in the repair work by welding.
The Check-assembly shall not be done on natural ground and should be done on a
levelled concrete surface as approved by the Engineer.
Prior to commencement of Check-assembly work, the Contractor shall submit Method
Statement including but not limiting to detail of platform system, handling, assembly
bolting-plan and match-marking etc., all as per the Drawings, for the approval of the
Engineer.
The Contractor shall conduct Check-assembly for all spans and all components,
including assembly of bearing and sole plate.
For simply supported spans, complete span shall be Check-assembled at same time;
however, for continuous spans, at least one span along with adequate number of panels
of adjacent span, necessary to represent continuous behaviour, shall be Check-
assembled at same time.
The Check-assembly shall be witnessed by the concerned interface contractor and
receive his acceptance and approval by the Engineer before dis-assembly.
The camber shall be provided only by lowering of the jacks and in no case by raising
the jacks.
Check-assembly shall be conducted using approximately 1.5m high support system
placed on stable foundation, with the truss supported at every panel point duly
maintaining the required camber. The Contractor shall provide safe and accessible
platform for inspection of all parts of assembled truss. The bottom surface of girder and
the upper surface of the bearing seat area of the Check-assembly platform, which come
into contact with bearing shall be true horizontal surfaces and parallel with each other
at the time of the load transfer to the bearing, as per the Drawing.
Bolt-jointing shall normally be carried out as per the approved bolt-plan. The total
number of service bolts and drift pins in assembly shall be more than 50% of HSFG
bolts group at a joint, with the number of drift pins more than 5% of them. The service
bolts are to be fully tightened as soon as the joint is assembled to secure full contact of
the mating parts.
Inspection for Check-assembly shall be carried out when temperature difference within
all bridge components is below 50 C.
The fabrication camber is the camber of steel truss only without any other dead load and
live load and with support in place i.e. no stress condition. The fabrication camber shall
be recorded in the approved format at regular stages of assembly build up. After
assembly, fabrication camber shall conform to the approved camber diagram.
Page 33 of 83
Accuracy of Check-assembly shall conform to Appendix-1.

Tolerance of the bolt joints shall conform to the following and Figure.2.2, unless
otherwise specified in the Drawings:
The misalignment between members to be joined shall be less than 2 mm.
The tolerance of gap between plates to be joined, where there is no gap shown in
the Drawings, shall be less than 5 mm. Otherwise, the tolerance shall be ±3 mm for
the gaps shown in the Drawings.
Misalignment between plates to be joined shall be less than 3 mm. If the above
misalignment exceeds 1 mm and is less than 3 mm, edge portion of plates to be
joined shall be scraped by using grinder and/or other devices to 1/10 grade slope
for connection plate as to closely contact with parent metal.
The bolts, nuts and washers, drifts and ordinary plates etc. used in the Check-assembly
shall remain the property of the Contractor, and the same shall not be reused in another
fabrication work. Reuse of functional bolts, nuts and washers, not adversely affecting
the Check-assembly components and results, shall be permitted.
General
Method Statement for anti-corrosive work by painting and galvanizing, with details of
surface preparation, painting specification, painting procedure and ITP, shall be submitted
to the Engineer for approval prior to commencement of work.
Painting Specification
The painting schedule for various fabrication elements shall be as per Appendix-8.
Surface preparation for painting work
Surface preparation shall conform to RDSO specification No. M&C/PCN/129/2010.
Special care should be taken in preparing corners, junctions of members, holes, areas
less accessible, hidden pockets etc. Surface preparation at such locations shall not be
inferior to that attained over the rest of the area.
Page 34 of 83
Blast work shall be performed indoor and shall not be performed in relative humidity
of more than 80 %. Steel plate shall not be exposed to rain or dew before blast work,
during working and till painting after blast work.
Granularity of abrasive materials and blast condition (such as air pressure, material
amount, blasting time, nozzle aperture etc.) shall be adjusted to obtain required
cleaning grade and roughness.
All surfaces shall be cleaned of loose substances and foreign materials. e.g. dirt, rust,
scale, oil, grease, welding flux etc so that the prime coat adheres to the original metal
surface. If any traces of oil or grease remain after blasting they shall be removed by
solvent cleaning and the area will be re-blasted thereafter.
All welding areas shall be given special attention for removal of weld flux slag, weld
metal splatter weld head oxides, weld flux fumes silvers and other foreign objects
before blasting. If deemed necessary and approved by the Engineer, acid washing and
subsequent washing with clean water shall be used.
Painting Procedure
Painting shall not be commenced till the surface preparation has been approved by the
Engineer.
Before the application of any paint the surfaces to be treated shall be thoroughly
cleaned. Oil and grease shall be removed from the surface by washing with solvents
or with a detergent solution.
If not in contravention with manufacturer’s specifications, paint shall not be applied
when the ambient temperature is 10°C and below, and also when the surface
temperature is above 50°C. For paints which dry by chemical reaction the temperature
requirements specified by the manufacturer shall be met with. Paint shall not be
applied in rain, wind, fog or at relative humidity of 80% and above (Inorganic Zinc-
rich Primer and Inorganic Zinc-rich Paint shall not be applied at relative humidity of
50% and below) or when the surface temperature is below dew point, resulting in
condensation of moisture. Any wet paint exposed to damaging weather conditions
shall be inspected after drying and the damaged area repainted after removal of the
paint.
Additives, if any, that are received separate such as curing agents, catalysts, hardeners
etc. shall be added to the paint as per the manufacturers’ instructions. These shall be
promptly used within the pot life specified by the manufacturers and unused additives
thereafter shall be discarded.
Sealed containers of paint of approved brand shall be used. Paint shall be mixed in
small quantities sufficient to be consumed within the pot life. The paint shall be applied
generally by spray and where not possible, by brush. The applied coat of paint shall be
uniform, and free from brush marks, sack marks, blemishes, scratching, non-uniform
thickness, holes, log marks, fuel staining, cracking, scaling, and other defects.
Each coat of paint shall be left dry till it sufficiently hardens before the subsequent
coat is applied and application parameters for subsequent coats shall conform to
manufacturer’s specification.
Page 35 of 83
Suitable tagging and masking shall be carried out for the areas not to be painted.
Hot-dip galvanizing
Hot-dip galvanized coating for anti-corrosion of the area specified in the Drawing shall be
as per Appendix-4 of these technical specifications.
Inspection and Testing for painting
The Contractor shall submit the Inspection and Test Plan (ITP) to the Engineer for
approval in accordance with the relevant provisions under Division 07000 of General
Specifications, in line with the standards mentioned as regards to inspection and tests
in these technical specifications.
The measurement of DFT shall conform to ISO 19840.
As for the plate interface between plies at bolt friction joints, the contact surface to be
jointed shall be treated so as to obtain slip factor of 0.4 or more. The Contractor shall
carry out test for slip factor as per IS: 4000 Annex B for these joints and shall confirm
that the slip factor meets the required value.
Painted surface shall be checked for any visual defects and for the required thickness.
The defect area shall be marked out for further inspection by the Engineer, after which
the suitable repair work shall be proposed by the Contractor for the approval of the
Engineer.
Repair of painting defects
Any Repair painting required after the inspection by the Engineer, shall be based on the
paint damage grade classified as under by the Contractor and painting shall be carried out
after due approval from the Engineer, as detailed in Table 2.12 below.
Table 2.12: Damage Grade and Surface Preparation for the Repair Painting
Damage Description Surface preparation
grade
Grade X Wide-spread paint damage with Using power tool
exposure of steel surface (preparation grade-3)
Grade Y Narrow-spread paint damage, and Using power tool
no exposure of steel surface (preparation grade-3)
Grade Z Only minor scratch By sandpaper
(Note) Surface preparation grade-3 means more than B Sa21/2 and CSt3 which is specified
in ISO 8501-2.
General
The Contractor shall provide Works Quality Management Plan (WQMP) in
accordance with Work Quality Management Program of General Specifications
(Division 07000: Quality Administration) and these technical specifications, as a
principal quality management plan to control whole quality management activity
considering characteristics of this Contract.
Page 36 of 83
One subsidiary quality plan, Site Quality Management Plan (SQMP), shall comprise
specifically of the following sub-divided subsidiary quality plans, as a minimum,
meeting the quality objectives of structural steel work.
Procurement Quality Management Plan (PQMP)
Processing Quality Management Plan (PCEQMP)
Assembling Quality Management Plan (AQMP)
Welding Quality Management Plan (WELQMP)
Check-assembly Quality Management Plan (CQMP)
Painting Quality Management Plan (PAIQMP)
Subsidiary plans of WQMP
The Contractor shall prepare subsidiary quality plans of WQMP conforming to
fabrication plan and facilities to be provided and used.
The subsidiary quality plans shall provide and describe in detail organization, quality
objectives, support and process in accordance with Sub-Clauses 2.4, 2.5, 2.7 and 2.8
of General Specifications (Sub-Division 07010). The Contractor may refer Appendix-
11 for reference. These shall also include criteria for the workmanship to be applied to
the works as per of General Specifications (Sub-Division 07020).
An indicative content for subsidiary quality plan of WQMP is given in Appendix-11.
Traceability Work QM Plan (TrWQMP)
The traceability record for permanent work shall conform but not limited to Table 2.13
below of these technical specifications.
Table 2.13: Traceability Record for Permanent work
Components
Type Description
of Truss
Each member Plate Piece No., plate No., heat No., mill sheet No.
of the truss
Weld Weld No., piece No., WPS, welder, date, location,
weather condition
Stud Piece No., WPS, welder, date, location, weather
condition
Bearing Upper bearing plate Piece No., plate No., heat No., mill sheet No.
Lower bearing plate Piece No., plate No., heat No., mill sheet No.
Rubber Piece No., mechanical performance test result
Bearing plate Piece No., cast No., heat No., mill sheet No.
Anchor bolt Piece No., plate No., heat No., mill sheet No.
Painting Paint material Lot No., expiry date, manufacturer, chemical
composition
Paint coat Painting date, weather condition, temperature, painter,
surface treatment, inspection date and DFT
Page 37 of 83
Non-conformity and its rectification

The Contractor shall report any non-conformity to the Engineer promptly, regardless
of Engineer’s witness. Area and position of non-conformity/defect shall be clearly
marked for proper reference. No rectification work shall be carried out to the non-
conformity till the Engineer approves the rectification method. The Contractor shall
propose the rectification method, after due consideration of causes and defects.
The approved rectification work after completion shall be again offered for inspection
and approval of the Engineer, without which the Contractor shall not proceed with
further work.
Packing, despatch or shipping and loading shall conform to IRS: B1-2001 CL. 42, 43
and 44.
Every precaution shall be taken by the Contractor for packing and transportation to
avoid any dent or distortion etc.
The items after fabrication shall be transported by the Contractor to bridge sites/site-
delivery-yards in a manner as to cause no damage to the components.
The Contractor shall be liable for all losses and damages in transit for the materials
consigned by him till materials are accepted by Interfacing Contractors after being
unloaded and stacked at bridge sites/site-delivery-yards. Insurance against loss or
damage in transit, if any, shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
Structural Steel work including painting shall be paid as per total weights in MT as
derived from the details mentioned in the structural Drawings provided by the Employer,
accurate to 0.001MT (i.e. 1 Kg). No deduction shall be made for the bolt holes.
Dimensions of length, breadth and thickness shall be measured with a steel tape correct
to nearest mm. Cubic contents of structural steel shall be worked out to nearest 0.0001
cum. The Density of the structural steel shall be taken as 7.85 tonnes/cum. The wastage
of steel are included in unit price and shall not be paid separately.
Rate for Fabrication shall include all activities for the complete Test-fabrication,
fabrication, packaging, transportation, unloading, stacking, all temporary works and
arrangements, cost of machines, plants and equipment etc.
Rate for Check-assembly shall include disassembly cost after successful Check-
assembly.
The payment for the procurement of material after receipt in fabrication shop shall be
made on the basis of acceptance after inspection/test results.
No additional payment shall be made for bolts, nuts and washers, drifts and ordinary
plates etc. used in the fabrication and Check-assembly of the work.
The bolts, nuts and washers, drifts and ordinary plates etc. used in the Test- fabrication,
fabrication and Check-assembly of the work are included in each unit price and shall
not be paid separately.
Page 38 of 83
General
The elastomeric bearings shall apply to steel superstructure for span lengths up to
100m.
The elastomeric bearings for steel superstructure shall include vulcanized elastomer
reinforced with steel laminates, upper and lower external steel plates and side blocks,
as specified in the Drawings.
The Contractor shall submit the Method Statement for the manufacturing,
workmanship, testing, installation (Check-assembly), inspection and acceptance etc.
of the bearings, all in accordance with the Drawings and the relevant codes. Approval
from the Engineer shall be obtained prior to the manufacture.
Procurement
Bearing Manufacturer
The bearings manufacturer shall be an experienced manufacturer having record of supply
of similar bearing to developed countries. Elastomeric bearing manufacturer shall be
Materials
Necessary test certificates for all raw materials as in this Clause shall be furnished by
manufacturers.
Steel
Steel laminates shall conform to IRC: 83 Part II (CL. 4) and the Drawings.
Steel plates, side blocks, anchor bolts, all other bolts, nuts and washers shall
conform to Sub-Clause 2.1 and the Drawings.
Elastomer
Elastomer shall conform to JIS K 6386 C08-b1 or its equivalent.
Chloroprene (CR) alone shall be used in the manufacture of bearing. Grades of raw
elastomer of proven use in elastomeric bearing with low crystallization rates and
adequate shelf life shall be used. Reclaimed rubber, vulcanised wastes, natural
rubber and deleterious filling material shall not be used.
The chemical composition of elastomer shall meet the standards specified in Table
3.1 below. For testing purposes, one lot represents one batch mix, and the batch mix
is typically a 150 Kg mix of raw materials for production of bearings, producing 5-
10 bearings depending on size of bearings.
Table 3.1: Quality Standard with Respect to Chemical Composition of Elastomer
Standard Referred
Items Frequency Testing Methods
Value Standard
Pyrolytic gas
(1) Identification CR Once per Chromatographic method/ ISO 7270-1/
of Polymer (Chloroprene) lot Infrared spectrometric ISO 4650
method
Page 39 of 83
Standard Referred
Items Frequency Testing Methods
Value Standard
(2) Poly
Once per Thermogravimetric
Chloroprene 50% or more ISO 9924-1
lot method
Content
Thermogravimetric
(3)
Once per method/ ISO 9924-1/
Reinforcement 10 - 35%
lot Pyrolytic and chemical ISO 1408
Content
degradation methods
Once per Thermogravimetric ISO 9924-1/
(4) Ash Content 10% or less
lot method ISO 247
The physical properties of elastomer shall meet the standards specified in Table 3.2
below, and these physical properties shall be tested and recorded. Ozone resistance
properties shall not be waived in any condition.
Table 3.2: Quality Standard with Respect to Physical Properties of Elastomer
Frequency
Standard Name of Test and Referred
Physical Properties Unit of
Value Standard
Inspection
Low
(1) Static shear modulus MPa 0.80±0.10 displacement JIS K 6254 Each lot
tensile test
(2) Hardness - A50 ±5 Hardness test ISO 7619-1 Each lot
400 or
(3) Elongation % Tensile test IRC:83(Part II) Each lot
more
ISO 1817
Oil: IRM903 (ASTM
(4) Oil resistance
+120 or Oil resistance D471) Once per 10
properties (Rate of %
less test Temperature (℃) : lot
volume change)
100
Duration (h) : 72
Rate of
stress ISO 188
-10 to
change at %
Ageing +100 Temperature (℃) :
25% Once per 10
(5) resistance elongation Ageing test 100
lot
properties Duration (h) : 72
Elongation
-50 or
change %
more
rate
IRC:83(Part II)
Permanent
(6) Permanent Temperature (℃) : Once per 10
% 35 or less compressive
compressive strain rate 100 lot
strain test
Duration (h) : 24
Page 40 of 83
Frequency
Standard Name of Test and Referred
Physical Properties Unit of
Value Standard
Inspection
IRC:83(Part II)
No Resistance to Ozone concentration
cracking ozone (pphm) : 100
(7) Ozone resistance Once per 10
- detected by cracking - Strain (%) : 30
properties lot
visual static strain Temperature (℃) :
observation test 40±1
Duration (h) : 96
Adhesive
Adhesive used for bonding reinforcement steel laminates to elastomer shall be a
vulcanizing adhesive of the two-layer coating type. Adhesion peeling strength between
elastomer and steel plate shall not be less than 7N/mm width. Adhesion strength test
shall conform to ISO 813.
Manufacturing and Workmanship
Manufacturing and Workmanship shall be as per the approved Method Statement.
Dimensions shall be measured after a lapse of 24 hours from finishing (vulcanization
process) of elastomeric bearing. The atmospheric temperature shall be recorded. This
shall be carried out for each bearing as detailed at items (7) and (8) in Table 3.3 below.
Acceptance criteria shall conform to Table 3.3 below. The tests for material properties
shall be carried out at an laboratory approved by the Employer.
Table 3.3: Acceptance Criteria of Bearing
Frequency of
Item of Inspection Criteria
Inspection
(1) Quality of elastomer As per Sub-Clause 3.1.2.2.2 Each 10 lots
(2) Quality of steel Each
As per Sub-Clause 3.1.2.2.1
laminates purchased lot
(3) Adhesion peeling
As per Sub-Clause 3.1.2.2.3 Each 10 lots
strength
(4) Test sample As per Table 3.4 (1-5,8,9) Each 3 months
Performanc Actual As per Table 3.4 (6,7)
Each bearing
e (Note4) Bearing
Edge surface of elastomer shall be formed
by cutting or integral moulding pressed.
There shall be no deleterious defect as
visible cracking, expansion, flaw by
process, burr etc.
(5) Visual inspection There shall be no peeling occurred between Each bearing
elastomer and steel laminates.
There shall be no crack, swell, flaw, peeling
from steel laminates and other visible
defect in the external plate and side blocks.
There shall be no defect in painting.
Page 41 of 83
Frequency of
Item of Inspection Criteria
Inspection
One per every
(6) Corrosion resistance According to f) below of the Sub-Clause. ten bearings of
same shape
Item Tolerance (mm)
t ≦20 mm: 0 to ±0.5mm
Thickness
20 < t ≦160mm: 0 to ±2.5% of t
(t)
t > 160mm: 0 to ±4mm
(a, b) ≤500mm: 0 to + 5mm
(7) Elastomer Width, 500mm < (a, b) ≦ 1500mm: 0 to
Measurement (Note3) length +1%
1500mm < (a, b): 0 to + 15mm.
Each bearing
0.3% of diagonal or 2% of mean
Flatness
(Note1) bearing thickness whichever is
higher
Planarity (a, b) ≦1000 mm: 1mm
(Note2)
1000 < (a, b): min(a, b)/1000
(8) Assembled bearing a, b ≦1500 mm: Add ±1.5mm to
including upper and lower total tolerance of t
external plate thickness
(Note3) a, b > 1500mm: Add ±2mm to
tolerance of t
(Note1) Measurement as per IRC: 83 (Part II):
(Note2) Planarity shall be measured from thicknesses at four corners of elastomer and tolerance
shall be calculated by maximum relative tolerance of four corners (formula: max(ti)-min(ti)).
(Note3) The letters “a”, “b” and “t” in table above represent two side lengths and thickness
respectively of the elastomer as mentioned in Appendix-9. The specimen used for testing shall be
reinforced with three reinforcement steel laminates.
(Note4) Fatigue resistance shall also be checked at the beginning and for every change in
composition of elastomer.
Performance standards for bearings shall conform to Table 3.4. Tests shall be carried
out at temperature between -1.1°C and 50°C.
(Please see next Page)
Page 42 of 83
Table 3.4: Performance Standards for Bearings

Size of
elastomer layer
Item Characteristic Value
ae×be×te (mm)
(Note 1)
(1) Static compressive Compressive strain rate shall be 7.5% or less 200×200×10
strain rate under bearing stress of 8.0MPa.
Static shear modulus shall be 0.80±0.10MPa
(2) Static shear modulus under compressive stress of 6.0MPa and shear 200×200×10
strain rate of 70%.
200×200×10
(3) Ultimate compressive
Bearing strength shall be 150MPa or more. One layer (with
strength
steel laminates)
Deleterious peeling or cracking shall not occur in
adhesion part between elastomer and steel 200×200×10
(4) Ultimate shear
laminates, and elastomer part respectively, when One layer (with
strength
shear strain rate of 200% is generated under steel laminates)
bearing stress of 8.0MPa.
The change of static shear modulus shall be
within ±20 ％ and deleterious peeling and
(5) Vertical compressive cracking shall not occur in adhesion part and 200×200×10
fatigue properties under elastomer part respectively, under fixed shear One layer (with
fixed shear deformation strain rate of 70% with 2,000,000 cycles of steel laminates)
repetitive compressive stress amplitude of 1.5 to
8.0 MPa.
Deleterious peeling or cracking shall not occur in Actual Bearing
(6) Static compressive adhesion part between elastomer and steel without steel
properties laminates, and elastomer part respectively, under
bearing stress of 12.0MPa. plates
Vertical compressive spring constant shall

be within ±30% of design value and.
Difference of vertical compressive spring
constant for each bearing in support line
Spring shall be within ±10% under the following
constant conditions:
(7)
Vertical Load: 1/3 of the maximum reaction on Actual Bearing
compressi the bearing. with steel plates
on Number of repetition: 3 cycles.
Measurement taken at 3rd cycle.
Vertical deformation value under vertical force
(range of force from dead load to maximum
Deformation
design load), measured at the third run of test,
shall be less than 1 mm.
Page 43 of 83
Deviation of shear spring coefficient is less

than ±10% at 175% of shear strain.
There shall be no visual defect (peeling or crack)

under the following conditions:
Under Load: From dead load (surface pressure 5.5 200×200×12
rotating N/mm2) to maximum design load One layer (with
deformation (12N/mm2) steel laminates)
Shear distortion: 50 % to 70 % of thickness
of test sample.
Rotation angle: 1/250
(8) Frequency: 2 Hz or 3 Hz
Compressiv
Number of repetition: 2 million
e fatigue
resistance Deviation of shear spring coefficient is less than
±10% at 175% of shear strain per 0.5 million
cycles.
There shall be no visual defect (peeling or crack) 400x400x9
Under under the following conditions.
Six layers
constant Load: From dead load (surface
pressure 5.5 N/mm2) to maximum (with five inner
shear
design load (12N/mm2) steel plates)
deformation
Shear distortion: 70 % thickness of test
sample.
Frequency: 2 Hz or 3 Hz
Number of repetition: 2 million
Deviation of shear spring coefficient is less than
±20% at 175% of shear strain.
400x400x9
There shall be no visual defect (peeling or crack)
(9) Fatigue resistance of Six layers
under the following conditions.
shear distortion by (with five inner
Load: maximum design load
temperature change steel plates)
Shear distortion: 70 % of bearing
thickness
Number of repetition: 5 thousand
Load cycle: one cycle per 3 minutes.
(Note 1) The letters “ae”, “be” and “te” mentioned above represent the side lengths and thickness of
elastomer. Also refer to Appendix-9.
Dimensional tolerance of external steel plates and side blocks shall conform to Table
3.5 below.
(Please see next Page)
Page 44 of 83
Table 3.5: Dimensional Tolerance for external steel plates and side blocks
Measurement item Standard
(1) Machine work
Rough grade in JIS B 0405 or equivalent.
(2) Casting Grade CT14/15 in JIS B 0403
or equivalent
(3) Length of upper external plate Grade CT13 in JIS B 0403 or equivalent
(4) Length of anchor bolt JIS B 1178 or equivalent
Corrosion protection of steel parts of bearing shall be carried out by galvanizing
conforming to Appendix-4 of these technical specifications.
Acceptance of Bearings
Bearing shall be inspected during manufacture in accordance with Sub-Clause 3.1.2
and 3.1.3 by the manufacturer in the presence of the Contractor, and then a sample
check by the Engineer. The Contractor shall report the inspection results to the
Engineer vide "Bearing manufacturing inspection record".
Bearings shall be transported to the fabrication-workshop/site-delivery-yard after final
acceptance by the Engineer and shall be accompanied by an authenticated copy of a
certificate to that effect.
Certification and marking
Certification and marking shall conform to IRC 83 Part II (CL. 8).
Transportation and Storage
Each bearing shall be clearly labelled or marked. Care shall be taken to avoid
mechanical damage, contamination with oil, grease and dirt, undue exposure of the
bearing to sunlight and weather, during transporting and handling prior to and during
installation. Bearings shall be wrapped in a protective cover and suitably packed.
Bearings shall be handled with care and stored under cover.
Transport Brackets are not to be relied for the lifting of the Bearings.
Upon receipt of the bearings at fabrication-workshop/site-delivery-yard, the
Contractor shall have a visual examination of the bearings to ensure that no damage or
displacement of the bearing components has taken place during the transportation.
Insurance against loss or damage in transit, if any, shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor.
Check-assembly and delivery of bearings
The procured bearings shall be assembled with the truss during Check-assembly using
the sole plate fabricated by the Contractor, and the same shall be part of the acceptance
of Check-assembly under Sub-Clause 2.5 of these technical specifications.
After assembly of girder, it shall be inspected for no cracks or defect in bearing.
Page 45 of 83
Measurement for Payment of Bearings

All Bearings required for a bridge (one GAD), as per the Drawing, shall constitute one set.
The measurement for payment of bearings shall be in sets.
General
The metallic bearings shall generally apply to steel superstructure exceeding 100m
span and adjoining continuous span, if any. These are Pivot bearings with
hemispherical cup at upper shoe and lower shoe. In addition, moveable bearing has
brass casting bearing plate and sliding plates.
Metallic bearings shall typically include upper shoe, lower shoe, base plate, bearing
plates, sliding plate, rings, sealing, lift prevention, hexagonal and anchor bolts, etc.
The number of Metallic bearings used in this Works are listed below:
Crossing Approx. Chainage Span Number of
Bridge
Sl.No. Stake (Km) of Bridge configuration Steel/Metallic
GAD No.
holder Centre Line (m) bearings
Package P-4(X)
Ulhas 100+130,130+
1 66 28.300 12
River 100
Railway
2 2 46.578 60,100+130,60 6
DFC-1
Expresswa
3 1967 416.188 100+130 6
y-3
Total 24
Package P-4(Y)
1 6 DFC-2 62.900 70+130+70 8
SH64 +
2 14 326.938 100+130 6
Railway
3 15 DFC 333.428 100+130,100 6
4 54 & 55 SH-41 505.122 90+90 6
Total 26
The Contractor shall submit the Method Statement for the manufacturing,
workmanship, testing, installation (Check-assembly and final), inspection and
acceptance etc. of the bearings, all in accordance with the Drawings and these technical
specifications. Approval from the Engineer shall be obtained prior to the manufacture.
Procurement and Fabrication/manufacturer
General
The Contractor shall refer to Sub-Clause 3.1.2.1.
Page 46 of 83
Materials
The material of the bearing plate shall be built by high strength brass casting of fourth
(4th) grade CAC304 specified in JIS H 5120.
Solid lubricant made by graphite is embedded into bearing plate face. This shall be
CB1, as specified in JIS M 8601 or equivalent. Binder for graphite shall not reduce
the lubricant effect.
Material for the upper and lower shoes, base plates, side blocks, rings, anchor bolts,
all other bolts, nuts and washers shall conform to Sub-Clause 2.1 and the Drawings.
Sliding plate material shall conform to JIS G 4304.
PTFE shall comply with Grade 3 of ISO 13000-1 .
Chloroprene of sealing material shall conform to Sub-Clause 3.1.2.2.2.
Necessary test certificates for raw materials as in this Clause shall be furnished by
manufacturers.
Manufacturing and Workmanship
Manufacturing and Workmanship shall be as per the approved Method Statement.
Tolerance of bearing dimensions shall conform to Table 3.6 below.
Table 3.6: Tolerance of bearing dimensions
S.No. Frequency of
Item of Inspection Referred Standard / Tolerance
Inspection
1 Completed bearing grade CT13 in JIS B 0403
Metallic JIS B 0403-95 CT 14 and CT 15
Casting
bearing or equivalent
Dimension middle grade in JIS B 0405 or
Machining
equivalent
2 Dimension of assembled product All bearings
(total thickness) including upper -3.0mm to +3.0mm
and lower external plate.
3 Space of diameter between sole-
0mm to +1.0mm
plate and shear key
4 Play gap -2.0mm to +2.0mm
Surface roughness of bearing plate and of bearing body, touching the bearing plate,
shall be 12.5 μmRzmax as specified in JIS B 0601 or equivalent. However, the surface
roughness with chrome plating shall be 6.3μmRzmax.
Bearing body surface touching bearing plate either shall be coated with more than 50
μm chrome plating conforming to JIS H 8615 or equivalent, or shall be coated with
more than 0.02 mm thick solid graphite lubricant using baking process.
Testing for chrome plating shall conform to Ferroxy testing specified in JIS H 8617
Appendix 3. Number of blemish spots identified in the test shall not be more than 1.0
per 100 mm2.
Page 47 of 83
Solid graphite lubricant shall be precisely pressed into bearing plate face. Total area
of solid lubricant shall be 25% to 35% of the sliding area of bearing plates. Depth of
solid lubricant shall be 4mm to 6mm, and it shall cover the surface uniformly when
bearing moves.
Testing and inspection of brass casting shall conform to JIS H 5120 unless in
contravention to this clause. Brinell Hardness of the brass casting shall be more than
210. Test for hardness shall be carried out as per HBS and HBW specified in ISO
6506-1.
Corrosion protection for all steel and casting steel parts shall be carried out by
galvanizing conforming to Appendix-4 of these technical specifications.
The bearing plates for metallic bearing shall pass the following friction test;
Friction coefficient of bearing plate shall be less than 0.1.
Friction testing for bearing plate shall be carried out by sliding friction test
machine, which shall be able to simulate sliding motion.
Material of test piece shall be same quality of bearing plate and its shape shall
conform to Figure. 3.1 below. Testing arrangement with single test piece may also
be used. Friction test shall be conducted under the following conditions.
Bearing stress: 35±1.0 N/mm2
Average sliding speed: 15 mm/s
Stroke: 200 mm
Number of horizontal cycles: 1000
Load
Test piece A Sliding face
Test piece B Slider
Solid lubricant
Figure. 3.2: Friction Testing
Page 48 of 83
Tests as at g) and h) shall be carried out one time at the commencement of

manufacturing and whenever the manufacturing and material of the bearing and shape
and arrangement of solid lubricant application are changed.
Representative test on assembled bearing-
The Contractor shall submit Method Statement to the Engineer for approval, which
shall include detail of test procedure, confirming parameters, loading system and
acceptance criteria etc. If the Contractor, proposes test on scale down model, the scaled
factor for test specimen should be more than 0.5 and scaled down model should be
representatives of original bearings.
Acceptance of Bearings
Bearing shall be inspected during manufacture in accordance with Sub-Clause 3.2.2
and 3.2.3 by the manufacturer in the presence of the Contractor, and then a sample
check by the Engineer. The Contractor shall report the inspection results to the
Engineer vide "Bearing manufacturing inspection record".
Bearings shall be transported to the fabrication-workshop after final acceptance by the
Engineer and shall be accompanied by an authenticated copy of a certificate to that
effect.
Certification and marking
Certification and marking shall conform to IRC 83 Part III (CL. 929).
Transportation and Storage
The Contractor shall refer to Sub-Clause 3.1.6 of these technical specifications.
Check-assembly and delivery of bearings
Refer to Sub-Clause 3.1.7 of these technical specifications.
Measurement for Payment of Bearings
All Bearings required for a bridge (one GAD), as per the Drawing, shall constitute one set.
The measurement for payment of bearings shall be in sets.
Page 49 of 83
Appendix-1 Dimensional Tolerance of Fabricated Steel Structure Elements.
Tolerance
Items Application
(mm)
1 Span length (L) ±(5+0.15L) In case of continuous girder
“L” measured in meters (m)
Span
2 Distance between centre to ±(3+0.5B)

centre of two bottom chords “B” measured in meters (m)
B
or of two top chords (B)
3 “Out-of-square” δ
misalignment between
chord ends at each girder δ =5
end (δ).
4 Difference of top and
Bu/Bb
δ≦2+2B
bottom chord spacing as at
δ=Bu-Bb (absolute value)
item no. 2 above (δ).
Bu: Upper chord Bb: Bottom chord
5 Height of girder or girder ±(4+0.5H)
members (H). “H” measured in meters (m) H
6 Vertical misalignment of ( 3+H ) a

top and bottom chords (δ).
b
δ＝｜ｂ―ａ｜
7 Difference in height of 5 All bearings (elastomeric bearings

bearings as well as metallic bearings) of one
girder
8 Camber at centre of span Excess camber: 3+0.15L, Max=12 |(Active camber)-(design camber)
(see Note 1) Deficient camber: 3+0.05L, Max=6 |= dead load camber
Page 50 of 83
9 Difference in heights of 5mm longitudinally Main code Floor beam

truss at adjacent panel 5mm transversely (single track)
points 7mm transversely (double track)
Difference in height
10 Deviation from straightness At centre of span δ
in truss alignment at centre 3+0.1L (Max=12)

between bearings (δ)
Ｌ
11 Deviation from straightness 5mm δ
in truss alignment at any 20 At centre of 20 m length

m interval (δ)
20m
12 Flange width (W) Excess : 2+1.5W/1000

Deficiency: 1+W/1000
“W” measured in mm
13 Inclination tolerance of web W/200 W
and flange (δ1- δ2)
δ1 δ2
14 Unevenness of flange edge 2mm δ

(undulation) (δ) At centre of any 1.5 m length 1.5m
15 Bent of primary member(δ) L/1000 (Max=8) δ
16 Bent of web (δ1) δ1==Lesser of h/250 and 2t/3

“h” measured in mm
“t” web plate thickness in mm
Page 51 of 83
Bent of flange (δ2 or δ3) For web to web W2 W2 W2

δ2= lesser of W1/150 and t
“t” web plate thickness in mm δ3
For rib to rib or rib to web
δ1
δ3=W2/150 h
W2 W2 W2
δ2
W1
17 Sole plate Sole plate

For sole plate width 500 mm or
less:
Bent (δ) < 0.5mm.
δ δ
For sole plate width more than
B B
500 mm
Bent (δ) < lesser of B/1000 and
1mm. Slope value shall be calculated
using height at highest and lowest
Bottom slope: less than 1/200.
points among four corners.
Gap between sole plate and
lower flange: 0.5mm or less
(Note 1): Item number 7 shall be considered for tolerance of camber.
Page 52 of 83
Appendix-2 Test of Welder for Fillet Welding
The Contractor shall submit Method Statement for fillet welding for test of welders, to the Engineer
for prior approval. The test shall be carried out by the Contractor in the presence of the Engineer.
Details of test
The test material shall conform to Table 1 below.
Table 1: Fillet Welding for Testing
Type Mark Electrode Position Steel Steel Test type
material plate
(Same as thickness
actual (mm)
welding)
SMAW AS-V IRS M: 28 Vertical E 350 10 Appearance,
(B0) dimension
GSAW HS-V IRS M: 46
and fracture
Test specimens and welding procedure shall be as per Table-2 below.
Table 2: Test specimens and welding procedure
Mark Test Detail Welding procedure
Specimen
(No.)
AS-V 1 As per Figure Simple fillet welding shall be
1 below. conducted by examinee on the
HS-V 1 back side of test weld to fix the
plates in position, over the entire
length of the test specimen.
Test weld: fillet weld with 6mm
leg length.
10mm
Figure 1: Test Specimen

For test specimen, if mill scale is removed, removal area shall be indicated on the plate
surface and removal area shall conform to final fillet welding.
Page 53 of 83
Welding procedure
Welding shall be as per the approved WPS.
Welding position shall be vertical position as shown in Figure 2 below. Direction of the
welding shall be bottom to top at one go.
Welding current type may be either AC or DC, but not mixed type for the same test
specimen.
Weld metal shall not be removed by grinder or chisel.
Vertical
v
Figure 2: Welding Position

Inspection for welding
Visual inspection: The root run, start and end position and defects shall be visually
inspected by the Engineer.
Fillet welding fracture test: Fillet weld on back side shall be removed by hammer or
cutting. A saw cut notch of 3mm in throat thickness shall be made into the test fillet
bead before the weld metal is broken by hammer blow.
Acceptable criteria
Visual inspection: The test shall be evaluated as per Sub-Clause 2.4.6.8.
Fracture test for fillet welding: The following defects at the broken face shall not be
accepted except for 10 mm length from start and end position.
Cracks
Blowhole and slag inclusions:
More than one defect exceeding 1.5mm diameter
One defect exceeding 1.0mm diameter and more than two defects exceeding
0.2mm diameter.
Diameter of 0.2 mm or more, exceeding 1.5 mm in total.
Slag inclusion exceeding 30% in evaluation area.
Severe unevenness at fusion line.
Report
The Contractor, on completion of test, shall submit a report to the Engineer for approval, which
among others shall include following items:
Details of Examinee
Dimensions of test specimen
Welding conditions
Page 54 of 83
Evaluation of visual inspection

Evaluation of fracture test
Total evaluation of the test
Photographs (test specimen, testing progress, bead and broken face etc.)
Page 55 of 83
Appendix-3 Test of welder for Stud Welding
The test of welder for stud welding shall be as follows:

Welding shall be as per the approved WPS.
Welding conditions:
Welding position: Flat
Nominal diameter of stud: 22 mm
Test type: Tensile test and bend test
Test piece: 2 nos. x 5 specimen (stud) for each test type of stud
Test piece and test specimen shall conform to Figure 1, and Table 1 below of this
appendix.
Test piece
Test specimen
Figure 1: Test piece and test specimen
Table 1: Detail of Test Piece

Nominal stud t (mm) W (mm) l Steel plate grade
diameter (mm)
22 More than More than 150 E250
16 80
For the tensile test, a tensile testing device shall be used. As for bend test, the stud shall
be bent to 30 degrees by hammer hitting at stud head. Refer to Figure 2 below
Figure 2: Typical Tensile and Bend Test Fixture
Page 56 of 83
Acceptance criteria for tests
Visual inspection after the weld shall conform to Table 2 below.

Table 2: Visual inspection criteria.
Defect Acceptance Criteria
Weld area The welding material shall enclose all area
imperfectness around the stud. The weld area shall be more
than 1 mm height and 0.5 mm width.
Crack No crack on the stud shank and parent metal.
However, crack of weld area and gap between
stud shank and weld area shall be acceptable
Undercut Neither sharp notch nor undercut more than 0.5
mm depth on stud shank and parent metal.
Height after welding Within nominal length ±2 mm
Bent ±5 degrees
In tensile test, stud shall break in the shank.
Before the test, the examinee can carry out trial welding for up to three pieces.
During the test, if the examinee fails he/she can repeat the test/re-weld for up to five
pieces.
Pre and post weld test photographs of visual, tensile and bend test, shall be recorded and
preserved till the end of Contract.
Page 57 of 83
Appendix-4 Hot-Dip Galvanizing
Scope
This appendix specifies the method, test and inspection of Hot-Dip galvanizing for steel
structures such as side-walk, inspection pathway, etc. as per the Drawing.
Work process
Sequence of work shall be as below:
Preparation
Stage
Degreasing Drying
Rinsing Galvanizing
Pickling Cooling
Rinsing Finishing
Fluxing Inspection
Procedure of galvanisation
Steel surface shall be made free from oil, scale, rust and oxide film, prior to galvanizing.
In general, the galvanisation shall conform to IS 2629 if not in contravention to
following provisions.
Material surface shall be free of foreign matter. Any identification marking shall be
conducted using tags of aluminium/steel foil.
Finishing treatment of the galvanized products shall not be conducted by grinding or
filing except for pointed extra zinc coat.
Quality of galvanizing
Mass of zinc coating shall be accordance with IS: 6745 as per Table 1 and quality of
galvanizing shall be as per Table 2 below.
Table 1: Mass of Zinc Coating
Materials Mass of zinc coating
(g/m2)
Steel plate more than 5 mm thickness 550
Page 58 of 83
Materials Mass of zinc coating

(g/m2)
Steel plate more than 3 mm, less than 5 mm 450
thickness
Ordinary bolt, nut and washer more than 350
M12
Table 2: Quality of Galvanizing
Items Quality
Mass of zinc coating As per Table 1 above
Adhesion character Zinc coating shall be strictly adherent and
free from peeling and crack in general use
Appearance Zinc coating surface shall be smooth and
free from harmful defect in general use
Testing and inspection
Test and inspection for Hot-dip galvanizing shall be carried out by the Contractor and
reported to the Engineer for approval.
The mass of zinc coating shall be determined in accordance with IS: 6745 (Table 1
above) and mass of zinc coating shall satisfy the required value.
The adherence of zinc coating on steel shall be determined by the pivoted hammer test
specified in IS: 2629.
Visual inspection shall be carried out by looking and by the feel and shall satisfy
required quality indicated in Table 2 above.
Incomplete galvanizing
Incomplete galvanizing means zinc coat is existing partially and/or metal surface is
exposed to the air.
Repair of incomplete galvanizing area shall be less than 0.5 % of all surface area of
material and each incomplete galvanizing area shall be less than 5 cm2.
If area of incomplete galvanizing is either over 0.5 % of all surface area or over 5 cm 2
at each area, treatment of defect (repair or re-galvanizing) can be decided with the
approval of the Engineer.
Repair of incomplete galvanizing shall be conducted with high concentration zinc dust
paint or zinc thermal splaying.
The galvanization for Sub-Clause 3.1.3 and 3.2.3 of these technical specifications, shall
conform to following:
For steel: more than 550 g/m2.
For Bolts, nuts and washer: more than 350 g/m2 (except high strength bolt, nut and
washer, which shall be painted after installation.
Page 59 of 83
Appendix-5 Sample Format of Method Statement
1. General
1.1 Scope of work
1.2 Applicable standards
1.3 Summary of work
1.3.1 Contract code
1.3.2 Contract name
1.3.3 Contract duration
1.3.4 Location of work
1.3.5 Employer
1.3.6 Contractor
1.3.7 Fabrication shop
1.3.8 Description of work
1.4 General drawing
2. Work schedule
3. Organization
3.1 Shop organization
3.2 Shop layout
3.3 Machines and equipment
4. Health and safety measure
4.1 Organization
4.2 Emergency contact system
5. Materials
5.1 Steel
5.1.1 Standard and supplier
5.1.2 Responsible person for storage
5.2 Parts
5.2.1 Standard and supplier
5.2.2 Storage
5.3 Welding consumables (standard, brand, supplier)
5.4 Paint material (standard, brand, supplier)
5.5 Management (storage, identification)
6. Work procedure
6.1 Work sequence
6.2 Full size inspection
6.3 Processing
6.3.1 Flatness of steel
6.3.2 Cutting (cutting machine, quality control, groove face, rectification, etc.)
6.3.3 Bending
6.3.4 Bolt hole
6.3.5 Straightening
6.3.6 Chamfer
Page 60 of 83
6.4 Assembly
6.4.1 Assembly manner
6.4.2 Accuracy of welded member
6.4.3 Quality of assembly welding
6.4.4 Assembly sequence
6.5 Welding
6.5.1 WPS and WPQR
6.5.2 Preheating
6.5.3 Welding position
6.5.4 Repair for defect
6.5.5 Straightening of distortion
6.5.6 Quality of weld
6.6 Manufacturing of bearing
6.7 Check-assembly
6.8 Shop painting
6.9 Packing and transportation of fabricated items
7. Inspection
7.1 Inspection items
7.2 Material inspection
7.3 Full scale inspection
7.4 Welding inspection
7.5 Check-assembly inspection
7.6 Painting inspection
7.7 Bearing Inspection
7.7 Inspection of final fabricated items
8. Testing
8.1 Testing items
8.2 Material testing
8.3 Testing for Test-fabrication
8.4 Testing of Welding
8.5 Testing of Bearing materials and Load testing of finished Bearings
8.6 Testing of Painting
9. Quality management
9.1 Company profile
9.2 Shop layout
9.3 Quality management manual
9.4 Quality management system
9.5 Work record management
9.6 Management regulation list
9.7 Organization chart
9.8 Regulation for management of standard and law
9.9 Document management
9.10 Regulation of management record
9.11 Environmental management
Page 61 of 83
9.12 Management of equipment and devices

9.13 Technical management
9.14 Regulation for management of welding operator
9.15 Regulation of procurement
9.16 Regulation of handling, storage and shipment
9.17 Fabrication process control
9.18 Regulation for treatment and correction of non-conformity products
9.19 Inspection and Testing
9.20 Packing, transportation or shipping of fabricated materials and bearings to bridge
sites/site-delivery-yards of Interfacing Contractors.
Page 62 of 83
Appendix-6 Sample Work Control Sheets
Table 1: Assembly Management Sheet
ASSEMBLY MANAGEMENT SHEET
Contract No. Piece mark
Person in charge Quality manager
Date Weather condition Electrod Welde Chec

Welding location Weathe temperatur Humidit
DD/MM/YY e r k
r e y
Assembly part
Preheating temperature
Treatment of primer
Groove shape
Cleaning of groove
root gap
Run in and run out
Length
Size
Visual
inspection for
Interval
assembly
welding
Crack
Repair for
crack
Check
Page 63 of 83
Table 2: Bolt Hole Management Sheet
Bolt Hole Management Sheet
Contract Contract Classification

No. name of member
Person in charge Quality Manager
Piece Nos. Design Check Vertical Burrs Repair Check Date

mark diameter for ratio
design
(*)
ex) 50 22 OK OK OK Yes DD/MM/YY
(Note) (* Aliment with the drawing of the hole diameter, numbers and position)
Page 64 of 83
Table 3: Welding Management Sheet
WELDING MANAGEMENT SHEET (SAW)
Quality
Person in charge
manager
Date Weather condition

Welding location DD/MM/YY
Electrode Welder Check
Weather temperature Humidity
Welding location
Groove shape
Preheating temperature
Face preparation
Assembly Crack
welding Repair
Existence
Run on and
run out Condition
after
remove
Leg length
Bead Appearance
Finishing
Cause of crack
Manner
electrode
Repair
Preheating
Operator
Check
Page 65 of 83
Table 4: Check-assembly Management Sheet
CHECK-ASSEMBLY MANAGEMENT SHEET
Person in charge Quality manager
Assembly method collective / split / other ( )
Check items Check result Date (DD/MM/YY)
Dimensional tolerance
direction of fix and move
Accuracy of joint
High strength bolt tightening
Surface preparation at interface between
plies
Pilot hole for erection
Sole plate bend
Page 66 of 83
Table 5: Painting Management Sheet
PAINTING WORK MANAGEMENT SHEET
Contract Contract name Painting

No. System
Working date
Notes
(DD/MM/YY) / / / / / /
Time 8 10 12 14 16 8 10 12 14 16 8 10 12 14 16
Weather
condition
Temperature in
shop
Humidity
Paint material : Paint material : Paint material : Accept
Confirmation
able
before work check before painting : check before painting : check before painting : quality
Product Quan
identity tity Repain
ting
Amount (kg) : Amount (kg) : Amount (kg) :

Yes /
Result : Result : Result :
No
Product Quan
ting

Yes /
No
Product Quan
ting

Yes /
No
Repair work Total
evalua
tion

Note: If there is paint dripping or unevenness, scratches, damage affected by the weather, fill it
in the 'Result' column. If there is no abnormality, write “OK”.
Fill in the paint lot number in the 'Paint material' column.
Page 67 of 83
Appendix-7 Test-fabrication of steel bridge components (partial mock-ups)
Scope
This Appendix details the Test-fabrication to be made at each fabrication-workshop
fabricating the contracted girder material, as stipulated in the Sub-Clause 2.3.4 of these
technical specifications.
Objectives
To establish Optimised and Standardised Fabrication work Sequence (hereinafter so
called “OSFS”) and quality management plan, with particular focus on places where
testing is not possible after full fabrication of members of steel girder truss.
To confirm the necessary skills, technologies and work sequence for welders and NDT
operators, and establish the practices to sustain the same at sufficient calibre throughout
the fabrication period.
Method Statement
The Contractor shall provide detailed method statement for the Test-fabrication keeping in
view the requirement of the entire fabrication as detailed in Clause 2 of these technical
specifications. The content shall include details of location, schedule, organization, shop
drawings, materials, all plants and equipment used, temporary platform, supporting jigs,
resource mobilization, detailed work sequence involved, WPS, Work management items and
requirement for each work including management sheets, tests and inspection, quality
management, destructive tests to verify QA (item, testing manner, requirements, evaluation
manner of test results), final reporting, and evaluation of final results for any changes in the
actual fabrication work.
ITP
The Contractor shall prepare ITP in line with the Contract requirements and submit to the
Engineer for approval.
Fabrication-workshop and resources
Fabrication-workshop shall meet requirements as per Sub-clause 2.3.1 in these technical
specifications. Plant and equipment to be used in the fabrication-workshop shall be the same
as for actual fabrication work. Engineers and skilled workers shall be qualified as per these
technical specifications and are scheduled to be engaged in the actual fabrication work.
Mock-up Girder Members for Test-fabrication
The Test-fabrication shall be conducted at each fabrication-workshop where steel
girders are to be fabricated.
The mock-up members for Test-fabrication shall be as indicated in the Drawings. An
example of Test-fabrication is given below in Figure 1 & 2 of this Appendix.
The mock-up members shall be from the maximum span bridge to be fabricated at the
fabrication-workshop. These members shall be of minimum two types, as below:
Bottom chord member for a panel length at the bridge centre. This bottom chord
member has typically a truss panel point with connection structures to a cross beam
and an adjacent chord member.
Page 68 of 83
A bottom chord member along with its connection structures, a cross beam and a
stringer, all for a panel length as located at one truss panel point at the bridge end.
The cross beam is to be connected with bottom chord member and the stringer.
The Contractor can add optional mock-up members as well as number of mock-ups, if
found necessary, to establish OSFS.
Material, welding consumables and others
All material including the machinery and WPS used for the Test-fabrication shall conform
to Clause 2 of these technical specifications as required and proposed to be procured and
deployed for the actual fabrication, along with passing of the required tests.
Preparation of work sequence and the required work and quality management plans
The work sequence and the work and quality management plans shall be prepared
strictly in line with the requirements of Clause 2 of these technical specifications as
proposed to be deployed for the actual fabrication.
The Contractor may study the detailed work sequence by using small scale model (eg.
Polystyrene Foam Board) before starting the Test-fabrication.
Management of fabrication work and Quality
Each work shall be inspected as per approved ITP duly conducting all the required tests, and
the quality of work shall be confirmed, recorded, and saved.
Assembly
Assembly for Test-fabrication, as required, shall be as per Sub-Clause 2.5 in these technical
specifications.
Evaluation
The Test-fabrication shall be evaluated conforming to these technical specifications.
Some of the important items are mentioned hereunder:
Dimensional accuracy of members after fabrication
Dimensional and geometrical accuracy of members assembled before and after
welding
Welding quality (shape and dimension of bead, visual test, NDT result etc.)
Position and shape of bolt holes
Any damage, notch and arc strikes etc. on the surface of members
Accuracy of cutting and groove faces of steel plates.
Estimated time for fabrication.
Required manpower, Plant and equipment and other resources to be mobilized.
Full penetration and corner welds (Fillet welds) in the mock-up member shall be tested
as below, using specimens taken out from mock-ups.
Tensile test for butt welds
Tensile test shall be conducted as per JIS Z 3121 using 1A test piece taken out at
position indicated in the Drawing. The tensile strength of the welded portion shall
not be less than that of the parent metal. Bending test for butt welds
Page 69 of 83
Bending tests (back-side/side bending) shall be conducted as per JIS Z 3122 using
test piece taken out at position indicated in the Drawing. No crack in the welding
shall occur. When plate thickness is less than 19mm, back-side bending test shall
be carried out, and when steel plate is equal to or more than 19mm, side bending
test shall be carried out.
Macro test
Test specimens shall be cut out from the positions indicated in the Drawing.
Penetration shape / depth, residual of welding, presence of internal defects shall be
checked as per ISO:4969 to evaluate the weldability and the quality of the welded
portion.
Charpy impact test
Test specimens for the Charpy impact energy absorption test shall be taken from
adjacent portions of the macro test specimen, and shall be for parent metal, heat
affected zone (HAZ) and fusion metal. Test temperature shall be the same as that
specified for parent metal, and test shall be carried out as per IS: 1757 to confirm
toughness and soundness of welding portion including HAZ. The Charpy impact
values obtained for the samples shall be at least that required for the parent metal
as per Sub-Clause 2.1.1 of these technical specifications.
Vickers hardness test
By using macro test specimens, Vickers hardness test shall be carried out as per IS
1501 to confirm and evaluate the property of parent metal, HAZ and fusion metal.
Maximum hardness shall be less than 350 HV.
Fracture test
A test specimen of 300 mm length shall be cut out from the position indicated in
the Drawing. A fracture surface shall be produced at room temperature to expose
the fillet welding by breaking it after making a suitable saw cut along the weld line
through the throat thickness. Shape and number of blowholes in the weld of the
fracture surface and the irregularities (penetration boundary line shape) of the weld
line shall be investigated to evaluate the quality of weld, the assembling method
and welding procedure.
Confirmation of competency of welders and NDT operators
The Contractor shall conduct the inspection, examination, evaluation on their
competency as per the evaluation of the Test-fabrication results, and decide
appropriateness of their engagement for this project and requirement of any suitable
retraining.
Report on Test-fabrication
The Contractor shall prepare a detailed report in the format approved by the Engineer
on evaluation of Test-fabrication, including any modifications proposed based on such
evaluation in the Method Statement, works and quality management plans for the actual
fabrication work and the same shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
Considering the contents and results of the tests, the Engineer may specify for more
Page 70 of 83
specimens, including additional tests as deemed necessary. Based on the final evaluation,
the Contractor shall also standardize the inspection manner and application of NDT.
Figure 1: An example of location and number of Test-fabrication.
Location & Number of Partial Mock-ups:

Note 1) At each Work Shop: Every workshop earmarked for fabrication
Note 2) For which Bridge: The longest bridge for which the workshop does fabrication
Note3) Mockup member: Selected based on difficulty and novelty of welding work. This is
indicated in the Drawing.
For Example:
Obj.-1… one (1) bottom chord & panel point at the center of bridge
Obj.-2… one (1) bottom chord, lateral beam & stringer at the end of the bridge
Note 4) Number of objects: At least two (2) for each mock-up member
Page 71 of 83
Note- Drawings are indicative and dimensions are not to the scale.
Figure 2: An example of test in Obj-1 (Refer Figure 1 above)
Page 72 of 83
Page 73 of 83
Page 74 of 83
Page 75 of 83
Appendix-8 Painting Specification for Steel Truss Bridge
1. The painting shall be as per C-5 Painting system confirming to “Handbook for
Corrosion Protection of Steel Road Bridges 26th March 2014 (Japan Road
Association)”
2. All the constituent paint products shall be procured from one Integrated source only
and the paint source shall be approved by the Engineer.
3. Detailed procedure for sampling and testing of the paint components as per Japanese
Industrial standard JIS K 5659:2008 (Long durable paints for steel structures) shall
be arranged within the quoted rates in RDSO or IITs or any other NABL certified
laboratory as directed by the Engineer. The Top coat shall be confirming to class-1
in terms of clause 4 & 5 of JIS K 5659:2008.
4. Painting specification for different areas to be painted shall conform to tables below,
Table 1: External and Internal surface (except contact surface with concrete)
Process Type of painting Standard Target Coating
coverage DFT interval
by spray (μm) (20℃)
(g/m2)
Fabrication Surface Blast cleaning: ISO Sa
workshop preparation 21/2
~ 4 hours
1st coat Inorganic Zinc-rich Paint 600 75
2 days ~ 10
nd
2 coat/ Epoxy resin paint 160 - days
Mist coat
1 day ~ 10
rd
3 coat Epoxy resin paint 540 120 days
1 day ~ 10
th
4 coat Fluoro resin paint for 170 30 days
undercoat
1 day ~ 10
5th coat Fluoro resin paint for 140 25 days
topcoat
Table 2: Friction joint interface at high-tensile bolt Joint
(g/m2)
workshop preparation 21/2 ~ 4 hours
1st coat Inorganic Zinc-rich Paint 600 75
Page 76 of 83
Table 3: Contact surface to concrete (Upper surface of Sacrificial Shuttering, Upper

surface of Cross Beam, Upper Surface of Stringer, except contacting area to
slab concrete of Bottom Chord Gusset Plate)
(g/m2)
st
1 coat Inorganic Zinc-rich Paint 240 30
Table 4: Contact area with high-strength bolt and washer at splice plate
(g/m2)
st
1 coat Inorganic Zinc-rich 600 75
Paint
Page 77 of 83
Table 4
Table 3
Table 1
Table 1
Table 2
Table 1Table 1
Page 78 of 83
Appendix-9 Bearing Test Samples
Meaning of notations mentioned in Table 3.3 note 3 of Sub-Clause 3.1.3 of these technical
specifications.
Figure 1: Meaning of notations mentioned in Table 3.3, item number 7 and 8.

Test sample of Elastomeric bearing for Steel bridge (Refer Table 3.4)
For the test of compressive fatigue resistance under rotating deformation, the length and
width of elastomer shall be 200 mm each and the length and width of test sample shall
be 210mm each with 5mm elastomer coating on each side. The thickness of the
elastomer coating on top and bottom laminates shall be 2 mm. The steel laminates shall
be 2 numbers of 2.3mm each. Total thickness of test sample shall be 18.6 mm.
2
2. 2 2.
20
21
3
0
0
2
3
20
0
21
0
Figure 1: Test sample for compressive fatigue resistance under rotating deformation
(dimensions in cm).
For the test of compressive fatigue resistance under constant shear deformation, the
length and width of elastomer shall be 400 mm each and the length and width of test
sample shall be 420mm each with 10mm elastomer coating on each side. The thickness
of the elastomer coating on top and bottom laminates shall be 2 mm. The top and bottom
laminates thickness shall be 32 mm each, and intermediate steel laminates shall be 5
numbers of 3.2mm each. Total thickness of test sample shall be 138mm.
Page 79 of 83
Figure 2: Test sample for compressive fatigue resistance under constant shear deformation
(dimensions in mm).
Test setup for compressive fatigue resistance test under rotating deformation:
Pressure plate B with slope
Roller
Pressure plate A with slope
Pressure plate
Ɵ 1, Ɵ 2: Ɵ 1- Ɵ 2= (1/250)(rad), and shear strain = 50% to 70%.
Figure 3: Test sample for compressive fatigue resistance under rotating deformation.
Test setup for compressive fatigue resistance test under constant shear deformation:
Pressure
plate
Shear strain 70%
Figure 3: Test sample for compressive fatigue resistance under constant shear deformation.
Page 80 of 83
Appendix-10 Preheating Temperature (TP)for Welding (Sample calculation)
The Contractor shall calculate TP as per Sub-clause 2.4.5.5 of these technical specifications.
However, for reference, TP calculated as per Sub-clause 2.4.5.5, for upper limit of PCM, as specified
in Sub-clause 2.1.2, for welding material conforming to IRS M-28 and IRS M-46 is given below in
Table 1 and Table 2 respectively. The abbreviation “t”, “PCM”, “HIIW”, “HGL”, “K”, “PW”, “TP” in
the table below shall be as per Sub-clause 2.4.5.5.
Table 1: For welding material conforming to IRS M-28 for SMAW

Plate Applicable
PCM Electrode Hydrogen HIIW HGL K TP
Steel Grade thickness PW temperature
(%) IRS Class Content (ml/100g) (ml/100g) (N/mm.mm) (degrees C)
t (mm) (degrees C)
B0 25 0.24 A2 H3 5 2.22 5000 0.290 25 N/A
E250 C 40 0.24 A3 H3 5 2.22 8000 0.297 36 50
C 75 0.24 A3 H3 5 2.22 15000 0.315 61 50
B0 25 0.26 B1 H3 5 2.22 5000 0.310 54 50
E350 C 40 0.27 B1 H3 5 2.22 8000 0.327 79 100
C 75 0.29 B1 H3 5 2.22 15000 0.365 133 150
Table 2: For welding material conforming to IRS M-46 for SMAW/SAW

Plate Applicable
PCM Electrode HIIW HGL K TP
Steel Grade thickness PW temperature
(%) IRS Class (ml/100g) (ml/100g) (N/mm.mm) (degrees C)
t (mm) (degrees C)
B0 25 0.24 I 4 1.43 5000 0.276 6 N/A
E250 C 40 0.24 I 4 1.43 8000 0.284 17 N/A
C 75 0.24 I 4 1.43 15000 0.301 42 50
B0 25 0.26 I 4 1.43 5000 0.296 35 50
E350 C 40 0.27 I 4 1.43 8000 0.314 60 50
C 75 0.29 I 4 1.43 15000 0.351 114 100
Note 1- Values for parameters “Electrode IRS Class” and “HIIW” in Table 1 and 2 above are from
IRS M-28 and IRS M-46 as per applicability.
Page 81 of 83
Appendix-11 Contents of subsidiary of WQMP (but not limited to the below)

Subsidiary Organization Quality Objectives Support Process, Operation
WQMP
Procurement -designated -work shop -supplier -survey

engineer selection -staffs -selection,
-QC team -subsidiary -laboratory evaluation
contractor -design drawing -ordering
-steel material -IS, JIS -receiving, testing
supply -MS, ITP
-weld consumables
-mineral materials
Processing -fabrication -cutting dimension -facilities -position

engineer -surface smoothing -NC facilities -fixing
-welding -evenness, - -cutting machine -measuring
engineer grinding -drilling machine -marking
-QC team -bending, - drilling -MS, ITP
-bevelling
Assembling -welding -position, fixing -platform -positioning
engineer in -direction, angle -scaffoldings -working space
charge -misalignment -temporary jigs preparation
-assembly -fitting status -fixing lugs -assembly order
work team -groove condition -lifting facilities -surveying,
-welder -straightness, -welder measuring
-QC team evenness -heating system -MS, ITP
-assembly weld
-preheating
Welding -welding -WPS -IEB -pWPS, WPQT,
engineer in -welding conditions -Welder, operator WPQR, WPS
charge -welder, operator -welding machine -welding conditions
-welder -type, size, groove, -weld -selection of
-NDT tester -weld position, consumables welder, operator
-NDT order, direction -manipulator -type, size, groove,
engineer in -surface treatment -platform, -weld position,
charge -back chipping scaffolding order, direction
Engineer of -size, surface -rotation, tilting -back chipping
IEB situation machine -size, surface
-QC team -existence of crack, -fixing system situation
undercut, -preheating -NDT application
-NDT system -MS, ITP
-preheating
Page 82 of 83
Subsidiary Organization Quality Objectives Support Process, Operation

WQMP
Painting Painting -painting system -blasting machine - blasting process

engineer in -paint material -sprayer -primer application
charge -surface - paint material -intermediate layer
-painter preparation application
-QC team -Dry film thickness -top layer
-cohesion application
-interval time - check of DFT
-friction factor at -temperature,
joint humidity
-temperature, -MS, ITP
humidity
-SHE
Check- -designated -foundation for -assembly area -preparation of area
assembly engineer support frame - -foundation for
-assembly -stability of support foundation/pavem support frame
team frame ent -support frame -support frame
-QC team -height of support -crane -height control
-Contractor -camber -survey system -assembling
of other -order of assembly -MS, ITP
package -joint status
-bolt fitting
-pilot holes
-dimension, size of
bridge
Page 83 of 83
Package No. MAHSR-P-4(X) and P-4(Y) Section VII, VIII and IX
BIDDING DOCUMENTS
FOR
for the




Package No. MAHSR-P-4(X) and P-4(Y) Section VII, VIII and IX
BIDDING DOCUMENTS
Table of Contents
Page No.
Section VII. General Conditions (GC) ............................................................................ 3
Section VIII. Particular Conditions (PC) ........................................................................ 4
Section IX. Annex to the Particular Conditions – Contract Forms…………………24
Page 2 of 37
Package No. MAHSR- P-4(X) and P-4(Y) Section VII. General Conditions (GC)
The General Conditions governing this Contract shall be Conditions of Contract for
Construction MDB Harmonized Edition, prepared and copyrighted by the International
Federation of Consulting Engineers (Fédération Internationale des Ingénieurs-Conseils, or
FIDIC), FIDIC June 2010, all rights reserved, (hereinafter referred to as “Standard GC”).
This publication is exclusive for the use of JICA’s Borrowers and their project implementing
agencies as provided under the License Agreement dated August 1st, 2008, between JICA
and FIDIC, and, consequently, no part of this publication may be reproduced, translated,
adapted, stored in a retrieval system or communicated, in any form or by any means,
whether mechanical, electronic, magnetic, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without
prior permission in writing from FIDIC, except by the parties above and only for the
exclusive purpose of preparing this Contract.
The General Conditions of Contract are available on the JICA’s website shown below:
https://www.jica.go.jp/english/our_work/types_of_assistance/oda_loans/oda_op_info/guid
e/tender/c8h0vm0000aoesst-att/civil_02.pdf
A copy of these General Conditions is not attached to these Bidding Documents.
Page 3 of 37
Package No. MAHSR-P-4(X) and P-4(Y) Section VIII. Particular Conditions (PC)
The following Particular Conditions shall supplement the GC. Whenever there is a conflict,
the provisions herein shall prevail over those in the GC.
Table of Contents
Part A - Contract Data ...................................................................................................... 5
Part B - Specific Provisions…………………………………………………………….13
Page 4 of 37
Part A - Contract Data
Conditions Sub-Clause Data
Employer’s name and 1.1.2.2 & National High Speed Rail Corporation
address 1.3(b) Limited
Road No. 205, Sector-9,
Dwarka, New Delhi-110077, India.
Tel: +91-11-28070000
Fax: +91-11-28070250
E-mail: p4packagetender@nhsrcl.in
Attention to:
Managing Director
Engineer’s name and address 1.1.2.4 & (To be Appointed)
1.3(b)
Bank’s name 1.1.2.11 Japan International Cooperation Agency
(JICA)
Borrower’s name 1.1.2.12 The President of India
Time for Completion 1.1.3.3 P-4(X): 1095 days

P-4(Y): 1095 days
For Milestones, refer to Table: Summary of
Milestones, below.
Defects Notification Period 1.1.3.7 730 days
Sections 1.1.5.6 Not applicable
Milestones 1.1.5.9 Refer to Table: Summary of Milestones
below.
Electronic transmission 1.3 Not applicable.
systems
Contractor’s name and 1.3(b) [To be specified]
address
Governing Law 1.4 The Laws of the Republic of India
Ruling language 1.4 English
Language for 1.4 English
Page 5 of 37

communications
Time for access to, and 2.1 1. No access is required for

possession of all parts of, the Commencement of Works as the
Site fabrication workshops are located
outside the Site.
2. Access to the delivery site of bridge
locations will be provided as per
Chapter 4 of Appendix 04000-1 of
Sub-Division of 04040 of General
Specifications.
Engineer’s Duties and 3.1(B)(ii) Nil
Authority
Performance Security 4.2 The Performance Security shall be in the
form of a demand guarantee in the
amount(s) of 5% (five percent) of the
Accepted Contract Amount less Provisional
Sums and in the same currencies of the
Accepted Contract Amount.
Normal working hours 6.5 From 8:00 AM to 5:00 PM

Delay damages for the Works 8.7 0.05% (zero-point zero five percent) of the
Contract Price per day.
For Milestones refer to Table: Summary of
Milestones, below.
Maximum amount of delay 8.7 5% (five percent) of the final Contract
damages Price.
Provisional Sums 13.5 (b)(ii) 15% (fifteen percent)
Advance payment 14.2 10% (ten percent) of the Accepted Contract
Amount less Provisional Sums payable in
the currencies and proportions in which the
Accepted Contract Amount is payable.
The Advance Payment shall be made in two

instalments as under:
a) 5 (five) percent: On submission of a
Performance Security;
b) 5 (five) percent: On submission of
an expenditure statement certified
by the Contractor detailing the
utilization of the first instalment of
the Advance Payment certified by
Page 6 of 37

Chartered Accountant/Company
Auditor;
Repayment amortization rate 14.2(b) 17% (seventeen percent) of the amount of
of advance payment each Interim Payment Certificate.
Percentage of Retention 14.3(c) 10% (ten percent) per Interim Payment
Certificate.
Limit of Retention Money 14.3(c) 3% (three percent) of the Accepted
Contract Amount excluding the Provisional
Sum
Plant and Materials 14.5(b)(i) Nil
14.5(c)(i) Nil
Minimum Amount of Interim 14.6 Nil
Payment Certificates
Delayed Payment 14.8 These financing charges shall be calculated
for:
1. Foreign currency: at LIBOR as on due
date + 2%.
2. Indian currency: the applicable rate shall
be SBI’s MCLR (one month), Marginal
Cost of Funds based Lending Rate.
Periods for submission of 18.1
insurance:
a. evidence of insurance. a. 14 (fourteen) days from the
Commencement Date of Works.
b. relevant policies b. 28 (twenty-eight) days from the
Commencement Date of Works.
Maximum amount of 18.2(d) INR 6,000,000.00 (Indian Rupees six

deductibles for insurance of million only)
the Employer's risks
Minimum amount of third 18.3 INR 50,000,000.00 (Indian Rupees fifty

party insurance million only) per occurrence.
Date by which the DB shall 20.2 56 (fifty-six) days after the

be appointed Commencement Date.
The DB shall be comprised of 20.2 03 (three) Members
Page 7 of 37

Appointment (if not agreed) 20.3 Secretary General of the International
to be made by Centre for Alternate Dispute Resolution
(ICADR) –
Head Office – Plot No. 6
Vasant Kunj Institutional Area,
Phase-II, New Delhi -110070 (India).
E-mail: icadr@nic.in
Place of Arbitration 20.6 New Delhi, India
A) MAHSR-Package No. P-4(X)
Table: Summary of Milestones
Milestone Description Time for Delay Damages

Name Completion from (Amount per day
(Sub-Clause 1.1.5.9) Commencement of delay)
Date (Sub-Clause 8.7)
(Sub-Clause
1.1.3.3)
MS-01 Submission of a set of Shop 28 days INR 25,000

drawings for 1st bridge for
each workshop, based on
tender Drawings for
fabrication of the steel
truss structures, for
Engineer’s approval.
Achievement – Completion of Check assembly of the complete steel truss at the

fabrication workshop after the completion of the fabrication along with
accessories of the same bridge in presence of Interfacing Contractors and
Engineer.
MS-02 GAD 66 520 days INR 20,000
MS-03 GAD 69 720 days INR 20,000
MS-04 GAD 2 550 days INR 20,000
MS-05 GAD 58 780 days INR 20,000
MS-06 GAD 8 460 days INR 20,000
Page 8 of 37

(Sub-Clause
1.1.3.3)
MS-07 GAD 1134 470 days INR 20,000
MS-08 GAD C5-2 770 days INR 20,000
MS-09 GAD C5-3 810 days INR 20,000
MS-10 GAD 25 840 days INR 20,000
MS-11 GAD 28 470 days INR 20,000
MS-12 GAD 1967 660 days INR 20,000
MS-13 GAD 32 530 days INR 20,000
MS-14 GAD 42 780 days INR 20,000
MS-15 GAD Laundry 840 days INR 20,000
Achievement – The following works shall have been completed for achieving
the Milestone:
a) Complete painting of the Steel truss after dismantling of the Check
assembly.
b) Transportation of the fabricated steel structural members after proper
marking, grouping, labelling and packing of the Truss members and safe
loading on the trailer at workshop and unloading from the trailer at the bridge-
c) Handing over the steel truss superstructure to the Interfacing Contractors
in presence of the Engineer.
MS-16 GAD 66 790 days INR 50,000
MS-17 GAD 69 790 days INR 50,000
MS-18 GAD 2 820 days INR 50,000
MS-19 GAD 58 850 days INR 50,000
MS-20 GAD 8 730 days INR 50,000
MS-21 GAD 1134 560 days INR 50,000
MS-22 GAD C5-2 860 days INR 50,000
MS-23 GAD C5-3 940 days INR 50,000
Page 9 of 37

(Sub-Clause
1.1.3.3)
MS-24 GAD 25 970 days INR 50,000
MS-25 GAD 28 540 days INR 50,000
MS-26 GAD 1967 790 days INR 50,000
MS-27 GAD 32 660 days INR 50,000
MS-28 GAD 42 850 days INR 50,000
MS-29 GAD Laundry 910 days INR 50,000
Page 10 of 37
B) MAHSR-Package No. P-4(Y)
Table: Summary of Milestones

(Sub-Clause
1.1.3.3)
MS-01 Submission of the set of 28 days INR 25,000
Shop drawings for 1st
bridge, based on tender
Drawings, of the steel truss
superstructures to be
fabricated at each
Workshop for approval of
the same by the Engineer.
Achievement – Completion of Check assembly of the complete steel truss at the
fabrication workshop after the completion of the fabrication along with
accessories of the same bridge in presence of Interfacing Contractors and
Engineer.
MS-02 GAD 65 730 days INR 20,000
MS-03 GAD 1 670 days INR 20,000
MS-04 GAD 57 630 days INR 20,000
MS-05 GAD 67 550 days INR 20,000
MS-06 GAD 3 810 days INR 20,000
MS-07 GAD 6 630 days INR 20,000
MS-08 GAD 68 490 days INR 20,000
MS-09 GAD 12 550 days INR 20,000
MS-10 GAD 61 550 days INR 20,000
MS-11 GAD 14 750 days INR 20,000
MS-12 GAD 15 530 days INR 20,000
MS-13 GAD 62 470 days INR 20,000
MS-14 GAD C5-1 920 days INR 20,000
MS-15 GAD 27 890 days INR 20,000
MS-16 GAD 31 470 days INR 20,000
MS-17 GAD 37 790 days INR 20,000
MS-18 GAD 2357-3 930 days INR 20,000
MS-19 GAD 54&55 810 days INR 20,000
Page 11 of 37

(Sub-Clause
1.1.3.3)
MS-20 GAD Diesel Shed 860 days INR 20,000
Achievement – The following works shall have been completed for achieving
the Milestone:
a) Complete painting of the Steel truss after dismantling of the Check
assembly.
b) Transportation of the fabricated steel structural members after proper
marking, grouping, labelling and packing of the Truss members and safe
loading on the trailer at workshop and unloading from the trailer at the bridge-
c) Handing over the steel truss superstructure to the Interfacing Contractors
in presence of the Engineer.
MS-21 GAD 65 800 days INR 50,000
MS-22 GAD 1 740 days INR 50,000
MS-23 GAD 57 820 days INR 50,000
MS-24 GAD 67 640 days INR 50,000
MS-25 GAD 3 940 days INR 50,000
MS-26 GAD 6 820 days INR 50,000
MS-27 GAD 68 560 days INR 50,000
MS-28 GAD 12 680 days INR 50,000
MS-29 GAD 61 640 days INR 50,000
MS-30 GAD 14 880 days INR 50,000
MS-31 GAD 15 720 days INR 50,000
MS-32 GAD 62 560 days INR 50,000
MS-33 GAD C5-1 990 days INR 50,000
MS-34 GAD 27 1020 days INR 50,000
MS-35 GAD 31 560 days INR 50,000
MS-36 GAD 37 860 days INR 50,000
MS-37 GAD 2357-3 1000 days INR 50,000
MS-38 GAD 54&55 940 days INR 50,000
MS-39 GAD Diesel Shed 930 days INR 50,000
Page 12 of 37
Part B - Specific Provisions
Sub-Clause 1.1 Replace the entire Sub-Clause 1.1.3.3 with the following:
Definitions
“Time for Completion” means the time for completing the
Works, a Section (as the case may be) or a Milestone (as the
case may be) under Sub-Clause 8.2 [Time for Completion], as
stated in the Contract Data (with any extension under Sub-
Clause 8.4 [Extension of Time for Completion]), calculated
from the Commencement Date.
Add new Sub-Clauses 1.1.3.10 after Sub-Clause 1.1.3.9 as

follows:
1.1.3.10 “Milestone Certificate” means the certificate issued

by the Engineer under Sub-Clause 4.25 [Milestone].
Add new Sub-Clauses 1.1.5.9 after Sub-Clause 1.1.5.8 as

follows:
1.1.5.9 “Milestone” means a part of the Plant and/or a part of

the Works stated in the Contract Data and described
in detail in the Work’s Requirements as a Milestone,
which is to be completed by the time for completion
stated in Sub-Clause 4.25 [Milestone] but is not to be
taken over by the Employer after completion.
Sub-Clause 1.2 After the sub-paragraphs (e), add (f) with the following:
Interpretation
(f) The word “Tender” includes “Technical Tender”
and/or “Price Tender”.
Sub-Clause 1.5 Replace subparagraphs from (a) to (i) with the following:
Priority of Documents
the Contract Agreement,
the Letter of Acceptance,
the Record of Meeting on Contract Negotiation,
the Addenda (the items of the Addends shall have
priority over the respective items of the related
section of the Contract Documents),
the Price Bid,
the Technical Bid, excluding the Contractor’s
Technical Proposal,
the Particular Conditions -Part A,
the Particular Conditions -Part B,
these General Conditions,
the Specification - Technical Specifications,
the Specification - General Specifications,
the Drawings,
Page 13 of 37
the Acknowledgement of Compliance with

Guidelines for Procurement under Japanese ODA
Loans,
the Contractor’s Technical Proposal,
the Reference Information/ Report, and
Any other documents forming part of the Contract.
Sub-Clause 1.15 This Sub-Clause is deleted entirely.

Inspections and Audit
by the Bank
Sub-Clause 4.1 Replace in the third paragraph:

Contractor’s General
Obligations “as defined by the Bank” with “as defined by the Loan
Agreement between the Bank and the Borrower”.
Sub-Clause 4.2 Add new paragraph after last paragraph of Sub-Clause 4.2
Performance Security with the following:
“In the event the Contractor fails to provide the Performance

Security within 28 days from the date of receiving of the
LOA, it may seek an extension of time for providing the
performance security for a period not exceeding a further 15
days, duly extending bid security accordingly, on payment of
damages for such extended period in a sum calculated at the
rate of 0.005% of the Accepted Contract Amount less
Provisional Sums for each day until the Performance Security
is provided.”
Sub-Clause 4.25 Add new Sub-Clause 4.25 after Sub-Clause 4.24 as follows:
Milestone
Sub-Clause 4.25 Milestone
If no Milestones no are specified in the Contract Data, this

Sub-Clause shall not apply.
The Contractor shall complete the works of each Milestone

(including all work which is stated in the Specification as
being required for the Milestone to be considered complete)
within the time for completion of the Milestone as stated in the
Contract Data, calculated from the Commencement Date.
The Contractor shall include, in the detailed time programme

and each revised programme, under Sub-Clause 8.3
[Programme], the time for completion for each Milestone.
The Contractor shall apply, by notice to the Engineer, for a

Milestone Certificate not earlier than 14 days before the works
Page 14 of 37
of a Milestone will, in the Contractor’s opinion, be complete.

The Engineer shall within 28 days after receiving the
Contractor’s notice:
issue the Milestone Certificate to the Contractor,

stating the date on which the works of the Milestone
were completed in accordance with the Contract,
except for any minor outstanding work and defects
(as shall be listed in the Milestone Certificate); or
reject the application, giving reasons and specifying
the work required to be done and defects required to
be remedied by the Contractor to enable the
Milestone Certificate to be issued.
The Contractor shall then complete the work referred to in

sub-paragraph (b) of this Sub-Clause before issuing a further
notice of application under this Sub-Clause.
If the Engineer fails either to issue the Milestone Certificate

or to reject the Contractor’s application within the above
period of 28 days, and if the works of a Milestone are
complete in accordance with the Contract, the Milestone
Certificate shall be deemed to have been issued on the date
which is 14 days after the date stated in the Contractor’s notice
of application.
For Milestone relating Completion of delivery of fabricated

steel truss members and accessories along with the bearings
to the Interfacing Contractor [namely MS-16 to MS-29 for
Package P-4(X) and MS-21 to MS-39 for Package P-4(Y),
refer to Contract Data of Particular Conditions], at the Time
for Completion of the respective Milestone, the Contractor’s
obligation for the care, custody and control of the fabricated
steel truss members for the superstructure and accessories
along with the bearings of each Milestone shall cease and the
Contractor shall be released from such obligations.
Sub-Clause 6.7 Replace in the fifth paragraph:

Health and
Safety “including the Defects Notification Period” with “excluding
the Defects Notification Period”.
Delete the following lines from the last paragraph of the Sub-
Clause 6.7:
The programme shall also include provision of a detailed cost

estimate with supporting documentation. Payment to the
Contractor for preparation and implementation this
Page 15 of 37
programme shall not exceed the Provisional Sum dedicated for

this purpose.
Sub-Clause 8.1 Replace Sub-paragraph (d) of the Sub-Clause 8.1 with the
Commencement of following:
Works
(d) receipt by the Contractor the first instalment of the
Advance Payment under Sub-Clause 14.2 [Advance
Payment] provided that the corresponding bank guarantee
has been delivered by the Contractor within 28 days from
the date of signing of the Contract Agreement. If the
Contractor fails to deliver the guarantee within such 28
days this sub-paragraph (d) shall not be applied.
Sub-Clause 8.2 The following paragraph shall be added at the end of Sub-
Time for Completion Clause 8.2:
The Contractor shall complete each Milestone (if any) within

the Time for Completion for the Milestone (as case may be),
including completing all work which is stated in the Contract
as being required for the Milestone to be considered to be
completed for the issuance of Milestone Certificate under Sub-
Clause 4.25 [Milestone].
Sub-Clause 8.4 Replace the entire first paragraph of Sub-Clause 8.4 with the
Extension of Time for following:
Completion
The Contractor shall be entitled subject to Sub-Clause 20.1
[Contractor’s Claims] to an extension of the Time for
Completion if and to the extent that completion for the purpose
of Sub-Clause 10.1 [Taking Over of the Works and Sections]
or for the issuance of Milestone Certificate under Sub-Clause
4.25 [Milestone] is or will be delayed by any of the following
causes.
Delay Damages following:
If the Contractor fails to comply with Sub-Clause 8.2 [Time

for Completion], the Contractor shall subject to notice under
Sub-Clause 2.5 [Employer’s Claims] pay delay damages to the
Employer for this default. These delay damages shall be the
sum stated in the Contract Data, which shall be paid for every
day which shall elapse between the relevant Time for
Completion and the date stated in the Taking-Over Certificate
or the Milestone Certificate. However, the total amount due
under this Sub-Clause shall not exceed the maximum amount
of delay damages (if any) stated in the Contract Data.
Page 16 of 37
Sub-Clause 13.5 Add the following paragraph after the existing Sub-Clause
Provisional Sums 13.5 as a part of this Sub-Clause:
As an exception to the above, the Provisional Sum for the cost

of the DB shall be used for payments to the Contractor of the
Employer’s share (one-half) of the invoices of the DB for its
fees and expenses, in accordance with GC 20.2. No prior
instruction of the Engineer shall be required with respect to
the payment of the DB. The Contractor shall produce the DB
invoices and satisfactory evidence of having paid 100% of
such invoices as part of the substantiation of those Statements
submitted under Sub-Clause 14.3, which contain requests for
payment under the Provisional Sum toward the cost of the DB.
The Engineer’s certification of such Statements shall be based
upon such invoices and such evidence of payment by the
Contractor. Contractor’s overhead, profit, etc., shall not be
included in the provisional sums for the cost of the DB.
Sub-Clause 14.1 Replace the entire second paragraph of Sub-Clause 14.1 with
The Contract Price the following:
Notwithstanding the provisions of subparagraph (b),

Contractor’s Equipment, including essential spare parts
therefor, imported by the Contractor for the sole purpose of
executing the Contract shall be governed by the prevailing
laws in this regard.
Sub-Clause 14.2 Insert the following paragraph between the second and third
Advance Payment paragraphs of Sub-Clause 14.2:
The guarantee in accordance to the form attached to the

Contract can be split up in six (6) guarantees to be released on
repayment. The guarantee shall be valid until Time for
Completion of the Contract and/or should be remain effective
until the Advance Payment has been repaid pursuant to
provision of this Sub-Clause 14.2.
Sub-Clause 14.3 Add new Sub-Clauses 14.3(h) after Sub-Clause 14.3(g) as

Application for follows:
Interim Payment
Certificates (h) 90% amount of the statement amount as agreed by the
Engineer for provisional payment in accordance with Sub-
Clause 14.7(d).
Sub-Clause 14.5 Replace the words of “Schedules” with “Contract Data”.

Plant and Materials
intended for the
Works
Page 17 of 37
Sub-Clause 14.6 Replace the first paragraph of Sub-Clause 14.6 with the
Issue of Interim following:
Payment Certificate
No amount will be certified or paid until the Employer has
received and approved the Performance Security. Thereafter,
the Engineer shall, within 28 days after receiving a Statement
and supporting documents, deliver to the Employer and to the
Contractor an Interim Payment Certificate which shall state
the amount which the Engineer fairly determines to be due,
with all supporting particulars for any reduction or
withholding made by the Engineer on the Statement if any and
shall include any amounts due to or from the Contractor in
accordance with a decision by the DB made under Sub-Clause
20.4 [Obtaining Dispute Board’s Decision].
Add the following paragraph after first paragraph of Sub-

Clause 14.6:
However, for Provisional Payment specified in Sub-Clause

14.7 (d) (i), the Engineer shall evaluate, within 7 days after
receiving a Statement and supporting documents, deliver to the
Employer and to the Contractor a Provisional Interim Payment
Certificate which shall state the amount which the Engineer
fairly determines to be due, with all supporting particulars for
any deduction or withholding made by the Engineer on the
Statement, if any.
Sub-Clause 14.7 Replace the sub-paragraph (b) of Sub-Clause 14.7 with the
Payment following:
(b) the amount certified in each Interim Payment Certificate

within 56 days after the Engineer receives the Statement
and supporting documents; or, at a time when the Bank’s
loan or credit (from which part of the payments to the
Contractor is being made) is suspended, the amount
shown on any statement submitted by the Contractor
within 14 days after such statement is submitted, any
discrepancy being rectified in the next payment to the
Contractor including any amounts due in accordance
with a decision by the DB which have been included in
the Interim Payment Certificate; and,
After the sub-paragraphs (c), add (d) with the following:
(d) Provisional amount against the Statement specified in

Sub-Clause 14.3:
The Employer shall pay 90% of Provisional Interim
Page 18 of 37
Payment Certificate as provisional payment within 7

days from the receipt of such evaluated statement
from the Engineer. The balance of the amount shall be
paid by the Employer as per Sub-Clause 14.7 (b). The
Contractor is required to submit the bank guarantee
for the payment on supply of structural steel for
fabrication and the validity of the bank guarantee shall
be until completion of check-assembly.
If the Contractor chooses payment through the
Commitment Procedure, then the provisional payment
Clause shall not apply and then the payment shall be
made within 56 days after the Engineer receives the
statement and supporting documents.
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to claim
an amount for the performed services as admissible as
per the Contract. If at any time it is observed by the
Engineer that the amount claimed in the Statement are
higher than the actual admissible performance, the
facility of provisional payment will be withheld until
such time the excess payment paid is adjusted in the
subsequent Interim Payment Certificate. In such a
case, warning letter will be issued to the Contractor.
Add new paragraphs after the last paragraph as follows:
Payment to the Contractor of the foreign as well as local

currency portions shall be made by using the Reimbursement
Procedure for Japanese ODA Loans unless the Contractor
chooses payment through the Commitment Procedure for
foreign currency portion.
https://www.jica.go.jp/english/our_work/types_of_assistance/
oda_loans/oda_op_info/procedure/index.html.
The funds will be paid in the designated currency to the

dedicated ‘Contract Specific Bank Account’ to be opened by
the Contractor for credit of advances and all other payments
received from the Employer under this Contract and for
expenditures/debits made/to-be-made for the purpose of
execution of the Works pertaining to this Contract. The details
of the Contract Specific Contract Account will be specified
after the award of work.
Payment to the Contractor which is not to be covered by the

JICA ODA Loan shall also be made to the dedicated ‘Contract
Specific Bank Account’.
Responsibility for the payment of Bank Charges shall be with
the Employer.
Page 19 of 37
Payment of Retention following two paragraphs.
Money
When the Taking-Over Certificate has been issued for the
Works, the first half of the Retention Money shall be certified
by the Engineer for payment to the Contractor. If a Taking-
Over Certificate is issued for a Section, the relevant percentage
of the first half of the Retention Money shall be certified and
paid when the Section passes all the tests.
The Contractor may substitute the Retention Money deducted

from Interim Payment Certificates with an unconditional bank
guarantee issued by any bank nationalized or scheduled by the
Government of India or any Japanese bank having
corresponding arrangements with the Indian bank of
equivalent amount for the respective currency portions,
provided that the refund shall be made in tranches of 1% of the
Contract Price. The bank guarantees shall be valid and
enforceable until the Contractor has executed and completed
the Works and remedied any defects, as specified for the
Performance Security in Sub-Clause 4.2. The Contractor may
submit such bank guarantee in advance to avoid deduction of
Retention Money from Interim Payment Certificate.
Replace the entire fifth paragraph of Sub-Clause 14.9 with the

following:
When the Taking-Over Certificate has been issued and the first
half of total of the Retention Money has been certified for
payment by the Engineer, the Contractor shall be entitled to
substitute a guarantee, in the form annexed to the Particular
Conditions or in another form approved by the Employer and
issued by any bank nationalized or scheduled by the
Government of India or any Japanese bank having
corresponding arrangements with the Indian bank for the
second half of the Retention Money. The Contractor shall
ensure that the guarantee is in the amounts and currencies of
the second half of the Retention Money and is valid and
enforceable until the Contractor has executed and completed
the Works and remedied any defects, as specified for the
Performance Security in Sub-Clause 4.2. On receipt by the
Employer of the required guarantee, the Engineer shall certify,
and the Employer shall pay the second half of the Retention
Money. The release of the second half of the Retention Money
against a guarantee shall then be in lieu of the release under
the third paragraph of this Sub-Clause. The Employer shall
return the guarantee to the Contractor within 21 days after
receiving a copy of the Performance Certificate.
Page 20 of 37
Sub-Clause 14.15 Replace the entire Sub-Clause 14.15 with the following:
Currencies of Payment
The Contract Price shall be paid in the currency or currencies
named in the Schedule of Payment Currencies. If more than one
currency is so named, payments shall be made as follows:
(a) payment of the damages specified in GC 8.7, shall be

made in the currencies and proportions specified in
Letter of Bid;
(b) other payments to the Employer by the Contractor shall
be made in the currency in which the sum was expended
by the Employer, or in such currency as may be agreed
by both Parties;
(c) if any amount payable by the Contractor to the
Employer in a particular currency exceeds the sum
payable by the Employer to the Contractor in that
currency, the Employer may recover the balance of this
amount from the sums otherwise payable to the
Contractor in other currencies; and
(d) the applicable rates of exchange shall be the reference
rate of RBI prevailing on the Base Date.
Sub-Clause 14.16 Add new Sub-Clause 14.16 after Sub-Clause 14.15 as

Payment to Joint follows:
Venture/Consortium
Sub-Clause 14.16 Payment to Joint Venture/Consortium
The payment shall be made to the joint venture/consortium.

However, in case of consortium, the direct payment to
individual members of consortium can be made; on joint
certification by the Representative of the consortium and
authorized representative of individual members of the
consortium, after making requisite recoveries/deductions
from the gross payment. In this case, a notarized agreement
jointly signed by authorised representatives of all the
members of the consortium to this effect need to be submitted
to the Employer on Commencement of the Works.
Corrupt or Fraudulent
Practices If the Employer determines, based on reasonable evidence,
that the Contractor has engaged in corrupt, fraudulent,
collusive or coercive practices, in competing for or in
executing the Contract, then the Employer may, after giving
14 days’ notice to the Contractor, terminate the Contract and
expel him from the Site, and the provisions of Clause 15 shall
apply as if such termination had been made under Sub-Clause
15.2 [Termination by Employer].
Page 21 of 37
Should any employee of the Contractor be determined, based

on reasonable evidence, to have engaged in corrupt,
fraudulent or coercive practice during the execution of the
Works, then that employee shall be removed in accordance
with Sub-Clause 6.9 [Contractor’s Personnel].
Appointment of the following:
Dispute Board
Dispute shall be referred to a DB for decision in accordance
with Sub-Clause 20.4 [Obtaining Dispute Board’s Decision].
The Parties shall appoint a DB by the date stated in the
Contract Data. The date may be changed if both the Parties
agree, in writing, to change the date, up to one hundred eighty
days after the Commencement Date.
Arbitration
Any dispute between the Parties arising out of or in
connection with the Contract not settled amicably in
accordance with Sub-Clause 20.5 above and in respect of
which the DB’s decision (if any) has not become final and
binding shall be finally settled by arbitration. Arbitration shall
be conducted as follows:
(a) if the Contract is with foreign contractors (or if the lead

partner is a foreign contractor, in case of JV),
international arbitration with proceedings administered
by the International Chamber of Commerce (ICC) and
conducted under the ICC Rules of Arbitration; by one
or more arbitrators appointed in accordance with said
arbitration rules.
(b) if the Contract is with domestic contractors, arbitration
with proceedings conducted in accordance with the laws
of the Employer’s country.
The place of arbitration shall be a neutral location determined

in accordance with the applicable rules of arbitration unless
otherwise stated in the Contract Data; and the arbitration shall
be conducted in the language for communications defined in
Sub-Clause 1.4 [Law and Language].
The arbitrators shall have full power to open up, review and
revise any certificate, determination, instruction, opinion or
valuation of the Engineer, and any decision of the DB,
relevant to the dispute. Nothing shall disqualify
representatives of the Parties and the Engineer from being
called as a witness and giving evidence before the arbitrators
Page 22 of 37
on any matter whatsoever relevant to the dispute.
Neither Party shall be limited in the proceedings before the

arbitrators to the evidence or arguments previously put before
the DB to obtain its decision, or to the reasons for
dissatisfaction given in its Notice of Dissatisfaction. Any
decision of the DB shall be admissible in evidence in the
arbitration.
Arbitration may be commenced prior to or after completion of

the Works. The obligations of the Parties, the Engineer and
the DB shall not be altered by reason of any arbitration being
conducted during the progress of the Works.
Page 23 of 37
Package No. MAHSR-P-4(X) and P-4(Y) Section IX. Annex to the Particular Conditions – Contract Forms
Section IX. Annex to the Particular Conditions –

Contract Forms
Table
Letter of Acceptance………………………………..…………………………………..25
Contract Agreement…………………………..………………………………………..26
Dispute Board Agreement …………………………..…………………………………28
Performance Security…………………………..………………………………………30
Advance Payment Security…………………………..………………………………...34
Retention Money Security…………………………..………………………………….36
Page 24 of 37
Letter of Acceptance
[Insert letterhead paper of the Employer]
[Insert date]
To: [Insert name and address of the Contractor]
This is to notify you that your Bid dated [insert date] for “[insert name of the contract and
brief description of the Works]” for the Accepted Contract Amount of the equivalent of
[insert amount in words and figures] [insert name of currency], as corrected and modified
in accordance with the Instructions to Bidders, is hereby accepted by our Agency.
You are requested to furnish the Performance Security within 28 days in accordance with
the Conditions of Contract, using for that purpose one of the Performance Security Forms
included in Section IX, Annexure to the Particular Conditions - Contract Forms, of the
Bidding Documents
Authorized Signature: _________________________________

Name and Title of Signatory: ___________________________
Name of Agency: ____________________________________
Page 25 of 37
Contract Agreement
THIS AGREEMENT made the [insert day] day of [insert month], [insert year], between
[insert name of the Employer] (hereinafter “the Employer”), of the one part, and [insert
name of the Contractor] (hereinafter “the Contractor”), of the other part:
WHEREAS the Employer desires that the Works known as “[insert name of the contract
and brief description of the Works]” should be executed by the Contractor, and has accepted
a Bid by the Contractor for the execution and completion of these Works and the remedying
of any defects therein,
The Employer and the Contractor agree as follows:
(1) In this Agreement words and expressions shall have the same meanings as are
respectively assigned to them in the Contract documents referred to.
(2) The following documents shall be deemed to form and be read and construed as part
of this Agreement. This Agreement shall prevail over all other Contract documents.
the Letter of Acceptance,

the Record of Meeting on Contract Negotiation,
the Addenda and Corrigenda (the items of the Addends and Corrigenda
shall have priority over the respective items of the related section of the
Contract Documents),
the Price Bid,
the Technical Bid, excluding the Contractor’s Technical Proposal,
the Particular Conditions -Part A,
the Particular Conditions -Part B,
the General Conditions,
the Specification- Technical Specifications,
the Specification - General Specifications,
the Drawings,
the Acknowledgement of Compliance with Guidelines for Procurement
under Japanese ODA Loans,
the Contractor’s Technical Proposal,
the Reference Information/ Report, and
Any other documents forming part of the Contract1.
(3) In consideration of the payments to be made by the Employer to the Contractor as

specified in this Agreement, the Contractor hereby covenants with the Employer to
execute the Works and to remedy defects therein in conformity in all respects with the
1
Like; replies to the Bidders’ queries.
Page 26 of 37
provisions of the Contract.
(4) The Employer hereby covenants to pay the Contractor in consideration of the
execution and completion of the Works and the remedying of defects therein, the
Contract Price or such other sum as may become payable under the provisions of the
Contract at the times and in the manner prescribed by the Contract.
IN WITNESS whereof the parties hereto have caused this Agreement to be executed in
accordance with the laws of INDIA on the day, month and year specified above.
Signed by _______________________ Signed by ______________________
for and on behalf of the Employer for and on behalf of the Contractor
in the presence of in the presence of
Witness, Witness,
Name, Name
Signature, Signature
Address, Address
Date Date
Page 27 of 37
Dispute Board Agreement

(For each member of three-member DB)
[All italicised text and any enclosing square brackets is for use in preparing the form and
should be deleted from the final product.]
Name and details of Contract
Name and address of Employer:
Name and address of Contractor:
Name and address of Member:
Whereas the Employer and the Contractor have entered into the Contract and desire jointly
to appoint the Member to act as one of the three persons who are jointly called the "DB"
[ and desire the Member to act as chairman of the DB]:
The Employer, Contractor and Member jointly agree as follows:
(1) The conditions of this Dispute Board Agreement comprise the "General Conditions
of Dispute Board Agreement", which is appended to the General Conditions of the
"Conditions of Contract for Construction" MDB Harmonised Edition June 2010
published by the Fédération Internationale des Ingénieurs-Conseils (FIDIC)
designated as the General Conditions, and the following provisions. In these
provisions, which include amendments and additions to the General Conditions of
Dispute Board Agreement, words and expressions shall have the same meanings as
are assigned to them in the General Conditions of Dispute Board Agreement.
(2) [Details of amendments to the General Conditions of Dispute Board Agreement, if

any. For example: In the procedural rules annexed to the General Conditions of
Dispute Board Agreement, Rule ___ is deleted and replaced by: “ … “ ]
(3) In accordance with Clause 6 of the General Conditions of Dispute Board Agreement,
the Member shall be paid as follows:
A retainer fee of ________________ per calendar month,

plus a daily fee of _______________ per day.
(4) In consideration of these fees and other payments to be made by the Employer and the
Contractor in accordance with Clause 6 of the General Conditions of Dispute Board
Agreement, the Member undertakes to serve, as described in this Dispute Board
Agreement, as one of the three persons who are jointly to act as the DB.
(5) The Employer and the Contractor jointly and severally undertake to pay the Member,
Page 28 of 37
in consideration of the carrying out of these services, in accordance with Clause 6 of

the General Conditions of Dispute Board Agreement.
(6) This Dispute Board Agreement shall be governed by the law of India
SIGNED by
for and on behalf of the Employer in the presence of:
Witness
Name
Address
Date
SIGNED by
for and on behalf of the Contractor in the presence of
Witness
Name
Address
Date
SIGNED by
The Member in the presence of
Witness
Name
Address
Date
Page 29 of 37
Performance Security
(Demand Guarantee)
[This form is to be used if the BG is to be submitted as individual entity or as a joint
venture/consortium in case of a venture/consortium]
[Insert Guarantor letterhead or SWIFT identifier code]
Beneficiary: [Insert name and Address of the Employer]

PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE No.: [Insert guarantee reference number]
We have been informed that [insert name of Contractor, which in the case of a joint
venture/consortium shall be the name of the joint venture/consortium] (hereinafter called
"the Applicant") has entered into Contract No. [insert reference number of the contract]
dated [insert date] with the Beneficiary, for the execution of [insert name of the contract
and brief description of the Works] (hereinafter called "the Contract").
Furthermore, we understand that, according to the conditions of the Contract, a performance

guarantee is required.
At the request of the Applicant, we as Guarantor, hereby irrevocably undertake to pay the
Beneficiary any sum or sums not exceeding in total an amount of [insert amount in
figures]([insert amount in words]),1 such sum being payable in the types and proportions
of currencies in which the Contract Price is payable, upon receipt by us of the Beneficiary’s
complying demand supported by the Beneficiary’s statement, whether in the demand itself
or in a separate signed document accompanying or identifying the demand, stating that the
Applicant is in breach of its obligation(s) under the Contract, without the Beneficiary
needing to prove or to show grounds for its demand or the sum specified therein.
This guarantee shall expire, no later than the [insert the day] day of [insert month], [insert
year]2, and any demand for payment under it must be received by us at this office indicated
above on or before that date.
The Guarantor agrees to a one-time extension of this guarantee for a period not to exceed
one year, in response to the Beneficiary’s written request for such extension, such request
to be presented to the Guarantor before the expiry of the guarantee.
1
The Guarantor shall insert an amount representing the percentage of the Accepted Contract Amount
specified in the Letter of Acceptance, less provisional sums, if any, and denominated either in the
currency(cies) of the Contract or a freely convertible currency acceptable to the Beneficiary.
2
Insert the date twenty-eight days after the expected completion date as described in GC Clause 11.9.
Page 30 of 37
Revision, ICC Publication No. 758, except tht the supporting statement under Article
15(a) is hereby excluded.
a) Our liability under this Guarantee shall not exceed [insert amount in figures] ([insert
amount in words]),
b) This Guarantee shall be valid up to [insert the day] day of [insert month], [insert
year],
c) We are liable to pay the guaranteed amount or any part thereof under the Guarantee
Date -------------------
Place --------------------- [Signature of Authorised person of Bank]
[Name in Block letters] ---------- ----------
[Designation] -------------------------------
[P/Attorney] No. ----------------------------
[Note: All italicized text (including footnotes) is for use in preparing this form and shall be
deleted from the final product.]
Page 31 of 37
Performance Security
(Demand Guarantee)
[This form is to be used if the BG is to be submitted by individual member of a joint
venture/consortium]
Beneficiary: [Insert name and Address of the Employer]

PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE No.: [Insert guarantee reference number]
We have been informed that [insert name of the joint venture/consortium,] has entered into
Contract No. [insert reference number of the contract] dated [insert date] with the Beneficiary,
for the execution of [insert name of the contract and brief description of the Works]
(hereinafter called "the Contract").
Where [insert name of the member of joint venture/consortium] (hereinafter called "the
Applicant") are a member of the joint venture/consortium for the above referred Contract and
are jointly and severally liable for the fulfilment of any obligation required as per the Contract.
Furthermore, we understand that, according to the conditions of the Contract, a performance
guarantee is required.
Beneficiary any sum or sums not exceeding in total an amount of [insert amount in
figures]([insert amount in words]),1 such sum being payable in the types and proportions of
currencies in which the Contract Price is payable, upon receipt by us of the Beneficiary’s
complying demand supported by the Beneficiary’s statement, whether in the demand itself or
in a separate signed document accompanying or identifying the demand, stating that the
Applicant is in breach of its obligation(s) under the Contract, without the Beneficiary needing
to prove or to show grounds for its demand or the sum specified therein.
This guarantee shall expire, no later than the [insert the day] day of [insert month], [insert
year]2, and any demand for payment under it must be received by us at this office indicated
above on or before that date.
1
The Guarantor shall insert an amount representing the percentage of the Accepted
Contract Amount specified in the Letter of Acceptance, less provisional sums, if any, and
denominated either in the currency(cies) of the Contract or a freely convertible currency
acceptable to the Beneficiary.
2
Insert the date twenty-eight days after the expected completion date as described in GC
Clause 11.9.
Page 32 of 37
The Guarantor agrees to a one-time extension of this guarantee for a period not to exceed one
year, in response to the Beneficiary’s written request for such extension, such request to be
presented to the Guarantor before the expiry of the guarantee.
Revision, ICC Publication No. 758, except that the supporting statement under Article 15(a) is
hereby excluded.
a) Our liability under this Guarantee shall not exceed [insert amount in figures] ([insert
amount in words]),
b) This Guarantee shall be valid up to [insert the day] day of [insert month], [insert year],
c) We are liable to pay the guaranteed amount or any part thereof under the Guarantee
Date -------------------
[Designation] -------------------------------
[P/Attorney] No. ----------------------------
Page 33 of 37
Advance Payment Security

(Demand Guarantee)
Beneficiary: [Insert name and address of the Employer]
ADVANCE PAYMENT GUARANTEE No.: [Insert guarantee reference number]
We have been informed that [insert name of Contractor, which in the case of a joint venture
shall be the name of the joint venture] (hereinafter called “the Applicant”) has entered into
Contract No. [insert reference number of the contract] dated[insert date of the contract]
with the Beneficiary, for the “[insert name of the contract and brief description of the
Works]” (hereinafter called "the Contract").
Furthermore, we understand that, according to the conditions of the Contract, an advance

payment in the sum [insert amount in figures] ([insert amount in words]) is to be made
against an advance payment guarantee.
Beneficiary any sum or sums not exceeding in total an amount of [insert amount in figures]
([insert amount in words])1 upon receipt by us of the Beneficiary’s complying demand
supported by the Beneficiary’s statement, whether in the demand itself or in a separate
signed document accompanying or identifying the demand, stating either that the Applicant:
has used the advance payment for purposes other than the costs of mobilization in
respect of the Works; or
has failed to repay the advance payment in accordance with the Contract
conditions, specifying the amount which the Applicant has failed to repay.
A demand under this guarantee may be presented as from the presentation to the Guarantor
of a certificate from the Beneficiary’s bank stating that the advance payment referred to
above has been credited to the Applicant on its account number[insert number]at[insert
name and address of Applicant’s bank].
1
The Guarantor shall insert an amount representing the amount of the advance payment and denominated
either in the currency(ies) of the advance payment as specified in the Contract, or in a freely convertible
currency acceptable to the Employer.
Page 34 of 37
The maximum amount of this guarantee shall be progressively reduced by the amount of
the advance payment repaid by the Applicant as specified in copies of interim statements or
payment certificates which shall be presented to us. This guarantee shall expire, at the latest,
upon our receipt of a copy of the interim payment certificate indicating that ninety (90)
percent of the Accepted Contract Amount, less provisional sums, has been certified for
payment, or on the[insert day] day of[insert month], [insert year],2 whichever is earlier.
Consequently, any demand for payment under this guarantee must be received by us at this
office on or before that date.
Revision, ICC Publication No. 758, except that the supporting statement under Article 15(a)
is hereby excluded.
(a) Our liability under this Guarantee shall not exceed [insert amount in figures] ([insert
amount in words]),
(b) This Guarantee shall be valid up to [insert the day] day of [insert month], [insert
year],
(c) We are liable to pay the guaranteed amount or any part thereof under the Guarantee
Date -------------------
[Designation] -------------------------------
[P/Attorney] No. ----------------------------
2
Insert the expected expiration date of the Time for Completion.
Page 35 of 37
Retention Money Security

Demand Guarantee
Beneficiary: [Insert name and Address of Employer]
Date:[Insert date of issue]
RETENTION MONEY GUARANTEE No.: [Insert guarantee reference number]
We have been informed that [insert name of Contractor, which in the case of a joint venture
shall be the name of the joint venture] (hereinafter called "the Applicant") has entered into
Contract No.[insert reference number of the contract] dated [insert date]with the
Beneficiary, for the “[insert name of the contract and brief description of the Works]”
(hereinafter called "the Contract").
Furthermore, we understand that, according to the conditions of the Contract, the

Beneficiary retains moneys up to the limit set forth in the Contract (“the Retention Money”),
and that when the Taking-Over Certificate has been issued under the Contract and the first
half of the Retention Money has been certified for payment, payment of [insert the second
half of the Retention Money or if the amount guaranteed under the Performance Guarantee
when the Taking-Over Certificate is issued is less than half of the Retention Money, the
difference between half of the Retention Money and the amount guaranteed under the
Performance Security] is to be made against a Retention Money guarantee.
At the request of the Applicant, we, as Guarantor, hereby irrevocably undertake to pay the
Beneficiary any sum or sums not exceeding in total an amount of [insert amount in figures]
([insert amount in words])1 upon receipt by us of the Beneficiary’s complying demand
supported by the Beneficiary’s statement, whether in the demand itself or in a separate
signed document accompanying or identifying the demand, stating that the Applicant is in
breach of its obligation(s) under the Contract, without the Beneficiary needing to prove or
show grounds for its demand or the sum specified therein.
A demand under this guarantee may be presented as from the presentation to the Guarantor
1 The Guarantor shall insert an amount representing the amount of the second half of the Retention Money or if the
amount guaranteed under the Performance Guarantee when the Taking-Over Certificate is issued is less than half of
the Retention Money, the difference between half of the Retention Money and the amount guaranteed under the
Performance Security and denominated either in the currency(ies) of the second half of the Retention Money as
specified in the Contract, or in a freely convertible currency acceptable to the Beneficiary.
Page 36 of 37
of a certificate from the Beneficiary’s bank stating that the second half of the Retention
Money as referred to above has been credited to the Applicant on its account number [insert
account’s number] at [insert name and address of Applicant’s bank].
This guarantee shall expire no later than the [insert day] day of [insert month], [insert year]2,
and any demand for payment under it must be received by us at the office indicated above
on or before that date.
Revision, ICC Publication No. 758, except that the supporting statement under Article 15(a)
is hereby excluded.

(a) Our liability under this Guarantee shall not exceed [insert amount in figures] ([insert
amount in words]),
(b) This Guarantee shall be valid up to [insert the day] day of [insert month], [insert
year],
(c) We are liable to pay the guaranteed amount or any part thereof under the Guarantee
Date -------------------
[Designation] -------------------------------
[P/Attorney] No. ----------------------------
deleted from the final product
2 Insert the same expiry date as set forth in the Performance Security, representing the date twenty-eight days after the
completion date described in GC Clause 11.9.
Page 37 of 37

PKG-P-4 (X) and P-4 (Y) - Tender Document AFCONS PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

PKG-P-4 (X) and P-4 (Y) - Tender Document AFCONS PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

BIDDING DOCUMENTS

Procurement, Fabrication, Check-Assembly, Painting at workshop(s) and

Summary Table of Contents

PART 1 – BIDDING PROCEDURES

PART 2 – WORKS REQUIREMENTS

PART 3 – CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT AND CONTRACT FORMS

National High Speed Rail Corporation Limited (NHSRCL)

Invitation for Bids

Procurement, Fabrication, Check-Assembly, Painting at workshop(s) and

NOTICE OF INVITATION FOR BIDS

(SINGLE STAGE TWO-ENVELOPE BIDDING)

i. Package – P-4(X): Procurement, Fabrication, Check-Assembly and Painting

ii. Package – P-4(Y): Procurement, Fabrication, Check-Assembly and Painting

(3) International Competitive Bidding will be conducted in accordance with

(4) Bidding will be conducted through procedures in accordance with the

General Manager- Contract

(9) Bidder can apply for anyone of the following cases:

The venue and time shall be as follows:

Venue : National High Speed Rail Corporation Limited,

Participation in this Pre-Bid meeting is not mandatory.

Procurement, Fabrication, Check-Assembly, Painting at workshop(s) and

Summary Table of Contents

Invitation for Bids (IFB)

PART 1 – BIDDING PROCEDURES

Section I. Instructions to Bidders (ITB)

PART 2 – WORKS REQUIREMENTS

Section VI. Works Requirements

PART 3 – CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT AND CONTRACT FORMS

Section VII. General Conditions (GC)

Section I. Instructions to Bidders (ITB)

Section I. Instructions to Bidders (ITB)

A copy of these Instructions to Bidders is not attached to these Bidding Documents.

Section II. Bid Data Sheet (BDS)

A Bidder may be a firm that is a single entity or any combination of such

A Bidder requiring any clarification of the Bidding Documents shall contact

Attention : General Manager- Contract, National High Speed

The Employer’s response will be uploaded on the Employer’s webpage no

Any addendum issued shall be part of Bidding Document and shall be

respective Forms as mentioned in “Clause 4.0 Bidder’s Qualification Section

The Price Bid shall comprise the following:

The Bids shall be submitted as follows:

D. Submission and Opening of Bids

The envelopes to be marked and documents to be enclosed in the envelopes

Envelope Marking on Envelopes and Documents to be

Envelope No. Marked as “ORIGINAL – PRICE BID (Y)” and

Schematic representation for Bid submission:

Envelope No. 4 : ‘ORIGINAL - TECHNICAL BID’

Envelope No. 5: ‘COPY 1 - TECHNICAL BID’

“TECHNICA Technical Bid + soft copy

AND P- Original Price Bid + soft copy

Envelope No. 11(X): ‘COPY 3 - PRICE BID (X)’

Envelope No. 11(Y): ‘COPY 3 - PRICE BID (Y)’

Envelope Marking on Envelopes and Documents to be

Envelope No. Marked as “LETTER OF PRICE BID (X+Y)” and

Envelope No. Marked as ‘“COPY 2 – LETTER OF PRICE BID

Schematic representation for Bid submission:

Envelope No. 7: ‘COPY 3 - TECHNICAL BID’

Envelope Envelope No. 8(X): ‘ORIGINAL - PRICE BID (X)’

Envelope No. 8(Y): ‘ORIGINAL - PRICE BID (Y)’

Envelope Envelope No.9(Y): ‘COPY 1 - PRICE BID (Y)’

Envelope No. 11(Y): ‘COPY 3 - PRICE BID (Y)’

Envelope No. 8(X+Y): ‘ORIGINAL - LETTER OF PRICE BID (X+Y)’

Envelope No.9(X+Y): ‘COPY 1 - LETTER OF PRICE BID (X+Y)’